Linden Comansa 21 LC 290 18T - Manufacturer Manual

MANUFACTURER´S MANUAL
"TRANSLATION FROM THE ORIGINAL MANUAL"
CRANE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
MANUAL REFERENCE DATE OF ISSUE
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22
CHAPTER TITLE Reference Rev.

1 GENERAL GEN 000 0003 D
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS EST 000 0299 A
3 ASSEMBLY / DISMANTLING MTJ 000 0213 A
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION INE 000 0193 A
5 CRANE OPERATION UTG 000 0317 A
6 MAINTENANCE MAN 000 0137 A
7 SPARE PARTS RPS 000 0090 A
8 VARIOUS
Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A.

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
Polígono Urbizkain E-31620 HUARTE-PAMPLONA.- SPAIN
e-mail: info@comansa.com / www.comansa.com
21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

1 GENERAL GEN 000 0003 D
6 MAINTENANCE MAN 0 0 0 0137 A
8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
GENERAL 000 0003 IB
21LC
INDEX -
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.
Table of contents....................................................................................................000 0003 IB D 3

Introduction.............................................................................................................010 0001 IB A 5
Guarantee..............................................................................................................010 0004 IB B 6
Crane manual layout..............................................................................................020 0001 IB A 8
Layout of service instruction sheets.......................................................................030 0001 IB B 9
Terminology............................................................................................................040 0003 IB A 10
Symbols..................................................................................................................050 0001 IB A 13
Units.......................................................................................................................060 0001 IB A 14
Equivalents.............................................................................................................060 0002 IB A 15
1 / 1 Rev: D 13/17 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 000 / 3

GENERAL 010 0001 IB
-
INTRODUCTION -
The purpose of this Instructions Manual is to provide the user with useful information regarding crane
handling, transportation, erection, operation, maintenance, disassembling and repairing. This information not
only will allow the user to operate the crane with the maximum safety but also, bearing in mind all its capacities,
obtain a better performance.
To make information retrieval easier, the Instructions Manual is divided into chapters as described in the
following sheets. Prior to crane operation read carefully those parts related to your duty and do not hesitate to
request any clarification or additional information if you should not understand the existing information or if it
should not be sufficient.
Crane operation is restricted to qualified personnel having received proper specialised training and
specific crane information. Apart from the operating instructions, applicable regulations must be taken
into account, specifically those related to safety precautions such as personal protection and hazard
prevention rules.
Prior to crane operation, the owner or user must make sure that any person involved in crane main-
tenance or operation is conversant with the safety and operating instructions regarding his duty,
described in this Manual, as well as with applicable standards and regulations.
Crane safety devices must be closely monitored. Check regularly their correct operation and, in case
of any failure or malfunction, prohibit crane operation.
ACCIDENTS MIGHT OCCUR IF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED
Subsequent to receiving this manual data concerning the crane can be sent in the form of Technical
Information or Maintenance Reports. It is important that these documents are taken into account and added to
this Manual.
This manual has been issued for a specific crane model and serial number. If based on the modular
design of the crane range, crane model and set-up is changed to other model not contemplated in this manual,
complementary instructions for the new set-up must be applied for.
The Instructions Manual is an important part of the crane and it must be always attached
to the crane in good condition and updated.
Illustrations on this manual do not necessarily correspond with actual product set-up.
1 / 1 Rev: A 03/50 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 010 / 5

GENERAL 010 0004 IB
-
GUARANTEE -
COMANSA GENERAL PRODUCT WARRANTY
1. COMANSA stands warranty for its products against any material and manufacturing defects. This
warranty covers use and service in normal conditions for one year as from the date of delivery
of the product to the customer, or for 1800 hours of operation of the equipment, whichever is
shorter.
2. This warranty does not cover normal wear and tear of consumable elements, steel cables and
electrical wiring.
3. This warranty does not cover equipment maintenance and adjustment work.
4. COMANSA provides no warranty for malfunction or damage to motors, brake coils, electronic
circuit boards, speed variators or electrical components in general as a result of defects in
electricity supplies. With the crane at rest and when it is operating with its motors at full load
or full speed the power supply at the base of the crane must be between 95 and 105% of the
voltage specified in the COMANSA instruction manual.
5. The general warranty does not cover defects arising in products as a result of:
- Improper or negligent use of equipment.
- Use of equipment by persons not legally authorised and/or not trained for such use.
- Improper or insufficient erection, installation, maintenance or use of equipment in any way
other than that indicated in the COMANSA instruction manual and in regulation ITC.MIE.
AEM2; the points made in standard EN 60204-32 concerning the area around the insta-
llation must also be considered.
- Overloads.
- Temporary or permanent removal of the safety systems of the equipment.
- Modifications to the equipment made without the consent of COMANSA or made with its
consent but improperly by personnel not answerable to COMANSA.
1 / 2 Rev: B 10/02 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 010 / 6

GENERAL 010 0004 IB
-
GUARANTEE -
6. COMANSA’s warranty obligations are binding only in the following cases
- When defects covered by the warranty are reported in writing within 30 calendar days
of the date when they are detected.
- When the faulty parts are shipped to COMANSA properly packaged and insured within
the period indicated by COMANSA. Shipping costs are payable always by the cus-
tomer, and requests by COMANSA for parts or equipment to be shipped to do not in
themselves constitute an acknowledgement of liability.
- When the customer, at the request of COMANSA, allows access of personnel answera-
ble to the latter so that they may inspect allegedly faulty equipment or materials on-site
and take possession of such parts as they may require for analysis by COMANSA or by
third parties.
7. COMANSA is responsible for supplying parts after defects have been detected, and may at
its own discretion repair faulty parts or equipment under warranty or replace them by new
parts. In the latter case the faulty parts or equipment shall become the property of COMAN-
SA.
8. In no case shall COMANSA be held liable under this warranty for damage that arises as a
direct or indirect consequence of defects covered by the warranty, even though the customer
may incur loss of profit due to the interruption or cessation of its activities or those of third
parties working for or with it. The liability of COMANSA shall be limited to the supply of parts
following the detection of defects.
9. COMANSA’s product warranty extends only to its own customers. COMANSA shall therefore
not be bound to provide warranty cover to third parties, even if they are users of its products
under any title.
10. Should any of the limitations laid down in this warranty be declared null and void under appli-
cable legislation, so that the warranty is therefore applicable, the warranty period shall be
reduced to six months.

GENERAL 020 0001 IB
-
INSTRUCTIONS SETUP -
These operating instructions comprise eight chapters. Chapters contain the following subjects.
1 GENERAL
This chapter gives information on the composition and use of the operating instructions, as well as general and
safety symbols there referred to.
Contents of the “Introduction” document at the beginning of this chapter are of great importance and must
strictly be respected.
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter contains technical information on the crane, i.e. technical data sheet, load diagrams, weight and
dimensions, construction features and guidance on overall crane design.
3 ERECTION / DISMANTLING
This chapter contains documents on crane erection, from jib assembling, including assembly design dimensions,
through the erection of different crane parts, to the calibration and checking of crane limiters and safety devices
for commissioning. Also, crane dismantling instructions are included, as well as guidance on the transportation
of different crane parts.
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
This chapter contains additional electrical information, complementary to information given in chapters EREC-
TION / DISMANTLING, CRANE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, which enable a correct crane electrical
installation and give ample knowledge on crane electrical system.
5 CRANE OPERATION
This chapter contains necessary information for a correct crane operation.
6 MAINTENANCE
This chapter informs on checks and adjustments to be performed periodically after crane erection.
7 SPARE PARTS
Different machine parts arranged into various construction groups are listed in this chapter. This information
helps to a better understanding of mechanical parts and thus to an easier identification of spare parts. Also,
precise information on how to place purchase orders for the required spare parts is given.
8 OTHER INFORMATION
Other crane information whether manufacturer or owner’s information could be incorporated into this chapter.

GENERAL 030 0001 IB
-
LAYOUT OF SERVICE INSTRUCTION SHEETS -
Document identification for queries shall be as follows:

- STATE CHAPTER AND DOCUMENT CODE or else
- CRANE MODEL, SERVICE INSTRUCTION NUMBER and SHEET CODE.
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
13
9 10 11 1 12
Sheets of these service instructions are laid out as follows.
1 COMANSA LOGO
2 CHAPTER NAME
3 DOCUMENT TITTLE
Regarding chapter SPARE PARTS, sections 2 and 3 are available in several languages.
4 DOCUMENT CODE
LINDEN COMANSA internal code, for document filing purposes.
5,6 IDENTIFICATION DATA
Data regarding crane type, section, part or other data, intended to ease document retrieval and filing.
7 DIVISION LINES
Border lines of different document areas, such as heading, contents and footer.
8 CONTENTS
Texts, drawings and tables regarding instruction of applicable service instruction sheets.
For spare parts sheets, detail drawings and parts lists in several languages.
9 SHEET NUMBER OF TOTAL NUMBER OF SHEETS
Sheet number and number of sheets in document.
10 REVISION
Letter stating document revision; revisions start by letter A.
11 DATE
Document drawing up date.
12 APPROVAL
Document “O.K.” only in the Spanish version.
13 SHEET CODE
Gives sheet position in service instructions.
x / yyy / zzz
x Chapter.
yyy Chapter group (first three digits of DOCUMENT CODE)
zzz Sheet

GENERAL 040 0003 ES
-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS
2 CRANE DEFINITIONS BASED ON FEATURES
3 PROCESS DEFINITIONS
4 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS
5 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS
- Crane
Discontinuous operation device used to hoist and distribute loads suspended from a hook over an
area.
- Slewing tower crane
Top slewing tower crane with slewing support on tower top end and with lower support connected to the
crane foot.
- Removable tower crane for worksites
Temporary slewing tower crane, used in construction sites, designed to cope with frequent erection and
dismantling operations, as well as transfers between different locations.
- Top slewing crane

Crane with the slewing system on tower top end.
- Horizontal jib crane
Crane where the jib is parallel to the ground.
- Travelling crane
Crane with foot equipped with own means for travelling on a track.
- Stationary
Crane without any travelling means or which, even featuring travelling means, may not move during site
construction work.
Crane anchored in a foundation or baseplate.
- CONDITION OF SERVICE
-Operational
Crane working under given operating conditions (crane setup, load reach, etc.) or ready to move
the loads for which it has been designed.
-Out of service
Unloaded crane left in stable position, in conditions specified by the manufacturer, without perfor-
ming any work, and ready to get into operation when circumstances so require and allow.
- Crane erection
The actual process of erecting the crane in the worksite, to perform as required. It includes preliminary
works such as foundations, track construction works, etc.
- Installed crane
Crane erected in the worksite, subject to design loads for crane out of service, but without the requirement
of being ready for operation.
- Commissioning
Set of crane checks and operations needed for making the crane operational.

GENERAL 040 0003 ES
-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
- Reach or radius
Horizontal distance measured between crane slewing axis and the vertical centerline of the hook without
load, when the crane is erected on horizontal ground.
- Lifting range
Vertical distance between upper and lower hook positions for the actual work.
- Lift
Vertical distance between hook rest level and upper hook position for the actual work.
- Lowering depth
Vertical distance between hook rest level and lowest position.
- Travelling speed
Speed of crane translation movement on the track for the type of work involved.
- Slewing speed
Angular speed of the slewing part of the crane for the type of work involved.
- Trolley speed
Speed of trolley translation movement for the type of work involved.
- Hoisting speed
Speed of the vertical movement of the load for the type of work involved.
- Positioning speed
Minimum load speed in erection or suspension processes, for the type of work involved.
- Tip load
Maximum load that can be hoisted at maximum reach.
- Maximum load
Maximum load that can be lifted according to crane manufacturer data.
5 COMPONENT DEFINITION, VOCABULARY
- Support frame
Structural assembly supporting the slewing part or the fixed part of the crane tower.
- Ballast
Mass attached to the support frame for crane stability.
- Tower
Vertical structure of crane which supports the slewing part and allows for the required lift to be met.
- Slewing section
Structure including the slewing track and the slewing mechanism and comprising the elements
for the transition between the fixed and the moving part of the crane.
- Operator’s cabin
Cabin destined to normal control of the crane that houses the controls and the crane operator.
- Jib
Structural component of the crane, supporting the trolley and the hook, ensuring this way the required
reach and lift. One section includes the trolley winch.
- Counterjib
Structure able to support the crane counterweight, that can include the hoisting mechanism.
- Counterweight
Mass fixed to the counterjib, that helps compensate load actions.
- Trolley
Structure destined to the translation of suspended loads.
- Hook
Device for suspending the load.
- Erection cage
Structure placed on the tower upper part, that allows for hoisting the crane slewing part.

GENERAL 040 0003 ES
-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
- Bracing frame
Structure, arranged on the tower, for transmitting loads derived from a tower extension.
- Travelling mechanism
Mechanism for crane translation on track.
- Slewing mechanism
Mechanism for turning the slewing part of the crane in a horizontal plane.
- Trolley winch
Mechanism for the translation of loads along the jib.
- Hoisting winch
Mechanism for hoisting and lowering loads.
- Limiter
Device for stopping or limiting crane movements or functions.
- Indicator
Device for furnishing the crane operator with necessary information for a perfect crane operation within
the operating parameter table.
6b 6 4 5c 5a 5
4d 5b
4e 7 8
6a
4a
4b
4c
4f
9
3
1.- Support frame, cross frame.
1a.- Support assembly.
3a 10 1b.- Structure assembly with translation mechanism
1c.- Base ballast
2.- Foundation anchor, foundation
2a.- Anchoring foot, Anchoring section.
3.- Tower.
3a.- Tower section.
4.- Slewing part.
1c 2a 4a.- Lower slewing track support.
4b.- Slewing track.
1 4c.- Upper slewing track support
4d.- Cat head.
4e.- Cabin.
4f.- Slewing mechanism.
5.- Jib
1a 2 5a.- Jib section.
1b 5b.- Jib end, moveable tip.
5c.- Trolley winch.
6.- Counterjib
6a.- Counterweights
6b.- Hoisting winch.
7.- Trolley.
8.- Hook.
9.- Erection cage.
10.- Bracing frame.


GENERAL 050 0001 IB
-
SYMBOLS -
A NUMBER OF SYMBOL ARE USEDIN THIS MANUAL TO DESCRIBE DIFFERENT IMPORTANT

OPERATIONS.
Symbol Meaning
Information to be considered when erecting, dismantling and operating the crane.
Important information for accident prevention.
Information, instructions and banning for damage and accident prevention.
See maintenance instructions.

Information contained in maintenance instructions.
Earthing.
The part involved must be connected to ground in accordance with specified instruc-
tions.
Voltage hazard.
Electric shock hazard.
Indicator of number of falls.

Single reeving.

Single / double reeving.
Travelling.
Translation mechanism.
Hoisting.
Hoisting winch.
Trolley translation.
Trolley winch.
Slewing.
Slewing mechanism.

GENERAL 060 0001 IB
-
UNITS -
Units which are used in the manual
MEASURE SYMBOL NAME
length m metre
mm millimetre
masa kg kilogramme
t ton
time s second
min minute
h hour
temperature ºC degree Celsius
speed m/s metre per second

m/min metre per minute
km/h kilometre per hour
min-1 return per minute
rpm return per minute
force N Newton
kN kilonewton
pressure kg/cm² kilogramme per square centimetre

Pa Pascal (N/m²)
bar 100 kPa
work Nm Newton per metre

kNm kilonewton per metre
kgm kilogramme per metre
elektric output W watt

kW kilowatt
CV horsepower (0,736 kW)

volume l litre

GENERAL 060 0002 IB
-
EQUIVALENTS -
CONVERSION UNITS FROM INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM TO BRITISH SYSTEM
TO CONVERT FROM TO MULTIPLY BY
Horsepower (CV) Horsepower (hp) 0.987
Kilogramme (kg) Pound (lbs.) 2.2046
Kilowatt (kW) Horsepower (hp) 1.341
Kilogramme/centimetre² (kg/cm²) Pound/inch² (psi.) 14.2232
Kilogramme/millimetre² (kg/mm²) Pound/inch² (psi.) 1,422.32
Kilometre/hour (km/h) Mile/hour (mph.) 0.6214
Kilogramme * metre (kgm) Pound * foot (lbs.ft.) 7.2307
Kilometre (km) Mile (mi) 0.6214
Metre (m) Foot (ft.) 3.28084
Metre/second (m/s) Mile/hour (mph.) 2.2369
Metre/second (m/s) Foot/second (ft./s.) 3.28084
Metre/minute (m/min) Foot/minute (ft./min) 3.28084
Liter Pint (U. S.) 2.113
UNIT EQUIVALENTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM
TO CONVERT FROM TO MULTIPLY BY
Horsepower (CV) Kilowatt (kW) 0.736
Kilogrammme (kg) Newton (N) 10

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

1 GENERAL GEN 0 0 0 0003 D
8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
TECHNICAL SPECIFECATIONS 000 0299 IB
21LC290/18 t
INDEX -
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.
Table of contents....................................................................................................000 0299 IB A 3

Technical data sheet...............................................................................................DS.1308.09 5
Load capacity.........................................................................................................010 0098 IB A 9
Load chart..............................................................................................................010 0014 IB A 10
Load chart..............................................................................................................010 0064 IB A 12
Mechanisms specifications.....................................................................................030 0235 IB A 14
Weights and measurements...................................................................................040 0216 IB A 17
Ballast summary.....................................................................................................050 0061 IB A 44
Base ballast............................................................................................................050 0052 IB B 46
Base ballast............................................................................................................050 0053 IB B 48
Base ballast............................................................................................................050 0051 IB B 50
Counterweight summary........................................................................................060 0061 IB A 53
Aerial counterweight...............................................................................................060 0015 IB B 54
General standards..................................................................................................070 0003 IB A 57
Certificate...............................................................................................................070 0004 IB B 58
Sound power..........................................................................................................070 0007 IB B 59

LC 2100 21 LC 290 18 t
20,6 m 76,0 m
11,5 m 8,0 m 2,1 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 4,0 m 0,9 m
m
1,6 m 2,2 m
2,0 m
4,5 m
5,2 m
0,4 m
> 3,5 m
SM21-K2/S25
SM21-K2/S35
J2-10 = - 0,6 m
> 2,6 m
J4.1
BM215A FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220 AM244
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230
LC 2100
H
= H - 0,4 m)
(
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A
R m
2700 74
8000 40
7000 44
5300 50
4600 54
4000 60
3700 64
3000 70
kg
kg
2970
8800
7700
5830
5060
4400
4070
3300
4,5 m 6,0 m
CL XA XR XA XR ES EN 14439
(C/25)
DS.1308.09 02/13 Reserva de modificaciones. Subject to modifications. Modifications reservées. Konstruktionsänderungen vorbehalten.
Il Fabbricante si riserva la facoltà di apportare modifiche. Возможны изменения.
DIAGRAMA DE CARGAS
Load chart / Diagramme de charges / Lastdiagramm / Diagramma di carico / Диаграмма распределения нагрузки
R (m)
14,3 15 20 25,8 25,9 30 34 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74,0 m
74
18000 17005 12165 9000 9000 7660 6660 5545 4980 4300 3930 3475 3220 2890 2700 kg
14,6 15 20 26,4 26,7 30 34 40 44 50 54 60 64 70,0 m
70
18000 17460 12500 9000 9000 7920 6890 5745 5155 4455 4075 3605 3340 3000 kg
15,7 20 25 28,4 29,1 34 40 44 50 54 60 64,0 m
64
18000 13585 10470 9000 9000 7580 6325 5685 4920 4505 3990 3700 kg
15,6 20 25 28,2 29,1 34 40 44 50 54 60,0 m
60
18000 13480 10390 9000 9000 7585 6335 5695 4930 4515 4000 kg
15,7 20 25 28,5 29,6 34 40 44 50 54,0 m
54
18000 13610 10500 9000 9000 7725 6450 5800 5020 4600 kg
16,3 20 25 29,7 31,0 34 40 44 50,0 m
50
18000 14255 11005 9000 9000 8140 6800 6115 5300 kg
18,2 20 25 30 33,1 35,0 40 44,0 m
44
18000 16115 12480 10100 9000 9000 7775 7000 kg (t)
18,5 20 25 30 33,8 35,9 40,0 m 18
40 =
18000 16490 12275 10345 9000 9000 8000 kg - 0,5
t
9
(m)
DIAGRAMA DE CARGAS POWERLIFT

Load chart PowerLift / Diagramme de charges PowerLift / Lastdiagramm PowerLift / Diagramma di carico PowerLift / Диаграмма распределения нагрузки PowerLift
R (m)
15,1 20 25 27,3 28,0 35 38 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74,0 m
74
18000 13010 10010 9000 9000 7030 6410 6050 5440 4700 4300 3810 3530 3180 2970 kg
15,5 20 25 28,1 28,9 35 38 40 44 50 54 60 64 70,0 m
70
18000 13400 10320 9000 9000 7280 6640 6280 5640 4880 4470 3960 3670 3300 kg
16,7 20 25 28 30,3 31,5 38 40 44 50 54 60 64,0 m
64
LC 2100
18000 14640 11300 9900 9000 9000 7330 6920 6230 5400 4940 4380 4070 kg
16,7 20 25 28 30,3 31,6 38 40 44 50 54 60,0 m
60
18000 14630 11290 9890 9000 9000 7350 6950 6250 5410 4960 4400 kg
16,9 20 25 28 30,6 32,2 38 40 44 50 54,0 m
54
18000 14800 11440 10010 9000 9000 7490 7080 6370 5520 5060 kg
17,6 20 25 28 31,9 33,8 38 40 44 50,0 m
50
18000 15530 12010 10520 9000 9000 7910 7470 6720 5830 kg
19,6 25 28 30 35,8 38,2 40 44,0 m
44 (t)
18000 13660 11990 11060 9000 9000 8550 7700 kg +10%
20,0 25 28 30 36,5 39,2 40,0 m 18
40 =
- 0,5
18000 14000 12290 11350 9000 9000 8800 kg t
9
(m)
MECANISMOS
Mechanisms / Mécanismes / Antriebe / Meccanismi / Механизмы
EFU5-50-45 EFU6-65-45 EFU4-110-45

790 m
9
50 kW 790 m
9
65 kW * 790 m
9
110 kW *
6 6 6
3 3 3
1,7
1,1 0,7 t
t t
100
150
200
60
100
140
m/min
90
150
210
m/min m/min
38
224
30
150
54
228
18 18 18
12 12 12
6 6 6
3,4
2,2 1,3 t
t t
50
75
100
30
50
70
m/min
45
75
105
m/min m/min
19
112
15
75
27
114
21LC290/18 t
MECANISMOS
EFU6L-65-45 EFU4L-110-45
1280 m
9
65 kW * 1280 m
9
110 kW *
6 6
Para mecanismos de alta capacidad de cable consultar cargas. /
3 For mechanisms with high drum capacity, request loads. / Pour des 3
mécanismes avec une grande capacité de câble il faut consulter. 1,7
0,7 t
t / Für Hubmechanismen mit hoher Kabelkapazität, Lastdiagramm
100
150
200
m/min
90
150
210
m/min anfragen. / Gru con tamburo ad alta capacità di avvolgimento
38
224
54
228
fune, consultare il diagramma di carico. / Проконсультируйтесь о
нагрузках при механизмах с большей вместимостью кабля.
18 18
12 12
6 6
3,4
1,3 t
t
50
75
100
m/min
45
75
105
m/min
19
112
27
114
CFU-7.5
7,5 kW
GFU-7.5
3x 7,5 kW
TRA-7.5
2x 75 Nm
* TRA-7.5VC
2x 75 Nm
0 20 m/min 0 20 m/min
0 94 m/min 0 0,7 rpm
3XR72 5XR72 5XR72
POTENCIA / POWER / PUISSANCE / LEISTUNG / POTENZA / МОЩЬНОСТЬ Tensión de alimentación / Opcional /

Operating voltage / Tension Generador / Generator / Optional / En
Elevación / Hoist / Levage Carro / Trolley / Chariot Giro / Slewing / Rotation Traslación / Travel / Translation de service / Betriebsspannung Générateur / Generator / option / Kaufoption
/ Hub / Sollevamento / Тип / Laufkatze / Carrelo / / Drehbewegung / / Verfahrbewegung / / Tensione di alimentazione / Generatore / Генератор / Opzionale /
механизма (подъем) Грузовая тележка Rotazione / Поворот Traslazione / Ход Напряжение источника питания Опционально
EFU5-50-45 160 kVA
LC 2100
EFU6-65-45 180 kVA
*
400 V
EFU6L-65-45 CFU-7.5 (3x) GFU-7.5 (2x) TRA-7.5 3ph 180 kVA
EFU4-110-45 50 Hz 250 kVA
EFU4L-110-45 250 kVA
ALTURAS BAJO GANCHO 2,0 m

Heights under hook / Hauteurs sous crochet / Hakenhöhen / Altezza sotto gancio / Высота под крюком
64,9 m nº Ref. h
63,1 m 1 S25 2,0 5,5
H h (m)
C/25
H
C/25
1
1 (m)
1
1
42,6 m 1
1
H 1
C/25
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1 En servicio / In operation / 3XR72...... 105 t
1 En service / In Betrieb / In
1,6 m 1 1,9 m 1 servizio / При работе 5XR72...... 107 t
1
Z máx.
Fuera de servicio / Out
Z Z PS5 of service / Hors service 3XR72........ 74 t
4,5 6,0 m
m / Ausser Betrieb / Fuori
3XA72 5XA72 servizio / В стационарном 5XR72...... 132 t
3XR72 5XR72 ES72 состоянии
Otras zonas de viento o alturas superiores consultar / Other wind zones or additional hook heights on request / Autres zones de vent ou des hauteurs supplémentaires sur demande /
Andere Windzonen oder weitere Hakenhöhen auf Anfrage / Per zone con velocità del vento particolari o altezze superiori consultare il fabbricante / При других ветренных зонах о при
бóльшой высоте проконсультируйтесь с нами
21LC290/18 t
GRÚA ARRIOSTRADA GRÚA TREPADORA
Braced crane / Grue à entretoisement / Abgespannter Kran / Internal climbing crane / Grue avec cage de télescopage intérieure / Kran
Gru ancorata / Наращиваемый кран mit klettern im Gebäude / Gru in rampante in cavedio / Монтажная клеть
3XA72 5XA72 H C/25 h (m)

C A max 29,1 51,4
B max - 33,0 - 33,0 55,1 m
H 4x S25
C/25 C max 52,0 46,5 46,5 46,5 + TD23A
(m)
H max 81,1 108,6 97,9 130,9 + 4x D23A
nº Ref. h
+ CLD23A
B
ES72 1 S25 2,0 5,5
A max 49,6 2 TD23A 2,0 5,5
B max - 33,0 3 D23A 2,0 5,5
F1 18 CLD23A 2,0 3,1
C max 46,5 46,5
A A
H max 96,1 129,1
F2
PD3-2 CL42
Otras zonas de viento, alturas superiores, arriostramientos o trepado interno consultar / Other wind zones , additional hook heights, tie frames or internal climbing on request / Autres
zones de vent, des hauteurs supplémentaires, entretoisements où grues avec cage de télescopage intérieure, sur demande / Andere Windzonen, weitere Hakenhöhen, Abspannungen
zum Gebäude oder Klettern im Gebäude auf Anfrage / Per zone con velocità del vento particolari, altezze superiori, ancoraggi o rampante in cavedio, consultare il fabbricante / При
других ветренных зонах, при бóльшой высоте, привязках к зданию или наращивании крана внутри здания проконсультируйтесь с нами

98,9 m
96,8 m
H C/25
H
C/25
6
85,8 m 6
82,4 m 6
80,3 m H C/25 6
H C/25 6
74,8 m H C/25 6 6
LC 2100
6 6
69,3 m H C/25 6 6 6
6 6
65,6 m H C/25 6 6 6 6
H C/25 6 7
6 6 6 6 7
6 6 9
6 6 6 6 9
6 6 10
6 6 6 6 10
6 6 10
6 6 6 6 10
6 6 11
6 6 6 7 11
6 6 11
6 6 6 9 11
6 6 12
6 6 6 10 12
6 6 13
6 6 6 10 13
6 7 13
6 6 7 10 13
6 8 13
6 7 8 10 13
6 9 13
6 8 9 11 13
1,9 m 6 2,2 m 10 2,2 m 13
6 8 10 11 13
6,0 m Z 8,0 m Z 10,0 m Z PS5 PD3-2 PD4-2 PD5 PD6

5XA73 7XA63 10XA83 ES73 ES43 ES63 ES6A3 ES83
5XR73 7XR63 10XR83
nº Ref. h nº Ref. h nº Ref. h

h (m) 6 S35 2,5 5,5 9 TD34 2,5 5,5 12 TD36B 2,5 5,5
7 TD33A 2,5 5,5 10 D34 2,5 5,5 13 D36 2,5 5,5
8 D33 2,5 5,5 11 D35 2,5 5,5
(m)

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
Polígono Urbizkain
DS.1308.09 02/13 21LC290/18 t
E-31620 HUARTE-PAMPLONA.- SPAIN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 010 0098 IB
-
LOAD CAPACITY -
Load diagrams shown on following pages are valid for cranes with height under hook of about 100 m.
Above this height it should take into consideration the weight of the additional hoisting cable, reducing
the load capacity of the crane according to the attached tables.
Reduction of loads
from 100 from 200 from 300 from 400 from 500 from 600
to 200 m to 300 m to 400 m to 500 m to 600 m to 700 m
21LC290/12 t SC 300 kg 600 kg 900 kg - - -

21LC400/12 t
21LC550/12 t DC 600 kg - - - - -
21LC290/18 t SC 300 kg 600 kg 900 kg 1200 kg 1500 kg 1800 kg

21LC400/18 t
21LC550/18 t
21LC660/18 t DC 600 kg 1200 kg 1800 kg - - -

21LC660/24 t
21LC750/24 t DC 880 kg 1760 kg 2640 kg - - -
SC 440 kg 880 kg 1320 kg 1760 kg 2200 kg 2640 kg

21LC660/36 t
21LC750/36 t
DC 1320 kg 2640 kg - - - -
SC 880 kg 1760 kg 2640 kg - - -

21LC660/48 t
21LC750/48 t
DC 1760 kg 3520 kg - - - -
The reduction of loads depends on the number of reevings and on the weight of the added hoisting ca-
ble. For medium heights under hook, the weight “P” of the added hoisting cable must be reduced from
suspended “Q” load on the crane.
Q Q
Rope Weight per
diameter meter of cable
(mm) (kg)
21LC/12 t
18 1,5 h >100 m
21LC/18 t
21LC/24 t
21LC/36 t 22 2,2
21LC/48 t
Q+P
1 / 1 Rev: A 13/11 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 2/ 010 / 9

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART -
Single trolley (2 falls)

Distance Hook radius (m)
trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
17 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
18 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
19 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
20 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
21 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
22 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
23 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
24 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
25 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
26 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8975
27 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8900 8610
28 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8550 8270
29 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8225 7950
30 9000 9000 9000 8865 8710 8705 7920 7660
31 9000 9000 9000 8550 8400 8395 7640 7385
32 9000 9000 8700 8255 8110 8105 7375 7125
33 9000 9000 8410 7980 7840 7835 7125 6885
34 9000 9000 8140 7725 7585 7580 6890 6660
35 9000 9000 7880 7480 7345 7340 6670 6445
36 8980 8725 7640 7250 7120 7115 6465 6245
37 8715 8470 7415 7035 6910 6900 6270 6055
38 8465 8225 7200 6830 6705 6700 6085 5880
39 8225 7995 6995 6635 6515 6510 5910 5710
40 8000 7775 6800 6450 6335 6325 5745 5545
41 7565 6615 6275 6160 6155 5585 5395
42 7370 6440 6110 6000 5990 5435 5250
43 7180 6275 5950 5840 5835 5295 5110
44 7000 6115 5800 5695 5685 5155 4980
45 5965 5655 5550 5545 5025 4850
46 5820 5515 5415 5405 4900 4730
47 5680 5385 5285 5275 4785 4615
48 5550 5260 5160 5150 4670 4505
49 5420 5135 5045 5035 4560 4400
50 5300 5020 4930 4920 4455 4300
51 4910 4820 4810 4355 4200
52 4800 4715 4705 4260 4110
53 4700 4610 4600 4165 4020
54 4600 4515 4505 4075 3930
55 4420 4410 3990 3850
56 4330 4320 3910 3770
57 4245 4235 3830 3690
58 4160 4150 3750 3615
59 4080 4070 3675 3545
60 4000 3990 3605 3475
61 3915 3535 3405
62 3840 3470 3340
63 3770 3400 3280
64 3700 3340 3220
65 3280 3160
66 3220 3100
67 3160 3045
68 3105 2990
69 3050 2940
70 3000 2890
71 2840
72 2790
73 2745
74 2700

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART -
Doble trolley (4 falls)

Hook radius (m)
Distance
trolley(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
12 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000

13 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
14 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
15 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17460 17005
16 18000 18000 18000 17605 17435 17580 16205 15780
17 18000 18000 17180 16420 16260 16395 15105 14705
18 18000 18000 16090 15370 15220 15345 14135 13760
19 17480 17090 15120 14445 14300 14415 13270 12920
20 16490 16115 14255 13610 13480 13585 12500 12165
21 15600 15245 13475 12865 12735 12840 11805 11490
22 14790 14455 12770 12190 12065 12160 11180 10875
23 14060 13735 12130 11575 11455 11545 10610 10320
24 13390 13080 11545 11010 10900 10985 10090 9810
25 12775 12480 11005 10500 10390 10470 9610 9345
26 12210 11930 10515 10025 9925 9995 9170 8920
27 11690 11420 10060 9590 9490 9560 8765 8525
28 11210 10945 9635 9185 9090 9155 8390 8155
29 10760 10505 9245 8810 8720 8780 8045 7815
30 10345 10100 8880 8460 8370 8430 7720 7500
31 9955 9720 8540 8135 8050 8105 7415 7205
32 9590 9360 8220 7830 7745 7800 7135 6930
33 9250 9030 7925 7545 7465 7515 6870 6670
34 8930 8715 7645 7275 7195 7245 6620 6430
35 8630 8420 7380 7020 6945 6990 6385 6200
36 8345 8140 7130 6785 6710 6755 6165 5985
37 8075 7880 6895 6560 6485 6530 5955 5780
38 7820 7630 6675 6345 6275 6315 5760 5585
39,3 7500 7315 6395 6075 6010 6045 5510 5345
41 6960 6075 5770 5705 5740 5225 5065
42 6755 5895 5600 5535 5565 5065 4910
43,3 6500 5665 5380 5315 5345 4860 4710
45 5405 5125 5070 5095 4630 4485
46 5255 4985 4925 4950 4495 4355
47 5110 4845 4790 4815 4370 4230
48 4975 4715 4660 4685 4245 4110
49,3 4800 4550 4495 4515 4090 3960
51 4355 4305 4325 3910 3785
52 4245 4195 4210 3810 3685
53,3 4100 4050 4070 3675 3555
55 3885 3905 3520 3405
56 3795 3805 3435 3320
57 3700 3715 3350 3235
58 3615 3625 3265 3155
59,3 3500 3510 3160 3050
61 3380 3035 2930
62 3300 2965 2860
63,3 3200 2870 2770
65 2760 2660
66 2700 2600
67 2635 2540
68 2575 2485
69,3 2500 2405
71 2320
72 2265
73,3 2200

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART PwL
(t)
+10%
(m)

trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
21 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
22 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
23 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
24 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
25 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
26 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8975
27 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8900 8610
28 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8550 8270
29 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8225 7950
30 9000 9000 9000 8865 8710 8705 7920 7660
31 9000 9000 9000 8550 8400 8395 7640 7385
32 9000 9000 8700 8255 8110 8105 7375 7125
33 9000 9000 8410 7980 7840 7835 7125 6885
34 9000 9000 8140 7725 7585 7580 6890 6660
35 9000 9000 7880 7480 7345 7340 6670 6445
36 8980 8725 7640 7250 7120 7115 6465 6245
37 8715 8470 7415 7035 6910 6900 6270 6055
38 8465 8225 7200 6830 6705 6700 6085 5880
39 8225 7995 6995 6635 6515 6510 5910 5710
40 8000 7775 6800 6450 6335 6325 5745 5545
41 7565 6615 6275 6160 6155 5585 5395
42 7370 6440 6110 6000 5990 5435 5250
43 7180 6275 5950 5840 5835 5295 5110
44 7000 6115 5800 5695 5685 5155 4980
45 5965 5655 5550 5545 5025 4850
46 5820 5515 5415 5405 4900 4730
47 5680 5385 5285 5275 4785 4615
48 5550 5260 5160 5150 4670 4505
49 5420 5135 5045 5035 4560 4400
50 5300 5020 4930 4920 4455 4300
51 4910 4820 4810 4355 4200
52 4800 4715 4705 4260 4110
53 4700 4610 4600 4165 4020
54 4600 4515 4505 4075 3930
55 4420 4410 3990 3850
56 4330 4320 3910 3770
57 4245 4235 3830 3690
58 4160 4150 3750 3615
59 4080 4070 3675 3545
60 4000 3990 3605 3475
61 3915 3535 3405
62 3840 3470 3340
63 3770 3400 3280
64 3700 3340 3220
65 3280 3160
66 3220 3100
67 3160 3045
68 3105 2990
69 3050 2940
70 3000 2890
71 2840
72 2790
73 2745
74 2700

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART PwL
(t)
+10%

(m)

trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
12 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
13 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
14 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
15 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17460 17005
16 18000 18000 18000 17605 17435 17580 16205 15780
17 18000 18000 17180 16420 16260 16395 15105 14705
18 18000 18000 16090 15370 15220 15345 14135 13760
19 17480 17090 15120 14445 14300 14415 13270 12920
20 16490 16115 14255 13610 13480 13585 12500 12165
21 15600 15245 13475 12865 12735 12840 11805 11490
22 14790 14455 12770 12190 12065 12160 11180 10875
23 14060 13735 12130 11575 11455 11545 10610 10320
24 13390 13080 11545 11010 10900 10985 10090 9810
25 12775 12480 11005 10500 10390 10470 9610 9345
26 12210 11930 10515 10025 9925 9995 9170 8920
27 11690 11420 10060 9590 9490 9560 8765 8525
28 11210 10945 9635 9185 9090 9155 8390 8155
29 10760 10505 9245 8810 8720 8780 8045 7815
30 10345 10100 8880 8460 8370 8430 7720 7500
31 9955 9720 8540 8135 8050 8105 7415 7205
32 9590 9360 8220 7830 7745 7800 7135 6930
33 9250 9030 7925 7545 7465 7515 6870 6670
34 8930 8715 7645 7275 7195 7245 6620 6430
35 8630 8420 7380 7020 6945 6990 6385 6200
36 8345 8140 7130 6785 6710 6755 6165 5985
37 8075 7880 6895 6560 6485 6530 5955 5780
38 7820 7630 6675 6345 6275 6315 5760 5585
39,3 7500 7315 6395 6075 6010 6045 5510 5345
41 6960 6075 5770 5705 5740 5225 5065
42 6755 5895 5600 5535 5565 5065 4910
43,3 6500 5665 5380 5315 5345 4860 4710
45 5405 5125 5070 5095 4630 4485
46 5255 4985 4925 4950 4495 4355
47 5110 4845 4790 4815 4370 4230
48 4975 4715 4660 4685 4245 4110
49,3 4800 4550 4495 4515 4090 3960
51 4355 4305 4325 3910 3785
52 4245 4195 4210 3810 3685
53,3 4100 4050 4070 3675 3555
55 3885 3905 3520 3405
56 3795 3805 3435 3320
57 3700 3715 3350 3235
58 3615 3625 3265 3155
59,3 3500 3510 3160 3050
61 3380 3035 2930
62 3300 2965 2860
63,3 3200 2870 2770
65 2760 2660
66 2700 2600
67 2635 2540
68 2575 2485
69,3 2500 2405
71 2320
72 2265
73,3 2200

CRANE OPERATION 030 0235 IB
21LC290/18 t
MECHANISM SPECIFICATIONS -
HOISTING Mechanisme type............EFU5-50-45-00
Motor
9 Make............................... LEROY SOMMER
Power ................................................ 50 kW
6 Brake
Type..............................................FCPL60H
3 Model........................................ FCPL60-2H
1,1 Drum
t Drum capacity................... 790 m in 3 layers
60
100
140
m/min
30
150
Máx. h.u.h. SC................................... 395 m
Máx. h.u.h. DC................................... 197 m
Operating voltage
18 Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
12
6
2,2
t
30
50
70
m/min
15
75
TROLLEY Mechanisme type............CFU-7.5-10
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power .................................................... 7,5 kW
(t) Brake
18 Type............................................... BFK 458
Model........................................ BFK 458.16
Operating voltage
9 Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
0 47 94 (m/min)
SLEWING Mechanisme type............(1x) GFU-7.5-07

(2x) GFU-7.5-08
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ..............................................7,5 kgm
-1 Brake
min 0 0,7 Type........................................................ GR
Model................................................... GR 7
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz

21LC290/18 t
TRAVELLING (4,5 m, VR) Mechanisme type TRA-7.5-04
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................2 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................ MS
Model............................................... 110 MS
Operating voltage
0 20 (m/min) Voltage.....................................400 V 50 Hz
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................4 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................... S
Model.................................................. 100 S
Operating voltage
0 20 (m/min) Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
TRAVELLING (6,0 m, VC) Mechanisme type TRA-7.5-05
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................4 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................... S
Model.................................................. 100 S
Operating voltage

21LC290/18 t
AUXILIAR JIB Mechanisme type ES1-2.2-7.5-01
Motor
(t) Make.................................. LEROY SOMER
1,5 Power ............................................... 2,2 kW
I Brake
Type......................................................FCO
SR 8 m/min Model.............................................FCO-100
1,5 t
Drum
0 8 Drum capacity................... 160 m in 8 layers
(m/min) Máx. h.u.h. .......................................... 80 m
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
CAGE HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT (J2-10) Mechanisme type GH20HI06
Motor
Make..................................................... ABB
Power ................................................ 20 CV
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
Pump
Make..............................................PARKER
Model.....................................PAF-20RK-3C

21LC290
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS 2,0 m
Measurements Weight Document

Nº Modulation
L (m) A (m) H (m) (kg) Reference
1 PS5 2,0 0,4 0,4 4 x (220) EST040 0011
2 3X_ 6,7 1,0 1,6 6000 EST040 0038
3 5X_ 9,5 2,4 2,0 11000 EST040 0018
4 S25 2,1 2,1 5,8 3325 EST040 0126
5 SM21-K2/S25 2,5 2,4 2,5 6600
EST040 0215
6 CM215 5,5 2,5 1,59 3850
AM282B 10,4 1,4 2,5 4850
AM272A 10,3 1,4 2,5 3300
AM262A 10,3 1,4 2,5 3000
AM250A 10,3 1,4 2,4 2310
AM240 10,3 1,4 1,8 1850
AM230 10,3 1,4 1,8 1450
7 AM220 10,2 1,4 1,8 1050 EST040 0026
AM244 4,2 1,4 1,8 400
JE211 0,9 1,4 0,7 100
TLC09 2,0 1,7 1,1 250
TALC18 1,2 1,7 1,3 120
GA09,0 1,4 1,2 0,6 290
GA18,0 2,0 0,6 1,3 540
FM215 8,4 1,8 2,5 3300
8 EST040 0214
BM215A 11,60 2,30 2,60 -
9 MA2 2,75 1,00 0,42 950 EST040 0033
10 J2-10 9,10 2,80 2,90 10800 EST 040 0198

PS_
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS -
PS3 FOOT
1,55
0,40
0,40
4 x 120 kg
PS4 FOOT
1,98
0,40
0,40
4 x 190 kg
PS5 FOOT
1,98
0,40
0,40
4 x 220 kg

X4.5m
3XA_ Base Support
Сomplete 6000 kg
Transport 5100 kg
Support (optional) Support (optional) Diagonal Platform
4 x 150 kg 4 x 60 kg 4 x 90 kg 1 x 75 kg
Platform Ceta Guard rail Ladder
1 x 40 kg 4 x 60 kg 4 x 9 kg 1 x 14 kg

X4.5m
3XR_ Base Support
Сomplete 10200 kg
Transport 5100 kg
Travelling mad Travelling engine Connection Arm
2 x 950 kg 2 x 1100 kg 4 x 20 kg 1 x 165 kg
Diagonal Ceta Platform
2 x 90 kg 4 x 60 kg 1 x 75 kg
Platform Guard rail Ladder
1 x 40 kg 1 x 9 kg 1 x 14 kg

X5 (6 M)
UNDERCARRIAGE
Complete
Transport
ARM PLATFORM
PLATFORM LADDER

X5 (6 M)
UNDERCARRIAGE
Transport
TRAVELLING TRAVELLING CROSSTIE
ARM PLATFORM
PLATFORM LADDER

2,0 m
S23 MAST SECTION
2630 kg
PANEL DIAGONAL PLATFORM

0,12
2,10
1,82
2,42 0,11
5,75 0,50
1,82 0,20
4 x 575 kg 50 kg 132 kg
GUARD LADDER GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL
3,14 0,70
0,47
1,05
1,05
0,23
0,66 5,80
1,44
1,82
35 kg 35 kg 2 x 18 kg 2 x 20 kg
TS24 MAST SECTION
2930 kg

0,12
2,10
1,82
2,42 0,11
5,75 0,50
1,82 0,20
4 x 650 kg 50 kg 132 kg
3,14 0,70
0,47
1,05
1,05
0,23
0,66 5,80
1,44
1,82
35 kg 35 kg 2 x 18 kg 2 x 20 kg

2,0 m
S24 MAST SECTION
2930 kg

0,12
2,10
1,82
2,42 0,11
5,75 0,50
1,82 0,20
4 x 650 kg 50 kg 132 kg
3,14 0,70
0,47
1,05
1,05
0,23
0,66 5,80
1,44
1,82
35 kg 35 kg 2 x 18 kg 2 x 20 kg
TS25 MAST SECTION
3370 kg

0,12
2,10
1,82
2,42 0,11
5,75 0,50
1,82 0,20
4 x 760 kg 50 kg 132 kg
3,14 0,70
0,47
1,05
1,05
0,23
0,66 5,80
1,44
1,82
35 kg 35 kg 2 x 18 kg 2 x 20 kg

2,0 m
S25 MAST SECTION
3370 kg

0,12
2,10
1,82
2,42 0,11
5,75 0,50
1,82 0,20
4 x 760 kg 50 kg 132 kg
3,14 0,70
0,47
1,05
1,05
0,23
0,66 5,80
1,44
1,82
35 kg 35 kg 2 x 18 kg 2 x 20 kg

21LC290
CM215 + SM21-K2/S25
7,10
12500 kg

21LC290
CM215
2,50
5,40
1,57
3800 kg
LADDER
2,10
0,48
0,10
11 kg

21LC290
SM21-K2/S25
2,40
1,90
2,46 2,35
(3 turns each mechanism 300 kg) 6600 kg
LADDER
2,20
0,48
0,09
3800 kg

21LC290
PLATFORM + CABIN
2,30
4,20 1,80
1300 kg
SUPPORT ARM STAIR STAIR

0,24
0,25
0,95
0,25
0,36
2,18
2,30
0,17
0,70 0,70
145 kg 2 x 30 kg 4 kg 4 kg
GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL
2,06 1,11
1,94
1,20
1,20
0,14
0,81
14 kg 9 kg 9 kg

21 LC
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS Pluma
AM299A JIB SECTION

(With automatic tensioning system)
3,85
10,45 1,40 7140 kg
AM298 JIB SECTION

3,70
10,40 1,40 5500 kg
AM298 JIB SECTION
3,70
10,40 1,40 4450 kg
AM282B JIB SECTION

2,50
10,35 1,40
4850 kg
AM282B JIB SECTION

(With trolley mechanism)
2,50
10,35 1,40
4230 kg
1 / 5 Rev: E 10/42 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 2 / 040 / 30

21 LC
AM282B JIB SECTION
2,50
10,35 1,40
3830 kg
AM272A JIB SECTION

2,45
10,30 1,40
4300 kg
AM272A JIB SECTION

2,45
10,30 1,40
3700 kg
AM272A JIB SECTION

2,45
10,30 1,40
3300 kg
AM262A JIB SECTION

2,45
10,30 1,40
3600 kg

21 LC
AM262A JIB SECTION

2,45
10,30 1,40
3000 kg
AM262A JIB SECTION
2,45
10,30 1,40 2600 kg
AM250A JIB SECTION

2,40
10,25 1,40
2700 kg
AM250A JIB SECTION

2,40
10,25 1,40
2310 kg
AM244 JIB SECTION

1,75
4,20 1,40
400 kg

21 LC
AM240 JIB SECTION
1,80
10,25 1,40
1850 kg
AM230 JIB SECTION
1,75
10,25 1,40
1450 kg
AM220 JIB SECTION
1,75
10,10 1,40
1050 kg
AM210 JIB SECTION

1,75
10,20 1,40
700 kg
AM211 JIB END

0,65
1,40
0,85
95 kg

21 LC
STRUT INDICATOR
1,40
0,70
1,65
0,75
1,50
15 kg 214 kg
PULLEY SUPPORT PULLEY SUPPORT SUPPORT
0,35
0,80
0,60
0,90
220 mm 210 mm 220 mm 210 mm
11 kg 12 kg 5 kg
FRONT TROLLEY FRONT HOOK

1,65
1,40
1,05
1,15
1,95
0,60
250 kg 290 kg
REAR TROLLEY REAR HOOK
1,65
1,30
1,30
0,60
1,15
120 kg 2,00 540 kg
FRONT AUXILLIARY TROLLEY REAR AUXILLIARY TROLLEY

0,70
0,70
1,50 0,30 1,50 0,30
25 kg 25 kg

21 LC
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS HS
FM218
3,70
4,40
1,40
1880 kg
FM215
2,50
8,40
1,75
3270 kg

21 LC
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS HS
BM215A
- Including hoisting machinery and
electrical equipment.
- Excluding hoisting rope and
auxiliary-jib.
EFU4-37-30 10000 kg
EFU5-50-30 11000 kg
EFU6-65-30 11500 kg
EFU5-50-45 11000 kg
EFU6-65-45 12000 kg
EFU4-110-45 12000 kg
EFU6-65-60 12500 kg
EFU4-110-60 12500 kg
Weights excluding hoisting rope.
EFU4L-110-60 13500 kg
FRAME
2,60
2,20 11,55
6200 kg
PLATFORM GUARD RAIL

0,35
5,14
5,20
1,10
1275 mm x 4
0,75
4 x 165 kg 4 x 30 kg
GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL
0,85 0,55
1,10
1,10
739 mm 440 mm
2 x 8 kg 4 x 7 kg

2,0 m
WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS
MA02 FRAME
950 kg
STRINGER CROSSTIE STRINGER

0,11
0,42
0,42
2,74
1,56 0,11
2,11 0,15
0,34
2 x 250 kg 2 x 155 kg 4 x 35 kg

J2-10
CAGE
TRANSPORT
13
9,
2,52
2,32
10800 kg

J2-10
FRAME
13
9,
2,52
2,32
4950 kg
SUPPORT SCALE
0,26 1,87
1,10
0,17
0,10
1,45
475 kg 2 x 73 kg
SCALE SCALE
5,31 2,25
0,14
0,14
0,10
0,10
2 x 260 kg 2 x 115 kg
CLIMBING FRAME ARM
0,28 1,60
1,40
1,82
1,60
0,50
950 kg 230 kg

J2-10
BLOCK HANDLE
1,00
0,46
0,93
2,56 0,10
0,50
540 kg 46 kg
SUPPORT SUPPORT
0,25
0,38 0,21
0,60
0,51
0,22
35 kg 28 kg
SUPPORT SUPPORT
0,44
0,72
2,48 0,40
2,48 0,48
190 kg 177 kg
FRAME FRAME
2,48
0,52
2,48 2,48
2,48
2,48
290 kg 320 kg

J2-10
PLATFORM PLATFORM
2,79 0,29
0,48
0,84
0,63 2,66
68 kg 2 x 72 kg
PLATFORM PLATFORM
0,29 2,79 0,29 2,79

0,84
0,84
79 kg 74 kg
PLATFORM PLATFORM
0,22 2,71 0,22 2,71

1,04
1,04
72 kg 79 kg
PLATFORM PLATFORM
0,65
0,65
1,38 0,22 1,38 0,22
2 x 33 kg 2 x 33 kg

J2-10
PLATFORM PLATFORM
0,68
0,68
1,18 0,83 1,18 0,83
50 kg 50 kg
PLATFORM GUARD RAIL
2,28
0,88
1,10
2,75 1,29 1120 mm 1120 mm
134 kg 4 x 14 kg
GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL
3,84 1,78
1,10
1,10
1219 mm 1219 mm 1219 mm 1150 mm
2 x 23 kg 4 x 12 kg
GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL
0,63 0,55 1,11

1,10
1,10
1,10
594 mm 430 mm 1060 mm
5 x 8 kg 2 x 7 kg 2 x 8 kg

J2-10
LADDER
0,48
7,00
53 kg
GUARD RAIL GUARD RAIL LADDER
1,98
1,48
0,48
1,10
0,81
2,70
1794 mm
11 kg 19 kg 18 kg
GUARD HYDRAULIC GROUP
3,60 0,71
1,63
0,75
0,55 0,85
47 kg 375 kg

21LC290
BALLAST SUMMARY -
SUPPORT FASTENING TRAVELLING
QUANTITY AND TYPE OF BALLAST BLOCKS (G) REQUIRED AS

A FUNCTION OF JIB HEIGHT H (m) AND LENGTH L(m).
View document reactions MTJ_030.0357
3XA72; 3XR72
L
74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
Block A: 5400 kg H
Block B: 2700 kg
12 x A 12 x A 14 x A
42,6 12 x A 14 x A 14 x A 18 x A 18 x A
1000 2xB 2xB 2xB
A
450
0 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A
500 37,1 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A 18 x A 18 x A
2xB 2xB 2xB
12 x A 12 x A 14 x A
31,6 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A 18 x A 18 x A
B 2xB 2xB 2xB
250
12 x A 12 x A 14 x A
26,1 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A 18 x A 18 x A
2xB 2xB 2xB
12 x A 12 x A 14 x A
20,6 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A 18 x A 18 x A
2xB 2xB 2xB

21LC290
BALLAST SUMMARY -
SUPPORT FASTENING TRAVELLING
QUANTITY AND TYPE OF BALLAST BLOCKS (G) REQUIRED AS

A FUNCTION OF JIB HEIGHT H (m) AND LENGTH L(m).
View document reactions MTJ_030.0358
5XA72; 5XR72
L
74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
H
64,9 14 x A 14 x A 14 x A 14 x A 14 x A 14 x A 16 x A 16 x A
Block A: 6750 kg
59,4 10 x A 10 x A 12 x A 12 x A 12 x A 12 x A 14 x A 14 x A
1500
A
0 53,9 8xA 8xA 10 x A 10 x A 10 x A 10 x A 12 x A 12 x A
625
300
48,4 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 10 x A 10 x A
42,9 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA 8xA

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
3201-10352
Block : 5400 kg
A
Mark the slab weight in an
indeleble way
500
15
45º
2100 1200
3500 +1 500
1000
500
4500
Bevel edges 15 x 15 mm to avoid dropping of concrete

particles. QUALITY OF CONCRETE..................................HA-30/F/20/IIa
All fittings to be galvanized. WEIGHT PER SLAB (DRY).................................6540 kg + 2%
Weld brackets to re-bar. QUALITY OF RE-BAR.........................................B 500S
Measurements in mm.
Quantities shown are for 1 slab.

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
90
60
0
r3
80
Ø
190
22
+0
130 -2
1- Tube Ø 139x5 (S235JR) L=500 1 p.
2- Lifting point Ø 20 (S355JO) 1 p.
3- ROUNDBAR Ø 20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4420
920
1 2 4
900 440
3 4
250
250
Nº Diameter Lenght Quantity
Quality of the steel: B 500S 1 12 4420 16

2 12 920 50
All fittings to be galvanized.
Weld brackets to re-bar.
3 10 See detail 4
Measurements in mm.
Quantities shown are for 1 slab. 4 8 See detail 62

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
Block : 2700 kg
A
indeleble way
250
15
45º
2100 1200
3500 +1 500
1000
500
4500

Measurements in mm.

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
90
60
0
r3
80
Ø
190
22
+0
130 -2
1- Tube Ø 139x5 (S235JR) L=250 1 p.

3- ROUNDBAR Ø 20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4420
920
1 2 4
900 190
3 4
250
250

2 12 920 50
3 10 See detail 4
Measurements in mm.

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
3201-10354
Block : 6750 kg
B A Mark the slab weight in an

indeleble way
300
45º
2500 1875
2800 1725
1500
750
4510 +1 870
6250

Measurements in mm.

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
1- Tube Ø139x5 (S235JR) L=300 1 p.

2- Lifting point (S355JO) 1 p.
3- Roundbar Ø20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4- Tube Ø8 (B500S) 2 p.
1- Tube Ø139x5 (S235JR) L=300 1 p.

2- Guide (S355JO) 1 p.

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
Ner. Diameter Lenght Quantity

1 12 See detail 4
2 8 See detail 84
3 12 6170 20
4 12 1420 64
Quality of the steel: B500S

Measurements in mm.

21LC290
COUNTERWEIGHT SUMMARY -
WEIGHT
BLOCK
(kg)
A 4000
B 2000
C 1000
21LC290/12 t
Jib lenght (m)
74 m 70 m 64 m 60 m 54 m 50 m 44 m 40 m
5xA
5xA 5xA 4xA 3xA 3xA
EFU3-37-30 1xB 5xA 4xA
1xB 1XC 1xC 1xB 1xC
1xC
4xA 2xA
4xA 4xA 4xA 3xA 3xA
EFU5-50-30 2xB 3xA 1xB
2xB 1xB 1xC 1xB 1xB
1xC 1xC
4xA 4xA 4xA 2xA
4xA 3xA 3xA
EFU6-65-30 2xB 2xB 1xB 3xA 1xB
1xB 1xB 1xB
1xC 1xC 1xC 1xC
21LC290/18 t
Jib lenght (m)
74 m 70 m 64 m 60 m 54 m 50 m 44 m 40 m
4xA
4xA 4xA 4xA 3xA 3xA 2xA
EFU5-50-45 2xB 3xA
2xB 1XB 1xC 1xB 1xB 1xB
1xC
4xA 4xA 4xA 2xA
4xA 3xA 3xA
EFU6-65-45 2xB 2xB 1xB 3xA 1xB
1xB 1xB 1xB
1xC 1xC 1xC 1xC
4xA 4xA 2xA
4xA 4XA 3XA 3XA 2xA
EFU4-110-45 2xB 2xB 1xB
1xB 1xB 1xB 1xB 1xB
1xC 1xC 1xC
Block position in counterjib is defined in documents "COUNTERWEIGHT ERECTION, BLOCK POSITION"

in chapter "ERECTION / DISMANTLING" and is a function of hoist drive, jib length and reeving.

21 LC
BALLAST SUMMARY -
3207-10194
Block: 4000 kg
A B C
1- Round bar Ø50 (S275JR) L=800 1 p. 1- Round bar Ø80 (S275JR) L=750 1 p. 1- Round bar Ø50 (S275JR) L=375 2 p.
2- Round bar Ø25 (S275JR) L=15 2 p.
Bevel edges 20 x 20 mm to avoid dropping of concrete particles.

QUALITY OF CONCRETE...............................HA-30/F/20/IIa
All fitttings to be galvanized.
WEIGHT PER SLAB (DRY)..............................4000 kg + 2%
WEIGHT OF THE STEEL.................................125 kg
Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

21 LC
BALLAST SUMMARY -
3207-10195
Block: 2000 kg
A B C

Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

21 LC
BALLAST SUMMARY -
3207-10196
Block: 1000 kg
A B C

Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

-
GENERAL STANDARDS -
CRANE’S DESIGNATION:
TOWER CRANES
SAFETY STANDARDS:
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Electro magnetic compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC
Noise emission Directive 2000/14/EC modified by 2005/88/EC
Low voltage Directive 2006/95/CE
Cranes – Safety – Tower cranes EN14439
CALCULATION STANDARDS:
DIN 15018-1
DIN 15018-2
DIN 15019-1
FEM 1.001
FEM 1.005
EN 14439 Annex A
CLASSIFICATION GROUPS:
Crane hoisting group (Classification DIN 15018): H1
Structure loading groups (Classification DIN 15018): Jib B2

Others: B3
Mechanism groups (Classification FEM 1.001 / EN14439): Hoisting winch: M4

Luffing gear: M4
Slewing gear: M5
Trolley travelling: M3
Travelling gear: M4
Auxiliary winch: M1
Ropes group (Classification FEM 1.001 / EN14439): Lifting ropes: M4

Luffing ropes: M4
Trolley travel ropes: M4
WIND CONDITIONS:
In service: 72 km/h (45 mph)
Out of service: C – region, 25 years recurrence interval (*)
(*) If more severe wind conditions are expected, please, contact to Linden Comansa for the best
solution
STEEL STANDARDS:
EN 10025
EN 10083-1

-
CERTIFICATE -
- DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We hereby certify that:
TOWER CRANE
TYPE: XXXX
HOIST WINCH: XXXX
SERIAL NUMBER: XXXX
MANUFACTURER: CONSTRUCCIONES METÁLICAS COMANSA S.A.
YEAR OF MANUFACTURE: XXXX
Conforms to the safety and health standards in accordance with:
 MACHINERY DIRECTIVE: 2006/42/EC

 ECM DIRECTIVE: 2004/108/EC
 NOISE EMISSION DIRECTIVE 2000/14/EC modified by 2005/88/EC
Design and construction are in accordance to:
 EN 14439
Conformity Assessment Procedure: Directive 2000/14/EC (Annexe VIII)

The Notified Body involved is: AENOR
Measured sound power level: LWA : xx dB
Guaranteed sound power level: LWAm xx dB
Technical documentation is held by: Alberto Munárriz Aldaz
Authorised person for CE signature: Isaac Cenoz Echeverría
Huarte-Pamplona, on XXXXX, XXth XXXX
ALBERTO MUNARRIZ ALDAZ

Managing Director

-
SOUND POWER -
INFORMATION REGARDING THE NOISE EMISSION
Noise emission directive 2000/14/CE modified by 2005/88/CE
21LC
Guaranteed sound Measured sound
Hoisting mechanism power level power level
Lwa Lwam
EFU3-37-__ 97 dB 91,7 dB
EFU5-50-__ 98 dB 97,5 dB
EFU6-65-__ 98 dB 97,5 dB
EFU4-110-__ 98 dB 97,5 dB
EFU4L-110-__ 98 dB 97,5 dB

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
ASSEMBLY / DISMANTLING 000 0213 IB
21LC290/18 t
INDEX EFU5-50-45
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Site, warnings.........................................................................................................010 0002 IB D 5
Anchor base erection.............................................................................................020 0011 IB A 7
Anchor base erection.............................................................................................020 0058 IB C 8
Fixing angle foundations........................................................................................020 0071 IB C 9
Fixing angles (pins)................................................................................................020 0050 IB C 11
Reactions (index)...................................................................................................020 0381 IB A 12
Location of cross base...........................................................................................030 0015 IB A 15
Fixing angle foundations........................................................................................030 0014 IB B 16
Fixing angle foundations........................................................................................030 0069 IB A 17
Track construction..................................................................................................030 0061 IB D 18
Reactions (index)...................................................................................................030 0356 IB A 22
Composition ballast................................................................................................030 0338 IB A 33
Base ballast............................................................................................................030 0340 IB B 34
Base ballast............................................................................................................030 0341 IB B 36
Composition ballast................................................................................................030 0328 IB A 38
Base ballast............................................................................................................030 0337 IB B 39
General erection instructions..................................................................................040 0001 IB A 42
Assembly of base...................................................................................................060 0083 IB C 43
Assembly of base...................................................................................................060 0052 IB C 48
Mast section assembly...........................................................................................060 0191 IB C 53
Assembly of slewing part........................................................................................060 0432 IB A 57
Cat-head (Pin identification)...................................................................................060 0081 IB A 62
Counter-jib -Pin identifications................................................................................060 0064 IB B 63
Erecting the counter-jib..........................................................................................060 0431 IB A 65
Jib assembly (preparation).....................................................................................060 0061 IB B 69
Jib sections; pin identification.................................................................................060 0292 IB A 79
Jib sections; pin identification.................................................................................060 0293 IB A 84
Jib sections, radius indicator flags..........................................................................060 0060 IB A 85
Secuence assembly of counter / jib........................................................................060 0320 IB A 86
Aerial counterweight combination / position...........................................................060 0318 IB A 88
Counterweight erection..........................................................................................060 0059 IB C 89
Counterweight........................................................................................................060 0058 IB B 91
Steel cables............................................................................................................070 0025 IB E 94
Trolley cables reeving.............................................................................................070 0032 IB A 97
Trolley cable reeving sequence..............................................................................070 0030 IB E 98
Hoisting cable reeving............................................................................................070 0029 IB A 104
Auxiliary trolley cables reeving...............................................................................070 0033 IB A 108
Anticatenary trolley rope assembly sequence........................................................070 0028 IB A 109
Reeving change / trolley change............................................................................070 0031 IB B 112
Daily checks...........................................................................................................080 0041 IB A 122
Location of limiters.................................................................................................080 0029 IB C 123
Travelling movement limiter....................................................................................080 0003 IB A 124
Slewing limiter........................................................................................................080 0006 IB B 125
Lifting stroke limiter................................................................................................080 0004 IB B 126
Trolley limiter..........................................................................................................080 0007 IB A 128
Moment limiter........................................................................................................080 0117 IB B 130
Load limiter.............................................................................................................080 0100 IB A 135
Cage momentum limiter.........................................................................................080 0113 IB B 137
Erection of the climbing section, balance weight....................................................110 0062 IB A 144
Erection of climbing section (in preparation)..........................................................110 0077 IB A 146
Erection of the climbing cage.................................................................................110 0078 IB A 153
Assembly of the climbing section, telescoping ......................................................110 0079 IB A 161
Ties.........................................................................................................................120 0023 IB C 169
1 / 2 Rev:A 13/22 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 3 / 000 / 3

21LC290/18 t
INDEX EFU5-50-45
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.
Ties.........................................................................................................................120 0104 IB A 172

Braced crane..........................................................................................................120 0096 IB A 176
Crane dismantling..................................................................................................140 0001 IB A 178
Scrapping the crane...............................................................................................140 0003 IB A 179

-
SITE, WARNINGS -
AN APPROPRIATE CRANE SITE IS A KEY POINT FOR A PERFECT CRANE OPERATION IN

OPTIMAL SAFETY CONDITIONS
Several points must be taken into account before selecting the crane site:
- Requirements inherent to the construction work
- Crane characteristics
- National and local regulations applicable in the site location
As a general rule, the following requirements shall be complied with
1 Minimum clear space for personnel passage between most outreaching crane parts and any obstacle
must be A=0,60 m width by B= 2,50 m height (Fig. 1)
In case this condition cannot be met, access of personnel to this hazardous area shall be prohibited.
Fig. 1
2 No part of the crane or the suspended loads should ever be allowed to come into contact with power
lines.
If they are high voltage lines the crane should never overhang them for any reason, although it may pass
underneath them. There should always be a safety space of 3.3 m + U/100 with a minimum of 5 metres
measured from its horizontal projection between these lines and any element of the crane or load (U
being the line voltage in kV) (Fig.2).
Fig. 2

-
SITE, WARNINGS -
3 If two cranes are close together, their location must be established such that there is a minimum
distance of D= 2 m between jib and mast parts subject to collide.
The minimum vertical distance between the lowest point (hook at the top position, or overhead
counterweight) of the highest crane and the highest point, subject to collide, of the other crane shall be
E= 3 m.
Fig. 3
4 For travelling cranes, an appropriate system must be provided to prevent cranes from getting closer
than any of the distances mentioned in the previous paragraph.
5 In case of cranes working on top of others, adequate measures must be taken to prevent the hoisting
cable or the load from colliding with any part of the lower crane.
6 If the crane is located near a slope, minimum safety distances must be kept for protection against
slips.
If keeping safety distances should not be possible, the slope must be reinforced to withstand the loads
transmitted by the crane. (Fig. 4)
F F
max 45º max 45º
Fig. 4
7 The site must allow for safe erection and dismantling operations.
8 All crane conditions both initial and with later tower extensions and possible stays must be taken into
account.
9 Also, crane-dismantling operations must be taken into account.

-
ANCHOR BASE ERECTION LC
1 Excavate.
Prepare 4 levelling blocks for the fixing angles. (Fig. 1)
Levelling Blocks
Fig. 1
2 Place fixing angles and locate re-bars.

Level.
Levelling can be-either done using a template or a mast section (Fig. 2)
3 Pour concrete, vibrate to eliminate air-pockets and settle correctly.
4 Before erecting crane, ensure that concrete is duly cured to prevent possibility of movement.
5 Connect to ground the anchor base. See instructions in chapter "ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION"
Tensioning wiresfor levelling
Fig. 2

21 LC
ANCHOR BASE ERECTION -
SELECTION OF FOUNDATION BASE PADS
SET-UP
ES72 ES73 ES43 ES63 ES6A3 ES83
CRANE
21 LC 290 EPS52 -- -- -- --
21 LC 400 -- EPS53 EPD3-23 EPD4-23 -- EPD63
21 LC 550 -- -- EPD3-23 EPD4-23 -- EPD63
21 LC 660 -- -- -- -- EPD53 EPD63
21 LC 750 -- -- -- -- -- EPD63
FIXING ANGLES
PS5 PD3-2 PD4-2 PD5 PD6
MAST SECTIONS
S25 EPS52 -- -- -- --
S35 EPS53 -- -- -- --
TD33A
-- EPD3-23 -- -- --
D33
TD34
-- -- EPD4-23 -- --
D34
D35 -- -- -- EPD53 --
TD36B
-- -- -- -- EPD66
D36
To establish foundation dimensions see documents "REACTIONS / PRESSURE UNDER

FOUNDATION" und "REACTIONS ON FIXING ANGLES" in following pages.
1 / 1 Rev:C 12/40 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 3 / 020 / 8

EPS52
FIXING ANGLE FOUNDATIONS -
ALWAYS use either a mast section or

COMANSA - built template to locate the
Max. permitted height tolerance fixing angles.
between feet in any axis; ±1mm
ATTENTION:
Check the anchoring feet position in
1794±0,5 relation to the X and Y axes.
1680
2000
600 AxA Q
1 3 4 5
2
( m) (t)
5,0x5,0 120
5,5x5,5 145
6,0x6,0 173
6,5x6,5 203
A 7,0x7,0 235
7,5x7,5 270
8,0x8,0 307
GRATING
1 250 x 250
A
GRATING
2 150 x 150
CONCRETE RESISTANCE.................HA-30/F/20/IIa
MIN. CONCRETE DENSITY...............2400 kg/m³
MIN. STEEL RESISTANCE.................B 500 S
ALL MEASUREMENS ARE IN MILLIMETRES WEIGHT OF FOUNDATIONS.............Q t
1 / 2 Rev: C 13/21 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 3 / 020 / 9

EPS52
FIXING ANGLE FOUNDATIONS -
PS5
450
ALL MEASUREMENS ARE IN MILLIMETRES
L L
L
40
40
40
40
50º
1 2 5
3 4
1 2 3 4 5
AxA Material Material Material
(m) Material Material
L L Quantity Quantity Quantity
Quantity Quantity
Length Length Length
5,0x5,0 4900 4900
Round Ø 10 (B 500 S)
5,5x5,5 5400 5400

 Mesh 150 x 150
 Mesh 250 x 250
L=1900 (mm)
L=2000 (mm)
L=1230 (mm)
6,0x6,0 5900 5900

16 Units
16 Units
16 Units
6,5x6,5 6400 6400
7,0x7,0 6900 6900
7,5x7,5 7400 7400
8,0x8,0 7900 7900

-
FIXING ANGLES (PINS) -
Anchor base must be electrically connected to ground, see instruction "ELECTRIC WIRING AND
GROUNDING" in chapter ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION of this manual.
Ax
G
Ø Diameter (mm)
L Length (mm)
Q Quantity
1 2
ø L Q ø L Q AxG
PS3 55 135 8 16 120 4 150 x 18
PS4 60 135 8 16 160 4 200 x 20
PS5 60 135 8 16 160 4 200 x 26

21LC290
REACTIONS (INDEX) Zona C/25 años

DESIGNATION CODE Reference
Reactions ES72 MTJ 020 0365

Reactions / pressure under foundation ES72 MTJ 020 0382

21LC290
REACTIONS ON FIXING ANGLES Zona C/25 años
SC
ES72 DC
Mt -Torsional moment. (kNm)
Mt
Mv -Overturning moment. (kNm)
P -Weight of crane (kN)
Mv Fh -Horizontal reaction (kN)
Fh P Q -Mass of foundation concrete (kN)
e -Excentricity (m)
h
Q σt -Pressure on ground (kN/m²)
ea
AxA σt -Permissible ground pressure (kN/m²)
adm
L -Max. hook radius
SC -SIMPLE TROLLEY (2 reenvíos)
e= Mv + Fh x h < A DC -DOUBLE TROLLEY (4 reenvíos)
P+Q 3 H -Hook height
σt = 2(P + Q)
< σtadm A -Foundation dimensions
3xAxa
H (m) IN SERVICE OUT OF SERVICE

L (m) L (m)
TOWER COM-
POSITION
74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40 74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
Mv 3812 3887 4085 4039 4097 4148 4427 4416 6056 6106 6135 6135 6069 6205 6344 6379
63,1
Fh 59 58 57 57 56 56 55 55 120 120 119 118 117 117 116 115
11 x S25
P 1054 1044 1035 1018 991 995 968 965 1027 1014 998 978 945 942 898 885
Mv 3486 3562 3753 3712 3772 3823 4093 4081 5367 5421 5454 5457 5396 5534 5679 5716
57,6
Fh 56 56 55 54 53 53 53 53 111 110 109 109 108 107 106 106
10 x S25
P 1021 1011 1002 985 958 962 934 931 994 981 965 945 912 908 864 851
Mv 3196 3271 3458 3420 3482 3532 3795 3783 4731 4787 4825 4830 4775 4915 5066 5106
52,1
Fh 53 53 52 52 51 51 50 50 101 101 100 99 98 98 97 96
9 x S25
P 988 978 969 951 924 928 901 898 961 948 932 911 878 875 831 818
Mv 2938 3013 3195 3161 3224 3274 3530 3517 4152 4210 4253 4260 4211 4354 4511 4552
46,6
Fh 51 50 49 49 48 48 47 47 92 91 90 90 89 89 88 87
8 x S25
P 955 945 935 918 891 895 868 865 928 915 898 878 845 842 798 785
Mv 2711 2786 2964 2932 2996 3045 3295 3282 3620 3680 3728 3737 3693 3838 4001 4045
41,1
Fh 48 48 47 46 46 45 45 45 82 82 81 81 80 79 78 78
7 x S25
P 921 911 902 885 858 862 835 832 894 881 865 845 812 809 765 752
Mv 2512 2586 2761 2731 2796 2845 3090 3076 3143 3205 3259 3270 3232 3379 3548 3593
35,6
Fh 45 45 44 44 43 43 42 42 73 73 72 71 70 70 69 69
6 x S25
P 888 878 869 852 824 828 801 798 861 848 832 812 778 776 731 718
Mv 2339 2413 2585 2557 2623 2672 2911 2897 2712 2777 2836 2849 2816 2966 3140 3188
30,1
Fh 43 42 41 41 40 40 39 39 64 63 62 62 61 60 59 59
5 x S25
P 855 845 836 818 791 795 768 765 828 815 799 778 745 742 698 685
Mv
Fh
P
Mt 503 503 503 503 503 503 503 503 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

REACTIONS ON FIXING ANGLES / PRESSURE UNDER 21LC290
FOUNDATION -
ES72 See document "REACTIONS ON FIXING ANGLES": (MTJ 020 0365)
See document "ANCHOR BASE ERECTION": (MTJ 020 0071)
A x A x h (m)
A x A x h -Foundation dimensions
D1 5,0 x 5,0 x 2,0 H -Hook height
D2 5,5 x 5,5 x 2,0 SR -Single reeving (2 reevings)
D3 6,0 x 6,0 x 2,0 DR -Double reeving (4 reevings)
D4 6,5 x 6,5 x 2,0
D5 7,0 x 7,0 x 2,0
D6 7,5 x 7,5 x 2,0 PRESSURE UNDER FOUNDATION IN
D7 8,0 x 8,0 x 2,0 kg/cm²
H D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
63,1 - - - - 2,1 1,7 1,4
57,6 - - - 2,5 1,8 1,5 1,3
52,1 - - - 2,1 1,7 1,4 1,2

SR
DR 46,6 - - 2,5 1,8 1,5 1,3 1,2
41,1 - - 2,1 1,6 1,4 1,2 1,1
35,6 - 2,6 1,8 1,5 1,3 1,1 1,0
30,1 - 2,2 1,6 1,4 1,2 1,1 1,0

Base X
LOCATION OF CROSS BASE -
The cross shaped undercarriage consists of one beam and two arms that open having the form of an X.
They are fixed by rods and bolh. To the cross shaped undercarriage are screwed anchorage feet the differnt
types of masts.
To each end of the X is fitted a stabilising base, (fig. 1) a rail travelling. (fig. 2).
These bases must be supported on four concrete platforms or on a single continuous base, and must be big
enough to take the whole undercarriage suitably.
Foundation size is given by the characteristics of the ground and the pressure per corner (see sheets on
“BALLAST & REACTIONS”) in following pages.
In case of rail travelling, it is mounted on the travelling. In order to realise the rail travelling, see documents
"Installation of the crane and of the travelling" and "TRACK ERECTION" in following pages.
The soil must be firm and resistend, and must be adequate to withstand the loads transmitted to the
base.
The crane site must be big enough to allow erection manoeuvres, and any obstacles such as buildings
or power lines nearby should be taken into account
Base must be electrically connected to ground, see instruction "ELECTRIC WIRING AND GROUNDING"
in chapter ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION of this manual.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2

BASE X
FOUNDATION´S EXECUTION -
L=3,2 m
L=3,8 m L x L depending on the base
L=4,5 m
SUPPORT
PYRAMID
(Optional)
A x A x h (m)
1,0 x 1,0 x 0,5

1,2 x 1,2 x 0,5
1,4 x 1,4 x 0,5
1,6 x 1,6 x 0,5
1,8 x 1,8 x 0,5
2,0 x 2,0 x 0,5
CONCRETE RESISTANCE.................HA-30/F/20/IIa
Millimetre dimension all MIN. STEEL RESISTANCE.................B 500 S

BASE X
FOUNDATION´S EXECUTION -
PYRAMID
A x A x h (m)
1.6 x 1.6 x 0.6

1.8 x 1.8 x 0.6
2.0 x 2.0 x 0.6
2.2 x 2.2 x 0.6
2.4 x 2.4 x 0.6
2.6 x 2.6 x 0.6
CONCRETE RESISTANCE.................HH-250 kg/cm²

Measurements in mm QUALITY OF RE-BAR.........................B 500 S

-
TRACK CONSTRUCTION -
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 TRACK ERECTION
3 TRACK INSTALLATION
4 TRACK TOLERANCES
5 TRACK END
1 GENERAL
AN APPROPRIATE TRACK ERECTION IS A KEY POINT FOR A PERFECT CRANE OPERATION IN

OPTIMAL SAFETY CONDITIONS.
When selecting the crane site, recommendations given in “SITE, WARNINGS” document at the beginning of
this chapter, must be taken into account.
As a general rule, standard UNE 58101-2:2011, must be complied with, notwithstanding other applicable regu-
lations or standards required in the crane site location.
2 TRACK ERECTION
Soil resistance must guarantee track stability.
The user must make sure (through certified documentation on soil characteristics or geotechnical surveys) that
the soil where the crane is erected, as well as the foundations are adequate to correctly withstand the maximum
loads specified by the manufacturer.
Track rails and other track elements shall be designed and installed in such a manner as to guaranteeing an
effective transmission of the maximum loads specified by the manufacturer without permanent deflections.
Rails on concrete slippers
RAIL
RAIL
L B e A H D
kg/m
30 280 120 12 53 110 48
35 280 120 12 60 123 61
45 280 120 12 66 142 80
54 300 120 12 72 159 97
60 320 120 12 74 172 110

-
Prefab track
3 TRACK INSTALLATION
Track rails must be electrically connected to ground see instruction "ELECTRIC WIRING AND GROUNDING"
in chapter ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION of this manual.
L (m)
B-B
B B
A (mm)
RAIL
TRACK WIDTH (L)

3,2 m 3,8 m 4,5 m 6m 8m 10 m
A A A A A A A A A A A A
Máx. Mín. Máx. Mín. Máx. Mín. Máx. mín. Máx. Mín. Máx. Mín.
5LC 74 53 74 53 66 53
11LC 74 53 74 53 74 53
21LC 74 53 74 53 74 53 74 53
LCL 74 53 74 53 74 53

-
4 TRACK TOLERANCES
Tolerances accepted for straight tracks are as follows.
Longitudinal levelling.
Rolling surface of the same rail shall be levelled to a maximum of 1/1000 of the track width “L”.
Transversal levelling
Difference in height between track rails shall not be more than 1/1000 of track width “L”.
Track width (m) t (mm)

3,2 3,2
3,8 3,8
4,5 4,5
6,0 6,0
8,0 8,0

10,0 10,0
Distance between rail centerlines
Shall be equal to theoretical track width “L” +- 5 mm.
Railheads must be enclosed in the space between two parallel vertical planes separated by a distance equal
to the nominal width “A” of said heads plus 5 mm.
Offset between rail sections at the joint

Shall be 2 mm maximum.
Rail joint separation

Shall be 5 mm maximum.
s

-
Transversal levelling of rail flange

Shall be 3/1000 of L in a horizontal plane.
Track width (m) t (mm)
3,2 9,6
3,8 11,4
4,5 13,5
6,0 18,0
8,0 24,0
10,0 30,0
Track condition
If used rails are employed, the flat worn surface of the head shall be fairly centered on the rail plane of
symmetry.
IF DURING OPERATION ANY OF THESE TRACK TOLERANCES ARE EXCEEDED IN MORE THAN
20% NECESSARY ACTION MUST BE TAKEN.
In case of bends, in slopes, or under special circumstances, the user must comply with the instructions and
applicable specifications given by the manufacturer for the specific case.
5 TRACK ENDS.
Track ends will be provided with:
- End of travel limiter actuator (limiter ramp) for the crane to stop at a minimum distance of 0,5 m from the
track stops.
- Bumpers placed at least 1 m before the end of the track.
TRACK STOP
LIMITER RAMP
TRACK END
Necessary data for material acquisition and erection shall be given by the manufacturer for each type of
crane.

LCL190/18 t
REACTIONS (INDEX) Zona C/25 años
H G
DESIGNATION CODE Reference
Reactions 5XA72; 5XR72 MTJ 030 0532

Reactions / pressure under foundation 5XA72 MTJ 030 0533
Reactions 5XA73; 5XR73 MTJ 030 0534

Reactions / pressure under foundation 5XA73 MTJ 030 0535

21LC290/18 t
REACTIONS Zona C/25 años
3XA72 SC 9000 kg
3XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
I FS.............Out of service
A B L...............Hook radius (m)
H...............Height under hook (m)
G...............Base ballast (t)
4,5 m SC............Simgle trolley (4 falls)
DC............Double trolley (8 falls)
C D Z...............Max. FS pressure (kN)
X...............Max. S pressure (kN)
4,5 m
V...............Horizontal force FS (kN)
W..............Horizontal force S (kN)
H (m) 42,6 37,1 31,6 26,1 20,6

COMPOSITION
TOWER
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
4 x S25
3 x S25
L
(m)
G 64,8 64,8 64,8 64,8 64,8

A 695 600 589 581 573
B 402 394 385 377 369
Z (I)
C 402 394 385 377 369
D 109 187 181 173 165
74 V 126 113 101 88 76
A 869 805 767 735 706
B 383 398 392 384 375
X (I)
C 383 398 392 384 375
D 0 0 17 32 44
W 55 53 50 47 45
G 70,2 64,8 64,8 64,8 64,8
A 688 609 599 590 583
B 412 390 382 374 365
Z (I)
C 412 390 382 374 365
D 136 171 165 157 148
70 V 126 113 100 88 76
A 874 811 767 735 707
B 402 390 389 381 373
X (I)
C 402 390 389 381 373
D 0 0 12 27 39
W 55 52 50 47 44

21LC290/18 t
3XA72 SC 9000 kg
3XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
4,5 m
H (m) 42,6 37,1 31,6 26,1 20,6

COMPOSITION
TOWER
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
4 x S25
3 x S25
L
(m)
G 70,2 70,2 70,2 70,2 70,2

A 661 631 622 613 606
B 408 400 391 383 375
Z (I)
C 408 400 391 383 375
D 155 168 161 153 144
64 V 125 112 99 87 75
A 948 883 827 782 753
B 360 376 388 392 384
X (I)
C 360 376 388 392 384
D 0 0 0 3 15
W 54 52 49 46 44
G 75,6 70,2 70,2 70,2 70,2
A 661 629 620 611 604
B 416 394 386 377 369
Z (I)
C 416 394 386 377 369
D 170 159 152 143 134
60 V 124 111 99 86 74
A 938 874 818 773 744
B 382 371 382 387 379
X (I)
C 382 371 382 387 379
D 0 0 0 2 14
W 54 51 49 46 43

21LC290/18 t
3XA72 SC 9000 kg
3XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
4,5 m
H (m) 42,6 37,1 31,6 26,1 20,6

COMPOSITION
TOWER
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
4 x S25
3 x S25
L
(m)
G 75,6 75,6 75,6 75,6 75,6

A 646 635 626 617 610
B 408 400 392 383 375
Z (I)
C 408 400 392 383 375
D 171 165 158 149 140
54 V 123 110 97 85 73
A 958 895 839 791 762
B 360 375 387 394 386
X (I)
C 360 375 387 394 386
D 0 0 0 0 11
W 53 50 48 45 42
G 81,0 81,0 81,0 81,0 81,0
A 682 672 663 655 648
B 421 413 404 396 388
Z (I)
C 421 413 404 396 388
D 160 154 146 137 127
50 V 122 109 97 85 73
A 969 905 849 810 781
B 384 399 411 409 401
X (I)
C 384 399 411 409 401
D 0 0 0 9 21
W 53 50 48 45 42

21LC290/18 t
3XA72 SC 9000 kg
3XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
4,5 m
H (m) 42,6 37,1 31,6 26,1 20,6

COMPOSITION
TOWER
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
4 x S25
3 x S25
L
(m)
G 97,2 97,2 97,2 97,2 97,2

A 741 732 724 717 710
B 450 442 434 425 417
Z (I)
C 450 442 434 425 417
D 159 152 144 134 124
44 V 121 108 96 83 72
A 1053 987 930 883 854
B 410 426 438 443 435
X (I)
C 410 426 438 443 435
D 0 0 0 3 15
W 52 50 47 44 42
G 97,2 97,2 97,2 97,2 97,2
A 747 738 730 723 716
B 447 439 431 422 414
Z (I)
C 447 439 431 422 414
D 147 140 131 122 112
40 V 120 108 95 83 71
A 1049 983 925 880 851
B 410 426 438 442 434
X (I)
C 410 426 438 442 434
D 0 0 0 4 17
W 52 49 47 44 41

21LC290/18 t
REACTIONS, PRESSURE UNDER FOUNDATION Zona C/25 años
3XA72 SUPPORT
A x A x h (m)
A x A x h -Foundation dimensions. (m)
D1 1.0 x 1.0 x 0.5
H -Hook height. (m)
D2 1.2 x 1.2 x 0.5
D3 1.4 x 1.4 x 0.5 SC -Single trolley. (2 falls)
D4 1.6 x 1.6 x 0.5 DC -Double trolley.(4 falls) PIRAMIDE
D5 1.8 x 1.8 x 0.5 σ S -Presure under foundation. (kg/cm²) (optional)
D6 2.0 x 2.0 x 0.5 σ P -Presure under support cones. (kg/cm²)
See document "REACTIONS": (MTJ 030 0357)
See document "FOUNDATION´S EXECUTION": (MTJ 030 0014)
σS
H σA σP D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
42,6 65,8 16,5 10,7 7,4 5,5 4,2 3,4 2,8
37,1 61,7 15,4 10,0 7,0 5,2 4,0 3,2 2,6
31,6 58,1 14,5 9,4 6,6 4,9 3,8 3,0 2,4
SC
26,1 55,2 13,8 9,0 6,3 4,6 3,6 2,8 2,3
DC
20,6 53,4 13,3 8,7 6,1 4,5 3,5 2,8 2,3

21LC290/18 t
5XA72 SC 9000 kg
5XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
6,0 m
H (m) 64,9 59,4 53,9 48,4 42,9 37,4 31,9

COMPOSITION
10 x S25
11 x S25
TOWER
9 x S25
8 x S25
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
L
(m)
G 94,5 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0

A 1320 1075 852 718 619 531 521
B 379 350 377 393 385 377 368
Z (I)
C 379 350 377 393 385 377 368
D 0 0 0 69 151 222 215
74 V 195 181 167 153 140 127 115
A 988 873 796 757 721 689 660
B 526 450 408 400 392 383 375
X (I)
C 526 450 408 400 392 383 375
D 72 35 27 49 68 84 96
W 71 68 65 63 60 57 55
G 94,5 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0
A 1305 1061 838 707 608 537 528
B 387 358 385 390 382 373 365
Z (I)
C 387 358 385 390 382 373 365
D 0 0 0 79 161 214 207
70 V 194 180 166 153 140 127 114
A 992 878 801 762 726 693 664
B 524 448 406 397 389 381 372
X (I)
C 524 448 406 397 389 381 372
D 63 26 18 41 59 75 87
W 70 68 65 62 60 57 54

21LC290/18 t
5XA72 SC 9000 kg
5XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
6,0 m
H (m) 64,9 59,4 53,9 48,4 42,9 37,4 31,9

COMPOSITION
10 x S25
11 x S25
TOWER
9 x S25
8 x S25
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
L
(m)
G 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0

A 1257 1015 823 682 584 543 533
B 400 437 428 386 378 369 361
Z (I)
C 400 437 428 386 378 369 361
D 0 0 35 93 173 198 191
64 V 193 179 165 152 138 125 113
A 1015 933 856 782 746 713 684
B 521 479 437 395 387 378 370
X (I)
C 521 479 437 395 387 378 370
D 45 42 34 23 42 57 70
W 69 67 64 61 59 56 53
G 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0
A 1261 1019 820 679 582 540 531
B 396 432 423 381 372 364 356
Z (I)
C 396 432 423 381 372 364 356
D 0 0 36 93 173 198 191
60 V 192 178 165 151 138 125 112
A 1005 924 847 773 737 705 676
B 517 475 433 391 382 374 366
X (I)
C 517 475 433 391 382 374 366
D 37 33 26 15 34 49 62
W 69 66 64 61 58 56 53

21LC290/18 t
5XA72 SC 9000 kg
5XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
6,0 m
H (m) 64,9 59,4 53,9 48,4 42,9 37,4 31,9

COMPOSITION
10 x S25
11 x S25
TOWER
9 x S25
8 x S25
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
L
(m)
G 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0

A 1224 985 795 654 559 532 523
B 392 428 415 372 364 356 348
Z (I)
C 392 428 415 372 364 356 348
D 0 0 38 94 173 183 175
54 V 191 177 163 150 137 124 111
A 1005 925 848 781 739 707 677
B 510 468 426 382 376 367 359
X (I)
C 510 468 426 382 376 367 359
D 37 32 24 12 31 46 58
W 68 65 63 60 58 55 52
G 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0
A 1204 966 784 645 559 549 541
B 415 450 414 372 363 355 347
Z (I)
C 415 450 414 372 363 355 347
D 0 0 60 116 171 176 169
50 V 190 176 163 149 136 123 111
A 1012 930 855 793 744 711 682
B 511 469 427 380 377 368 360
X (I)
C 511 469 427 380 377 368 360
D 23 19 11 0 19 34 47
W 68 65 63 60 57 55 52

21LC290/18 t
5XA72 SC 9000 kg
5XR72 DC 18000 kg
S...............In service
6,0 m
H (m) 64,9 59,4 53,9 48,4 42,9 37,4 31,9

COMPOSITION
10 x S25
11 x S25
TOWER
9 x S25
8 x S25
7 x S25
6 x S25
5 x S25
L
(m)
G 108,0 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0

A 1139 926 777 638 571 562 553
B 497 479 437 394 352 344 336
Z (I)
C 497 479 437 394 352 344 336
D 0 52 117 172 153 146 138
44 V 188 175 161 148 135 122 109
A 1072 990 917 854 797 748 706
B 538 496 450 405 348 356 353
X (I)
C 538 496 450 405 348 356 353
D 18 15 8 0 0 0 11
W 67 65 62 59 57 54 51
G 108,0 94,5 81,0 67,5 54,0 54,0 54,0
A 1118 912 764 626 574 565 557
B 502 475 433 391 349 341 333
Z (I)
C 502 475 433 391 349 341 333
D 0 60 125 164 144 137 129
40 V 188 174 160 147 134 121 109
A 1070 988 915 851 794 745 703
B 537 495 449 398 342 349 353
X (I)
C 537 495 449 398 342 349 353
D 11 9 2 0 0 0 6
W 67 65 62 59 57 54 51

21LC290/18 t
REACTIONS, PRESSURE UNDER FOUNDATION Zona C/25 años
5XA72
A x A x h (m)
A x A x h -Foundation dimensions. (m)
D1 1,6 x 1,6 x 0,6 H -Hook height. (m)
D2 1,8 x 1,8 x 0,6 SC -Single trolley. (2 falls)
D3 2,0 x 2,0 x 0,6 PIRAMIDE
PIRAMIDE
DC -Double trolley.(6 falls)
D4 2,2 x 2,2 x 0,6 σ S -Presure under foundation. (kg/cm²)
D5 2,4 x 2,4 x 0,6 σ P -Presure under support cones. (kg/cm²)
D6 2,6 x 2,6 x 0,6
See document "REACTIONS": (MTJ 030 0358)
See document "FOUNDATION´S EXECUTION": (MTJ 030 0069)
σS
H σP D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
64,9 10,9 5,3 4,2 3,4 2,9 2,4 2,1
59,4 8,9 4,3 3,5 2,8 2,4 2,0 1,7
53,9 7,6 3,7 3,0 2,4 2,0 1,7 1,5
SC
48,4 7,1 3,5 2,8 2,3 1,9 1,6 1,4
DC
42,9 6,6 3,3 2,6 2,1 1,8 1,5 1,3
37,4 6,2 3,1 2,5 2,0 1,7 1,4 1,3
31,9 5,8 2,9 2,3 1,9 1,6 1,4 1,2

X 4,5 m
COMPOSITION BALLAST -
POSITION BLOCKS BALLAST

BASE SUPPORTED BASE TRANSLATION
5,8 m
5,3 x 5,3 m 4,5 m 4,8 m
X 4,5 m
Base Composition
Ballast (t) blocks
118,8 22xA
113,4 20xA + 2xB
108,0 20xA
Bloque A: 5400 kg
102,6 18xA + 2xB
Bloque B: 2700 kg
97,2 18xA
1000
91,8 16xA + 2xB
A
4500 86,4 16xA
500
81,0 14xA + 2xB
75,6 14xA
B
70,2 12xA + 2xB
250
64,8 12xA
59,4 10xA + 2xB
54,0 10xA
48,6 8xA + 2xB
43,2 8xA
37,8 6xA + 2xB
32,4 6xA

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
3201-10352
Block : 5400 kg
A
indeleble way
500
15
45º
2100 1200
3500 +1 500
1000
500
4500

Measurements in mm.

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
90
60
0
r3
80
Ø
190
22
+0
130 -2
1- Tube Ø 139x5 (S235JR) L=500 1 p.
3- ROUNDBAR Ø 20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4420
920
1 2 4
900 440
3 4
250
250

2 12 920 50
3 10 See detail 4
Measurements in mm.

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
Block : 2700 kg
A
indeleble way
250
15
45º
2100 1200
3500 +1 500
1000
500
4500

Measurements in mm.

X 4,5 m
BASE BALLAST -
90
60
0
r3
80
Ø
190
22
+0
130 -2
1- Tube Ø 139x5 (S235JR) L=250 1 p.

3- ROUNDBAR Ø 20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4420
920
1 2 4
900 190
3 4
250
250

2 12 920 50
3 10 See detail 4
Measurements in mm.

X 6,0 m
COMPOSITION BALLAST -
POSITION BLOCKS BALLAST

BASE SUPPORTED BASE TRANSLATION
7,6 m
6,8 x 6,8 m 6,0 m 7,1 m
Bloque A: 6750 kg
1500
A
0
625
300
X6m
Base Composition
Ballast (t) blocks
148,5 22 x A
135,0 20 x A
121,5 18 x A
108,0 16 x A
94,5 14 x A
81,0 12 x A
67,5 10 x A
54,0 8xA
40,5 6xA
27,0 4xA

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
3201-10354
Block : 6750 kg
B A Mark the slab weight in an

indeleble way
300
45º
2500 1875
2800 1725
1500
750
4510 +1 870
6250

Measurements in mm.

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
1- Tube Ø139x5 (S235JR) L=300 1 p.

2- Lifting point (S355JO) 1 p.
3- Roundbar Ø20 (S235JR) L=350 1 p.
4- Tube Ø8 (B500S) 2 p.
1- Tube Ø139x5 (S235JR) L=300 1 p.

2- Guide (S355JO) 1 p.

X6m
BASE BALLAST -
Ner. Diameter Lenght Quantity

1 12 See detail 4
2 8 See detail 84
3 12 6170 20
4 12 1420 64
Quality of the steel: B500S

Measurements in mm.

-
GENERAL ERECTION INSTRUCTIONS -
1 Erections and dismantling operations shall be carried out by qualified personnel complying with
applicable regulations related to their function and the location where said operations are being
carried out.
2 The user must make sure that erection setup complies with applicable Regulations and Standards.
This is to say:
- Crane position must keep safety distances to other cranes or buildings.
- Foundations, supports and tracks erected in accordance with the loads transmitted by the
crane setup and required alignment and levelling tolerances.
- Power supply and earth connections in accordance with current regulations and crane
electrical data.
- Accessibility and provision of enough space to carry out erection activities in a safe
manner.
3 Keep operation sequences, safety warnings and instructions given in this manual.
4 Use approved personal protection equipment required for the job.
5 If a mobile crane is used for erection make sure it is adequate for handling the heaviest part
taking into account its dimensions and the position of the mobile crane on site.
6 Hoisting accessories used for erection must be duly approved for the loads to be handled. Load
slinging and part handling must be done with care (see document “tackle and slings” in chapter
Crane Operation of this manual)
WARNING
SPECIAL ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN TO AVOID SIDE PULLING FROM PARTS TO

BE ERECTED OR ALREADY INSTALLED.
¡ SIDE PULLING IS TOTALLY FORBIDDEN !
WRONG ! RIGHT

X 4,5 m ( 2,0 m)
ASSEMBLING THE BASE -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 FREESTANDING BASE ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE
3 TRAVELLING BASE ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE.
4 POSITIONING THE BASE BALLAST
1 DESCRIPTION
- The base consists of a girder and two articulated arms that open to form an "X".
The arms are secured to the girder using threaded rods.
- The base has four different surfaces prepared for bolting different anchors according to the different types
of towers that may be used.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Posición pies Posición pies
Fig. 3
para torre 1,2 m para torre 1,6 m
Posición pies
Ver documento Ver documento
para torre 2,0 m
MTJ060.0003 MTJ060.0051

- Lift the base using a mobile crane and place it above the specially designed support platforms, sup-
port the base using ancillary supports. (Fig. 4)
Do not remove the transport attachments until the base is supported to avoid accidents due to
the arms opening.
During handling of the base, survey the arms closely to avoid possible accidents due to
sudden opening.
Fig. 4

X 4,5 m ( 2,0 m)
- Open the arms simultaneously and place the rods (A) to lock the arms in place. (Fig. 5)
- Fit the platform (B) (Fig. 5).
B C
A E
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
- Fit the four horizontal tubing bars Ø "C" and fix them at both ends. (Fig. 6)
It is essential to fit the four tubing bars Ø "C".
- Fit the platform "E" and access ladders "F". (Fig. 6)
- Fit the chosen support system and secure it to the base bolts. (Fig. 7)
Support screw jack Support plate Negative ballast plate

(Optional) (Optional)
F
0.8 m 0.4 m 0.23 m
Fig. 7

X 4,5 m ( 2,0 m)
- Using the mobile crane, lift the assembly and remove the auxiliaries supports, position the base on the
support platforms (Fig. 6) and level it using the screws (F) (Fig. 8).
Leveling is done with respect to A base machined surfaces or with respect to the uprights of
the foot support B surfaces.
F F
B A
minimum
175 mm
65 mm
maxi-
mum
Fig. 8
- Place the crane base on the ground. See instructions in the section "ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION".
Do not remove the transport attachments until the base is supported to avoid accidents due to
the arms opening.
During handling of the base, survey the arms closely to avoid possible accidents due to
sudden opening.
- Suspend the base using the mobile crane and support it using auxiliary supports. (Fig. 9)
Open the arms simultaneously and place the rods (A) to lock the arms in place. (Fig. 9)
Fit the platform (B). (Fig. 10)
Position the mobile mechanisms, the motors (M) must be located on the long arm of the base and
inside the rails, and secure them to the base. (Fig. 10)
M
Trasvelling B
A
Fig. 8 Fig. 9

X 4,5 m ( 2,0 m)
- Support the wheels on the rails and secure them using the anchor flanges (G). (Fig. 11)
- Fit the two tube Ø "C" bars, securing them only on one end. (Fig. 11)
- Fit the horizontal IPE "D" bars, bolting them on both ends. (Fig. 11)
- Bolt the tube Ø "C" bars. (Fig. 11)
The IPE "D" bars must absolutely be at 100º to the rail.
- Fit the platform "E" and the stairs "F". (Fig. 11)
- Pace the crane base on the ground. See the instructions in the section "ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION"
C
G
F
E
Fig. 11

- The ballast blocks of the base measure 4.5 x 1.0 x 0.5 m and weight 5400 kg each.
- These are fitted supported by the cross beams.
- The first block is secured to the base using the elements "A" (Fig. 12).
- The remaining blocks fit into place over each other using the anchors B.

X 4,5 m ( 2,0 m)
Fig. 12
- The ballast blocks cross over one another starting from a height allowing access to the tower.
BASE BASE
- FREESTANDING - MOBILE
Fig. 13

X5
ASSEMBLING THE BASE
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
1 DESCRIPTION
- The base consists of a girder and two articulated arms that open to form an "X". The arms are secured
to the girder using threaded rods.
- The base has four different surfaces prepared for bolting different anchors according to the different types
of towers that may be used.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Anchor and access positions Anchor and access positions
for tower 1.6 m for tower 2.0 m
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Anchor and access positions Anchor and access positions
for tower 2.5 m for tower 2.15 m

X5
ASSEMBLING THE BASE

- Lift the base using a mobile crane and place it above the specially designed support platforms, posi-
tion the support screw jacks above the platforms. (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5
- Remove the transport attachments, using the mobile crane, open the articulated arms and secure
them using the rods "A" (Fig. 6).
Be careful during manipulation with cross base arms opening to avoid any accident.
- Place the platform "B" on the rods "A".

- Bolt the landing "C" to the platform "B".
- Bolt the stairs "D" to the platform "B".
- Align the access assembly with those of the first tower section.
Fig. 6

X5
ASSEMBLING THE BASE
- Level the base using the bolts of the support screw jacks. (Fig. 7)
Leveling is done with respect to A base machined surfaces or with respect to the uprights of
the foot support B surfaces.
250 mm
máximo
B A
mínimo
90 mm
Fig. 7

- Place the mobile assemblies (Fig. 8) on the rails, place supports to stop them from moving and join
them using the corresponding beams (Fig.9).
The beams are always perpendicular to the rails.
Do not remove the supports until the entire base is assembled.
Identification of joined elements

X Z Y Z
Motor weight ...............1390 kg
Free weight................. 1240 kg
Beam weight .................980 kg
Fig. 8 Fig. 9

X5
ASSEMBLING THE BASE
- Suspend the base using the mobile crane, remove the transport attachments, open the articulated
arms and secure them using the rods "A" (Fig. 10).
Once the base is fitted, secure it to the beams, always fitting the complete diagonal "E" to the
motorised mobile units (Fig. 11).
During handling of the base, survey the arms closely to avoid possible accidents due to sudden opening.
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
- Place the platform "B" on the rods "A" (Fig. 12).

Bolt the landing "C" to the platform "B".
Bolt the stairs "D" to the platform "B".
Align the access assembly with those of the first tower section.
Fig. 12

- The ballast blocks of the base measure 6.25 x 1.5 x 0.3 m and weight 6750 kg each.
- These are fitted supported by the cross beams.
- The first block is secured to the base using the elements "A" (Fig. 13).
- The remaining blocks fit into place over each other using the anchors B.

X5
ASSEMBLING THE BASE
Fig. 13
FITTING THE BALLAST BLOCKS
FIXED BASE MOBILE BASE
Fig. 14

2,0 (L)
MAST SECTION ASSEMBLY -
DURING ALL THE ERECTION PROCESS, WATCH ALL THE POSSIBLE MOVEMENTS OF THE
LOADS TO AVOID ACCIDENTS.
0 CONTENT
1 ERECTION SECUENCE
2 POSSIBLE SECTION COMBINATIONS
3 GENERAL DIMENSIONS
1 ERECTION SECUENCE
- Put a panel on some balanced supports and assembly another one by pins, forming a right angle with
the first one (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
- Repeat the process to complete two " L".

2,0 (L)
- Following the instructions of fig. 2, turn one of the "L" for its later erection.
1º- To proceed to the section preparation putting it in a way which forms a triangle on the floor.
Fix slings through panel lattice window.
2º- Hang the "L" with cables of the same leng and taking as mooring points the corner beams, as it
indicates in figure 2.
3º- Finish the erection of the section assembly the two "L" by pins.
1 2
MOORING
MOORING
POINTS
POINTS
Fig. 2
4º- Mount the diagonal on which support the platform.
5º- Assemble the guard-rails and platforms. Fig 3.
DETAILS A
FIXING THE PROTECTION
Fig. 3

2,0 (L)
2 POSSIBLE SECTION COMBINATIONS
EFORE JOINING TWO TOWER SECTIONS MAKE SURE THE CONTACT SURFACES OF THE
B
UPRIGHTS AND THE HOUSING HOLES FOR THE PINS ARE CLEAN AND FREE OF PAINT
RESIDUE.
BEFORE JOINING TWO TOWER SECTIONS APPLYING GREASE TO THE HOUSING HOLES OF
THE PINS AND THE CONTACT SURFACES OF THE UPRIGHTS IS RECOMMENDED.
S22
S22
S23
TS24
TS24
TS24
S24
TS25
S25
See pins and bolts in the following page.

2,0 (L)
3 GENERAL DIMENSIONS
1 2 3 4 5
Ø L Q Ø L Q Ø L Q Ø L Q Ø L Q
S22 55 160 8 16 120 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 20 70 24
S23 55 160 8 16 120 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 20 70 24
S24 60 160 8 16 160 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 30 80 24
S25 60 160 8 16 160 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 30 80 24
TS24 55 160 8 16 120 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 30 80 24
TS25 60 160 8 16 160 4 20 35 2 20 70 2 30 80 24
"S" "TS"
DETAILS MAST
SECTIONS
ASSEMBLY
H A1 A2 LxG D1 D2
S22 5500 2000 1794 150x18 55 55

S23 5500 2000 1794 180x18 55 55
S24 5500 2000 1794 200x20 60 60
S25 5500 2000 1794 200X26 60 60
TS24 5500 2000 1794 200x20 55 60
TS25 5500 2000 1794 200x26 60 60

21LC290
ASSEMBLY OF THE ROTATING PART AND APEX SM21-K2/S25
0 CONTENTS
1 SM21-K2/S25 PREPARATION
2 PREPARING THE APEX
3 ASSEMBLY OF APEX AND CROWN SUPPORT
4 ASSEMBLING THE CAB PLATFORM
1 SM21-K2/S25 PREPARATION
See weights and dimensions of parts in the "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS" chapter.
- The SM21-K2/S25 comprises the lower tower peak, crown and upper tower peak, rotating mechanisms
and rotation limiter.
Optionally, it may include a rotating collector instead of a rotation limiter.
Optionally, it may include an area limiter
The SM21-K2/S25 assembly arrives from the factory:
- With the lower platform mounted on the lower tower peak.
- With the slewing mechanisms and electrical connections ready to use.
- If the area limiter option is included, it comes assembled and with its electrical connections ready
to use.
- If the collection option is included, it comes disassembled.
Option
Rotating mechanisms Rotating collector
Rotation limiter
Upper
tower peak Option
Area limiter
Crown
Lower
tower peak
Fig. 1
1 / 5 Rev: A 13/22 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approval 3 / 060 / 57

21LC290
Preparing the rotating part on the ground.
- If it includes the collector option, set this collector in position.

Insert axle "1" in its housing, secure post "2" with the screws "3" and place the pinion "4".
4
D
Fig. 2
- Make sure that platform "D" accessing the lower tower peak is in position.
TESTS
- To test the screws or change the rotating mechanism, see the "Tightening the screws of the rotating
mechanism" document in the "MAINTENANCE" chapter.
- To test the crown screws, see the "Tightening the crown screws" document in the "MAINTENANCE"
chapter.
- To lubricate the crown, see the "Lubricating instructions (rotating crown)" document in the "MAINTENANCE"
chapter.
- To lubricate the rotating mechanism, see the "Lubricating instructions (rotating mechanism)" document
in the "MAINTENANCE" chapter.
- To lubricate the hoisting mechanism see the "Lubricating instructions (hoisting mechanism)" document
in the "MAINTENANCE" chapter.
2 PREPARING THE APEX

- Vertically position the apex.
- The apex arrives from the factory with the platforms installed.
- Check that the support frame of cab "A" is in position and secured with its pins (Fig. 3).

21LC290
Ø25
120
Fig. 3
3 ASSEMBLY OF APEX AND CROWN SUPPORT

USE A SAFETY HARNESS DURING ASSEMBLY / DISMANTLING OPERATIONS TO PREVENT
ACCIDENTS.
- Raise with a truck crane and join to the rotating part. See Fig.4.
Respect the position of the apex in relation to the tower peak.
Monitor the movements of the apex so that it does not knock the slewing motors.
- Position the connecting pins.
- Complete the accesses by positioning the stepladder (A) between the rotating part and apex.
Jib
M52
Ø75
36
3
Fig. 4

21LC290
- Use the truck crane to raise the assembly and attach it to the last tower section. See Fig. 4
Join the lower tower peak to the last tower section.
- Once assembled, place into position the access ladder of the last tower section to the tower peak.
- Once assembled, make the connections indicated in the "ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY" document in the
"ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION" chapter.
4 ASSEMBLING THE CAB PLATFORM
Although the cab platform with the cab can be assembled on the ground, this unbalances the assembly
so it is better to assemble it off the ground, after attaching the lower tower peak to the last tower section.
The platform assembly arrives with the cab and cabinet mounted and wired to each other.
Preparing the cab platform on the ground

- Pin the brackets "B" to the cab platform "A" (Fig. 5).
Place the railings "C" and "D" in position.
Fig. 5
- Suspend using the truck crane and secure to the upper tower peak with its pins (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6

21LC290
- Place the enclosure railings "A" between the apex and cab platform (Fig. 7).
- Secure the access ladder to jib "B" and protector "C".
C A
Fig. 7

21LC290
PINT IDENTIFICATION -
2 1 1 2
FM215 C AM282A
M
5 4 3
2 3 4 5
1
5
Pin

1 Ø=125 L=285

Cotter Pin
2 a=170 b=70 c=6
Bolt
3 d=M24 L=360 DIN931
Nut
4 Ø=M24 DIN985
Washer
5 D=Ø44 d=Ø25 DIN6916

COUNTERJIB SECTIONS; 21LC
PIN IDENTIFICATION -
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF JIB SECTIONS
2 1
BM215 FM215 FM218
3 3
1 3215P1005 2 3205-10142
PSI6x70x170 PSI6x70x170
093124300260088
3301P198.03
ARP25D6916
0985243008
1 /2 Rev: B 10/42 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 3 / 060 / 63

COUNTERJIB SECTIONS; 21LC
PIN IDENTIFICATION -
Designation Reference Dimension
Pin
3205P1005 ø 125 L=220
3205-10142 ø 111 L=220
Cotter pin
PSI6*70*170 d= 6 b= 70 a= 170
Bolt
093124300260088 M= 24 L= 260 DIN0931
Washer
ARP25D6916 ø 25 DIN6916
3301P198.03 D= 45 d= 25 L= 20
Nut
0985243008 M=24 DIN0985

21LC
COUNTER-JIB ASSEMBLY (Preparations) -
0 CONTENTS
1 PREPARING FM215
2 SUSPENDING SECTION FM215
3 PREPARING BM215A
1 PREPARING FM215
The first counter-jib section is attached to the cat-head.
- It arrives from the factory with footwalk "A" assembled (Fig. 1).
- Check that the counter-jib attachment pin "1" is in position.
- Prepare the counter-jib attachment screws "2" and secure them to the structure to prevent it from
falling when the section is hoisted for assembly.
See document "COUNTER-JIB SECTIONS: FASTENER PLACEMENT" to identify the pins.
Fig. 1 A
3 SUSPENDING SECTION FM215

- The section have welded suspension lugs.
- The counter-jib sections can either be raised individually, always respecting the assembly sequence.
- The section must be raised at an angle to facilitate their assembly; firstly secure them to their upper part
and then lower them to screw them to their lower part.
- The position of the suspended sections for assembly must be at an angle of approximately 5º, see fig.
2.
Use slings of approximately 5 metres in length and sufficiently resistant for the load.
The truck crane must have slings with a minimum length of 3 m, prepared for the assembly load.
When choosing the slings, see the "Slings and tackles" section in the "CRANE USE" chapter.
1/4 Rev: A 13/21 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approval 3 / 060 / 65

21LC
aprox. 5º
Fig. 2
4 PREPARING BM215A
- Last counter-jib section.
- It arrives from the factory with the platforms installed and the hoisting mechanism with the hoist cable
wound around the drum.
Fig. 3
- Place the counter-jib section on supports on the ground.

- Secure the footwalks "A" to the section with pins "1" and bring them down to the working position (Fig.
4).
The footwalks can be kept vertical by pin "2" and rod "3"
- Place the railings "B" on the footwalks and attach them using the pins "4".

21LC
Ø25
1
90
Ø15
2
110
3
Fig. 4
SLINGS
- The section comes with welded suspension lugs.
- The position of the slings is shown in Fig. 6.
4 slings prepared for suspending the assembly are supplied with the section (Fig. 5).
Sling 3 includes a tightener for adjusting its length and for suspending the assembly completely balanced.
The truck crane must provide slings with a minimum length of 3 m, prepared for the assembly load.

For sling selections, see the "Slings and accessories" section of the "USING THE CRANE" chapter.
Tiro 6,5 t
L = 5,3 m
Tiro 6,5 t
L = 2,9 m
Tiro 10,5 t
L = 2,9 m (min. 2,6 m, max. 3,2 m)
Tiro 10,5 t
L = 5,2 m
Fig. 5

21LC
M
m
in
.3
.3
n
Mi
m
Max. Max.
60º 60º
Fig. 6

21 LC
JIB ASSEMBLY (Preparation)
0 CONTENTS
1 1st JIB SECTION
2 JIB PASSAGEWAYS
3 TROLLEY MECHANISM
4 JIB SHEAVES
5 JIB END
6 DISTANCE SIGNS
7 AUXILIARY CABLE REEVING
1 1st JIB SECTION

- In the LC2100 family’s modular system, the first jib section varies depending on the model of crane (see
Technical Sheets).
- This first section may be jib model AM299, AM298, AM282A, AM272A or AM262A, all of which incorporate
various sub-assemblies needed for crane operation.
A Jib foot pulley support

B Rear hook support
C Reeving change ramp catch
D Automatic tensioning system
E Maximum load limiter
Fig. 1
- The automatic tensioning system “D” and maximum load limiter “E” are already in position when the unit
leaves the factory.
- The remaining items are installed as follows:

21 LC
"CASE I" -FITTING THE 1º JIB SECTION WITHOUT EITHER TROLLEY OR HOOK
- Support the 1º jib section on trestles (there may be two jib sections of the same height). Fasten the 1º
jib section to the trestle at "A" to prevent it tipping over. (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
- Put the jib foot pulley support into position, with the start of the 1º jib section stopped up against cross
tie "B".
Use the appropriate flanges for fixing, depending on the jib section. (Fig. 3), the jib section AM299 doesn´t
need clamps.
Fig. 3

21 LC
- Fix the reeving change ramp catch in position using screws “C”. (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4
- Hang the rear hook support by bolting it to the jib foot pulley support at holes “D”. Turn the support about
pin “D” and bolt together at holes “E”. (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5

21 LC
"CASE II" -FITTING THE 1º JIB SECTION WITH BACK TROLLEY AND HOOK-
- Support the 1º jib section on trestles (there may be two jib sections of the same height). Fasten the 1º
jib section to the trestle at "A" to prevent it tipping over. (Fig. 6)
Fig. 6
- To realise the union of trolleys and back hooks and auxiliary cable sending back according to is indicated
in point 7 of this instruction.
- Assembly the back trolley and hook on the jib, to take them until the support and to hold them to avoid
that they move.
Place the protections of hook « PG» in its position and to fix it with circlip, to determine the protections
by means of the connecting rod « B» screwing it. (Fig 7).
Fig. 7

21 LC
- Put the jib foot pulley support into position, with the start of the 1st jib section stopped up against cross
tie “B”. Use the appropriate flanges for fixing, depending on the jib section. (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8
- Fix the reeving change ramp catch in position using screws “C”. (Fig. 9).
Fig. 9

21 LC
- Hang the rear hook support by bolting it to the jib foot pulley support at holes “D”. Turn the support about
pin “D” and bolt together at holes “E”. (Fig. 10).
Fig. 10
- Take the trolley and rear hook to the start of the jib. Hang the trolley by its front wheels and swing it on
the rear ones so it can be positioned with the hook housed in the support and the trolley supported on
the back wheels.
The trolley engagement catch “GE” must be lifted and resting on the catch ramp “RG”.
Fix the trolley and hook assembly to the hook support. (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11

21 LC
2 JIB PASSAGEWAYS
- All jib sections have passageways to gain access to the end of the jib. Check that they are correctly fitted.
(Fig. 12).
Fig. 12
- Passage through the automatic tensioning system zone means moving on the outside of the jib. This
involves removing protection chain “A” and fastening the safety harness to fixing bar “B” before moving
outside. (Fig. 13).
Fig. 13
SAFETY HARNESS MUST BE USED TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS
- Make sure protection chains “A” are in position after passing through the automatic tensioning
system.

21 LC
3 TROLLEY MECHANISM
- The trolley mechanism sits on the jib and is fixed
using screws “A”.
- It is fitted on different jib sections depending on

the model of crane. (Fig. 14).
See the document entitled “TROLLEY CABLE

REEVING” for trolley mechanism position.
Fig. 14
4 JIB SHEAVES
- For different jib lengths and depending on crane
model, sheaves are fitted to the jib for reeving the
trolley cable. (Fig. 15).
See the document entitled “TROLLEY CABLE

REEVING” for the number and position of
sheaves.
Fig. 15
5 JIB END
- Jib end module JE211, which is common to all the
LC2100 family, incorporates sheaves for reeving
the trolley cables and the hoisting cable rotating
point.
- It is advisable to fit it to the last jib section (depending

on model and length of jib chosen) before erecting
the jib.
See the document entitled “JIB ERECTION”

(Boltwork) for details of the bolts, bushes and pins
needed for different assembly tasks.
Fig. 16

21 LC
6 DISTANCE SIGNS
- The unit may be fitted with signs showing the distance
to the jib axis.
See the document entitled “JIB ERECTION”

(Distance signs) for the number and position of
signs.
Fig. 17
7 DISTANCE SIGNS
- It is advisable to carry out a preliminary reeving with an auxiliary cable to make reeving the hoisting cable
easier.
Rear trolley and hook. (Fig. 18)

- The rear trolley and hook have fixings for fitting to the jib.
- Fit the hook on supports, locate the rear trolley on the hook, screw it down at “A” and fix it with pieces at
“B”.
Fig. 18

21 LC
The trolley and hook must be fixed to the supports during these operations to prevent them falling.
- Carry out the auxiliary reeving.
Front trolley and hook. (Fig. 19)
- The front trolley and hook have fixings for fitting to the jib.
Fig. 19
- Support the trolley on trestles.
- Hang the hook and fix it by shifting the fixing pin from position “2” to position “1”.
- Carry out the auxiliary reeving.
The trolley and hook must be fixed to the supports during these operations to prevent them falling.

1 / 5
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF JIB SECTIONS
Rev: A
1 2 3 3 7 10 13 6
10/02
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220 AM244 JE211
15 16 16 17 17 17 17 17
8 11 14
JE211 JE211 JE211
17 17 17
4 6
12
JE211 AM244 JE211
17 17 17
ASSEMBLY / DISMANTLING
9 7

JIB SECTIONS; PIN IDENTIFICATION
AM244 JE211
17 17
Vº Bº
5 6
AM244 JE211
17 17
-
21LC290
060 0292 IB
3 / 060 / 79
-
JIB SECTIONS; PIN IDENTIFICATION 21LC290
3205P1001 3205P1693
1 PSI6x70x170 2 PSI6x70x170 3 3205P994
PSI6x70x170
10250160.14
4 3205P949
5 6 10250060.14
3205P994 PSA5x60
PSA5x60 3205P947 PSI4x25x85
3205P996
7 8 9
10250160.14 3205P946
3205P996 3205P950 PSI5x40x105
PSI5x40x105 PSA5x60
PSI4x25x85

-
10250120.14
10 11 12 3205P998
3205P998 3205P951
PSA5x60 3205P945
PSI4x25x85
13 14 10250120.14 15
3205P999 3205P1006
3205P1711 PSA5x60
093124300140088
3301P198.03
ARP25D6916
0985243008
16 17
093124300100088 093120250090088
ARP25D6916 ARP21D6916
0985243008 0985202508

-
Denominación Nº de Plano Dimensiones
Pin
3205P1001 ø 111 L=200
3205P1693 ø 101 L=172
3205P994 ø 81 L=170
3205P996 ø 71 L=157
3205P998 ø 56 L=117
3205P999 ø 46 L=97
Pin
10250160.14 ø 25 L=160
10250120.14 ø 25 L=120
10250060.14 ø 25 L=60
Bushing
3205P947 D= 100 d= 82 L= 16
3205P950 D= 100 d= 26 L= 54
3205P945 D= 82 d= 57 L= 25
3205P1711 D= 82 d= 47 L= 40
3205P949 D= 82 d= 26 L= 55
3205P951 D= 57 d= 26 L= 34
3205P1006 D= 47 d= 26 L= 26
Cotter pin
PSI6*70*170 d= 6 b= 70 a= 170
PSI5*40*105 d= 5 b= 40 a= 105
PSI4*25*85 d= 4 b= 25 a= 85
PSA5*60 d= 5 a= 60

-
Denominación Nº de Plano Dimensiones
Bolt
093124300140088 M= 24 L= 140 DIN0931
093124300100088 M= 24 L= 100 DIN0931
093120250090088 M= 20 L= 90 DIN0931
Washer
ARP21D6916 ø 21 DIN6916
ARP25D6916 ø 25 DIN6916
3301P198.03 D= 45 d= 25 L= 20
Nut
0985202508 M=20 DIN0985
0985243008 M=24 DIN0985

21 LC
JIB SECTIONS; PIN IDENTIFICATION JE211
Pin Bolt
1 Ø=10 L=100 4 d=M16 L= 50 DIN931
Cotter pin Nut

2 d=5 L=60 5 Ø=M16 DIN985
Cotter pin Washer

3 Ø=3,2 6 d=Ø17 DIN0125

21 LC
RADIUS INDICATOR FLAGS
Note: Load indicator flags to be laocated on

right hand side of jib as seen from the
centre of the crane.

21LC290
JIB ASSEMBLY EFU5-50
DURING THE ERECTION AND DISMANTLING IS NECESSARY TO USE SAFETY HARNESS IN ORDER
TO AVOID ACCIDENTS.
ENSURE THAT THE TOTAL BALLAST FOR THE TRAVELLING OR FIXEND BASE (IF APPLICABLE)
IS IN PLACE BEFORE STARTING THE ERECTION OF JIB AND COUNTERJIB.
THE ASSEMBLY SEQUENCES EXPLAINED HERE BELOW SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT AVOIDING
LONG INTERUPTIONS.
3 2 1 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220 AM244 74 m
Assembly counterweight JE211
8 4 blocks (16000 kg)
3 2 1 4 5 6 7 9 10
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220 70 m

8 4 blocks (16000 kg)
3 2 1 4 5 6 7 9 10
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM244 64 m

8 4 blocks (16000 kg)
3 2 1 4 5 6 7 9
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 60 m

8 4 blocks (16000 kg)
3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM244 54 m

JE211
3 2 1 4 5 6 7
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 50 m

JE211
3 2 1 4 5 6 7
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM244 44 m

JE211
3 2 1 4 5 6
BM215 FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A 40 m

JE211
HOOK AND TROLLEY MUST ALWAYS BE MOUNTED ON THE HOME SECTION OF AM282B.
THE LAST STEP WILL BE TO POSITION THE AERIAL COUNTERWEIGHT IN ITS PLACE AT THE
BM215.
THE ERECTING ORDER OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS MUST BE FOLLOWED EXACTLY AS
DESCRIBED.

21LC290
JIB ASSEMBLY EFU5-50
COUNTERWEIGHT BLOCKS SHOULD ALWAYS BE FITTED STARTING FROM THE REAR OF THE
COUNTERJIB AND WORKING TOWARDS THE TOWER.
SSEMBLY COUNTERWEIGHT BLOCKS IN THE RIGHT ORDER. SEE QUANTITY & POSITION IN
A
"MOUNTING COUNTERWEIGHT BLOCK POSITION".
THE SEQUENCE FOR DISMANTLING IS INVERSE TO ERECTION.
DURING ASSEMBLY / DISMANTLING OPERATIONS THE SLEWING MOVEMENT TO BE USED ONLY
IN FIRST SLEWING SPEED.
THE WIND SPEED DURING THE ERECTION PROCESS SHOULD BE LOW ENOUGH AS TO ALLOW
THE SAFE HANDLING OF THE CRANE ELEMENTES, I.E. APPOX. LESS THAN 25 km/h.

EFU5-50-45
AERIAL COUNTERWEIGHT COMBINATION / POSITION 21LC290 18 t
BLOCK WEIGHT(kg)
A 4000
B 2000
C 1000
Jib (m) POSITION Weight (kg)
A A A A
74 B B C 21000
• • • • • • •
A A A A
70 B B 20000
• • • • • •
A A A A
64 B 18000
• • • • •
A A A A
60 C 17000
• • • • •
A A A
54 B 14000
• • • •
A A A
50 B 14000
• • • •
A A A
44 • • • 12000
A A
40 B 10000
• • •

21LC
COUNTERWEIGHT ERECTION
0 CONTENS
1 AERIAL COUNTERWEIGHT
2 ERECTION
1 AERIAL COUNTERWEIGHT
- The overhead counterweight is made up of 4000 kg (Fig. 1), 2000 kg (Fig. 2) and 1000 kg (Fig. 3)
blocks.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
- The number of blocks and their position on the counterjib are defined in the following sheets entitled
“COUNTERWEIGHT ERECTION. BLOCK POSITION”, and depend on the hoisting mechanism and jib
length.
2 ERECTION
Safety harness must be used during erection operations..
- Blocks must be secured at a balanced position so as to allow tilting for transportation.

Blocks must be looked at during erection operations preventing them from swinging and causing (by any
circumstances) any accident (knocking against stationary parts of the crane).
- The blocks are fitted to the counterjib using an

auto-crane, with the aid of the block lifting hook
(A). A
The hoisting hook incorporates a safety catch A1,

retained in its position by means of A2 pin.
A1 A1
Fig. 4

21LC
COUNTERWEIGHT ERECTION
- The blocks are positioned on the counterjib and rock on round part “B” until coming to a stop up against
the bottom stop “C”.
- Round part “D” must rest on the bottom stop “C”.
- Keep a check on block position to see that they are fitted correctly.
B
D
RIGHT WRONG
Fig. 5
- To move the platform " P" to a comfortable position to facilitate the positioning of the blocks and enlistment
and it uncouples of the same
Fig. 6

21 LC
COUNTERWEIGHT -
3207-10194
Block: 4000 kg
A B C

Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

21 LC
COUNTERWEIGHT -
3207-10195
Block: 2000 kg
A B C

Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

21 LC
COUNTERWEIGHT -
3207-10196
Block: 1000 kg
A B C

Measurements in mm.
ALL MESH........................................................Ø10 (B500S)

21LC290
STEEL CABLES - CHARACTERISTICS- -
LENGTHS OF THE WIRE ROPES
LENGTH (m)
L = (H + 2) x n + R + LFM + 40
L = Total rope length.

H = Height under kook.
n = Number of extension parts.
Single trolley n=2

Double trolley n=4
R = Max. working radius.
LFM = Total length of extension parts.
(FM215 = 8 m)
Maximun capacity of the winch depending on mechanism. (see technical data sheet).
CHARACTERISTICS
Rope diameter 18 mm
Rope grade 1960 N/mm²
Wire rope core Steel core
Weight * 147 kg/100 m
35 (W) x 7 Minimun m breaking force * 229,0 kN
Type Non-rotating cable
Type of lay Lang (zZ)
Protection Galvanised
Lubrication With grease
(According to EN 12385) (*) It may change subject to the manufacturer of the cable.
For use and maintenance of ropes see "INSTRUCTIONS FOR WIRE ROPES" in chapter 6 (Maintenance)
of this manual.

21LC290
LENGTHS OF THE TROLLEY ROPES

Jib lengths
(m) 74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
Side
Tower 110 110 100 100 90 90 80 80
Jib-end 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60
Tumbckle 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(Cable lengths in meters)
CHARACTERISTICS
Rope diameter 8 mm
Weight * 25,6 kg/100 m
Minimun m breaking force * 44,7 kN
6 x 19M Type No Non-rotating cable
Type of lay Right regular lay (sZ)
(According to
EN 12385) (*) It may change subject to the manufacturer of the cable.
of this manual.
LENGTHS OF AUXILIARY TROLLEYS ROPES
Jib lengths (m) 74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
Cable lengths (m) 153 145 133 - - - - -
CHARACTERISTICS
Rope diameter 5 mm
Wire rope core Fiber core
6 x 19 Minimun m breaking force* 13,6 kN
Type No Non-rotating cable
(According to EN Lubrication With grease
12385)
(*) It may change subject to the manufacturer of the cable.
of this manual.

21LC290
SAFETY CABLE
Jib lengths (m) 74 70 64 60 54 50 44 40
Cable lengths (m) 76 72 66 62 56 52 46 42
CHARACTERISTICS
Rope diameter 10 mm
Wire rope core Fiber core
6 x 19 Minimun m breaking force* 54,4 kN
Type No Non-rotating cable
(According to EN Lubrication Without grease
12385)
(*) It may change subject to the manufacturer of the cable.
of this manual.
AUXILIAR JIB ROPE
LENGTH (m)
L = (H +4) x 2
L = Total rope length

L H = Height under hook
H Drum capacity: 160 m (in 8 layers)
CHARACTERISTICS
Rope diameter 8 mm
Weight 26,2 kg/100 m (*)
Minimun m breaking force 44,7 kN (*)
Type Non-rotating cable
6 x 36
(According to EN 12385)
(*) It may change subject to the manufacturer of the cable
of this manual.

21LC290
TROLLEY CABLES REEVING -
The number and disposition of the pulleys depend on the length of the jib and counterjib.

21LC
TROLLEY CABLE FITTING SEQUENCE -

FOR RIGGING OPERATIONS WEARING SAFETY HARNESS IS COMPLULSORY
0 CONTENTS
1 CABLE REEVING
2 RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE OF ASSEMBLY
3 TURNBUCKLE OPERATION
4 TROLLEY CABLE FAIL URESAFETY DEVICE
5 RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE OF DISMANTLING
1 CABLE REEVING
Poleas de pluma
Mecanismo de carro
Tambor
Final de pluma
Tensor
Carro delantero
Poleas
Carro trasero
pie de pluma
2 RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE OF WORKING
or advice on handling cables, see the relevant specifications in the chapter

F
“MAINTENANCE” of the document entitled “Steel cables”.

21LC
- The crane leaves the factory with the trolley cables clamped and fully or partially wound on the drum.
- Fit the front trolley at the start of the second jib section.
C B
Fig. 1
- Take the tip of the cable and pass it through the trolley reeving sheaves, then fix the end to the front
trolley using the cable terminal at point “B” (Fig. 1). See the document entitled “Trolley cable reeving” for
sheave position.
- Fasten the trolley to the jib cross member.
Operate the trolley mechanism, moving the trolley forward to take up the slack in the cable without putting
it under too much tension.
IN OPERATION IDLE
Fig. 2

21LC
- Fit the moving tensioner sheaves to a fixed point (A) to prepare for reeving.
- Bring the leaving pawels(G) in working position to hold the trolley cable whinch, removing pin (D)
- Reeve the ratchet cable.
Tighten the rope with the open-end ratchet wrench (L), place the wrench between the ratchet drum axle
and the flange teeth, turn the ratchet drum. Repeat the operation until the rope is taut but not too tight
(Fig 2).
- Unwind the rear trolley cable, pass it through the trolley reeving sheaves and fix it to the end of the trolley
at point “C” (Fig. 1). See the document entitled “Trolley cable reeving” for sheave position.
- Release the moving sheave and fit the protections preventing the cable coming off the sheave.
The trolley cable rear reeving will be slack.
- Repeat the rope-tightening operation with the open-end ratchet wrench (L) until the ratchet cable reeving
moving sheave is suspended in the air.
- Release the trolley from the jib cross member.
Initial tensioning of the trolley cable will be done by hoisting a load after cable rigging during crane start
up.
After tensioning, pawl (G) must be brought to rest position and blocked by pin (D) (Fig. 2).
The retaining bolt (R) of the rope-break safety device should be removed from the trolley once the
tightening has been completed to activate the system. See Point 4.
3 TURNBUCKLE OPERATION
The trolley rope turnbuckle is an system which provides tension to the trolley rope through the hoisting rope
when the crane lifts a load.
The system consists of two adjustable springs which are adjusted at the factory and should not be readjusted
without good reason.
Trolley cable tensioning by load hoisting must only be done if necessary, as a general rule during crane start
up and maintenance operations.
After tensioning, pawl (G) must be brought to rest position and blocked by pin (D) (Fig. 4).
Leaving pawls (G) in working position can result into trolley cable over-tensioning, which may lead to
cable failure
Fig. 3

21LC
1 Travel adjustment spring.

Its function is to limit the system shift to one tooth of the ratchet drum in each hoist operation until the trolley
rope reaches its final tension.
Its adjustment has an influence on the final tension of the trolley rope but it should not be adjusted to
that end.
L1 = 251 mm
65 mm
Fig. 4
If L1 is increased, the trolley rope tension increases.
If L1 is decreased, the travel is insufficient to pass a tooth of the ratchet drum .
2 Tension-regulating spring in trolley rope.

Its function is to limit the tension of the trolley rope.
When this tension is reached in the rope, this spring begins to compress, preventing it from passing a tooth in
the ratchet drum.
L2 = 385 mm (Tambor ø140)

L2 = 350 mm (Tambor ø193)
Tambor ø140
Tambor ø193
Fig. 5
If L2 is increased there is less tension in the trolley rope.
If L2 is decreased there is more tension in the trolley rope.

21LC
4 TROLLEY CABLE FAIL URESAFETY DEVICE
- The trolley has a built-in safety system to block the trolley in case the rope breaks.
- The system leaves the factory prepared and retained in this position by the bolt (R).
- It comprises a series of rods and a spring connected to the trolley ropes, kept in this working position by
the tension of these parts.
ASSEMBLY
NORMAL OPERATION FAILED CABLE
Fig. 6
- The bolt should be removed (R) and placed in its housing in order to activate the system, once the reeving
and tightening of the ropes has been carried out.
- If the rope breaks, the spring will close displacing the stop (T), which collides with the latticing of the jib,
causing the trolley to stop.
If the rope-break safety device has operated, the trolley and jib structure should be checked and the
necessary elements repaired or replaced before the crane is restarted.

21LC
5 RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE OF DISMANTLING
BEFORE DISMANTLING THE TROLLEY ROPE IT IS NECESSARY TO DISMANTLE THE HOISTING

CABLE.
The tension on the trolley rope should be released before it can be safely dismantled.
- Block the trolley rope-break safety device by reinstalling the retaining bolt (R) in the rod.
- Use the open-end ratchet wrench (L), applying tension to the rope to remove the ratchet drum retaining
pawls (H).
Turn the wrench in the reverse direction, releasing rope from the ratchet drum.
Reinstall the pawls retaining the ratchet drum.
Repeat the operation until the rope is slack.
- Set the hoisting blocks at point (A) and release the cable from the trolley terminals.
Rewind the rope on the trolley mechanism drum for transport.
Fig. 7

21LC
HOISTING CABLE REEVING -
Hoisting cable run.

21LC
For advice on handling cables, see the relevant specifications in the chapter "MAINTENANCE" of the
document entitled "Steel cables".
The crane leaves the factory with the hoisting cable wound on the drum.
RECOMMENDED FITTING SEQUENCE

- Pay off cable from the hoisting drum at the mechanism’s minimum speed and pass the cable end inside
the counterjib and the jib as far as sheave "1" in the automatic tensioning system. (Fig. 1).
- Take the cable to sheave "2" at the foot of the jib under roller (A), and reeve with the aid of the auxiliary
cable that joins sheaves "3" of the rear trolley and hook. (Fig.1).
- Move the front trolley and hook to the start of the jib, and reeve with the aid of an auxiliary cable that
passes through sheaves "4", "5" and "7" of the front trolley and hook. (Fig.1).
- Pass through a length of about 5m of hoisting cable and fit the cable terminal «6» at the end.
- Fasten the hoisting cable to the front trolley. (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1

21LC
- By moving the trolley, take the end of the hoisting cable to the tip of the jib and fix cable terminal "6" at
the end of the jib at the rotatating point. (Fig. 2).
- Free the hoisting cable from the trolley.
Fig. 2
- Tension the hoisting cable and release the front trolley and hook fixing by shifting the bolt joining them
from position "1" to position "2". (Fig. 3).
- Release the joint connecting the rear trolley and rear hook.
Free the screwed joint between the trolley and hook, then shift the drawbolts joining them from position
"1" to position "2". (Fig. 3).
- Move several trolley and hoisting movements to check for correct cable positioning and rotary movement
of the terminal.
Fig. 3

21LC
RECOMMENDED DISMANTLING SEQUENCE

- Put the crane in a single reeving situation.
- Tie the rear hook to the hook mounting at the foot of the jib, and fix the hook to the trolley.
- Take the front trolley to a point approximately 5m from the end of the jib, taking in hoisting cable until the
hook can be fastened to the trolley by shifting the retaining bolt from position "1" to position "2". Fix the
dead stretch of the hoisting cable to the trolley and move the trolley forward. The hoisting cable slackens
off and the cable terminal can be released from the end of the jib. (Fig. 4).
- Move the trolley back, and at the same time wind the excess cable onto the hoisting drum. Free the trol-
ley cable and withdraw the cable terminal. Wind all the cable onto the hoisting drum.
Fig. 4
A safety harness must be worn during fitting and dismantling work involving hoisting cable reeving.

21LC290
AUXILIARY TROLLEY CABLES REEVING -
Disposition of auxiliary trolley pulley cables anti-sag.
auxiliary trolley
trolley
hoisting

21LC
ANTICATENARY TROLLEY ROPE ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE -
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2 ASSEMBLY ON JIB
3 REEVING EXECUTION

ALL WORK ON UPPER STRUCTURE OF CRANE TO BE CARRIED OUT USING SAFETY HARNESS
AND WITH PERSONNEL EXCLUSION AREA UNDER CRANE DURING WORK.
- The assembly of the system can be carried out at the same time that the erection of the complete crane
is carried out or after the crane has been erected and in operation.
«CT» «CAT» «CD» «CAD»

«D»
«PE»
«T»
- "D" Front rope turnbuckle.

- "T" Rear rope turnbuckle.
- "CAD" Front anticatenary trolley.
- "CAT" Rear anticatenary trolley.
- "CT" Rear trolley.
- "CD" Front trolley.
- "PE" Pushing pads.
«CAD»
«D»
«T»
«CD»
«CAT»
Auxiliari trolley
«PE»
Trolley
Hoisting
«CT»
NOTE: It is important that the assembly sequence order be followed.
Fig. 1
1 / 3 Rev: A 04/09 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approvato 3 / 070 / 109

21LC
2 ASEEMBLY ON JIB
- Incorporate anticatenary trolleys during crane erection.
- Mount on jib and secure to front trolley during jib erection.
Tornillos Tornillos
«CD»
«CAT» «CAD»
Fig. 2
- To facilitate assembly and incorporation to the crane, the trolleys are formed of two parts, which are
connected by means of bolts (Fig. 2)
3 REEVING EXECUTION
3.1 reeving toward the jib end
- Situate the "CT" housed in the rear hook support and the "CD" to approximately 20 m (65.61 ft.)from the
centre of the tower.
- Situate the "CAT" against the "CT" and the "CAD" in the centre of the jib. (Fig. 3)
«CAT»
«CT»
«CD» «CAD»
Fig. 3
- Prepare the anticatenary trolley rope by passing (Fig. 1) it through the sheaves of the inside of the jib
see document "INSTALLATION AND ERECTION" (Auxiliary trolley cables reeving).
- Pass the anticatenary rope end through the end sheaves of the jib and take this to the "D" turnbuckle in
the "CAD" (Fig. 4)
«D»
«CAD»
Fig. 4

21LC
3.2 REEVE TO THE TOWER

- Pass rope through jib foot sheaves on "CT" structure.
- Pass rope between "CAT" (Fig. 5) guide rollers, taking care that as the rope passes over the "CD" struc-
ture it does not interfere with the correct operation of the trolley rope rupture stop.
GUIDE ROLLERS
«CAT»
Fig. 5
- Secure the "T" end in the "CAD" (Fig. 6)
«T»
«CAD»
«D»
Fig. 6
- Secure the pushing pads on the anticatenary rope, in the vicinity of the jib foot. (Fig. 7 )
«PE»
«CT»
Fig. 7
3.3 ROPE TENSION

- Tension the anticatenary trolley rope through the "D" y "T" (Fig. 6) turnbuckles situated in the "CAD".
Once the reeving has been carried out, conduct several forward and reverse manoeuvres to check the correct
operation of the system.

21LC
TROLLEY CHANGE SYSTEM -
0 CONTENTS
1 SWITCH FROM 1 TO 2 TROLLIES (CHANGE FROM 2 TO 4

REEVES)
2 SWITCH FROM 2 TROLLIES TO 1 (CHANGE FROM 4 TO 2
REEVES)
3 REMOVING / REPLACING TROLLEY FOR DOUBLE REEVING
1 SWITCH FROM 1 TO 2 TROLLIES

(CHANGE FROM 2 TO 4 REEVES)
REEVING CHANGES MUST ALWAYS BE CARRIED OUT FROM A POSITION THAT ALLOWS THE
PERSON MAKING THE CHANGE TO SEE WHAT IS HAPPENING AND THEREBY PREVENT ANY
FAULT OR MALFUNCTION THAT COULD LEAD TO A HAZARDOUS SITUATION.
THE REEVING CHANGE OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO LOAD, SLING OR OTHER
LOAD SUSPENSION TACKLE ON THE HOOK.
THE CRANE’S ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INCLUDES A SAFETY SYSTEM THAT PREVENTS AN

IMPROPER MANOEUVRE DURING THE REEVING CHANGE FROM PRODUCING A HAZARDOUS
SITUATION.
ALL CRANE LIMITS MUST BE PROPERLY ADJUSTED. THIS OPERATION INVOLVES THE HOOK UP
AND CARRIAGE BACK TRAVEL LIMITS AS WELL AS THE LOAD LIMITER. SEE THE DOCUMENTS
“HOISTING LIMITER”, “CARRIAGE LIMITER” AND “LOAD LIMITER” IN THE “USE AND MAINTENAN-
CE” CHAPTER.
CT - Rear trolley PG - Hook protection

CD - Front trolley RG - Catch ramp
GT - Rear hook LPCT - Rear trolley position limiter
GD - Front hook LPCD - Front trolley position limiter
SG - Rear hook support LC4 - First load limiter
GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 1
- The crane is working with a single trolley and hook (the front ones). (SINGLE REEVING).
- The rear hook and trolley are housed at the start of the jib on the rear hook support. (SG).
- The rear trolley operates a position limiter (LPCT) that detects when it is in a position to make a reeving
change.

21LC
Fig. 2
- Take the front trolley and hook closer to the start of the jib without going beyond the hook up and trolley
back limits.
- Use the crane control to cancel the trolley back limit, and take the front trolley towards the start of the jib
until it reaches a stop against the rear trolley, operating the front trolley position limiter (LPCD) to enable
the change to continue.
ONCE THE “TROLLEY BACK” BUTTON HAS BEEN PRESSED TO EXCEED THE LIMIT, THE HOOK UP
MOVEMENT IS LOCKED UNTIL THE FRONT TROLLEY POSITION LIMITER COMES INTO OPERATION.
Fig. 3
- Use the crane control to cancel the hook up limit, and take the front hook up at slow speed until it is
housed in the rear hook and stops up against it.
ONCE THE “HOOK UP” BUTTON HAS BEEN PRESSED TO EXCEED THE LIMIT, THE TROLLEY
FORWARD MOVEMENT IS LOCKED UNTIL THE FIRST LOAD LIMITER COMES INTO OPERATION.
(LC4).

21LC
Fig. 4
- Continue the upward movement, and the hook assembly and rear trolley swings on the rear wheel, the
front hook is housed in the front trolley, and protection “PG” swings, hiding the front hook anchor and
securing the two hooks.
- As the upward movement continues, the hoisting cable comes under tension and the first load limiter
(LC4) comes into operation, thereby stopping the movement.
Fig. 5
- Move the trolley and hook assembly forward until it leaves the rear hook support.

21LC
Fig. 6
- Continue the trolley forward movement until the trolley back limit zone has been exceeded.
- Use the crane hook down control, and the rear trolley will swing so that its front wheels rest on the track
profile.
- The hitching catch (GE) will couple the two trolleys.
- Taking the trolley forward, the crane is ready to work with both trollies and both hooks hitched together.
(DOUBLE REEVING).
- Loads must be suspended from the rear hook anchor.
REMOVING THE FRONT HOOK ANCHOR PROTECTION TO HANG LOADS DURING DOUBLE-
REEVING WORKING IS PROHIBITED.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS RESTRICTION MAY LEAD TO ACCIDENT.
If it is necessary during reeving change

operations to carry out a movement that
is prohibited by the reeving change safety
system, this system may be cancelled by
operating the key switch (ID) in the hoisting
electrical cabinet.
The ID cancelling switch for the reeving

change safety system may only be used
by service personnel who are fully aware
of the effect of cancelling the safety system.
All operations carried out with the safety Fig. 7

system cancelled must be especially well
supervised to avoid creating a hazardous situation.
Once the operation connected with cancelling the safety system has been completed, the crane must
be stopped and subsequently restarted.
IF ANY IRREGULARITY IS OBSERVED DURING REEVING CHANGE OPERATIONS, ADVISE THE

MAINTENANCE SERVICES FOR THEM TO CHECK AND ADJUST AS NECESSARY.

21LC
SWITCH FROM 2 TROLLIES TO 1


SITUATION.
“HOISTING LIMITER”, “CARRIAGE LIMITER” AND “LOAD LIMITER” IN THE “USE AND MAINTENANCE”
CHAPTER.
CT - Front trolley PG - Hook protection

CD - Rear trolley RG - Catch ramp
GT - Front hook LPCT - Rear trolley position limiter
GD - Rear hook LPCD - Front trolley position limiter
GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 8
- The crane is working with two trollies and the two hooks joined. (DOUBLE REEVING).

21LC
Fig. 9
- Use the crane control to cancel the hook up limit, and at slow hoisting speed draw the hooks closer to
the trollies until the rear hook makes contact with the rear trolley.
(LC4).
Fig. 10
- Continue the upward movement, and the rear trolley swings on the rear wheel and the front hook is
housed in the front trolley.
- The hoisting cable comes under tension and the first load limiter (LC4) comes into operation, thereby
stopping the movement.

21LC
Fig. 11
- Use the crane control to cancel the trolley back limit, and take the trollies towards the start of the jib.
- The trolley coupling catch (GE) enters the ramp (RG).
Fig. 12
- Continue taking the trolley back until the reeving change position limiters (LPCT) and (LPCD) come into
operation.
ONCE THE “TROLLEY BACK” BUTTON HAS BEEN PRESSED TO EXCEED THE LIMIT, HOOK MO-
VEMENT IS LOCKED UNTIL THE LOAD POSITION LIMITERS COME INTO OPERATION.

21LC
Fig. 13
- Operate slow speed down movement and the rear trolley swings on the rear wheel until the rear hook is
housed in the rear hook support. (SG).
- The front hook anchor protection (PG) swings and frees the front and rear hook coupling.
THE TROLLEY CANNOT BE MOVED WHILE THE FRONT HOOK IS OVER THE HOOK UP LIMIT.
Fig. 14
- Continue the downward movement until the front hook is below the “hook up” hoisting limit.

21LC
Fig. 15
- Taking the trolley forward, the crane is ready to work with a single trolley and hook (the front ones).
(SINGLE REEVING).

electrical cabinet.
Fig. 16
The ID cancelling switch for the reeving change safety system may only be used by service personnel
who are fully aware of the effect of cancelling the safety system.
All operations carried out with the safety system cancelled must be especially well supervised to avoid
creating a hazardous situation.


21LC
If a crane should be left with single trolley (discarding the possibility of a 2nd trolley for double reeving), apart
from removing the trolley (see ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY) the following operations must be done:
a) Physically remove jib mounted trolley position limiters ( LPCT and LPCD ).
b) Switch off the power connection of the limiters (removing plugs in electrical cabinet or disconnecting-
terminals in junction boxes, as applicable).
c) Place jumpers in tower top electrical cabinet
43-44 AID contactor.
53-54 AID contactor .
14 ABCT contactor and 14 ALCT contactor.
13-14 ALCDE contactor.
d) Check SR trolley operation against end stops with trolley backwards.
If the 2nd trolley should be replaced in order that double reeving is available, proceed in reverse order (points
a, b and c) and check the correct operation of changing from single to double reeve trolley and viceversa.
(see points 1 and 2 in this instruction).

-
CHECKS PRIOR TO START UP
After erection is completed, having obtained permits for crane operation, the instructions described in
this section must be complied with prior to commissioning.
Following these instructions will guarantee the safety of crane operation.
1.- For travelling cranes, check crane translation limiter.

See instruction “TRANSLATION MOVEMENT LIMITER” later.
2.- Adjust hoisting limit switch.

See instruction “LIFTING STROKE LIMITER” later.
3.- Adjust trolley limit switch.

See instruction “TROLLEY LIMITER” later.
4.- Adjust slewing limit switch in cranes without slip ring.

See instruction “SLEWING LIMITER” later.
5.- Adjust load-limiting system.

See instruction “LOAD LIMITER” later.
6.- Adjust torque-limiting system.

See instruction “MOMENT LIMITER” later.
7.- Check safety system against trolley cable failure.

See instruction “TROLLEY CABLE FITTING SEQUENCE” in this chapter.

8.- Check correct operation of trolley cable tensioning.
See instruction “TROLLEY CABLE FITTING SEQUENCE” in this chapter.
9.- For cranes equipped with single hook/double reeving, check correct operation of the re-reeving
system.
See instruction “REEVING CHANGE / TROLLEY CHANGE” in this chapter.
10.- Check correct operation of all crane movements at different speeds.
11.- Check correct operation of motor brakes and load hold.

Refer to brake maintenance instructions if required.
See Maintenance chapter in this Manual.

12.- Check correct operation of switching the slewing motors to free-slewing mode.
See Maintenance chapter in this Manual.
13.- Check that all maintenance operations set down for every crane after erection have been carried out
14.- Make sure that all requirements for crane power supply and electrical installation are complied with.
See chapter Electrical Installation in this Manual.
15.- Carry out all instructions set forth for crane commissioning other than the above stated points.
See chapter Operation in this Manual.

21 LC
LOCKING LIMITERS -
3 5 6 4
7
2
1 TRAVELLING LIMITER
2 ROTATION LIMITER OR SLIP-RING UNIT
3 LIFTING LIMITER
4 TROLLEY LIMITER
5 MOMENT LIMITER
6 LOAD LIMITER
7 REEVING CHANGE / TROLLEY CHANGE LIMITERS
8 CAGE MOMENTUM LIMITER
NOTE: See instructions about the adjusment of limiters on the following pages.

-
TRAVELLING MOVEMENT LIMITER -
THE CRANE SHOULD NOT BE USED UNTIL THIS LIMITER HAS BEEN APPROPRIATELY ADJUSTED
AND FULLY COMPLIES WITH THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN INSTALLED
0 CONTENTS
1 LOCATION
2 OVERVIEW
3 TRAVELLING MOVEMENT LIMITS
4 CHECKING
1 LOCATION
Normally the limiter is located in one of the driving trolleys or by default in the head girder.
2 OVERVIEW
The Travelling movement limiter stops the movement in both directions.
On the two track ends, mechanical stops and a limiter activating rail must be provided, so that the limiter is ac-
tivated and the crane stopped before impacting against the mechanical stops.In order for the limiter to operate
properly, it is important that the 25
mm height coordinate be respected.
The limiter actuating arm height can be adjusted.
25 mm
Actuating arm
Actuating rail Actuating rail
Neutral position
3 TRAVELLING MOVEMENT LIMITS

The limiter actuating rail, which must feature a sturdy design, should be located in such a way that the distance
from the crane’s most external part, once stopped, to the mechanical stop in question is at least 0.5 m.
Note that movement should be stopped before the limiter reaches the actuating rail end. In cranes with more
than one Travelling speed setting, make sure that there is full compliance with this when the crane is travelling
at its maximum speed, when the limiter is activated.
Normally, movement is stopped progressively in these cases.
4 CHECKING
Make sure the hook is free and is not loaded.
Make sure the limiter is not physically damaged and that the activating arm returns to the neutral position of
the limiter when it moves towards the sides manually.
Move the crane to the Travelling movement limiting positions and make sure that the movement is stopped at
the positions described in Section 3.
During these operations the crane operator should be ready to stop the movement suddenly if required.
If the system does not work as previously explained, the cause should be found and corrected.

-
SLEWING LIMITER -
THE CRANE MUST NOT BE USED UNTIL THIS LIMITER IS CORRECTLY ADJUSTED AND MEETS
ALL THE REQUIREMENTS FOR WHICH IT IS INSTALLED
0 CONTENTS
1 LOCATION
3 MOVEMENT LIMITS
4 CHECKING
5 ADJUSTMENT
1 LOCATION
On the slewing ring, which transmits the slewing movement to the limiter via a cog wheel.
This is a turns-counter type limiter.
The limiter has two limiting positions: one for each slewing direction.
3 MOVEMENT LIMITS
The slewing limiter is normally used to prevent the crane rotating more times than permitted
The crane should not turn more than two complete rotations in each slewing direction, counting as from a
position in which the electric cables passing through the slewing ring are not twisted.
This is stipulated to prevent damage to electric cables as a result of twisting.
Note: The crane is delivered from factory with the slewing limiter already prepared for carrying out one and a
half turn in each sense of the slewing.
Nevertheless, it is necessary to verify its correct functioning during the assembly.
The slew limiter on this machine is factory set to two turns in each slewing direction.
4 CHECKING
Ensure that the hook is free and not under load.
Slew the crane to the limit positions and check that the limiter stops slewing there.
If slewing continues beyond the limit position or stops early, adjust the limiter as per point 5 below.
5 ADJUSTMENT
Release the
assembly 5.1 Remove the protective cover from the limiter.
5.2 Ensure that the hook is free and the crane can slew freely through 360
degrees (complete rotation).
5.3 Slew the crane clockwise to the limit position.
5.4 Unscrew the adjuster cam locking screw.
5.5 Adjust the cam for the clockwise slewing limiter contact block (1).
5.6 Slew the crane anti-clockwise to the limit position.
5.7 Adjust the cam for the anti-clockwise slewing limiter contact block (2).
5.8 Tighten the cam locking screw and fit the cover on the limiter
Adjust the 5.9 Check limiter operation as indicated in point 4 above.
cams
NOTE: Cams should never be superimposed
Right Wrong

-
LIFTING STROKE LIMITER 4 micros
ALL THE REQUIREMENTS FOR WHICH IT IS INSTALLED.
0 CONTENTS
1 LOCATION
3 HOOK MOVEMENT LIMITS
4 CHECKING
5 ADJUSTMENT
1 LOCATION
This rev-counter type limiter is located on the hoisting winch.
The limiter is activated by the hoisting drum.
The drum and the limiter are mechanically linked, usually by direct coupling but sometimes by pinions or chains.
The job of the limiter is to stop the hook movement before it exceeds the working limits set for it.
For instance when the hook is moving up this means before the hook block hits the trolley.
The limiter also includes the device for preventing fast hoisting speeds when the hook is close to the point
where its movement is limited.
3 HOOK MOVEMENT LIMITS

The limiter must stop the hoisting winch when the hook rises to around 1 m below the trolley, and on its downward
travel also if necessary so that at least two turns of rope remain on the hoisting drum when the hook is at its
lowest point.
Remember that on some sites ground level will not coincide with the base of the crane. It must therefore be
ensured that the hoisting cable is long enough for the work to be done and that the required two turns are left
on the drum when the hook is at its lowest point.
4 CHECKING
Ensure that the hook is free and under no load. Move the hook to the upper and lower limits of its travel and
check that the limiter stops it at the required positions. Check also that rapid hoisting speed is not permitted
close to the limit points. While making these checks the crane operator should be ready to stop hook movement
suddenly if necessary.
If the hoisting winch continues to work beyond the set working limits the limiter must be adjusted as per section
5 of this chapter.
5 ADJUSTMENT
IF THE HOOK MUST BE LIMITED ON ITS DOWNWARD TRAVEL FOR REASONS OTHER THAN THE
MAINTAINING OF THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF TURNS ON THE DRUM THIS SYSTEM MUST BE
ADJUSTED AFTER EACH OPERATION TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF HOOK REEVINGS.
Upward travel limitation does not need to be adjusted after changing hook reevings.

-
LIFTING STROKE LIMITER 4 micros
The limiter has four independent contact blocks:

- Blocks 4 and 2 are used to limit hook travel at the top and bottom, respectively.
- Blocks 3 and 1 are used to limit top speed.
IF THE CRANE IS TO WORK WITH BOTH 2 AND 4 REEVINGS, THE UPPER AND LOWER
HOOK LIMIT SHOULD BE DONE WITH DOUBLE REEVING.
5.1 Remove the limiter protection cover.

5.2 Ensure that the hook is free and under no load.
Release the 5.3 Hoist the hook carefully to the top limit point (see section 3).
assembly 5.4 Release the locking screw on the regulating cams.
5.5 Adjust the cams for the top hook limit block (nº 4) and the top
speed block (nº 3) to the required positions.
When limiting high spped, take into account the travel required
to slow down from top speed (on cranes with hoisting speed
range selection, select top spped to adjust and check the high
speed limiter)
IF THE CRANE DOES NOT REQUIRE LIMITING AT THE

BOTTOM OF HOOK TRAVEL, GO TO POINT 5.8.
Adjust the
appropriate
5.6 Lower the hook to the bottom limit point.
cams
5.7 Adjust the cams for the bottom hook limit block (nº 2) and the
top speed block (nº 1) to the required positions.
5.8 Tighten the cam locking screw.
5.9 Fit the limiter protection cover.
5.10 Check that the limiter works properly as per section 4.

-
TROLLEY LIMITER 4 micros
ALL THE REQUIREMENTS FOR WHICH IT IS INSTALLED
0 CONTENTS
1 LOCATION
3 MOVEMENT LIMITS
4 CHECKING
5 ADJUSTMENT
1 LOCATION
This rev-counter type limiter is located on the trolley winch.
The limiter is activated by the trolley rope drum. The drum and the limiter are mechanically linked, usually by
direct coupling but sometimes by chains.
The job of the limiter is to stop the trolley’s movement before it hits the mechanical stops at the end of the jib.
3 MOVEMENT LIMITS
The purpose of the limiter is to stop the trolley winch before the trolley reaches the stop.
The limiter triggering point is a function of the type of braking, inertia, etc.
Trolley must stop at a minimum distance of 0,3 m from the stop, when the maximum travelling speed is used.
Top speed must be limited earlier, and the trolley must be in low gear when approximately 5 m from the
mechanical stops.
4 CHECKING
Check working whenever the trolley rope is tensioned, and ensure that the hook is free and under no load.
Move the trolley in low gear to the forward and backward limits of its travel and check that the limiter stops it at
the required positions before the stops are reached.
Check also that rapid trolley speed is not permitted close to the limit points. While making these checks the
crane operator should be ready to stop trolley movement suddenly if necessary.
If the trolley winch continues to work beyond the set working limits the limiter must be adjusted as per section
5 of this chapter.
5 ADJUSTMENT
The limiter must also be adjusted whenever the trolley rope is changed.
The limiter has four independent contact blocks:
- blocks 2 and 4 are used to limit hook travel towards the tower and tip respectively;
- blocks 1 and 3 are used to limit top speed. Block 1 is for trolley backward movement and block 3
for forward movement.

-
TROLLEY LIMITER 4 micros
5.1 Remove the limiter protection cover.

5.2 Ensure that the hook is free and under no load.
Release the 5.3 Take the trolley carefully to the backward limit point (tower side of
assembly jib)
5.4 Release the locking screw on the regulating cams.
5.5 Adjust the cams for the backward trolley limit block (n¦ 2) and
the top speed block (n¦ 1) to the required positions.
5.6 Take the trolley to the forward limit point (jib tip).
5.7 Adjust the cams for the forward trolley limit block (n¦ 4) and the
top speed block (n¦ 3) to the trolley positions indicated in section
3.
5.8 Tighten the cam locking screw.
5.9 Fit the limiter protection cover.
Adjust the
5.10 Check that the limiter works properly as per section 4.
appropriate cams

21LC
MOMENTUM LIMITER -
THE CRANE MUST NOT BE USED UNTIL THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN PROPERLY ADJUSTED AND
UNTIL IT FULLY MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN INSTALLED
ADJUST THE LOAD LIMITING SYSTEM BEFORE ADJUSTING THE LIMITER
0 CONTENTS
2 MOMENTUM LIMITING SYSTEM
3 SYSTEM LIMITING (OPTIONAL)
The momentum limiter is a double spring system associated with a set of position limiter switches.
It is located at the top of the crane.
The crane is subjected to load-momentum stress which is transferred through the top's structure, causing the
compression of the structural tubes to which the limiting system's springs are connected.
LM LIMITERS OPERATING
LMPWL WITH THE CORRECT LOAD
LM2
INDICATORS
OPTION
LIMITERS TRIGGERED
DUE TO EXCESS LOAD
Fig. 1
1 / 5 Rev: B 13/19 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approved 3 / 080 / 130

21LC
MOMENTUM LIMITER -
2 MOMENTUM LIMITING SYSTEM

2.1 Limiters.
LM
LMPWL
LM2
INDICATORS
OPTION
LIMITERS OPE-
RATING WITH
THE CORRECT
LOAD
LIMITERS TRIGGERED
DUE TO EXCESS LOAD
Fig. 2
The system has 3 limiters:
LM Maximum momentum limiter.

This is activated when the crane's maximum permissible static momentum is exceeded.
It prevents the upward movement of the hook and front trolley.
It activates the crane's horn which sounds continuously.
In cranes with a cab and control integrated into the seat, a pilot light comes on on the control (red).
LMPWL Powerlift momentum limiter

Temporarily prevents the upward movement of the hook and front trolley.
A pilot light temporarily comes on on the control (red).
If the limiter remains activated for 5 to 10 seconds, upwards movements are once again allowed
and the trolley can move in any direction but at a reduced speed; the red lights goes out and an
amber LAPWL pilot light comes on.
The crane's horn sounds continuously
LM2 Approaching maximum momentum limiter.

By default, this is set to 90% of the maximum permissible static momentum, but can be adjusted
to the value set by the local regulation (for example 85%).
It prevents the trolley from moving at a fast speed.
In cranes with a cab and control integrated into the seat, a pilot light comes on on the control
(amber).
It activates the crane's horn which sounds intermittently.
Adjust the load limiting system before adjusting these limiters.

See the "LOAD LIMITER" instruction

21LC
MOMENTUM LIMITER -
2.2 Test loads.

The following test loads will be available on the work site (fig. 2):
Load A: Approaching maximum momentum load.

This is 90% of the value of the jib-end load at the span at which the
crane is installed.
Load B: Overload.
Load which, along with load A, makes 100% of the value of the jib-end
load for the span at which the crane is installed.
Load C: Overload.
Load which, along with load A, makes 110% of the value of the jib-end
load for the span at which the crane is installed.
Fig. 3
The value of the loads is obtained from the crane's technical data sheet, depending on the number of
reeving lines and the length of the crane's jib.
The test loads must be manufactured according to national and local standards.
2.3 Checking the system.

In cranes with a SR/DR hook, the test should preferably be conducted with double reeving (DR).
The test will be performed with the trolley in the maximum span position.
Ensure that the system operates correctly by lifting the corresponding loads.
Load None A A+B A+C
Limiter activated None LM2 LM2 -LMPWL LM2 -LMPWL - LM
Cab pilot light

- Yes Yes Yes
amber
Yes
Cab pilot light
- - (for 5 - 10 seconds, Yes
red
then no)
Cab pilot light Yes
- Intermittent Yes
blue (after 5-10 seconds)
Horn - Intermittent Continuous Continuous
No
Upwards hoisting
Yes Yes (for 5-10 seconds, No
Trolley forward
then both)
2.4 Settings
The adjustment will be made with the trolley in the maximum span position.
The operation of the span limiter must be checked before adjusting the momentum limiting system.
In cranes with SR/DR hook, the test should be performed preferably with double reeving (DR).

21LC
MOMENTUM LIMITER -
The momentum limiters should be adjusted in the following order to prevent the pressure exerted by the
position switches on the spring from affecting the operation of the maximum load limiter:
1 LM2 approaching maximum momentum limiter.
2 LMPWL Powerlift limiter.
3 Maximum momentum limiter.
Adjusting the LM2 approaching maximum momentum limiter
1.- With the trolley in the maximum span position, lift test load A.
2.- Adjust the actuator screw (1) which acts on the LM2 limiter so that the amber pilot light comes on in
the cab and the crane's horn sounds intermittently.
3.- Block the actuator screw (1) with the nut (2). Fig.1
4.- Deposit the load on the ground.
5.- Check the adjustment by following the instructions in section 2.3.
Adjusting the LMPWL PowerLift limiter
1. With the trolley in the maximum span position, gently lift the test load "A+B" until it is raised from the
ground.
2. With the load raised and the crane at rest, adjust the actuator screw (1), which acts on the LMPWL limiter
until it is activated (fig. 1), as indicated in the system's checklist.
3. Block the actuator screw (1) with the nut (2) (fig. 1).
4. Deposit the load on the ground.
5. Check the adjustment by following the instructions in section 2.3.
Adjusting the LM maximum momentum limiter
To make the adjustment easier, it is recommended that you press the IAPWL button inside the electrical
cabinet.
Each time the stop button is activated during the operation, the IAPWL button must be pressed again.
1. With the trolley in the maximum span position, gently lift the test load "A+C" until it is raised from the
ground.
2. With the load raised and the crane at rest, adjust the actuator screw (1), which acts on the LM limiter
until it is activated (fig. 1), as indicated in the system's checklist.
3. Block the actuator screw (1) with the nut (2) (fig. 1).
4. Deposit the load on the ground.
5. Check the adjustment by following the instructions in section 2.3.
If you only have a test load equal to "A+C" (110% of the maximum jib-end load) you can adjust the
approaching maximum momentum limiter with said load.
To do this, position load "A+C" at a distance of "D":
(%M)
D= x Maximum span
110
For example:
Maximum span = 40 m
Jib-end load = "A+C" = 1.5 t
Approaching 90% of maximum momentum limiter.
90
D (90% M) = x 40 = 32.7 m
110

21LC
MOMENTUM LIMITER -
3 SYSTEM LIMITING (OPTIONAL)

As an option, the crane can be equipped with a manual key switch (IACM) with a return to zero.
It is located in the top cabinet and can bridge the load and maximum momentum limiters for supervisory work.
Always ensure that this is turned off during normal operation.
This system could be explicitly contraindicated by applicable standards in the country or region where
the crane is being used.

21LC
LOAD LIMITER EFU5-50-45
THE CRANE SHOULD NOT BE USED UNTIL THIS SYSTEM IS PROPERLY ADJUSTED AND MEET THE
FUNCTION FOR WHICH THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN DESIGNED
0 CONTENT
2 TEST LOADS
3 CHECKING THE SYSTEM
4 ADJUSTMENT
The load limiting system is situated on the jib, above the trolley-rope.
The pull force applied on the load suspended from the hook is transmitted through a reeving of the hoist rope
on an articulated arm, which compresses the spring of the limiter, and governs the movements of adjustment
bushes with respect to position limiters. Refer to figure below.
There exist 4 limiters:
Adjustment bushes
Position
limiters
LC Maximum load allowed for the crane depending on the number of falls. In case of being
activated, the hook's and trolley's mevements of hoisting are disabled. The red warning
lamp in the cabin will be switched on and the horn of the crane will sound continuosly.
LC2, LC3 and LC4 Intermediate load levels for the control of the control of the maximum allowed hoisting
speeds depending on the load under hook.
2 TRIAL LOADS
The following loads should therefore be available on site:
Load A: This is the maximum permitted load for the crane configuration in use,
depending the number of reevings on the hook.
Principal load 9000 kg for SR and 18000 kg for DR.
Load B: This is the maximum load test overload.
10% of load A, 900 kg for SR and 1800 kg for DR.
Load C: (LC2) Intermediate load to regulate the frequency converter.
6000 kg for SR and 12000 kg for DR.
Load D: (LC3) Intermediate load to regulate the frequency converter.
4000 kg for SR and 8000 kg for DR.
Load E: (LC4) Intermediate load to regulate the frequency converter.
Surchage 2000 kg for SR and 4000 kg for DR.

21LC
LOAD LIMITER EFU5-50-45
3 SYSTEM CHECK
3.1 Maximum load limit
The check will be carried out with the trolley in the rear trolley position and the lifting speed in position 1.
The system should allow to lift the A load but not A+B loads together.
Otherwise, proceed with adjustment according to Section 4.1.
3.2 Intermediate limit levels

Verification will be carried out with the trolley in the rear trolley position.
The system should allow to lift the maximum load associated with each lifting speed range, with this being
selected in the crane operator’s control commutator. See table.
Control commutator position

Maximun load Limiter
(Lifting speed range)
1 A LC
2 C LC2
3 D LC3
4 E LC4
For this, once the position of the commutator is selected, check that it is possible to lift the load related to the
maximum speed and that an excess weight of 10% impedes the ascent and descent movements and the SCEM
pilot in the control cabin illuminates.
Otherwise, proceed with the adjustment according to Section 4.2.
NOTE. If during the normal operation of the crane, it is observed that the load limiter impedes lifting
operations with a lighter load than that allowed or, if on the contrary, operations are allowed with greater
loads, then the adjustment of the load limit should be carried out, as is indicated in Section 4 of this
chapter. An incorrect adjustment of the intermediate load levels of the frequency converter regulation
may cause the load racing safety system not to operate correctly.
4 ADJUSTMENT
4.1 Maximum load limit adjustment
Lift A load with the trolley in the rear position and the lifting speed commutator in position 1.
Adjust the LC limiter with the associated bushing.
Check the adjustment according to Point 3.1.
Block the adjusting bushing shift.
4.2 Intermediate adjustment levels of the load limiter

Keep the trolley in the rear position, change the speed commutator to positions 2, 3 and 4 and regulate limiters
LC2, LC3 and LC4 in order that they can lift loads C, D and E, respectively.
Check adjustment according to Point 3.2.
Block the adjusting bushing shift.

-
CAGE MOMENTUM LIMITER -
THE CLIMBING SECTION MUST NOT BE USED UNTIL THIS SYSTEM HAS BEEN ADJUSTED
PROPERLY AND UNTIL IT FULLY MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM
3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
4 CONNECTING THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
5 INITIAL CHECK AND VERIFICATION OF OPERATION
6 EQUIPMENT OPERATION
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
The telescoping operation should be performed exclusively by previously-trained personnel (erector and
crane operator).
During the telescoping procedures, you should always know where the equilibrium point is and avoid
manoeuvres that may tend to shift the crane away from that position.
The control system provided in the AJ control cabinet allows the operator who is next to the control unit
to act upon the crane movements, thus communication and coordination between this operator and the
crane operator must be guaranteed at all times.
This system only works after the support of the rotating part of the cage structure has been fully transferred.
The system does not detect an imbalance prior to transfer and, therefore, does not prevent the extension
of the cylinder.
Before performing the balancing and telescoping procedures, you must check the proper functioning of
the system, as described in these instructions.
This is a safety system and the limiters should not engage except when necessary.
Limiters should not be used under any circumstances as a reference for telescoping.
The balancing and telescoping operation should always be performed from the control cab or with a
remote control cable. It should never be performed through radio control.
The cage momentum limiter is a double spring system connected to a series of position limit switches.
It is located in the crane's climbing section (fig. 1).
2 1
Fig. 1
1/7 Rev: B 13/12 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 3 / 080 / 137

-
The climbing section is subjected to a load-moment solicitation that is transferred through the structure causing
a deformation of the structural tubes to which the limiting system's springs are attached.
The deformation of the structural tubes, increased by the springs, causes a displacement of the actuators
located at their end.
The position of actuators 1 can be regulated by screws 2. The actuators activate or deactivate the electromechanical
limiters 3 depending on their position
The electrical telescoping equipment includes a limiting system that blocks movements that may tend to increa-
se imbalance after one of the permissible momentum limits (forward or rear) has been reached. The limiters
engage only after the support of the part that will telescope to the cage structure has been fully transferred.
The following elements form part of the system:

- Caged maximum imbalance detector spring.
- Micro LJMP: detects the transition to a state of positive or forward momentum within the permissible limit.
- Micro LJMN: detects the transition to a state of negative or rear momentum within the permissible limit.
- Electrical equipment cabinet attached to the hydraulic control unit.
- Electrovalve for locking the movement of the cylinder extension.
- Manual bypass valve that allows disabling of the extension movement lock caused by the electrovalve.
The position of said valve can be locked with a padlock.
Rear or negative momentum Forward or positive momentum
Momentum limiter Momentum limiter

reached limiter Balanced cage reached limiter
LJMN
LJMP
LJMN
LJMN
LJMP
LJMP
Fig. 2
When either of the micros - LJMP or LJMN - engage, the electromechanical control system blocks those
movements that tend to increase the state of forward or rear momentum, respectively.

-
3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The electrical equipment is attached to the hydraulic control unit and consists of:
- Electronic motor protection relay for power to the hydraulic control unit motor.
- AJ cage electrical control cabinet.
- Electrovalve for locking the movement of the cylinder extension.
- The electronic motor protection relay includes:

- E8 quick coupling for power to the hydraulic control unit motor.
- Start-up button I that connects the hydraulic control unit motor.
- Off button 0 that disconnects the hydraulic control unit motor.
- The AJ electrical control cabinet includes:

- Couplings:
- Quick coupling EJ for LMJP and LMJN limiter signals.
- Quick coupling E92 for cutting off crane movements.

- Indication lights on the front of the cabinet:
- Amber LAMP light: admissible limit of positive or forward momentum reached.
- Amber LAMN light: admissible limit of negative or rear momentum reached.
- Amber LAOD light: limitation system deactivated with the IOD button.
- Buttons on the outside of the cabinet:

- PMJ start-up button
- PPJ stop push-button
- TEST test button.
- ICL trolley slow-speed switch.
- Buttons on the inside of the cabinet:

- IOD system suppression button.
4 CONNECTING THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

From the moment when the E92 coupling is disconnected from the cab cabinet and connected to the
E92 coupling in the AJ cabinet until the moment the limitation system is started up by pressing the PMJ
button, the crane will not respond to cab controls.
Before starting the hydraulic control unit using button I on the electronic motor protection relay, you must make
the following connections:
- Connect coupling EJ from the control cabinet AJ to coupling EJ of the LJMP and LJMN limiters.
- Connect coupling E92 from the control cabinet AJ to coupling E92 located inside the cab's electrical
cabinet.
- Connect coupling E8 from the control unit's electronic motor protection relay to coupling E8 in the
counter jib's electrical cabinet (luffing-jib crane) or the top cabinet (tower crane).
Once the connections are made, all the crane's cylinder extension movements remain locked until the system
is started up using button PMJ in AJ (see operation of electrical equipment).

-
E8
E92
EJ LJMP
LJMN
AJ
Fig. 3
5 INITIAL CHECK AND VERIFICATION OF OPERATION

If during checking and verification tests a failure or unexpected behaviour is detected, you should determine
the cause before proceeding to telescoping.
Before beginning the telescoping operations, it is essential to balance the crane.
Failure to carry out this balancing operation could result in serious accidents.
See the "CLIMBING SECTION ASSEMBLY, balanced loads" document for its installation.
efore beginning telescoping, electrical equipment checks should be carried out as described below, as
B
well as the rest of the mechanical checks specified in the instructions.
Every time the cage's electrical equipment is to be used for telescoping, the functional checks and verifications
of the electrical equipment listed below should be performed beforehand:
,- Check that the position of the LJMP and LJMN micros in the spring is correct.
- Check that the manual bypass valve of the electrovalve is closed (the lever is perpendicular to the pipe)
and it is padlocked into position.
- Activate the TEST button located on the front of the AJ control cabinet.
Check that:
- The LAMP and LAMN lights are on.
- The LAOD light is off.
- All the crane's movements are locked.
- Extending the cylinder is not permitted
- Retracting the cylinder is permitted.

-
- Simultaneously press the IOD button located inside the AJ control cabinet and the TEST button. Check
that:
- The LAMP, LAMN and LAOD lights are on.
- All the crane's movements are permitted.
- Extending and retracting the cylinder is permitted
- Manually press each of the micros.
Check that:
- The LAMP and LAMN lights light up alternatively according to the micro being pressed.
- The system works by preventing movement as shown in the table in the "Operation of electrical
equipment" section.
6 EQUIPMENT OPERATION
6.1 Start-up
very time the cage is to be used for telescoping, the checks specified in the "Initial checks and verification
E
of operation" section must be performed.
The PMJ start-up button activates the limitation system so that the crane and cylinder extension movements
are authorised in accordance with the position of the LJMP and LJMN micros. To activate the compressor motor
of the control unit, push button I on the electronic motor protection relay. Once the compressor is running, you
may use the distribution lever to extend or retract the cylinder.
The PPJ push-button allows you to lock all the crane's movements and the cylinder extension movement from
the AJ control cabinet. When pressed, the movements are stopped after a pause controlled by the frequency
inverters. The brakes are applied after the deceleration. To fully stop the control unit's compressor motor, press
button 0 on the electronic motor protection relay.
To reset the limitation system after having pushed the PPJ push-button, you must reset the push-button and
press the PMJ start-up button again.
6.2 Limiter Operation

When the system is limited due to forward momentum, do not set the load on the ground because this
will increase the imbalance.
The limitation system always allows the retraction of the cylinder.
The electrical equipment allows or blocks the crane's movements or the extension of the cylinder according to
the status of the micros, according to the following table:
Micro LJMP activated Micro LJMN activated

Trolley forward or NO YES
Counterweight forward
Trolley backwards or YES NO
Counterweight backwards
Left slewing NO NO
Right slewing NO NO
Elevation rising NO YES
Elevation falling YES NO
Cylinder extension NO NO
Cylinder retraction YES YES

-
Upon reaching the forward momentum limit, the amber LAMP light on the front of the AJ control cabinet will
light up.
Upon reaching the rear momentum limit, the amber LAMN light on the front of the AJ control cabinet will light up.
6.3 Suppression of the caged limitation system
The system suppression function should only be activated when necessary and may lead to dangerous
situations. If for some reason it is necessary to use it, you should restore the system to its normal operation
as soon as possible.
The IOD button located inside the AJ control cab suppresses the performance of the cage's limitation system
if held down. When released, the system will return to normal functionality.
While the button is pressed, a red LAOD light on the front of the AJ control cabinet will light up and the slewing
and trolley movements will operate at reduced speeds.
6.4 Trolley or counterweight speed limitation
When the ICL switch located on the front of the AJ control cabinet is activated, the crane will work with the trolley
or counterweight at reduced speed
7 ADJUSTMENT
The crane must be balanced.
Failure to carry out this balancing operation could result in serious accidents.
See the "CLIMBING SECTION ASSEMBLY, balanced loads" document for its installation.
7.1 Initial limiter position
Before beginning the telescoping operation, centre actuators 1 in relation to the limiters.
approx. 105 mm
Fig. 4
7.2 Control of LJMP positive or forward momentum limiter

The limiter detects the transition to a state of positive or forward momentum within the permissible limit. It pre-
vents the movements that surpass this limit.
- Activate the telescoping operation until the section's crown holder is removed; the final balancing of the
crane will have been achieved by moving the trolley.
- At reduced speed move the empty trolley approximately 10 metres forward, without exceeding the
balanced load; adjust actuator 1 so that the LJMP limiter is activated and lock it using screw 2.
- Return the trolley to its initial position and continue the telescoping operation.

-
2 1
Fig. 5
7.3 Control of LJMN negative or rear momentum limiter

The limiter detects the transition to a state of negative or rear momentum within the permissible limit. It prevents
the movements that surpass this limit.
- With the cage open, insert the tower section into its position.
- At reduced speed move the empty trolley approximately 5 metres backwards, adjust actuator 1 so that
it activates the LJMN limiter and lock it using screw 2.
- Return the trolley to its initial position and continue the telescoping operation.
2 1
Fig. 6

21LC290/18 t
ASSEMBLING CLIMBING SECTION, balancing loads EFU5-50-45 (J3)
BEFORE BEGINNING THE CRANE TELESCOPING OPERATIONS, IT IS

ESSENTIAL TO BALANCE THE CRANE USING THE SPECIALLY DESIGNED
HANGER.
PLACING THE BALANCED LOAD

The balancing is done with a load “Q” which is
placed at a distance “d” on the jib (Fig. 1).
Place the beam “B” with the rope “A” at the correct
distance.
Unify the hanger “C” the beams “D” and the load
“Q” on the ground.
Hoist this unit with the hook and the piece “G” and
fix it on the beam “B”.
If during this operation it is necesary to exceed the
limitation of the hook upwards, that safety system
can be cancelled by operating the switch with key
(ID) inside the lifting electrical cupboard (Fig 3).
Fig. 1
Not carrying out the above operation may result in accidents.
Distance (d) in metres of the balancing weight depending on the maximum

length of the jib.
Q L Jib length (m)
Balancing
loads in
(kg) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
1000 - - - 37 30 28 17 13
2000 - 33 21 17 15 13 - -
3000 25 22 14 - - - - -
4000 19 16 - - - - - -
The crane must be balanced in relation to the

hydraulic cylinder axis.
During the cage telescoping process, the crane is

in the position shown in fig. 2, with the balancing
load in place and a section of the mast suspended
from the monorail.
The final balancing is achieved by shifting the position

of the trolley and hook
At the beginning of and during the operation

to dismantle sections, since no mast section
is hanging from the monorail, the trolley-hook
cylinder axis
must be positioned further forward in order

to achieve the correct balance. Likewise,
when the mast section is pulled free, the
trolley-hook must be moved backwards
to recover this balance. Fig. 2

21LC290/18 t
ASSEMBLING CLIMBING SECTION, balancing loads EFU5-50-45 (J3)
The ID switch for overriding the reeving changing safety system should only be used by those personnel
who are fully aware of the possible consequences of overriding said safety system.
All operations carried out whilst the safety system is out of action must be carefully supervised in order
to avoid any hazardous situations.
Once the operation requiring the safety system to be overridden has been completed, the crane should
be stopped and reset.
IF YOU OBSERVE ANY IRREGULARITY WHILE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION DURING THE
CANCEL OF THE SECURITY SYSTEM, ADVISE IMMEDIATELY SERVICE DEPARTMENT FOR
ANALYSIS.
Fig. 3

J2-10
ASSEMBLY OF THE CLIMBING SECTION (CAGE) -
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
3 CAGE TRANSPORT
4 ASSEMBLING/DISASSEMBLING THE CRATE
5 PREPARING THE CAGE
6 ACCESS PLACEMENT

1 IMPORTANT NOTES
DURING ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS WIND SPEED MUST NOT BE SO HIGH AS TO PREVENT SAFE
HANDLING OF THE CRANE'S ELEMENTS. (NO HIGHER THAN 25 km/h).
USE SUITABLE SLINGS FOR THE LOADS HANDLED DURING LOADING, UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY
OF THE CAGE.
MONITOR THE MOVEMENTS OF THE PARTS TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS DURING THE LOADING,
UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
AKE AVAILABLE SUFFICIENT SPACE ON THE SITE, WITH A FLAT AND LEVELLED SURFACE, FOR
M
LOADING, UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
EAD THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE STARTING THE LOADING, UNLOADING AND
R
ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
The names used in this figure will be used throughout the entire document.
4 5 6 18
19
21
7
11
1
17 2
12 3
22
20
14
16 8
13 15
10
9
1 "U" structure 12 Climbing mast section

2 Right door 13 Fixed climbing crossbeam
3 Left door 14 Mobile climbing crossbeam
4 Rear cage joist hanger 15 Hydraulic control unit
5 Front cage joist hanger 16 Hydraulic cylinder
6 Section assembly rail 17 Assembly pole
7 Upper platforms 18 Section assembly trolley
8 Lower platforms 19 Section hanger
9 Control platform 20 Hook
10 Mast section hoist bar 21 Pulley holder
11 Mast section hanger 22 Ladder
Fig. 1
1/7 Ver: A 12/25 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approval 3 / 110 / 146
J2-10
3 CAGE TRANSPORT
Use suitable slings for the loads handled during loading and unloading of the cage.
Monitor the movements of the parts to prevent accidents during the loading and unloading of the cage.
ake available sufficient space on the site, with a flat and levelled surface, for loading and unloading of
M
the cage.
The cage is transported completely assembled in a single crate.

The crate may be assembled differently depending on who made it.
The transport attachments (A) must be in position to move the crate.
Fig. 2
J2-10
4 ASSEMBLING/DISASSEMBLING THE CRATE

Use suitable slings for the loads handled during the assembly or disassembly of the crate.

Monitor the movement of the parts to prevent accidents during the assembly or disassembly
of the crate.
ake available sufficient space on the site, with a flat and levelled surface, for assembly and disassembly
M
of the crate.
- Remove the transport attachments (A) from the structure (Fig 2).
- Remove the material contained in the structure (Fig 3 and 4).
5 4 20 19
6 6 18 6
17 13 14 16 11
12 12 10
Fig. 3
J2-10
22
22
Fig. 4
J2-10
5 PREPARING THE CAGE

Use suitable slings for the loads handled during the assembly of the cage.
Monitor the movement of the parts (abrupt and sudden knocks) which can cause accidents during the
assembly of the cage.
Make sure the structure's cross sections are not damaged during the assembly of the cage.
ake available sufficient space on the site, with a flat and levelled surface, for the assembly
M
of the cage.
Position the transport attachments (A) before turning the structure.
- Turn over the structure 90º so it is resting on the rear panel.
- Remove the transport attachments (A) to turn over the square brackets.
- Remove the triangular connecting rods (B), hook the square bracket on the lug (Z) and gently lift, the
square bracket will rotate on the pins (C) until the pins (D) are in position.
The square bracket will be left in the working position.
- Remove the pins (C) and continue turning the square bracket on the pins (D) until the triangular connecting
rods (B) can be positioned.
The square bracket will be left in the assembly position.
- Repeat the previous operations with the other square bracket.
Z
D
B
C
Fig. 5
J2-10
- Check that the following are assembled: the climbing guide rollers (1), the pins for hanging the cage during
assembly (2), the cage lock pins (3) and the return pulleys for the mast section suspension cable (4).
- Make the mast section suspension cable return.
- Reposition the transport attachments (A) to turn over the entire assembly.
A
4
3
4
2
Fig. 6
6 ACCESS PLACEMENT
MONITOR THE MOVEMENT OF THE PARTS (ABRUPT AND SUDDEN KNOCKS) WHICH CAN CAU-
SE ACCIDENTS.
- With the transport attachments positioned hook the lug assembly (Y). Gently rotate the assembly on
support blocks (A), support it on auxiliary workhorses (B).
- Position the upper rear platform (C) and side walkways (D) on the "U" structure, assemble the handrails
on the platforms.
Position the tilting platform (E), rotated on its anchors and fixed to the side walkway (D).
- Position the ladder (F) offset on its platform anchors and fasten it to the structure.
E
F Y
A
C
D
B D
Fig. 7
J2-10
- Raise the suspended lug assembly (Y), turning it on its supports until it is in the vertical position.
- Remove the transport attachments.
MONITOR THE MOVEMENT OF THE PARTS (ABRUPT AND SUDDEN KNOCKS) WHICH CAN CAUSE
ACCIDENTS.
- Position the lower rear platform (C) and side walkways (D) on the "U" structure, assemble the handrails
on the platforms.
Position the tilting platform (E), rotated on its anchors and fixed to the side walkway (D).
- Position the access ladder (F) in its position between the lower and upper platforms and position the
guard (G).
- Position the balconies (H) on the square brackets.
- Prepare the balcony for the hydraulic unit (J) on the slider (K) and fasten it to the structure. Position the
access ladder (L) on the platform (C), offset from its position.
When the assembly is raised the hydraulic system platform will glide along the slider (K) to its working
position, the ladder (L) should then be repositioned for correct access.
F
G
L
E
K
J
H
J
Fig. 8
J2-10
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
3 ASSEMBLY OF CAGE SUPPORT BEAMS AND SECTION ASSEMBLY RAIL
4 ASSEMBLY OF THE CLIMBING SECTION
5 CAGE ASSEMBLY

1 IMPORTANT NOTES
DURING ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS WIND SPEED MUST NOT BE SO HIGH AS TO PREVENT SAFE
HANDLING OF THE CRANE'S ELEMENTS. (NO HIGHER THAN 25 km/h).
USE SUITABLE SLINGS FOR THE LOADS HANDLED DURING LOADING, UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY
OF THE CAGE.
MONITOR THE MOVEMENTS OF THE PARTS TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS DURING THE LOADING,
UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
AKE AVAILABLE SUFFICIENT SPACE ON THE SITE, WITH A FLAT AND LEVELLED SURFACE, FOR
M
LOADING, UNLOADING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
EAD THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE STARTING THE LOADING, UNLOADING AND
R
ASSEMBLY OF THE CAGE.
The names used in this figure will be used throughout the entire document.
4 5 6 18
19
21
7
11
1
17 2
12 3
22
20
14
16 8
13 15
10
9
1 "U" structure 12 Climbing mast section

2 Right door 13 Fixed climbing crossbeam
3 Left door 14 Moving climbing crossbeam
4 Rear cage joist hanger 15 Hydraulic control unit
5 Front cage joist hanger 16 Hydraulic cylinder
6 Section assembly rail 17 Assembly pole
7 Upper platforms 18 Section assembly trolley
8 Lower platforms 19 Section hanger
9 Control platform 20 Hook
10 Mast section hoist bar 21 Pulley holder
11 Mast section hanger 22 Ladder
Fig. 1
1 / 8 Ver: A 12/25 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approval 3 / 110 / 153

J2-10
3 ASSEMBLY OF CAGE SUPPORT BEAMS AND SECTION ASSEMBLY RAIL
- Prepare the assembly pole (17) fixing the 540 kg counterweight block in its position.
540 kg counterweight block
Fig. 2
- Using the assembly pole (17) suspend the rear cage joist hanger (4) and connect it to the cage support
lugs on section S23J or TS24J or the lower crown holder depending on the crane model.
When positioning the cage joist hangers, take into account the direction in which the mast sections are
assembled.
Fig. 3

J2-10
- Prepare the structure for assembling the sections on the ground.

Connect the front section assembly rail (6D) and the rear section assembly rail (6R) and position the tie
rods (6T) and the platform (6P).
Fix the section hoist trolley (18) to the rail to prevent movement during assembly.
- Attach the front cage joist hanger (5) over the rear rail.
- Connect the assembly pole (17) to the assembly lugs on the rear rail "6R".
Suspend the lug set (Z), the assembly will be practically balanced when raised.
Prepare a second sling fixed to the lug (Y) for lowering the pole.
- Insert the assembly into the mast, fix the rear rail to the rear joist and screw the front joist to the cage
support lugs on the mast section.
When assembling the rails, control their movement to prevent accidents due to entrapment inside the
mast section.
- Change the suspension sling on the pole of lug (Y) before removing the connecting pins (R) from the
rear rail, the pole will be balanced when lowered.
6R
6P
6D
R
18
Z
Y
Fig. 4

J2-10
4 ASSEMBLY OF THE CLIMBING SECTION

- On the ground prepare the fixed climbing crossbeam (13), the hydraulic cylinder (16) and the mobile
climbing crossbeam (14) connected via the transport and assembly rods (A). Position them towards the
upper part using the safety hooks to prevent the climbing pins from falling.
- Connect the lower mast section (12A) and upper mast section (12B) and pass them through the previous
assembly, position the climbing pins in the fourth and fifth hole of the mast section.
- Position the mast section hanger (11) with the climbing tabs towards the lower part, position the mast
section extension (12C).
- Connect the top mast section and mast section extension and position the assembly pole connecting the
fixed crossbeam and the mast section hanger.
- Using the assembly pole (17), suspend the mast section assembly and attach to (C) the suspension rods
for the mast section (B) to the lower lugs of the rear cage joist hanger.
- Support the assembly on the mast.
- Remove the assembly pole.
16 17
12A
14
13
A
12B
12C 11 B
Fig. 5

J2-10
5 CAGE ASSEMBLY
MONITOR THE MOVEMENT OF THE PARTS (ABRUPT AND SUDDEN KNOCKS) WHICH CAN CAUSE
ACCIDENTS.
- Suspend the cage from the indicated lugs via two slings, the entire assembly rotates on the supports (A).
- On suspending the assembly, the support platform for the hydraulic control unit will glide along its slider
to its working position; reposition the platform access ladder for correct access.
Exercise extreme caution this operation.
Handle the loads at reduced speeds to prevent abrupt movements as far as possible.
Leave a space free from obstacles for moving the load.
A
Fig. 6

J2-10
- Hang the cage from the lugs on the rear cage joist hanger. Lower the truck crane, the cage rotates on
the pins moving closer to the mast.
With the help of a block and tackle, tilt the cage until it is in the vertical position.
- Remove the rods connecting the open square brackets (A) and close, position the corresponding con-
necting pins.
- Remove the platform connections, lower them into their position.
Fig. 7

J2-10
- On tilting the cage, the cage's rear connecting lugs align with the lugs on the rear cage joist hanger; insert
the connecting pins in (A).
Connect the front part of the cage to the front cage hanger using the rod (B).
Using a block and tackle, tilt the cage to facilitate inserting the pins.
- Remove the block and tackle once the cage is closed.
- Remove the pins (C) suspending the cage from the rear cage joist hanger.
- Position the support (D) to support the mast section lifting bar on the lower platform.
- Connect the mast section suspension return to the mast section hoist bar (10) and the mast section
hanger (11).
- Using the crane hook, tense the mast section suspension cable until the rods (E) can be removed and
place the mast section hanger in its working position hanging from the climbing tabs on the mast section.
A
B
11
10
11
Fig. 8

J2-10
- Connect the cylinder to the hydraulic control unit.

- Using the telescoping movements of the cylinder lower the fixed climbing crossbeam (13) until pinning
it to the cage.
1 Remove the transport rods (C) from the fixed climbing crossbeam (13) and mobile climbing crossbeam
(14).
2 Remove the climbing catch hooks (A) from the mobile crossbeam, extend the cylinder, the mobile
crossbeam is lowered until the next mast section step (12).
3 Position the catch hooks (A) on the mobile crossbeam and remove the climbing catch hooks (B) from
the fixed crossbeam, retract the cylinder until the next mast section step.
4 Position the catch hooks (B) on the fixed crossbeam and remove the catch hooks (A) from the mobile
crossbeam, extend the cylinder to the mast section.
5 Repeat the previous steps until the connecting pins (D) of the fixed climbing crossbeam can be
connected to the cage.
12
13 B
B
C
A A
14
B
B B
A A
Fig. 9

J2-10
ASSEMBLY OF THE CLIMBING SECTION, TELESCOPING -
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 POSITIONING THE SECTION ON THE HANGER RAIL
3 BALANCING
4 TELESCOPING
5 INSERTING THE MAST SECTION
6 RECOVERING THE CLIMBING MAST SECTIONS
7 REPEATING OPERATIONS
8 FINAL OPERATIONS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
DURING TELESCOPING WIND SPEED MUST NOT BE SO HIGH AS TO PREVENT SAFE HANDLING
OF THE CRANE'S ELEMENTS. (NO HIGHER THAN 25 km/h).
FOR LIMITED TOWER HEIGHTS, THE CLIMBING SECTION MUST BE LOWERED FOR EACH JIB
CONFIGURATION.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE STARTING TELESCOPING.
HE MAST SECTIONS TO BE LIFTED MUST BE ASSEMBLED AND PLACED AT THE FOOT OF THE
T
CRANE BEFORE STARTING TELESCOPING.
THE CRANE MUST BE BALANCED, USING THE HANGER SPECIFICALLY EQUIPPED FOR THIS
PURPOSE, BEFORE STARTING TELESCOPING OPERATIONS.
2 POSITIONING THE SECTION ON THE HANGER RAIL

Assemble the mast sections following the "MAST ASSEMBLY" instructions in the manual.
Position the mast sections at the foot of the crane.
Prepare the section for suspension, fix the hanger eye strops to the section (19), the eye strops must be identical
in the length to keep the section level.
19
1300 mm
Fig. 1

J2-10
Using the hoist hook (20) position the mast section on the section assembly trolley (18), on the section assembly
rail (6).
20
18
20
Fig. 2
Once the section is in position, unhook and remove the hoist hook (20).
3 BALANCING
THE CRANE MUST BE BALANCED, USING THE HANGER SPECIFICALLY EQUIPPED FOR THIS
PURPOSE, BEFORE STARTING TELESCOPING OPERATIONS.
The crane must be balanced in relation to the hydraulic cylinder axis.
During telescoping operations, the balance of the crane can vary due to the position of the section on the
assembly trolley or the effects of the wind on the crane. The balance point of the crane is obtained by moving
the trolley and the hook.
See the corresponding document on balancing.

HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
AXIS
Fig. 3

J2-10
4 TELESCOPING
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CRANE IS BALANCED.
FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THE BALANCING OPERATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS ACCIDENTS.
MAKE SURE THE MAST SECTIONS ARE IN CONTACT WITH THE THICK METAL PLATE OF THE
MAST SECTION HANGER BEFORE STARTING TELESCOPING OPERATIONS.
If the mast sections need repositioning, actuate on the hydraulic cylinder with the lower climbing catch hooks
(A) positioned on the mobile climbing crossbeam (14) and the upper climbing catch hooks (C) removed from
the fixed climbing crossbeam, gently retract the cylinder, the climbing mast sections (12) will rise; place them
against the thick metal plate of the mast sections hanger and gently return the cylinder to its initial position.
Before starting crane telescoping operations, the connecting pins should be removed from the last section of
the mast on the cage support section.
To facilitate this operation it may be necessary to actuate on the hydraulic cylinder, with the lower climbing catch
hooks (A) positioned on the mobile climbing crossbeam (14) and the upper climbing catch hooks (C) removed
from the fixed climbing crossbeam; gently remove the cylinder to align the section splice holes and eliminate
the pressure on the pins.
12
Mast
sections
position
A
14
14
Fig. 4
Once the connecting pins have been removed from the final section of the cage support section, the
crane should not be turned.
If the trolley and hook need to be moved to achieve better balancing this must be done very slowly.

J2-10
With the lower catch hooks (A) positioned on the mobile crossbeam (14), continue to withdraw the cylinder
until the holes on the fixed crossbeam (13) and those on the mast sections (12) are aligned; position the upper
catch hooks (C).
Gently retract the cylinder until the cage is supported on the upper catch hooks (C) and the lower catch hooks
can be removed (A); continue to retract the cylinder, so that the fixed crossbeam (13) rises; align the holes of
the fixed crossbeam and those of the mast sections, position the lower catch hooks.
Gently withdraw the cylinder until it is supported on the lower catch hooks and remove the upper ones, continue
to withdraw the cylinder until the holes on the fixed crossbeam and mast sections are aligned, ...
Repeat the operations until finishing the mast sections.
When the last section is reached, monitor the extraction of the cylinder so that it does not reach the mechanical
limit (T) between the mast sections hanger (11) and the plate supporting the fixed crossbeam (J).
12
13
A
14
11
T
Fig. 5

J2-10
The distance between the lower part of the hanging section and the upper part of the lugs on the mast section
will be approximately 80 mm (Fig. 6).
80 mm
Fig. 6
5 INSERTING THE MAST SECTION

Insert the mast section in the climbing section.
Use the auxiliary return cable located on the section assembly rail to facilitate this operation.
Auxiliary return
Fig. 7

J2-10
Reverse the telescoping process in the previous point until the new mast section is inserted, at its lower part,
into the crane mast and they can be pinned using the working pins (A).
Remove the section suspension eye strops and pull the assembly trolley (18) out to the end of the rail (6).
Continue to lower the climbing section until the upper part of the new section is inserted in the cage support
section and the assembly pins (B), which have a smaller diameter and a head, can be positioned. Four assembly
pins are used, one per corner.
ONCE THE NEW MAST SECTION IS CONNECTED TO THE CAGE SUPPORT SECTION VIA THE
ASSEMBLY PINS, THE MAXIMUM ROTATION ALLOWED FOR THE CRANE IS 10º IN EACH DIRECTION
AND AT THE FIRST ROTATION SPEED ONLY
Fig. 8
6 RECOVERING THE CLIMBING MAST SECTIONS

t the start of telescoping, the climbing mast sections must be hanging from the hook on the upper mast
A
section, to do this, follow the instructions below:
o move the climbing mast sections assembly, the mast sections must be repositioned; they must be
T
against the thin steel plate on the mast sections hanger.
Connect the auxiliary hook (20) to the mast sections hoist bar (10) and using the crane's main hook, tense the
cable connecting the hoist bar to the mast sections hanger (11), check that the cable runs correctly through
the return pulleys (Fig. 9).
With the lower climbing catch hooks (A) positioned, close the cylinder so that the mast sections rise, at the
same time, raise the mast sections hanger using the crane's main hook, remove it from its housing in the mast
section and move it so that the mast sections are against the thin steel plate of the hanger, remove the cylinder
so that the mast sections are supported on the hanger and remove the lower climbing catch hooks (A) (Fig. 9).

J2-10
Pull the hoist bar and raise the assembly until the mast sections can be repositioned in the climbing tabs of
the upper section.
During mast section hoisting, ensure that there are no snags between the mast section structure and
the cage or the mast section.
To reposition the mast sections, actuate on the hydraulic cylinder with the lower climbing catch hooks (A) posi-
tioned on the mobile climbing crossbeam (14) and the upper climbing catch hooks (C) removed from the fixed
climbing crossbeam; gently retract the cylinder, the climbing mast sections (12) will rise, place them against the
thick metal plate of the mast sections hanger and gently withdraw the cylinder to its initial position.
MAKE SURE THE MAST SECTIONS ARE IN CONTACT WITH THE THICK METAL PLATE ON THE
MAST SECTIONS HANGER BEFORE CONTINUING TELESCOPING OPERATIONS.
10
20
11
Mast sections
position
Fig. 9

J2-10
7 REPEATING OPERATIONS
Repeat the operations in sections 2 to 6 until the final height of the crane is reached.
8 FINAL OPERATIONS
Insert working pins in the connection between the final mast section and the cage support section.
Remove the section climbing cage, follow the assembly process in reverse.
Lower the section hanging rail.

Using the crane's elevation, gently turn the section hanging rail to remove the tie rod pins, reposition the tie
rods in the transport position.
Remove the pins connecting the rails and articulate the front rail lowering it to avoid possible interference with
the hoist cable at the crane's minimum altitude positions.
Inspect and check that the mast accesses are correctly positioned.
Fig. 10

MA02
TIES 2,0 m
MOUNTING THE TIE-FRAME
THE SPANNING FRAME SHOULD BE LOCATED AT THE TOWER BAY JOINT
To mount the frame see document "TIE": (MTJ 120 0104)
Level union
mast section
65
140
253
Ø62
2000
2490
2
Ø5
2000
2490

MA02
TIES 2,0 m
RIGID TIE-FRAME
Frame
C Stringer Stringer
A B
Frame Frame Frame
Knee- Knee-
Stringer brace Cable brace Stringer Cable
Turnbuckle Turnbuckle
A A B A B
The angles A and B should be between 30 º and 60 º

The maximum admissible inclination of the bracing bars C is 5 °
For other solutions, please contact COMANSA.
DETAILS OF RIGID TIE-FRAME AND TIE-BRACES
MANUFACTURERS
SUPPLIES ONLY ITEMS:

A Inner tie-frame
B Outer tie-frame
C Tie-pin
2490

MA02
TIES 2,0 m
DETAILS OF TIE-FRAME ON THE GROUND WITH WIRES
Frame
Cable
A
Turnbuckle
Concrete block
The angle A should be between 30 º and 60 º
TIE-FRAME ON THE GROUND WITH WIRES
Concrete block
Turnbuckle
Cable
Frame
Concrete block Concrete block Concrete block
Turnbuckle Turnbuckle Turnbuckle

Cable Cable Cable
Frame Frame Frame
Extreme cases only.
For other solutions, please contact COMANSA.

MA01 / MA02
BRACING -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 OUTER FRAME ASSEMBLY
3 INNER FRAME ASSEMBLY
ALWAYS USE THE SAFETY HARNESS DURING THE ASSEMBLY/DISMANTLING OPERATIONS TO

PREVENT ACCIDENTS.
THE STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS MUST BE ASSEMBLED IN THE SEQUENCE DESCRIBED HERE.
1 DESCRIPTION
The assembly is composed of two parts:

Outer frame:
- Composed of 2 crossbeams "1" and 2 arms "13" fixed with screws "2".
Each crossbeam and arm carries two shafts "6", used to fix the frame to the tower's section.
The frame is supported on the tabs used to climb up the tower's section.
Inner frame:
- Composed of 4 arms "11" adjusted to the tower's section with shafts "12".
The inner frame is installed at the same level of the shafts "6" and it is supported on the handrails of the
tower's section with the adjustable supports "10".
6 1 2
10 11
13 12
1. Outer frame crossbeam

2. Screw
6. Outer frame shaft
10. Inner arm support
11. Inner arm
12. Inner frame shaft
13. Outer frame arm
Fig. 1
1 / 4 Rev: A 10/19 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 3 / 120 / 172

MA01 / MA02
BRACING -
2 OUTER FRAME ASSEMBLY
Prepare the crossbeams and arms on the floor, placing the outer frame adjustment elements in position.
6. Outer frame shaft

7. Outer frame rod
8. Connecting rod
9. Counter-nut
Fig. 2
Hang a crossbeam "1" from its tabs and raise it to the desired height.
Move the crossbeam near the tower and attach it to the tower section's tabs.Keep it tethered to the tower with
an auxiliary fastening system.
FIG. 3
Attach arms "13" to the tabs of the tower's sections and fasten them to crossbeam "1" with screws "2" (fig. 4)
forming a "U".

MA01 / MA02
BRACING -
Finally, mount the crossbeam with remaining joining elements 2, 3, 4 and 5. (See Fig.4)
APPROXIMATE ASSEMBLY TORQUE = 800 Nm
Fig. 4
Fix the pre-assembled frame to the section with the use of the adjustment elements of each sector. (See Fig.2)
3 INNER FRAME ASSEMBLY
Place the supports "9" of the inner frame on the handrails of the tower's section and fix it to them.
Fig. 5
Adjust screw "A" to align the height of support "B" with shaft "C" of the outer frame.
C A
Fig. 6

MA01 / MA02
BRACING -
Place the inner frame "10" supporting the arms on the supports "9" and adjust it to the inside of the struts with
the use of the shafts "11" of each arm. (See Fig.7)
Fig. 7

21LC290
BRACED CRANE -
If a crane needs to be erected at a height greater than its free-standing height (H), it must be braced via a frame
which embraces the tower section.
Bracing is fitted at the join between standard sections.
Cranes can be braced against buildings or from the ground.

Bracing against a building: connection to beams in the structure of the building.
Bracing against to the ground:connection to the ground via steel cables.
Depending on the final height under hook, several tie-frames may be necessay.
For heights above 100 m, contact COMANSA.

For special assemblies contact COMANSA.
A Base/tower version. (Refer to Datasheet).
H Free-standing height.
H1 Max. height with 1 level of bracing.
H2 Max. height with 2 levels of bracing.
h0 Nº of sections below the first bracing
frame.
h1 Nº of sections between bracing frames.
h Nº of sections above top bracing frame.
A 3XA72 5XA72
42,6 64,9
H
(7xS25) (11xS25)
81,1 97,9
(14xS25) (17xS25)
H1
h 52,0 (9xS25) h 46,5 (8xS25)
h0 29,1 (5xS25) h0 51,4 (9xS25)
108,6 130,9
(19xS25) (23xS25)
H2 h 46,5 (8xS25) h 46,5 (8xS25)

h1 33,0 (6xS25) h1 33,0 (6xS25)
h0 29,1 (5xS25) h0 51,4 (9xS25)

21LC290
BRACED CRANE -
If a crane needs to be erected at a height greater than its free-standing height (H), it must be braced via a frame
which embraces the tower section.
Bracing is fitted at the join between standard sections.
Cranes can be braced against buildings or from the ground.

Bracing against a building: connection to beams in the structure of the building.
Bracing against to the ground:connection to the ground via steel cables.
Depending on the final height under hook, several tie-frames may be necessay.
For heights above 100 m, contact COMANSA.

For special assemblies contact COMANSA.
A Base/tower version. (Refer to Datasheet).
H Free-standing height.
H1 Max. height with 1 level of bracing.
H2 Max. height with 2 levels of bracing.
h0 Nº of sections below the first bracing
frame.
h1 Nº of sections between bracing frames.
h Nº of sections above top bracing frame.
A ES72
63,1
H
(11xS25)
96,1
(17xS25)
H1
h 46,5 (8xS25)
h0 49,6 (9xS25)
129,1
(23xS25)
H2 h 46,5 (8xS25)
h1 33,0 (6xS25)
h0 49,6 (9xS25)

-
CRANE DISMANTLING -
DURING CRANE DISMANTLING OPERATIONS WEARING SAFETY HARNESS IS COMPULSORY.
Crane dismantling sequence will be opposite to that used for erection
1.- If crane height is greater than self-stable height, with stays, tower sections will be removed by means
of the climbing cage until reaching a height such that the mobile crane may be used (see documents
regarding CLIMBING SECTION ERECTION).
Remove the cage.
2.- Unreeve the lifting cable.

Override lift hook travel limiter and hoist it at a low speed to fix it to the trolley or hang the hook from the
mobile crane to bring it to ground level.
Bring the trolley to the jib end untying the cable from the jib end, fixing it to the trolley.
Actuate on the hoisting drive to reel the cable while bringing it toward the tower.
Release the cable end from the trolley and reel all the cable on the hoisting drum, fixing it to avoid
unreeling.
Fix the trolley to the first jib section for dismantling both as a unit.
3.- Unreeve the trolley cable.

If the jib is being dismantled as a whole, cable unreeving can be made with the jib at ground level.
If the jib is dismantled in sections, unreeve the cable overhead, release cable terminals from the trolley
and gather the cables inside the jib.
Remove trolley drive electrical connection.
4.- Remove jib safety cable (guardrail).
5.- Remove counterweight blocks and jib elements
6.- Dismantle the counterjib.
7.- Dismantle the slewing part.

Remove electrical connection of base box, remove hose to tower attachment fasteners
Arrange electrical hoses such that they can be lowered together with the slewing part
Using adequate slings, suspend the slewing part from the mobile crane, remove the connecting bolts of
the lower crown wheel holder to the last tower section and bring down to ground level
8.- Dismantle the tower
9.- Remove base ballast
10.- Dismantle the base

-
SCRAPPING THE CRANE -
Social awareness of the need for Sustainable Growth requires the construction field to enable recycling for
equipment and materials that have reached the end of their useful lives.
The most outstanding advantage to this recycling effort is the concurrent solution of problems originating in
elimination of some sub-products of waste as well as obtaining new raw material, which reduces the quantity
of newly extracted natural resources.
Waste from maintenance operations, before being disposed of, must be classified according to type:
- Structure, mechanisms, and steel cables.

- Electrical parts.
- Plastic materials.
- Lubricants.
Such materials should be disposed of by authorized companies.
At the end of the crane's useful life its raw materials should be recycled rather than thrown away.
The apparatus, accessories, fluids and packaging should be sent to sites set aside for ecological reutilization.
Waste from electronics and electronic devices should be stored at places set aside for selective recovery.
Disposal and scrapping of the crane should be performed according to the provisions of current legislation
in the country where the work is performed.
Proper disposal of waste generated in the scrapping of the crane contributes to the conservation of resources
and the prevention of possible environmental problems.
The owner may scrap the crane by separating all materials according to their type:

- Electrical parts.
- Plastics.
- Lubricants.
Such materials should be disposed of by authorized enterprises.
1 / 1 Rev: A 10/26 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approval 3 / 140 / 179

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 000 0193 IB
21LC
INDEX EFU5-50-45
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Electric wiring and grounding.................................................................................020 0022 IB A 4
Crane electric equipment.......................................................................................030 0037 IB A 8
Electrical assembly.................................................................................................040 0028 IB A 13
Start up system......................................................................................................050 0004 IB A 17
Travelling system - electrical installation................................................................060 0005 IB B 20
Slewing system - electrical part..............................................................................070 0007 IB A 26
Hoisting system -electrical part-.............................................................................080 0009 IB A 47
Trolley system -electrical part-................................................................................090 0012 IB A 68
Trolley change system............................................................................................100 0002 IB B 87
Weather vaning......................................................................................................110 0001 IB C 97
Anemometer...........................................................................................................110 0004 IB B 99
Data display unit.....................................................................................................115 0003 IB B 104
Data display unit.....................................................................................................115 0007 IB C 171
Electrical maintenance...........................................................................................120 0001 IB E 175
Crane control diagrams..........................................................................................140 0005 IB C 178
Electric diagram..................................................................................................... 1407P00891 181
General assembly.................................................................................................150 0066 ES A 229

21LC
ELECTRIC WIRING AND GROUNDING -
THIS SECTION CONTAINS INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR CRANE

PROPER POWER SUPPLY AND EARTHING. NOT COMPLYING WITH THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD
CAUSE DAMAGE TO PERSONS OR MATERIALS.
he electrical connection must guarantee a rated voltage of 400 V with fluctuations of less than +5%
T
and a wave frequency of 50 Hz with fluctuations of less than +1%.
0 CONTENTS
1 Regulations
2 Site switchboard
3 Power supply cable
4 Equipment electrical data
5 Earthing (power supply)
6 Earthing of crane structure
7 Leakage currents
1 Regulations
The following regulations have been complied with
- IEC 60364-4-41, Protection against electric shocks
- IEC 364-4-47, Application of protective measures for safety
- IEC 60364-5-54, Earthing arrangements and protective conductors
- IEC 60364-6, Low-voltage electrical installations. Verification.
Also, other regulations and standards might be applicable and must be complied with as a function of the
crane site.
2. Site switchboard
Electrical supply to the crane must be taken from the site switchboard (standards IEC 60436-4; EN 60439-4)
This switchboard must be provided with a protective enclosure adequate for the actual environment. IP44
minimum protection made of insulating material is recommended.
The electrical supply cable from site switchboard to the crane shall be provided with short-circuit and thermal
circuit breakers. This protection can be accomplished by:
- Line protection fuses, characteristic curve gL.
Fuses must be selected in accordance with the cross section of the cable to be protected (See manufacturer’s
specific tables with data of cables used). Design cable current shall never be higher than fuse rated
current.
- Line protection thermal magnetic circuit breaker, tripping curves B and C, or above (curves D or K or
motor overload protection)
Breaker current may not be higher than maximum line working current.
A differential circuit breaker must also be provided for protection against indirect contacts. This protection
and the earthing of the electrical supply line must comply with national standards and regulations applicable
at the site.
Cranes with frequency converters could exhibit fault currents continuously tripping protection differential
circuit breakers. If this should be the case, differential circuit breakers immune to this kind of fault currents
shall be used.
Some crane electric devices like inverters include filters to bring voltage supply quality to a sufficient level. These
filters are passive components which “clean” the supply voltage by blocking high frequency current harmonics
and diverting them to earth. Under some circumstances, these leakage currents can make the RCD (residual
current device) to trip. If such is the case, immunized RCD devices must be used instead.
3 Electrical supply cable

The electrical supply cable must be adequate for the working voltage, the installed power, the distance to the
crane and the environment.
Cable type RVK-06/1kV (UNE 21123 – IEC 502) for indoor or outdoor stationary overhead or underground
installations is recommended provided site conditions do not require a special cable.

4.
2 / 4
POWER SUPPLY GENERATOR
POWER ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
3 x 400 V 50 Hz (4)
Model
Hoist Trolley Slewing Travel Current (1) Current (2) Fuse (3) Cable (5) Length (6) Length (7)
kVA
Rev: A
kW kW kW kW Total (A) Crest (A) (A) Type Total (m) minimun
37 123 193 160 130 50 170 40
13/21
50 152 248 200 160 50 135 40
21LC290/12 t
7,5 3 x 7,5 2 x 3,7
21LC290/18 t
65 176 291 250 180 70 160 60
other elements of the electrical supply :
110 239 409 315 250 95 150 80
37 135 209 160 140 50 153 40

Electrical data for the installation
21LC400/12 t 2 x 3,7
21LC400/18 t
50 165 264 200 170 50 130 40
7,5 4 x 7,5
21LC550/12 t
65 188 307 250 195 70 150 60
21LC550/18 t
21LC550/24 t 4 x 3,7
110 251 424 315 260 95 140 80
50 165 264 200 170 50 130 40

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

ELECTRIC WIRING AND GROUNDING
21LC660/18 t 65 7,5 4 x 7,5 4 x 3,7 188 307 250 195 70 150 60
110 251 424 315 260 95 140 80
Vº Bº
21LC660/24 t
21LC660/36 t 65 197 318 250 205 70 140 60
21LC660/48 t
13 4 x 7,5 4 x 3,7
21LC750/24 t
Below please find a table with electrical data for the installation to assist in selecting the cable and
-
21LC750/36 t 110 260 435 315 270 95 135 80

21LC
21LC750/48 t
020 0022 IB
4 / 020 / 5
21LC
NOTES:
1. Total current is the sum of all motor rated currents with a simultaneity coefficient of 0.8
2. Peak current is the sum of hoist motor maximum current (at speed change) and the rated currents
of the rest of the motors.
3. Line protection fuse gL or magnetic thermal circuit breaker (see par. 2 – site switchboard)
4. The generator must be able to start with hoist motor maximum current (at speed change). and with
the breaking power related to lowering of maximum load at maximum speed.
5. Electrical supply cable may not be smaller than size stated in table.
6. This length is the maximum allowable for the cable stated. The length is the sum of the electrical
supply to the crane foot plus the length of cable installed in the tower.
This cable has been designed for 4% voltage drop at rated current.
If the total length of the electrical supply cable plus the tower cable should be above the stated
value, a cable with more cross section shall be installed. Cable cross section selection must also
take into account the voltage drop through tower cable (cross section of this cable is table stated
cross section) and table stated currents.
7. Electrical supply cable length plus tower cable length must always be above this value.
8. The power values indicate the rated mechanical power of each mechanism working separately.
The electrical power required to supply them is somewhat higher.
5. Earthing (electrical supply cable)

Crane must be earthed through the protection conductor provided in the crane electrical supply cable.
This protection conductor, of green yellow colour shall have the minimun cross section statedin the
following table:
INSTALLATION PHASE CONDUCTOR MINIMUN CROSS SECTION OF

CROSS SECTIONS PROTECTION CONDUCTOR
(mm²) (mm²)
S < 16 S
16 < S < 35 16
S > 35 S/2
Earthing must be done by a qualified engineer, and must be adequate for the selected differential protection
against indirect contacts and must be done according to the set of standards and laws applicable on the
place where the crane is erected. Its effectiveness must be checked as indicated on IEC 60364-6.
The earthing of the current supply must be connected before connecting the voltage and must be disconnect
after disconnecting the voltage.
6. Earthing of the structure
Prior to crane start up, the contractor must check the need for earthing of the crane structure as well as
protection measures against lightning (applicable regulations for accident hazard prevention – insurance
company’s or owner’s requirements – etc.)
Earthing the structure is recommended as a precaution measure against electrostatic discharge, although
this will not guarantee full protection against lightning.
If the crane should need full protection against lightning, it shall comply with jobsite local regulations in force.
If this should be the case, installing lightning arrestors at the power supply connection is recommended for the
protection of crane electrical equipment.

21LC
The following instructions must be followed when earthing the structure:
- Minimum earthing lead cross section shall be 35 mm2 for copper conductors, or 30 mm x 3,5 mm
galvanised strip.
- Earth electrodes must be driven to a minimum depth of 2m
- Leads shall be connected through M10 bolts with lock nuts and washers
- Earth resistance above 20 ohms is not recommended
- Crane structure earthing surface must be ground for a better electric contact
- For cranes on track: Rail ends must be earthed through earth electrodes. Rails longer than 20 m must
have an earth connection every 20 m. Rail sections must be electrically linked and all rail ends must have
a direct earth connection.
CRANE ON SUPPORTS CRANE ON TRACK CRANE ANCHORED TO

FOUNDATION
7 Leakage currents
Some of the units of the crane have electrical filters, which are necessary for reducing the level of electric
interference conducted to and from the unit. Due to their operating principle, the filters can generate leakage
currents greater than 30mA that, nevertheless, do not imply a risk to people. These leakage currents can
make the differential switches that protect the crane trip.
As indicated in the section "Switching panel", if nuisance differential protection trips occur, you must use a
differential that is immune to this type of default currents. When selecting the differential, you must choose a
differential suitable for the installation and take into account the nominal current of the crane indicated in the
table in the "Electrical data for installation" section.
The following table shows the typical and maximum leakage currents for the different crane models:
Typical leakage current Maximum leakage current

MODEL POWER
(mA) (mA)
37/50/65 1,5 260
21LC290
110 2,1 280
37/50/65 1,5 260
21LC400
110 2,1 280
37/50/65 1,5 260
21LC550
110 2,1 280
50/65 1,5 260
21LC660
110 2,1 280
65 1,5 260
21LC750
110 2,1 280
Note: the values in the table are orientative. Factors such as the phase unbalance, the length of the
supply and the load of the motors can make the leakage level significantly higher or lower than the typical
leakage level.

21LC290/400/550
CRANE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT -
0 CONTENTS
1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
2 TOWER FOOT BOX AND TOWER CABLE
3 SWITCHGEAR CABINET
4 TOP ASSEMBLY / SLEWING PART
5 CRANE CONTROL
6 LIMIT SWITCHES AND LIMITERS
1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
CJE, CME, FME, CJC, FMC, LCA,

FMEE, FMEI, LB, LSR, LCAR ,LCT,
LBR, LS, ME, MVE, CJLM, E33, LM, CJL, LC, LC2, LCTR, LC4, MC,
PPE, RE, TEE LM2, LMPWL LPCD, LPCT LC3, LC4 PPC
MP
AEL, BAL1, BAL2, BO, E1C, E1P,

E230, E2P, E2E,E2S,E2R, E2C, E41, CAB, E5, E9, E110,
E42, E43, E44, E4E,E8/1, E8/2, E11, E230, E91, E92, E933
EL, IACM, RC, RG
LGI, LGD, MG1, FMG1, DBG1, MG2,

FMG2, DBG2, MG3, FMG3, DBG3, E
MG4, FMG4, DBG4
AT, CJA, IAG, T22
LTA, LTT
MRT1, FMT1, MTR2, FMT2,
MTR3, FMT3, MTR4, FMT4
Fig. 1
AEL Hoisting slewing cabinet DBG1 Slewing motor release (1)

AJ Cage cabinet (optional) DBG2 Slewing motor release (2)
AT Travelling cabinet (optional) DBG3 Slewing motor release (3)
BAL1 Pilot light amber DBG4 Slewing motor release (4)
BAL2 Pilot light red E Crane power supply socket
BO Hooter E1P Trolley socket (motor power)
CAB Operator cabin E1C Trolley socket
CJA Cable con. box with switch E230 Auxiliar socket (230 V máx. 10 A)
CJC Trolley winch distribution box E2P Power plug
CJE Hoisting winch distribution box E2E Encoder motor plug
CJL Load limiter box E2S Sensor over speed plug
CJLM Moment, load and reeving distribution box E2R Resistance disipation plug
CME Hoisting motor captator E2C Rest hoist elements (brake, ventilation, probes

21LC290/400/550
and up-down limiter) LCAR Trolley fast forward limiter

E41 Slewing motor plug 1 LCT Trolley back limiter
E42 Slewing motor plug 2 LCTR Trolley fast backward limiter
E43 Slewing motor plug 3 LGD Right slewing limiter
E44 Slewing motor plug 4 LGI Left slewing limiter
E4E Encoder slewing plug LJMP Forward momentum cage limit swicht (optional)
E5 Cabin power plug LJMT Rear momentum cage limit swicht (optional)
E8/1 Erecting unit socket LM Maximum torque limiter
E8/2 Erecting unit socket LM2 90% maximun limiter
E9 Cabin control socket LMPWL PowerLift limiter
E11 Auxiliar socket (230 V max. 1A) LPCD Trolley forwards limit swicht
E110 Auxiliar socketr (110 V max. 10A) LPCT Trolley backwards limit swicht
E33 Load limiter plug LS Hoist up limiter
E91 Remote control socket or cabin seat controls LSR Fast hoist up limiter
E92 Forbidden zones socket LTA Forward travelling limiter
E933 Events register function socket LTT Backward travelling limiter
EJ Cage limit swicht plug (optional) MC Trolley motor
EL Load, momentum and reeving change limit ME Hoisting motor
swicht plug MG1 Slewing motor (1)
FMC Trolley motor brake MG2 Slewing motor (2)
FME Hoist motor brake (37/50/65kW) MG3 Slewing motor (3)
FMEE External hoist motor brake (110kW) MG4 Slewing motor (4)
FMEI Internal hoist motor brake (110kW) MP Auxiliary jib motor (optional)
FMG1 Slewing motor brake 1 MTR1 Travelling motor 1 (optional)
FMT1 Travelling motor brake 1 (optional) MVE Fan motor
FMT2 Travelling motor brake 2 (optional) PPC Trolley emergency stop
FMT3 Travelling motor brake 3 (optional) PPE Hoisting emergency stop
FMT4 Travelling motor brake 4 (optional) RC Trolley resistor
IACM Load and momentum disabler RE Hoisting resistor
IAG Box (Crane switch) RG Slewing resistor
LB Hoist down limiter TEE Encoder hoist motor
LBR Hoist up limiter T22 Service transformer (optional)
LC Maximum load limiter
LC2 2º level load limiter
LCA Trolley forward limiter
2 TOWER FOOT BOX AND CRANE CABLE

The electrical equipment starts at the power supply terminals IAG of the crane foot box (CJA).
This box is provided with crane tower cable protecting fuses and with an isolator for isolating the electric equi-
pment of the crane from the power supply.
If it should be required, the isolator may be locked in the off position “0”, by means of a lock with key.
The tower cable to be connected to the cabinet by a quick connect plug comes from this box. (included
in the power supply of the T22 crane, in case required).
3 ELECTRICAL CABINET & SWITCHGEAR

The electrical installations of the crane are in a cabinet located on the cabin platform.
The cabinet is equipped with an isolator located in the door which disconnects the electric power supply from
the power and movement control circuits.

21LC290/400/550
The corresponding key should be used to open the cabinet doors and this can only be carried out if the door
isolator is not in the disconnected position «0».
Isolating switch fails to cut out:

- Erection circuit.
- Cabin power circuit.
- Auxiliary socket 230 V.
- Top and hoisting cabinet heating and ventilating circuit.
- Operations transformer supply.
The cage cabinet AJ is located next to the hydraulic unit and contains the cage operation equipment and tools.
The crane is provided with two emergency stop buttons (mushroom type) situated close to the hoisting winch
and trolley winch, for use in case necessary during crane maintenance operations.
The electric cabinet are provided with one 230 V - 1 A outlet, for the computer connection.
3.1 LOW TEMPERATURES

To prevent the electronic equipment from operating at extremely low temperatures or when there are
sudden temperature changes, the electric cabinets are fitted with heating resistances and fans for heating
or refreshing the inside air. These units are regulated by thermostats that control the temperature inside
the cabinets, so that below 00 C heating resistances work, between 00 and 50 C the ventilation and heating
resistances work at the same time, and above 50 the ventilation works.
Electronic units can malfunction or break down at low temperatures.

When temperatures are below 00 C it is advisable to allow the electric cabinet heating system to operate
even when the crane is out of service. For this, leave the crane's electric power on, keeping the load
breaker switch at the crane's base connected and disconnect the load breaker switch located in the top
cabinet (this will cut the crane's power and control circuits).
Review with Comansa in the following cases:
- Operating temperatures below -150 C
- Storage temperatures below -250 C
Electrical storms can cause disturbances in the power grid that may damage some of the crane's electronic
equipment. Some of this equipment remains connected to the network after the remote's stop button is
pressed. When a storm is predicted, it is recommended to disconnect the crane from the CJA inlet box,
thus disconnecting all the equipment and reducing the risk of damage.
4 PLATFORM CABIN / ROTARY PART ASSEMBLY

This structural assembly contains the trolley/slewing cabinet, the slewing mechanisms, the trolley resistor and
the momentum limiting system. All these items are wired other.
The electric power supply connections of the items that do not come factory wired, are done using fast connector
plugs.
Optional items, such as assembly equipment or an auxiliary jib, are also connected to the cabinet of the cabin
platform using fast connector plugs.
5 CRANE CONTROL
The crane is controlled from the cabin using a fast connector plug connected to the cabinet of the cabin platform.
The controls always have automatic reset and locking against conflicting movements.

21LC290/400/550
6 LIMIT SWITHES AND LIMITERS

The carne is provided with the following limit switches and limiters:
1 Travel end stop per path.

2 Slewing end stop.
3 Lifting end stop.
4 Trolley end stop
5 Momentum limiter
6 Load limiters.
7 Reeving change limiters
8 Cage momentum limiters.
- Rail travel limit switch

It is a position limiter located on the translation frame. Its purpose is to stop crane translation at runway limits
in both directions.
- Slewing limit switch.

It is a revolution counter located at the slewing ring. Its purpose is to limit the slewing movement to a given
number of revolutions in order to prevent the electric cables going through the slewing part from torsional da-
mage. This limit switch may not be used to limit crane movement in a slewing forbidden area.
Cranes with slip ring unit are not provided with this limit switch.
- Hoist limit switch

It is a revolution counter located at the hoisting winch drum. Its purpose is to stop the hook at hoisting limits in
both directions. Also provided with fast speed limiters before reaching the limit switches.
- Trolley limit switch

It is a revolution counter located at the trolley winch drum. Its purpose is to stop trolley translation at runway
limits in both directions. Also provided with fast speed limiters before reaching the limit switches.
- Moment limiters
The system incorporates 3 position limiters situated in the cathead of the crane. The maximum moment limiter
is used to prevent the crane from being overloaded by the load moment (See load–range diagram). It cuts off
the elevation movements of the hook and trolley to the jib point. In addition, it indicates the limit condition by
illuminating a red light and sounding the claxon continuously.
The 90% moment limiter disables the fast speed of the trolley. In addition, it indicates the approach to maximum
moment by illuminating an amber light and intermittently sounding the claxon.
LMPWL limiter is associated with the POWERLIF system.
- Load limiters.
There are four position limiters situated in the first jib section which are used to prevent the crane from being
overloaded. One of these is activated when the maximum load is exceeded and disconnects the hoisting mo-
vement of the hook and trolley movement to the jib point. In addition, the limit condition is indicated with the
illumination of a red light and the horn sounding continuously. The other three limit switches are used to limit
the maximum lifting load according to the speed range selected in the cab.

21LC290/400/550
- Reeving change limiters.

These two limiters (LPCT and LPCD) are fitted to the first section of the jib and belong to the reeving change
system. They are connected to the cabinet of the cabin platform by means of the E34 socket.
- Cage momentum limiters.

They contain 2 limiters that engage when the working momentum limits are reached and they cut off the cage's
movements. The limiting status is indicated through pilot lights in the cage cabinet AJ.
Good condition and proper operation and calibration of limiters and limit switches are a must for guaranteeing
a safe crane operation.
For more details on limiters and limit switches, see inspection and calibrating instructions in chapter “ASSEMBLY
/ DISMANTLING” of this manual, and “CHECKS PRIOR TO START UP”.
Note: A switch with a key (IACM) located in the cabinet of the cabin platform allows for the maximum load and
momentum limiters to be disabled, for supervision tasks. (fig. 3)
Fig. 3
Ensure that the load and momentum limiters are not disabled by the IACM switch while the crane is
operating.

21LC290/400/550
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY -
0 CONTENTS
1 FACTORY MADE CONNECTIONS.
2 ELECTRIC ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE
1 FACTORY MADE CONNECTIONS.

The crane is factory connected as follows:
- Main breakers at crane base

Comprising:
- Service box with breaker CJA.
- Tower service cable with intermediate hangers and end plug for E connectors on the slewing unit.
- Slewing assembly unit.

Includes:
- Slew motors MG1, MG2, MG3 and MG4, connected to the electrical service box by means of E41,
E42, E43, E44 and E4E.
- Full slewing system with LGI/LGD travel limiter.
- Slewing sensor for the zone limitation system (optional).
- Cabin platform unit.

Includes:
- Electrical service box.
- CAB control cab.
- Dissipation resistor of the RC trolley and RG slewing mechanism.
- First jib section.

Includes:
- The LC, LC2, LC3 and LC4 load limiting system, with CJL intermediate limiters box connected to
the CJLM box by means of the E33 connector.
- CQ load pin for the cab indication system.
- Apex.
Includes:
- The LM, LM2 and LMPWL momentum limitation system with CJLM intermediate limiters box,
connected to the electrical service box by means of the EL connector.
- Third jib section.

Includes:
- Trolley mechanism and end stop.
These elements are electrically connected in an intermediate CJC box with two outputs: E1P
for the trolley motor and E1S for the rest (probe, brake and travel limiter). These connectors are
connected to the trolley/slewing unit service box during assembly.
The travel limiter has a built-in trolley position detector for the in-cab indication system.
- Counter-jib unit.
Includes:
- Hoisting mechanism and end stop.
- ME lifting motor.
- Travel limitation system.
- RE Dissipation resistor.
- E2P Power connector.
- E2E Motor encoder connector.
- E2S Speed sensor connector.
- E2R Dissipation resistor connector.
- E2C Connector for the rest of the lifting components (brake, ventilation, probes and travel
limitation).
- CJE Distribution box.

21LC290/400/550
The travel limitation system has a built-in lift position detector for the in-cab indication system.
- Auxiliary jib (optional), with its control system.
- Reeving change system.

Includes:
- LPCT and LPCD Trolley end-position limiters. These elements are connected to the CJLM box.
- Cab.
Includes:
- E5 connector for cab power.
- E9 connector for crane manoeuvring.
- E933 connector for the IMDL46 cab recorder (optional). The cables to subsequently connect the
CQ load pin to the lift and trolley end stops, slewing sensor (optional) and momentum capture
system come out of the IMDL46 central indication unit.
- Climbing section.
Includes:
- Hydraulic group to control box connections via connectors E8/1 and E8/2 (optional).
- Radio controller send/receive unit with base connected via E9 (optional).
- Auxiliary jib unit connected to CJE distribution box (optional).
- Anemometer unit connected to trolley/slewing unit service box terminals X1-IO, X1-I1G and X1-G.
- Travel unit connected to trolley/slewing unit service box terminals X1-L41, L42, L43, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
I0, I11 and GND (optional).
All connectors are marked with their names and codes in order to facilitate correct connections.
All the electrical components built into each of the above structural components are factory-wired together;
during the assembly/disassembly sequence it is necessary to connect/disconnect these elements using
the built-in quick connectors.
Electrical service box connectors:

E1P Trolley power
E1S Trolley manoeuvring
E2P Power connector.
E2E Motor encoder connector.
E2S Speed sensor connector.
E2R Dissipation resistor connector.
E2C Connector for the rest of the lifting components (brake, ventilation, probes and travel
limitation).
E41 Slewing motor 1.
E4E Slewing encoder connector.
EL Momentum limiters, load and reeving change connectors.

21LC290/400/550
Connectors in the electrical service box:

EL Momentum limiters, load and reeving change connectors.
E8/1 Climbing equipment connector.
E8/2 Climbing equipment connector.
E11 230 VAC 1A auxiliary.
Cab connectors:
E5 cab power
E9 cab control (exterior)
E933 IMDL46 Signal recording connector
E110 110 V 10 A auxiliary
E230 230 V 10 A auxiliary
E91 cab control (interior)
E92 zone limitation system
E93 recorder (indication system)
E991 trolley sensor (indication system)
E992 lift sensor (indication system)
E993 momentum sensor (indication system)
E994 load sensor (indication system)
E995 slewing sensor (indication system)
2 ELECTRIC ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE
- Install service box CJA by means of its support at the base of the crane. The service box comes connected
to the service cable; to install it, pull from the inside of the cable roll using the hanger fastened to it.
- If the crane is equipped with auxiliary transformer T22 (optional for destination with 60 Hz supply) connect
the transformer input to the service entrance available at the connection point; voltage range can be
selected from 480 V to 520 V in order to ensure 460 V 60 Hz supply for crane operation.
- Bring electrical supply to the tower, placing the intermediate hangers a maximum of 40 metres apart.
Once the rotating part is in place, fasten the service cables to it using the upper support.
- Once the cab platform is in place on top of the rotating part, connect the slewing connectors E41, E42,
E43, E44 and E4E.
- Once the first counter-jib section and the first jib section are in place, you may connect junction box CJLM
(momentum limiters, load and reeving change) using the EL connector. Before making this connection
you must connect the CJL load limiters box to the CJLM box using the E33 connector.
Attach the electrical service cables from the service box to the support using the pin located on the vertical
of the rotating part.

21LC290/400/550
- Connect the connectors from electrical service box E to the ones that come out of the apex service box
(follow the matching colours and markings on the cable).
The service cable should be connected by qualified personnel, according to the instructions in this manual
for "ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND GROUNDING".
During assembly, it is prohibited to make any of the crane's active phase connections without having first
connected the grounding cable. Likewise, during disassembly, it is obligatory to keep the grounding cable
connected until all active phases have been disconnected. This must be taken into consideration provided
the connection/disconnection operation is not carried out by means of a connector which connects all
phases simultaneously, for example if unipolar tower hoses are being used.
- At this time, once the electrical power is on and controls E9, E5 and E933 are connected, the slewing
unit may be rotated to facilitate assembly of the jib and counter-jib.
To carry out this operation without the E1S trolley connector and the E2S lift connector being connected,
you must connect the aerial connectors from the right side of the service box to the corresponding E1S
and E2S service box cables.
- Once the slewing unit jib is assembled, connect trolley connectors E2P and E2S to the service box.
- Once the counter-jib is assembled, connect all the lift connectors E2P, E2S, E2R, E2E and E2C to the
electrical service box.
- To interconnect the cab indication system, remove the cables that go to the load and moment systems
(in the first jib section), to the trolley and lift end stops and to the rotation sensor (optional) from the inside
of the cab. These cables must be pulled through the opening in the upper part of the cab's external
connections area.
- For travelling cranes, make the connection from the apex service box to the travel service box at the
base, for both power and manoeuvring, routing the cables in the same place as the main electrical service
cable. Install the travel end stop in its work position and connect the travel motor cables.
- If the crane is equipped with radio control, install the amber-green lamp that is supplied with the crane
following the "USING THE CRANE" instructions in this manual.
- If the crane is equipped with an anemometer, install the signal unit where it is visible to people in the
vicinity of the crane.
- The crane is now ready for operation and installation.
To facilitate and enable lifting, trolley and slewing movements in the crane assembly/disassembly stage
only, there is a ID key-operated selector switch inside the lift service box.
The functions of this selector switch are to:

- Limit the maximum lift and trolley speed to lower speeds.
- Limit the maximum slewing speed to first speed values.
- Allow lifting and trolley movements regardless of the status of reeving change limiters LPCT and
LPCD, load limiter LC4 and lift travel limiter LS.
- The crane is now ready for operation and installation.

11LC; 21LC
START UP SYSTEM -
0 CONTENTS
1 START UP SYSTEM
2 PHASE PROTECTION RELAY
3 START STOP SAFETY RELAY
1 START UP SYSTEM
For start up press the start up button located in the crane control panel
This operation can only be done if:
- Power supply isolating switches are in “On” position “I”.

Existen dos seccionadores en la grúa:
- In cabinet at crane foot
- On door of top electrical cabinet.
- Emergency stop pushbuttons must be unlocked.

There are three emergency stop pushbuttons:
- In crane control panel
- Outside the electrical cabinet
- Near trolley mechanism
The two latter pushbuttons are provided in case they are needed during crane erection and maintenance
operations
- Power supply phase sequence must be correct.

See phase protection relay in this chapter.
- A permissive start up signal is given by the safety relay as a function of a number of external
conditions.
See start stop safety relay in this chapter.
In case the permissive signal is present, pressing the start pushbutton entails the connection of the main
switch in electrical cabinet (power and control), the crane being ready for operation.
2 PHASE PROTECTION RELAY

(Refer to electrical diagram RCF)
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Three phase grid phase sequence is controlled by this relay.
Failure of one or more phases is detected by this relay.
Power supply.............L1, L2, L3

Connections
Relay output.....................11-14

11LC; 21LC
START UP SYSTEM -
DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Phase sequence O.K.
Three phases connected.

AMBER LED ON
Relay connected.
Main switch connects when pressing start, the crane
being operative.
Incorret phase sequence.
At least one phase not connected.
AMBER LED OFF Cranne cannot operate.
Main switch would not connect when pressing start.
Swap two phases of crane power supply strip.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Anomaly Symptom Cause/Solution

Power supply phase sequence wrong.
Main switch would not connect with crane powersu- (this will reverse movement direction)
pplied and start button pressed. At least one supply phase failed.
AMBER relay pilot off. Swap two phases of power supply.

.
Check likely phase connection failure
Loss of at least 1 phase of power supply, so relay
No crane movement is possible. Any movement ope-
cuts in.
rating is stopped automatically via a controlled stop.
The amber light on the relay is off Check likely supply phase failure.
3 START STOP SAFETY RELAY

(Refer to electrical diagram RSM)
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Emergency stop mushroom button operative state is controlled by this relay.
Control and stop circuit failures are controlled by this relay.
- 24 V a.c. supply....................A1, A2
- Stop circuit A........................S11, S12
- Stop circuit B........................S21, S22
Connections - Start......................................S12, S39
- Relay K1 output....................13, 14
- Relay K2 output....................23, 24
- Bridge between....................13, 23

11LC; 21LC
START UP SYSTEM -
DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Yellow led A1 / A2 on. 24 V a.c. supply O.K.
Stop circuit A, O.K.

Yellow led K1 on
Relay 1 O.K
Stop circuit B, O.K
Yellow led K2 on.
Relay 2 O.K
Yellow led A1 / A2 off. 24 V a.c. supply wrong. No voltage.
Stop circuit A, open.

Yellow led K1 off.
Relay 1 wrong.
Stop circuit B, open.
Yellow led K2 off.
Relay 2 wrong.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Anomaly / Symptom Cause / Solution
24 V a.c. supply wrong

Yellow led A1 / A2 off. No voltage between A1, A2
If voltage O.K. relay faulty, change relay.
Stop circuit A open.

Bridge S11, S12, if led lights up, check stop circuit
Yellow led K1 off A.
Relay 1 wrong.
If it does not light up, relay faulty, change relay.
Stop circuit B open

Bridge S21, S22, if led lights up, check stop circuit
Yellow led K2 off. B.
Relay 2 wrong.
If it does not light up, relay faulty, change relay.

-
TRAVELLING SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
2 BCR30 CONTROL CARD
3 BPR POWER BLOCK
4 OPERATING TABLES

Travelling movement is effected by several resistive rotor motors in short circuit with decelerator (eddy-current
brake). The motors drive through speed reducing gearboxes which, in turn, drive the travelling boogies. Move-
ment is very smooth during both acceleration and deceleration.
There are three speeds in either direction. The most suitable values for stator supply and decelerator voltages
are selected to achieve this. The special concept of the motors allows a really reduced first speed without the
need for high braking values, thereby avoiding excessive heating.
The control signals from the crane operator´s control are received in the BCR30 control card, which governs
both the power stages of the motors, control gear and BPR power blocks, as well the decelerators and elec-
tromechanical parking brakes.
The following functions are possible as a result:
- gradual shift between speeds, producing a high degree of smoothness during acceleration
- protection against a sharp reversal in operating direction from the control
- adjustment of first speed value
- adjustment of second speed value
- movement braking via supply to decelerator and subsequent actuation of electromechanical parking
brake
- adjustment of movement braking torque value
- protection against supply phase fault
Power and control gear are protected by magneto-thermal relays.
Movement is blocked by electromechanical brakes located in the motors. These brakes are actuated once mo-
vement has been stopped by the motor decelerator braking. In case of need, there is a pushbutton to actuate
the brakes.
Both mechanical and electrical design is strong and simple.
While transfer movement is taking place an alarm siren at the foot of the crane sounds intermittently to warn
anyone in the vicinity.
Inside the rotational motion cabinet there is a key switch that can lock rotational movement from the base of
the crane. It should only be activated once rotational movement has stopped. After activating the key switch
and before proceeding to work in the rotational area, you must check that rotational movement is impossible in
both directions. The use of the key switch locks the crane's movement but it also keeps the cabinet elements
powered (refer to the electric diagram).
In some cranes, the travel system incorporates a mechanical lock system in the wheel housing. This system
includes positioning switches which prevent travel if any of the latches are in the lock position or any position
other than idle in the unlock position. If the travel mechanism needs to be activated when the latches are not in
the idle in unlock position (for example, if the latches have become jammed), there is a switch with a key inside
the travel unit which cancels any limitations to the travel movement when activated.

-
2 BCR30 CONTROL CARD

2.1 Description.
This card receives the signals from the operators' control and provides suitable supplies to the motor stator
and for decelerator braking.
It covers the following functions:
- Supply for decelerator braking, depending on the speed selected by the operator.
- Control of the BPR power changer for supply of the motor stator.
- Timing, steps between speeds.
- Intelligent anti-reverse protection, distinguishing the speed point from when reverse starts.
- Timing the actuation of the motor´s electromechanical brake.
The BCR30 card can control one or several "BPR" power blocks, depending on the number of motors involved
in a movement.
2.2 Safety devices
- Thermal limitation.
If the temperature of the electronic circuit exceeds a certain safety level, then the maximum voltage which
may be supplied for decelerator braking is reduced to 10 Vdc.
- Incorrect control.
If the card receives commands to operate in both directions, no output will be produced, and the slewing
system will remain at rest.

- The card incorporates a green indicator Led:
On (steady) = normal operation.
Flashing = operation with thermal limitation.
Off = failure of supply to card.
2.3 Regulation.
The system includes the facility to set four parameters, each with its own potentiometer located in the "BCR30"
control card.
See P1-P2-P3- y P4 in the figure below:
CARD BCR30
P1 P2 P3 P4
P1 P2 P3 P4
5 5 5 5
1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
st
1 Speed 2nd Speed Stop Brake time

-
P1 "1 Speed." controls the first movement speed.

"MAX" means higher deceleration braking, and therefore lower speed.
Decelerator output between 3 and 15 Vdc (10 Vdc in the event of thermal limitation).
P2 "2 Speed" controls the second movement speed.

As in P1, "MAX" means higher deceleration, i.e. lower speed.
Decelerator output between 0 and 6 Vdc.
P3 "Stop" controls the progressiveness of dynamic movement braking.

"MAX" means higher deceleration, and therefore higher braking.
Decelerator output between 3 and 15 Vdc (10 Vdc in the event of thermal limitation).
P4 "Brake time" controls the time for each actuation of the electromechanical brake.
"MAX" means greater time.
Electromechanical brake actuation time between 2 and 20 sec.
The potentiometers P1, P2, P3, P4 are adjusted at the COMANSA factory to the theoretically
ideal average values for the crane in question.
Should adjustment be considered necessary, this should be carried out with full knowledge of the
procedure and its consequences. Do not hesitate to consult with the factory.
In any event the following considerations should be borne in mind:
first speed (P1)

It is not a good idea for this to be very short (high deceleration), especially if use is to be frequent and
held, as motor cooling may not be sufficient.
Neither should it be too long (low deceleration), as this would reduce the precision of short travelling
movements.
second speed (P2)

This should not be very long (low or nil braking), as the third speed point would not be distinguished.
dynamic braking (P3)

A balance should be reached where movement braking as the joy-stick passes zero does not cause
shocks to the crane structure (excessive braking), but neither should it be too long (low braking), leading
to a reduction in crane precision during use.
As a general rule, stopping all movement when passing zero from maximum speed should take place
within a period of between 5 and 8 seconds.
electromechanical brake actuation time (P4)

The electromechanical brake incorporated in the motor must always operate once movement of the motor
has been stopped by dynamic braking. If not, roughness in the crane would be the logical results.
This system incorporates a pushbutton in the operator's control to brake movement. The button cancels
the delay in the actuation of the electromechanical brake, and may be used, for example, to lock crane
travelling once it has already been stopped by dynamic braking, and there is a strong wind prevailing.

-
3 BPR POWER BLOCK

3.1 Description.
- The power block supplies different voltage values to the motor stator depending on the commands it
receives from the BCR30 control block.
- In the first speeds, it provides the motor with a reduced supply voltage, while in fast speed it supplies the
motor with the rated mains voltage.
- Each motor is governed by a power block.
3.2 Safety devices.

- Thermal limitation.
If the temperature of the electronic circuit exceeds a certain safety level, the block stops supplying the
motor.
- Input phase fault.

The block stops supplying the motor.

- The card incorporates two indicator Leds:
+ Green led:
- On (steady) = normal operation.
- Flashing = operation in reverse direction
- Off = phase fault in supply input.
+ Red led:
- Off = normal operation.
- On (steady) = phase fault in supply input.
- Flashing = thermal limitation.
3.3 Regulation.
The block can regulate two parameters:

- Motor stator supply voltage.
- Acceleration ramp in step to fast speed.
R S T U V W
Red Green
1 2
Initial Voltage
Block input Earth Output to Ramp Commutation
motor terminal
POT1
Controls the value of stator supply voltage in the first speeds, and therefore the torque applied by the
motors at these speeds.
Less voltage (less motor torque).
More voltage (more motor torque).
POT2 Changes the value of the voltage ramp in the step between the reduced value of the first speeds and
the rated mains voltage corresponding to fast spped.

-
Output voltage
V2
V1
Time
T1 T2
V1 = Reduced voltage (first speeds). Regulated by POT1.
V2 = Rated mains voltage.
T1 = Time to establish first speeds voltage (fixed and very short value).
T2 = Time for ramp to establish rated mains voltage. Regulated by POT2.
The potentiometers POT1 and POT2 are adjusted at the COMANSA factory to the theoretically ideal
average values for the crane in question.
Should adjustment be considered necessary, this should be carried out with full knowledge of the pro-
cedure and its consequences. Do not hesitate to consult with the factory.
In any event the following considerations should be borne in mind:
POT1 This should be set to obtain a good first speed for the working conditions on site.
It is inadvisable to exceed 300 V with 400 V 50 Hz mains, or 360 V with 480 V 60 Hz mains, becau-
se:
- A greater deceleration is needed to have a small 1st speed.
- Motor consumption, and therefore heating, is greater at low speeds.
- Slewing starting torques are greater, so that the demands on mechanisms, and crane structurE
are greater.
POT2 Provides a more progressive step to fast speed.

Adjustment range 0.4-8 sec.
It is advisable to locate the potentiometer in middle position.
Power block output voltage values should be similar, to avoid motors working out of balance.

-
4 OPERATING TABLES
X = Working
Contactor status
Control position -- = Rest
TAD TAT FT RT
Rest -- -- -- --
Travelling forwards 1 X -- X X
During braking (2) on passing zero -- -- X X
Travelling back 1 -- X X X
( 2) When the joy-stick passes zero, movement is braked by the motor decelerator during the time set in card BCR30.
After this time has elapsed, supply to the decelerators is cut off (contactor RG = OFF) and the electromechanicar
brake is actuated (FG = OFF)
NO = Contact open
BCR30 Card terminals BPR Terminals (1)
NC = Contact closed
Control position
1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 2-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 (1) R-S-T U-V-W
Rest 48 Va -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- NO 48 Va (3) -- --
Travelling
48 Va 48 Va -- -- -- -- 48 Va -- 48 Va NO 48 Va 6-9 Vdc 400 Vac 250-310 Va
forwards 1
Travelling
48 Va 48 Va -- 48 Va -- -- 48 Va -- 48 Va NO 48 Va 0,5-2 Vdc 400 Vac 250-310 Va
forwards 2
Travelling
48 Va 48 Va -- 48 Va 48 Va -- 48 Va -- 48 Va NC 48 Va -- 400 Vac 400 Vac
forwards 3
During braking
(2) on passing 48 Va -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 48 Va NO 48 Va 6-9 Vdc -- --
zero
Travelling back
48 Va -- 48 Va -- -- -- -- 48 Va 48 Va NO 48 Va 6-9 Vdc 400 Vac 250-310 Va
1
Travelling back
48 Va -- 48 Va 48 Va -- -- -- 48 Va 48 Va NO 48 Va 0,5-2 Vdc 400 Vac 250-310 Va
2
Travelling back
48 Va -- 48 Va 48 Va 48 Va -- -- 48 Va 48 Va NC 48 Va -- 400 Vac 400 Vac
2
On pressing
travelling brake
48 Va -- -- -- -- 48 Va -- -- -- NO 48 Va (3) --
with control at
0 (4)
( 1) Voltage values for the decelerator and motor may be adjusted via card BCR30 and block BPR respectively
( 2) When the joy-stick passes zero, movement is braked by the motor decelerator during the time set in card BCR30.
After this time has elapsed, supply to the decelerators is cut off and the electromechanicar brake is actuated
( 3) If the decelerator circuit is not under load, the voltage reading on the direct current side (terminals 15-16) in not signi-
ficant.
( 4) The travelling brake pushbutton cancels timing of the electromechanical brake actuation when the joy-stick is a rest.

GFU
SLEWING SYSTEM - ELECTRIC SECTION -
0 CONTENTS
1 OPERATION DESCRIPTION
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
3 BRAKING RESISTANCES
The high-performance systems allow high-speed movement of loads. The crane operator should be
aware that the space needed to decelerate loads increases with increasing speed
The crane operator must always choose a suitable speed for the work conditions and other factors such
as visibility, obstacles, proximity of people, proximity to moving objects, reaction time, etc.
If the variator is replaced, before connecting it ensure that the motor and the braking resistances are not
diverted to earth. Failure to do so may cause damage to the variator.
The test must be carried out using an insulation tester.
Slewing control should be smooth and without jerking.

Jerking will reduce the useful life of the slewing motors.
The crane operator should be shown how to correctly use the slewing movement that could be different
from other types of tower cranes, as well as how to properly adjust the PAG and PDG potentiometers
to facilitate proper handling according to the construction site circumstances (see recommendations in
points 2, 3 and 4)
Providing direct power supply to the slewing motors is strictly prohibited.

Doing so may cause damage to the crane structure or its components (gearbox, pinion, crown, etc.).
Working with fewer slewing motors than the crane is equipped with in normal operating mode may cause
damage to system components (crown, gearbox or pinion). The correct operation of the motors must be
checked regularly and rescue mode should be used when working with fewer motors than the crane is
equipped with.
The slewing movement is powered by a frequency converter in order to avoid sudden jumps in speed and to
guarantee smooth operation, according to the order given by the crane operator using the controls.
The frequency inverter feeds 2, 3 or 4 asynchronous motors depending on the crane model. One of the motors
has a built-in encoder which closes the variator control loop. Every motor has its own built-in shut-off tempera-
ture sensor, a brake and a remote weathervaning mechanism. During braking, the frequency inverter absorbs
the energy of the movement and dissipates it into a braking resistor.
The control has 3 speed settings, graduated from a minimum speed to the maximum permissible speed. Mo-
vement is smooth for both acceleration and deceleration.
When the jib reaches the end stop, the movement gradually and smoothly decelerates until it comes to a full stop.
There are three speeds in each direction. There are 2 speeds for keypad-run mechanisms, with the medium
speed being a step below the maximum speed.
The control signals from the crane operator controls are received by the variator, which executes a series of
control algorithms developed specifically for this application in order to ensure that:

GFU
- Changes of speed are gradual, producing smooth acceleration and deceleration movements.
- Sudden changes in running direction from the control are prevented.
- In normal operations, when the control is released, the variator gradually stops in a controlled way before
the mechanical brake is applied.
Retention of movement is achieved through electromechanical brakes located in the motors that are applied
once movement has stopped or when the crane operator presses a button on the control (PCFG).
Weathervane protection can be controlled remotely from the crane operator's control, and manually in the event
of a power failure.
The slewing system has a switch inside the service box that lets users work in rescue mode. Work can continue
when certain malfunctions occur, because rescue mode allows jib rotation with reduced performance. Temporary
unavailability of the crane is thereby avoided.
1.1 Adjusting low-speed operation for positioning movements

The frequency inverter's built-in control algorithm enables highly accurate positioning of the jib at low speeds.
A potentiometer located inside the electrical service box (PDG) can increase or decrease the reactivity of the
crane during positioning, in order to fine-tune the system response based on the particular working conditions
and operator preference.
The potentiometer is marked from 0 to 10. If it is on 0, the jib output will be smoother. If it is on 10, it will be
more forceful.
1.2 Adjusting the braking ramp to adapt it to the configuration of the assembled crane
Warning note: Note that the variation of the braking ramp will affect the time and angle travelled during braking.
To adjust it, take precautions to check that there are no obstacles in the angle swept by the jib. Otherwise, the
ramp reduction could cause a collision.
The frequency inverter's built-in control algorithm allows you to adapt the crane's braking features based on the
length of the assembled jib or user preferences. A potentiometer located inside the electrical service box (PDG)
can increase or decrease the reactivity of the crane during braking, in order to fine-tune the system response
based on the particular working conditions and operator preference.
The potentiometer is marked from 0 to 10. If it is on 0, the braking will be smoother. If it is on 10, it will be more
forceful.
1.3 Operation in rescue mode

A switch located inside the electrical service box (IRG) lets you change the variator's normal work mode to
rescue mode.

GFU
1.4 Movement limitations

The slewing system is affected by the following conditions that reduce the speed and/or stop the move-
ment:
- Slewing end stop. It has two (2) limitation micros:

- Left slewing limiter (LGI).
- Right slewing limiter (LGD).
- Reduced speed during assembly:
- When the trolley box (CJC) is not connected, the system will only rotate in first speed.
- If the lift limiters override switch (ID) is switched on, the system will only rotate in first speed.
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
If a variator is replaced, before connecting it ensure that the motor and the brake resistors are not are
not diverted to earth.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the variator.
2.1 Using the frequency converter terminals
L1-L2-L3 Input terminals. (Converter power supply)

U-V-W Output terminals. (Motor power supply)
+/Rb2 Discharge resistance output of the continuous BUS.
X10.2 Converter fault contact relay
X10.3 Converter fault contact relay.
X210A.1 24 V output
X210A.2 Common (0 V)
X210A.3 Activation of the variator 1 and reset.
X210A.4 Right slewing.
X210A.5 Left slewing.
X210A.6 Second slewing speed
X210A.7 Third slewing speed
X210B.3 Brake control
X210B.5 10 V.
X210B.6 Braking ramp setting signal (PDG)
X210B.4 Reactivity fine-tuning signal of the positioning system (PAG)
X410B.7 0 V.
X210A.1 Encoder signals
X210A.7 Rescue mode activation signal.
X410B.1 Turning on the motor thermal probe
X210B.2 Turning on the motor thermal probe.
X210B.4 Speed range selection (bit 2).

GFU
2.2 Operation and diagnosing errors

The operation of the frequency converter and the load connected are continuously monitored.
Different functions record the operation behaviour and facilitate the diagnosis of operation and errors.
2.2.1 Converter status: LEDs and Display

The frequency converter's green LED and red LED indicate its status. The pilot lights are found on the front
part of the converter, in the same area where the console was connected. When the console is connected,
they are hidden from view so it is necessary to disconnect the console to verify its status (its layout is shown
in the drawing below):
4 3 2 1
ESC ENT
When the console is connected, the converter's status is indicated through the RUN, WARN and FAULT indi-
cations on the display.
The following shows the correspondence between the indicator status and the converter operation status.
LED screens
LED H1 green LED H2 red Status
On Power connected, self-testing in progress
on off
Equipment active and ready
flashing
On Equipment error. Consult parameter 310 for
off flashing information about the error.
off power off or power supply fault.
off Equipment ready, not activated (FUF + STR or STL).
flashing Equipment ready but OFF.
flashing
Consult parameter 269 for further information about the lock
2.2.2 Messages on the variator console display

Normally, when the converter is powered, the display may indicate:
CTRL
FUF:
The variator is not operational and will not react to control orders. Check the X210.3 connection
for variator operation.

GFU
241 A numerical value:

The converter is operating normally. By default, the value of parameter 241 is displayed, which
is the frequency monitor of motor rotation (estimated for open-loop or measured by the encoder
for closed-loop).
F…
F 0700 Indicates the error code triggered by the variator. The variator can only be activated by pressing
the RESET in the electrical cabinet or pressing the start/stop pushbutton or turning off the variator
power. When the error is reset, the screen shows a numeric value once more (see the table of
trigger codes). Outside of the console error screen, it is possible to read the actual error status of
the variator by reading the contents of parameter 259.
2.2.3 Display console control

The display can show information other than the above that may be useful during service.
When voltage is supplied to the converter, the screen shows parameter 241 which is the actual real frequency of
the motor (estimated in open-loop and measured by the encoder in closed-loop configuration). Other parameters
may be displayed on the screen by navigating through the menu structure.
The display interface has 3 menus: CTRL, PARA and VAL. The following diagram shows the layout of menus
and the content of each menu.
MAIN MENU
PARA VAL CTRL
- MOTOR AND - ACTIVATION AND

VARIATOR STATUS CONTROL OF THE
DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA VARIATOR
SET 0 SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4
- ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS
- OPERATION CHANGES
The menu functions displayed on screen are as follows:

1) VAL menu:
This can be used to display the values giving information about the status and speed of motor
and variator operation. Specialised personnel may find information in this menu about software
operation.
2) PARA menu:
This is used to display and adjust parameters that change the software behaviour. Adjustments
should not be made before asking COMANSA's technical support service.
3) CTRL menu:
This menu deals with the variator set-up process (SETUP) and direct motor operation. This should
not be used without consulting with COMANSA's technical support.

GFU
To navigate through the menus, use the buttons on the console with the following functions:
- Up ( ) and down( ) buttons: these are used to navigate through the menu structure and to
change the value of settings and parameters.
- ENT Key:
This is used to access the content of menus and the content of parameters and values of each
menu as well as to confirm changes to a parameter value.
- ESC Key:
This is used to return to the main menu or a submenu or to cancel a change made to a parameter
that has not yet been confirmed.
2.2.4 Investigation of errors: variator status upon error, error history

Very useful information about the variator can be displayed on the console screen to solve errors that may
occur during operation.
As well as the basic information, described in the sections above, the variator includes functions that will help
the equipment operator or technical support to solve problems when an error occurs:
1) Converter status at latest error: If a converter fault occurs, the variator records the values of currents,
voltages, frequencies etc. in parameters 330 to 360. It is recommended that errors are checked when
they occur, especially when the reason for the fault is unknown.
2) List of the latest 16 errors: each one of the parameters from 310 to 325 record a description of the error
and the operation time at which it occurred (hours-minutes from the first use of the variator).
3) Error sum: this records the total number of errors that have occurred during the life of the variator
(parameter 362 of the VAL menu).
2.2.5 Autotuning (identification of motor parameters)

The identification of converter parameters may be necessary when a new motor or new frequency converter
is installed.
Autotuning is an operation that must be carried out by specialised personnel.

The autotuning must not be done without the manufacturer's assistance or without authorisation.
If autotuning is necessary, request instructions from the manufacturer for the operation.
2.3 Error codes

Error messages on the variator screen are displayed with an F…. The error codes as well as possible causes
and solutions are described below. The converter may be reset in 2 different ways:
- Press on the reset button inside the electrical cabinet.

- Press on crane stop and then start.
When the variator has been triggered, we recommend noting the fault code that appears on the screen and to
find its causes.
Each time an error occurs, the following messages will be displayed on the KP 100 control unit with the mo-
ving code and text and red background. The error displayed is deleted by pressing the start/enter button. The
error status may be checked by reading the parameter 259 in the VAL menu (if there is no error then F0000 is
displayed for this parameter).

ERROR MESSAGES
7 / 21
KP 100 SCREEN PROBLEM SOLUTION
DISPLAY MEANING EXPLANATION CAUSE SOLUTION
Rev: A
F0000 NO ERROR There is no error No error occurred. - -
Convertor overloaded for more than - Overload of lifting weight. - Testing of mechanical variables:
13/22
60 s. - Mechanical overload, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
This appears when the output strain.
current exceeds the machine - Motor lock, stiff.
F0100 IXT Overload
safety values for a specific period.
Examples: 150% for more than 60
seconds.
130% for more than 30 seconds.
Convertor overloaded at low output - Overload of lifting weight. - Testing of mechanical variables:
frequency. Check operation and - Mechanical overload, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 IXT DC DC overload
motor. Similar to IXT but for low strain.
power supply frequencies (<5Hz) - Motor lock, stiff.
Converter overloaded for 60s. -Overload of lifting weight. -Testing of mechanical variables:
-Mechanical overloads, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 LONG TERM IXT Lengthy load
strain.
- Stiffness
Convertor overloaded for 1s -Overload of lifting weight. -Testing of mechanical variables:
Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A.

Short-term over- -Mechanical overloads, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 SHORT TERM IXT
SLEWING SYSTEM - ELECTRIC SECTION
load strain.
- Stiffness
HEAT SINK Over This appears when the heatsink -Excessive air temperature. -Check cooling electrical cabinet.
Approval
F0000 OVER temperature on temperature exceeds 80°C or 90°C. -Converter cooling not operating or -Check converter cooling.
TEMPERATURE the heatsink obstructed.
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 32
ERROR MESSAGES
8 / 21
Rev: A
This appears when the heatsink -Internal sensor of the converter -Check electrical cabinet heating.
Heatsink
temperature sensor is faulty or the faulty. -Change equipment.
F0000 HEAT SINK temperature
machine is too cold (see the range of -Excessively low-temperature.
sensor
13/22
acceptable working temperatures).
This appears when the variator -Excessive air temperature. -Check cooling electrical cabinet.
OVER Over temperature
F0000 internal temperature exceeds 70°C. -Converter cooling not operating or -Check converter cooling.
TEMPERATURE of the variator
obstructed.
This appears when the variator -Excessively low-temperature. -Check electrical cabinet heating.
UNDER Variator low
F0000 internal temperature drops below
TEMPERATURE temperature
0°C.
This appears when the motor -Temperature motor too high (PTC -Check the connection to the PTC
temperature probe (PTC) switches > 3 kOhm). probe.
Motor Motor tempera- or when its value is higher than 3000 -PTC terminals of the motor not -Measure the PTC resistance.
F0400
TEMPERATURE ture Ohms. connected to X464.1/2 on the -Check operation of the air
variator. circulation.
-PTC probe cable ruptured.
Activation of the A motor protection switch has been - Motor connection or phase fault. - Check motor
MOTORPROTEC-
F0000 motor protection activated
TIVE SWITCH
switch
The converter has not detected one -A converter output phase is off. -Check the motor and its cabling

PHASE FAILURE Motor phase
F0000 of the motor phases -Motor cable rupture. from the variator terminals.
MOTOR failure
-Motor phase open circuit.

This appears when the output -Short circuit or earth/ground fault -Check motor cabling for possible
current instantaneously exceeds the in the motor or its power cables. diversion.
OVER over-
F0000 predefined value (around 200% of -Excessive instantaneous demand -Check the lifting load.
Approval
CURRENT current
the converter rated value). on the motor shaft. -If the fault occurs again without a
-Transistors short-circuiting. load, replace the converter.
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 33
ERROR MESSAGES
9 / 21
Rev: A
This appears when a short circuit -Short circuit or earth/ground fault -Check motor cabling for possible
UCE- or earth/ground fault occurs on the in the motor or its power cables. diversion.
F0000 UCE Control
CONTROL output. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault occurs again without a
13/22
load, replace the converter.
The converter detects a sudden -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:
DYN. PHASE-CU-
Limitation of pha- current surge -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 RRENT LIMITA-
TION se current -Check the motor and its cabling
from the variator terminals
DC LINK over-
or earth/ground fault occurs on the in the motor or its power cables. diversion.
F0000 OVER current on the DC
CURRENT output. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault occurs again without a
connection
CURRENT - Motor mechanical or electrical - Check motor.
Current controller Prolonged overload of the current
F0000 LIMIT CONTRO- limit controller. fault.
LLER limit
EARTH FAULT over- This appears when the sum of cable -Current leakage. -Check motor cabling for possible
F0000 OVER current leakage currents is incorrect. diversion.
CURRENT to earth
Motor phase current very high. -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:
over- -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible obstruction, etc.

F0000 OVERCURRENT

current -Check the motor and its cabling

Current monitoring fault -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:
over- -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 OVERCURRENT
Approval
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 34
ERROR MESSAGES
10 / 21
Rev: A
F0600 POWER UNIT Power unit Internal fault in the detection of the -Variator internal fault -Please contact COMANSA.
DETEC-TION: 0H detection power board
DETECTED
13/22
DETECTION: FH detection power board
DETECTED
DETECTION: detection power board
TOLERANCE
ERROR
MEASUREMENT
ERROR
F0604 Unknown Power Unknown power Internal fault in the detection of the -Variator internal fault -Please contact COMANSA.
Unit unit power board
F0605 Power Unit De- Power unit de- Internal fault in the detection of the -Variator internal fault -Please contact COMANSA.
tection: Error tection power board
This appears when the voltage on -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
the intermediate DC circuit exceeds -Voltage spikes or problems on the -Verification of the dynamic braking

OVER
F0000 Overvoltage the maximum permitted (780 Vdc). power supply cable. resistances.
VOLTAGE
-Fault in the braking transistor.

-Fault in the braking resistance.
This appears when the voltage on -Power supply unstable or too low. -Verification of the mains voltage
Approval
UNDER the intermediate DC circuit is lower -Fault on a power supply phase. on all phases.
F0000 Low voltage
VOLTAGE than permitted (350 Vdc). Voltage on -Voltage drop due to cable losses. -Verification of cabling.
the DC bus too low.
This appears when there is a -Power supply unstable or too low. -Verification of the mains voltage
F0000 POWER FAILURE Power failure converter power supply fault. on all phases.
-
-Verification of cabling.
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 35
ERROR MESSAGES
11 / 21
Rev: A
PHASE FAILURE Power supply Variator power supply phase fault -There is no voltage on one of the -Check the variator power supply.
F0703 LINE phase failure variator power supply phases. -Check the variator chooses.
OVERVOLTAGE DC bus voltage -The voltage value of parameter p.680 -Excess power supply voltage -Check power supply voltage.
13/22
F0704 UDC LIMITATION limit has been exceeded. -Check value of parameter p.680
This appears when the voltage of the -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
OVER Braking circuit intermediate DC circuit is higher than -Use of the crane without -Ensure that the crane connection
F0000
VOLTAGE BC overvoltage the dynamic braking circuit activation connection transformer suitable. guarantees a suitable voltage.
voltage.
Motor Chopper This appears when the voltage of the -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
OVER
F0000 circuit overvol- intermediate DC circuit is higher than -Use of the crane without connec- -Ensure that the crane connection
VOLTAGE MC
tage the Motor chopper circuit activation tion transformer suitable. guarantees a suitable voltage.
voltage.
Appears when the +/-15 Vdc voltage -Converter fault. -Replace converter.
15V VOLTAGE 15V – voltage too
F0000 is too low on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling. -Check the cabling to the control
TOO LOW low
terminals.
Appears when the 24 Vdc voltage is -Converter fault. -Replace converter.
F0000 too low on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling. -Check the cabling to the control
TOO LOW low
terminals.
Power Interface Power Interface Internal fault on the power interface -Variator internal fault -Check for the unusual source of
Elec. Voltage unit voltage board -Excessive electrical noise. excessive electrical noise in the

F0000
installation and the surroundings.
-Replace variator.
24 V. -Replace converter.
24V VOLTAGE Appears when the 24 Vdc voltage is -Converter fault.
F0000 voltage too -Check the cabling to the control
TOO SMALL too high on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling.
Approval
high terminals.
Bootstrap Pre- Precharge initial Fault in the initial condenser precharge -Variator internal fault -Replace variator.
F0000
charge process system.
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 36
ERROR MESSAGES
12 / 21
Rev: A
PRE- This appears when the preload -Turn off the power supply, wait
F0000 LOAD CON- Preload contactor contactor has triggered or is not -Load circuit overheated. five minutes and turn on the power
TACTOR activated. supply once more.
13/22
Brake Chopper Brake circuit Fault in the braking transistor. -Internal variator fault caused by a -Carefully check the braking resis-
F0000 fault in the braking transistor. tance for a short-circuit and correct it.
-Replace variator.
This appears when the variator -Converter fault. -Check the settings of the load
FRE-
detects that the upper Frequency -Load limiting system incorrectly limiting system.
F0000 QUEN- Frequency limit
CY LIMIT Switch-Off Limit has been reached, set or faulty. -Check variator operation.
parameter 417.
F1101 Frequency Limit DC bus frequency Speed limit reached due to brake -Problem in the brake circuit. -Carefully check the braking resis-
UDC Limitation limitation problem. -Overload of the brake circuit. tance to see if it is in open circuit
configuration.
- Testing of mechanical variables:
load, possible obstruction, etc.
F1110 Speed Limit Speed limit Speed limit reached. -Encoder broken. - Testing of mechanical variables:
-Electromagnetic noise from load, possible obstruction, etc.
encoder. -Check correct operation of the
-Encoder bad connection. encoder.
-Excessive speed for the load level.

F0000 EARTH FAULT Earth fault
output circuit. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault occurs again without a
IDC This appears when the variator -A converter output phase is off. -Check the motor and its cabling.
Approval
Compensation
F0000 COM- supplies power to an irregular load. -Motor cable rupture.
PENSATION of IDC system
MIN. CURRENT Very low control The reference current cannot be - Motor connection or phase - Check motor
F0000 reached after opening the brake. problem
CONTROL current
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 37
ERROR MESSAGES
13 / 21
Rev: A
A n a l o g Va l u e Analogue input va- The potentiometer input value is in- -Internal fault on the variator analo-
F0000 -Replace variator.
MFI1A missing lue fault adequate. gue input circuit.
MFI1 : Overcu- Overcurrent on Overcurrent on the potentiometer -Potentiometer ohmic value to low. -Check potentiometer resistance.
13/22
rrent the analogue in- input. -Short-circuit on the potentiometer -Check potentiometer cabling.
F0000 put input. -Replace variator.
-Internal fault on the variator analo-
gue input circuit.
ENCO- This appears when encoder -Encoder broken. -Check encoder connections.
No encoder
F0000 DER: NO ENCO- monitoring detects a fault in the -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
DER SIGNAL signal
encoder signal. -Encoder cable cut.
Fault on one
F0000 DER: ONE CHAN- monitoring detects the absence of -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
NEL FAULT encoder channel
one of the encoder signal channels. -Encoder cable cut.
ENCO- This appears when the encoder -Encoder broken. -Check encoder connections.
DER: Encoder: wrong monitoring detects an incorrect -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
F0000
WRONG DIREC- direction operation direction of rotation.
TION
F1434 Encoder: Low Di- N u m b e r o f The variator detects that the number of -The encoder connected is unsui- -Check correct operation of the
vision Marks encoder divisions encoder pulses is lower than expected. table. encoder.
insufficient -Encoder broken. -Check the number of pulses per

encoder cycle.
F1435 Encoder: Low Di- N u m b e r o f The variator detects that the number -The encoder connected is unsui- -Check correct operation of the
vision Marks encoder divisions of encoder pulses is higher than ex- table. encoder.
excessive pected. -Encoder broken. -Check the number of pulses per
Approval
encoder cycle.
Encoder 1: Divi- Encoder division Encoder division marks fault -The variator detects a fault in the -The encoder connected is unsui-
F0000 sion Marks Fault marks fault encoder division marks. table.
-Encoder broken.
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 38
ERROR MESSAGES
14 / 21
Rev: A
F2300 Unknown CM Unidentified CM Fault on a variator optional board -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
board -Variator internal fault excessive electrical noise in the
13/22
-Replace variator.
Unknown EM Unidentified EM Fault on a variator optional board -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
F0000
-Replace variator.
F0AXX - - Fault in the variator EEPROM. -Sporadic fault in reading memory. -Turn the variator off and on again.
-Program incorrectly stored in me- -Load suitable program.
mory. -Replace variator.
-Memory faulty. -Check for the unusual source of
-Electromagnetic noise. excessive electrical noise in the
F0BXX - - Control board fault -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
-Variator internal fault excessive electrical noise in the
-Replace variator.
F0CXX - - Control board fault -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of

-Replace variator.
SFXXX - - Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault during the motor parameters -Repeat autotuning.
identification process. -Check motor parameters.
Approval
SAXXX - - Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault during the motor parameters -Repeat autotuning.
-
GFU
070 0007 IB
4 / 070 / 39
GFU
Apart from the previous error messages, there are additional error messages that are not listed here. If
you receive an error message not mentioned in the above list, please contact the COMANSA technical
support area.
2.4 List of parameters displayed by the console

Now the values (MENU VAL) and parameters (MENU PARA) shown in the display submenus are listed:
Note: The most useful parameters for the user have been highlighted using italics and bold lettering.
VAL menu (variables that may be monitored) VAL menu (variables that may be monitored)
nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit
210 FS Stator frequency Hz 235 U SD Flux formation voltage V

211 I RMS Apparent current A
236 U SQ Torque formation voltage V
212 U RMS Output voltage V
Real motor speed
213 PW Active power kW
(estimated in open
215 I SD Isd current A 240 SPEED circuit and measured 1/min
in closed-circuit
216 I SQ Isq current A
configurations)
Speed measured by Real motor frequency
218 N1 1/min
encoder (estimated in open
241 FREQ circuit and measured Hz
221 FSLIP Frequency slip Hz
in closed-circuit
222 UDC Real DC voltage V configurations)
242 LOAD Actual load %
223 A Modulation %
243 ESLOAD Estimated load %
Rotor magnetisation
225 IMR A
current Converter modulation
244 TWORK h
time counter
226 T MOT Winding temperature °C
Converter on time
227 T ROT Rotor time constant ms 245 TOP h
counter
Internal reference fre-
228 FREF Hz 249 DSET Set of active data
quency (1)
Reference frequency as 250 IND Digital inputs state
229 PCREF %
a percentage (2)
Control speed
231 PHIXT IxT peak value % 251 INA1 V
reference
232 PHIDC IxT-DC peak value %
252 INA1 Analogue input 2 V
253 INA1 Analogue input 3 mA

GFU

F0000
317 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
254 OUTD Digital outputs state F0000
F0000
318 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
255 TC Heatsink temperature °C F0000
F0000
319 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
256 TI Internal temperature °C F0000
F0000
257 OUTA1 Analogue output 1 mA 320 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
259 ERROR Actual error status F0000
321 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
266 OUTA1 Analogue output 2 mA F0000
322 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
267 OUTA1 Analogue output 3 mA
F0000
323 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
269 WARN Warnings F0000
F0000
275 CTRST Controller status 324 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
287 UDMAX Udc peak value V F0000
325 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
288 UDAVG Average Udc value V DC bus voltage upon last
330 EUDC V
Heatsink peak tempera- error
289 TCMAX °C
ture value Output voltage upon last
Heatsink average tempe- 331 EURMS V
290 TCAVG °C error
rature value Stator frequency upon
Internal peak temperatu- 332 EFS Hz
291 TIMAX °C last error
re value
Encoder 1 frequency
Internal average tempe- 333 EEC1 Hz
292 TIAVG °C upon last error
rature value
Encoder 2 frequency
293 IMAX I apparent peak value A 334 EEC1 Hz
upon last error
Ia phase current upon
294 IAVG I apparent average value A 335 EIA A
last error
Positive active power Ib phase current upon
295 PMAXP kW 336 EIB A
peak value last error
Negative active power Ic phase current upon
296 PMAXN kW 337 EIC A
Active power average
297 PAVG kW RMS value of current
value 338 EIRMS A
upon last error
301 ENRGP Energy, positive kWh
Isd / reactive current
302 ENRGN Energy, negative kWh 339 EISD A
upon last error
F0000 Isq / active current up on
310 ERR1 00000:00; Last Error 340 EISQ A
F0000 last error
00000:00; Penultimate F0000 Rotor magnetisation
311 ERR1 341 EIMR A
error F0000 current upon last error
F0000
312 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 342 ET Torque upon last error Nm
F0000
F0000 Analogue input 1 upon
313 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 343 EINA1 V
F0000 last error
314 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 344 EINA1 V
F0000 last error
315 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 345 EINA1 mA
F0000 last error
F0000 Analogue output 1 upon
316 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 346 EOUT1 mA
F0000 last error

GFU
VAL menu (variables that may be monitored) PARA menu (parameter configurations)
nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit
Name of program ins- 33 cha-
29 NAME
Analogue output 2 upon talled racters
347 EOUT1 mA
last error
30 CONF Configuration Selection
Analogue output 3 upon
348 EOUT1 mA Selec-
last error 33 LANG Language
tion
Frequency output repeti- 123:
349 EFO Hz
tion upon last error Rearm
Command line for ori-
4444:
34 PROG ginal settings reset or
Status of digital inputs Original
350 EIND error reset.
upon last error set-
tings.
Status of digital outputs 39 TVENT Air cooling on temp. °C
351 EOUTD
upon last error Selec-
237 PHCLR Reset memory
tion
h:m:s.
352 ETIME Time since last error Motor data
ms
370 MUR Rated voltage V
Heatsink temperature
353 ETC °C
371 MIR Rated current A
upon last error
Internal temperature 372 MNR Rated speed -1/min
354 ETI °C
upon last error 373 MPP Nº of pole pairs
Controller status at latest
355 EC text 374 MCOPR Rated j cosine
error:
Warning status upon last 375 MFR Rated frequency Hz
356 EW text
error 376 MPR Rated power kW
Internal value 1 upon last
357 EI1 400 FT Switching frequency kHz
error
Internal value 2 upon last Error and warning compartment
358 EI1
error 405 WIXTD Lim. warning IxT DC %
Extended value 1 upon 406 WIXT Lim. warning IxT %
359 EF1
last error
407 WTC Limit warning Tc °C
Extended value 2 upon
360 EF1 408 WTI Limit warning Ti °C
last error
Checksum upon last 409 CTMSG Controller status Selection
361 CHSUM
error Communication interface
0 ... Time watchdog RS232/
362 ESUM Number of errors 413 WDOG s
32767 RS485
Error and warning compartment
PARA menu (parameter configurations) 415 DCCMX DC compensation limit V
Earth/ground fault switch

nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit 416 IEOFF A
off limit
0 SN Serial number (date) text 417 F OFF Frequency switch off limit Hz
1 OPT Optional modules text Frequencies/Ramps
Selec- 418 FMIN Minimum frequency Hz
10 BAUD Xmission speed
tion
419 FMAX
Maximum frequency Hz
12 VERS Software version –Fl text
Clockwise acceleration
420 RACCR Hz/s
(1)
27 PASSW Change password 0 ... 999
Clockwise deceleration
421 RDECR Hz/s
28 MODE Access level 1 ... 3 (1)

GFU
PARA menu (parameter configurations) PARA menu (parameter configurations)

Name/meaning Unit
nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit nº Abbrev.
Counter clockwise acce- Reference and real values source

422 RACCL Hz/s
leration (1) Motor-potentiometer
Counterclockwise dece- 474 MPOTI Selection
423 RDECL Hz/s operation mode
leration (1)
Clockwise emergency Reference frequency
424 RDNCR Hz/s 475 RFSEL Selection
stop (1) source (1)
Counterclockwise emer- Programmable frequencies (1)
425 RDNCL Hz/s
gency stop (1) Programmable frequency
426 RFMX Maximum advance 1) Hz 480 FF1 Hz
1 (1)
Clockwise ramp rise time Programmable frequency
430 RRTR ms 481 FF1 Hz
(1) 2 (1)
Programmable frequency
482 FF1 Hz
431 RFTR Clockwise ramp fall time (1) ms 3 (1)
Counterclockwise ramp rise Programmable frequency
432 RRTL ms 483 FF1 Hz
time (1) 4 (1)
Counterclockwise ramp Encoder data
433 RFTL ms
fall time (1) Encoder 1 operation
490 EC1SL Selection
Locking frequency (1) mode
491 EC1N Nº pulses/revolution
447 FB1 1st locking frequency (1) Hz
492 EC1L Output type encoder 1 Selection
448 FB1 2nd locking frequency (1) Hz
Repetition frequency
449 FBHYS Hysteresis – freq. (1) Hz 496 FOSEL Selection
channel
Analogue inputs Operation frequency
498 FORMP Hz
operation mode
450 TBLOW Tolerance limit point zero %
Braking unit
Tolerance limit at maxi-
451 TBUPP % Brake unit trigger thres-
mum 506 UD BC V
Analogue input operation hold
452 A1SEL Selection
mode 1 Motor chopper
453 A1SET Extreme upper point A1 V Motor chopper trigger
507 UD MC V
threshold
454 A1OFF Lowest point A1 V
Comparator value
Analogue input operation
460 A2SEL Selection
510 FTRIG Frequency setting Hz
mode 2
461 A2SET Extreme upper point A1 V Percentages (2)

Percentage of min refe-
518 PRMIN %
462 A1OFF Lowest point A2 V rence
Percentage of max refe-
Temperature setting 519 PRMAX %
rence
465 MTSEL Operation mode Selection
Digital and relay outputs
466 MTCAL Temperature coefficient °C Operation mode Digital
530 D1SEL Selection
output 1
467 MTCAT Temperature setting °C D1SEL Operation mode Digital
531 Selection
Analogue inputs output 2
Analogue input operation Operation mode Digital
470 A1SEL Selection 532 D1SEL Selection
mode 3 output 3
Operation mode Digital
471 A1SET Extreme upper point A3 mA 533 D4SEL Selection
output 4
472 A1OFF Lowest point A3 mA 532 D4SEL Selection
output 5

GFU

Operation mode Compa- Power reference support
540 C1SEL Selection 672 UDU1 V
rator 1 value
541 C1ON Upper comparator on % Voltage renewal accele-
674 UDACC Hz/s
ration
542 C1OFF Lower comparator off % 675 UDOFF Switch off threshold Hz
Operation mode Compa- 676 UDU2 Ref. switch off value V

543 C1SEL Selection
rator 2 677 UDV Amplification
544 C1ON Upper comparator on % 678 UDTI Integral time ms
545 C1OFF Lower comparator off % 680 UDLIM Reference DC bus limitation V
681 UDFMX Max. freq. increase. Hz

549 DEVMX Control maximum deviation %
Analogue outputs 683 VC GL Gen. ref. current limit A
Operation mode Analo- Current controller

550 O1SEL Selection
gue output 1
Current controller amplifi-
Zero setting Analogue 700 DC V -
551 O1OFF % cation (3)
output A1 Current controller integral
Analogue output amplifi- 701 DC TI ms
552 O1SC % time (3)
cation A1
Additional motor data
Operation mode Analo-
555 O1SEL Selection Rated magnetisation
gue output A2 716 MIMAG A
current 3)
Zero setting Analogue
556 O1OFF % 717 MFLUX Reference flux %
output A2
Analogue output amplifi- Rated slip correction
557 O1SC % 718 MSLIP %
cation A2 factor 3)
Operation mode Analo- 719 MSLMSX Frequency slip %
560 O3SEL Selection
gue output 3
Zero setting Analogue Speed controller
561 O3OFF %
output A3 Speed controller opera-
720 SCSEL Selection
Analogue output amplifi- tion mode
562 O3SC %
cation A3 721 SC V1 Amplification 1 (1)
Motor protection switch
722 SCTI1 Integral time 1 (1) ms
PTC thermal probe ope-
570 MTSEL Selection
ration mode 723 SC V1 Amplification 2 (1)
Motor thermal protection
571 MSEL Selection 724 SCTI2 Integral time 2 (1) ms
operation mode
Intelligent current limits Acceleration pre-control
573 LISEL Selection 725 ACSEL Selection
operational mode operation mode.(1)
574 LIPR Power limit % 726 ACMIN Minimum acceleration (1) Hz/s
575 LID Duration limit min Mechanical time constant
727 AC TM ms
(1)
Voltage controller
Output values limit
Voltage controller opera-
670 UDSEL Selection Acceleration pre-control
tion mode 728 SCULI A
operation mode.(1)
671 UDTRG Power failure threshold V
729 SCLLI Minimum acceleration (1) A

GFU
Mechanical time constant Starting behaviour

730 SCULT %
(1) Flux formation maximum
780 FCTFF ms
Output values limit (continuation) time
Acceleration pre-control 781 FCIFF Flux formation current (3) A
731 SCLLT %
operation mode.(1)
732 SCUPT Minimum acceleration (1) % Brake behaviour
Mechanical time constant
733 SCLPT % 800 BRT1 Brake open delay time 1 s
(1)
Acceleration pre-control 801 BRT2 Brake open delay time 2 s
734 SCSUI Selection
operation mode (1)
735 SCSLI Lower Isq limit source Selection 802 BRT3 Brake open delay time 3 s
736 SCSUT Torque upper limit source Selection 803 BRT4 Brake open delay time 4 s
737 SCSLT Torque lower limit source Selection 804 BRT11 Brake close delay time 1 s
805 BRT12 Brake close delay time 2 s
Speed control switching
738 SCSWP Hz
limit 806 BRT13 Brake close delay time 3 s
739 SCULP Upper power limit kW 807 BRT14 Brake close delay time 4 s
740 SCLLP Lower power limit kW Brake open monitoring

808 BR_I A
current
Field controller
Field amplification con- 809 BR_F Brake closing frequency %
741 FC V
troller (3) Frequency reference Selecta-
Field controller integral 810 FCTFF
742 FC TI ms source ble
time (3)
Mechanical system data
Upper Isd limit reference
743 FC UL A
(3) 811 TM Mechanical time constant s
744 FC LL Lower Isd limit reference A
812 TPM Turns per metre 1/m
Modulation controller Data for a load estimation
750 MCREF Reference modulation % Minimum frequency for
813 FMLLE %
Reference modulation load estimation
752 MC TI ms
integral time Maximum time for load
815 T LE s
Reference modulation estimation
753 MCSEL Selection
operation but Start-up torque at maxi-
816 MK FM %
mum frequency Fmax
755 MC LL Lower Imr limit reference A
817 S OFF Switch off speed Hz
756 MCLCD Deviation control limit %
818 I LIM Limit current A
Encoder control Desirable lifting Isq
819 Isq Up A
Encoder control opera- current
760 EMSEL Selection
tion mode 820 Isq Do Desirable Isq current A
761 EMSF Timeout: signal fault ms Desirable Isq current
762 EMCF Timeout: channel fault ms 821 Isq Do lowering at Fmax fre- A
quency
763 EMDF Timeout: direction fault ms
822 BR LE Operation mode A

GFU
3 BRAKING RESISTORS
Both the braking resistors and their enclosures may reach very high temperatures.
Before beginning inspection or maintenance ensure that it is at a temperature that will not cause damage.
Even if the variator is not dissipating energy in the braking resistors, this does not guarantee that they
are electrically disconnected.
Before beginning any maintenance operation on the braking resistors, turn off the variator and wait 5
minutes until the direct-current bus is discharged. Otherwise, you may be subjected to an electrical dis-
charge.
During deceleration of variator movement, the inertia is dissipated by heating a battery of electrical resistors
that are designed to consume high quantities of energy without any damage.
The condition of this battery must be verified so that the system operates correctly, given that the variator be-
haviour is quite sensitive to variations in resistance value. Given the need to dissipate heat, the resistor bank
is not sealed and is therefore exposed to small particles.
In salty or dusty environments, the resistor bank must be checked regularly and, if necessary, it must be cleaned
using air and brushes to avoid situations that may affect its electrical resistance value.

EFU
LIFTING SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL SECTION -
0 CONTENTS
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
3 OVERSPEED CONTROL SYSTEM
5 EFFI+ SYSTEM
Because of the sensitivity of the crane operator control, it is recommended that lifting and lowering
operations are carried out in the positioning mode.
The high-performance systems allow high-speed movement of loads. The crane operator should take
into account the space required to slow down the loads after acceleration
The crane operator must always choose a suitable speed for the work conditions and other factors such
as visibility, obstacles, proximity of people, proximity to moving objects, reaction time, etc.
The winch is powered by a frequency converter in order to avoid sudden jumps in speed and to guarantee a
smooth operation, according to the order given by the crane operator using the controls.
The control includes a potentiometer, which can be used to select any speed ranging from 0 to the maximum
permitted speed of the specific hook status and the range of speeds selected by the crane operator. (see load/
speed diagrams).
When the hook is approaching the end of its range, the maximum lifting speed is reduced automatically (high-
speed pre-limitation).
load
LIFTING/LOWERING
speed
Maximum speed/load diagram.
(1) Mechanism in high-speed pre-limitation or positioning mode.
1.1 Smoothness and safety in the operation of the electromechanical brake

The converter controls opening and closing of the electromechanical retention brake.
At the beginning of movement, the brake is only released if the converter has ensured that the motor has
sufficient torque.
The brakes are applied at zero speed to avoid shuddering due to brake activation.
At the end of the movement, the converter reduces the mechanism speed until it is practically zero then orders
application of the brakes.
Because this is a retention brake system and not a working brake system, the brake wear and maintenance
is kept to a minimum.

EFU
Despite the above, emergency stops triggered by the crane operator using the control or due to triggering
of the frequency converter protection both cause the brake to be activated with a moving load, so it must be
again highlighted that the brakes must be serviced soon after to ensure that they operate properly (see brake
adjustment instructions).
1.2 Operation modes

The mechanism has two operation modes:
- normal
- positioning
The positioning mode provides gentle and precise operation for load positioning.
When the crane operator chooses this mode of operation, the range of speed according to the movement of
the crane operator control is noticeably reduced and the brake is not applied when passing the zero point. It
also provides high sensitivity at low speeds, small lowering/lifting movements for positioning, eliminating all
shudders and sudden stops.
The positioning mode may be selected by the crane operator, even while the mechanism is moving, for example,
when the load is approaching the stopping point and then used to gently and precisely lower the load.
The retention brakes are activated when the crane operator changes to normal operation and the controller is
at point zero.
The range of lifting speeds is selected by the crane operator using the four-position switch located in the crane
operator cabin. (see the section "Crane operator control").
If a range of speeds is selected and the hook load is higher than allowed for this range, then the lifting movement
is blocked (both lifting and lowering) and the overload management (SCEM) indicator in the cab indicates this
situation.
The crane is fitted with a safety system that protects against uncontrolled load movements in case the
frequency converter malfunctions. An inductive sensor on the lifting motor shaft sends a speed signal to a
programmable computer (AEQ) located in the lifting cabinet, so if the speed is higher than the suitable speed
for the hook load, lifting is stopped.
So that the safety system operates correctly, the load limitation system must be correctly set.
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
If a variator is replaced, before connecting it ensure that the motor and the brake resistors are not short-
circuited to ground.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the variator.
2.1 Using the frequency converter terminals
L1-L2-L3 Input terminals. (Converter powersupply)

U-V-W Output terminals. (Motor powersupply)
+/Rb2 Discharge resistance output of the continuous BUS.
X209.1
Converter fault contact relay.
X209.2
X210.1 24 V output
X210.2 Common (0 V)
X210.3 Variator operation.

EFU
X210.4 Lifting.
X210.5 Lowering.
X210.6 High-speed limitation (bit 1).
X210.7 High-speed limitation (bit 2).
X210.8 Speed range selection (bit 1).
X210.9 Speed range selection (bit 2).
X210.10 Reset.
X210.12 Speed signal reached. (90 rpm)
X210.13 Brake control
X211.1 10 V.
X211.2
0 V.
X211.4
X211.3 Speed reference.
X460.1
Internal auxiliary braking relay.
X460.2
X464.1
Turning on the motor thermal probe.
X464.2
2.2 Operation and diagnosing errors

The operation of the frequency converter and the load connected are continuously monitored.
Different functions record the operation behaviour and facilitate the diagnosis of operation and errors.

The frequency converter's green LED and red LED indicate its status. The pilot lights are found on the front
part of the converter, in the same area where the console was connected. When the console is connected,
they are hidden from view so it is necessary to disconnect the console to verify its status (its layout is shown
in the drawing below):
4 3 2 1
ESC ENT
When the console is connected, the converter's status is indicated through the RUN, WARN and FAULT indi-
cations on the display.
The following shows the correspondence between the indicator status and the converter operation status.

EFU
LED screens
LED H1 green LED H2 red Status
On Power connected, self-testing in progress
On off
Equipment active and ready
flashing
On Equipment error. Consult parameter 310 for
off flashing information about the error.
off power off or powersupply fault.
off Equipment ready, not activated (FUF + STR or STL).
flashing Equipment ready but off Check parameter
flashing
269 for further information about the lock
2.2.2 Messages on the variator console display

Normally, when the converter is powered, the display may indicate:
CTRL
FUF: The variator is not operational and will not react to control orders. Check the X210.3 con-
nection for variator operation.
241
A numerical value: The converter is operating normally. By default, the value of parameter 241 is
displayed, which is the frequency monitor of motor rotation (estimate for open-loop or measured
by the encoder if closed-loop).
F… indicates the error code triggered by the variator. The variator can only be activated by pressing
F 0700 the RESET in the electrical cabinet or pressing the start/stop pushbutton or turning off the variator
power. When the error is reset, the screen shows a numeric value once more (see the table of
trigger codes). Outside of the console error screen, it is possible to read the actual error status of
the variator by reading the contents of parameter 259.
2.2.3 Display console control

The display can show information other than the above that may be useful during service.
When voltage is supplied to the converter, the screen shows parameter 241 that is the actual real frequency of
the motor (estimated in open-loop and measured by the encoder in closed-loop configuration). Other parameters
may be displayed on the screen by navigating through the menu structure.
The display interface has three menus: CTRL, PARA and VAL. The following diagram shows the layout of
menus and the content of each menu.
MAIN MENU
PARA VAL CTRL
- MOTOR AND - ACTIVATION AND

VARIATOR STATUS CONTROL OF THE
DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA VARIATOR
- ADJUSTABLE SETTINGS/PARAMETERS
- OPERATION CHANGES

EFU
The menu functions displayed on screen are as follows:

1) VAL menu:
This can be used to display the values giving information about the status and speed of motor
and variator operation. Specialised personnel may find information in this menu about software
operation.
2) PARA menu:
This is used to display and adjust parameters that change the software behaviour. Adjustments
should not be made before asking COMANSA's technical support service.
3) CTRL menu:
This menu deals with the variator set-up process (SETUP) and direct motor operation. This should
not be used without consulting with COMANSA's technical support.
To navigate through the menus, use the buttons on the console with the following functions:
- Up ( ) and down( ) buttons:
These are used to navigate through the menu structure and to change the value of settings and
parameters.
- ENT Key:
This is used to access the content of menus and the content of parameters and values of each
menu as well as to confirm changes to a parameter value.
- ESC Key:
This is used to return to the main menu or a submenu or to cancel a change made to a parameter
that has not yet been confirmed.
2.2.4 Investigation of errors: variator status upon error, error history

Very useful information about the variator can be displayed on the console screen to solve errors that may
occur during operation.
As well as the basic information, described in the sections above, the variator includes functions that will help
the equipment operator or the technical support to solve problems when an error occurs:
1) Converter status at latest error: If a converter fault occurs, the variator records the values of currents,
voltages, frequencies etc. in parameters 330 to 360. It is recommended that errors are checked when
they occur, especially when the reason for the fault is unknown.
2) List of the latest 16 errors: each one of the parameters from 310 to 325 record a description of the error
and the operation time at which it occurred (hours-minutes from the first use of the variator).
3) Error sum: this records the total number of errors that have occurred during the life of the variator
(parameter 362 of the VAL menu).
2.2.5 Autotuning (identification of motor parameters)

The identification of converter parameters may be necessary when a new motor or new frequency converter
is installed.
Autotuning is an operation that must be carried out by specialised personnel.
The autotuning must not be done without the manufacturer's assistance or without authorisation.
If autotuning is necessary, request instructions from the manufacturer for the operation.
2.3 Error codes

Error messages on the variator screen are displayed with an F…. The error codes as well as possible causes
and solutions are described below. The converter may be reset in two different ways:
- Press on the reset button inside the electrical cabinet.
- Press on crane stop and then start.
When the variator has been triggered, we recommend to note the fault code that appears on the screen and
to find its causes.
Each time an error occurs, the following messages will be displayed on the KP 100 control unit with the mo-
ving code and text and red background. The error displayed is deleted by pressing the start/enter button. The
error status may be checked by reading the parameter 259 in the VAL menu (if there is no error then F0000 is
displayed for this parameter).

ERROR MESSAGES
6 / 21
Rev: A
F0000 NO ERROR There is no error No error occurred. - -
Convertor overloaded for more than - Overload of lifting weight. - Testing of mechanical variables:
12/43
60 s. - Mechanical overload, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
This appears when the output strain.
current exceeds the machine - Motor lock, stiff.
F0000 IXT Overload
safety values for a specific period.
Examples: 150% for more than 60
seconds.
130% for more than 30 seconds.
Convertor overloaded at low output - Overload of lifting weight. - Testing of mechanical variables:
frequency. Check operation and - Mechanical overload, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 IXT DC DC overload
motor. Similar to IXT but for low strain.
powersupply frequencies (<5Hz) - Motor lock, stiff.
Converter overloaded for 60s. -Overload of lifting weight. -Testing of mechanical variables:
-Mechanical overloads, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 LONG TERM IXT Lengthy load
strain.
- Stiffness
Convertor overloaded for 1s -Overload of lifting weight. -Testing of mechanical variables:

Short-term over- -Mechanical overloads, motor load, possible obstruction, etc.
F0000 SHORT TERM IXT
LIFTING SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL SECTION
load strain.
- Stiffness
HEAT SINK Over This appears when the heatsink -Excessive air temperature. -Check cooling electrical cabinet.
F0000 OVER temperature on temperature exceeds 80°C or 90°C. -Converter cooling not operating or -Check converter cooling.
TEMPERATURE the heatsink obstructed.
Approval
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 52
ERROR MESSAGES
7 / 21
Rev: A
This appears when the heatsink -Internal sensor of the converter -Check electrical cabinet heating.
Heatsink
temperature sensor is faulty or the faulty. -Change equipment.
F0000 HEAT SINK temperature
machine is too cold (see the range of -Excessively low-temperature.
sensor
12/43
acceptable working temperatures).
This appears when the variator -Excessive air temperature. -Check cooling electrical cabinet.
OVER Over temperature
F0000 internal temperature exceeds 70°C. -Converter cooling not operating or -Check converter cooling.
TEMPERATURE of the variator
obstructed.
This appears when the variator -Excessively low-temperature. -Check electrical cabinet heating.
UNDER Variator low
F0000 internal temperature drops below
TEMPERATURE temperature
0°C.
This appears when the motor -Temperature motor too high (PTC -Check the connection to the PTC
temperature probe (PTC) switches > 3 kOhm). probe.
MOTOR Motor tempera- or when its value is higher than 3000 -PTC terminals of the motor not -Measure the PTC resistance.
F0400
TEMPERATURE ture Ohms. connected to X464.1/2 on the -Check operation of the air
variator. circulation.
-PTC probe cable ruptured.
Activation of the A motor protection switch has been - Motor connection or phase fault. - Check motor
MOTORPROTEC-
F0000 motor protection activated
TIVE SWITCH
switch
The converter has not detected one -A converter output phase is off. -Check the motor and cabling from

PHASE FAILURE Motor phase
F0000 of the motor phases -Motor cable rupture. the variator terminals.
MOTOR failure
-Motor phase open circuit.

This appears when the output -Short circuit or earth/ground fault -Check motor cabling for possible
current instantaneously exceeds the in the motor or its power cables. diversion.
OVER over-
F0000 predefined value (around 200% of -Excessive instantaneous demand -Check the lifting load.
CURRENT current
the converter rated value). on the motor shaft. -If the fault reoccurs without a load,
Approval
-Transistors short-circuiting. replace the converter.
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 53
ERROR MESSAGES
8 / 21
Rev: A
UCE- or earth/ground fault occurs on the in the motor or its power cables. diversion.
F0000 UCE Control
CONTROL output. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault reoccurs without a load,
12/43
replace the converter.
The converter detects a sudden -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:
DYN. PHASE-CU-
Limitation of pha- current surge -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible destruction, etc.
F0000 RRENT LIMITA-
TION se current -Check the motor and its cabling
DC LINK over-
F0000 OVER current on the DC
CURRENT output. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault occurs again without a
connection
CURRENT - Motor mechanical or electrical - Check motor.
Current controller Prolonged overload of the current
F0000 LIMIT CONTRO- limit controller. fault.
LLER limit
EARTH FAULT over- This appears when the sum of cable -Current leakage. -Check motor cabling for possible
F0000 OVER current leakage currents is incorrect. diversion.
CURRENT to earth
Motor phase current very high. -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:
over- -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible destruction, etc.

F0000 OVERCURRENT

Current monitoring fault -Instantaneous motor overload. - Testing of mechanical variables:

over- -Short-circuit on one motor phase. load, possible destruction, etc.
F0000 OVERCURRENT
Approval
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 54
ERROR MESSAGES
9 / 21
Rev: A
DETEC-TION: 0H detection power board
DETECTED
12/43
DETECTION: FH detection power board
DETECTED
TOLERANCE
ERROR
MEASUREMENT
ERROR
F0604 Unknown Power Unknown power Internal fault in the detection of the -Variator internal fault -Please contact COMANSA.
Unit unit power board
F0605 Power Unit De- Power unit de- Internal fault in the detection of the -Variator internal fault -Please contact COMANSA.
tection: Error tection power board
This appears when the voltage on -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
the intermediate DC circuit exceeds -Voltage spikes or problems on the -Verification of the dynamic braking

OVER
F0000 Overvoltage the maximum permitted (780 Vdc). powersupply cable. resistances.
VOLTAGE
-Fault in the braking transistor.

-Fault in the braking resistance.
This appears when the voltage on -Power supply unstable or too low. -Verification of the mains voltage
UNDER the intermediate DC circuit is lower -Fault on a powersupply phase. on all phases.
F0000 Low voltage
VOLTAGE than permitted (350 Vdc). Voltage on -Voltage drop due to cable losses. -Verification of cabling.
Approval
the DC bus too low.
This appears when there is a -Power supply unstable or too low. -Verification of the mains voltage
F0000 POWER FAILURE Power failure converter powersupply fault. on all phases.
-
-Verification of cabling.
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 55
ERROR MESSAGES
10 / 21
Rev: A
PHASE FAILURE Power supply Variator powersupply phase fault -There is no voltage on one of the -Check the variator powersupply.
F0703 LINE phase failure variator powersupply phases. -Check the variator chooses.
OVERVOLTAGE DC bus voltage -The voltage value of parameter p.680 -Excess power supply voltage -Check power supply voltage.
12/43
F0704 UDC LIMITATION limit has been exceeded. -Check value of parameter p.680
This appears when the voltage of the -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
OVER Braking circuit intermediate DC circuit is higher than -Use of the crane without -Ensure that the crane connection
F0000
VOLTAGE BC overvoltage the dynamic braking circuit activation connection transformer suitable. guarantees a suitable voltage.
voltage.
Motor Chopper This appears when the voltage of the -Power voltage too high. -Verification of the mains voltage.
OVER
F0000 circuit overvol- intermediate DC circuit is higher than -Use of the crane without connec- -Ensure that the crane connection
VOLTAGE MC
tage the Motor chopper circuit activation tion transformer suitable. guarantees a suitable voltage.
voltage.
Appears when the +/-15 Vdc voltage -Converter fault. -Replace converter.
F0000 is too low on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling. -Check the cabling to the control
TOO LOW low
terminals.
Appears when the 24 Vdc voltage is -Converter fault. -Replace converter.
F0000 too low on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling. -Check the cabling to the control
TOO LOW low
terminals.
Power Interface Power Interface Internal fault on the power interface -Variator internal fault -Check for the unusual source of
Elec. Voltage unit voltage board -Excessive electrical noise. excessive electrical noise in the

F0000
-Replace variator.
24 V. -Replace converter.
24V VOLTAGE Appears when the 24 Vdc voltage is -Converter fault.
F0000 voltage too -Check the cabling to the control
TOO SMALL too high on the controller board. -Control terminals cabling.
high terminals.
Approval
Bootstrap Pre- Precharge initial Fault in the initial condenser precharge -Variator internal fault -Replace variator.
F0000
charge process system.
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 56
ERROR MESSAGES
11 / 21
Rev: A
PRE- This appears when the preload -Turn off the power supply, wait
F0000 LOAD CON- Preload contactor contactor has triggered or is not -Load circuit overheated. five minutes and turn on the power
TACTOR activated. supply once more.
12/43
Brake Chopper Brake circuit Brake transistor fault. -Internal variator fault caused by a -Carefully check the braking resis-
F0000 fault in the braking transistor. tance for a short-circuit and correct it.
-Replace variator.
This appears when the -Converter fault. -Check the settings of the load
FRE-
variator detects that the upper -Load limiting system incorrectly limiting system.
F0000 QUEN- Frequency limit
CY LIMIT Frequency Switch-Off Limit has been set or faulty. -Check variator operation.
reached, parameter 417.
F1101 Frequency Limit DC bus frequen- Speed limit reached due to brake -Problem in the brake circuit. -Carefully check the braking resis-
UDC Limitation cy limitation problem. -Overload of the brake circuit. tance to see if it is in open circuit
configuration.
- Testing of mechanical variables:
load, possible destruction, etc.
F1110 Speed Limit Speed limit Speed limit reached. -Encoder broken. - Testing of mechanical variables:
-Electromagnetic noise from load, possible destruction, etc.
encoder. -Check correct operation of the
-Encoder bad connection. encoder.
-Excessive speed for the load level.

F0000 EARTH FAULT Earth fault
output circuit. -Transistors short-circuiting. -If the fault reoccurs without a load,
IDC -A converter output phase is off. -Check the motor and its cabling.
Compensation This appears when the variator
F0000 COM- supplies power to an irregular load. -Motor cable rupture.
Approval
PENSATION of IDC system
MIN. CURRENT Very low control The reference current cannot be - Motor connection or phase - Check motor
F0000 reached after opening the brake. problem
CONTROL current
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 57
ERROR MESSAGES
12 / 21
Rev: A
A n a l o g Va l u e Analogue input va- The potentiometer input value is in- -Internal fault on the variator analo-
F0000 -Replace variator.
MFI1A missing lue fault adequate. gue input circuit.
MFI1 : Overcu- Overcurrent on Overcurrent on the potentiometer -Potentiometer ohmic value to low. -Check potentiometer resistance.
12/43
rrent the analogue in- input. -Short-circuit on the potentiometer -Check potentiometer cabling.
F0000 put input. -Replace variator.
-Internal fault on the variator analo-
gue input circuit.
No encoder
F0000 DER: NO ENCO- monitoring detects a fault in the -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
DER SIGNAL signal
encoder signal. -Encoder cable cut.
Fault on one
F0000 DER: ONE CHAN- monitoring detects the absence of -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
NEL FAULT encoder channel
one of the encoder signal channels. -Encoder cable cut.
ENCO- This appears when the encoder -Encoder broken. -Check encoder connections.
DER: Encoder: wrong monitoring detects an incorrect -Encoder connection incorrect. -Replace encoder.
F0000
WRONG DIREC- direction operation direction of rotation.
TION
F1434 Encoder: Low Di- N u m b e r o f The variator detects that the number of -The encoder connected is unsui- -Check correct operation of the
vision Marks encoder divisions encoder pulses is lower than expected. table. encoder.
insufficient -Encoder broken. -Check the number of pulses per

encoder cycle.
F1435 Encoder: Low Di- N u m b e r o f The variator detects that the number -The encoder connected is unsui- -Check correct operation of the
vision Marks encoder divisions of encoder pulses is higher than ex- table. encoder.
excessive pected. -Encoder broken. -Check the number of pulses per
encoder cycle.
Approval
Encoder 1: Divi- Encoder division Encoder division marks fault -The variator detects a fault in the -The encoder connected is unsui-
F0000 sion Marks Fault marks fault encoder division marks. table.
-Encoder broken.
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 58
ERROR MESSAGES
13 / 21
Rev: A
F2300 Unknown CM Unidentified CM Fault on a variator optional board -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
12/43
-Replace variator.
Unknown EM Unidentified EM Fault on a variator optional board -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
F0000
-Replace variator.
F0AXX - - Fault in the variator EEPROM. -Sporadic fault in reading memory. -Turn the variator off and on again.
-Program incorrectly stored in me- -Load suitable program.
mory. -Replace variator.
-Memory faulty. -Check for the unusual source of
-Electromagnetic noise. excessive electrical noise in the
F0BXX - - Control board fault -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of
-Replace variator.
F0CXX - - Control board fault -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for the unusual source of

-Replace variator.
SFXXX - - Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault during the motor parameters -Repeat autotuning.
SAXXX - - Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault during the motor parameters -Repeat autotuning.
Approval
-
EFU
080 0009 IB
4 / 080 / 59
EFU
Apart from the previous error messages, there are additional error messages that are not listed here. If
you receive an error message not mentioned in the above list, please contact the COMANSA technical
support area.
2.4 List of variables displayed by the console

The values (MENU VAL) and parameters (MENU PARA) shown in the display submenus are listed:
Note: The most useful parameters for the user have been highlighted using italics and bold lettering.
210 FS Stator frequency Hz 235 U SD Flux formation voltage V

211 I RMS Apparent current A
236 U SQ Torque formation voltage V
212 U RMS Output voltage V
Real motor speed
213 PW Active power kW
(estimated in open
215 I SD Isd current A 240 SPEED circuit and measured 1/min
in closed-circuit
216 I SQ Isq current A
configurations)
Speed measured by Real motor
218 N1 1/min
encoder frequency (estimated
241 FREQ in open circuit and Hz
221 FSLIP Frequency slip Hz
measured in closed-
222 UDC Real DC voltage V circuit configurations)
242 LOAD Actual load %
223 A Modulation %
243 ESLOAD Estimated load %
Rotor magnetisation
225 IMR A
current Converter modulation
244 TWORK h
time counter
226 T MOT Winding temperature °C
Converter on time
227 T ROT Rotor time constant ms 245 TOP h
counter
Internal reference
228 FREF Hz 249 DSET Set of active data
frequency (1)
Reference frequency as 250 IND Digital inputs state
229 PCREF %
a percentage (2)
Control speed
231 PHIXT IxT peak value % 251 INA1 V
reference
232 PHIDC IxT-DC peak value %
252 INA1 Analogue input 2 V
253 INA1 Analogue input 3 mA

EFU

F0000
317 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
254 OUTD Digital outputs state F0000
F0000
318 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
255 TC Heatsink temperature °C F0000
F0000
319 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
256 TI Internal temperature °C F0000
F0000
257 OUTA1 Analogue output 1 mA 320 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
259 ERROR Actual error status F0000
321 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
266 OUTA1 Analogue output 2 mA F0000
322 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
267 OUTA1 Analogue output 3 mA
F0000
323 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
269 WARN Warnings F0000
F0000
275 CTRST Controller status 324 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
287 UDMAX Udc peak value V F0000
325 ERR1 00000:00; Error3
F0000
288 UDAVG Average Udc value V DC bus voltage upon last
330 EUDC V
Heatsink peak error
289 TCMAX °C
temperature value Output voltage upon last
Heatsink average 331 EURMS V
290 TCAVG °C error
temperature value Stator frequency upon
Internal peak 332 EFS Hz
291 TIMAX °C last error
temperature value
Encoder 1
Internal average 333 EEC1 Hz
292 TIAVG °C frequency upon last error
temperature value
Encoder 2
293 IMAX I apparent peak value A 334 EEC1 Hz
frequency upon last error
Ia phase current upon
294 IAVG I apparent average value A 335 EIA A
last error
Positive active power Ib phase current upon
295 PMAXP kW 336 EIB A
Negative active power Ic phase current upon
296 PMAXN kW 337 EIC A
Active power average
297 PAVG kW RMS value of current
value 338 EIRMS A
upon last error
301 ENRGP Energy, positive kWh
Isd / reactive current
302 ENRGN Energy, negative kWh 339 EISD A
upon last error
F0000 Isq / active current up on
310 ERR1 00000:00; Last Error 340 EISQ A
F0000 last error
00000:00; Penultimate F0000 Rotor magnetisation
311 ERR1 341 EIMR A
error F0000 current upon last error
F0000
312 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 342 ET Torque upon last error Nm
F0000
313 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 343 EINA1 V
F0000 last error
314 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 344 EINA1 V
F0000 last error
315 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 345 EINA1 mA
F0000 last error
F0000 Analogue output 1 upon
316 ERR1 00000:00; Error3 346 EOUT1 mA
F0000 last error

EFU
VAL menu (variables that may be monitored) PARA menu (parameter configurations)
Name of program 33 cha-
29 NAME
Analogue output 2 upon installed racters
347 EOUT1 mA
last error
30 CONF Configuration Selection
Analogue output 3 upon
348 EOUT1 mA Selec-
last error 33 LANG Language
tion
Frequency output 123:
349 EFO Hz
repetition upon last error Rearm
Command line for
4444:
34 PROG original settings reset
Status of digital inputs Original
350 EIND or error reset.
upon last error set-
tings.
Status of digital outputs 39 TVENT Air cooling on temp. °C
351 EOUTD
upon last error Selec-
237 PHCLR Reset memory
tion
h:m:s.
352 ETIME Time since last error Motor data
ms
370 MUR Rated voltage V
Heatsink temperature
353 ETC °C
371 MIR Rated current A
upon last error
Internal temperature 372 MNR Rated speed -1/min
354 ETI °C
upon last error 373 MPP Nº of pole pairs
Controller status at latest
355 EC text 374 MCOPR Rated j cosine
error:
Warning status upon last 375 MFR Rated frequency Hz
356 EW text
error 376 MPR Rated power kW
Internal value 1 upon last
357 EI1 400 FT Switching frequency kHz
error
Internal value 2 upon last Error and warning compartment
358 EI1
error 405 WIXTD Lim. warning IxT DC %
Extended value 1 upon 406 WIXT Lim. warning IxT %
359 EF1
last error
407 WTC Limit warning Tc °C
Extended value 2 upon
360 EF1 408 WTI Limit warning Ti °C
last error
Checksum upon last 409 CTMSG Controller status Selection
361 CHSUM
error Communication interface
0 ... Time watchdog RS232/
362 ESUM Number of errors 413 WDOG s
32767 RS485
Error and warning compartment
PARA menu (parameter configurations) 415 DCCMX DC compensation limit V
Earth/ground fault switch

nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit 416 IEOFF A
off limit
0 SN Serial number (date) text 417 F OFF Frequency switch off limit Hz
1 OPT Optional modules text Frequencies/Ramps
Selec- 418 FMIN Minimum frequency Hz
10 BAUD Xmission speed
tion
419 FMAX
Maximum frequency Hz
12 VERS Software version –Fl text
Clockwise acceleration
420 RACCR Hz/s
(1)
27 PASSW Change password 0 ... 999
Clockwise deceleration
421 RDECR Hz/s
28 MODE Access level 1 ... 3 (1)

EFU

Name/meaning Unit
nº Abbrev. Name/meaning Unit nº Abbrev.
Counter clockwise Reference and real values source

422 RACCL Hz/s
acceleration (1) Motor-potentiometer
Counterclockwise 474 MPOTI Selection
423 RDECL Hz/s operation mode
deceleration (1)
Clockwise emergency Reference
424 RDNCR Hz/s 475 RFSEL Selection
stop (1) frequency source (1)
Counterclockwise Programmable frequencies (1)
425 RDNCL Hz/s
emergency stop (1) Programmable
426 RFMX Maximum advance 1) Hz 480 FF1 Hz
frequency 1 (1)
Clockwise ramp rise time Programmable
430 RRTR ms 481 FF1 Hz
(1) frequency 2 (1)
Programmable
482 FF1 Hz
431 RFTR Clockwise ramp fall time (1) ms frequency 3 (1)
Counterclockwise ramp rise Programmable
432 RRTL ms 483 FF1 Hz
time (1) frequency 4 (1)
Counterclockwise ramp Encoder data
433 RFTL ms
fall time (1) Encoder 1 operation
490 EC1SL Selection
Locking frequency (1) mode
491 EC1N Nº pulses/revolution
447 FB1 1st locking frequency (1) Hz
492 EC1L Output type encoder 1 Selection
448 FB1 2nd locking frequency (1) Hz
Repetition
449 FBHYS Hysteresis – freq. (1) Hz 496 FOSEL Selection
frequency channel
Analogue inputs Operation
498 FORMP frequency operation Hz
450 TBLOW Tolerance limit point zero % mode
Tolerance limit at Braking unit
451 TBUPP %
maximum Brake unit trigger
Analogue input operation 506 UD BC V
452 A1SEL Selection threshold
mode 1
Motor chopper
453 A1SET Extreme upper point A1 V
Motor chopper trigger
507 UD MC V
454 A1OFF Lowest point A1 V threshold
Analogue input operation Comparator value
460 A2SEL Selection
mode 2 510 FTRIG Frequency setting Hz
461 A2SET Extreme upper point A1 V Percentages (2)
Percentage of min
462 A1OFF Lowest point A2 V 518 PRMIN %
reference
Temperature setting Percentage of max
519 PRMAX %
reference
465 MTSEL Operation mode Selection
Digital and relay outputs
466 MTCAL Temperature coefficient °C Operation mode Digital
530 D1SEL Selection
output 1
467 MTCAT Temperature setting °C
D1SEL Operation mode Digital
Analogue inputs 531 Selection
output 2
Analogue input operation Operation mode Digital
470 A1SEL Selection 532 D1SEL Selection
mode 3 output 3
471 A1SET Extreme upper point A3 mA 533 D4SEL Selection
output 4
472 A1OFF Lowest point A3 mA Operation mode Digital
532 D4SEL Selection
output 5

EFU

Operation mode Power reference support
540 C1SEL Selection 672 UDU1 V
Comparator 1 value
541 C1ON Upper comparator on % Voltage renewal
674 UDACC Hz/s
acceleration
542 C1OFF Lower comparator off % 675 UDOFF Switch off threshold Hz
Operation mode 676 UDU2 Ref. switch off value V

543 C1SEL Selection
Comparator 2 677 UDV Amplification
544 C1ON Upper comparator on % 678 UDTI Integral time ms
545 C1OFF Lower comparator off % 680 UDLIM Reference DC bus limitation V
681 UDFMX Max. freq. increase. Hz

549 DEVMX Control maximum deviation %
Analogue outputs 683 VC GL Gen. ref. current limit A
Operation mode Current controller

550 O1SEL Selection
Analogue output 1
Current controller
Zero setting Analogue 700 DC V -
551 O1OFF % amplification (3)
output A1 Current controller integral
Analogue output 701 DC TI ms
552 O1SC % time (3)
amplification A1
Additional motor data
Operation mode
555 O1SEL Selection Rated magnetisation
Analogue output A2 716 MIMAG A
current 3)
Zero setting Analogue
556 O1OFF % 717 MFLUX Reference flux %
output A2
Analogue output Rated slip correction
557 O1SC % 718 MSLIP %
amplification A2 factor 3)
Operation mode 719 MSLMSX Frequency slip %
560 O3SEL Selection
Analogue output 3
Zero setting Analogue Speed controller
561 O3OFF %
output A3 Speed controller
720 SCSEL Selection
Analogue output operation mode
562 O3SC %
amplification A3 721 SC V1 Amplification 1 (1)
Motor protection switch
722 SCTI1 Integral time 1 (1) ms
PTC thermal probe
570 MTSEL Selection
operation mode 723 SC V1 Amplification 2 (1)
Motor thermal protection
571 MSEL Selection 724 SCTI2 Integral time 2 (1) ms
operation mode
573 LISEL Selection 725 ACSEL Selection
operational mode operation mode.(1)
574 LIPR Power limit % 726 ACMIN Minimum acceleration (1) Hz/s
575 LID Duration limit min Mechanical time constant
727 AC TM ms
(1)
Voltage controller
Output values limit
Voltage controller
670 UDSEL Selection Acceleration pre-control
operation mode 728 SCULI A
operation mode.(1)
729 SCLLI Minimum acceleration (1) A

EFU
Mechanical time constant Starting behaviour

730 SCULT %
(1) Flux formation maximum
780 FCTFF ms
Output values limit (continuation) time
Acceleration pre-control 781 FCIFF Flux formation current (3) A
731 SCLLT %
operation mode.(1)
732 SCUPT Minimum acceleration (1) % Brake behaviour
Mechanical time constant
733 SCLPT % 800 BRT1 Brake open delay time 1 s
(1)
Acceleration pre-control 801 BRT2 Brake open delay time 2 s
734 SCSUI Selection
operation mode (1)
735 SCSLI Lower Isq limit source Selection 802 BRT3 Brake open delay time 3 s
736 SCSUT Torque upper limit source Selection 803 BRT4 Brake open delay time 4 s
737 SCSLT Torque lower limit source Selection 804 BRT11 Brake close delay time 1 s
805 BRT12 Brake close delay time 2 s
Speed control switching
738 SCSWP Hz
limit 806 BRT13 Brake close delay time 3 s
739 SCULP Upper power limit kW 807 BRT14 Brake close delay time 4 s
740 SCLLP Lower power limit kW Break open monitoring

808 BR_I A
current
Field controller
Field amplification 809 BR_F Brake closing frequency %
741 FC V
controller (3) Frequency reference Selecta-
Field controller integral 810 FCTFF
742 FC TI ms source ble
time (3)
Mechanical system data
Upper Isd limit reference
743 FC UL A
(3) 811 TM Mechanical time constant s
744 FC LL Lower Isd limit reference A
812 TPM Turns per metre 1/m
Modulation controller Data for a load estimation
750 MCREF Reference modulation % Minimum frequency for
813 FMLLE %
Reference modulation load estimation
752 MC TI ms
integral time Maximum time for load
815 T LE s
Reference modulation estimation
753 MCSEL Selection
operation but Start-up torque
816 MK FM at maximum %
755 MC LL Lower Imr limit reference A
frequency Fmax
817 S OFF Switch off speed Hz
756 MCLCD Deviation control limit %
818 I LIM Limit current A
Encoder control
Desirable lifting Isq
Encoder control 819 Isq Up A
760 EMSEL Selection current
operation mode
761 EMSF Timeout: signal fault ms 820 Isq Do Desirable Isq current A
762 EMCF Timeout: channel fault ms Desirable Isq current

821 Isq Do lowering at Fmax A
763 EMDF Timeout: direction fault ms frequency
822 BR LE Operation mode A

EFU
3 OVERSPEED CONTROL SYSTEM

The crane features a built-in safety system that prevents the load from overspeeding if there is a frequency in-
verter failure.
A pulse detector sends the programmable computer (PLC) a signal proportional to the motor rotation speed.
Meanwhile, the PLC receives the signals from the load limiters and finds out the suspended load.
At all times, the PLC calculates the motor rotation speed and compares it to the maximum allowed speed for
the load level and, if it detects an overspeed, it switches to fault status and orders brake application as well as
cutting the power supply to the frequency variator.
The PLC also verifies that the detector is sending pulses when the motor is moving so that if there were a failure
in the sensor or if the cable were cut, the PLC would also switch to fault status.
If the PLC switches to fault status, it can be reset by pressing the PRE reset button located in the lifting cabinet.
The PLC reports on fault status using the LEDs located on its front, as indicated in the drawing below.
LED panel
The following table indicates the software status according to the status of the LEDs:
LED STATUS SOLUTION

PWR Fixed PLC powered -
(Green) Off No power supply to PLC Check voltage
RUN Fixed Program running normally -
(Green) Flashing Program execution fault Reprogram or replace
Off Software is not running Connect to the PLC and execute
program or replace PLC
ERR Fixed PLC internal fault Replace PLC
(red) Flashing Software structure fault Reprogram or replace
Off The program did not execute Reprogram or replace
OUT.0 Fixed Fault due to overspeed or defective sensor -
(Green) since the last PLC reset
Off Fault due to excessive motor speed or a Press PRE to reset. Check variator
pulse detector fault and detector.
OUT.3 Off No fault due to overspeed or defective sensor -
(Green) since the last PLC reset
Flashing Fault due to excessive motor speed or a Press PRE to reset. Check variator
pulse detector fault and detector.

EFU
4 BRAKING RESISTORS
Both the braking resistors and their enclosures may reach very high temperatures.
Even if the variator is not dissipating energy in the braking resistors, this does not guarantee that they
Before beginning any maintenance operation on the braking resistors, turn off the variator and wait five
minutes until the direct-current bus is discharged. Otherwise, you may be subjected to an electrical dis-
charge.
During deceleration of variator movement, the inertia is dissipated by heating a battery of electrical resistors
The condition of this battery must be verified so that the system operates correctly, given that the variator be-
haviour is quite sensitive to variations in resistance value. Given the need to dissipate heat, the resistor bank
is not sealed and is therefore exposed to small particles.
In salty or dusty environments, the resistor bank must be checked regularly and, if necessary, it must be cleaned
using air and brushes to avoid situations that may affect its electrical resistance value.
5 EFFI+ System
The Effi+ system lets users increase the maximum speed of the lifting system in order to achieve significant
increases in the crane's productivity.
On occasion it may be advisable to deactivate the system to prevent it from reaching high speeds, for example,
when working with a low under-hook height. For this purpose, there is a switch inside the cabinet that lets users
cancel the job in high-speed areas.

CFU
TROLLEY SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL PART -
0 CONTENTS
1 OPERATING DESCRIPTION
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
1 OPERATING DESCRIPTION
The crane operator must match the speed to the working conditions and to factors such as visibility,
obstacles, proximity of people, proximity to other moving objects, reaction time, etc. at all times.
The movement of the winch is secured by the frequency converter in such a way that it occurs gradually,
without any abrupt changes in speed, in accordance with the command given by the crane operator through the
controls. The controls include a potentiometer, which allows the operator to select any speed from a minimum
up to the maximum permitted speed. The maximum permitted speed depends on the location of the trolley, the
load that is being handled and the speed range selected by the crane operator (see load / speed diagram).
If the trolley comes close to the limit switch or the crane is loaded with a moment of more than 90% of the
permitted maximum, the maximum speed is automatically reduced (quick speed pre-limiting).
load
Load/maximum speed diagram. speed
(1) Mechanism in quick speed pre-limiting position due to proximity to limit switch or because the crane
is loaded with a moment of more than 90% of the maximum permitted.
(2) Speed in reduced speed range, via cabin switch ( ) or due to load limit.
(3) Speed in maximum speed range, via cabin switch ( ) without load limit.
1.1 Operating the electromechanical brake smoothly and safely

The converter controls the opening and closing of the electromechanical load holding brake.
At the beginning of the movement, the brake is only opened if the converter can assure that the motor has
sufficient torque available.
The brake is applied at zero speed, eliminating any possible abrupt movements deriving from the operation of
the brake. At the end of the movement the converter decreases the speed of the mechanism until it is practically
zero and then orders the application of the brake.
Since this is a holding brake rather than a working brake, the wear upon the brake and therefore its
maintenance is minimum.
The system features two speed ranges, maximum (3) or reduced (2), which can be selected by the
crane operator using a switch in the cabin or forced by the load limitation system (with large loads, the speed
is automatically reduced to range (2)).
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
If a variator is replaced, before connecting it check that the braking resistors have no earth leakage.
Failure to check this point could result in irreparable damage to the variator.

CFU
2.1 Use of frequency converter terminals

L1-L2-L3 Input terminals. (Converter power supply)
U-V-W Output terminals. (Motor power supply)
Rb1 Output for continuous BUS discharge resistor (depending on converter model).
Rb2
X10.2
Converter relay fault contact.
X10.3
X210A.1 Power supply for external inputs (24 V).
X210A.3 Input for enabling variator and resetting variator.
X210A.4 Trolley forward direction input.
X210A.5 Trolley backward direction input.
X210A.6 Motor heat probe connection.
X210.2
Inputs for limiting maximum speed value.
X210.2
X210B.2 (0 V)
X210B.3 Motor brake control output.
X210B.5 10 V.
X210B.6 Speed reference.
X210B.7 0 V.
2.2 Operating from the console and diagnosing errors
The operation of the frequency converter and the connected load is constantly monitored.
Diverse functions document the operational behaviour and facilitate the diagnosis of the operation and any
errors.

The two green and red LEDs on the frequency converter indicate the state of the converter. They are located
on the front of the converter, in the same area where the console is connected. When the console is connected,
they are hidden from view and the console must therefore be disconnected in order to check their status (their
location is shown in the diagram below):
4 3 2 1
ESC ENT
When the console is connected, the state of the converter is indicated via the messages RUN, WARN and
FAULT in the display.

CFU
Below we show how the state of the LEDs or the display messages correspond to the operating status of the
converter.
LED and display screens
Green LED Red LED Display Status
on - Power connected, auto-check running

on off RUN
Device ready and activated
blinking RUN + WARN
on FAULT Device error. Consult parameter 310 for
off blinking FAULT blinking information on causes of error.
off - Power disconnected or fault in power supply.
off RUN blinking Device ready, not activated (FUF + SRT or STL).
blinking Device ready and NOT activated. Consult parameter
blinking RUN + WARN
269 for information on causes of block
2.2.2 Messages on the console display of the variator

Under normal circumstances, when the converter is connected to the power supply, the display will show one
of the following:
CTRL
FUF: The variator is not enabled and will not respond to the commands given via the controls.
Check the X210.3 connection for enabling the variator.
241 A numeric value: The converter is operating as normal. By default, the value of parameter 241 is
shown, which monitors the turn frequency of the motor (which will be estimated if it is open-loop
or measured by the encoder if it is closed-loop).
F… Indicates the error code that has tripped the variator (See table of trip codes). The variator
will not be able to be started until either the RESET button, in the electrical cabinet, or the start/
F 0700
stop mushroom-head button has been pressed, or the power supply to the variator has been
disconnected. When the error has been reset, the screen goes back to displaying a numerical
value. If you leave the console error screen, it is possible to see the current error status of the
variator by reading the contents of parameter 259.
2.2.3 Using the viewing console

The converter's display can show other information that may be of use.
When the power supply is connected to the converter, parameter 241 appears on screen, showing the frequency
in real time of the motor (which will be estimated if it is open-loop or measured by the encoder if it is closed-
loop). Other parameters can be viewed on the display by navigating through the menu structure.
The display interface consists of three menus: CTRL, PARA and VAL. Shown below is the nest structure of the
menus, and the contents of each of them

CFU
MAIN MENU
PARA VAL CTRL
- STATUS OF - HANDLING AND

MOTOR AND STARTUP OF
DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA VARIATOR VARIATOR
- CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
- OPERATING MODIFICATION
The functions carried out through the menus shown in the viewer are as follows:
1) VAL menu: Allows for the viewing of values that give information on the state or the operating mode
of the motor and the variator. Specialist personnel can find in this menu relevant information about
the operation of the application.
2) PARA menu: Allows for the viewing and modification of parameters that alter the behaviour of the
application. No adjustments should be made without previously consulting the COMANSA SAT
department.
3) CTRL menu: Dedicated to the variator's setup process and to the direct operation of the motor.
It should not be used without previously consulting the technical service of COMANSA.
To move through the menus use the console keys, which work as follows:
- Up ( ) and down( ) keys : used to navigate through the menu structure and to modify the
value of values and parameters.
- ENT key: used to access the menus and the parameters and values in each menu, as well as to
confirm a change made to the value of a parameter.
- ESC key: used to go back to the main menu or to a submenu or to cancel a modification made to
a parameter that is yet to be confirmed.
2.2.4 Investigating errors: the state of the variator when an error occurs, error log
The variator allows you to consult on the console display information which is very useful for solving any errors
that may occur during operation.
In addition to the basic information, which has been explained in previous sections, the variator includes two
features that help the user of the device or the technical service team to solve problems when an error occurs:
1) Status of the converter at the time of the last error:

If a fault occurs with the converter, the variator stores the values of the currents, voltages, frequencies,
etc. within parameters 330 to 360 of the VAL menu. After an error occurs, it is advisable to consult these
parameters, especially if the cause of the fault cannot be detected by other means.
2) List of the last 16 errors:

Parameters 310 to 325 of the VAL menu each stores the description of an error and the operating time
when it has occurred (hours-minutes since the initial use of the variator).
3) Sum of errors:
Gives a total sum of all the errors that have occurred during the lifetime of the variator (parameter 362
of the VAL menu).

CFU
2.3 Error codes

Error messages are shown on the variator screen with an F…. The error codes, their possible causes and their
solutions are described later on. Resetting the converter can be done in either of two ways:
- Press the reset button inside the electrical cabinet.
- Press the crane's stop button and then start it again.
After the variator has been tripped, it is advisable to note down the fault code that appears on the screen and
to find out what has caused said fault.
The following error messages are shown on the display whenever an error has occurred. The error can be removed
from the screen by pressing the start/enter key. It is also possible to check the state of the error by reading the
contents of parameter 259 of the VAL submenu (If no error is present, this parameter will show F0000).
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
SCREEN EXPLANATION CAUSE SOLUTION
F0000 No error has occurred. - -
Converter overloaded for more than 60 -Overload in hoist

s. This appears when the output current weight.
-Check the mechanical
exceeds the device's safety values for a -Mechanical overload,
F0102 variables: load,
determined amount of time. For example: motor overstrained.
possible blockage, etc.
150% for more than 60 seconds. -Motor locked, seized
130% for more than 30 seconds. up.
-Overload in hoist
Converter overloaded at low output weight.
-Check the mechanical
frequency. Check the mechanism and the -Mechanical overload,
F0103 variables: load,
motor. Similar to IXT but for low supply motor overstrained.
possible blockage, etc.
frequencies (<5Hz) -Motor locked, seized
up.
-Excessive ambient -Check electrical
Appears when the radiator temperature temperature. cabinet cooling.
F0200
exceeds 80°C or 90°C. -Converter cooling not -Check converter
working or blocked. cooling.
Appears when the radiator's temperature -Converter's internal -Check electrical
sensor is faulty or the equipment is too sensor is faulty. cabinet heating.
F0201
cold (consult the permitted temperature -Excessively low -Replace device.
range). temperature.
Appears when the temperature inside the -Excessive ambient -Check electrical
variator exceeds 70°C. temperature. cabinet cooling.
F0300
-Converter cooling not -Check converter
working or blocked cooling.
Appears when the temperature inside the -Excessively low -Check electrical
F0301
variator falls below 0°C. temperature. cabinet heating.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
Appears when the value of the motor's -Temperature of motor -Check PTC probe
heat probe (PTC) changes or has a value too high (PTC > 3 connection.
that exceeds 3000 Ohms. kOhm) -Measure PTC
-PTC terminals of the resistance.
F0400 motor not connected -Check that the forced
to X464.1/2 on the cooling is working
variator. properly.
-PTC Probe cable
broken.
The converter fails to detect one of the -Disconnection of a -Check the motor and
phases of the motor phase of the converter its wiring from the
output. variator terminals.
F0403
-Motor cables cut.
-Motor phase in open
circuit.
Appears when the output current -Short-circuit or earth -Check motor's wiring
momentarily exceeds the predetermined fault in the motor or its and for any possible
value (around 200% of the nominal value supply line. leakage.
of the converter). -Excessive momentary -Check the hoist load.
F0500
demand on the motor -If the fault is recurring,
axle. even without load,
-Short-circuited replace the converter.
transistors.
The converter detects a sudden -Momentary overload -Check the mechanical
overcurrent. in the motor. variables: load,
-Short-circuit in one possible blockage, etc.
F0502
of the phases of the -Check the motor and
motor. its wiring from the
variator terminals.
Appears when a short-circuit or earth fault -Short-circuit or earth -Check motor's wiring
occurs in the output. fault in the motor or its and for any possible
supply line. leakage.
F0503
-Short-circuited -If the fault is recurring,
transistors. even without load,
occurs in the output. fault in the motor or its and for any possible
F0504
Appears when the sum of the line -Current leakage -Check motor's wiring
F0505 currents is incorrect. and for any possible
leakage.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
SCREEN EXPLANATION CAUSE SOLUTIO7N
Current phase of motor very high. -Momentary overload -Check the mechanical
in the motor. variables: load, possible
-Short-circuit in one blockage, etc.
F0506
of the phases of the -Check the motor and
motor. its wiring from the
variator terminals.
Fault in current monitoring -Momentary overload -Check the mechanical
in the motor. variables: load, possible
-Short-circuit in one blockage, etc.
F0507 of the phases of the
motor. -Check the motor and
its wiring from the
variator terminals.
Internal fault detecting the power card -Internal variator fault -Contact COMANSA.
F0600
F0601
F0602
F0603
F0604
F0605
Appears when the voltage of the -Supply voltage too -Check the network
intermediate DC circuit exceeds the high. voltage.
maximum permitted limit (780 Vdc). -Voltage spikes or -Check the dynamic
disturbances on the braking resistors.
F0700 supply line.
-Fault in the braking
transistor.
-Fault in the braking
resistor.
Appears when the voltage of the -Unsteady or excessively -Check the network
intermediate DC circuit falls below the low supply voltage. voltage in all the phases.
F0701 minimum permitted limit (350 Vdc). DC bus -Fault in a supply phase. -Check the wiring.
voltage too low. -Voltage drop caused by
dip in the cables.
Appears when there is a fault in the -Unsteady or excessively -Check the network
F0702 converter power supply. low supply voltage. voltage in all the phases.
-Check the wiring.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
-Fault in a supply phase of the variator. -One of the supply -Check the variator
phases of the variator power supply.
F0703
has no power. -Check the fuses of the
variator.
intermediate DC circuit is incorrect high. voltage.
-Crane being used -Check that the
F0704
without a correctly crane's connection can
connected transformer. guarantee the correct
voltage.
intermediate DC circuit is higher than the high. voltage.
activation voltage of the dynamic braking -Crane being used -Check that the
F0705
circuit. without a correctly crane's connection can
voltage.
intermediate DC circuit is higher than the high. voltage.
activation voltage of the Motor chopper -Crane being used -Check that the
F0706
circuit. without a correctly crane's connection can
voltage.
Appears when the 24 Vdc electronics -Defective converter. -Replace the converter.
F0801 voltage is too low in the controller card. -Wiring of the control -Check the wiring of
terminals. the control terminals.
Internal fault in the power interface card -Internal variator fault. -Check for a source of
-Excessive electrical any unusual excessive
noise. electrical noise in
F0803
the installation or its
surroundings.
-Replace variator.
Appears when the electronics voltage is -Defective converter. -Replace the converter.
F0804
too high. -Wiring of the control -Check the wiring of
terminals. the control terminals.
Fault in the bootstrap precharge system of -Internal variator fault -Replace variator.
F0810
the condensers.
Appears when the preload contactor has -Load circuit overheated. -Disconnect the power
F0900 failed or has not been activated. supply, wait five minutes
and reconnect it.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
Fault in the braking transistor. -Internal fault in the -Carefully check the
variator caused by a braking resistor for a
F1000 defect in the braking possible short-circuit and
transistor. correct it.
-Replace variator.
Appears when the variator detects that -Badly configured or -Check the calibration of
the Frequency Switch-Off Limit, parameter defective load limit the load limit system.
F1100
417, has been exceeded. system. -Check that the variator
-Defective converter. is working properly.
Speed limit reached due to problem with -Problem in braking -Carefully check the
braking. circuit. braking resistor to see if
-Overloaded braking it was in open circuit.
F1101
circuit. -Check the mechanical
variables: load, possible
blockage, etc.
Speed limit reached. -Faulty encoder. -Check the mechanical
-Electromagnetic noise variables: load, possible
in the encoder. blockage, etc.
F1110 -Badly connected -Check that the encoder
encoder. is working correctly.
-Excessive speed for the
load level.
occurs in the output circuit. fault in the motor or its and for any possible
F1300
Appears when the variator supplies an -Disconnection of a -Check the motor and its
irregular load. phase of the converter wiring.
F1310 output.
-Motor cables cut.
Appears when the variator detects an -Badly connected motor -Check the motor
irregular signal in the MFIA1 multifunction potentiometer. potentiometer
F1401 input (potentiometer controls). -Faulty motor connections.
potentiometer. -Repair or replace motor
potentiometer.
Appears when the variator detects an -Badly connected motor -Check the motor
overcurrent in the MFIA1 multifunction potentiometer. potentiometer
F1407 input (potentiometer controls). -Faulty motor connections.
potentiometer. -Repair or replace motor
potentiometer.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
The variator fails to detect a signal from the -Faulty encoder. -Check that the encoder
encoder. -Electromagnetic noise is working correctly.
in the encoder. -Check the encoder's
connection and wiring.
-Check for a source of
F1430 any unusual excessive
electrical noise in
surroundings.
-Check the conduction of
the encoder cable.
Appears when the encoder control detects -Faulty encoder. -Check the encoder
that one of the encoder's signal channels is -Incorrect encoder connections.
F1431
absent. connection. -Replace the encoder.
-Cut encoder cable.
Appears when the encoder control detects -Faulty encoder. -Check the encoder
F1432 an incorrect turn direction. -Incorrect encoder connections.
connection. -Replace the encoder.
The variator detects a lower number of -The connected encoder -Check that the encoder
encoder pulses than expected. is not suitable. is working correctly.
F1434 -Faulty encoder. -Check the number of
pulses per turn of the
encoder.
The variator detects a higher number of -The connected encoder -Check that the encoder
encoder pulses than expected. is not suitable. is working correctly.
F1435 -Faulty encoder. -Check the number of
pulses per turn of the
encoder.
Fault in the encoder divisions. -The variator detects -The connected
F1436 a fault in the encoder encoder is not suitable.
marks. -Faulty encoder.
Fault in an optional card of the variator. -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for a source of
-Internal variator fault. any unusual excessive
electrical noise in
F2300
surroundings.
-Replace variator.
Fault in an optional card of the variator. -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for a source of
electrical noise in
F2301
surroundings.
-Replace variator.

CFU
ERROR MESSAGES
CONSOLE
SOLUTION TO PROBLEM
DISPLAY
Fault in the EEPROM memory of the -Temporary fault reading -Switch off the variator
variator. from memory. and then switch it on
-Program badly stored in again.
memory. -Load correct program.
-Defective memory. -Replace variator.
F0AXX
-Electromagnetic noise. -Check for a source of
any unusual excessive
electrical noise in
surroundings.
Fault in the control card. -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for a source of
electrical noise in
F0BXX
surroundings.
-Replace variator.
Fault in the control card. -Electromagnetic noise. -Check for a source of
electrical noise in
F0CXX
surroundings.
-Replace variator.
Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault in the motor -Repeat autotuning.
SFXXX parameter identification -Check motor
process. parameters.
Internal fault during autotuning. -Fault in the motor -Repeat autotuning.
SAXXX parameter identification -Check motor
process. parameters.
Apart from the previous error messages, there exist additional error messages that are not listed here.
If an error message not listed here is received, contact the technical service of Comansa.

CFU
2.4 List of parameters that can be viewed from the console

Listed below are the values (VAL MENU) and parameters (PARA MENU) that are shown in the display's sub-
menus:
Note: Those parameters that may be of most use to the user have been emphasized in either italics or
bold.
VAL menu (Monitorable variables) VAL menu (Monitorable variables)

No. Abbrev. Name / Meaning Units No. Abbrev. Name / Meaning Units
210 FS Stator frequency Hz Real frequency of motor

(which will be estimated
211 I RMS Apparent current A 241 FREQ Hz
if it is open-loop or mea-
212 U RMS Output voltage V sured if it is closed-loop)
213 PW Active power kW Time counter of con-
244 TWORK h
214 Active current A verter modulation
215 I SD Isd current A
Time counter of con-
216 I SQ Isq current A 245 TOP h
verter connection
217 Encoder frequency Hz
249 DSET Active data group
Speed measured by
218 N1 1/min
encoder 250 IND Status of digital inputs
221 FSLIP Slip frequency Hz
MFIA1 input: Speed ref.
251 MFIA1 V
222 UDC Real DC voltage V of controls
223 A Modulation % 252 MFIA2 MFIA2 analogue input V

224 Torque Nm 254 OUTD Status of digital outputs
225 Rotor flux %
255 TC Radiator temperature °C
226 T MOT Winding temperature °C 256 TI Internal temperature °C
257 MFOA1 MFOA1 analogue output mA
227 T ROT Rotor time constant ms
F0000
259 ERROR Current error status
Internal reference F9999
228 FREF Hz
frequency W0000
269 WARN Warnings
Reference frequency as W9999
229 PCREF % C0000
percentage 275 CTRST Controller status
C9999
Real frequency as
230 % 287 UDMAX Peak Udc value V
percentage
231 PHIXT Peak IxT value % 288 UDAVG Average Udc value V
232 PHIDC Peak IxT-DC value % Peak radiator temp.
289 TCMAX °C
value
235 U SD Flux formation voltage V Average radiator temp.
290 TCAVG °C
value
236 U SQ Torque formation voltage V 291 TIMAX Peak internal temp. value °C
238 Flux value % Average internal temp.
292 TIAVG °C
239 Reactive current A value
Real speed of motor 293 IMAX Peak apparent I value A
(which will be estimated
240 SPEED 1/min 294 IAVG Average apparent I value A
if it is open-loop or mea-
sured if it is closed-loop) Peak positive active
295 PMAXP kW
power value

CFU
VAL menu (Monitorable variables) VAL menu (Monitorable variables)

No. Abbrev. Name / Meaning Units
Ic phase current at time
Peak negative active 337 EIC A
296 PMAXN kW of last error
power value
Apparent current at time
Average active power 338 EIRMS A
297 PAVG kW of last error
value
Isd / Reactive current at
301 ENRGP Energy, positive kWh 339 EISD A
time of last error
302 ENRGN Energy, negative kWh Isq / Active current at
340 EISQ A
F0000 time of last error
310 ERR1 00000:00; Last Error
F9999 Rotor magnetization cu-
341 EIMR A
00000:00; Penultimate F0000 rrent at time of last error
311 ERR2
error F9999 Torque at time of last
342 ET Nm
F0000 error
312 ERR3 00000:00; Error3
F9999 MFIA1 analogue input
F0000 343 EMFIA1 (Controls) at time of last V
313 ERR4 00000:00; Error4
F9999 error
F0000 MFOA1 analogue output
314 ERR5 00000:00; Error5 346 EMFOA1 mA
F9999 at time of last error
F0000
315 ERR6 00000:00; Error6 Repetition frequency
F9999
349 EFO output at time of last Hz
F0000
316 ERR7 00000:00; Error7 error
F9999
F0000 Status of digital inputs at
317 ERR8 00000:00; Error8 350 EIND
F0000
318 ERR9 00000:00; Error9
F9999
Status of digital outputs
F0000 351 EOUTD
319 ERR10 00000:00; Error10 F9999 at time of last error
F0000
Time since activation at h:m:s.
320 ERR11 00000:00; Error11 352 ETIME
F9999 time of last error ms
F0000 Radiator temperature at
321 ERR12 00000:00; Error12 353 ETC °C
F0000 Internal temperature at
322 ERR13 00000:00; Error13 354 ETI °C
F0000
323 ERR14 00000:00; Error14 F9999 Controller status at time
355 EC text
of last error
F0000 Warning status at time of
324 ERR15 00000:00; Error15 356 EW text
F9999 last error
F0000 Internal value 1 at time of
325 ERR16 00000:00; Error16 357 EI1
F9999
last error
DC bus voltage at time of
330 EUDC V Internal value 2 at time of
last error 358 EI2
last error
Output voltage at time of
331 EURMS V Long value 1 at time of
last error 359 EF1
last error
Stator frequency at time
332 EFS Hz Long value 2 at time of
of last error 360 EF2
last error
Frequency of encoder 1
333 EEC1 Hz Checksum at time of last
at time of last error 361 CHSUM
error
Frequency of encoder 2
334 EEC2 Hz 0 ...
at time of last error 362 ESUM No. of Errors
32767
Ia phase current at time
335 EIA A No. of auto-recognised 0 ...
of last error 363
Errors 32767
Ib phase current at time
336 EIB A
of last error

CFU
PARA menu (configuration parameters)

VAL menu (Monitorable variables)
103 Error recognition Selection
No. of auto-recognised 0 ...
363
Errors 32767 164 Control change n-/M Selection
470 Rotations 204 Motor-PTC Selection
A0000 237 PHCLR Reset memory Selection

537 Current warning
A9999
Motor data
OK/
797 SETUP status 369 Motor type Selection
NOK
370 MUR Nominal voltage V
371 MIR Nominal current A
372 MNR Nominal speed min-1
0 SN Serial no. (date) text 373 MPP No. of pole pairs
1 OPT Optional modules text 374 MCOPR Nominal j cosine
12 VERS Software version –Fl text 375 MFR Nominal frequency Hz
27 PASSW Change password 0 ... 999 376 MPR Nominal power kW

377 Stator resistance mOhm
28 MODE Access level 1 ... 3
378 Leakage coefficient %
Name of installed
29 NAME 33 Char.
program Pulse width modulation
30 CONF Configuration Selection 400 FT Switching frequency Selection
33 LANG Language Selection 401 Min. switching frequency Selection

123:
Command line for reset- Error and warning behaviour
Reset
34 PROG ting to factory default 405 WIXTD IxT DC warning limit %
4444:
values or error reset. Fact. def.
406 WIXT IxT warning limit %
39 TVENT Ventilator on temperature °C
407 WTC Tc warning limit °C
62 Motor pot Freq. increase Selection 408 WTI Ti warning limit °C
409 CTMSG Controller status Selection
63 Motor pot Freq. decrease Selection
Communication interface
66 Fixed frequency change 1 Selection
412 Local/Remote Selection
67 Fixed frequency change 2 Selection RS232/RS485 watchdog
413 WDOG s
68 Clockwise startup Selection time
69 Anti-clockwise startup Selection Error and warning behaviour
70 Change data group 1 Selection 415 DCCMX DC compensation limit V
71 Change data group 2 Selection
Frequency disconnection
417 F OFF Hz
72 Motor pot Percent increase Selection limit
Frequencies / Ramps
Motor pot Percent de-
73 Selection 418 FMIN Minimum frequency Hz
crease
419 FMAX Maximum frequency Hz
75 Fixed percentage change 1 Selection
76 Fixed percentage change 2 Selection 420 RACCR Clockwise acceleration Hz/s
83 Timer 1 Selection
421 RDECR Clockwise deceleration Hz/s
84 Timer 2 Selection

CFU

Anti-clockwise accelera-
422 RACCL Hz/s
tion 462 Load correction
Anti-clockwise decelera-
423 RDECL Hz/s 463 Activity after positioning
tion
Clockwise emergency 464 Waiting time ms
424 RDNCR Hz/s
stop
Temperature adjustment
Anti-clockwise emergency
425 RDNCL Hz/s 465 MTSEL Operating mode Selection
stop
Maximum monitoring
426 RFMX Hz 466 MTCAL Temperature coefficient %/°C
error
Clockwise ramp raising 467 MTCAT Adjustment temperature °C
430 RRTR ms
time Source of real and reference values
Clockwise ramp lowering
431 RFTR ms Motor pot ramp via ke-
time 473 Hz/s
ypad
Anti-clockwise ramp rai-
432 RRTL ms Motor Potentiometer ope-
sing time 474 MPOTI Selection
rating mode
Anti-clockwise ramp lowe-
433 RFTL ms Reference frequency
ring time 475 RFSEL Selection
source
Blocking frequency Reference percentage
476
440 Operating mode source
441 Fixed frequency Hz 477 Percentage slope ramp %/s

442 Maximum P component Hz Current percentage
478 -
source
443 Hysteresis %
Programmable frequencies
444 Amplification
480 FF1 Programmed frequency 1 Hz
445 Integral time Ms
446 Flux control factor
447 FB1 1st blocking frequency Hz 483 FF4 Programmed frequency 4 Hz
448 FB2 2nd blocking frequency Hz 489 JOG frequency Hz
449 FBHYS Hysteresis – freq. Hz Encoder data
Analogue inputs Encoder 1 operating
490 EC1SL Selection
mode
450 TB Tolerance band %
491 EC1N No. of pulses / revolution
452 Operating mode
Repetition frequency
496 FOSEL Selection
453 Error/warning behaviour channel
497 Divider
454 Point X1 %
Braking unit
455 Point Y1 %
456 Point X2 % 506 UD BC Braking unit trip threshold V
457 Point Y2 % Motor chopper
Positioning Motor chopper trip
507 UD MC V
458 Operating mode threshold
459 Signal source Comparator value
510 FTRIG Frequency adjustment Hz
460 Positioning distance U
461 Signal correction ms

CFU

Percentages (2)
Intelligent current limits
518 PRMIN Min. reference percentage %
Intelligent current limits
573 LISEL Selection
operating mode
519 PRMAX Max. reference percentage %
574 LIPR Power limit %
520 Programmed percentage 1 % 575 LID Time limit min
521 Programmed percentage 2 % Error/warning behaviour
522 Programmed percentage 3 % 576 Phase supervision Selection
523 Programmed percentage 4 %
578 No. of auto-recoveries
Digital outputs and relay 579 Startup delay ms
Digital output 1 operating Pulse width modulation
530 D1SEL Selection
mode Heat dissipator temp.
580 °C
Digital output 3 operating reduction limit
532 D3SEL Selection
mode Load loss monitoring
536 Creation of warning mask Selection 581 Operating mode Selection
Comparator 1 operating 582 Active I trip limit %

540 C1SEL Selection
mode 583 Time delay s
541 C1ON Upper comparator connected % V/f characteristic
600 Startup voltage V
Lower comparator
542 C1OFF %
disconnected 601 Voltage increase %
Comparator 2 operating 602 Increase frequency %
543 C2SEL Selection
mode
603 Cut-off voltage V
Upper comparator con-
544 C2ON %
604 Cut-off frequency Hz
nected
Lower comparator discon-
545 C2OFF % 605 Dynamic voltage precontrol %
nected
Current limit controller
549 DEVMX Maximum control deviation %
610 Operating mode Selection
Analogue outputs
611 Amplification
550 Operating mode Selection
612 Integral time ms
551 100% voltage V
613 Current limit A
552 0% voltage V
614 Frequency limit Hz
553 Analogue operation Selection
Startup behaviour
554 Digital operation Selection
620 Operating mode
555 Repetition freq. operation Selection 621 Amplification
556 Division marks 622 Integral time Ms
Motor protection switch 623 Startup current A
PTC heat probe operating 624 Frequency limit Hz

570 MTSEL Selection
mode Stop behaviour
Motor protection heat sink 630 Operating mode Selection
571 MSEL Selection
operating mode
Frequency limit
572 Hz

CFU

Continuous current brake
Current controller
631 Braking current A
Current controller
632 Braking time S 700 CC V
amplification
633 Demagnetization time S Current controller integral
701 CC TI ms
time
634 Amplification Additional motor data
635 Integral time ms Flux with 50% magnetiza-
713 %
Stop behaviour tion current
637 Disconnection threshold % Flux with 80% magnetiza-
714 %
tion current
638 Holding time S
Flux with 110% magneti-
On-the-fly operation 715 %
zation current
645 Operating mode Selection Nominal magnetization
716 MIMAG A
Braking time after on-the-fly current
646 S
operation 717 MFLUX Reference flux %
Motor current / nominal
647 % Nominal slip correction
current 718 MSLIP %
factor
648 Amplification
719 MSLMSX Slip frequency %
649 Integral time ms
Speed controller
Auto-startup
Speed controller opera-
720 SCSEL Selection
651 Operating mode Selection ting mode
Slip compensation 721 SC V1 Amplification 1
660 Operating mode 722 SCTI1 Integral time 1 ms
% 723 SC V2 Amplification 2
661 Amplification
724 SCTI2 Integral time 2 ms
662 Maximum slip ramp Hz/s
Acceleration precontrol
663 Minimum frequency Hz Acceleration precontrol
725 ACSEL Selection
Voltage controller operating mode (1)
Voltage controller 726 ACMIN Minimum acceleration Hz/s

670 UDSEL Selection
operating mode 727 AC TM Mechanical time constant ms
Output value limit
Reference power support 728 SCULI Current limit A
672 UDU1 V
value
C/gen. operation current
Voltage restoral accele- 729 SCLLI A
674 UDACC Hz/s limit
ration
730 SCULT Torque limit %
675 UDOFF Off threshold Hz
C/gen. operation torque
676 UDU2 Off reference value V 731 SCLLT %
limit
677 UDV Amplification Upper limit of torque
732 SCUPT %
678 UDTI Integral time ms comp. P
Lower limit of torque
680 UDLIM DC bus reference limit V 733 SCLPT %
comp. P
UDFMX C/Motor operation Isq
681 Max. freq. increase Hz 734 SCSUI Selection
limit source
683 VC GL Gen. ref. current limit A
C/gen. operation Isq limit
735 SCSLI Selection
source

CFU
PARA menu (configuration parameters) PARA menu (configuration parameters)

Name / Meaning Units
No. Abbrev. No. Abbrev. Name / Meaning Units
Motor operation torque Startup behaviour
736 SCSUT Selection
limit source
Maximum flux formation
Gen. operation torque 780 FCTFF ms
737 SCSLT Selection time
limit source
Current during flux forma-
Speed control switching 781 FCIFF A
738 SCSWP Hz tion
limit
Timer
C/Motor operation power
739 SCULP kW
limit 790 Timer 1 operating mode
C/gen. operation power
740 SCLLP kW 791 Timer 1 Time 1 s/m/h
limit
792 Timer 1 Time 2 s/m/h
Field controller
793 Timer 2 operating mode Selection
741 FC V Field amplification controller
794 Timer 2 Time 1 s/m/h
742 FC TI Field integral time controller ms 795 Timer 2 Time 2 s/m/h
743 FC UL Upper Isd reference limit A Auto installation
796 Select SETUP Selection

744 FC LL Lower Isd reference limit A
Braking behaviour
Speed controller
800 BRT1 Brake opening delay 1 s
748 Response damping %
Modulation controller 801 BRT2 Brake opening delay 2 s
750 MCREF Reference modulation % s

802 BRT3 Brake opening delay 3
Reference modulation
752 MC TI ms
integral time 803 BRT4 Brake opening delay 4 s
Reference modulation
753 MCSEL Selection 804 BRT11 Brake closing delay 1 s
operating mode
755 MC LL Lower Imr reference limit A 805 BRT12 Brake closing delay 2 s
806 BRT13 Brake closing delay 3 s
756 MCLCD Deviation control limit % 807 BRT14 Brake closing delay 4 s
Encoder control Brake opening monitoring

808 BR_I A
Encoder control operating current
760 EMSEL Selection
mode
761 EMSF Timeout: signal failure ms 809 BR_F Brake closing frequency %
762 EMCF Timeout: channel failure ms
763 EMDF Timeout: direction failure ms
Torque controller
767 Upper frequency limit Hz
768 Lower frequency limit Hz
Upper frequency limit

769 Selection
source
Lower frequency limit
770 Selection
source

CFU
Both the braking resistances as well as their enclosures may reach very high temperatures.
Even if the variator is not dissipating energy in the braking resistances, this does not guarantee that they
Before beginning any maintenance operation on the braking resistances, turn off the variator and wait
five minutes until the direct-current bus is discharged. Otherwise, you may be subjected to an electrical
discharge.
During deceleration of variator movement, the inertia is dissipated by heating a bank of electrical resistances
The condition of this battery must be verified so that the system operates correctly, given that the variator
behaviour is quite sensitive to variations in resistance value. Given the need to dissipate heat, the resistance
battery is not sealed and is therefore exposed to small particles.
In salty or dusty environments, the resistance battery must be checked regularly and, if necessary it must be
cleaned using air and brushes to avoid situations that may vary its electrical resistance value.

21LC
0 CONTENTS

REEVES)
REEVES)
3 REMOVING / REPLACING TROLLEY FOR DOUBLE
REEVING


SITUATION.
CE” CHAPTER.

GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 1
change.

21LC
Fig. 2
back limits.
ONCE THE “TROLLEY BACK” BUTTON HAS BEEN PRESSED TO EXCEED THE LIMIT, THE HOOK
UP MOVEMENT IS LOCKED UNTIL THE FRONT TROLLEY POSITION LIMITER COMES INTO
OPERATION.
Fig. 3
(LC4).

21LC
Fig. 4
Fig. 5

21LC
Fig. 6
profile.
(DOUBLE REEVING).

electrical cabinet.

change safety system may only be used by
service personnel who are fully aware of the
effect of cancelling the safety system.



21LC


SITUATION.
CHAPTER.

GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 8

21LC
Fig. 9
(LC4).
Fig. 10

21LC
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
operation.

21LC
Fig. 13
Fig. 14

21LC
Fig. 15
(SINGLE REEVING).

electrical cabinet.
Fig. 16


21LC

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 OPERATION
3 MANUAL OPERATION
4 WIRING
5 ADJUSTMENT
6 CHECKING OPERATION
1 DESCRIPTION
The crane is prepared for weather vaning by releasing the brake on the slewing motor(s), leaving the upper
crane free to move with the wind. The brakes are released remotely via the release units on the brake cover
of each slewing motor.
A control box in the operator’s cabin (or at the base of the crane when there is no cabin) governs the release
units.
In case of a power cut-off or malfunction in the release system, weather vaning can be done manually.
2 OPERATION
Weathervaning sequence (Fig. 1)
1 Opening the motor brake causes the manual lever (1) to move upwards
2 The electromagnet (5) attracts the moving armature (2) and positions it below the manual lever
(1).
3 When the brake drops the manual lever (1) rests against the moving armature (2), preventing the
brake from closing and weathervaning the crane.
Activating weathervaning
1 The crane must be in operation.
2 Press the weathervaning button on
the crane control panel and wait 5-10
seconds. If the crane siren is still
blowing after that time, the crane is
weathervaned.
3 Press Stop to cut the siren.
4 Press Start. The siren should continue
to blow when the Start button is
released.
5 Press stop to cut the siren.
Deactivating weathervaning.
1 Engage the slewing control with the
crane in operation.
IMPORTANT: 1 Manual releasing lever

2 Mobile armature
- Steps 4 and 5 are essential, as they 3 Manual releasing push button
ensure that weathervaning has actually 4 Brass nut
taken place. 5 Autoblocage nut
6 Releasing electromagnet and Switch set
- If the weathervaning button is pressed
7 Adapter disk
by accident during normal operation, just
8 Motor brake cover
engage the slewing control to deactivate
it. Fig. 1
- Do not hold down the weathervaning button more than 30 seconds.
Some cranes have a lamp on the weathervaning button to indicate that weathervaning is engaged.
el dispositivo de veleta está activado.

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
3 MANUAL OPERATION
If there is a malfunction or power cut-off the slewing motor brakes can be
released manually.
1- Lift the lever, overcoming the resistance of the brake springs, and
keep it lifted.
2- Press and hold down the button.
3- Release the lever.
4- Release the button.
This procedure should be repeated with each release unit.
Repeat the process on each release unit
Fig. 2
2
4 WIRING
3 1-2 48V (50/60 Hz) electro-magnet power
4 3-4 Electro-magnet operating indicator micro-switch.
.
Fig. 3
5 ADJUSTMENT
To regulate the unblocking weather vanning, proceed as follows:
1- Manually lift the unblocking lever (1).
2- Push the button (3) until the mobile armature (2) comes inside
under the lever (1).
3- Unscrew the nut (4) in such a way that the distance "a" between
armature (2) and lowr part of the lever (1) when this is lifted at
its highest be approximatively 0.5 mm.
4- Check electrical operation: the armature (2) should enter freely
when the weathervaning button is pressed on the crane controls,
and should release when slewing movement is commanded. If
it does not, slacken the self-locking nut (4) 1/12 of a turn (half a
facet) and try again.
NOTE: Between the position of maximum regulation and minimum

the brass nut (4) turns 4/6 of return (4faces). Fig. 4
IMPORTANTE: The brake gap should not be less than 1 mm if weathervaning is to be regulated
correctly.
Weathervaning must be used in windy conditions: if the jib points in the direction of the wind then the weathervaning
system is working correctly.
To check weathervaning when it not windy, proceed as follows:
1- Ensure that the crane can turn freely with no obstacles in its path.
2- With the trolley back and the hook raised and under no load, engage first gear and slew slowly.
3- Still in first gear, press the weathervaning button (the crane siren will sound).
4- Still slewing in first gear and with the weathervaning button engaged, press the stop control and check
that the jib continues to turn freely under its own inertia.
5- If it does not do so, readjust the brake gap (which should be 1 mm) and adjust the weathervaning
system..

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
0 CONTENTS
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2 OPERATION CHECK
3 ALARM AND TEST PROGRAMMING
4 RS 485 WIND-SPEED OUTPUT
5 HEATING SYSTEM FOR THE WIND-SPEED SENSOR

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The basic configuration has a wind-speed sensor (1), which is connected to the control and signalling unit
(2).
The system operates as follows:
- The control and signalling unit is electrically powered from the crane electric cabinet.
- The orange luminous beacon is activated when the wind-speed exceeds 50 km/h.
- The red luminous beacon and warning siren are activated when the wind-speed exceeds 70
km/h..
If the crane is no in operation, the wind alarm indication syste is no operable.

In case of disconnection of the crane, this should be placed in an out-of-service condition (including the
weathervaning).
It should be considered that the radio controls automatically disconnect the cran whe it is unused for a
certain period. When the crane is not supervised, it should be placed in an out-of-service condition.
1 Wind-speed sensor
2 Control and signalling unit
4 Fastening magnets
5 Orange and red beacons
6 Siren
7 Line fastening to the structure
8 Cabin display
Fig. 1
2 OPERATION CHECK
2.1 Indication and control unit
- Check the operation of the beacons and siren as follows:
- Check the crane is powered.
- The switches at the bottom of the crane and the general switch on the electrical cabinet are
in the ON position.
- Press the stop button in the crane control and then press the start button (radiocontrol,
telecontrol or seat).
- This procedure allows to detect a problem in:
- Orange or red beacons.
- Siren.
- Unit power supply.
The device checks the proper operation of the red and orange beacons and of the siren by switching the
beacons and the siren (each beacon should blink twice and the siren must horn once).

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
- If one or several elements do not operate, this is because there is a problem in the electric supply
or in the elements themselves.
During this test, physically cover the siren to prevent being deafened by the noise this produces.
- Double check that the control and signal code units are properly fixed by the magnets and check
that the unit is appropriately secured to the crane structure with the fastening line (7) which is
supplied.
- Check that the unit is visible from the crane operator’s control position.
2.2 Wind-speed sensor.

- Check that it turns freely.
- Check that it is not affected by the shielding of the structure.
- Check that the cable between the sensor and the control unit is not cut or disconnected.
2.3 Wind velocity detection system check.

The correct operation of the wind velocity detection system can be checked at three levels of complexity,
according to what needs to be checked:
Level 1. Checking of operation

The system is correctly connected and detects the wind velocity.
It is not checked whether the wind signal is correctly calibrated or whether the alarm system is activated
at preset values.
Necessary material:
- Cabin wind velocity display.
Instructions:
A. Connect the cabin wind velocity displayto the control unit (See Point 4).
B. Move the wind velocity detector cups either through the action of the wind or by turning them by
hand.
C. Check that there is a velocity reading on the cabin wind velocity display.
Level 2. Check the operation and quality of the signal detected

The system is correctly connected, is detecting the wind velocity and the signal detected is correct.
It is not checked whether the wind signal is 100% correctly calibrated or whether the alarm system is
activated at preset values.
Necessary materials:
- One complete portable anemometer with built-in display.
Instructions:
A. Connect the cabin wind velocity display to the control unit (See Point 4).
B. Install the portable anemometer pickup near the crane pickup and under the same wind reception
conditions.
C. Compare the wind velocity readings on the two displays (the check will be much more effective if
the auxiliary anemometer is calibrated).
Level 3. Calibration of the apparatus

The system correctly detects the wind velocity and checks that the signal and alarm limits are correctly
calibrated.
It is necessary to send the anemometer to the equipment manufacturer for this check. This manufacturer
has a certified test bed for checking and calibrating the anemometer.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
3 PROGRAMMING OF TEST AND ALARM MODES.

The equipment is set by the manufacturer to be configured in different ways in the alarm test and operating
modes.
The equipment is configured by COMANSA, as is indicated in Fig.2.
Fig. 2
The device can be configured in different ways, by changing a set of 4 mini-switches 4 placed inside it. The
different functions that can be activated or deactivated are: autotest function, configuration in which the device
must be reinitialized after the 70km/h alarm is activated, cancel the acoustic warning when working close to
low noise areas like hospitals, residentials...
To access to the connections or configuration, loose the screws that fix the small bottom cover.
3.1 Test and alarm configuration modes..
ON (1) Autotest ON
DIP1
OFF Autotest OFF.
ON (1) Siren ON.

DIP2
OFF Siren OFF.
After the wind-speed goes above 70 km/h , the ALARM remains activated , even if the
ON speed goes to 0 km/h (The alarm will be deactivated only after the unit supply is switched
DIP3 off for more thatn 15 seconds).
OFF (1) The ALARM is deactivated immediately after the speed goes below 70 km/h.
The DIP4 configuration is exclusively to be changed by an authorised person. Its proper position is ON.
Otherwise, the device indicates a "SENSOR FAILURE"
ON (1) Normal operation.

DIP4
OFF Maintanance operation.
(1) Standard factory settings.
Before changing the position of the switches, ensure that it complies with the required standard for the
installation and that the new alarm method (sound and visual) is understood by the crane operators.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
3.2 Test modes.

The test allows to check the proper operation of the device.
This device allows two operation modes:
- Switch-on autotest: it is done during a few seconds immediately after supplying the
device.
- No switch-on autotest.
The default factory setting is with the switch on Autotest enabled.
3.3 Alarms.
The device includes the following alarm modes:
- At 50 km/h only amber light, and at 70 km/h only red light.
- At 50 km/h only amber light, and at 70 km/h red light + siren.
The default factory setting is "at 50 km/h only amber light, and at 70 km/h red light + siren".
3.4 Anemometer internal wiring
Fig. 3
The device is prepared for 48 V 50/60 Hz.
Once the wiring is done:

1.- Tightly screw the gland to the cable to seal the interior of the unit against liquids or dust.
2.- Check the proper closing of the bottom cover to keep IP65 inside.
3.5 Sensor failure detection
In case there is any abnormal behaviour signal at the sensor, a cable that has been cut or an improper connection,
the system beacons intermittently blink until the problem is solved.

The control and signalling unit (Fig. 4) is equipped with an RS 485 output that allows a fast connection to the
indicator system in the cabin. Refer to the crane wiring schematic for more details.
Fig. 4

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA

It is place within the wind-speed sensor. A heater is switched on whenever the temperature goes below a preset
value. This heater melts the frost wich would otherwise prevent the sensor rotor motion.
This heater system is supplied from a point which is placed before the general crane contactor G (see wiring
schematic) . If the general switch of the crane (IG) is ON and the crane bottom switch is ON, the heating system
will be operative, regardless the stop control is pressed or not. This allows the system to melt the frost even
when the crane controls are switched off.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE SYSTEM.

2.1 System overview.
2.2 Basic configuration and optional functions.
2.3 System features and functions.
2.4 Safety hints for installation and adjustment.
3 SYSTEM INSTALLATION.
3.1 General description and location of the system on the crane (complete system).
3.2 System basic technical specifications.
3.3 Description of the devices.
4 USE OF UCDL46 DISPLAY.

4.1 Information on the screen and use of the keyboard.
4.2 Dynamic menu.
4.3 Secret code.
4.4 Editable fields.
4.5 Pages' hierarchy.
4.6 Exporting or importing UCDL46 configuration files.
4.7 Default factory configuration.
4.8 Firmware update and activation of a new function.
4.9 Events that demand to reset the system settings.
5 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE INDICATION FUNCTION.

5.1 Introduction to the indication page [P1].
5.2 Setting up the indication function [P10].
5.3 Digital nputs monitoring screen page [P19].
6 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE DATA LOGGER FUNCTION.

6.1 Permanent events indication page [P2].
6.2 Events log page [P3].
6.3 Exporting the database to a USB key.

7 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES FUNCTION
7.1 Forbidden zones indication page [P4].
7.2 Forbidden zones function configuration [P11].
7.3 Defining the geometric shape of a forbidden zone [P41].
7.4 Drawing a rectangular forbidden zone [P42].
7.5 Drawing a polygonal forbidden zone [P43].
7.6 IM45 Digital output control [P20].

8 ANNEX
Annex 1– Geometric parameters for forbidden zones configuration.
Annex 2– Geometric parameters for sensor configuration .
Annex 3– Reading the event log from a PC using the USB key.
Annex 4– Event list and failure codes.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
INDICATORS SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A DETERMINANT AID IN CRANE WORK AT POINTS

WHERE THE OPERATOR CANNOT PERFECTLY SEE THE LOAD AND SURRONDINGS. ON SUCH
SITUATION, THE INDICATIONS OF A SIGNAL-MAN ARE COMPULSORY.
INDICATORS SHALL NEVER REPLACE A SCALE AND SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE
FOR THE CRANE LOAD AND MOMENT LIMITERS.
DATA DISPLAYED ARE SIMPLY INDICATIONS AND CANNOT REPLACE THE PERSONAL SUPERVISION
OF THE OPERATOR AND HIS OWN IMPRESION OF THE SIZE OF THE LOAD BEING HANDLED.
FOR THE SYSTEM TO WORK PROPERLY, IT IS NECESSARY TO PERFORM CORRECTLY THE

COMPLETE SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UNIT.
ANY CHANGE ON THE CRANE CONFIGURATION MAY RESULT IN A BAD OPERATION OF THE INDI-
CATION, DATA LOGGING OR FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM. AFTER ANY CRANE CONFIGURATION
CHANGE, IT IS NECESSARY TO READJUST THE SYSTEM AND CHECK THAT THE UNIT IS FULLY
OPERATIVE AND PROPERLYWORKING.
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO RELY EXCLUSIVELY ON THE SAFETY LEVEL PROVIDED BY THE ZONING

SYSTEM WHENEVER THE CONSEQUENCE OF A FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM FAILURE MIGHT
LIKELY RESULT IN SEVERE DAMAGE FOR PEOPLE OR PROPERTY.
THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM ALONE SHOULD NOT BE USED TO AVOID TO DRIVE THE
CRANE ABOVE PIPE INSTALLATIONS THAT MIGHT CONTAIN FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS OR GASES.
THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE USED TO AVOID TO DRIVE THE CRANE ABOVE
ELECTRIC CABLES. ON SUCH SITUATIONS, IT IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A SAFETY ASSESSMENT
AND TAKE ADDITIONAL MEASURES (I.E. MOUNTING THE CRANE SO THAT THERE IS NO POSSI-
BILITY OF INTERFERENCE WITH THE CABLE) THAT LEAD TO A PROPER RISK REDUCTION.
IT IS COMPULSORY TO CHECK THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM

AND THAT EVERY FORBIDDEN ZONE IS ACTIVATED AND WORKING PROPERLY, EVERY DAY
BEFORE BEGINNING TO WORK.
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE SYSTEM

DLZ341 system must be used as an aid to operate the crane. It does not and cannot replace the hability, ex-
perience and common sense of the crane operator.
The system offers visual and alphanumerical information that allows faster and more integrated perception of
the crane situation and other parameters that affect its behaviour (wind speed, load...). The proper understan-
ding and the judgement of the information and its reliability is a responsability of the crane operator, who is also
responsible for the control and proper and careful drive of the crane.
Before beginning to use the system, it is compulsory to properly train the operator. Furthermore, the
maintainer of the crane or whoever performs any adjustment or change on it, must carefully read
this manual until he understands the working principle and the procedures for its adjustment.
The indication screens on this document may suffer some change as a result of any improvement of the
system software.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -

DLZ341 system includes the following functions as standard:
- Basic indications (trolley radius, height under hook,load, moment...).
- Data logger.
DLZ341 may optionally include the following special functions (on demand):
- Extended indication (the system can be supplied with additional information like slewing position
or travelling position).
- Forbidden zones system (prevents the hook from entering the areas defined by the user. If the
system is equipped with forbidden zones, it must include the slewing sensor and the travelling
sensor, if needed, to properly perform the forbidden zone function).
The addition of new functions to a crane with the system basic configuration is possible through addition of
an upgrade kit (contact factory for more details). The kit is made up of an informatic software upgrade and of
additional hardware (slewing and travelling sensors, electrical cabinet IM45 interface...).
Additional functions are always based on the basic system configuration. It is not possible to install an optional
function without previously installing the basic system.
COMANSA does not supply anticollision system (a system which avoids the risk of collision between
working cranes), however, a dedicated plug which gives access to the proper electrical points where the
connections of such a system must be done is supplied.

The indication screen (see 3.3.2) allows the user to access the system information and configuration. The
screen is a colour antireflective one and is provided with an ergonomic design that improves the comfort and
usability to the crane operator.
Screen messages use pictograms recommended by FEM1003 standard which list the symbols to be
used on tower crane indications, so that an effective and error-free communication is achieved.
The indication function offers an instantaneous and intuitive sight that shows the load state of the crane and
the crane position. The data are represented in numerical format and also as a progress bar, allowing a faster
and easier understanding.
Further information on the indication function may be found in point 5 of this document.
The data logger function supplies information referred to the crane operation (number of working hours of each
winch, number of overloads, information on the last movements, alarms…).
Further information on the data logger function may be found in point 6 of this document.
The forbidden zones function allows the user to define a number of zones where the hook will be prevented
from entering. Once the system is properly adjusted, the crane stores the zones information in memory and
operates in an intelligent way, automatically preventing the hook from entering into the forbidden areas.
Further information on the forbidden zones function may be found in point 7 of this document.
2.4 Safety hints for installation and adjustment
The installation and setting up of the DLZ341 system must be performed by qualified people, specially
trained and with a good understanding of this document.
There is no element within the DLZ341 system that needs any maintance by the crane operator.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Any change in the crane configuration may demand a readjustment on the DLZ341 system (see 4.9).
The commissioning of the unit should be done at the same time as the commissioning of the crane.
The UCDL46 indicator screen shows a question mark in the indication numerical field of a sensor if the asso-
ciated sensor is bad adjusted or is not properly sending the signal. It will also be represented by an error code
in the left zone of the screen (see annex 4) .
3 SYSTEM INSTALLATION.
3.1 General description and location of the system on the crane (complete system).
The complete system (indicators, data logger and forbidden zones) comprises the following devices :
6, 4 5, 8
9
1, 2, 3, 11
UCDL46 IMDL46
Central Unit Sensor interface
2 3
5
To the electrical cabinet

- Digital inputs 6
- Digital outputs
10
7
8
1
9 Option
10 Option
Opción 11
To the electrical cabinet

- Digital inputs
- Digital outputs
Fig. 1

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Basic configuration devices:

1 Stabilized power source.
2 Central processing unit and display UCDL46.
3 Signal interface and digital input registering unit IMDL46.
4 Load cell.
5 Moment sensor.
6 Trolley position sensor.
7 Hoisting position sensor.
8 Anemometer signal.
The forbidden zones system (option) includes the devices of the above list and also the following:
9 Slewing position sensor BROR45C.
10 Travelling position sensor (if the crane is allowed to move on a railtrack).
11 IM45 relays interface unit for the intelligent movement stop.
Picture.1 is a sketch and the real position of the devices on the crane may change depending on crane
models.
UDCL46 screen is the only interface between the system and the crane operator.
It can also be used to program and adjust the unit and to diagnose the system state.
The IMDL46 terminal box supplies and links every subsystem (sensors, IM45, UCDL...), and acts as a sensor
signals and electrical cabinet signals hub.
Communication flow between each element and the central unit (which lies inside the UCDL46) always goes
through the IMDL46 unit and is done by means of a CAN bus network protocol (Control Area Network).
The CANANA units are electronic modules which convert the trolley, hoisting and moment analog signals into
digital signals, that can be transmitted and understood through the CAN network.
The load cell contains an amplifier that transforms the strain gauge mVolts signal into Volts. The Volts signal is
later converted into a digital signal within the IMDL46 unit.
The anemometer signal is sent to the IMDL46 unit and is transformed to a special digital format different than
the CAN format.
The travelling sensor also sends the information to the IMDL46 in CAN bus digital format.
The following table shows the elements description, their location and the configuration option that includes
them.
INFORMATION PROCESS AND DISPLAY UNITS

REFERENCE LOCATION COFIGURATION
Stabilized power source 400V-24Vdc Cab Basic system
UCDL46 Bracket Cab Basic system
UCDL46 Display/CPU Cab electrical cabinet Basic system
IMDL46 interface unit Cab electrical cabinet Basic system
IMDL46 system to electrical cabinets interface plug Cab electrical cabinet Basic system
IM45 system to seat-radiocontrol interface Cab electrical cabinet Forbidden zones
IM45 system to seat-radiocontrol interface plug Cab electrical cabinet Basic system
USB memory stick Cab Basic system
Anemometer Cat head Basic system

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
HOISTING SIGNAL DEVICES

DESIGNATION LOCATION CONFIGURATION
Hoisting limiter potentiometer Hoisting mechanism Basic system
Hoisting limiter integrated CANANA Hoisting mechanism Basic system
TROLLEY SIGNAL DEVICES

Trolley limiter potentiometer Trolley mechanism Basic system
Trolley limiter integrated CANANA Trolley mechanism Basic system
LOAD SIGNAL DEVICES

Load cell with integrated amplifier Hoisting rope Basic system
MOMENT SIGNAL DEVICES

Inductive sensor 4-20m A Moment leaf spring Basic system
Inductive sensor CANANA Moment leaf spring Basic system
SLEWING SIGNAL DEVICES

BROR45C slewing signal (encoder+CAN digital converter) Slewing ring Forbidden zones
TRAVELLING SIGNAL DEVICES

Travelling sensor with incremental encoder connected to
Travelling winch Travelling option
a travelling winch axle.
CAD40 travelling electronic board with digital output Travelling winch Travelling option
Reset signal device for travelling wheel slip correnction Travelling winch Travelling option

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3.2 System basic technical specifications.
REFERENCE POWER SUPPLY IP OPERATING TEMPERA- STORAGE TEMPERA-

TURE TURE
Power source 3x320-575 Vac (1) IP33 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +85 ºC
UCDL46 24 Vdc IP33 -20 ºC to +60 ºC (2) -20 ºC to +70 ºC
IM45LC 24 Vdc IP33 -33 ºC to +45 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
IMDL46 24 Vdc IP33 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
BROR45C 24 Vdc IP33 -20 ºC to +60ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
CAD40 24 Vcd IP33 -33 ºC to +55 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
Luffing angle sensor 24 Vdc IP67 -20 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +75 ºC
CANANA 24 Vdc IP33 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
Load cell 24 Vdc IP67 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -25 ºC to +60 ºC
Trolley sensor 24 Vdc IP65 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
Hoisting sensro 24 Vdc IP65 -25 ºC to +60 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
(1) The power source supplies a 24Vdc stabilized voltage to the system.
(2) UCDL46 integrates its own heating and cooling system. UCDL46 CPU can work from -20 ºC up to 60ºC,
however, the screen does not begin to work before the display is heated above -5 ºC. When the internal
temperature of the units approaches to the maximum operation temperature, the fan starts so as to keep
the temperature below the maximum switch off temperature.
3.3 Description of the devices
3.3.1 General description of the sensors (complete system)

The following table shows the transformation of the sensor signals.
REFERENCE SENSOR TYPE LOCATION SIGNAL A/D

CONVERSION
Hoisting Pot. 0-10 kOhms Hoisting winch 0-5 Vdc CANANA
Trolley Pot. 0-10 kOhms Trolley winch 0-5 Vdc CANANA
Moment Inductive 4-20mA Moment leaf spring 4-20 mA CANANA
Load Load cell Hoisting wire rope 0-5 Vdc IMDL46
Slewing (option) Absolute encoder Slewing ring DIGITAL CAN BROR45C
Travelling (option) Incremental encoder Travelling winch DIGITAL CAN CAD40
Anemometer Pulse counter Anemometer DIGITAL IMDL46
3.3.2 UCDL46 Central processing unit and display.

UCDL46 central processing unit and display unit lies inside the cab, in front of the crane operator seat, and is
fixed to the cab by means of a bracket. (Fig. 2).
1 Navigation and data feed keyboard.

2 UCDL46 power on green LED (it switches on a few seconds after connecting the CAN M12 plug
to the unit).
3 Failure on the system red LED (see Annex 4).
4 USB port.
5 CAN M12 plug.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Display
Fixing bracket
2
4 5
Fig. 2
When UCDL46 internal temperature goes below -10ºC or above +60ºC, the screen is switched off and the
power supply green LED blinks. The functions of the system keep working but the screen is automatically
switched off to avoid damages.
The display must be stored in a clean and dry place.
The UCDL46 unit is mounted inside the cabin on a fixing bracket that permits several rotations and movements.
It allows the crane operator to set an optimal position from an ergonomic point of view.
To adjust the display position and orientation, loose both swivels, set the unit to the desired position and tighten
them again (Fig.2).
3.3.3 IMDL46 interface unit

IMDL46 is fixed to the cab electrical cabinet by means of 4 magnets on its back.
IMDL46 is a signal hub which receives and interconnects all the devices.
Every sensor signal (analogic and digital) are connected to IMDL46. Every 100ms the IMDL46 sends all the
information to the central processing unit (CPU) which is inside the UCDL46.
15 16 17 18 IMDL46 system-electrical cabi-

net interface plug
4 8
9
3 7
2 6
1 5
11 12 13 14
Fig. 3

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
The sensor signals ar connected to the IMDL46 front through CAN M12 plugs as indicated in the following
table.
REFERENCE FUNCTION
1 Load cell signal
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Trolley or luffing angle signal
6 Hoisting signal
7 Moment signal
8 Slewing signal (option)
9 - Electrical cabinet digital inputs and outputs interface plug
Digital signals coming or going into the crane electrical cabinet go through the multipole fast plug (9) connected
at the bottom of the IMDL46. This plug carries the signals needed for the data logger function.
The green fast terminal connectors on both sides of the IMDL46 connect devices which are permanently insi-
de the cabin and, therefore, do not need to be connected or disconnected every time the crane is erected or
dismantled (power source, IMDL46 to UCDL46 connection...). They are also used to connect some optional
devices (anemometer, travelling…)
The following table describes the functions of the various devices which are connected to the IMDL46 through
green fast connectors:
SIMBOLO FUNCIÓN
11 RS485 connection for the anemometer speed sensor signal.
Not used.
12 SHUNT KEY
13 UCDL IMDL46 to UDCL46 connection.

Not used.
14 FREE Free CAN bus connection .
15 POWER IMDL46 to 24 Vdc power source connection.
16 IM45 IMDL46 to IM45 CAN connection (option).
17 UC35 Not used.
18 CAD40 IMDL46 to travelling CAD40 CAN sensor (option).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Further information on the connection of each device and on the electrical cabinet signals to the IMDL46,
is available in the electrical wiring diagram.
3.4.3 IM45 system to seat-radiocontrol interface (forbidden zones option)
IM45 is fixed to the cab electrical cabinet by means of 4 magnets on its back.
IM45 system-seat-ra-
diocontrol interface- IM45 to IMDL46 CAN
giro connector
Fig. 4
IM45 consists of a relays interface that deccelerate and stops the crane movements when the crane approaches
to any of the forbidden zones (see 7).
The relays contained in IM45 can stop the signals going from the seatcontrol or radiocontrol to the electrical
cabinet.
The following sketch shows the concept which allows the system to control the crane movements.
The cabin is wired (Fig.5) in such a way that allows the IM45 to selectively stop the crane movements . Further
information on the connection of each device and on the electrical cabinet signals to the IM45, is available in
the electrical wiring diagram.
Bypass plug must be connected if the

system does not include forbidden
zones option
IM45
Fig. 5
If the system does not include the forbidden zones function, a bypass plug replaces the IM45. This bypass plug
re-establishes the path between IM45 and the electrical cabinet, thus allowing the normal work of the crane.
IMPORTANT NOTE: the removal of the bypass plug stops the crane immediately as when pressing the emer-
gency stop button. Do not remove the plug when moving the crane. A bad connection of the IM45 or of the
bypass plug leads to the stop or prevention of some or every movement.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3.3.4 CANANA analog to digital signal conversion

CANANA is a device which translates the analog signal emitted by the trolley, hoisting and moment sensor to
a digital signal comprehensible by the CAN network.
The trolley and hoisting sensors CANANAs are screwed inside the hoisting and trolley limiter.
The moment sensor CANANA is placed close to the moment inductive sensor and is fixed to the crane structure
by means of a magnet. Moment CANANA must be vertically placed and must be close to the inductive sensor
to prevent water from entering.
IIt is necessary to identify the CANANAs on the CAN network, so that the IMDL46 knows which sensor co-
rresponds to each signal. To do so, every CANANA has got a switch set named SW2 that must be adjusted
as per picture. 6.
TROLLEY HOISTING MOMENT
SW2 SW2 SW2
Fig. 6
The amber D3 LED on indicates that the CANANA is powered ON.

The green D4 LED on indicates that the communication between CANANA and IMDL46 unit is correct.
3.3.5 CAN cables

Each CAN cable is shielded to avoid electromagnetic interference.
The folowing picture shows the wiring inside the CAN cable.
CAN M12 plugs are plastic injected to achieve a good sealing when properly connected.
M 12plug
Brown
Blue
White
Black
Gray
Fig. 7

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3.3.6 Trolley and hoisting sensors

Trolley and hoisting sensors are of the same type.
These sensors and their associated CANANAS are placed inside the trolley and hoisting limiters respecti-
vely.
Both limiters have got CANM12 connectors.

To connect the trolley and hoisting sensors to the IMDL46, it is enough to connect the cable CAN M12 connec-
tors to the trolley and hoisting limiter CAN M12 connectors.
The trolley and hoisting analog signals come from a potentiometer of resistance between 0 and 10 kOhms (1,
in picture 8). The potentiometer axle is connected through a gearbox to the rotating axle of the mechanism
(trolley or hoisting). The analog signal is then translated to a digital signal comprehensible by the CAN network
through a CANANA unit (2 in Fig. 8). (See 3.3.4).
The following picture identifies the potentiometer and the CANANA position within the limitter.The potentiometer
adjustment is independent of the limit switches adjustment.
CONNECTOR CANM12
1 2
POTENTIOMETER CANANA
Fig. 8
The connection between the potentiometer and the CANANA is shown in the following picture.
0V Blue
SIGNAL White J3
1
+V Red
Fig. 9
The digital signal generated by the CANANA is sent to IMDL46 unit through a CAN cable. This cable is con-
nected to the limiter through a female CAN M12 connector.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
The connection between the CANANA and the CAN M12 female plug is shown in Fig. 10.
Brown
1
Blue J1
oV
2 1
Connector +V White
CANM12 3
CAN+ Black
4
CAN- Gray
5
Fig. 10
It is necessary to set up each CANANA so that the IMDL46 can identify to which sensor corresponds each
signal received. To do so, the SW2 switches of the CANANA must be set up as shown in 3.3.4.
SW2 SW2 SW2
Fig. 11
3.3.7 Potentiometer manual adjustment (Fig.12)

If the potentiometer span is not enough, it may be necessary to disconnect and readjust it.
Follow the following procedure:
1.- Loose two of the three screws (2) from the coupling of the pontentiometer. In case that you have a bad
access to the screws (2) loose the complete assembly with the screws (1) and mount the same com-
plete assembly in such a way that the accessibility is good to the two screws (2).Loose the two screws
(2)
2.- Move the wheel (3) until you have reached the required value.
3.- Tighten again the two screws (2) in such a way, that the axle of the potentiometer remains in the middle
of the coupling (see picture below).
Fig. 12

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3.3.8 Moment sensor

The moment sensor is placed on the moment leaf spring, next to the moment limiters.
The connection between the moment CANANA and the IMDL46 unit is done through a CAN M12 cable.
The moment is indirectly estimated by measuring the movement of the moment leaf spring. The movement of
the leaf spring increases as the moment exerted by the load on the crane increases. The movement is measured
through the inductive sensor drawn in Fig. 13.
The inductive sensor generates an analog signal (4-20 mA) which is then translated to a digital signal through
a CANANA (see 3.3.4).
The CANANA digital signal is sent to the IMDL46.
The connection between the moment inductive sensor and the CANANA is shown in Fig.13.
Sensor
Red
White
Signal
Fig. 13
It is necessary to set up each CANANA so that the IMDL46 can identify to which sensor corresponds each
signal received. To do so, the SW2 switches of the CANANA must be set up as shown in 3.3.4.
SW2 SW2 SW2
Fig. 14
WHEN ADJUSTING THE MOMENT SENSOR IT IS NECESSARY TO CHECK THAT THERE IS NO POS-
SIBILITY OF GEOMETRICAL CONTACT BETWEEN THE INDUCTIVE SENSOR AND THE MOMENT
LEAF SPRING OF THE CRANE, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE.
3.3.9 Load cell

The lifted load is measured through a load cell. The load cell is placed next to the load limiter and undergoes
directly or indirectly the stress of the hoisting cable.
To connect the load cell to the IMDL46, it is enough to connect the cable with the fast CANM12 connectors to
the load cell.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
The signal is generated in the load cell by means of a gauge bridge. The signal conditioning is done through
an amplifier, inside the load cell.
The load cell translates the strain applied on it to a voltage signal which goes from 0 to 5 Vdc. This signal is
sent to the IMDL46.
Sensor
Brown
24 Vdc supply
White
Measurement 0Vdc
Blue
0 Vdc supply
Black
Measurement
0 Vdc to 5 Vdc
Fig. 15
3.3.10 Slewing sensor (option)

The slewing sensor measures the angle of the crane.
The connection between the Slewing sensor and the IMDL46 is done through a CAN M12 cable.
The slewing angle is transmitted to the sensor through a pinion connected to the luffing ring.
The pinion transfers the slewing movement to an axle which is reduced through a gear inside the slewing sensor
box, and then it is transferred to an absolute encoder in a 1:1 ratio.
The absolute encoder signal is transformed into a CAN signal inside the slewing sensor box by means of an
electronic board.
The slewing sensors are different depending on the crane models as the gear ratio and the teeth number and
modulus depends on the slewing ring model.
1 Pinion
2 Slewing ring 1 2
3 CAN M12 connector
Fig. 16

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
REFERENCE EXPLANATION
D4 Power on LED.
D5 CAN bus error LED.
D6 CAN bus error LED.
D7 Sensor error LED.
D8 Communication error LED
J1 Power and CAN bus connector.
J2 Microcontroller programming connnector.
J3 12 and 14 bits encoder connector
J4 Encoder heating resistor connector.
J5 Temperature PTC connector.
SW1 Reset button.
SW2 120 Ohms CAN Network end indicator
SW3 Encoder type selection
U1 Microcontroller.
3.3.11 Travelling sensor (option)

Working principle
CAD40 comprises the set of devices needed to properly measure the distance travelled by the crane on a
railtrack.
It is placed on the basement of the crane, close to the travelling mechanism.
It performs the following functions.
- Indication of the travelling distance.

An incremental encoder, placed inside a TER GF4C limiter, and connected to one of the travelling rotating
axles, generates a train of pulses that are then read by the electronic CAD40 module.
The processing unit of CAD40 integrates a pulse counter which determines the sense of the movement
and allows calculating the position of the crane on the track after properly adjusting the scale. The infor-
mation is sent through the CAN bus to the IMDL46.
CAD40 allows to measure movements of up to 250 m.
- Correction of the deviation due to the slip on the track-wheel contact.

An inductive sensor detects a thin metal sheet fixed to a known position on the track and allows the
electronic CAD40 module to readjust the scale according to the actual situation if needed.
This function allows the correction of the deviation due to the slip on the track-wheel contact every time
the crane passes through this railtrack position.
When the railtrack is long, an additional reset sensor can be supplied so that the readjustment can be
done in two positions of the track.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Devices that make up the CAD40 travelling sensor

CAD40 includes the devices shown in Fig.17.
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 17
1 CAD40 electronic board is the processing unit for the signals received from the inductive sensors. It de-
termines the sense of the movement and the crane position on the track and transmits it to the IMDL46
through the a CAN cable (the length of the cable depends on the crane height)
2 Limit switch TER GF4C equipped with an incremental encoder to count the turns of the travelling whe-
el.
3 An inductive sensor for repositioning, to reset the error due to the slip in the contact between wheel and
track.
For long tracks, a second repositioning sensor may be necessary.
4 A bracket for the repositioning sensor and its screws and bolts. A second bracket is delivered when two
repositioning sensors are used.
5 A repositioning flag to weld along the track. A second repositioning flag is necessary when two reposi-
tioning sensors are used.
Installation of the components
Some of the following steps imply an important crushing danger. DO NOT hesitate to lock the travelling
winch when necessary and to ensure a good and permanent communication with the crane driver.
- Encoder:
The encoder is mounted in a TER GF4C limiter. It generates spaced pulses when the wheel rotates.
TER GF4C limiter is fixed by means of a bracket and is connected to the wheel or gear axle depending
on the bogie type.
- Repositioning sensors and indicators:

Weld the repositioning indicators on a side of the track so that they pass close enough to the repositioning
sensors when the desired resetting point is reached.
Choose a repositioning point that it lies in a place, which the crane is usually passing through. A proper
choice will result in smaller error accumulation. Install the optional indicator and repositioning sensor in
the other track.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
- CAD40 electronic board :

Install the electronic board close to the travelling limiter on a place where it is free from shocks, for exam-
ple in a proper placed on the bogie.
The magnets allow it to be fixed to any steel sheet of the bogie. Place it vertically with the glands upside
to avoid water from entering.

CAD40 electronic board description
DISPLAY
FAST CONNECTOR
Fig. 18
SYMBOL FUNCTION
DISPLAY It is the programming interface to CAD40 electronic module.
J2 Radio link (not used).
J3 TER GF4C Encoder connection.
J4 TER GF4C Encoder connection.
J5 First repositioning sensor I1 (init 1).
J6 Second repositioning sensor I2 (init 2) (option).
LED1 (amber) «A channel detector» : ON when the encoder sends a pulse.
LED2 (amber) «B channel detector» : ON when the encoder sends a pulse.
LED3 (amber) «I1 detector» : ON when the I1 repositioning sensor is reached.
LED4 (amber) «I2 detector» : ON when the I2 repositioning sensor is reached.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
SIMBOLO FUNCIÓN
LED5 (amber) «positive» : ON when counting is upwards
LED6 (green) «can bus» : ON if messages are correctly received over the CAN bus.
LED7 (red) «RS485» : ON if messages are correctly received over the RS485 link.
LED8 .(red) «default» : ON when the CAD40 software detects a fault.
LED9 (red) «power on» : ON when the unit is powered on.
Selection of the repositioning type of signal expected at J5 or J6 (NPN o PNP).

S3
S4 Selection of the repositioning sensor type (NPN o PNP).

It establishes the link between CAD40 electronic board and IMDL46 through the CAN
FAST CONNECTOR
bus network.
This 120 Ohms resistor must be enabled (ON) if the distance between the travelling
ST1 mechanism to IMDL46 is bigger than the distance to the trolley. If so, the trolley
120Ohms resistor SW1 must be switched off.
ST2 ST2 enables(ON) or disables(OFF) the RS485 120 Ohms resistor.
S, -, + Display navigation keyboard.
Wiring of CAD40
Brown
Yellow
Brown
Green
Brown
White
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
Travelling encoder OPTION
Repositioning sensors
Fig. 19
Connect the devices as indicated in Fig. 19.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Using the programming keyboard

Program CAD40 using the 3 pushbuttons labelled «S», «-» y «+»
Fig. 20
- «S» allows selecting a menu, a reply to a question, or a value.

- The «+» key allows to go to the next menu, to the next question, or to increment a value.
- The «-» key allows to go to the previous menu, to the previous question, or to decrement a value.
Unit programming
Before any new programming, restore the default values. The CAD40 restarts, and you must type the secret
code again to be able to change settings.
The value is adjusted one digit at a time, starting from the most left digit. Press «S» to go to the next digit.
The last «S» validates the complete value.
To enter the values of inits 1 and 2, it is possible to directly take the value by simultaneously pressing «+» and
«S», starting with «+».
The complete programming menu is the following : (the chapter numbers are for guidance only in this
document)
1. Setting:
1.1 Secret code: (from 000 to FFF)
1.2 Language: (F / GB / D)
1.3 Sensor type: (travelling/trolley/hoisting)
1.4 Use of inits: (none/ 1 / 2 / double 1 (secure))
1.5 Init values:
1.5.1 Init 1 : (from 0 to 1023)
1.5.2 Init 2 : (from 0 to 1023)
2. Options:
2.1 Max acceptable reset on reinit:V (1 to50)
2.2 Pre-division factor: not used(de to 100)
3. Information:
3.1 Software information
3.2 Average offset
3.3 Last error
3.4 CAN bus status
4. Restore all default settings (confirmation is requested)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Configuration menu description

1. Setting
1 .1 Secret code.
Enter the secret code to to change values in any menu, except for language selection.
In this software version, the secret code is unique to all CAD40s and is:
« 34A «
Do not disclose
After you have entered the secret code, you can change the values.
After 30 minutes without pressing any key, or in case of power supply failure or reset, the CAD40 locks.
To change values, you must type the secret code again.
1.2 Language.
Menu for the language selection. Only the error messages are always in English.
After restoring the default values, the language is French.
1.3 Sensor type.

Sensor type selection: travelling, trolley or lifting. This selection changes the value of «init1», which becomes
500 for a travelling sensor and 200 for a trolley sensor. This value can be adjusted later.
After restoring the default values, the CAD40 is in the travelling mode.
1.4 Use of inits.

Use this menu to define the desired init type.
«None»: No init, the detector inputs I1 and I2 are not used.
«1 init»: For a single init detector connected to I1, with I2 unassigned.
«2 inits»: For 2 detectors connected to I1 and I2, with 2 flags at 2 points of the track.
«Double»: For 2 detectors connected to I1 and I2 with a single flag to make the init secure.
After restoring the default values, the CAD40 is on «init 1»
1.5 Init values.
Init 1
Use it to set the value of init 1.
If no init is used, this value is unnecessary. For 1, 2 or a double init, this value is taken into account.
It is possible to define the current value as the init value by simultaneously pressing «+» and «S», starting with
«+».
After restoring the default values, the CAD40 is defined as a travelling sensor and init 1 is set to 500.
Init 2
Use it to the value of init 2.
If using a single init , or if using double init is used, this value is unnecessary.
It is possible to define the current value as the init value by simultaneously pressing «+» and «S», starting with
«+».
After restoring the default values, init 2 is always 0.
2. Options
2.1 Max acceptable reset on re-init: 1 to 50.
Used to set the max slip beyond which a fault is generated.
At the level of the init marker, the software determines the correction to be applied to the value it has in memory
to reset the init value. If the difference is greater than this «max reset», an internal fault is generated. The red
LED comes on and an error message can be read.
After restoring the default values, the max reset is 15.
2.2 Pre-division factor: 1 to 100
This function is used reduce the number of flags. If «N» is the value of this factor, the CAD40 will increment by
1 every N flags only. This function is to be used only in special cases.
After restoring the default values, the pre-division factor is 1.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3 Information
3.1 Software information.
Software version and checksum.
3.2 Average offset.

Average of the last 10 offset values (see «max reset»). If nothing is displayed, then the value is not yet available
(if less than 10 inits have been recorded for the time being)
3.3 Last error.

Message corresponding to the last recorded error. Pressing «S» clears this message and turns off the red
LED.
3.4 CAN bus status.

Information on the local status of the CAN bus. The possible values are:
Good, average, bad and bus off. This information may be useful for diagnosis.
4 Restore all default settings.

Pressing «S» in this menu resets the CAD40 to the default values. A validation will be requested before
action.
Repositioning sensor adjustment

The inductive sensors detect a metal piece at a distance of 8mm to 12mm toward the front of the detection face
and 15mm toward the back, for instance the support of the sensor (see drawings below):
The sensors have a LED on their back to check their status (detection or not). This status can also be checked
on LED 1 to 4 in the CAD40.
It is necessary to take the slack of the wheel on its axis into account. Depending on the travelling track this
slack can be very important and modify the distance flag/sensor you may have adjusted.It is then required to
check that both sensors detect all flags and only the flags all along the track to avoid any error in the counting
and then the positioning of the crane.
repositioning sensor
15 mm minimum
15 mm
counting sensor minimum
8 mm > 12 mm
8 mm > 12 mm
Fig. 21
To achieve it, while you travel the crane from one side to the other of the track, look at the LED 5 (SENS POSITIF)
in the CAD40. This one must be permanently ON (or OFF, depending on the direction of travelling). If the LED5
flashes even a short while during the crane travelling it means that one of the sensors didn’t detect a counting
flag (gap between flag and sensor to big), or detected the wheel (gap between flag and sensor to small).
If this is the case, readjust the sensor and then repeat the previous operation several times to ensure a good
counting all along the track.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
CAD40 electronic board adjustment

First, place the crane at the centre of its travelling track and disconnect the repositioning sensors in the
CAD40.
- Enter the CAD40 menus with «S», «+» et «-».

- Re-initialise the CAD40 with menu 4. Restore all default settings.
- Enter menu 1. Setting.
- Type in the Secret code.
- Then in the menus choose the desired Language and the type of sensor you are using the CAD40 for :
« travelling ».
- Finally, enter the number of init used in Use of inits.
- In menu 2.Options, enter your value for the Max acceptable reset on reinit (Usually, this value equals the
number of impulsions corresponding to a positioning error of about 1m).
While keeping the repositioning sensor(s) disconnected in the CAD40, move the crane till the repositioning
sensor is completely above the repositioning flag (Fig.21). Setting and for the corresponding sensor (I1 or I2)
enter the Init value. You can either read this value in the main screen (number of impulses) or learn it directly.
Re-plug the set sensor.
Repeat this step for the second repositioning sensor if necessary.

Screen side used to display the date, time, wind speed

(if the crane is equipped with anemometer), and the
overall crane and DLZ341 status.
Central area of the screen which informs about crane

functions.
Bottom screen side, showing the dynamic menu and

the navigation keyboard.
Fig. 22
The following table shows the pictograms in this page and their meaning.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
SIDE BAND PICTOGRAMS

PICTOGRAM EXPLANATION CONFIGURATION
1 Wind speed. Basic system
2 Wind speed prealarm (threshold defined by the user). Basic system
3 Wind speed alarm (threshold defined by the user). Basic system
4 Anemometer signal fault Basic system
5 Crane switched on. Basic system
6 Crane switched off. Basic system
7 Weathervaning on. Basic system
8 Forbidden zones ON. Forbidden zones
9 Forbidden zones OFF. Forbidden zones
10 Internal system fault (see appendix 4) Basic system
The following table shows the function of each keyboard key.
NAVIGATION AND DATA FEEDING KEYBOARD

KEY EXPLANATION
1 Pushbutton associated to the dynamic menu.
2 Enter.
3 Move right or increase value.
4 Move left or decrease value.
5 Escape.
6 Screen backlight control (in Page P1). In some other pages it is a help button.
4.2 Dynamic menu.

Depending on the active page and the navigation level, the dynamic menu changes and offers different choices
between the associated pictograms. To choose any option use the pushbuttons associated to the dynamic
menu.
DYNAMIC MENU PICTOGRAMS
1 Accesible menu page. Basic system
2 Active page. Basic system
3 Page under programming or configuration mode. Basic system
4 Move right to hidden dynamic menu elements Basic system
5 Move left to hidden dynamic menu elements. Basic system
6 Navigate through additional pages of the event log. Basic system
7 Export to USB. Basic system
8 Import from USB. Basic system
9 Delete information. Basic system

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -

10 Restore factory settings. Basic system
11 Save current settings. Basic system
12 Activate/Deactivate forbidden zones. Forbidden zones
13 Show advanced forbidden zones parameter configuration Forbidden zones
14 Show the version information and software upgrading page Basic system
Basic system
15 Current reeving and manual reeving change.
4.3 Secret code.

A code is necessary to get access and modify some of the system options and parameters. This is a way to
avoid that an error of the user causes further damage. It is the responsability of the crane owner not to com-
municate this code.
There are four different acces levels, and each of them has got a different secret code:
- N0 SMIE's access level.

- N1 COMANSA's access level.
- N2 crane owner's level (the code is 13524, and cannot be changed. Do not disclose it).
- N3 crane users' level (not used)
To type in the secret code:
When trying to access the configuration pages or

when trying to perform some other action, UCDL46
asks for the secret code.
Use the keys shown in the dynamic menu to type

in the secret code.
and rest active to validate the code or
to close the secret code window.
Fig. 23
FIELD KEYS EXPLANATION

Allows to move from a field to the next or previous one through the
1 000.00 m configuration pages. The active field is highlighted in a blue frame.
2 000.00 m Enter the field to modify.

3 500.00 m Choose the alphanumerical value of the current digit
4 500.00 m Confirm the current digit value and pass to the next one.
5 000.00 m Exit the field.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
4.5 Pages' hierarchy.

Indication function (see 5):
P1 Main page
Indication function
CODE N0-N1-N2 levels
Crane's general configu-

P10
ration Sensor configuration and
scaling pages
P12 á 18
Digital inputs monitoring
P19
page
Black box function (see 6):

Counters and work cycles
P2
page
P3 Events log page
Forbidden function page (see 7):
Main page
P1 P4
Indication function
CODE N0-N1-N2 levels CODE N0-N1-N2 levels
Forbidden zones configuration page Forbidden zones drawing pages

P11 P41
P42
digital outputs forcing page P43
P20 P44
4.6 Exporting or importing UCDL46 configuration files.

For maintaining or especial purposes (eg, to replace the UCDL46 central and display unit), it may be useful to
export the complete configuration of the UCDL46 old unit to the new one.
The configuration export operation consists on saving to the USB key all the registered parameters of page
[P10] an also the current scaling of the sensors for the indication and also the registered parameters and zones
of forbidden zones option [P11] / [P41]. The configuration import consist on downloading the configuration file
contained on the USB key to the UCDL46.
To export or import the UCDL46 configuration to or from the USB key:
Insert the USB key in the UCDL46 port (see 3.3.2), then follow the process visually described below, until rea-
ching the transfer confirmation screen. The process is the other way for exporting importing the data.
Use the button for exporting the configuration to a USB key or the button to import a confi-
guration from a USB key.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 24
Press to confirm the transfer or to cancel. Once the transfer is done, indicates that it has
been succesfully performed and the USB key can be removed.
indicates that the transfer failed. Check that the key has been properly inserted and that the available
memory is enough to complete the operation and try again.
Note: it is not guaranteed that any USB will properly work with the UCDL46. It is recommended that you ask
the factory for a USB if the one supplied from factory is lost.
4.7 Default factory configuration.

It allows to go back to the default factory configuration and readjust it. Once the unit has been restored to factory
default configuration it must be readjusted.
Before going to default factory parameter consider that every parameter must be set again to get the unit to
work properly-
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 25

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Press to restore the factory configuration or to cancel. indicates that restoration was successful
that the USB key can be removed.
Restoring the factory settings, completely erases the previous configuration, including the forbidden
zones configuration. Events data log are not deleted.
4.8 Firmware update and activation of a new function.

This page allows to control the current version in the UCDL46 unit. It also allows to upgrade the firmware to
a newer version or to add a new function not installed in the original system configuration (eg, forbidden zo-
nes).
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 26
EXPLANATION
1 UCDL46 serial number.
2 Current activation code.
Current active functions.
Every function are preinstalled in the UCDL46 unit, however, only the chosen functions are active.(see
4.8.1)
3 A = Indication.
D = Data logger.
Z = Forbidden zones.
Current unit version.

The firmware version is identified by a decimal number:
- The integer places refer to major firmware revision (also to different functions).
4 - The decimal places indicate the minor firmware revision.
eg. Version 01.10

integer decimal
5 Available preinstalled firmware.

6 Battery status.
7 UCDL46 internal temperature.
8 Activation code for adding a new function or for a firmware upgrade. (see 4.8.1 and 4.8.2)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
4.8.1 New function activation.

DLZ341 integrates the indication and data logger function as a standard.
The forbidden zones option can be activated through a 10 digits code (contact the factory to demand more
information if you want to add this function).
If it is asked for, the unit can come with the complete system preinstalled from the factory.
Fill in the active field; validate the field to register the code.
Once the process finishes, ndicates that it has been successfully performed and the new function is
active.
There is a different code for each UCDL46 unit and that means that this code can only be used with that
particular unit.
Once the activation process is finished, the UCDL46 CAN M12 plug must be removed and reconnected
to reinitialize the system.
To add the new function it can be necessary to use additional hardware and sensor (e.g., forbidden
zones).
4.8.2 Firmware upgrade.

The firmware upgrade is done in two steps:
- Load the new firmware version to the UCDL by means of the USB key:
Insert the USB key into the UCDL46 unit USB port and choose . (Fig. 26).
Once it is successfully saved to the UCDL46, indicates there is a new available firmware version
in the unit.
- Activate the new available firmware version:
Check that the new available version is the proper upgrade (compare its number to the current version
number). (Fig. 26).
- If the new available version is lower than the current one, it can be activated by typing in [0000000000]
and pressing to confirm. (Fig. 26).
Once it is successfully saved to the UCDL46, indicates firmware version has been
upgraded.
- If the upgrade is a higher version, it can be activated by typing in the code supplied with the new
available firmware, and following the process indicated above.

Once the activation process is finished, the UCDL46 CAN M12 plug must be removed and reconnected
to reinitialize the system.
4.9 Events that demand to reset the system settings.
Any crane configuration change may demand a system readjustment.
The good operation of the system depends on the consistency between the parameters in the DLZ341 system
and the crane and environment actual situation.
It is compulsory to assess if a crane or enviromental change demand the readjustment of the DLZ341
system.
The following table shows a list some of the changes that demand a readjustment of the DLZ341 system.
CRANE/ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIRED ACTION SEE
CHANGE
Daylight saving time DST change Date and time adjustment 5.2.1

Time zone change Date and time adjustment 5.2.1
International system/imperial
units change Configuration change 5.2.1
Anemometer alarm thresholds
Configuration change 5.2.8
Anemometer connection/
disconnection Configuration change 5.2.1

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
CRANE/ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIRED ACTION SEE
CHANGE
Basic parameters change P10 5.2.1
Forbidden zones parameter change P41 7.2.1
Jib length Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2
Hoisting sensor scaling 5.2.3
Slewing stop readjustment 7.2.5

Counterjib length Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2
Slewing stop readjustment 7.2.5
Trolley mechanism change

(motor, gear, limitter,...) Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2
Trolley rope change
Hoisting mechanism change

(motor, gear, limitter,...)
Hoisting rope change
Change in the capacity diagram Basic parameters change P10 5.2.1

of the crane (eg, jib length Load cell scaling 5.2.5
change) Moment scale readjustment 5.2.4
Reeving system
Hoisting rope elongation Hoisting sensor scaling 5.2.3
Trolley rope elongation Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2

Crane heigth under hook Hoisting sensor scaling 5.2.3
Add the forbidden zones Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2
function Hoisting sensor scaling 5.2.3
Slewing sensor scaling 7.2.5
Add or activate a forbidden Define a forbidden zone 7.3.1
zone Activate a forbidden zone 7.3.4
Redefine a forbidden zone Redefine a forbidden zone 7.3.2
Delete or deactivate a forbidden Deactivate a forbidden zone 7.3.4
zone Delete a forbidden zone 7.3.3
Trolley sensor scaling 5.2.2; 7.2.2
Hoisting sensor scaling 5.2.3; 7.2.3
Add a new sensor Moment sensor scaling 5.2.4
Load cell scaling 5.2.5
Travelling scaling 5.2.6; 7.2.4
Slewing sensor scaling 5.2.7; 7.2.5
Jib/ counterjib width Forbidden zones parameter change P41 7.2.1

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE INDICATION FUNCTION.
THE INDICATION SCREENS SHOWN IN THIS DOCUMENT MAY SUFFER SOME CHANGE DUE TO
ANY SYSTEM SOFTWARE IMPROVEMENT.

This screen displays the status of the crane and the position of several crane movements.
Each indication is associated to a sensor connected to the IMDL46 unit.
1 2
3
7
10
8
4
9
Fig. 27
1 Real-time wind speed.

A prealarm and an alarm warning indication on the screen can be set, to warn the crane operator when
wind speed goes beyond the chosen thresholds.
To disable or enable the wind speed indication see 5.2.1.
To set the prealarm and alarm levels see 5.2.8.
2 Moment exerted by the load on the crane

It is indicated as a percentage with respect to the nominal maximum moment.
This value can be measured through the moment sensor or can be automatically estimated from the load
cell and trolley indications, see 5.2.1.
The indication can be a intermittent sound warning when the moment goes beyond 80%, and it becomes
continuous from 100% on.
To enable the sound indication, see 5.2.1.
The maximum value shown by the display is 133%.
3 Trolley position.
With respect to the tower mast central axis.
4 Hoisting position.
Indicated with respect to a chosen ground level (0 meters).
This value can be positive or negative depending on wheter the hook can go below the chosen ground
level or not.
5 Reeving state.
Displays the current crane reeving state.
The system does not automatically detect the reeving number. To indicate the proper number of reevings,
press the reeving change button (see 4.2).

An incorrect number of reeving choice may lead to an incorrect hook height and load indication and thus
to a possible incorrect operation of the forbidden zones height limitation.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
6 Maximum load at current trolley position.

This value is attained through calculations based on the crane parameters of [P10] (see 5.2.1) and on
the measured values .
This indication is just a rough value and only pretends to be an aid to the crane operator. It is compulsory
that the crane operator knows and refers to the load chart diagrams of the crane and never lifts loads
above the crane capacity indicated on the chart.
7 Angle between current jib position and another reference position. The angle must be increased when
the crane turns clockwise (slewing sensor option).
8 Maximum permitted reach for the current load.
This value is attained through calculations based on the crane parameters of [P10] (ver punto 5.2.1) and
on the measured values .
9 Travelling position (option).

10 Load under hook.
Movement commands are indicated on the screen.

The arrow corresponding to the sense of movement blinks as the winch moves.
If there is a failure on any of the sensors or on its configuration, the screen shows this pictogram
and an error code (see Appendix 4).
5.2 Setting up the indication function.
The indication set up must be done in the order explained below. To configure the unit, the necessary
information must be available so that it can be correctly set during the configuration process (load chart
and technical sheets).
The indication set up is done in two steps.

The first step consists on getting into the main page of the unit configuration [P10] and type in the general
crane parameters according to the current crane assembly (number of luffing and counterjib sections, sensors
installed...).
The second step consists on configuring and escaling the sensor signals on pages [P12] and [P18].
5.2.1 Page [P10] configuration.
2
1
3
4
5
Levels
6 N0-N1-N2
7
Fig. 28

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
PICTOGRAM EXPLANATION NOTE
Crane general data field. 1 Configuration program.

1 2 Crane model.
3 Crane serial number.
Date and time adjustment window. Press to modify.
Press to cancel.
2 Window to modify the date and time.(1) Press to save the changes.
Forbidden zones activate and deactivate Available when Forbidden zones option
3
checkbutton. is installed.
Unit System choice buttons. - International system units.
4 - Imperial units.
Moment threshold warning sound activa-
5
tion/deactivation checkbutton.
Moment calculation method checkbuttons Both fields must be always filled in with the
and related fields. sum of the trolley and hook, in single reeving
If any of them is checked, the calculation is (1) and in double reeving (2), regardless the
done by multiplying the estimated load by method of calculation of the moment.
6
the trolley position. Otherwise, the signal
coming from the moment sensor is used.
Maximum permitted end jib load for the It depends on the number of jib sections.
7 current crane assembly.
Maximum load.
8
Maximum distance from the tower mast It depends on the number of jib sections.
9 axis to the end jib trolley position for the
current crane assembly.
Maximum heigth under hook from ground It changes when assemblying additional
10 level for the current crane assembly. tower mast sections.
It must be checked if the crane includes

Reeving change registering method chec-
11 automatic reeving change.
kbutton.
Reeving configurations available in the / / /

12 / /
crane.
/
Page [P1] Trolley indication activation

13 checkbutton.
Page [P1] Hoisting indication activation
14 checkbutton.
This option can be activated only if the
Page [P1] Moment indication activation
15 function 6 of this list is disabled.
checkbutton.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -

This option can be activated only if the
Page [P1] Load cell indication activation
16 function 6 of this list is disabled. Otherwise
checkbutton.
the function is active.
Page [P1] Slewing indication activation
17 checkbutton. Slewing sensor is an option
Page [P1] Travelling indication activation Travelling indication is an option.
18 checkbutton.
Page [P1] Wind speed indication activation Anemometer is an option.
19 checkbutton.
Manual reeving change checkbutton. It must be unchecked if the reeving change
20 is to be indicated manually by the crane
operator. In the case of automatic reeving
chang detection, the signal comes from
IMDL46 unit.
Sensor interface choicebutton. It will always be set to IMDL46.
21
(1) The calendar does not automatically change to Daylight Saving Time. It must be manually changed.
The UCDL46 comes from factory with basic adjustments which correspond to a crane assembled with
the maximum jib and counterjib length , with the self supporting heigth and with double reeving. The
moment alarm and the anemometer alarm are disconnected.
Do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P10] by pressing .

Once the new data are saved, use to exit from [P10] and go back to [P1].

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.2 Trolley sensor scaling [P12].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 29
See 3.5.6 for the sensor installation instructions.
Trolley limiter potentiometer voltage indi- Move the trolley backward to the closest possible position to
1 cation . the tower mast and adjust the potentiometer to get a value
The trolley distance in meters or feet is close to 0.30 V.
indicated once the escaling is completed. Move the trolley forward to the closest possible position to the
jib end and check that the voltaje is not more than 4.85 V.
Move the trolley to the closest possible position to the tower

mast P12-1 (see annex 2) and measure the distance between
the tower mast axis and the trolley centered vertical axis.
2 First position. Trolley backward capture. Type the distance measured on proper units in the field under
the voltage indication and confirm pressing .
Move the trolley to the closest possible position to the jib end
P12-2(see annex 2) and measure the distance between the
3 Second position. Trolley forward capture. tower mast axis and the trolley centered vertical axis.
Type the distance measured on proper units in the field under
Once the second position has been captured, the escale will be set. Do not forget to save the settings before
leaving [P12] by pressing .
If the jib lenght is modified, it is necessary to perform trolley scaling again . (see 4.9).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.3 Hoist sensor scaling [P13].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 30

The hoist scaling process must be done once for each of the reeving states available in the crane as defined
in the configuration menu [P10]. The scaling must follow the order established in the scaling window from left
to right. If there is no reeving change defined in [P10] the scaling can be done just once.
Hoist limiter potentiometer voltage indi- Move the hook to the closest possible position below the jib and
cation . adjust the potentiometer to get a value close to 0.30 V.
1 The hook height in meters or feet is indica- Lower the hook to the lowest position possible and check
ted once the escaling is completed. that the voltaje is not more than 4.85 V.
Move the hook to the closest possible position to the jib

P13-1 (see annex 2) and measure the distance under hook
2 First position. Hook up capture. to the chosen ground level.
Move the hook to the position that wants to be defined as

ground level P13-2(see annex 2).
3 Second position. Hook down capture.
Repeat the above procedure after changing the reeving number.
If the crane height is modified, it is necessary to perform hoisting scaling again . (see 4.9).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.4 Moment sensor scaling [P14].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 31
Access to page [P14] is possible if a moment sensor is used to measure the crane moment. If the moment is
not measured but calculated(see point 6 of table on 5.2.1), this page will not be available.
Move the empty hook to the upper position and the trolley
Moment sensor voltage indication
to the closest possible position to the tower mast and adjust
1 the potentiometer to get a value close to 0.30 V.
The moment in % is indicated once the
Lift the maximum jib end permitted load and check that the
escaling is completed.
voltaje is not more than 4.5 V.
Move the empty hook to the upper position and the trolley to
the closest possible position to the tower mast.
2 First position. No load moment capture.
Type "0"in the field in the field under the voltage indication
and confirm pressing .
Lift the maximum end jib permitted load or a load that makes
the 100% moment limiter to activate.
3 Second position. Maximum load moment
Type "100"in the field in the field under the voltage indication
capture.
If the jib lenght is modified, it is necessary to perform moment scaling again. (see 4.9).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.5 Load cell scaling [P15].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 32
To get higher precision, the scaling should be done with the maximum permitted load for the reeving used.
Check that the reeving chosen in the screen when performing the setting up is the same as the one actually
bein used on the crane.
Load cell sensor voltage indication
1 The load in tons is indicated once the es-

caling is completed
Move the empty hook to the upper position.

2 First position. No load capture. Type "0"in the field in the field under the voltage indication
Lift the known load.

Type the load value (including the weigth of the chains and
3 Second position. Maximum load capture.
container) in the field in the field under the voltage indication
If the crane height is modified, it is necessary to perform load cell scaling again . (see 4.9).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.6 Travelling sensor scaling [P16].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 33

The maximum distance is 250 m.
Indication of pulses detected by the It is better to set the «zero» out of the track.
travelling sensor.
1 The travelling position in meters or feet is
indicated once the escaling is completed.
Move the crane to a point in the track and measure the

2 First position capture. distance between the tower mast axis and the point chosen
as "zero".
Move the crane to a second point in the track as far as possible
from the previous one and measure the distance between
the tower mast axis and the point chosen as "zero".
3 Second position capture.. Type in the distance measured on proper units in the field
under the voltage indication and confirm pressing .

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.7 Slewing sensor escaling [P17].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 34
See 3.3.10 for the sensor installation instructions
Angle indication detected by the slewing

1 The slewing angle must increase when the crane moves
sensor, in degrees.
clockwise (right).
If the sense of rotation is anticlockwise (left), change it to

2 Signal Inversion. clockwise by pressing this key.
If the system includes travelling sensor, place the jib paralel

to the track. If the system does not include travelling, set the
0º on a position easy to be remembered (north, in line with
3 First position. 0° capture. a fixed and big thing, frequent wind direction…).
Confirm pressing .

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.2.8 Anemometer options adjustment [P18].
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 35
See "ANEMOMETER" instructions document for the installation.
Wind speed prealarm and alarm configu- Prealarm speed field. When winds peed goes beyond this
1 ration. value, the unit will show this amber pictogram in page [P1]
together with an intermittent prealarm sound.
Alarm speed field. When wind speed goes beyond this

value, the unit will show this red pictogram in page [P1]
together with a continuous alarm sound.
2 Indication units. Imperial or international units.
This checkbutton activate/deactivate the visual and sound

3 Alarm activation / deactivation. alarm and prealarm.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5.3 Digital inputs monitoring screen page [P19].

Page [P19] shows the state of the digital inputs to the IMDL46 unit. Each input represents the state of a part of
the crane. It allows to check the digital input signals (hoisting, lowering...)
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 36
PICTOGRAM FUNCTION
1 Crane switched on (ON when general contactor energized).

Reeving state (only works if automatic reeving state detection is
2
installed).
3 Trolley forward (ON when trolley forward contactor energized).
4 Trolley backward (ON when trolley backward contactor energized).
5 Hoisting (ON when hoisting contactor energized).
6 Lowering (ON when lowering contactor energized).
7 Weathervaning on (ON when weathervaning sequence detected).

Slewing right or left (ON when Slewing right or left contactor
8
energized).
Travelling backward or forward (ON when Travelling forward or
9
backward contactor energized).
Moment or load limitation detected (ON when Load-moment limit
10
contactor deenergized)..

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
6 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE DATA LOGGING FUNCTION.

Page [P2] displays the permanent information of the system. Permanent information is a set of accumulated
values that are not reset, unless an authorized user reset them on purpose.
They are counters which inform about the overall crane activity.
These values are updated everytim there is a crane event that affects their value (movements, load limita-
tion...).
Last information reset

date
Accumulated values
since the last reset
10 last hoist cycles in- Counter of cycles clas-

formation sified according to the
4 ranges defined by the
user
Fig. 37
6.1.1 Accumulated values since the last reset.
Zone 2 on page [P2] (Fig. 37) registers and displays the values accumulated since the last reset (see 6.2.1)
All the information listed below, except the total load, is calculated by processing the activation/deactivation
information coming from the digital inputs received by the IMDL46 (see 5.3).
PICTOGRAM EXPLANATION
1 Crane switched on total time (in hours : minutes).
2 Total trolley work time (in hours : minutes).
3 Total hoist work time (in hours : minutes).
4 Times the crane reached a moment limit situation.
5 Times the crane reached a load limit situation.
6 Total lifted load (in tons).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
6.1.2 Hoist cycles.

DLZ341 system continuously calculates the lifted load and registers the cycle information in 2 different screen
zones (zones 3 and 4 of page [P2]) (Fig. 37).
A cycle begins when the lifted load goes beyond 5% of the crane maximum load specified in [P10] during
more than 5 seconds.
A cycle ends when the lifted load goes below al 5% of the crane maximum load specified in [P10] during
Zone 3 (Fig.37) -Cycle counter:

This zone shows the number of accumulated cycles classified according to 4 ranges. The ranges may be
changed by the user .
D
4 Nº 3
C 3 Nº 2
B Nº 1
2
A 1
Fig. 38
EXPLANATION
A Number of cycles with moment % below N°1.
B Number of cycles with moment % between N°1 and Nº2.
C Number of cycles with moment % between N°2 and Nº3.
D Number of cycles with moment % beyond N°3.
To choose the moment % ranges thresholds, follow the procedure shown in Fig.39.
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 39

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Zone 4 (Fig.37) - 10 last hoist cycles information:

This screen zone displays detailed information of the 10 last hoist cycles, ordered in a FIFO list (The list always
contains 10 cycles. When detecting a new cycle, it is placed in position 1, the rest are moved to the next position,
and the one in position 12 is deleted)
EXPLANATION
Cycle number.
08:49 Beginning of the cycle time.
Cycle length (minutes : seconds).
Reeving state.
Maximum moment during the cycle.
Maximum load during the cycle.
Trolley position at the beginning of the cycle.

Fig. 40
Trolley position at the end of the cycle.
Press to access the field , and use to go throught the cycle list.
Press to exit.

Page [P3] shows the events recorded in the DLZ341 database.
The event log records the last 2000 events since the last reset, ordered in a FIFO list (The list alway contains
2000 events. A new event is placed in position 1, the rest are moved to the next position, and the one in po-
sition 2000 is deleted)
Fig. 41
1 Chronology of the events.
2 Event identification page (see Appendix 4).
3 Complementary info (see Appendix 4).
Press to exit.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
6.2.1 Data log reset.
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 42
Press to confirm or to cancel.

Once the process finishes, indicates that it has been succesfully performed
indicates that the process has not been completely performed.
6.3 Exporting the database to a USB key.

It is possible to export the the data logger information to a personal computer, to analyze or store it (see Appen-
dix 3).
Fig. 43

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Press to confirm or to cancel.

Once the process finishes, indicates that it has been succesfully performed
The pictogram indicates that the transfer has not been done.
Check that the USB key is properly inserted in the UCDL USB port and that there is free memory enough in
the USB key.
The data are exported in MS Excel format and it is necessary to have a license of the program to display the
information in a PC.
7 USE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES FUNCTION

An unproper adjustment or scaling of the forbidden zones function may lead to an undesired behaviour
of the crane or to a loss of safety.
It is compulsory that the configuration and scaling is done by a trained maintainer.

This page displays a view of the forbidden zones shapes locations with respect to the crane. In this page, the for-
bidden zones change dinamically with respect to the crane (the zones rotate around the crane as it moves)
3
6
5
7
4
8
Fig. 44
1 Jib and counterjib drawing, scaled proportionally to the parameters in page [P11].
2 Trolley drawing, scaled proportionally to the parameters in page [P11].
3 Active forbidden zone drawing (red coloured line).
A zone can be activated or deactivated selectively.
4 Band indicating the current crane position coordinates.
5 Travelling track drawing (option).
6 Deactivated forbidden zone (green coloured line).
The deactivated zone is recorded, but the crane is allowed to enter inside.
7 Scaled grid.
8 Global forbidden zones activation or deactivation pressbutton.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.1.1 Hook position coodinates indication.

The band at the bottom of page [P4] (Fig. 44) displays the hook position coordinates referred to the set of axis
defined during the sensor scaling (height under hook, trolley position…) (see 5.2.2 to 5.2.7)
PICTOGRAMA EXPLICACIÓN
1 Slewing angle referred to the "zero" set during the slewing sensor scaling.
2 Trolley position.
Height under hook referred to the ground level set on the hoist sensor
3
scaling
4 Travelling position referred to the "zero" set on the travelling sensor scaling.
Hook position referred to cartesian absolute axis. The intersection of x and y
axis is set on the mast center.
5
The arrows associated to each movement in [P1] will blink in red when the DLZ system stops the mo-
vement.
7.1.2 Movement stop indications in page [P1].
Every time the system stops a movement to avoid entering a forbidden zone, it warns the operator . This warning
is done by showing a pictogram, both in page [P4] and in page [P1].
The movement stop pictograms are listed in the following list.
PICTOGRAMA FUNCIÓN
1 Trolley forward stop.
2 Trolley backward stop.
3 Hoisting stop.
4 Lowering stop.
5 Clockwise slewing stopped Slewing.
6 Anticlockwise slewing stopped Slewing.
7 Travelling forward stop.
8 Travelling backward stop.
7.2 Forbidden zones function configuration.
The forbidden zones set up must be done in the order explained below. To configure the unit, the neces-
sary information must be available so that it can be correctly set during the configuration process (load
chart and technical sheets).
The forbidden zones configuration consists on three steps:

1 Type in the crane geometric parameters in main page [P11] (see 7.2.1).
2 Scale the sensors in pages [P12] to [P18] and the stopping times (see 7.2.2 to 7.2.5).
3 Define the forbidden zones shapes in page [P41] (see 7.3).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.2.1 Configuration page [P11]
3
5
4 Levels
N0-N1-N2
7
6
Fig. 45

Total jib length from the mast center to the
1 See Appendix 1
jib end.
Total counterjib length from the mast center
2 to the counterjib end. See Appendix 1
3 Total heigth under hook See Appendix 1
Single reeving hook width.

4
Double reeving hook width.
5
6 Maximum jib width. Including accesories
7 Maximum counterjib width. Including accesories
Take it into account when defining

Safety distance to apply all around the
the zones.
8 forbidden zone shape.
It must be a value between 2 m y 10 m.
do not change
9 Machine control mode

Once the data are saved, press to exit page [P11] and return to [P1].
7.2.2 Trolley sensor adjustment

Follow the instructions on 5.2.2 to scale the sensor. Once the sensor is scaled, press to enter the additional
trolley parameters that need to be defined.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 46
Trolley position and speed indicator
1
Move the trolley at maximum speed and write down the

2 Maximum trolley speed. maximum speed reached shown in the indicator 1 (Fig. 46).
Type the value in the field 2 (Fig. 46).
Maximum distance travelled by the trolley Estimate the trolley maximum stop distance and type the
3 before stopping from maximum speed to value in field 3 (Fig. 46).
zero.
Once the second value has been set, do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P12] by pressing .
7.2.3 Hoisting sensor adjustment [P13].

Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 47

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Hook position and speed indicator
1
Move the hook at maximum speed in the fastest reeving case

2 Maximum hook speed.(in the fastest ree- and write down the maximum speed reached shown in the
ving case). indicator 1 (Fig. 47). Type the value in the field 2 (Fig. 47).
Maximum distance travelled by the hook

Estimate the hook maximum stop distance and type the value
3 before stopping from maximum speed to
in field 3 (Fig. 47). (in the fastest reeving case).
zero.(in the fastest reeving case).
7.2.4 Travelling sensor adjustment [P16] (option).

Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 48
Travelling position and speed indicator
1
Move the travelling at maximum speed and write down the

2 Maximum travelling speed. maximum speed reached shown in the indication 1 (Fig. 48).
Maximum distance travelled by the trave- Estimate the travelling maximum stop distance and type the
3 lling before stopping from maximum speed value in field 3 (Fig. 48).
to zero.
Once the second value has been set, do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P16] by pressing

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.2.5 Slewing sensor adjustment[P17].

Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 49
Slewing position and angular speed indi-
1
cator
Move the slewing at maximum speed and write down the
2 Maximum slewing speed. maximum speed reached shown in the indication 1 (Fig. 49).
Maximum angle travelled by the jib before Estimate the maximum stop angle and type the value in
3 stopping from maximum speed to zero. field 3 (Fig. 49).
7.3 Defining the geometric shape of aforbidden zone in [P41].

The first step to define a forbidden zone is to choose its shape type and some options which affect its defini-
tion.
The starting point to define the zone is page [P41].

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Levels
N0-N1-N2
Fig. 50
1 Adds a new zone (up to 12).
2 1 To modify a zone enter this field
3 Activates a zone whech checked.
Rectangular forbidden zone shape.
4 Circular forbidden zone shape (not enabled).
Polygonal or point by point forbidden zone shape.
5 Enables the height limitation mode (three dimensional forbidden zones).

Avoids the jib and counterjib from entering the forbidden zone instead of only
6
the hook.
7 To draw or modify the selected forbidden zone.
8 Deletes the selected forbidden zone.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.3.1 Defining a new forbidden zone area

1 Select it and confirm by pressing to add a new zone.

Once the zone has been added, it is possible to choose its type, to draw it
2 2 and to define the rest of options.
3 Choose the zone shape.
4 Choose any of the additional options, if required.
Select it and confirm by pressing to access the page to draw the zones.
5 - Rectangular shape [P42].
- Circular shape [P43]. (not to be used).
- Polygonal or point by point shape [P44].
Once the options have been set, do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P41] by pressing
.
7.3.2 Modifying an existing forbidden zone.

Choose the zone selection field. The field will be highlighted in blue.
1 3 Select the zone.
It is not possible to modify part of the drawing of an already saved zone.
2
The zone shape of a saved zone cannot be modified.
3 Choose any of the following additional options, if required.
4 Select it and confirm by pressing to access the drawing page and redefine
the zone drawing.
.
7.3.3 Deleting an existing zone.
1 3 Select the zone.
2 Select it to to delete the selected zone.
Once the zone has been deleted, do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P41] by pressing
.
7.3.4 Forbidden zones activation and deactivation.
This action will be automatically registered in the event log on page [P3].
1 3
Select the zone.
Check the box to activate the zone or uncheck it to deactivate.
2 The deactivated zones will be green coloured on page [P4].
Once the activation or deactivation has been performed, do not forget to save the settings before

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.3.5 Forbidden zones override.
This action will be automatically registered in the event log in page [P3].
Press it to completely override the zoning function.
1 This action may also be done on page [P4].
2 Press it to re-activate the forbidden zones function.
The forbidden zones state pictogram is also shown at page [P1].
7.4 Drawing a rectangular forbidden zone on page [P42].
1 Geometric definition of the rectangle.

2
4 5
Dynamic zone drawing.
Crane and hook position coordinates indication.
Fig. 51
The rectangle geometry is defined by 3 points:

P1 to define the first point of any of the rectangle sides (move the hook to the desired position).
P2 to define the second point of the same rectangle side.
P3 to define the rectangle depth.
At each point, the system registers the slewing , the trolley and travelling (option) coordinates
.
If the hook height forbidden zones management is chosen, it is necessary to define a fourth point named Pz to
define the minimum hook height allowed in each zone.
1 Indicates that a rectangular zone is being drawn or modified.
2 Coordinates of the 3 registered points P1, P2 and P3.
3 Rectangle depth (point P3).
Hook lowest position allowed in the forbidden zone(point Pz).

4
Select it to define the zone outside the drawn rectangle as forbidden and
5
allow the zone inside the rectangle.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.4.1 Drawing the rectangle [P42].
It is important to take into account the safety distance (d) defined at page [P11] to set the points of the
rectangle.
The safety distance is automatically applied all around the defined zone perimeter by the software .
The drawings on the screen show the zone to which the hook access is prevented. However, the crane
movements are stopped (d)m before.
Place the hook at the first rectangle vertex
P1.
Register the point by pressing V.
1 1 The point coordinates are shown a few
seconds after registering the point and the
point number will change to P2.
Place the hook at the second rectangle
2 2 vertex P2.
Place the hook at the third rectangle vertex
3 3 P3.
If height management is selected, move the
4 hook to the desired limit Pz.
Once the above process is finished, the zone definition is done. However, the zone will not be closed
and saved until the zone is saved pressing .
During the drawing of the zones, it is possible to modify any of the previously defined points. It is not possible
to do so after saving the points.
PICTOGRAMA EXPLANATION
1 To modify the points P1 or P2, first select the desired point in the selection
field.
2 Place the hook at the desired point and register it by pressing V.
To modify P3, enter the field and manually modify the depth value.
It is possible to invert the depth sense with respect to P1-P2 by using the
3
fields of _
Move the hook to the desired limit Pz and check its coordinate.
4 Enter Pz field and adjust manually to the desired value.
.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7.5 Point to point drawing of a polygonal forbidden zone [P43]
3
4
1
Geometric definition of the polygon.
2
5 6
Zone dynamic drawing.
Crane and hook position coordinates indication.
Fig. 50
It is possible to define a polygon of up to 20 points (from P1 to P21).
At each point, the system registers the slewing , the trolley and travelling (option) coordinates
.
If the hook height forbidden zones management is chosen, it is necessary to define a fourth point named Pz to
define the minimum hook height allowed in each zone.
1 Indicates that a polygonal zone is being drawn or modified.
2 Coordinates of the registered points P1 to P21.
3 Select it to delete the selected point.
Select it to indicate that the system will automatically close the polygon by
4 drawing a line between the first and the last point.
Select it always.
Hook lowest position allowed in the forbidden zone(point Pz).
5
Select it to define the zone outside the drawn polygon as forbidden and allow
6
the zone inside the polygon.
7.5.1 Drawing of the Point to point polygon [P43].
It is important to take into account the safety distance (d) defined at page [P11] to set the points of the
rectangle.
The safety distance is automatically applied all around the defined zone perimeter.
The screen drawing indicates the exact zone to which the hook access is prevented. However, the crane
movements are stopped (d)m before.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Place the hook at the first polygon vertex
P1.
1
The point coordinates are shown a few
seconds after registering the point and the
point number will change to P2.
Place the hook at the second polygon
2 vertex P2.
Place the hook at the next polygon vertex.

3 Register the point by pressing V.
Repeat the process with the following points
If height management is selected, move the

4 hook to the desired limit Pz.
Once the above process is finished, the zone definition is done. However, the zone will not be closed
and saved until the zone is saved pressing .
During the drawing of the zones, it is possible to modify any of the previously defined points. It is not possible
to do so after saving the points.
1 To modify the points P1 to P21, first select the desired point in the selection
field.
2 Place the hook at the desired point and register the point by pressing V.
It is possible to delete one of the points (e.g. point P4 in

the right figure).
3 After confirming the deletion, the system will calculate
again the segment between the points previous and
following to the deleted point.
Move the hook to the desired height limit Pz and check its coordinate.
4
Select Pz field and adjust manually to the desired value.
Once the options has been determined, do not forget to save the settings before leaving [P43] by
pressing .
7.6 IM45 Digital output control [P20].

Page [P20] allows to simulate the forbidden zones dynamic movement stop and prevention. It is possible to
activate IM45 relays through this page and thus to stop selectively the crane movements.
Before beginning to use the Forbidden zones option it is compulsory to check that DLZ341 forbidden zones
system is able to stop each of the crane movements through the proper relay output.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5 6
1
8
2
9
3
Levels
4 10 N0-N1-N2
11
7
12
13
Fig. 53
1 Stops and prevents clockwise slewing movements.
2 Stops and prevents anticlockwise slewing movements.
Sets a reduced speed for slewing movements (clockwise and

3
anticlockwise)
4 Applies the slewing brake.
5 Stops and prevents trolley forward movements.
6 Stops and prevents trolley backward movements.
7 Sets a reduced speed for trolley movements (clockwise and anticlockwise)
8 Stops and prevents hoisting movements.
9 Stops and prevents lowering movements.
10 Sets a reduced speed for hoist movements (hoisting and lowering)
11 Stops and prevents travelling forward movements.
12 Stops and prevents travelling backward movements.
13 Indicates detection of a zero position of slewing control (not used)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
8 APPENDICES
Appendix 1 – Geometric parameters for forbidden zones configuration.
Fig. 54
Appendix 2 – Geometric parameters for sensors configuration.
Fig. 55

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Appendix 3– Reading the event log from a PC using the USB key.
A USB key is supplied with the DLZ341 system. The USB stores the application DLZ341-GAT.xls that works
under MS Excel. This application allows to view and print the information registered by the Data logger. To do
so, it is necessary a personal computer and the program MS Excel.
1. Opening an event log file.
1 Once the information has been transferred from UCDL46 into the USB key (see 6.3), plug it to PC USB
port.
The following screen appears after opening the USB folder.
Fig. 56
To open the folder, it may be necessary to use the system explorer.
2 When opening DLZ-GAT.xls the following sheet appears:
Fig. 57

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
To open the file, it is necessary that MS Excel is configured at a low safety level, so that it allows to run
Macros. If an error message appears on the screen when trying to oper the excel file, check the safety
level in the menu Tools/Macro/Safety settings, or in the MS Excel equivalent version menu. If the safety
level is too high, decrease it so that it does not interfere with the program.
3 After opening the file, choose the language:

Application use:
The report is made up of the data registered in the three sheets described below.
1 Previous page.
2 Print report.
3 Next page.
To navigate through the sheets use the buttons placed at the bottom of the sheet.
2 Report sheet 1 :
2
1
Fig. 58
1 UCDL serial number
2 Time and date of the UCDL to USB key event log down-
load
-Grue: Configuration program
3 Crane identification -Modèle: Model
-NS: Crane serial number
1 4
3 5
2 6
Fig. 59

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
1 Total crane connection time (hours : minutes).
2 Total trolley work time (hours : minutes).
3 Total hoist work time (hours : minutes).
4 Total slewing work time (hours : minutes). (option)
5 Total travelling work time (hours : minutes). (option)
6 Total lifted load.
DERNIERS CYCLES DE TRAVAIL

3 4 5 6 7 8
2
Fig. 60
The table registers the last 10 lift cycles.
Being the cycle 1 the most recent
1 Cycle number
cycle.
2 Cycle duration. Hours and minutes.
3 Reeving state during the cycle.
Percentage with respect to the maxi-

4 Maximum moment within the cycle.
mum moment of the crane.
5 Load lifted within the cycle. Tons.
6 Trolley position at cycle start. Meters.
7 Trolley position at cycle end. Meters.
8 Date and time at cycle start.
3 Page 2 .
The page shows a bargraph which indicates the number of registered cycles classified in four ranges depending
on the moment exerted on the crane during the cycle.
- Zone 1 : Less than 50% of the maximum admissible moment.

- Zone 2 : Between the 50% and the 74% of the maximum admissible moment.
- Zone 3 : Between the 75% and the 100% of the maximum admissible moment.
- Zone 4 : More than the 100% of the maximum admissible moment.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Fig. 61
The ranges can be modified in page [P2] by changing the threshold values (see 6.1.2).
The cycles indicated by the bargraphs correspond to the ranges defined at [P2], though the side inscrip-
tions indicate the default ranges.
Fig. 62
These tables register details of the last 10 cycles in the 3rd and 4th ranges.
The information of this table is the same as that in the table «last cycles» of the 1st page of the report
(see 2 of this Appendix).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
3 Page 3 description :
Page 3 shows the events log registered in the DLZ341 system database.
2000 events. A new event is placed in position 1, the rest are moved to the next position, and the one in po-
sition 2000 is deleted)
Fig. 63
Event number. The left arrow allows to go through
1
the whole list of events.
2 Event time and date Hours and minutes.
Event icon (see appendix 4)

3
The last column indicates a value associated to eg: lifted load, trolley position
4 the registered event, if any.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Annex 4 – Events list and failure codes.

EVENT FUNCTIÓN NOTE
1 Reeving state.
2 Reeving state.
3 Reeving state.
4 Reeving state
5 Reeving state
6 Wind speed rise above prealarm

threshold
Wind speed fall below prealarm
threshold
7 Wind speed rise above alarm threshold
Wind speed fall below alarm threshold.
8 Anemometer signal fault.
9 Trolley backward start.
11 Trolley forward start.
When the trolley mechanism is stopped at

13 Trolley stopped state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
The position is also registered.
14 Hoisting start.
15 Hoisting stop.
16 Lowering start .
17 Lowering stop.
When the hoist mechanism is stopped at
18 Hoist stopped state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
19 Load hung state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
The load value is also registered.
20 Moment limitation state start.
21 Moment limitation state stop.
22 Load limitation state start.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
EVENT FUNCTION NOTE
23 Load limitation state stop.
24 Crane switched on.
25 Crane switched off.
26 Weathervaning on.
27 Weathervaning off.
28 Forbidden zones on.
30 UCDL46 on.
31 UCDL46 off.
32 UCDL46 date and/or clocktime change.
33 UCDL46 software change.
FAILURE CODE FUNCTION NOTE
Luffing angle sensor badly scaled or sensor Only in luffing jib crane.
41 1
failure.
42 Trolley sensor badly scaled or sensor
2
failure
Load cell badly scaled or load cell
43 3
failure.
Moment sensor badly scaled or sensor
44 4 failure
Hoisting sensor badly scaled or sensor
45 5 failure
Anemmometer sensor badly scaled or
46 6 Option
sensor failure
Slewing sensor badly scaled or sensor
47 7 Forbidden zones option
failure
Travelling sensor badly scaled or sensor
48 8 Option
failure
49 9 System error
50 10 Data logger failure
51 11 Memory corruption.
52 12 Data logger information restoring error.

21LC
DIGITAL INDICATORS -
Values for the parameterisation of the indicators and prohibited areas
WARNINGS:
THE CORRECT PARAMETERISATION OF THE SET OF INDICATORS AND PROHIBITED AREAS

DEPENDING ON EACH SITUATION IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CRANE INSTALLER.
EACH PIECE OF DATA ENTERED AND THE CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION MUST BE CHECKED
AFTER THE INSTALLATION.
The following tables provide orientative information that may help when parameterising the system of indicators
and prohibited areas.
Some data will depend on the configuration of the crane erected:

- Maximum reach.
- Height under jib.
- Maximum load at maximum reach.
- Maximum load.
- Length of shaft at jib end.
The following table shows the settings that are filled in on page P10.
SETTINGS P10
(INDICATION FUNCTION)
Weight Hook Maximum load Maximum Maximum Height

trolley + weight at maximum load reach under jib
hook(t) (t) reach (t) (t) (m) (m)
MODEL
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 6,0 (1) (2)

21LC290/12 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 9,0 (1) (2)
21LC290/18 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 18,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 6,0 (1) (2)
21LC400/12 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 9,0 (1) (2)
21LC400/18 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 18,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 6,0 (1) (2)
21LC550/12 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 9,0 (1) (2)
21LC550/18 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 18,0 (1) (2)
SC 0,54 0,29 (1) 9,0 (1) (2)
21LC660/18 t
SC/DC 1,20 0,83 (1) 18,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,31 0,70 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
21LC660/24 t
SC/DC 3,11 1,95 (1) 24,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,31 0,70 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
21LC660/36 t
SC/DC 3,79 2,40 (1) 36,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,95 1,08 (1) 24,0 (1) (2)
21LC660/48 t
SC/DC 4,28 2,63 (1) 48,0 (1) (2)
(1) Depends on the configuration of jib fitted.

(2) Depends on the configuration of tower erected.
1 / 2 Rev.: C 13/09 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 4 / 115 / 171

21LC
SETTINGS P10
(INDICATION FUNCTION)
Weight Hook Maximum load Maximum Maximum Height

trolley + weight at maximum load reach under jib
hook(t) (t) reach (t) (t) (m) (m)
MODEL
SC 1,31 0,70 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)

21LC550/24 t
SC/DC 3,11 1,95 (1) 24,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,31 0,70 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
21LC750/24 t
SC/DC 3,11 1,95 (1) 24,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,31 0,70 (1) 12,0 (1) (2)
21LC750/36 t
SC/DC 3,79 2,40 (1) 36,0 (1) (2)
SC 1,95 1,08 (1) 24,0 (1) (2)
21LC750/48 t
SC/DC 4,28 2,63 (1) 48,0 (1) (2)
The following table shows the settings that are filled in on page P11, (it is only necessary to enter this data if
the crane has the prohibited areas unit).
SETTINGS P11
(PROHIBITED AREAS ONLY)
Length of Length of Width Width

Height
shaft at Width of shaft at Width of of hook of hook
under jib MCM
jib end jib (m) counter-jib counter-jib (m) 2-FALL 4-FALL
(m)
(m) end (m) (m) (m)
MODEL
21LC290/12 t (1) 1,4 20,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11

21LC290/18 t (1) 1,4 20,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC400/12 t (1) 1,4 24,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC400/18 t (1) 1,4 24,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC550/12 t (1) 1,4 24,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC550/18 t (1) 1,4 24,2 (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC550/24 t (1) 1,4 24,2 (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
21LC660/18 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,1 2,3 11
21LC660/24 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
21LC660/36 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,1 2,85 11
21LC660/48 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
21LC750/24 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
21LC750/36 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
21LC750/48 t (1) 1,4 (1) (2) 3,4 1,3 2,85 11
(1) Depends on the configuration of jib fitted.

(2) Depends on the configuration of tower erected.
2 / 2 Rev.: C 13/09 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 4 / 115 / 172

-
Point for connecting an anti-collision or external areas system
The connection of a system of areas other than the original supplied with the crane or an anti-collision
system is the responsibility of the crane installer.
In each case, the crane installer is responsible for carrying out a risk analysis and assessing if the
maximum safety level provided by the system chosen is sufficient for the work it must do.
Any change made to the crane as a consequence of the installation of a limitation system of this type
shall be the responsibility of the installer.
For any later service, any modification made in the electric wiring must be noted on the electrical diagrams
sent in the control panels and on he diagram in the crane manual.
Likewise, the changes must be written in any other modifications record system necessary for later
follow-up.
The control signals access socket can be live.

Before disconnecting it from the jumper base, you must press the crane stop button first.
The work must be performed by staff responsible for electrical work.
In the control panel inside the cab, there is a plug E92 that allows access to each of the control signals for all
the movements of the crane.
If no area limitation system is installed, you must connect the E92 plug to the E92 jumper socket. If you
disconnect the E92 plug from the E92 jumper socket, the crane will not receive any control signals and it will
not be possible to make any movement.
It is represented graphically below:
CONTROL SIGNALS
ACCESS PLUG E92
JUMPER SOCKET E92 (USED IF
THERE IS NO LIMITATION SYSTEM)
1 / 2 Rev.: B 10/09 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 4 / 115 / 173

-
By acting on the E92 plug in a controlled way, it is possible to interrupt the movements of the crane
selectively.
The contacts and what to do to impede or allow the crane movements are shown below:
The working voltage of the pins in the E92 plug is 48VAC.

The current flowing through the contacts may be different in every case.
The system installer must verify that the elements inserted in the socket can bear the operating conditions
and do not stop the control panel working correctly.
EFFECT ON MOVEMENT
Electric contact open Electric contact closed
MOVEMENT PINS
LIFT E92.03-E92.23 Not possible Possible

LOWER E92.04-E92.24 Not possible Possible
ROTATE LEFT E92.09-E92.10 Not possible Possible
ROTATE RIGHT E92.06-E92.07 Not possible Possible
TROLLEY FORWARD E92.11-E92.12 Not possible Possible
ELEVATION FORWARD E92.11-E92.12 Not possible Possible
TROLLEY BACK E92.03-E92.23 Not possible Possible
ELEVATION BACK E92.15-E92.16 Not possible Possible
TRANSPORT FORWARD E92.15-E92.16 Not possible Possible
TRANSPORT BACK E92.17-E92.18 Not possible Possible
See electrical diagram for more details.
2 / 2 Rev.: B 10/09 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 4 / 115 / 174

ELECTRIC INSTALLATION 120 0001 IB
-
ELECTRIC MAINTENANCE -
ALWAYS PERFORM ELECTRIC MAINTENANCE WORK WITH ELECTRIC POWER

DISCONNECTED.
ENSURE THAT ELECTRIC POWER IS NOT RECONNECTED WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING.
0 CONTENTS
1 ELECTRIC CABINET
2 ELECTRIC MOTORS
3 RESISTORS
4 ELECTRIC CABLES
5 LIMITERS
6 ELECTRIC COLLECTOR
7 ANEMOMETER
8 FORBIDDEN AREAS SYSTEM
9 CABIN
10 POWER SURGES PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 ELECTRIC CABINET
Regularly ensure the following conditions
- Water-tightness of the envelope against water entry and proper door sealing closure.
- Proper greasing of cabinet hinges.
- If ventilation and heating elements are fitted, that these operate properly.
- The cabinet door switch can easily be operated.
- There are no loose cable connections, either in connection terminal boards or in the terminals of the
electrical switchgear elements.
- The cabinet is clean and free from foreign objects inside.
- The contacts of the contactors are in proper condition. Only replace the contacts or the contactor, if any
contact is fully worn-out (virtually non-existent silver surface) or there are signs that it has been soldered.
Never file the contact surface.
- The labels in the outside of the cabinet are in good state and are legible.
- If the cabinet has an air inlet grid with filter.
- Check its condition regularly.
- Clean the filter to ensure air flow.
- The maintenance light points located inside the cabinet light up on when the switches are
pressed.
The frequency of reviews depends on the surrounding pollution. In case of extreme pollution, weekly
cleaning may be required.
When permanent obstructions are detected in the screen or breaks in it, it must be replaced.
If a variator is replaced, before connecting it ensure that the motor and the brake resistors are not short-
ciruited to grounding. Failure to do so may cause damage to the variator.
IN THE EVENT OF A SHORT-CIRCUIT, CONTROL CONTACT OF THE CONTACTORS THAT MAY
HAVE BEEN INVOLVED. CONTACTS MAY HAVE BECOME SOLDERED TOGETHER.
2 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Regularly ensure the following conditions:
- -Water-tightness against water entry is maintained.
- The compression glands are properly tightened (fully closed tightening nut) and the cables are properly
fitted to the compression glands (the compression gland acts on the outside covering of the cables and
these are not forced obliquely against the compression gland).
- The airing windows are free from obstructions.
- If forced ventilation is available, that it is working properly and is free from obstructions.
- Motor connections are properly tightened.
1 / 3 Rev: E 10/19 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 4 / 120 / 175

-
3 RESISTORS
Both brake resistors and the envelope where they are lodged can reach very high temperatures. Before
starting inspection or maintenance ensure that they are at a temperature that will not cause damage.
The fact that the variator is not dissipating energy to the braking resistors does not guarantee that they
are electrically insulated. Before beginning any maintenance operation on the brake resistors, turn off
the variator and wait five minutes until the direct-current bus is discharged. Otherwise, you may be suffer
an electrical discharge.
Regularly ensure the following conditions:
- Connections with screws, both on cable connection terminals and in the resistors' internal connections,
are properly tightened.
- The resistor tubes and components are not damaged.
In salty or dusty environments, frequently review the state of the resistor battery, and if necessary clean with
compressed air and brushing to prevent short-circuits that may vary the electric resistance value.
4 ELECTRIC CABLES
Regularly check:
- that the external covers of the cables are free of physical damages.
- that the cables are not subject to stretching or twisting efforts.
- that the cables are not forced at the receptor inlet sites (motors, derivation boxes, etc.).
5 LIMITERS
For a safe use of the crane, the limiters and end stops must be in good condition.
Regularly check:
- The actuators of position limiters act properly (actuation and return to rest position with no efforts or
seizing of the outside covering of the cables, that are free from physical damage.
- The envelopes and covers ensure limiter water-tightness.
fitted to the compression glands (the compression gland acts on the outside cover of the cables and
6 ELECTRIC COLLECTOR
Regularly check:
- Status of brushes and rings.
- Electric connections.
- Envelope water-tightness.
fitted to the compression glands (the compression gland acts on the outside cover of the cables and
7 ANEMOMETER
Regularly check anemometer and alarm operation:
- Operation of light beacons and siren (press TEST button).
- The anemometer pickup turns freely and is not affected by screening of the structure.
- The cable between the pickup and the control / signalling unit is not cut or unplugged.
- The signalling unit can be seen by the crane operator.
- The signalling unit is properly attached to the structure using the supplied chain.
For further details, see the "Anemometer - Indication / Wind speed alarm" instruction.

-
8 FORBIDDEN AREA SYSTEM

For a safe use of the crane, the limiting and warning system must be properly adjusted.
Regularly check operation of the area limitation:

- The movement cut-off relays, located in the IM45 unit, open and close the contacts properly.
- Sensors have not become maladjusted or the cumulative maladjustment does not prevent the system
from performing its function.
9 CABIN
Regularly check equipment operation, including the cabin:
9.1 Air conditioning.
- Remove the air filters, clean them with soap and warm water, dry them and reassemble.
- Check that the suction and ventilation ducts are not blocked.
9.2 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

- Check the level of the washing liquid tank, if necessary refill with water and the proper soap.
- Check that the brushes sweep their area properly.
If necessary clean or replace the brushes, this can be done from inside the cabin.
9.3 Ventilation grilles.

- Check that the grids for air renewal in the cabin are not blocked and, if necessary, clean them.
9.4 Fire extinguisher.

- Check that the level marked by the pressure gauge is correct.
If necessary replace with another of the same characteristics.
9.5 Indicator lights.

- Check that all indicator lights on the controls light up properly.
9.6 Inside lighting.

- Check that the light goes on when the switch is pressed.
10 POWER SURGES PROTECTION SYSTEM

If the crane is fitted with a device for protecting against power surges, regularly verify that the grounding cartridges
have not reached the end of their useful life.
A coloured pilot above the cartridge shows its status.Replace the cartridges with new ones as appropriate.

21LC
CRANE CONTROL DIAGRAMS FU45; 65;110 kW

21LC
CRANE CONTROL DIAGRAMS FU45; 65;110 kW

5ºC 5ºC
-
I II III IV
203
1 4
ON ON ON
ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
AB CONTACTOR AUXILIAR ELEVACION BAJAR

HOISTING DOWN AUX. CONTACTOR
ACC8 CONTACTOR FRENO AC8

AC8 BRAKE CONTACTOR
ACE CONTACTOR AUXILIAR DEFECTO ELEVACION

HOISTING DEFECT AUX. CONTACTOR
AEL ARMARIO ELECTRICO

ELECTRICAL CABINET
AEQ AUTOMATA CONTROL ELEVACION

HOISTING CONTROL AUTOMATON
AG CONTACTOR AUXILIAR DEL GENERAL

AUX. CONTACTOR OF MAIN CONTACTOR
AG1 CONTACTOR AUXILIAR DEL GENERAL

AUX. CONTACTOR OF MAIN CONTACTOR
AID CONTACTOR ANULACION LIMITADORES CARRO/ELEVACION

TROLLEY/HOISTING LIMITERS CANCELLATION CONTACTOR
ALCT CONTACTOR LIMITADOR CARRO ATRÁS

TROLLEY FORWARDS LIMITER CONTACTOR
ALS CONTACTOR AUXILIAR LIMITADOR SUBIR ELEVACION

HOISTING UP LIMITER AUX. CONTACTOR
AN BLOQUE CONTROL ANEMOMETRO

WIND SPEED CONTROL BLOCK
APB CONTACTOR AUXILIAR PUESTA EN VELETA

FREE-SLEWING PUSH-BUTTON AUX. CONTACTOR
APM CONTACTOR AUXILIAR ELEVACION MODO POSICIONAL

HOISTING PLACING ROTATING AUX. CONTACTOR
AS CONTACTOR AUXILIAR ELEVACION SUBIR

HOISTING AUX. CONTACTOR
BAL1 BALIZA
BUOY
BAL2 BALIZA
BUOY
BAL3 BALIZA
BUOY
BO BOCINA
HOOTER
CAB CABINA OPERADOR

OPERATOR'S CABIN
CAD CONTACTOR CARRO ADELANTE

CONTACTOR, TROLLEY OUT
CAN CAPTADOR VELOCIDAD VIENTO

WINDSPEED SENSOR
CAT CONTACTOR CARRO ATRAS

CONTACTOR TROLLEY BACK
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
CC2 INTERRUPTOR LIMITACION MAXIMA VELOCIDAD CARRO

TROLLEY SPEED MAX. LIMITATION INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
CDFE CONTACTOR DESGASTE FRENO ELEVACION

HOISTING BREAKE WEAR AWAY CONTACTOR
CFC CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA MOTOR CARRO

TROLLEY MOTOR FREQUENCE CONVERTER
CFE CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA MOTOR ELEVACION

HOIST MOTOR FREQUENCY CONVERTER
CFG CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA MOTOR GIRO

SLEWING MOTOR FRECUENCE CONVERTER
CFO1 CONTACTOR FOCO 1

BULB 1 CONTACTOR

BULB 2 CONTACTOR

BULB 3 CONTACTOR
CHL CONTACTOR CHEQUEO LAMPARAS INDICACION CABINA

CABIN INDICATION LAMPS CHECK CONTACTOR
CJA CAJA ACOMETIDA CON INTERRUPTOR

MAINS SUPPLY BOX WITH INTERRUPTOR
CJC CAJA DERIVACION CABRESTANTE CARRO

TROLLEY WINCH JUNCTION BOX
CJE CAJA DERIVACION CABRESTANTE ELEVACION

HOIST WINCH JUNCTION BOX
CJL CAJA DERIVACION LIMITADORES

LIMIT SWITCH JUNCTION BOX
CM CONTACTOR 100%CARGA/MOMENTO ó 100%MOMENTO

100% LOAD/MOMENT CONTACTOR OR 100%MOMENT
CM1 CONTACTOR 100%CARGA/MOMENTO ó 100%MOMENTO

100% LOAD/MOMENT CONTACTOR OR 100%MOMENT
CM2 CONTACTOR SEGURIDAD CARGA/MOMENTO NIVEL 2

AUX.CONTACTOR FOR OVERLOAD LEVEL 2
CME CAPTADOR MOTOR ELEVACION

HOISTING MOTOR CAPTATOR
CMPWL CONTACTOR LIMITADOR POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT LIMITER CONTACTOR
COC CONTACTOR CARRO PUNTO "0"

STEP "0" TROLLEY CONTACTOR
COL COLECTOR ELECTRICO

SLIP-RING COLLECTOR
CQ2 CONTACTOR CARGA INTERMEDIA (2º NIVEL)

INTERVAL LOAD CONTACTOR (2nd LEVEL)
CQ3 CONTACTOR CARGA INTERMEDIA (3º NIVEL)

INTERVAL LOAD CONTACTOR (3st LEVEL)
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
CQ4 CONTACTOR CARGA MINIMA (4º NIVEL)

MINIMUM LOAD CONTACTOR (4st LEVEL)
CRCF CONTACTOR RELE CONTROL DE FASES

BALANCED PHASES CONTROL RELE CONTACTOR
CVE CONMUTADOR VELOCIDADES ELEVACION

HOISTING SPEED COMUTATOR SWITCH
DFE CONTACTO DESGASTE FRENO ELEVACION EXTERNO

EXTERNAL HOISTING BREAKE WEAR AWAY CONTAC
DG CONTACTOR DEFECTO EN GIRO

SLEWING FAILURE CONTACTOR
DIT TOMA DE TIERRA

ELECTRIC GROUNDING
E0 CONTACTOR MANDO ELEVACION PUNTO "0"

POINT "0" HOISTING CONTROL CONTACTOR
E11 ENCHUFE FUERZA AUXILIAR

AUXILIARY SOCKET
E110 ENCHUFE AUXILIAR 110V

AUXILIARY SOCKET 110V
E230 ENCHUFE AUXILIAR 230V

AUXILIARY SOCKET 230V
E91 ENCHUFE MANDO ASIENTO CABINA

CABIN SEAT CONTROL SOCKET
E92 ENCHUFE LIMITACION DE ZONAS

ZONING SOCKET
E933 ENCHUFE INDICADORES CABINA

CABIN INDICATORS SOCKET
EFFI+ SELECTOR EFFI+

EFFI+ SELECTOR
EM1 CONTACTOR 1er RANGO VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING FIRST SPEED RANGE CONTACTOR
EM2 CONTACTOR 2º RANGO VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING SECOND SPEED RANGE CONTACTOR
EM3 CONTACTOR 3er RANGO VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING THIRD SPEED RANGE CONTACTOR
EM4 CONTACTOR 4º RANGO VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING FOURTH SPEED RANGE CONTACTOR
F1 FOCO 1 PLUMA
FLOOD LIGHT 1
F2 FOCO 2 PLUMA
FLOOD LIGHT 2
F3 FOCO 3 PLUMA
FLOOD LIGHT 3
FC CONTACTOR FRENO CARRO

TROLLEY BRAKE CONTACTOR
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
FCCR CONTACTOR LIMITACION CARRO RAPIDA

FAST TROLLEY LIMITATION CONTACTOR
FCER CONTACTOR LIMITACION VELOCIDAD ELEVACION RAPIDA

FAST HOIST SPEED LIMITATION CONTACTOR
FCF FILTRO CONVERTIDORES DE FRECUENCIA

FREQUENCE CONVERTERS FILTER
FE CONTACTOR FRENO ELEVACION

HOISTING BRAKE CONTACTOR
FE1 CONTACTOR FRENO ELEVACION 1

1 HOISTING BRAKE CONTACTOR
FG CONTACTOR FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE CONTACTOR
FMC FRENO MOTOR CARRO

TROLLEY MOTOR BRAKE
FME FRENO MOTOR ELEVACION

HOIST MOTOR BRAKE
FMG1 FRENO MOTOR GIRO 1

SLEWING MOTOR BRAKE 1



FUE FUSIBLES GENERALES ACOMETIDA

MAIN SUPPLY FUSES
FURC FUSIBLES RECTIFICADOR CABINA

CABIN RECTIFIER FUSE
FUUA1 FUSIBLE UNIDAD AIRE ACONDICIONADO

EQUIPPED AIR SYSTEM FUSE
FUUA2 FUSIBLE UNIDAD AIRE ACONDICIONADO

EQUIPPED AIR SYSTEM FUSE
G CONTACTOR GENERAL
MAIN CONTACTOR
G2 CONTACTOR GIRO 2a VELOCIDAD

2nd SLEWING SPEED CONTACTOR
G3 CONTACTOR GIRO 3a VELOCIDAD

3 SLEWING SPEED CONTACTOR
GD CONTACTOR GIRO DERECHA

SLEWING CONTACTOR, RIGHT
GI CONTACTOR GIRO IZQUIERDA

SLEWING CONTACTOR, LEFT
HR CALEFACCION ARMARIO ELECTRICO

CUPBOARD HEATING
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
IAPWL CONTACTOR ANULACION POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT ANUL CONTACTOR
IBAL INTERRUPTOR LUCES AEREAS

LIGHT SWITCH AIR
ICC INTERRUPTOR CALEFACION CABINA

CABIN HEATING INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
ID CONMUTADOR DESBLOQUEO MONTAJE

ERECTION DE-BLOCKING COMUTATOR
ID110 INTERRUPTOR DIFERENCIAL CIRCUITO 110V

DIFFERENTIAL CIRCUIT BREAKER 110V
ID230 INTERRUPTOR DIFERENCIAL CIRCUITO 230V

IDLAR INTERRUPTOR DIFERENCIAL CIRCUITO 230V

IF INTERRUPTOR FOCOS
LAMP INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
IG INTERRUPTOR GENERAL
GENERAL INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
IL INTERRUPTOR LIMPIAPARABRISAS
WINDSCREEN-WIPER INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
ILAR1 INTERRUPTOR ILUMINACION ARMARIO

ELECTRIC CUPBOARD LIGHT SWITCH
ILC INTERRUPTOR LUZ CABINA

CABIN LIGHT INTERRUPTOR SWITCH
IM45 UNIDAD CENTRAL ZONAS PROHIBIDAS

ZONING CENTRAL UNIT
IMDL46 UNIDAD CENTRAL INDICADORES

INDICATORS CENTRAL UNIT
IRG INTERRUPTOR RESCATE GIRO

SLEWING RESCUE SWITCH
KB ELECTROIMAN DESBLOQUEO GIRO

FREE SLEWING ELECTRO-AIMANT
KM1 CONTACTOR SUBIR PLUMIN AUXILIAR

AUX. JIB UP CONTACTOR
KM2 CONTACTOR BAJAR PLUMIN AUXILIAR

AUX. JIB DOWN CONTACTOR
LB LIMITADOR ELEVACION BAJAR

HOOK DOWN LIMIT SWITCH
LBR LIMITADOR BAJAR RAPIDA

FAST SPEED "DOWN" LIMITER
LC LIMITADOR CARGA MAXIMA

MAX.LOAD LIMIT CUT-OUT
LC2 LIMITADOR CARGA INTERMEDIA 2º NIVEL

2º LEVEL INTERMIDIATE LOAD LIMITER
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION

3º LEVEL INTERMIDIATE LOAD LIMITER

4º LEVEL INTERMEDIATE LOAD LIMITER
LCA LIMITADOR CARRO ADELANTE

TROLLEY FORWARDS LIMITER
LCAR LIMITADOR CARRO ADELANTE RAPIDA

TROLLEY OUT FAST SPEED LIMITER
LCB LUZ DE CABINA

CABIN LIGHT
LCM100 LAMPARA CARGA/MOMENTO MAXIMO

MAXIMUN LOAD/MOMENT LAMP
LCT LIMITADOR CARRO ATRAS

TROLLEY BACKWARDS LIMIT-SWITCH
LCTR LIMITADOR CARRO ATRAS RAPIDA

FAST SPEED LIMITER. TROLLEY BACK
LM LIMITADOR MOMENTO MAXIMO

LOAD MOMENT LIMIT CUT-OUT
LM2 LIMITADOR MOMENTO 90%

90% MOMENT LIMITER
LM90 LAMPARA MOMENTO 90%

90% MOMENT LAMP
LMPWL LIMITADOR MOMENTO POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT MOMENT LIMITER
LPB LAMPARA DESBLOQUEO MOTOR GIRO

FREE SLEWING UNIT LAMP
LPWL LAMPARA POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT LAMP
LS LIMITADOR ELEVACION SUBIR

HOOK UP LIMIT SWITCH
LSCEM LAMPARA SOBRECARGA/VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING SPEED/OVERLOAD LAMP
LSR LIMITADOR SUBIR RAPIDA

HOISTING UP LIMITER FAST
MBL MOTOR BOMBA LAVA PARABRISAS

WASHES WINDSHIELD PUMB MOTOR
MC MOTOR CARRO
TROLLEY MOTOR
ME MOTOR ELEVACION
HOISTING MOTOR
MG1 MOTOR GIRO 1

SLEWING MOTOR 1
MG2 MOTOR GIRO 2

SLEWING MOTOR 2
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
MG3 MOTOR GIRO 3

SLEWING MOTOR 3
MG4 MOTOR GIRO 4

SLEWING MOTOR 4
ML MOTOR LIMPIAPARABRISAS CABINA

CABIN WINDSCREEN-WIPER MOTOR
MP MOTOR PLUMIN
AUXILIARY JIB MOTOR
MREP MANDO MODO REPOSO GRÚA/PINZA

CRANE/CLAMP STOP MODE CONTROL
MT1 MAGNETOTERMICO PRIMARIO TRANSFORMADOR MANIOBRA T1

T1 OPERATING TRASFORMER 1st CIRCUIT BREAK
MT110 MAGNETOTERMICO UTILIZACIÓN 110V

110V UTILIZATION EDDY-CURRENT
MT15 MAGNETOTERMICO ENCHUFES 220V

CIRCUIT BRAKER FOR SOCKET 220V
MT2 MAGNETOTERMICO SECUNDARIO TRANSFORMADOR MANIOBRA T1

T1 OPERATING TRASFORMER 2nd CIRCUIT BREAK
MT230 MAGNETOTERMICO UTILIZACIÓN 230V

230V UTILIZATION EDDY-CURRENT
MTAL MAGNETOTERMICO BALIZA

BUOY EDDY-CURRENT
MTAN MAGNETOTERMICO ANEMOMETRO

WIND SPEED CONTROL EDDY-CURRENT
MTC MAGNETOTERMICO MOTOR CARRO

TROLLEY CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTCAB MAGNETOTERMICO FUERZA CABINA

CABIN MAINS SUPPLY CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTF MAGNETOTERMICO FRENOS

BRAKES CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTF1 MAGNETOTERMICO FOCO 1

BULB 1 BREAKER

BULB 2 BREAKER

BULB 3 BREAKER
MTFC MAGNETOTERMICO FRENO CARRO

TROLLEY BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTFE MAGNETOTERMICO FRENO ELEVACION

HOIST BRAKE THERMAL CUT-OUT
MTFG MAGNETOTERMICO FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTFO MAGNETOTERMICO GENERAL FOCOS

BREAKER GENERAL BULBS
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
MTG MAGNETOTERMICO GIRO

SLEWING CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTM MAGNETOTERMICO MONTAJE

MONTAGE CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTPA MAGNETOTERMICO PLUMIN AUXILIAR

AUXILIARY JIB CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTPC MAGNETOTERMICO PRIMARIO TRANSFORMADOR CABINA

CABIN TRANSFORMER 1st EDDY-CURRENT
MTPS MAGNETOTERMICO PRIMARIO TRANSFORMADOR SERVICIO

SERVICE TRANSFORMER 1st EDDY-CURRENT
MTRS MAGNETOTERMICO RELE REGURIDAD MARCHA/PARO

ON/OFF SAFETY RELAY EDDY-CURRENT
MTVC MAGNETOTERMICO VENTILACION Y/O CALEFACCION ARMARIO

CUPBOARD VENTILATION AND/OR HEATING CIRCUIT BRAKER
MTVE MAGNETOTERMICO VENTILADOR ELEVACION

HOIST VENTILATOR CUT-OUT
MVC MOTOR VENTILACION CABINA

CABIN VENTILATION MOTOR
MVE MOTOR VENTILACION ELEVACION

HOIST VENTILATION MOTOR
PAG POTENCIOMETRO GIRO ACELERACION

ACELERATION SLEWING POTENCIOMETER
PAPWL PULSADOR ANULACION POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT ANUL PUSH BOTTON
PBO PULSADOR BOCINA

HORN PUSH-BUTTON
PCFG CONTACTOR FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE CONTACTOR
PCHC100 PULSADOR CHEQUEO LIMITADOR DE CARGA 100%

100% LOAD LIMITER CHECK PUSH BOTTON
PDG POTENCIOMETRO GIRO DECELERACION

DECELERATION SLEWING POTENCIOMETER
PFG PULSADOR FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE PUSH-BUTTON
PL PILOTO LINEA
LINE PILOT
PM PULSADOR MARCHA
ON PUSH-BUTTON
PMC POTENCIOMETRO MANDO CARRO

TROLLEY CONTROL POTENTIOMETER
PME POTENCIOMETRO MANDO ELEVACION

HOIST CONTROL POTENTIOMETER
PP PULSADOR PARO
OFF PUSH-BUTTON
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
PPC PULSADOR PARO EN CAJA CARRO

TROLLEY TERMINAL BOX OFF PUSH-BUTTON
PPE PULSADOR PARO EN MECANISMO ELEVACION

HOISTING MECHANISM OFF PUSH-BUTTON
PRC PULSADOR RESET MANIOBRA CARRO

RESET TROLLEY OPERATION PUSH BUTTON
PRE PULSADOR RESET MANIOBRA ELEVACION

RESET HOIST OPERATION PUSH BUTTON
PRG PULSADOR RESET MANIOBRA GIRO

RESET SLEWING OPERATION PUSH BUTTON
PWL CONTACTOR POWER LIFT

POWER LIFT CONTACTOR
RAD RADIO CABINA

CABIN RADIO
RC RESISTENCIA CARRO
TROLLEY RESISTOR
RCF RELE CONTROL DE FASES

BALANCED PHASES CONTROL RELE
RE RESISTENCIA ELEVACION
HOIST RESISTOR
REP PULSADOR POSICIONAMIENTO ELEVACION

HOIST PLACING PUSH BUTTON
RFC RECTIFICADOR FRENO MOTOR CARRO

TROLLEY MOTOR BRAKE RECTIFIER
RFE RECTIFICADOR FRENO MOTOR ELEVACION

HOISTING MOTOR BRAKE RECTIFIER
RFG1 RECTIFICADOR FRENO MOTOR GIRO

SLEWING MOTOR BRAKE RECTIFIER
RFG2 RECTIFICADOR FRENO MOTOR GIRO

SLEWING MOTOR BRAKE RECTIFIER
RG CONTACTOR RALENTIZADOR GIRO

SLEWING EDDY-COURRANT CONTACTOR
RLBO RELE BOCINA

CLAXON RELAY
RLFC1 RELE FRENO CARRO

TROLLEY BRAKE RELAY
RLFC2 RELE FRENO CARRO

TROLLEY BRAKE RELAY
RLFE1 RELE AUXILIAR FRENO ELEVACION

HOISTING BRAKE AUXILIARY RELAY
RLFE2 RELE AUXILIAR FRENO ELEVACION

HOISTING BRAKE AUXILIARY RELAY
RLFG1 RELE FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE RELE
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
RLFG2 RELE FRENO GIRO

SLEWING BRAKE RELE
RLFO RELE FOCOS

BULB RELAY
RLME RELE AUXILIAR MOVIMIENTO ELEVACION

HOISTING MOVEMENT AUX. RELAY
RSM RELE SEGURIDAD MARCHA/PARO

ON/OFF SAFETY RELAY
RTCB RECTIFICADOR CABINA

CABIN RECTIFIER
SCEM CONTACTOR SOBRECARGA/VELOCIDAD ELEVACION

HOISTING SPEED/OVERLOAD CONTACTOR
STC RELE SONDA TERMICA MOTOR CARRO

THERMIC SONDE RELAY TROLLEY MOTOR
STCAB SONDA TERMICA CABINA

CABIN THERMICAL SONDE
STE RELE SONDA TERMICA MOTOR ELEVACION

THERMIC SONDE RELAY HOISTING MOTOR
STE2 SONDA TERMICA 2 MOTOR ELEVACION

HOIST MOTOR THERMAL LINE 2
STG1 SONDA TERMICA MOTOR GIRO 1

THERMAL LINE SLEWING MOTOR 1

SLEWING 2 MOTOR THERMICAL SONDE


T1 TRANSFORMADOR MANIOBRA O MANIOBRA/RALENTIZADOR GIRO

CONTROL LINE TRANSFORMER OR CONTROL LINE/EDDY-COURRANT T
T3 TRANSFORMADOR SERVICIO
SERVICE TRANSFORMER
T4 TRASFORMADOR CABINA
CABIN TRANSFORMER
TBO TEMPORIZADOR BOCINA

HOOTER TIMER
TCM TEMPORIZADOR CONTACTOR CARGA MOMENTO 100%

100% LOAD MOMENT CONTACTOR TIMER
TEE ENCODER MOTOR ELEVACION

HOIST MOTOR "ENCODER"
TEG ENCODER GIRO

SLEWING ENCODER
TF TRANSFORMADOR FOCOS
TRANSFORMER BULBS
NOMBRE DESCRIPCION
NAME DESCRIPTION
THR TERMOSTATO ARMARIO ELECTRICO

CUPBOARD THERMOSTAT
UAA UNIDAD AIRE ACONDICIONADO

EQUIPPED AIR SYSTEM
VA MOTOR VENTILACION ARMARIO

CUPBOARD VENTILATION MOTOR
VE CONTACTOR VENTILACION ELEVACION

HOIST VENTILATION CONTACTOR
X1 BORNERO ARMARIO CARRO/GIRO Ó MANIOBRA

GERENAL OR TROLLEY/SLEWING CUPBOARD TERMINAL-BOX
X5 BORNERO CAJA CARRO

TROLLEY TERMINAL-BOX
X52 BORNERO CAJA LIMITADORES CARGA

LOAD LIMITERS TERMINAL-BOX
X7 BORNERO CAJA ELEVACION

HOISTING TERMINAL-BOX
X9 BORNERO CABINA
CABIN TERMINAL-BOX
XF BORNERO CAJA LUCES AEREAS

JUNCTION BOX TERMINAL AERIAL LIGHT
CÓDIGO DE COLOR DE LOS CABLES
Tensión continua polo positivo +Vdc Azul
Tensión continua polo negativo -Vdc Blanco
Cables bajo tensión después de pulsar la seta de parada y emergencia o desconectar el interruptor IG Naranja
Tensión de control 48Vac Rojo
Ttensión de control 400Vac Negro
Cable de neutro en acometida Azul
Cable de tierra Verde-amarillo

Nota peligro: cualquier cable o dispositivo alimentado por un cable de color naranja puede estar bajo tensión tras
pulsar la seta de paro. Para desconectar la tensión de todos los dispositivos que forman parte de la grúa, se debe
seccionar la tensión desde la caja de acometida situada en la base de la torre.
NOTAS DE AYUDA AL MANTENIMIENTO ELÉCTRICO
La lista de notas a continuación no es exhaustiva y no sustituye la obligación de lectura del manual del fabricante:
-El mantenimiento eléctrico debe ser realizado exclusivamente por personal especialmente formado que haya
leído y tenga acceso al manual de la grúa.
-Se debe asegurar que el gruista recibe una copia de la instrucción“Utilización de Grúa” del manual.
-El funcionamiento de los equipos está garantizado en niveles de tensión de ±5% con respecto a la nominal.
-Los manuales de accesorios (radio MP3, aire acondicionado, etcétera) se envían en el interior de la cabina.
Enchufes e iluminación auxiliar para el mantenimiento eléctrico:

-Cada armario eléctrico dispone de iluminación para labores de mantenimiento y de un enchufe de 1A.
-La cabina incluye un enchufe de 110V/10A y otro de 230V/10A.
Bloqueo de movimientos
- Hay una seta de emergencia en el puesto de manejo de la grúa y en la proximidad de cada cabrestante que
interrumpe todos los movimientos cuando se pulsa.
-En grúas con traslación por vía, un interruptor en el interior del armariode traslación en la base de la grúa
permite bloquear el movimiento de la traslación.
Armario eléctrico:
-Cada armario eléctrico incluye resistencias de caldeo autoventiladas y ventiladores de extracción controlados por
dos termostatos independientes. Se deben ajustar para evitar condensación y acondicionar la temperatura interior.
-Hay un esquema eléctrico en cada armario eléctrico, en la cabina y en el manual del fabricante. Si el usuario o
propietario realiza modificaciones sobre los circuitos originales, debe actualizar los esquemas.
-En el interior del armario eléctrico se envía un conjunto de fusibles de repuesto.
-El interruptor general IG interrumpe la alimentación a todos los circuitos salvo el naranja. Consultar esquema.
Acometida
-Los filtros eléctricos garantizan los niveles de emisión y protección frente a interferencias electromagnéticas
conducidas según la normativa europea pero pueden provocar disparos intempestivos del diferencial. Una solución
es sustituir los interruptores diferenciales estándar por otros superinmunizados.
-En el manual se indican los datos necesarios para dimensionar la acometida.
Ajustes
-Para realizar el ajuste del sistema de indicadores y zonas prohibidas se debe consultar el manual.
-Para realizar el ajuste de limitadores se debe consultar el manual.
-Para realizar el ajuste de frenos se debe consultar el manual.
Opciones eléctricas y electrónicas (consultar con fábrica)

- Sistema electrónico de limitación de zonas.
-Sistema electrónico anticolisión.
-Cable de neutro adicional para la acometida.
-Transformador de acometida adaptador de tensiones inestables o no estándar.
-Equipo eléctrico auxiliar para rotar la parte giratoria durante el montaje.
-Sistema de protección contra sobretensiones y descargas atmosféricas.
CABLE COLOR CODE
Direct current, positive pole +V DC Blue
Direct current, negative pole -V DC White
Live cables after pressing the emergency stop button or turning the master switch off Orange
Control voltage, 48V AC Red
Control voltage, 400V AC Black
Neutral cable in connection Blue
Ground cable Green-yellow

Hazard note: cables or devices powered by an orange cable may still be live after pressing the emergency palm
button. To disconnect the power to all the devices that make up the crane, cut off the power from the connection
box located at the base of the tower.
NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE ASSISTANCE
The following list of notes is not exhaustive, and does not replace the user's obligation to read the manufacturer's
manual:
-Electrical maintenance is to be performed exclusively by specialized personnel that have received specific
training and that have read and can access the crane manual.
-Please ensure the crane operator receives a copy of the "Crane Operation" instructions of the manual.
-The operation of the equipment is guaranteed with voltage levels of ±5% in relation to the nominal voltage.
-The accessory manuals (MP3 radio, air-conditioning, etc.) are shipped inside the cabin.
Power outlets and auxiliary lighting for electrical maintenance:

-Every electrical cabinet has lighting for maintenance tasks and a 1A power outlet.
-The cabin includes one 110V/10A power outlet and one 230V/10A outlet.
Movement blocking:
- An emergency palm button is provided at the crane operator station and next to each winch. It stops all crane
movements when pressed.
-For rail-mounted cranes, a switch inside the traveling cabinet at the base of the crane can be used to block the
traveling movement.
Electrical enclosure:
-Every electrical cabinet has automatically ventilated heating elements and extractor fans controlled by two
independent thermostats.These must be adjusted to avoid condensation and to condition the internal temperature.
-A wiring diagram is provided on each electrical cabinet, in the cabin and in the manufacturer's manual. If the
user or the owner make any changes to the original circuits, they must update these diagrams.
-A set of spare fuses is shipped inside the electrical cabinet.
-The master switch MS cuts power to all circuits, except the orange colored ones. Please check the diagram.
Connection:
-Electrical filters guarantee the levels of emission and protection against conducted electromagnetic interference
according to European regulations, but may result in accidental tripping of the ground fault interrupter. One
solution consists of replacing standard ground fault interrupters for GFIs with over-current protection.
-The manual contains the information required for dimensioning the connection.
Adjustments:
-Please consult the manual before adjusting the system of indicators and danger zones.
-Please consult the manual before adjusting the limiters.
-Please consult the manual before adjusting the brakes.
Electrical and electronic options (consult the manufacturer):

-Electronic zone-limiting system.
-Electronic anti-collision system.
-Additional neutral cable for the connection.
-Connection transformer, unstable or non-standard voltage adapter.
-Auxiliary electrical equipment for rotating the rotating part during assembly.
-System for protecting against voltage surges and lighting strikes.
KABEL-FARBCODE
Gleichspannung, Pluspol +V DC Blau

Gleichspannung, Minuspol -V DC Weiß
Unter Spannung stehende Kabel nach Betätigen des Notausschalters oder nach Trennen des
Orange
Überspannungsschutzes
Steuerspannung 48 V AC Rot
Steuerspannung 400 V AC Schwarz
Neutralleiter Blau
Erdungskabel Grün-gelb
Warnhinweis:Kabel oder Geräte, die mit Spannung aus orangefarbenen Kabeln gespeist werden, können nach Betätigen des
Notausschalters unter Spannung stehen.Um alle zum Kran gehörenden Vorrichtungen von der Spannung zu trennen, muss die
Spannung an dem Schaltschrank unterbrochen werden, der sich an der Plattform des Turms befindet.
HINWEISE ZUR ELEKTRISCHEN WARTUNG

Die folgenden Hinweise sind nicht erschöpfend und ersetzen keinesfalls die Beachtung der Hinweise im Handbuch des
Herstellers.
- Die elektrische Wartung darf nur von eigens dafür ausgebildetem Personal durchgeführt werden, das das Bedienhandbuch des
Krans gelesen und Zugang dazu hat.
- Der Kranführer muss ein Exemplar des Kapitels "Bedienung des Krans" erhalten haben.
- Der Betrieb der Geräte ist bei einer Spannungsabweichung von ±5 % von der Nennspannung gewährleistet.
- Die Handbücher zum Zubehör (Radio, MP3, Klimaanlage usw.) liegen in der Führerkabine bei.
Steckdosen und Hilfsbeleuchtung für die elektrische Wartung:

- Jeder Schaltschrank enthält eine Steckdose mit 110 V/10 A und eine zweite mit 230 V/10 A.
- Die Führerkabine enthält eine Steckdose mit 110 V/10 A und eine zweite mit 230 V/10 A.
Arretierung:
- Ein Notausschalter befindet sich am Führerstand des Krans und in der Nähe jeder Seilwinde. Bei Betätigung werden alle
Bewegungen des Krans unterbrochen.
- Bei Schienenkranen befindet sich ein Schalter im Innern des Schienenschranks an der Kranbasis, mit dem man die
Bewegung auf den Schienen stoppen kann.
Schaltschrank:
- Jeder Schaltschrank enthält selbstkühlende Wärmeschutzschalter sowie Abluftventilatoren, die von zwei unabhängigen
Thermostaten gesteuert werden. Die Thermostate müssen entsprechend justiert werden, um Kondensation zu vermeiden und
um die Innentemperatur zu regeln.
- In jedem Schaltschrank, in der Führerkabine und im Handbuch des Herstellers befindet sich ein Schaltplan.Wenn der
Benutzer oder Eigentümer die Original-Schaltkreise verändert, müssen die Schaltpläne aktualisiert werden.
- Im Innenraum des Schaltschranks befindet sich ein Satz Ersatzsicherungen.
- Der Überspannungsschutz unterbricht die Spannungszufuhr für alle Stromkreise, mit Ausnahme des orangefarbenen. Siehe
Schaltplan.
Anschluss:
- Die elektrischen Filter gewährleisten in Übereinstimmung mit der europäischen Richtlinie eine Begrenzung der Emission von
elektromagnetischen Interferenzen sowie den entsprechenden Schutz davor. Es kann jedoch zu heftigem Auslösen des
Schutzschalters kommen. Eine Lösung liegt darin, konventionelle Schutzschalter durch Schutzschalter mit geringer
Empfindlichkeit zu ersetzen.
- Das Handbuch enthält die notwendigen Informationen, um einen entsprechenden Anschluss herzustellen.
Einstellungen:
- Einstellung der Kennlinien und der verbotenen Bereiche, siehe Handbuch.
- Einstellung der Überlastsicherung, siehe Handbuch.
- Einstellung der Bremsen, siehe Handbuch.
Elektrische und elektronische Einstellungen (mit dem Hersteller abstimmen):

- Elektronisches System zur Bereichsbegrenzung.
- Elektronischer Kollisionsschutz.
- Zusätzlicher Neutralleiter.
- Transformator zum Anpassen von instabilen oder von der Nennspannung abweichenden Spannungen.
- Elektrisches Hilfsmodul für das Drehen des Drehkreuzes während der Montage.
- System zum Schutz vor Überspannung und vor atmosphärischen Entladungen.
CODE COULEUR DES CÂBLES
Tension de courant continu, pôle positif +Vcc Bleu

Tension de courant continu, pôle négatif -Vcc Blanc
Câbles sous tension après pression du bouton d'arrêt d'urgence ou déconnexion de l'interrupteur
Orange
IG
Tension de commande 48 Vca Rouge
Tension de commande 400 Vca Noir
Câble à neutre pour raccordements électriques Bleu
Câble de terre Vert-Jaune
Mise en garde : tout câble ou dispositif alimenté par un câble de couleur orange peut être sous tension après pression du
bouton d'arrêt. Pour que tous les dispositifs de la grue soient dépourvus de tension, celle-ci doit être coupée depuis le boîtier de
raccordement situé au pied de la tour.
CONSIGNES D'AIDE À LA MAINTENANCE ÉLECTRIQUE

La liste des consignes ci-dessous n'est pas exhaustive et ne doit en aucun cas entraîner l'omission de la lecture obligatoire du
manuel du fabricant :
- La maintenance électrique doit être exclusivement réalisée par du personnel spécialement formé ayant lu le manuel de la grue
et pouvant y accéder pour toute consultation.
- Veiller à ce qu'une copie des instructions fournies dans la section « Utilisation de la grue » du manuel soit remise au grutier.
- Le fonctionnement des équipements est garanti à des niveaux de tension de ±5 % par rapport à la tension nominale.
- Les manuels relatifs aux accessoires (radio MP3, air conditionné, etc.) sont disponibles à l'intérieur de la cabine.
Prises et éclairage auxiliaire pour la maintenance électrique :

- Chaque armoire électrique est équipée d'un éclairage et d'une prise de 1 A pour la réalisation des opérations de maintenance.
- La cabine est quant à elle pourvue d'une prise de 110 V/10 A et d'une prise de 230 V/10 A.
Verrouillage des mouvements :

- Un bouton d'arrêt d'urgence situé dans le poste de commande de la grue et à proximité de chaque treuil permet de verrouiller
tous les mouvements de la grue lorsque celui-ci est enfoncé.
- Sur les grues à déplacement sur rail, un interrupteur situé à l'intérieur de l'armoire de déplacement se trouvant au pied de la
grue permet de verrouiller le mouvement de déplacement.
Armoire électrique :
- Chaque armoire électrique renferme des résistances chauffantes autoventilées ainsi que des ventilateurs d'aspiration
commandés par deux thermostats indépendants. Ces éléments doivent être réglés pour éviter toute condensation et réguler la
température intérieure.
- Un schéma électrique est disponible dans chaque armoire électrique, dans la cabine et dans le manuel du fabricant. En cas de
modifications apportées aux circuits d'origine par l'utilisateur ou le propriétaire, les schémas doivent être mis à jour.
- Un ensemble de fusibles de rechange est disponible à l'intérieur de l'armoire électrique.
- L'interrupteur général IG coupe l'alimentation de tous les circuits à l'exception des câbles de couleur orange. Se reporter au
schéma.
Raccordements électriques :
- Les filtres électriques garantissent les niveaux d'émission et de protection contre les interférences électromagnétiques
conduites conformément à la réglementation européenne. Ces derniers peuvent toutefois provoquer des déclenchements
intempestifs du disjoncteur différentiel. Pour remédier à ce problème, il est possible de remplacer les disjoncteurs différentiels
standard par des disjoncteurs super-immunisés.
- Les informations nécessaires au dimensionnement des raccordements électriques sont fournies dans le manuel.
Réglages :
- Consulter le manuel pour procéder au réglage du système d'indicateurs et des zones interdites.
- Consulter le manuel pour procéder au réglage des limiteurs.
- Consulter le manuel pour procéder au réglage des freins.
Options électriques et électroniques (consulter le site de fabrication) :

- Système électronique de limitation de zones.
- Système électronique anticollision.
- Câble à neutre supplémentaire pour les raccordements électriques.
- Transformateur de raccordement adaptateur de tensions instables ou non standard.
- Appareil électrique auxiliaire permettant de faire pivoter la partie rotative pendant le montage.
- Système de protection contre les surtensions et les décharges atmosphériques.
REPUESTOS CONJUNTO GENERAL 150 0066 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ENSEMBLE GENERAL 21LC
SPARE PARTS GENERAL ASSEMBLY
ERSATZTEILLISTE ALGEMEINESCHEMA 1407P10280
12 10
1, 3, 4 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
12

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ENSEMBLE GENERAL 21LC
ERSATZTEILLISTE ALGEMEINESCHEMA 1407P10280
Nº Referencia Designación Designation Designation Benennung P. / S.
1 160 0394 ARMARIO ELÉCTRICO ARMOIRE ELECTRIQ. CONTROL CABINET SCHALTSCHKRAN 111
2 160 0395 CONJ. MANGUERAS ENSEMBLE CABLES CABLES SET SATZ KABEL 119
3 160 0178 RESISTENCIA RESISTANCE RESISTENCE WIDERSTAND 125
4 160 0189 RESISTENCIA RESISTANCE RESISTENCE WIDERSTAND 127
5 160 0327 CABINA MANDO CABINE COMMANDE CABIN STEUERUNG 121
6 160 0315 CONJ. INDICADORES INDICATEURS CABIN CABIN INDICATORS KABINENANZEIGE 111
10 160 0246 ANEMOMETRO ANEMOMETRE ANEMOMETER WINDMESSER 111
11 160 0292 TRASLACION TRANSLATION TRAVELLING FAHRWERK 111
12 160 0330 PLUMÍN POTENCE AUX. JIB BALLASTIERKRAN 145

REPUESTOS ARMARIO ELÉCTRICO 160 0394 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ARMOIRE ELECTRIQ. 20495
SPARE PARTS CONTROL CABINET
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTSCHRANK -
1 / 5 Rev: A 13-22 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 4 / 160 / 231

Nº Referencia Designación Designation Designation Benennung Q

AB_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AB_2 CONT.A002 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ACC_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ACE_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ACE_2 CONT.A004 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AEL_1 1408P30845 ARMARIO CHAPA ARMOIRE VIDE CUBICLE METALLSCHRANK 1
AEL_2 1408P30846 BASTIDOR CHASSIS FRAME RAHMEN 1
AEL_4 LAMP.0100 LAMPARA LAMPE LAMP LAMPE 1
AEL_5 1407P70050 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
AEQ_1 AUTO.0002 AUTOMATA AIUTOMATE PLC SPS 1
AG_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AG_2 CONT.A023 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AG1_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AG1_2 CONT.A023 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AG1_3 CONT.A012 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AID_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AID_2 CONT.A002 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AID_3 CONT.A013 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ALCT_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ALCT_2 CONT.A001 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ALS_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
APB_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
APB_2 CONT.A024 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
APM_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AS_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
AS_2 CONT.A001 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
BO_1 CXON.0054 BOCINA KLAXON HORN HUPE 1
BOR_1 1407P35254 BORNERO BORNES TERMINAL KLEMME 1
BOR_2 GUIA.A001 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 2
BOR_3 GUIA.A002 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 4
BOR_4 BRNE.0108 BORNA BORNE TERMINAL KLEMME 1
BOR_6 1408P30661 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
BOR_7 BRNE.A130 BORNA BORNE TERMINAL KLEMME 500
CAD_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CAT_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CDFE_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CDFE_2 CONT.A016 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CFC_1 VDOR.ACU401-25 VARIADOR REGULAT. DE VITESSE SPEED REGULATOR GESCHWINDIGKEITSREG 1
CFE_1 VDOR.ACU401-43 VARIADOR REGULAT. DE VITESSE SPEED REGULATOR GESCHWINDIGKEITSREG 1
CFG_1 VDOR.ACU401-29 VARIADOR REGULAT. DE VITESSE SPEED REGULATOR GESCHWINDIGKEITSREG 1
CHL_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CHL_2 CONT.A001 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM_2 CONT.A016 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM_3 CONT.A012 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM1_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM1_2 CONT.A016 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CM2_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CMPWL_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CMPWL_2 CONT.A022 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CMPWL_3 CONT.A013 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ
COC_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
COC_2 CONT.A002 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CQ2_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1


CQ3_2 CONT.A001 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CQ4_2 CONT.A009 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CRCF_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
CRCF_2 CONT.A005 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
DG_1 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
DG_2 CONT.A021 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
E0_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
E0_2 CONT.A009 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
E11_1 TCTE.4003 ENCHUFE PRISE DE COURANT POWER SOCKET STECKER 1
E1C_1 CTOR.0024 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E1C_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E1C_5 SIRG.0001 SIRGA CABLE DE LEVAGE HOISTING CABLE HUBSEIL 1300
E1P_1 CTOR.0001-1 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2C_3 SIRG.0001 SIRGA CABLE DE LEVAGE HOISTING CABLE HUBSEIL 1300
E2E_1 CTOR.0001 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2E_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2P_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2R_1 CTOR.0025-3 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2R_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2S_1 CTOR.0001 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2S_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E41_1 CTOR.0024 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E41_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E8/1_1 TCTE.0102 ENCHUFE PRISE DE COURANT POWER SOCKET STECKER 1
E8/2_1 TCTE.0103 ENCHUFE PRISE DE COURANT POWER SOCKET STECKER 1
EFFI+_1 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
EFFI+_2 CONM.0001 INTERRUPTOR MAGN. DISJONCTEUR CIRCUIT BREAKER MAGNETSCHALTER 1
EFFI+_3 1408P30829-7 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
EL_1 CTOR.0022 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
EM1_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
EM1_2 CONT.A006 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FC_1 CONT.0501 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FCCR_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FCER_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FCFE_1 VDOR.A652 FILTRO FILTRE FILTER FILTER 1
FE_1 CONT.0902 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FE_2 CONT.A024 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FE1_1 CONT.0501 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FE1_2 CONT.A023 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1


FG_1 CONT.0902 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
FREE_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 3
FREE_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 3
FUE_1 PFUS.1202 PORTAFUSIBLE PORTE-FUSIBLE FUSE HOLDER SICHERUNGSTRÄGER 1
FUE_2 FBLE.1036 FUSIBLE FUSIBLE FUSE SICHERUNG 6
G_1 CONT.0611 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
G_2 CONT.A046 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
G2_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
G3_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
GD_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
GI_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
HR_1 RCIA.5016 RESISTENCIA RESISTANCE RESISTANCE WIDERSTAND 2
IAPWL_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
ID_1 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
ID_2 PULS.A008 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
ID_3 CONM.0010 CONMUTADOR COMMUTATEUR SWITCH UMSCHALTER 1
ID_4 1408P30829-6 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
IDLAR_1 INDF.0001 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
IG_1 INTE.3512 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
IG_2 INTE.A202 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
IG_3 INTE.A302 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
IG_4 INTE.A322 PORTAFUSIBLE PORTE-FUSIBLE FUSE HOLDER SICHERUNGSTRÄGER 1
IG_5 FBLE.1209 FUSIBLE FUSIBLE FUSE SICHERUNG 9
IG_6 FBLE.A001 FUSIBLE FUSIBLE FUSE SICHERUNG 1
IRG_1 CONM.0001 CONMUTADOR COMMUTATEUR SWITCH UMSCHALTER 1
IRG_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
IRG_3 1408P30829-2 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
MT1_1 INMT.0014 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MT2_2 INMT.A008 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTAN_1 INMT.1602 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTC_1 INMG.0022 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTC_2 INMT.A022 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTCAB_1 INMT.1410 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTFC_1 INMT.1503 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTFC_2 INMT.A008 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTFE_1 INMT.1516 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTFE_2 INMT.A008 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTFG_1 INMT.1503 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTFG_2 INMT.A008 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTG_1 INMT.0033 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTG_2 INMT.A024 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
MTPS_1 INMT.0043 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTRS_1 INMT.1602 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTVC_1 INMT.1516 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTVE_1 INMT.0020 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
MTVE_2 INMT.A022 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
PAG_1 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PAG_2 POTE.0001 POTENCIOMETRO POTENTIOMETRE POTENTIOMETER POTENTIOMETER 1
PAG_3 1408P30829-5 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PAPWL_1 PULS.0025 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PAPWL_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PAPWL_3 1408P30829-8 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PCFG_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1


PCHCM100_1 PULS.0025 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PCHCM100_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PCHCM100_3 PULS.A009 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PCT_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
PDG_1 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PDG_2 POTE.0001 POTENCIOMETRO POTENTIOMETRE POTENTIOMETER POTENTIOMETER 1
PDG_3 1408P30829-9 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PRC_1 PULS.0025 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRC_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PRC_3 PULS.A009 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRC_4 1408P30829-1 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PRE_1 PULS.0025 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRE_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PRE_3 PULS.A009 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRE_4 1408P30829-3 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PRG_1 PULS.0025 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRG_2 GUIA.A005 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
PRG_3 PULS.A009 PULSADOR BOUTON-POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
PRG_4 1408P30829-4 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1
PWL_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
PWL_2 CONT.A008 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
PWL_3 CONT.A005 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
RCF_1 RELE.1111 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RFC_1 RECT.1014 RECTIFICADOR REDRESSEUR RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTER 1
RFE_1 RECT.1015 RECTIFICADOR REDRESSEUR RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTER 1
RFG1_1 RECT.1014 RECTIFICADOR REDRESSEUR RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTER 1
RFG2_1 RECT.1014 RECTIFICADOR REDRESSEUR RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTER 1
RLFC1_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFC1_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFC2_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFC2_2_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFE1_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFE1_2 RLFE1_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFE2_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFE2_2RLFE1_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFG1_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFG1_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFG2_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLFG2_2_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLME_1 RELE.1114 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RLME_2 RELE.A006 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
RSM_1 RELE.5002 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
SCEM_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
STE_1 RELE.1105 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
T1_1 TDOR.1166E TRASFORMADOR TRANSFORMATEUR TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMATOR 1
T3_1 TDOR.5465E TRASFORMADOR TRANSFORMATEUR TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMATOR 1
TBO_1 RELE.0200 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
TCM_1 CONT.0512 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
TCM_2 CONT.A021 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
THR_1 TERM.0002 TERMOESTATO THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT 1
VA_1 VENT.1011 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER 4
VA_2 VENT.A001 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER 4
VA_3 VENT.A002 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER 2
VE_1 CONT.0501 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
VE_2 CONT.A025 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1

REPUESTOS CONJ. MANGUERAS 160 0395 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ENSEMBLE CABLES -
SPARE PARTS CABLES SET
ERSATZTEILLISTE SATZ KABEL 60581


CJC_1 1407P25022 CAJA DERIVACIÓN BOITE DERIVATION DISTRIBUTION BOX KRAFTVERTEILUNG 1
CJC_2 091205080035088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 4
CJC_3 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
CJC_4 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJC_5 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJE_1 1407P25066 CAJA DERIVACIÓN BOITE DERIVATION DISTRIBUTION BOX KRAFTVERTEILUNG 1
CJE_2 091205080035088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 4
CJE_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
CJE_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJE_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJL_1 1407P25068 CAJA DERIVACIÓN BOITE DERIVATION DISTRIBUTION BOX KRAFTVERTEILUNG 1
CJL_2 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 3
CJL_3 091205080060088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 1
CJL_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
CJL_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJL_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJLM_1 1407P25067 CAJA DERIVACIÓN BOITE DERIVATION DISTRIBUTION BOX KRAFTVERTEILUNG 1
CJLM_2 091205080035088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 4
CJLM_3 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
CJLM_4 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CJLM_5 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 4
CME_1 TRAS.0101 CAPTADOR CAPTEUR SENSOR GEBER 1
E1C_3 PNSA.0106 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E1P_2 PNSA.1004 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E2C_2 PNSA.0108 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E2E_3 PNSA.1005 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E2P_1E2/1_1 CTOR.2025-1 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2P_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2P_3 PNSA.1008 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E2R_1 CTOR.2025-3 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2R_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2R_3 PNSA.1008 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E2S_1 CTOR.2001 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
E2S_2 CTOR.A003 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
E2S_3 PNSA.1005 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E33_3 PNSA.0105 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E41_1 CTOR.2024-2 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1


E4E_3 PNSA.1005 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
E5_1 TCTE.0201 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
EL_1 CTOR.2022 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
EL_2 PNSA.0105 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LC_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LC_2 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LC_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LC_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LC_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LC_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LC2_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LC2_2 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LC2_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LC2_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LC2_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LC2_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LGI/LGD_1 LMCV.3142SL35 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LGI/LGD_2 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LGI/LGD_3LGI/LGD_3 PNSA.A002M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LGI/LGD_4 093306100016088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LGI/LGD_5 0934061008 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LGI/LGD_6 ARP6.4F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LGI/LGD_7 ARS6.4D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LM_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LM_2 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LM_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LM_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LM_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LM_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LM2_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LM2_2 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LM2_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LM2_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LM2_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LM2_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LMPWL_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LMPWL_2 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1


LMPWL_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LMPWL_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LMPWL_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LMPWL_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LPCD_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LPCD_2 LMMC.4002 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LPCD_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LPCD_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LPCD_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LPCD_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LPCT_1 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
LPCT_2 LMMC.4002 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
LPCT_3 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
LPCT_4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
LPCT_5 ARP5.3F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
LPCT_6 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
MANGUERAS_1 1407P61581 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL 1

REPUESTOS RESISTENCIA 160 0178 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE RESISTANCE
SPARE PARTS RESISTANCE
ERSATZTEILLISTE WIDERSTAND RCIA.2017

REPUESTOS RESISTENCIA 160 0178 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE RESISTANCE
SPARE PARTS RESISTANCE
ERSATZTEILLISTE WIDERSTAND RCIA.2017
1 RCIA.2017 RESISTENCIA RESISTANCE RESISTANCE WIDERSTAND 1

REPUESTOS ACOMETIDA 160 0189 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CONNENTION -
SPARE PARTS CONNENTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE VERBINDUNG 20302M
2
3
4
5

REPUESTOS ACOMETIDA 160 0189 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CONNENTION -
SPARE PARTS CONNENTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE VERBINDUNG 20302M

1 CAJA.0605 CAJA DERIVACIÓN BOITE DERIVATION DISTRIBUTION BOX KRAFTVERTEILUNG 1
2 INTE.3513 INTERRUPTOR INTERRUPTEUR SWITCH AUSSCHALTER 1
3 INTE.A202 MANETA MANETTE HANDLE SCHALTHEBEL 1
4 INTE.A302 CUBREBORNE COUVERCLE TERMINAL COVER KLEMMSCHUTZ 1
5 INTE.A322 CUBREBORNE COUVERCLE TERMINAL COVER KLEMMSCHUTZ 1

REPUESTOS CABINA MANDO 160 0327 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CABINE COMMANDE -
SPARE PARTS CABIN
ERSATZTEILLISTE STEUERKABINE 40073

REPUESTOS CABINA MANDO 160 0327 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CABINE COMMANDE -
SPARE PARTS CABIN
ERSATZTEILLISTE STEUERKABINE 40073

1 1408P30785 CABINA CHAPA CABINE CABIN KABINE 1
2 1407P70162 ASIENTO CON MAND. SIEGE DE CONTROLE CONTROL CABIN SEA SITZ MIT STEUERUN 1
3 1407P70050 ETIQUETA ETIQUETTE MARKING PLATE BESCHILDERUNG 1

REPUESTOS CABINA CHAPA 160 0299 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CABINE -
SPARE PARTS CABIN
ERSATZTEILLISTE KABINE 30785

REPUESTOS CABINA CHAPA 160 0299 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CABINE -
SPARE PARTS CABIN
ERSATZTEILLISTE KABINE 30785

1 1407P60461 CONJ. MANGUERAS ENSEMBLE CABLES CABLE SET KABELSATZ 1
2 CABI.0001 VIDRIO VITRE GLASS GLAS 2
7 CABI.0050 BRAZO LIMPIAPARA. BALAI ESSUIE-GLAC WINDSH. WIPER ARM SCHEIBENWISCHERAR 2
8 CABI.0055 LIMPIAPARABRISAS ESSUIE-GLACE WINDSHIELD WIPER SCHEIBENWISCHER 2
9 CABI.0060 MOTOR LIMPIAPARA. MOTEUR ESSUIE-GLA WIND.WIPER ENGINE SCHEIBENWIS.MOTOR 2
10 CABI.0151 CERRADURA SERRURE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SCHLOSS 1
11 CABI.0154 MANETA MANETTE HANDLE SCHALTHEBEL 1
12 CABI.0155 CERRADURA SERRURE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SCHLOSS 1
13 CABI.0201 PLAFON PLAFONNIER SOFFIT SOFFIT 1
14 CABI.0202 LAMPARA LAMPE LAMP LAMPE 2
15 CABI.0203 RADIO RADIO RADIO RADIO 1
16 CABI.0204 ALTAVOZ HAUT-PARLEUR SPEAKER LAUTSPRECHER 1
17 CABI.0205 ANTENA ANTENNE AERIAL ANTENNE 1
18 CABI.0206 FUENTE ALIMENTAC. SOURCE ALIMENTAT. POWER SUPPLY SPANNUNGSQUELLE 1
19 CABI.0801 AMORTIGUADOR AMORTISSEUR DAMPER DAEMPFER 1
20 CABI.0803 CALEFACCION CHAUFFAGE HEATER HEIZUNG 1
21 CABI.0804 EXTINTOR EXTINCTEUR EXTINGUISHER FEUERLÖSCHER 1
22 1407P70203 BASTIDOR CHASSIS FRAME RAHMEN 1

REPUESTOS ASIENTO CON MANDO 160 0300 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE SIEGE DE CONTROLE -
SPARE PARTS CONTROL CABIN SEA
ERSATZTEILLISTE SITZ MIT STEUERUN 70162



1 ASTO.0201 ASIENTO CABINA SIEGE CABINE CABIN SEAT KABINENSITZ 1
2 ASTO.A009 SONDA SONDE SENSOR SENSOR 1
5 ASTO.A104 TOMA CORRIENTE PRISE DE COURANT PLUG IN SOCKET STECKDOSE 1
6 ASTO.A004 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER 1
7 ASTO.A005 CALEFACCION CHAUFFAGE HEATER HEIZUNG 2
8 ASTO.A003 REJILLA GRILLE GRILL SCHUTZGITTER 2
9 PNSA.0103M20 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 6
10 ASTO.A007 REGLETERO BORNIER TERMINAL STRIP KLEMMLEISTE 1
11 ASTO.A015 TRASFORMADOR TRANSFORMATEUR TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMATOR 1
12 PNSA.0107M32 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 2
13 COMB.2023 COMBINADOR COMBINATEUR JOY-STICK MEISTERSCHALTER 1
14 COMB.2020 COMBINADOR COMBINATEUR JOY-STICK MEISTERSCHALTER 1
15 CONM.2001 CONMUTADOR COMMUTATEUR SWITCH UMSCHALTER 1
16 PILO.0305 PILOTO VOYANT LUMINEUX INDICATOR LAMP KONTROLLLEUCHTE 2
17 PILO.A305 PILOTO VOYANT LUMINEUX INDICATOR LAMP KONTROLLLEUCHTE 2
18 PILO.0304 PILOTO VOYANT LUMINEUX INDICATOR LAMP KONTROLLLEUCHTE 1
19 PILO.A304 PILOTO VOYANT LUMINEUX INDICATOR LAMP KONTROLLLEUCHTE 1
20 PULS.0022 PULSADOR POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 3
21 PULP.0001 PULSADOR POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
22 PULS.0111 PULSADOR POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
23 PULS.A007 MANETA MANETTE HANDLE SCHALTHEBEL 1
25 PULP.0002 PULSADOR POUSSOIR PUSHBUTTON TASTER 1
26 ASTO.A002 TERMOESTATO THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT 1
30 CTOR.2706 CONECTOR CONNECTEUR CONNECTOR STECKER 1
31 PNSA.0057 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 1
32 RCON.0016 REDUCCION REDUCTION REDUCER VERRINGERUNG 1

REPUESTOS CONJ. INDICADORES 160 0315 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE INDICATEURS CABIN -
SPARE PARTS CABIN INDICATORS
ERSATZTEILLISTE KABINENANZEIGE 70211

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE INDICATEURS CABIN -
ERSATZTEILLISTE KABINENANZEIGE 70211

1 1407P70211-01 CONJ. INDICADORES INDICATEURS CABIN CABIN INDICATORS KABINENANZEIGE 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE INDICATEU CABINE -
ERSATZTEILLISTE ANZEIGE KABINE 70188-3


1 1407P70188-3-2 CONJ. INDICADORES INDICATEURS CABIN CABIN INDICATORS KABINENANZEIGE 1







REPUESTOS ANEMÓMETRO 160 0246 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ANEMOMETRE -
SPARE PARTS ANEMOMETER
ERSATZTEILLISTE WINDMESSER 11366

REPUESTOS ANEMÓMETRO 160 0246 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ANEMOMETRE -
SPARE PARTS ANEMOMETER
ERSATZTEILLISTE WINDMESSER 11366

1 1407P11366 ANEMÓMETRO ANEMOMETRE ANEMOMETER WINDSMESSER 1


REPUESTOS TRASLACIÓN 160 0292 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TRANSLATION -
SPARE PARTS TRAVELLING
ERSATZTEILLISTE FAHRWERK 11268

REPUESTOS TRASLACIÓN 160 0292 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TRANSLATION -
ERSATZTEILLISTE FAHRWERK 11268

1 1407P20140 ARMARIO ELECTRICO ARMOIRE ELECTRIQ. CONTROL CABINET SCHALTSCHRANK 1
2 1407P60343 CONJ. MANGUERAS ENSEMBLE CABLES CABLE SET KABELSATZ 1
3 1407P00764 ESQUEMA ELECTRICO SCHEMA ELECTRIQUE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SCHALTBILD 1
4 1408P30523 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
5 1408P30707 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
6 PREF.0003 SUJETACABLE SERRE-CABLE CABLE HOLDER KABELKLEMME 4

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ARMOIRE ELECTRIQ. -
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTSCHRANK 20140

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ARMOIRE ELECTRIQ. -
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTSCHRANK 20140

1 ARMA.0004 ARMARIO CHAPA ARMOIRE VIDE CUBICLE METALLSCHRANK 1
2 1408P30421 EMBUDO PASACABLES PASSE-FIL CABLE BUSH KABELTRICHTER 1
4 CXON.0051 BOCINA KLAXON HORN HUPE 1
12 INMT.A024 CONTACTO AUXILIAR CONTACT AUXILIAIR AUXILIARY CONTACT HILFSKONTAKT 2
14 ARMA.A104 BASTIDOR CHASSIS FRAME RAHMEN 1
15 VDOR.1252 BLOQUE POTENCIA BLOC DE PUISSANCE POWER BLOCK LEISTUNGSBLOCK 2
16 TRTA.0201 TARJETA CONTROL CARTE DE CONTROLE CONTROL CARD KONTROLLKARTE 1
17 TDOR.1050E TRASFORMADOR TRANSFORMATEUR TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMATOR 1
18 INMT.0032 INTERRUPTOR MAGN. DISJONCTEUR CIRCUIT BREAKER MAGNETSCHALTER 1
23 RELE.1105 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1
24 CONT.0511 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 1
25 INVR.0602 INVERSOR CONTACTEUR INVER. REVERSING CONTACT UMSCHALTER 1
26 CONT.0501 CONTACTOR CONTACTEUR CONTACTOR SCHÜTZ 2
27 1407P35110 REGLETERO BORNIER TERMINAL STRIP KLEMMLEISTE 1
28 GUIA.A002 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 4
29 GUIA.A001 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 2
30 RTIE.0002 BORNA BORNE TERMINAL KLEMME 1
32 CLTA.0001 CANALETA GOULOTTE CABLES CABLE DUCT KABELKANAL 550
37 GUIA.0001 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 190
38 GUIA.0001 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 315
39 RELE.0200 RELE RELAIS RELAY RELAIS 1

REPUESTOS PLUMÍN AUXILIAR 160 0330 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE POTENCE -
SPARE PARTS AUX. JIB
ERSATZTEILLISTE BALLASTIERKRAN 11295

REPUESTOS PLUMÍN AUXILIAR 160 0330 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE POTENCE -
SPARE PARTS AUX. JIB
ERSATZTEILLISTE BALLASTIERKRAN 11295

1 1407P61357 MANGUERAS CABLES HOSES KABEL 1
2 GMIN.0051 GUARDAMOTOR PROTECTEUR MOTEUR MOTOR SHIELD MOTORSCHUTZ 1
3 084A05080020056 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2
4 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2
5 ARS5.3D6798A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 2
6 TCTE.2002 TOMA CORRIENTE PRISE DE COURANT PLUG IN SOCKET STECKDOSE 1
7 PNSA.0104 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE CABLE GLAND KABELVERSCHRAUB. 2
8 TRCA.0004 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 2

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
21LC290/18 t
INDEX -
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Introduction for the crane operator.........................................................................010 0001 IB A 5
Symbols..................................................................................................................010 0002 IB A 6
Notice boards / signs..............................................................................................010 0005 IB C 7
Advertising boards..................................................................................................010 0022 IB A 9
Technical data sheet...............................................................................................DS.1308.09 13
Load capacity.........................................................................................................020 0083 IB A 17
Load chart..............................................................................................................020 0008 IB A 18
Load chart..............................................................................................................020 0055 IB A 20
Mechanisms specifications.....................................................................................030 0222 IB A 22
Operating instructions............................................................................................040 0001 IB D 25
Rules for safety......................................................................................................050 0001 IB A 28
Daily checks...........................................................................................................060 0001 IB A 29
Commissioning instructions....................................................................................070 0001 IB A 30
Powerlift system.....................................................................................................080 0047 IB A 31
Crane control..........................................................................................................080 0037 IB C 32
Reeving change / trolley change............................................................................090 0003 IB B 52
Taking the crane out of service...............................................................................100 0001 IB B 62
Anemometer...........................................................................................................110 0004 IB B 65
Locking of the crane in a fixed position..................................................................120 0001 IB A 70
Stopping work because of wind..............................................................................130 0001 IB B 71
Load surface...........................................................................................................130 0002 IB B 72
Inspection and maintenance plan...........................................................................140 0001 IB A 74
Hand signals for crane operations..........................................................................150 0001 IB A 78
Slings & tackle........................................................................................................160 0001 IB A 82
Terminals and wire rope clamp...............................................................................160 0002 IB A 87
Terminology............................................................................................................170 0003 IB A 91

-
INTRODUCTION FOR THE CRANE OPERATOR -
This chapter contains useful information leading to a better crane performance under safety conditions.
Read this information thoroughly and bear in mind the recommendations and warnings given herein.
Crane operation is restricted to properly trained and qualified personnel, complying with the applicable regulations
and being conversant with the Safety Rules relative to his task. Being familiar with crane operation and operating
limits is crane operator responsibility.
Not complying with the Rules may cause accidents
Never operate the crane if the SAFETY SYSTEMS are not working or work incorrectly.
Be always alert toward anomalies in crane performance and immediately report them to the applicable
responsible person. The approach should be:
SAFETY FIRST
Later, additional information can be sent (i.e. technical maintenance bulletins) which must be read thoroughly
attaching it to the appropriate section.

-
SYMBOLS -
A NUMBER OF SYMBOL ARE USEDIN THIS MANUAL TO DESCRIBE DIFFERENT IMPORTANT

OPERATIONS.
Symbol Meaning
Information to be considered when erecting, dismantling and operating the crane.
Important information for accident prevention.
Information, instructions and banning for damage and accident prevention.
See maintenance instructions.Information contained in maintenance instructions.
Earthing.The part involved must be connected to ground in accordance with specified

instructions.
Voltage hazard.
Electric shock hazard.

Single reeving.

Single / double reeving.
Travelling.
Translation mechanism.
Hoisting.
Hoisting winch.
Trolley translation.
Trolley winch.
Slewing.
Slewing mechanism.
1 / 1 Rev.: A 04/03 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 5 / 010 / 6

21 LC
NOTICE BOARDS / SIGNS 1408P31029
CRANES MUST INCLUDE ALL WARNING NOTICE BOARDS / SIGNS STATED IN THIS DOCU-
MENT..

21 LC
NOTICE BOARDS / SIGNS 1408P31029
Nº Significado Nº Significado
11 Information Label
PROGRAMA/FILE
1 Electric Hazard
12 Danger Warning
Secondary Registration
2
Numberplate
13 Danger Warning
3 Operation Regulations
4 Operation Regulations 14 Information Label
Declaration of Conformity 15 Read manual

5
CE
21 LC ---
6 Nameplate
16 Load Diagram
7 220V Max. 15A Information Label

Earthing
17
8 Danger Warning 18 20 m Distance notice board
19 Danger Warning
9 230 V Information Label
10 Information Label 20 Information Label

21LC290
ADVERTISING BOARDS Zona C/25 años
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 SIGNS ON BASE
3 SIGNS ON TOWER
4 SIGNS ON SLEWING PART
5 SWINGING SIGNS

1 GENERAL
The posting of advertising signs on the crane increases the part exposed to the wind beyond the
amount considered in the calculations, which may cause problems in the stability of the crane.
Due to the interest in the posting of signs on the part of the owners, the possibilities have been
studied.
2 SIGNS ON BASE
If the crane is mounted on the base, the ballast area can be covered with advertising signs.
If the crane is embedded, an advertising sign of the same dimensions as the crane load sign can be
posted, both situated less than 20 meters high.
1m
3X_ nº of blocks x 0,5 m
5X_ nº of blocks x 0,3 m
2m 3X_ _ _= 4,5 m
5X_ _ _= 6,0 m
2m
Max. 20 m
Fig. 1
3 SIGNS ON TOWER
Whenever you wish to attach an advertising sign to the upper part of the tower, the self-stabilizing
height of the crane should be reduced.
The reduction of the self-stabilizing height is determined by the size of the sign and the tower version
to be mounted (See table).

21LC290
21LC290
Reduction 1 section Reduction 2 section Reduction 3 section
Versión 3X_72 9,0 m Toda la torre Entire tower
Versión 5X_72 7,5 m 19,5 m Entire tower
Versión ES72 7,5 m 19,5 m Entire tower
The posting of signs in other areas or of signs larger than those indicated by the manufacturer may cause
accidents.
In case the crane will be mounted on cross base the calculations for the corresponding foundation and
base ballast concrete blocks should be made based on the reaction forces like if the crane was mounted
at its maximum self standing height.
In case the crane will be mounted on fixing angels the calculations for the foundation should be made
based on the reaction forces like if the crane was mounted at its maximum self standing height.
L máx.
del cartel.
Fig. 2
4 SIGNS ON SLEWING PART
The posting of advertising signs on the slewing part of the crane is limited to the areas and sizes defined
in Fig. 3.
3,85 m
1 m
Cartel
Publicitario
Cartel
Publicitario
Fig. 3

21LC290
5 SWINGING SIGNS
Swinging signs suspended from the counterjib structure that allow that structure to move freely can be
always be posted provided that they do not exceed the characteristics indicated in the following:
4 x 1 m and 10 kg/m2 density
1m
4m
Fig. 4

LC 2100 21 LC 290 18 t
20,6 m 76,0 m
11,5 m 8,0 m 2,1 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 10,0 m 4,0 m 0,9 m
m
1,6 m 2,2 m
2,0 m
4,5 m
5,2 m
0,4 m
> 3,5 m
SM21-K2/S25
SM21-K2/S35
J2-10 = - 0,6 m
> 2,6 m
J4.1
BM215A FM215 AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A AM240 AM230 AM220 AM244
LC 2100
H
= H - 0,4 m)
(
AM282B AM272A AM262A AM250A
R m
2700 74
8000 40
7000 44
5300 50
4600 54
4000 60
3700 64
3000 70
kg
kg
2970
8800
7700
5830
5060
4400
4070
3300
4,5 m 6,0 m
CL XA XR XA XR ES EN 14439
(C/25)
DIAGRAMA DE CARGAS
Load chart / Diagramme de charges / Lastdiagramm / Diagramma di carico / Диаграмма распределения нагрузки
R (m)
14,3 15 20 25,8 25,9 30 34 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74,0 m
74
18000 17005 12165 9000 9000 7660 6660 5545 4980 4300 3930 3475 3220 2890 2700 kg
14,6 15 20 26,4 26,7 30 34 40 44 50 54 60 64 70,0 m
70
18000 17460 12500 9000 9000 7920 6890 5745 5155 4455 4075 3605 3340 3000 kg
15,7 20 25 28,4 29,1 34 40 44 50 54 60 64,0 m
64
18000 13585 10470 9000 9000 7580 6325 5685 4920 4505 3990 3700 kg
15,6 20 25 28,2 29,1 34 40 44 50 54 60,0 m
60
18000 13480 10390 9000 9000 7585 6335 5695 4930 4515 4000 kg
15,7 20 25 28,5 29,6 34 40 44 50 54,0 m
54
18000 13610 10500 9000 9000 7725 6450 5800 5020 4600 kg
16,3 20 25 29,7 31,0 34 40 44 50,0 m
50
18000 14255 11005 9000 9000 8140 6800 6115 5300 kg
18,2 20 25 30 33,1 35,0 40 44,0 m
44
18000 16115 12480 10100 9000 9000 7775 7000 kg (t)
18,5 20 25 30 33,8 35,9 40,0 m 18
40 =
18000 16490 12275 10345 9000 9000 8000 kg - 0,5
t
9
(m)
DIAGRAMA DE CARGAS POWERLIFT

Load chart PowerLift / Diagramme de charges PowerLift / Lastdiagramm PowerLift / Diagramma di carico PowerLift / Диаграмма распределения нагрузки PowerLift
R (m)
15,1 20 25 27,3 28,0 35 38 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74,0 m
74
18000 13010 10010 9000 9000 7030 6410 6050 5440 4700 4300 3810 3530 3180 2970 kg
15,5 20 25 28,1 28,9 35 38 40 44 50 54 60 64 70,0 m
70
18000 13400 10320 9000 9000 7280 6640 6280 5640 4880 4470 3960 3670 3300 kg
16,7 20 25 28 30,3 31,5 38 40 44 50 54 60 64,0 m
64
LC 2100
18000 14640 11300 9900 9000 9000 7330 6920 6230 5400 4940 4380 4070 kg
16,7 20 25 28 30,3 31,6 38 40 44 50 54 60,0 m
60
18000 14630 11290 9890 9000 9000 7350 6950 6250 5410 4960 4400 kg
16,9 20 25 28 30,6 32,2 38 40 44 50 54,0 m
54
18000 14800 11440 10010 9000 9000 7490 7080 6370 5520 5060 kg
17,6 20 25 28 31,9 33,8 38 40 44 50,0 m
50
18000 15530 12010 10520 9000 9000 7910 7470 6720 5830 kg
19,6 25 28 30 35,8 38,2 40 44,0 m
44 (t)
18000 13660 11990 11060 9000 9000 8550 7700 kg +10%
20,0 25 28 30 36,5 39,2 40,0 m 18
40 =
- 0,5
18000 14000 12290 11350 9000 9000 8800 kg t
9
(m)
MECANISMOS
EFU5-50-45 EFU6-65-45 EFU4-110-45

790 m
9
50 kW 790 m
9
65 kW * 790 m
9
110 kW *
6 6 6
3 3 3
1,7
1,1 0,7 t
t t
100
150
200
60
100
140
m/min
90
150
210
m/min m/min
38
224
30
150
54
228
18 18 18
12 12 12
6 6 6
3,4
2,2 1,3 t
t t
50
75
100
30
50
70
m/min
45
75
105
m/min m/min
19
112
15
75
27
114
21LC290/18 t
MECANISMOS
EFU6L-65-45 EFU4L-110-45
1280 m
9
65 kW * 1280 m
9
110 kW *
6 6
Para mecanismos de alta capacidad de cable consultar cargas. /
3 For mechanisms with high drum capacity, request loads. / Pour des 3
mécanismes avec une grande capacité de câble il faut consulter. 1,7
0,7 t
t / Für Hubmechanismen mit hoher Kabelkapazität, Lastdiagramm
100
150
200
m/min
90
150
210
m/min anfragen. / Gru con tamburo ad alta capacità di avvolgimento
38
224
54
228
fune, consultare il diagramma di carico. / Проконсультируйтесь о
нагрузках при механизмах с большей вместимостью кабля.
18 18
12 12
6 6
3,4
1,3 t
t
50
75
100
m/min
45
75
105
m/min
19
112
27
114
CFU-7.5
7,5 kW
GFU-7.5
3x 7,5 kW
TRA-7.5
2x 75 Nm
* TRA-7.5VC
2x 75 Nm
0 20 m/min 0 20 m/min
0 94 m/min 0 0,7 rpm
3XR72 5XR72 5XR72
POTENCIA / POWER / PUISSANCE / LEISTUNG / POTENZA / МОЩЬНОСТЬ Tensión de alimentación / Opcional /

Operating voltage / Tension Generador / Generator / Optional / En
Elevación / Hoist / Levage Carro / Trolley / Chariot Giro / Slewing / Rotation Traslación / Travel / Translation de service / Betriebsspannung Générateur / Generator / option / Kaufoption
/ Hub / Sollevamento / Тип / Laufkatze / Carrelo / / Drehbewegung / / Verfahrbewegung / / Tensione di alimentazione / Generatore / Генератор / Opzionale /
механизма (подъем) Грузовая тележка Rotazione / Поворот Traslazione / Ход Напряжение источника питания Опционально
EFU5-50-45 160 kVA
LC 2100
EFU6-65-45 180 kVA
*
400 V
EFU6L-65-45 CFU-7.5 (3x) GFU-7.5 (2x) TRA-7.5 3ph 180 kVA
EFU4-110-45 50 Hz 250 kVA
EFU4L-110-45 250 kVA

64,9 m nº Ref. h
63,1 m 1 S25 2,0 5,5
H h (m)
C/25
H
C/25
1
1 (m)
1
1
42,6 m 1
1
H 1
C/25
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1 En servicio / In operation / 3XR72...... 105 t
1 En service / In Betrieb / In
1,6 m 1 1,9 m 1 servizio / При работе 5XR72...... 107 t
1
Z máx.
Fuera de servicio / Out
Z Z PS5 of service / Hors service 3XR72........ 74 t
4,5 6,0 m
m / Ausser Betrieb / Fuori
3XA72 5XA72 servizio / В стационарном 5XR72...... 132 t
3XR72 5XR72 ES72 состоянии
21LC290/18 t
GRÚA ARRIOSTRADA GRÚA TREPADORA
Braced crane / Grue à entretoisement / Abgespannter Kran / Internal climbing crane / Grue avec cage de télescopage intérieure / Kran
Gru ancorata / Наращиваемый кран mit klettern im Gebäude / Gru in rampante in cavedio / Монтажная клеть
3XA72 5XA72 H C/25 h (m)

C A max 29,1 51,4
B max - 33,0 - 33,0 55,1 m
H 4x S25
C/25 C max 52,0 46,5 46,5 46,5 + TD23A
(m)
H max 81,1 108,6 97,9 130,9 + 4x D23A
nº Ref. h
+ CLD23A
B
ES72 1 S25 2,0 5,5
A max 49,6 2 TD23A 2,0 5,5
B max - 33,0 3 D23A 2,0 5,5
F1 18 CLD23A 2,0 3,1
C max 46,5 46,5
A A
H max 96,1 129,1
F2
PD3-2 CL42
Otras zonas de viento, alturas superiores, arriostramientos o trepado interno consultar / Other wind zones , additional hook heights, tie frames or internal climbing on request / Autres
zones de vent, des hauteurs supplémentaires, entretoisements où grues avec cage de télescopage intérieure, sur demande / Andere Windzonen, weitere Hakenhöhen, Abspannungen
zum Gebäude oder Klettern im Gebäude auf Anfrage / Per zone con velocità del vento particolari, altezze superiori, ancoraggi o rampante in cavedio, consultare il fabbricante / При
других ветренных зонах, при бóльшой высоте, привязках к зданию или наращивании крана внутри здания проконсультируйтесь с нами

98,9 m
96,8 m
H C/25
H
C/25
6
85,8 m 6
82,4 m 6
80,3 m H C/25 6
H C/25 6
74,8 m H C/25 6 6
LC 2100
6 6
69,3 m H C/25 6 6 6
6 6
65,6 m H C/25 6 6 6 6
H C/25 6 7
6 6 6 6 7
6 6 9
6 6 6 6 9
6 6 10
6 6 6 6 10
6 6 10
6 6 6 6 10
6 6 11
6 6 6 7 11
6 6 11
6 6 6 9 11
6 6 12
6 6 6 10 12
6 6 13
6 6 6 10 13
6 7 13
6 6 7 10 13
6 8 13
6 7 8 10 13
6 9 13
6 8 9 11 13
1,9 m 6 2,2 m 10 2,2 m 13
6 8 10 11 13
6,0 m Z 8,0 m Z 10,0 m Z PS5 PD3-2 PD4-2 PD5 PD6

5XA73 7XA63 10XA83 ES73 ES43 ES63 ES6A3 ES83
5XR73 7XR63 10XR83
nº Ref. h nº Ref. h nº Ref. h

h (m) 6 S35 2,5 5,5 9 TD34 2,5 5,5 12 TD36B 2,5 5,5
7 TD33A 2,5 5,5 10 D34 2,5 5,5 13 D36 2,5 5,5
8 D33 2,5 5,5 11 D35 2,5 5,5
(m)

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
Polígono Urbizkain
DS.1308.09 02/13 21LC290/18 t
E-31620 HUARTE-PAMPLONA.- SPAIN
-
LOAD CAPACITY -
Load diagrams shown on following pages are valid for cranes with height under hook of about 100 m.
Above this height it should take into consideration the weight of the additional hoisting cable, reducing
the load capacity of the crane according to the attached tables.
Reduction of loads
from 100 from 200 from 300 from 400 from 500 from 600
to 200 m to 300 m to 400 m to 500 m to 600 m to 700 m
21LC290/12 t SC 300 kg 600 kg 900 kg - - -

21LC400/12 t
21LC550/12 t DC 600 kg - - - - -

21LC400/18 t
21LC550/18 t
21LC660/18 t DC 600 kg 1200 kg 1800 kg - - -

21LC660/24 t
21LC750/24 t DC 880 kg 1760 kg 2640 kg - - -
SC 440 kg 880 kg 1320 kg 1760 kg 2200 kg 2640 kg

21LC660/36 t
21LC750/36 t
DC 1320 kg 2640 kg - - - -
SC 880 kg 1760 kg 2640 kg - - -

21LC660/48 t
21LC750/48 t
DC 1760 kg 3520 kg - - - -
The reduction of loads depends on the number of reevings and on the weight of the added hoisting ca-
ble. For medium heights under hook, the weight “P” of the added hoisting cable must be reduced from
suspended “Q” load on the crane.
Q Q
Rope Weight per
diameter meter of cable
(mm) (kg)
21LC/12 t
18 1,5 h >100 m
21LC/18 t
21LC/24 t
21LC/36 t 22 2,2
21LC/48 t
Q+P

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART -

trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
17 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
18 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
19 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
20 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
21 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
22 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
23 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
24 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
25 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
26 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8975
27 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8900 8610
28 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8550 8270
29 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8225 7950
30 9000 9000 9000 8865 8710 8705 7920 7660
31 9000 9000 9000 8550 8400 8395 7640 7385
32 9000 9000 8700 8255 8110 8105 7375 7125
33 9000 9000 8410 7980 7840 7835 7125 6885
34 9000 9000 8140 7725 7585 7580 6890 6660
35 9000 9000 7880 7480 7345 7340 6670 6445
36 8980 8725 7640 7250 7120 7115 6465 6245
37 8715 8470 7415 7035 6910 6900 6270 6055
38 8465 8225 7200 6830 6705 6700 6085 5880
39 8225 7995 6995 6635 6515 6510 5910 5710
40 8000 7775 6800 6450 6335 6325 5745 5545
41 7565 6615 6275 6160 6155 5585 5395
42 7370 6440 6110 6000 5990 5435 5250
43 7180 6275 5950 5840 5835 5295 5110
44 7000 6115 5800 5695 5685 5155 4980
45 5965 5655 5550 5545 5025 4850
46 5820 5515 5415 5405 4900 4730
47 5680 5385 5285 5275 4785 4615
48 5550 5260 5160 5150 4670 4505
49 5420 5135 5045 5035 4560 4400
50 5300 5020 4930 4920 4455 4300
51 4910 4820 4810 4355 4200
52 4800 4715 4705 4260 4110
53 4700 4610 4600 4165 4020
54 4600 4515 4505 4075 3930
55 4420 4410 3990 3850
56 4330 4320 3910 3770
57 4245 4235 3830 3690
58 4160 4150 3750 3615
59 4080 4070 3675 3545
60 4000 3990 3605 3475
61 3915 3535 3405
62 3840 3470 3340
63 3770 3400 3280
64 3700 3340 3220
65 3280 3160
66 3220 3100
67 3160 3045
68 3105 2990
69 3050 2940
70 3000 2890
71 2840
72 2790
73 2745
74 2700

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART -

Hook radius (m)
Distance
trolley(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
12 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000

13 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
14 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
15 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17460 17005
16 18000 18000 18000 17605 17435 17580 16205 15780
17 18000 18000 17180 16420 16260 16395 15105 14705
18 18000 18000 16090 15370 15220 15345 14135 13760
19 17480 17090 15120 14445 14300 14415 13270 12920
20 16490 16115 14255 13610 13480 13585 12500 12165
21 15600 15245 13475 12865 12735 12840 11805 11490
22 14790 14455 12770 12190 12065 12160 11180 10875
23 14060 13735 12130 11575 11455 11545 10610 10320
24 13390 13080 11545 11010 10900 10985 10090 9810
25 12775 12480 11005 10500 10390 10470 9610 9345
26 12210 11930 10515 10025 9925 9995 9170 8920
27 11690 11420 10060 9590 9490 9560 8765 8525
28 11210 10945 9635 9185 9090 9155 8390 8155
29 10760 10505 9245 8810 8720 8780 8045 7815
30 10345 10100 8880 8460 8370 8430 7720 7500
31 9955 9720 8540 8135 8050 8105 7415 7205
32 9590 9360 8220 7830 7745 7800 7135 6930
33 9250 9030 7925 7545 7465 7515 6870 6670
34 8930 8715 7645 7275 7195 7245 6620 6430
35 8630 8420 7380 7020 6945 6990 6385 6200
36 8345 8140 7130 6785 6710 6755 6165 5985
37 8075 7880 6895 6560 6485 6530 5955 5780
38 7820 7630 6675 6345 6275 6315 5760 5585
39,3 7500 7315 6395 6075 6010 6045 5510 5345
41 6960 6075 5770 5705 5740 5225 5065
42 6755 5895 5600 5535 5565 5065 4910
43,3 6500 5665 5380 5315 5345 4860 4710
45 5405 5125 5070 5095 4630 4485
46 5255 4985 4925 4950 4495 4355
47 5110 4845 4790 4815 4370 4230
48 4975 4715 4660 4685 4245 4110
49,3 4800 4550 4495 4515 4090 3960
51 4355 4305 4325 3910 3785
52 4245 4195 4210 3810 3685
53,3 4100 4050 4070 3675 3555
55 3885 3905 3520 3405
56 3795 3805 3435 3320
57 3700 3715 3350 3235
58 3615 3625 3265 3155
59,3 3500 3510 3160 3050
61 3380 3035 2930
62 3300 2965 2860
63,3 3200 2870 2770
65 2760 2660
66 2700 2600
67 2635 2540
68 2575 2485
69,3 2500 2405
71 2320
72 2265
73,3 2200

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART PwL
(t)
+10%
(m)

trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
21 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
22 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
23 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
24 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
25 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000
26 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8975
27 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8900 8610
28 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8550 8270
29 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 8225 7950
30 9000 9000 9000 8865 8710 8705 7920 7660
31 9000 9000 9000 8550 8400 8395 7640 7385
32 9000 9000 8700 8255 8110 8105 7375 7125
33 9000 9000 8410 7980 7840 7835 7125 6885
34 9000 9000 8140 7725 7585 7580 6890 6660
35 9000 9000 7880 7480 7345 7340 6670 6445
36 8980 8725 7640 7250 7120 7115 6465 6245
37 8715 8470 7415 7035 6910 6900 6270 6055
38 8465 8225 7200 6830 6705 6700 6085 5880
39 8225 7995 6995 6635 6515 6510 5910 5710
40 8000 7775 6800 6450 6335 6325 5745 5545
41 7565 6615 6275 6160 6155 5585 5395
42 7370 6440 6110 6000 5990 5435 5250
43 7180 6275 5950 5840 5835 5295 5110
44 7000 6115 5800 5695 5685 5155 4980
45 5965 5655 5550 5545 5025 4850
46 5820 5515 5415 5405 4900 4730
47 5680 5385 5285 5275 4785 4615
48 5550 5260 5160 5150 4670 4505
49 5420 5135 5045 5035 4560 4400
50 5300 5020 4930 4920 4455 4300
51 4910 4820 4810 4355 4200
52 4800 4715 4705 4260 4110
53 4700 4610 4600 4165 4020
54 4600 4515 4505 4075 3930
55 4420 4410 3990 3850
56 4330 4320 3910 3770
57 4245 4235 3830 3690
58 4160 4150 3750 3615
59 4080 4070 3675 3545
60 4000 3990 3605 3475
61 3915 3535 3405
62 3840 3470 3340
63 3770 3400 3280
64 3700 3340 3220
65 3280 3160
66 3220 3100
67 3160 3045
68 3105 2990
69 3050 2940
70 3000 2890
71 2840
72 2790
73 2745
74 2700

21LC290/18 t
LOAD CHART PwL
(t)
+10%

(m)

trolley
(m) 40 44 50 54 60 64 70 74
12 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
13 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
14 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
15 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 17460 17005
16 18000 18000 18000 17605 17435 17580 16205 15780
17 18000 18000 17180 16420 16260 16395 15105 14705
18 18000 18000 16090 15370 15220 15345 14135 13760
19 17480 17090 15120 14445 14300 14415 13270 12920
20 16490 16115 14255 13610 13480 13585 12500 12165
21 15600 15245 13475 12865 12735 12840 11805 11490
22 14790 14455 12770 12190 12065 12160 11180 10875
23 14060 13735 12130 11575 11455 11545 10610 10320
24 13390 13080 11545 11010 10900 10985 10090 9810
25 12775 12480 11005 10500 10390 10470 9610 9345
26 12210 11930 10515 10025 9925 9995 9170 8920
27 11690 11420 10060 9590 9490 9560 8765 8525
28 11210 10945 9635 9185 9090 9155 8390 8155
29 10760 10505 9245 8810 8720 8780 8045 7815
30 10345 10100 8880 8460 8370 8430 7720 7500
31 9955 9720 8540 8135 8050 8105 7415 7205
32 9590 9360 8220 7830 7745 7800 7135 6930
33 9250 9030 7925 7545 7465 7515 6870 6670
34 8930 8715 7645 7275 7195 7245 6620 6430
35 8630 8420 7380 7020 6945 6990 6385 6200
36 8345 8140 7130 6785 6710 6755 6165 5985
37 8075 7880 6895 6560 6485 6530 5955 5780
38 7820 7630 6675 6345 6275 6315 5760 5585
39,3 7500 7315 6395 6075 6010 6045 5510 5345
41 6960 6075 5770 5705 5740 5225 5065
42 6755 5895 5600 5535 5565 5065 4910
43,3 6500 5665 5380 5315 5345 4860 4710
45 5405 5125 5070 5095 4630 4485
46 5255 4985 4925 4950 4495 4355
47 5110 4845 4790 4815 4370 4230
48 4975 4715 4660 4685 4245 4110
49,3 4800 4550 4495 4515 4090 3960
51 4355 4305 4325 3910 3785
52 4245 4195 4210 3810 3685
53,3 4100 4050 4070 3675 3555
55 3885 3905 3520 3405
56 3795 3805 3435 3320
57 3700 3715 3350 3235
58 3615 3625 3265 3155
59,3 3500 3510 3160 3050
61 3380 3035 2930
62 3300 2965 2860
63,3 3200 2870 2770
65 2760 2660
66 2700 2600
67 2635 2540
68 2575 2485
69,3 2500 2405
71 2320
72 2265
73,3 2200

21LC290/18 t
HOISTING Mechanisme type............EFU5-50-45-00
Motor
9 Make............................... LEROY SOMMER
Power ................................................ 50 kW
6 Brake
Type..............................................FCPL60H
3 Model........................................ FCPL60-2H
1,1 Drum
t Drum capacity................... 790 m in 3 layers
60
100
140
m/min
30
150
Máx. h.u.h. SC................................... 395 m
Máx. h.u.h. DC................................... 197 m
Operating voltage
18 Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
12
6
2,2
t
30
50
70
m/min
15
75
TROLLEY Mechanisme type............CFU-7.5-10
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power .................................................... 7,5 kW
(t) Brake
18 Type............................................... BFK 458
Model........................................ BFK 458.16
Operating voltage
9 Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
0 47 94 (m/min)
SLEWING Mechanisme type............(1x) GFU-7.5-07

(2x) GFU-7.5-08
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ..............................................7,5 kgm
-1 Brake
min 0 0,7 Type........................................................ GR
Model................................................... GR 7
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz

21LC290/18 t
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................2 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................ MS
Model............................................... 110 MS
Operating voltage
0 20 (m/min) Voltage.....................................400 V 50 Hz
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................4 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................... S
Model.................................................. 100 S
Operating voltage
TRAVELLING (6,0 m, VC) Mechanisme type TRA-7.5-05
Motor
Make............................................. BESOZZI
Power ........................................4 x 7,5 kgm
Brake
m/min 0 20 Type........................................................... S
Model.................................................. 100 S
Operating voltage

21LC290/18 t
AUXILIAR JIB Mechanisme type ES1-2.2-7.5-01
Motor
(t) Make.................................. LEROY SOMER
1,5 Power ............................................... 2,2 kW
I Brake
Type......................................................FCO
SR 8 m/min
Model.............................................FCO-100
1,5 t
Drum
0 8 Drum capacity................... 160 m in 8 layers
(m/min) Máx. h.u.h. .......................................... 80 m
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
CAGE HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT (J2-10) Mechanisme type GH20HI06
Motor
Make..................................................... ABB
Power ................................................ 20 CV
Operating voltage
Voltage............................400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz
Pump
Make..............................................PARKER
Model.....................................PAF-20RK-3C

-
CRANE OPERATION -
1. Only duly qualified personnel complying with current Regulations in force and familiar with Safety Rules
relative to his task is authorised to operate the crane.
2. Never work on safety devices in order to override or modify their calibration out of range. (Fig. 1)
3. Never use a load limiter as normal stopping device.

These devices are not load measuring scales but safety elements. (Fig. 1)
4. Never operate the crane before all protections and safety devices are installed and in correct working
order.
5. If changes in crane setup are introduced (jib length, height, etc), make sure that load limiters and limit
switches are readjusted for the new setup. (Fig. 2)
- LIMITERS ARENOT SCALES. - READJUST LIMITERS.

- LIMITERS ARESAFETY ELEMENTS.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
6. No unauthorised persons may have access to the crane.
7. Transporting persons is forbidden (Fig. 3)
As a last alternative to reach areas not accessible by other means the tower crane may be used to raise
and lower personnel to that area, provided the following criteria is met.
The device that will carry the personnel being transported shall be manufactured and approved for that
purpose, and all procedures related to the crane operation and the transportation of personnel shall be
in accordance with all Local, State and Government standards.
8. Loads shall not be handled over persons or transit areas (Fig. 4)
Fig. 3 Fig. 4

-
CRANE OPERATION -
9. The following operations affecting crane stability are forbidden:

- Sudden manoeuvres causing the load and the structure to swing (Fig. 5)
- Side pulling of the load (Fig. 6)
- Lifting loads above specified capacity
- Drawing out objects firmly attached to the floor. Care shall be taken when ice formation is likely, when
the object has been in the same position for long, or when it is hooked or tangled to other objects (i.e.
concrete reinforcing bar bundles) (Fig 6)
- Dragging loads over the floor (Fig 7)
- Adding loads onto suspended loads
10. Do not rest the hook on he load or any other surface as lifting cables must never be loose.
11. If during a lifting operation the steel cables become loose, the operation must be interrupted until
the cause of loosening is found and check the proper winding of the cable and that it is not out of
pulleys or guides.
12. The emergency stop should not be used for stopping during normal operations.
In case of repeated emergency stops within a short period of time, the brakes should be checked imme-
diately by qualified personnel, since they may be adversely affected and lose their braking power and
load-retaining capabilities.
13. If the work is interrupted, never leave loads in suspension or the crane running.
14 Load slinging must be done by qualified personnel.

Never lift any load if not properly tied up and the ready signal has been given.
15. The operator must have a perfect view of the working area and the load (Fig 8)
16 When lack of view is due to poor light, floodlights covering the full working area shall be used.
17. A signal man must direct the operation if lack of view is due to physical obstacles. (Fig 9)
18 Signals given by the signal man must be based on specific systems (national standards, if any, shall
be used) (Fig 10)

-
CRANE OPERATION -
19. When the crane is operated from the cabin, visibility conditions must be maintained by window
cleaning avoiding any view limiting objects.
Keep the wipers in good condition.
Cleaning of cabin windows must be done by using exclusively thos e accessories enabling it with no
need for going outside passages or access platforms to the cabin.
20 Maximum operating wind velocity is 72 km/h

When wind velocity is near 45 km/h, gusts to 72 km/h are possible.
In order to cease the activity in time, the time required to bring the crane into out of service condition
must be born in mind.
21 The crane operator must be kept informed about the existing wind velocity.
Anemometers give this information and are very useful in windy areas.
22 As a general rule, work must cease if wind velocity makes handling loads difficult with hazard to
persons.
23 Make sure there are no hazards to persons prior to starting the crane (See checks prior to
commissioning)
24 Before work commencement, the operator must be familiar with condition existing at the site such as
main obstacles, traffic areas, interferences, etc.
25 Crane travelling, when required, must not be used in conjunction with any other movement and then,
the jib and counterjib must be placed in the direction of the track.
26 Every day check for damage or visible defects.

If a malfunction is found, crane operation must be interrupted until said malfunction is repaired and
permission from the responsible person is obtained.
27 Make sure that safety signs and warnings are in good condition and in the right place.
28 Keep access and working platforms in good condition and free from tools or objects that can fall down.
29 Follow all regulations in force at the work location
30 Use personal protection equipment required by the regulations

-
RULES FOR SAFETY -
Instructions in this section are given for complementary guidance; therefore they do not replace current
safety regulations in force, national and international laws, local regulations or of the insurance compa-
nies.
1 Carry out standard inspections and specific inspections prior to start up and after major crane modifica-
tions.
2 Periodic inspections must be carried out by qualified personnel at standard frequencies.
3 Inspection reports must be recorded and duly documented.
4 Crane documents (Instructions Manual, certificates, records, etc.) must be kept at the crane in an acces-
sible place.
5 All personnel involved with crane erection, dismantling, operation and maintenance must be conversant
with the instructions given in this Manual. Should the information contained in any paragraph be incom-
plete or confusing, applicable clarification shall be requested before carrying out any action.
6 The crane must be free from permanent deformations, fractures, cracks or other defects affecting its-
safety.
7 Foreign elements not being part of the crane are not allowed provided they have not been authorised by
the manufacturer.
8 Personnel appointed for crane operation (crane operators) must have appropriate qualifications and be
conversant with the instructions and specific features of the crane being operated.
9 Before beginning crane operation, the crane operator must proceed with all the checks mentioned in this
Manual for commissioning stage.
10 When crane work has been finalised, the operator shall follow the instructions for taking the crane out of
service. Thus:
ENABLING FREE SLEWING IS OF VITAL IMPORTANCE
11 The crane operator must know the wind conditions to be able to discontinue crane work if necessary.
For a direct knowledge of the real wind velocity, the provision of an anemometer at the site is advisa-
ble.

-
CHECKS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING -
0 CONTENTS

1 POWER SUPPLY
2 CRANE TRACK
3 CLEARANCES
4 BASE BALLAST AND OVERHEAD COUNTERWEIGHTS
5 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
6 BARE GEARS
7 STEEL CABLES AND PULLEYS
8 MAINTENANCE
1 POWER SUPPLY
Make sure that power supply source is adequate for the crane and that fluctuations are less than +-5%
of rated value. See chapter Electrical Installation.
2 CRANE TRACK
Check that rails are in good condition and correctly mounted and the track is free from foreign objects.
Check that rail ties are in good condition and that end of track bumpers are correctly placed.
3 CLEARANCE
Check that the crane can move free from obstacles keeping minimum safe clearances between the crane
or the load and possible obstacles (at least 0,5 m).In case electric lines are present, check that the safety
distance is in accordance with the line voltage.
4 BASE BALLAST AND OVERHEAD COUNTERWEIGHTS

Check that base ballast quantity and block fastening are correct
5 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
If lightning arresters are installed check that the structure earthing connection is properly made.
6 BARE GEARS
Check that bare gears are properly greased
7 STEEL CABLES AND PULLEYS

Check position of cables through pulleys, look for damage and check proper greasing of cables, as well
as proper cable winding on drums.
8 MAINTENANCE
Check that all required maintenance operations have been carried out.

-
COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS -
1 Check that crane movements are obstruction-free
2 Put main switch at crane foot to position I
3 Lift the stop pushbutton on the crane controls
4 Press the start pushbutton
Crane siren will sound meaning that the crane is free slewing
5 Check the operation of crane siren by pressing the pushbutton on the crane controls
6 Check that crane controls operate properly.

Joy-sticks or pushbuttons come back to zero when released, stop the movement, and are in good working
order.
7 Check that all movements and brakes work properly.
If any crane malfunction is detected, stop the crane (pressing the stop button) and call for service.
8 Check the operation of the stop button.

No movement may be possible with the button pressed
9 Operate the crane in accordance with instructions in document “CRANE CONTROL” in this chapter

-
POWERLIFT SYSTEM -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 OPERATION
1 DESCRIPTION
The PowerLift system improves the load diagram by 10% at reduced speeds.
With this system, the crane can move the nominal load shown in the diagram over greater distances.
This system will not allow the crane to have more than the maximum load capacity. What it does allow
for is a 10% increase in the nominal load range that appears in the load diagram, up to the maximum
load limit shown in the data sheet.
The PowerLift system is a momentum control and limiting method which, by automatically reducing the trolley
and elevation speed, gives the crane the potential of achieving up to 10% more load for jobs that require it.
Example: The 21LC400/18 t, with an 80 metre jib, can load 18,000 kg over a jib length of up to 16.6 metres.
Thanks to the PowerLift system, it can load those same 18,000 kg over a span of approximately up to 18 metres.
In addition, if this crane has a jib-end load of 3,000 kg, with the PowerLift system it can load 3,300 kg.
2 OPERATION
The PowerLift system is automatic and not at all difficult to use:
- When a load reaches its maximum standard range, the trolley and elevation movements are automatically
interrupted, activating the momentum limiting red pilot light situated in the operator's position inside the
cab.
- After a few seconds, in which the oscillation of the load is dampened, a blue pilot light comes on inside the
cab and trolley and elevation movements are authorised again, limiting the elevation speed to values of
between 20 and 30 metres per minute. The trolley can advance at a reduced speed a few more metres.
Having achieved this additional range, the crane limits movements once again and the momentum limiting
red pilot light comes on again in the cab.
To benefit from the advantages of this new system, the crane's installation engineer must adjust the crane's
capacity limiters differently to their previous settings.
The instructions and all the necessary information for achieving this are available in the crane's instruc-
tion manual.
1/1 Rev: A 13/17 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S.A. Approved 5 / 080 / 31

21LC/18 t
CRANE CONTROLS EFU5-50-45
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 CONTROL PANEL
3 LEFT CONTROL
4 RIGHT CONTROL
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
Stop operating the crane and put it out of service if the following is observed while driving the crane:
- When there is a malfunction of any movement or movement retaining brakes
- Non-activation of the end stops at the movement limits.
- Loads greater than authorised can be lifted.
In case of repeated emergency stops in a short time, have the brakes immediately reviewed by qualified
staff, as they may be affected and braking and load retention performance may be lost.
In periods with freezing temperatures, ensure that the crane's mobile components (brakes, crown,
collector, etc.) are not locked up by ice formation. In these cases, the first operating manoeuvres should
be done with care
Crane operation should be stopped when the wind speed makes it dangerous for people to handle the
loads. See documents “Stopping work due to wind” and "Anemometer - Wind speed indicator / alarm"
in this chapter of the manual.
When the crane is switched off, the wind indicator / alarm system is not operational.
In case the crane is disconnected, it should be placed out-of-service (including wind protection).
When the crane is unsupervised, it should be out-of-service. Take into account that the radiocontrols
automatically disconnect the crane when it is not used for some time.
The crane driver must be aware of the loads they are handling and the crane's load capacity, which must
not be exceeded.
Load and momentum limiters should not be used as a working system, as these are safety elements that
should not usually be activated.
Movements must stop before reaching the movement limits. The end stops are safety elements, and
should not usually be used for stopping movement.
The use of several portable radiocontrols in the same working area can lead the crane operator not
knowing which machine they are controlling with the radiocontrol used, with the consequent risk.
If the crane operator detects this risk, they should warn others about it.
It is the operator's responsibility to have the means for ensuring that no confusion occurs, for instance,
by a radiocontrol marking and identification system so that the crane operator can distinguish without
error which radiocontrol controls which crane.
It is the operator's responsibility to have the means and establish the safety procedures so that when the
radiocontrols and/or telecontrols are not working or being used, they are removed from the work area to
prevent anyone from believing that their emergency stop device is active.
Moreover, the operator must set up safety procedures to ensure that a radiocontrol or telecontrol is NOT
used. It is recommended to keep them under lock and key.

21LC/18 t
If the crane is fitted with radiocontrol, it includes a factory-fitted electric light beacon, connected to the
top cabinet, this beacon has a magnetic fastening system and a steel cable with a safety spring hook to
fasten it and secure it to the crane's structure.
The crane operator must fit the beacon in a place where it is visible to all people working close to the
crane.
This beacon has different coloured lamps:
- Yellow lamp:
Fixed light warning when the crane has exceeded 90% of its momentum capacity.
- Green lamp:
Fixed light warning when the radio control receiver of the crane is on.
Both warnings are enabled when the power supply switches on the base of the crane and those of the
top cabinet are in the ON position, at the same time as the crane is in the ON state in the control.
2 CONTROL PANEL
2
9 24
12
16
15
14
18
13
8 4
11
23
7
5
6
17
10
Left control Right control

21LC/18 t
3 LEFT CONTROL
Pushbuttons
6 Slewing brake pushbutton
Cancels the delay in the electromechanical brake application of the slewing motor.
Under normal conditions, once the joystick is brought to zero setting, the jib movement will be
brought to rest through the motor braking action in a progressive manner. The electromechanical
brake is a park brake and acts subsequently.
Under certain conditions with strong winds, the jib must be locked after the movement stops,
using this pushbutton.
7 Wind protection light button

With button, the slewing motor brakes are unlocked. For its use, see the instruction "WIND
PROTECTION" in Use and Maintenance.
8 Limiter cancellation switch.

This is a three-position switch with return to the central position.
In central position: 0 No action.
In left position: Overrides the hook up limiter to allow for reeving

change.
With this pushbutton activated, the trolley can only
be used at low speed.
In right position: Overrides the trolley backwards limiter to allow for

reeving change to be performed.
With this pushbutton activated, the trolley can only
be used at low speed.
During the reeving change operation and once the trolley backwards and hook up
limitations have been surpassed, depending on the position of the trolley and the
hook, some of the movements: backwards or forwards trolley and up or down hoisting
may be hindered as the reeving change manoeuvre was started and was not properly
performed.
9 Cabin wind shield wiper control switch

- Left position: Wind shield wipers with water jets.
- Central position: Idle.
- Right position: Wind shield wipers
12 Lift overload indicator light

This pilot light is on when the crane load exceeds the selected lifting speed range. (See
commutator no.23 on the right control).
Therefore, it indicates an overload and lifting does not work up or down.
A slower lifting speed range should be selected (commuter no. 23) according to the load on
the hook.
15 Warning pilot light

>100% Load or momentum greater than 100%. Hook up and trolley forwards are locked.

>90% Momentum greater than 90%. The trolley forward movement is not possible at high speed (high
speed pre-limitation situation)

PowerLift system activated.
Trolley, hoisting and slewing motions are possible only at slow speeds.

21LC/18 t
13 Joystick trolley / slewing
Joystick is fitted with zero reset device.
13.1 Orientation
Movement acceleration and deceleration are accomplished by varying the current supplied to the
motor stator and motor idler so that a perfect performance against load swinging is obtained.
Movement braking is automatically done, during speed change or when the joystick is brought
to the zero position, through the current supplied to the idler.
SPEED
MOVEMENT MACHINERY SITUATION
POINT
3 Motor at top speed
2 motor at intermediate speed
<
LEFT SLEWING 1 Motor at micro-speed
0 Motor idle, brake locked
1 Motor at micro-speed
> 2 Motor at intermediate speed
RIGHT SLEWING
3 Motor at top speed
There is a bushbutton for overriding the delay of the electromechanical brake. For its use, see
section 1.1.1, point 6.
13.2 Trolley operation

Trolley movement is achieved through a frequency converter controlled by the control panel
joystick. This includes a potentiometer which allows for selecting any speed from practically
zero to the top speed depending on the trolley position on the jib.
Top hoisting speed is automatically reduced when the trolley comes close to the end stop.
Movement acceleration and slowing down are gradual and never sudden.
The electromechanic brake locks the movement when the motor has fully stopped (frequency
converter control).
2 speed ranges are available, see trolley speed switch. (Right control nº 11)
POSITION SWITCH nº 11
VARIANCE
MOVEMENT LEVER
CONTROL
0 47 m/min 0 94 m/min
TROLLEY FORWARDS
0 47 m/min 0 94 m/min
TROLLEY BACKWARDS
When the crane is loaded with over 90% of momentum, the trolley speed is automatically
limited to a low value.

21LC/18 t
4 RIGHT CONTROL
Push-buttons
1 ON light pushbutton
Used to start the crane.
Pressing this pushbutton switches on the main contactor and the light inside it comes on.
When the crane is power supplied through the main contactor, the hoist and trolley frequency
converters go into a self-test checking for errors. This takes a few seconds.
Hoisting and trolley movements are not possible during this time.
2 Stop Pushbutton
The normal use of the stop push button is to disconnect the power supply to the crane when no
work is being done, or as an initial measure to switching off the main contactor prior to leaving
the work place at the end of the shift.
Also, it may be used as an emergency stop when crane work so requires.
On turning the power off, the frequency converters start the capacitors' disconnection
and discharge stage, which lasts about 10 seconds. If during this period, crane start is
pressed again, the converter may not start properly and it will stay in trigger status, not
allowing the related movement.
If this occurs, stop again, wait 10 seconds and start it again.
3 Alarm button
Pressing this pushbutton also continuously sounds the crane's alarm.
4 Travelling control commutator

Used to disconnect the transfer movement of the crane, thus avoiding unwanted starts of the
travel movement.
5 Transfer brake button

Cancels the delay in the electromechanical brake application of the transfer motors.
In normal work, once the combiner is set to zero, the transfer movement decreases
gradually.
The electromechanical brake is a park brake and acts subsequently.
10 Cabin heating control commutator

- Position 0 : Heating disconnected.
- Position : Ventilator
- Position : Ventilator
- Position : Ventilator + heater (4000 W).
- Position : Ventilator + heater (2000 W).
On the lower part (on the outside) of the left control there is a thermostat that allows the heating
to be adjusted.
11 Trolley speed range selection switch

Allows for the trolley movement speed range to be selected.
Offers 2 ranges, top speed and low speed.

See trolley joystick (point 13.2).
17 ITEX Switch (optional equipment)

Switch for unlocking movements for outside temperatures of less than -25º C.

0 1
Must only be used to unload the crane and put it out of service when the temperature is
below -25º C and the temperature sensor has stopped crane movements.

21LC/18 t
23 Lifting speed range selection switch

Allows for the lifting speed range to be selected.
The load on the hook must not exceed the allowed maximum according to the following
table:
LOAD (in kg) LIFTING

Position POINT
SWITCH DOUBLE TROLLEY SINGLE TROLLEY
(4 reevings) (2 reevings)
1 18,0 9,0
lowest
2 12,0 6,0
3 8,0 4,0
highest
4 4,0 2,0
Lower speed ranges can be selected, even with lighter loads, in order to obtain greater movement
precision.
Maximum speeds based on the selected speed range are:
TOP SPEED ALLOWED (in m/min)

POSITION
SWITCH DOUBLE TROLLEY SINGLE TROLLEY
(4 reevings) (2 reevings)
1 22 44
2 33 66
3 50 100
4 78 156
The hoisting mechanism allows for very high speeds to be selected. (for instance,
156 m/min in single reeving, with the speed range switch set to position 4).
The path of the hook in slowing down movement before coming to a stop, must be taken
into account.
he speed range change can be made with a load on the hook, but the hoist idle.
T
The system is protected against using this switch with the hoist operating.
If during normal crane operation the load limiter hinders lifting a work load lower than the
allowed one or if on the other hand working with higher loads is allowed, technical service
should be called in to adjust the load limitation system.
Wrong selection of the speed range can cause the load to speed out of control if the
load limitation system is not properly adjusted and does therefore not protect against this
event.
14 Hoisting/travelling joystick
Joystick is fitted with zero reset device.

21LC/18 t
14.1 Hoisting
Hoisting movement is achieved through a frequency converter governed by the control panel
joystick.
The combiner includes a potentiometer which allows for selecting any speed, from zero to the
maximum allowed, depending on the load on the hook and the jib position.
The speed adjustment depending on the load function is automatically obtained by the
converter.
Movement acceleration and slowing down are gradual and never sudden.
The electromechanical brake locks movement when the motor is stopped (controlled by the
frequency converter that monitors motor speed at all times).
The hoisting mechanism has two operating modes:

- Normal and
- Positioning
The positioning mode is obtained by pressing the control knob button of the lifting combiner
(see 15), allowing great precision at low lifting speeds. In addition, the electro mechanical brakes
are open while the pushbutton is pressed, avoiding sudden stops and starts that occur every
time the joystick passes by zero.
TOP SPEEDS IN m/min

VARIANCE
MOVEMENT LEVER Selector DOUBLE Simple
CONTROL Range TROLLEY TROLLEY
Speed (4 reevings) (2 reevings)
1 0 22 0 44
2 0 33 0 66
3 0 50 0 100
4 0 78 0 156
UP
Positioning 0 3,2 0 6,4
1 0 22 0 44
2 0 33 0 66
3 0 50 0 100
4 0 78 0 156
DOWN
Positioning 0 3,2 0 6,4
In the positioning mode the load is held securely thanks to the frequency converter.
Switching operating modes (normal to operating or vice versa) can be done with the hoist
operating, without any problem. If when working in normal mode the lever button is pressed, the
lifting motor speed range decreases automatically and on the contrary it increases on switching
from positioning to normal (release lever button).
The lever has automatic return to zero position. Therefore, when the lever is released, the lifting
movement stops and the electromechanical retention brake is applied.
If the hook is close to the end of path of the hoist, speed decreases automatically.

21LC/18 t
The hoisting mechanism allows for very high speeds to be selected. (for instance,
156 m/min in single reeving, with the speed range switch set to position 4).
The path of the hook in slowing down movement before coming to a stop, must be taken
into account.
14.2 Travelling
Movement acceleration and slowing down are obtained by changing the motor's power supply,
providing gradual movement.
Movement braking is automatically carried out by speed changing or bringing the joystick to
zero setting.
There is a bushbutton for overriding the delay of the electromechanical brake. See section
1.2.1-5
An acoustic alarm located at the base of the crane operates intermittently while travel movement
occurs. Its sound is different from the normal crane horn.
SPEED
MOVEMENT MACHINERY SITUATION
POINT
3 motor at top speed
2 motor at medium speed
TRAVELLING 1 motor at micro-speed
FORWARDS
0 motor idle, brake locked
1 motor at micro-speed
TRAVELLING BAC- 2 motor at medium speed

KWARDS 3 motor at top speed
18 Lifting positioning mode button
The knob of the lifting lever has a button that is pressed to select the positioning mode in the
lifting movement (See 14.1)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
0 CONTENTS
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE SYSTEM.
3 USE OF UCDL46 DISPLAY
3.2 Dynamic menu.
4 USE OF THE INDICATION FUNCTION.
5 USE OF THE DATA LOGGER FUNCTION.
6 USE OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES FUNCTION
7 APPENDICES
– Event list and failure codes.
1 IMPORTANT NOTES
INDICATORS SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A DETERMINANT AID IN CRANE WORK AT POINTS

WHERE THE OPERATOR CANNOT PERFECTLY SEE THE LOAD AND SURRONDINGS. ON SUCH
SITUATION, THE INDICATIONS OF A SIGNAL-MAN ARE COMPULSORY.
INDICATORS SHALL NEVER REPLACE A SCALE AND SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE
FOR THE CRANE LOAD AND MOMENT LIMITERS.
DATA DISPLAYED ARE SIMPLY INDICATIONS AND CANNOT REPLACE THE PERSONAL SUPERVISION
OF THE OPERATOR AND HIS OWN IMPRESION OF THE SIZE OF THE LOAD BEING HANDLED.
FOR THE SYSTEM TO WORK PROPERLY, IT IS NECESSARY TO PERFORM CORRECTLY THE

COMPLETE SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UNIT.
ANY CHANGE ON THE CRANE CONFIGURATION MAY RESULT IN A BAD OPERATION OF THE INDI-
CATION, DATA LOGGING OR FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM. AFTER ANY CRANE CONFIGURATION
CHANGE, IT IS NECESSARY TO READJUST THE SYSTEM AND CHECK THAT THE UNIT IS FULLY
OPERATIVE AND PROPERLYWORKING.
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO RELY EXCLUSIVELY ON THE SAFETY LEVEL PROVIDED BY THE ZONING

SYSTEM WHENEVER THE CONSEQUENCE OF A FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM FAILURE MIGHT
LIKELY RESULT IN SEVERE DAMAGE FOR PEOPLE OR PROPERTY.
THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM ALONE SHOULD NOT BE USED TO AVOID TO DRIVE THE
CRANE ABOVE PIPE INSTALLATIONS THAT MIGHT CONTAIN FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS OR GASES.
THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE USED TO AVOID TO DRIVE THE CRANE ABOVE
ELECTRIC CABLES. ON SUCH SITUATIONS, IT IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A SAFETY ASSESSMENT
AND TAKE ADDITIONAL MEASURES (I.E. MOUNTING THE CRANE SO THAT THERE IS NO POSSI-
BILITY OF INTERFERENCE WITH THE CABLE) THAT LEAD TO A PROPER RISK REDUCTION.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
IT IS COMPULSORY TO CHECK THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES SYSTEM

AND THAT EVERY FORBIDDEN ZONE IS ACTIVATED AND WORKING PROPERLY, EVERY DAY
BEFORE BEGINNING TO WORK.
2 introduction to the system

DLZ341 system must be used as an aid to operate the crane. It does not and cannot replace the hability,
experience and common sense of the crane operator.
The system offers visual and alphanumerical information that allows faster and more integrated perception of the
crane situation and other parameters that affect its behaviour (wind speed, load...). The proper understanding
and the judgement of the information and its reliability is a responsability of the crane operator, who is also
responsible for the control and proper and careful drive of the crane.
Before beginning to use the system, it is compulsory to properly train the operator. Furthermore, the
maintainer of the crane or whoever performs any adjustment or change on it, must carefully read
this manual until he understands the working principle and the procedures for its adjustment.
The indication screens on this document may suffer some change as a result of any improvement of the
system software.

DLZ341 system includes the following functions as standard:
- Basic indications (trolley radius, height under hook,load, moment...).
- Data logger.
DLZ341 may optionally include the following special functions (on demand):
- Extended indication (the system can be supplied with additional information like slewing position
or travelling position).
- Forbidden zones system (prevents the hook from entering the areas defined by the user. If the
system is equipped with forbidden zones, it must include the slewing sensor and the travelling
sensor, if needed, to properly perform the forbidden zone function).

The indication screen allows the user to access the system information and configuration. The screen is a
colour antireflective one and is provided with an ergonomic design that improves the comfort and usability to
the crane operator
Screen messages use pictograms recommended by FEM1003 standard which list the symbols to be
used on tower crane indications, so that an effective and error-free communication is achieved.
The indication function offers an instantaneous and intuitive sight that shows the load state of the crane and
the crane position. The data are represented in numerical format and also as a progress bar, allowing a faster
and easier understanding.
Further information on the indication function may be found in point 4 of this document.
The data logger function supplies information referred to the crane operation (number of working hours of each
winch, number of overloads, information on the last movements, alarms…).
Further information on the data logger function may be found in point 5 of this document.
The forbidden zones function allows the user to define a number of zones where the hook will be prevented
from entering. Once the system is properly adjusted, the crane stores the zones information in memory and
operates in an intelligent way, automatically preventing the hook from entering into the forbidden areas.
Further information on the forbidden zones function may be found in point 6 of this document.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Display
Fixing bracket
2
4 5
DLZ341
Fig. 1
When UCDL46 internal temperature goes below -10ºC or above +60ºC, the screen is switched off and
the power supply green LED blinks. The functions of the system keep working but the screen is automa-
tically switched off to avoid damages.
The display must be stored in a clean and dry place.
The UCDL46 unit is mounted inside the cabin on a fixing bracket that permits several rotations and movements.
It allows the crane operator to set an optimal position from an ergonomic point of view.
To adjust the display position and orientation, loose both swivels, set the unit to the desired position and tighten
them again (Fig.1).

Screen side used to display the date, time, wind speed

(if the crane is equipped with anemometer), and the
overall crane and DLZ341 status.
Central area of the screen which informs about crane

functions.
Bottom screen side, showing the dynamic menu and

the navigation keyboard.
Fig. 2

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
The following table shows the pictograms in this page and their meaning.
SIDE BAND PICTOGRAMS
1 Wind speed. Basic system
2 Wind speed prealarm (threshold defined by the user). Basic system
3 Wind speed alarm (threshold defined by the user). Basic system
4 Anemometer signal fault Basic system
5 Crane switched on. Basic system
6 Crane switched off. Basic system
7 Weathervaning on. Basic system
8 Forbidden zones ON. Forbidden zones
9 Forbidden zones OFF. Forbidden zones
10 Internal system fault (see appendix 4) Basic system
The following table shows the function of each keyboard key.
NAVIGATION AND DATA FEEDING KEYBOARD

KEY EXPLANATION
1 Pushbutton associated to the dynamic menu.
2 Enter.
3 Move right or increase value.
4 Move left or decrease value.
5 Escape.
6 Screen backlight control (in Page P1). In some other pages it is a help button.
3.2 Dynamic menu.

Depending on the active page and the navigation level, the dynamic menu changes and offers different choices
between the associated pictograms. To choose any option use the pushbuttons associated to the dynamic
menu.
1 Accesible menu page. Basic system
2 Active page. Basic system
3 Page under programming or configuration mode. Basic system
4 Move right to hidden dynamic menu elements Basic system
5 Move left to hidden dynamic menu elements. Basic system
6 Navigate through additional pages of the event log. Basic system
7 Export to USB. Basic system
8 Import from USB. Basic system
9 Delete information. Basic system

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -

10 Restore factory settings. Basic system
11 Save current settings. Basic system
12 Activate/Deactivate forbidden zones. Forbidden zones
13 Show advanced forbidden zones parameter configuration Forbidden zones
14 Show the version information and software upgrading page Basic system
Basic system
15 Current reeving and manual reeving change.
FIELD KEYS EXPLANATION

Allows to move from a field to the next or previous one through the
1 000.00 m configuration pages. The active field is highlighted in a blue frame.
2 000.00 m Enter the field to modify.

3 500.00 m Choose the alphanumerical value of the current digit
4 500.00 m Confirm the current digit value and pass to the next one.
5 000.00 m Exit the field.
4 Use of the indication function.

This screen displays the status of the crane and the position of several crane movements.
Each indication is associated to a sensor connected to the IMDL46 unit.
1 2
3
7
10
8
4
9
Fig. 3

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
1 Real-time wind speed.

A prealarm and an alarm warning indication on the screen can be set, to warn the crane operator when
wind speed goes beyond the chosen thresholds.
2 Moment exerted by the load on the crane

It is indicated as a percentage with respect to the nominal maximum moment.
The maximum value shown by the display is 133%.
3 Trolley position.
With respect to the tower mast central axis.
4 Hoisting position.
Indicated with respect to a chosen ground level (0 meters).
This value can be positive or negative depending on wheter the hook can go below the chosen ground
level or not.
5 Reeving state.
Displays the current crane reeving state.
The system does not automatically detect the reeving number. To indicate the proper number of reevings,
press the reeving change button 5.

An incorrect number of reeving choice may lead to an incorrect hook height and load indication and thus
to a possible incorrect operation of the forbidden zones height limitation.
6 Maximum load at current trolley position.

This value is attained through calculations based on the crane parameters and on the measured values
.
7 Angle between current jib position and another reference position. The angle must be increased when
the crane turns clockwise (slewing sensor option).
8 Maximum permitted reach for the current load.

This value is attained through calculations based on the crane parameters and on the measured values
.
9 Travelling position (option).
10 Load under hook
Movement commands are indicated on the screen.

The arrow corresponding to the sense of movement blinks as the winch moves.
If there is a failure on any of the sensors or on its configuration, the screen shows this pictogram
and an error code (see Appendix).

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
5 USE OF THE DATA LOGGING FUNCTION.

Page [P2] displays the permanent information of the system. Permanent information is a set of accumulated
values that are not reset, unless an authorized user reset them on purpose.
They are counters which inform about the overall crane activity.
These values are updated everytim there is a crane event that affects their value (movements, load limita-
tion...).
Last information reset

date
Accumulated values
since the last reset
10 last hoist cycles Counter of cycles

information classified according to
the 4 ranges defined by
the user
Fig. 4
5.1.1 Accumulated values since the last reset.

Zone 2 on page [P2] (Fig. 4) registers and displays the values accumulated since the last reset
1 Crane switched on total time (in hours : minutes).
2 Total trolley work time (in hours : minutes).
3 Total hoist work time (in hours : minutes).
4 Times the crane reached a moment limit situation.
5 Times the crane reached a load limit situation.
6 Total lifted load (in tons).
5.1.2 Hoist cycles.

DLZ341 system continuously calculates the lifted load and registers the cycle information in 2 different screen
zones (zones 3 and 4 of page [P2]) (Fig. 4).
A cycle begins when the lifted load goes beyond 5% of the crane maximum load specified in [P10] during
A cycle ends when the lifted load goes below al 5% of the crane maximum load specified in [P10] during

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
Zone 3 (Fig.4) -Cycle counter:

This zone shows the number of accumulated cycles classified according to 4 ranges. The ranges may be
changed by the user.
D
4 Nº 3
C 3 Nº 2
B Nº 1
2
A 1
Fig. 5
EXPLANATION
A Number of cycles with moment % below N°1.
B Number of cycles with moment % between N°1 and Nº2.
C Number of cycles with moment % between N°2 and Nº3.
D Number of cycles with moment % beyond N°3.
Zone 4 (Fig.37) - 10 last hoist cycles information:

This screen zone displays detailed information of the 10 last hoist cycles, ordered in a FIFO list (The list always
contains 10 cycles. When detecting a new cycle, it is placed in position 1, the rest are moved to the next position,
and the one in position 12 is deleted)
EXPLANATION
Cycle number.
08:49 Beginning of the cycle time.
Cycle length (minutes : seconds).
Reeving state.
Maximum moment during the cycle.
Maximum load during the cycle.
Trolley position at the beginning of the cycle.

Fig. 40
Trolley position at the end of the cycle.
Press to exit.

Page [P3] shows the events recorded in the DLZ341 database.
2000 events. A new event is placed in position 1, the rest are moved to the next position, and the one in position
2000 is deleted)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
1 Chronology of the events.
2 Event identification page (see Appendix).
3 Complementary info (see Appendix).
Press to access the field , and use

and to go throught the cycle list.
Press to exit.
Fig. 7
6 USE OF THE FORBIDDEN ZONES FUNCTION

An unproper adjustment or scaling of the forbidden zones function may lead to an undesired behaviour
of the crane or to a loss of safety.
It is compulsory that the configuration and scaling is done by a trained maintainer.

This page displays a view of the forbidden zones shapes locations with respect to the crane. In this page, the for-
bidden zones change dinamically with respect to the crane (the zones rotate around the crane as it moves)
1 Jib and counterjib drawing. 1

2 Trolley drawing.
3 Active forbidden zone drawing (red coloured
line). A zone can be activated or deactivated 2
selectively.
4 Band indicating the current crane position
coordinates. 3
6
5 Travelling track drawing (option).
6 Deactivated forbidden zone (green coloured 5
line). 7
The deactivated zone is recorded, but the
crane is allowed to enter inside. 4
7 Scaled grid. 8
8 Global forbidden zones activation or deac-
tivation pressbutton.
Fig. 8
6.1.1 Hook position coodinates indication.

The band at the bottom of page [P4] (Fig. 8) displays the hook position coordinates referred to the set of axis
defined during the sensor scaling (height under hook, trolley position…)

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
PICTOGRAMA EXPLICACIÓN
1 Slewing angle referred to the "zero" set during the slewing sensor scaling.
2 Trolley position.
Height under hook referred to the ground level set on the hoist sensor
3
scaling
4 Travelling position referred to the "zero" set on the travelling sensor scaling.
Hook position referred to cartesian absolute axis. The intersection of x and y
axis is set on the mast center.
5
The arrows associated to each movement in [P1] will blink in red when the DLZ system stops the mo-
vement.
6.1.2 Movement stop indications in page [P1].
Every time the system stops a movement to avoid entering a forbidden zone, it warns the operator . This warning
is done by showing a pictogram, both in page [P4] and in page [P1].
The movement stop pictograms are listed in the following list.
PICTOGRAMA FUNCIÓN
3 Hoisting stop.
4 Lowering stop.
5 Clockwise slewing stopped Slewing.
6 Anticlockwise slewing stopped Slewing.
7 Travelling forward stop.
8 Travelling backward stop.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
7 APPENDICES – Event list and failure codes.
EVENT FUNCTIÓN NOTE
1 Reeving state.
2 Reeving state.
3 Reeving state.
4 Reeving state
5 Reeving state
6 Wind speed rise above prealarm

threshold
Wind speed fall below prealarm
threshold
7 Wind speed rise above alarm threshold
Wind speed fall below alarm threshold.
8 Anemometer signal fault.
9 Trolley backward start.
11 Trolley forward start.
When the trolley mechanism is stopped at

13 Trolley stopped state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
14 Hoisting start.
15 Hoisting stop.
16 Lowering start .
17 Lowering stop.
18 Hoist stopped state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
19 Load hung state start. the same position for more than 5 seconds.
The load value is also registered.
20 Moment limitation state start.
21 Moment limitation state stop.
22 Load limitation state start.

DLZ341
DATA DISPLAY UNIT -
EVENT FUNCTION NOTE
23 Load limitation state stop.
24 Crane switched on.
25 Crane switched off.
26 Weathervaning on.
27 Weathervaning off.
30 UCDL46 on.
31 UCDL46 off.
32 UCDL46 date and/or clocktime change.
33 UCDL46 software change.
FAILURE CODE FUNCTION NOTE
Luffing angle sensor badly scaled or sensor Only in luffing jib crane.
41 1
failure.
42 Trolley sensor badly scaled or sensor
2
failure
Load cell badly scaled or load cell
43 3
failure.
Moment sensor badly scaled or sensor
44 4 failure
Hoisting sensor badly scaled or sensor
45 5 failure
Anemmometer sensor badly scaled or
46 6 Option
sensor failure
Slewing sensor badly scaled or sensor
47 7 Forbidden zones option
failure
Travelling sensor badly scaled or sensor
48 8 Option
failure
49 9 System error
50 10 Data logger failure
51 11 Memory corruption.
52 12 Data logger information restoring error.

21LC
0 CONTENTS

REEVES)
REEVES)
3 REMOVING / REPLACING TROLLEY FOR DOUBLE
REEVING


SITUATION.
CE” CHAPTER.

GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 1
change.

21LC
Fig. 2
back limits.
ONCE THE “TROLLEY BACK” BUTTON HAS BEEN PRESSED TO EXCEED THE LIMIT, THE HOOK
UP MOVEMENT IS LOCKED UNTIL THE FRONT TROLLEY POSITION LIMITER COMES INTO
OPERATION.
Fig. 3
(LC4).

21LC
Fig. 4
Fig. 5

21LC
Fig. 6
profile.
(DOUBLE REEVING).

electrical cabinet.

change safety system may only be used by
service personnel who are fully aware of the
effect of cancelling the safety system.



21LC


SITUATION.
CHAPTER.

GE - Hitching catch
Fig. 8

21LC
Fig. 9
(LC4).
Fig. 10

21LC
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
operation.

21LC
Fig. 13
Fig. 14

21LC
Fig. 15
(SINGLE REEVING).

electrical cabinet.
Fig. 16


21LC

-
TAKING THE CRANE OUT OF SERVICE -
0 CONTENTS

1 TROLLEY AND HOOK POSITION
2 CLEARANCE
3 FREE SLEWING
4 CONTROL VOLTAGE DISCONNECTION
5 POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECTION
6 FASTEN THE CRANE TO THE TRACK (if crane on rails)
7 ACCESS TO CRANE CONTROLS
1 TROLLEY AND HOOK POSITION

Remove the load from the hook and the lifting accessories
Place the trolley back to minimum reach position and the hook up to top position
2 CLEARANCE
Make sure the crane can slew a complete turn with no obstructions.
3 FREE SLEWING
Set the crane free slewing by pressing the applicable pushbutton on the crane controls.
The siren will sound to indicate that the crane is free slewing.
By pressing the crane stop button, the siren will cease.
Press again the start button; the siren will indicate that free slewing has correctly been activated.
4 CONTROL VOLTAGE DISCONNECTION

Press the stop button on the controls. The siren indicating that the crane is free slewing will cease to
sound. Check that no movement is possible when acting on levers and buttons and that these reset to
zero.
5 POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECTION

Put power supply switch at crane foot to position 0.
Lock out in this position if necessary.
Also, disconnecting the power supply line from mains to crane is recommended.
Electronic equipment may malfunction at low temperatures.

If the ambient temperature is below 0 0C it is advisable to leave the electrical cabinet heating systems on
when the crane is not operating. To do this, leave the electrical power to the crane on, keep the isolating
switch at the foot of the crane connected and disconnect the isolating switch on the cathead cabinet (this
cuts off the electricity to the power and control circuits of the crane).
6 FASTEN THE CRANE TO THE TRACK (if crane on rails)

Anchor the crane to the rails by means of the applicable jaws. See document “RESTRICT CRANE MO-
VEMENT” in this chapter of the Manual
7 ACCESS TO CRANE CONTROLS

If necessary, make sure that persons foreign to crane operation do not have access to the crane con-
trols.
If compliance with any of the above instructions should not be possible, notify the maintenance personnel
to take corrective action before taking the crane out of service.
On line outage or electrical system malfunction, acting on devices installed on slewing motors can set
free slewing manually. See document “FREE SLEWING” in this chapter of the Manual.

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 OPERATION
3 MANUAL OPERATION
4 WIRING
5 ADJUSTMENT
1 DESCRIPTION
units.
2 OPERATION
(1).
weathervaned.
released.
crane in operation.

2 Mobile armature
5 Autoblocage nut
taken place.
6 Releasing electromagnet and Switch set
- If the weathervaning button is pressed 7 Adapter disk
by accident during normal operation, just8 Motor brake cover
it. Fig. 1

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
3 MANUAL OPERATION
released manually.
keep it lifted.
Fig. 2
2
4 WIRING
.
Fig. 3
5 ADJUSTMENT

correctly.
system..

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
0 CONTENTS
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2 OPERATION CHECK

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(2).
km/h..

weathervaning).
1 Wind-speed sensor
4 Fastening magnets
6 Siren
8 Cabin display
Fig. 1
2 OPERATION CHECK
in the ON position.
- Siren.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
supplied.



at preset values.
Necessary material:
Instructions:
hand.

Instructions:
conditions.

calibrated.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA

modes.
The equipment is configured by LINDEN COMANSA, as is indicated in Fig.2.
Fig. 2
3.1 Test and alarm configuration modes..
ON (1) Autotest ON
DIP1
OFF Autotest OFF.
ON (1) Siren ON.

DIP2
OFF Siren OFF.

DIP4

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
3.2 Test modes.

device.
3.3 Alarms.
Fig. 3


Fig. 4

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA


-
CRANE TIE UP -
TYING UP THE CRANE WHEN OUT OF SERVICE IS COMPULSORY.

NOT COMPLYING WITH THIS RULE CAN LEAD TO SEVERE ACCIDENTS.
Lifted clamp Anchored clamp
To carry out this operation, swing the clamps by loosening the mounting.
Once the clamps have been positioned embracing the rail, they should be mounted with the fittings.
IN STATIONARY CRANES, CLAMPS ARE PERMANENTLY INSTALLED. NEVERTHELESS, THEY

SHOULD BE PERIODICALLY CHECKED TO ENSURE THAT THEY ARE CLAMPING PROPERLY

-
STOPPING WORK BECAUSE OF WIND -
Crane's operations should be interrupted whenever the wind velocity endangers the
handling o the load for the operating staff.
According to the calculation standard (DIN 15019-1), the crane has to be taken out of service when the wind
velocity Vo corresponding to the dynamic pressure limit qo, determined from a 10 seconds average, is excee-
ded.
Vo a qo are determined according to the following formulas:
qo < q - 30 t
qo = Vo ² / 1.6
qo Dynamic pressure limit (N/m2)

q Calculated operational dynamic pressure for cranes in use (250 N/m2)
t Time in minutes from dynamic pressure to limit go being exceeded to completion of safety measures.
(See "PROCEDURE FOR TAKING UNITS OUT OF SERVICE" in this chapter.)
Vo Wind velocity (m/s) registered within 10 seconds.

t Vo
(min) m/s km/h
5 17 61
10 16 58
15 15 54
20 14 50
25 13 47
Example: If 15 minutes will be needed for the fullfilment of safety measures (Procedure for taking units out
of service), the crane's operations have to be interrupted when the wind velocity reaches 54 km/h.
registered within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Cranes working in areas where wind velocity is likely to be above design limit must be provided
with anemometers.
See "ANEMOMETER - WIND SPEED INDICATION / ALARM" instruction in this manual.

-
LOAD SURFACE -
Work with the crane must stop when the wind speed makes manipulating loads hazardous for people.
In cranes that are going to work in areas where winds can reach service limits, the user must install an
anemometer. (ITC "MIE-AEM-2" 2003).
See instruction "ANEMOMETER" in this manual.
The maximum surface permitted for a load exposed to wind is obtained by the formula:
A = Surface exposed to wind (m2).

0,03 x P
P = Weight of the load (kg).
A=
q = Pressure coefficient = v2/16 (kg/m2).
q x 1,2
v = Wind speed (m/s).
Permitted service wind speeds depending on the surface of the load (km/h)
Surface of
the load
(m2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Load (t)
1 72 51 42 36 32 29 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 18 17 17 17 16
2 72 72 59 51 46 42 38 36 34 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 25 24 23 23
3 72 72 72 62 56 51 47 44 42 39 38 36 35 33 32 31 30 29 29 28
4 72 72 72 72 64 59 54 51 48 46 43 42 40 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
5 72 72 72 72 72 66 61 57 54 51 49 46 45 43 42 40 39 38 37 36
6 72 72 72 72 72 72 67 62 59 56 53 51 49 47 46 44 43 42 40 39
7 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 67 63 60 57 55 53 51 49 48 46 45 44 43
8 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 68 64 61 59 56 54 53 51 49 48 47 46
9 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 68 65 62 60 58 56 54 52 51 50 48
10 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 66 63 61 59 57 55 54 52 51
11 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 66 64 62 60 58 56 55 53
12 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 67 64 62 60 59 57 56
13 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 67 65 63 61 60 58
14 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70 67 65 63 62 60
15 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70 68 66 64 62
16 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70 68 66 64
17 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70 68 66
18 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70 68
19 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70
20 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72

-
LOAD SURFACE -
Surface of
the load
(m2)
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Load (t)
21 72 70 69 67 66 65 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 57 56 55 54 54 53 52
22 72 72 70 69 68 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 56 55 54 53
23 72 72 72 70 69 68 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 58 57 56 55 55
24 72 72 72 72 71 69 68 67 65 64 63 62 61 60 60 59 58 57 56 56
25 72 72 72 72 72 71 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 58 57
26 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 60 59 58
27 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 62 61 60 59
28 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 68 67 66 65 64 63 63 62 61 60
29 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 67 66 66 65 64 63 62 61
30 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62
31 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63
32 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64
33 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
34 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67 66
35 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68 67
36 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69 68
37 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 69
38 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70
39 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71
40 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
Surface of
the load
(m2)
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Load (t)
41 72 71 70 70 69 68 67 67 66 65 65 64 63 63 62 62 61 61 60 60
42 72 72 71 70 70 69 68 67 67 66 65 65 64 63 63 62 62 61 61 60
43 72 72 72 71 70 70 69 68 67 67 66 65 65 64 64 63 63 62 61 61
44 72 72 72 72 71 70 70 69 68 68 67 66 66 65 64 64 63 63 62 62
45 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 70 69 68 68 67 66 66 65 65 64 63 63 62
46 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 70 70 69 68 68 67 66 66 65 65 64 64 63
47 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 71 70 69 68 68 67 67 66 65 65 64 64
48 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 71 70 69 69 68 67 67 66 65 65 64
49 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 71 70 69 69 68 67 67 66 66 65
50 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 71 71 70 69 69 68 67 67 66 66

-
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PLAN -
0 CONTENTS

1 GENERAL
2 DAILY INSPECTION
3 MONTHLY AND SEMIANNUAL INSPECTIONS
4 YEARLY INSPECTION
5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
6 SUMMARY
1 GENERAL
The purpose of the instructions below is to describe the operations required to keep the crane in safe condition.
It serves as a guidance for detecting defects, taking necessary action to overcome the situation.
Apart from these inspections, National or Local Regulations must also be complied with.
2 DAILY INSPECTIONS
Visual inspection without part removal and checking the operation of the various mechanisms.

These must be done by personnel involved with the crane, e.g. the crane operator.
The inspection is carried out prior to starting crane work and must include:
- Observation of apparent defects in crane supports, cables, structure, etc.
- Operation of drives, movements and brakes, with no load.
- Operation of limiters and indicators
Any defect must be reported to the crane supervisor.

He will decide to keep the crane working, repair the defects, go into a deeper inspection or stop the crane.
Defect causes must be investigated and recorded into the crane log.

3 MONTHLY AND SEMIANNUAL INSPECTIONS
Based on visual inspection, generally without part removal and checking the operation of the various mecha-
nisms
Inspections must be carried out by qualified experienced technical personnel.
Monthly inspections must include:

- Checking lubricants, levels, grease on crown wheel teeth, etc.
- Checking hydraulic equipment, hydraulic fluid levels.
- Checking hooks and hook safety latches, deformation, fracture, etc.
- Checking connections, screw and bolt corrosion, etc.
Semi-annual inspections must include:

- Checking brakes, operation, wear.
- Checking hydraulic hoses, oil leakage, hose condition.
- Checking electric installation, see “ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE” in chapter “ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION”.
- Checking crane anchorage.
Defects must be reported to the crane supervisor.


-
4 YEARLY INSPECTIONS
This inspection must be carried out every time the crane is erected or every year if the crane is still
operating at the site.
Yearly inspections are based on visual inspection, generally without part removal.
Prior to every erection some inspections can more easily be done with the parts on ground level and other
inspections with the crane erected.
Inspections must be carried out by qualified technical personnel.

The inspector must be provided with the previous inspection report and must be informed on the type of crane
work.
Inspection includes:
- Monthly and semi-annual inspections
- Checking for presence of nameplates
- Checking for presence of instructions manual
- Checking reports of previous inspections
- Checking that installed components coincide with components stated in documents
- Checking equipment condition for damage prevention
- Check for leaks of oil or grease
- Check for any damage in couplings
- Check for abnormal noise during operation
- Check for abnormal equipment temperature in operation
- Check that connecting bolts are tightened and free from cracks and defects.
- Check that brakes are not worn out or damaged
- Check that the machine is in overall good condition, clean, without critical corrosion, etc.
- Check that the electrical installation is free from damage.
- Check that cables are free from wear or critical deformations.
- Check that hooks are free from deformations or cracks.
- Checking drive operation
- Load limiters
- Indicator operation
- Brake operation
- Overall inspection of the structure, welds condition, corrosion, deformations, etc.
- Inspection of crane support (foundations, track), check for any settlement

5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
Inspections carried out at the following intervals:
- Every two years after crane commissioning

- Yearly after 14 year operation
- After detecting major defects
- After major modifications of crane features
Qualified technical personnel who will decide on actions to be taken as a function of the inspection outcome
must carry out inspections.
The inspector must be provided with the previous inspection report and must be informed on the type of crane
work.

-
Special inspections must take into account:

- All checks described for yearly inspections
- Equipment vibration, noise and high temperature
- Machine overall condition, corrosion, cleanness, etc
- Equipment fastening
- Brake operation
- Connecting screws and bolts.
Special inspections may require part removal and non-destructive tests if deemed necessary as a function
of:
- Result of previous inspections
- Result of load and braking tests, etc.
- Result of visual inspections

6 SUMMARY
ELEMENT WHAT WHEN

Overall condition, supports track. Daily
Corrosion Monthly
Base Fastening screws, connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly
Overall condition Daily
Corrosion Monthly
Tower access Connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly
Corrosion Monthly
Slewing part Connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly
Corrosion Monthly
Jib Connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly
Corrosion Monthly
Counterjib Connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly
Corrosion Monthly
Trolley and hook Connecting bolts Yearly
Semi-annual
Deformation
Yearly

-
ELEMENT WHAT WHEN

Overall condition
Daily, yearly
Motors and brakes
Travelling drive Fastening
Monthly, semi-annual,
Greasing
yearly
Gear condition
Overall condition
Daily, yearly
Motors and brakes
Slewing drive
Fastening
Monthly, semi-annual,
Greasing
yearly
Gear condition
Overall condition
Daily, yearly
Motors and brakes
Hoisting drive
Fastening Monthly, semi-annual,
Greasing yearly
Overall condition
Daily, yearly
Motors and brakes
Trolley drive
Fastening Monthly, semi-annual,
Greasing yearly

Cables
Greasing Monthly
Ballast and counterweight

Overall condition Yearly
blocks
See instructions in "ELECTRICAL MAINTE-

Electrical installation
NANCE" in chapter "Electrical Installation" Semi-annual

-
HAND SIGNALS FOR CRANE OPERATIONS -
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 PERSONNEL DUTIES
3 PRINCIPLES FOR ESTABLISHING A SIGNAL CHART
4 SIGNAL DEFINITION
Prior to performing any operation check that the load being moved is perfectly fastened and ready for
movement.
Make sure that neither persons nor materials that could be damaged are present in the load area.
Do not allow persons along the load path while operations are being carried out.
1 GENERAL
THIS INSTRUCTION IS BASED ON STANDARD UNE 58000
- Persons involved are: Operations Superintendent, Signalman, and Crane Operator

- Signals to be used by the signalman are established to direct the crane operator
- Signals must be coded to avoid confusion
2 PERSONNEL DUTIES
2.1 OPERATIONS SUPERINTENDENT

Person in charge of appointing a team to perform load preparation operations, this team includes
the signalman.
2.2 SIGNALMAN
This person reports to the operations superintendent
He takes over as chief of the crane operator since the “take control” signal is made until the “Quit
control” signal is made.
The signalman is fully responsible for directing the crane operator since the load starts moving,
through load transfer, until the load arrives to its final position as well as securing the slings around
the load from the start to the end of the operation.
Communication with the crane operator will be through hand signals with the arm(s) and signals must
not be repeated except for slow approach movements or if the crane operator so demands.
The signalman must always be in the crane operator field of view, see the load at all times, remain
outside the load path and keep personnel out of the load path.
In case he cannot see both the crane operator and the load, the operations superintendent shall appoint
an assistant.
Signalman and crane operator must know each other and maintain their functions during the job, and
due to the relevance of this function, training courses and physical examinations are required (Standard
UNE58158)
2.3 CRANE OPERATOR

He must follow the instructions given by the signalman after taking control (acoustic or short light signal)
Repetition of signals shall not be expected except for slow approach or joined movements
Once started, movements shall not be interrupted except when:

- A different command or a stop signal is given.
- Safety reasons dictate to interrupt the movement
- Signals are not clear
- Command signals are being given by other persons at the same time
- Signals do not coincide with the specified standard signals
New instructions must be requested for restarting (two short acoustic or light signals)

-
3 PRINCIPLES FOR ESTABLISHING A SIGNAL CHART
- “Take control” and “Quit control” signals determine the moment from which the crane operator
effectively depends on the signalman.
- Signals must be made:
- Using ample and vigorous movements perfectly differentiated.
- Using ample hand and finger movements recognised under any condition (lighting, distance)
- In two well differentiated planes
a) In a vertical plane, to the right or to the left of the signalman body
b) In a horizontal plane, above or below
To command a movement or a stop, the signalman must always move the arm or forearm with no repetition
nor keeping on the movement (once the “understood” signal has been received) except for approach or
joined movements.
- When lighting is not adequate white bracelets on arms must be used

- There is no need for the signalman to constantly watch the crane operator (except at operation start and
stop). But the load must always be watched at. The crane operator must watch the signalman.
4 SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
4.1 TAKE AND QUIT CONTROL
Meaning Description Illustracion

Take control One hand on hip. The other arm ex-
tended up above the haed and palm
forward
Quit control Facing the crane operator, starting

with both arms crossed under the face,
extend the arms to the sides at chest
level

-
4.2 VERTICAL MOVEMENTS
Meaning Description Illustration

Hoist Forearm vertical, forefinger pointing
(lift the load) up, move finger in circle.
Hoist slowly Forefinger pointing up moving finger in

circle and place the palm of the other
hand motionless in front of it (as if
placing a top).
Lower hook With arm extended downward forefin-

(Lower the load) ger pointing down moving in circle.
Lower hook slowly Forefinger pointing down moving

finger in circle. Palm of the other hand
motionless in front of it (as if placing a
top).

-
4.3 OTHER MOVEMENTS
Meaning Description Illustracion

Slew the jib in finger direc- Arm extended and finger pointing out
tion the slewing direction.
Move in direction given by Direction indicated by movement of

signalman extended hand (Palm direction).
Stop Hand extended at head level with palm

(Stop the previous move- forward.
ment)
Overall stop Arms in cross, palms downward.

Emergency stop

-
SLINGS AND TACKLE -
0 CONTENTS
1 MAIN TYPES OF SLING

2 CHOOSING A SLING
3 USING SLINGS
4 CONNECTIONS
5 HOOKS
6 TRANSVERSE SHAFTS OR GANTRIES
7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF USE
8 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF STORAGE
1 MAIN TYPES OF SLING

Slings may be made of rope, cable or chain (Fig. 1).
Sling breakage almost always causes serious accidents, injuring personnel and damaging goods. Good
quality slings must therefore be used, constructed with the utmost care.
Accidents involving sling breakage are often caused not by technical faults but by human error.

The site foreman and the hooker on must therefore know how to choose slings suited to each manoeuvre and
how to use them according to safety rules.
Fig. 1
2 CHOOSING A SLING
Slings must be chosen on the basis of the following points:
- Weight of the load to be hoisted

If in doubt calculate high.
To calculate the weight of a load, multiply its volume by the density of the product involved.
The following approximate densities should be remembered:
- wood 0.8,
- stone & concrete 2.5,
- steel, iron and cast iron 8.

-
SLINGS AND TACKLE -
- Working load of the sling

The working load of a cable is the load which it can support safely. This load must be marked legibly in
words es on the sling ring or on a plate pressure fitted onto one of its strands. The working loads of the
most widely used cables are shown below. The minimum tensile strength of the sling is 160 kg/mm².
Working loads in kg. of most widely used cables

Diam. in mm 8 10 14 20 26
Load in kg 560 850 1700 3550 6000
- The angle formed by the strands of a sling reduces its strength. For the sake of illustration we provide
coefficients below by which sling strength must be divided according to the angle between the strands
when the sling is in working position (Fig. 3 and 4).
Angle of strands 0º 45º 60º 90º 120º

Coefficient 1 1,08 1,15 1,41 2
Observations:
When a load is supported by a 4 strand sling the angle must be measured as indicated in figure 4, and
the sling strength calculated on the basis of total weights being supported by
- 2 strands if the load is rigid,
- and 3 strands if it is flexible.
For a 2 strand sling with a given strength (Pm), capacity decreases as the angle between the ends
increases (Fig.4).
3 USING SLINGS
When working with slings you need to know:
- Why strength decreases
There are many reasons. Apart from wear, knots, welds in cables and the devices used in connections
must be taken into account.
- Knots reduce sling strength by 30-50%.
- Welds in final rings or eyelets, even if technically very well done, reduce strength by between 15 and
20%.
- Connections made with cable holders, even when they are used properly and in sufficient numbers,
reduce sling strength by around 20%.

-
SLINGS AND TACKLE -
- The right way to arrange sling strands

Welds or areas joined with cable holders should never be placed on the hook of the hoisting equipment
or at edges. Joins or splices should be used only in free areas, where they can work only with traction.
Strands from two different slings should not be crossed on the hook, as one of them will compress the
other (Fig.5). If the strand angle exceeds 90º longer slings or transverse shafts (gantries) must be used,
as per figure 6.
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
4 CONNECTIONS
Hooks, rings and eyes are used to connect hoisting equipment to loads.
- Eyes
These are made of forged steel, and comprise U-bolt and a fitted shaft, which is usually screwed onto
one arm of the U-bolt (Fig. 7).
- Working load of eyes

This should be indicated by the manufacturer, and will depend on the steel used and the heat treatments
applied.
The shaft of an eye should therefore never be replaced by a bolt, however good its quality.
- Rings
These come in various shapes, though they are usually circular in cross section. As with eyes the load
they can support depends on their cross section, on their shape and on the steel from which they are
made (fig. 9). It is essential to check that they retain their shape over time.
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
5 HOOKS
Their shape enables loads to be attached rapidly.
- Description
There are many types of hook. The most widely used are beaked hooks (Fig.8),
which are connected by a hole or rod.
Fig. 9

-
SLINGS AND TACKLE -
- Hook construction
Unlike rings and eyes, hooks work by flexion, and are therefore designed and built to very severe stan-
dards.
- Hook shapes are therefore perfectly described in construction standards.

- And hooks must always be made of heat treated steel completely free from internal stresses.
You should therefore never attempt to build your own hoisting hooks.
- Using hooks
Never try to widen the shape of a hook so that it will take a larger cable. Likewise, never heat hooks
for any reason, as heating will change the properties of the steel.
Open or bent hooks should be discarded.
While hooking up a load, ensure:

- that stress is taken by the bottom of the hook and not by the beak (fig. 10);
- that the safety piece works perfectly to prevent accidental unhooking; and
- that there are no external forces which might deform the hook opening.
In some cases mere swinging of the load may produce such forces.
Fig. 10
6 TRANSVERSE SHAFTS OR GANTRIES

Using gantries to lift long loads enables sling length to be reduced and therefore allows lower lifting equipment
to be used (fig. 11 and 12).
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
Semi-gantries are used for normal loads, and they prevent or reduce any bending stresses in loads at the level
of the points where they are supported.
Never exceed the loading capacity of these gantries, which should be indicated on them.

-
SLINGS AND TACKLE -
7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF USE

- Use only items of suitable strength.
- Do not use lifting equipment in such a way that sharp angles are formed, or on sharp edges. The following
should be done in such cases:
- protect edges with rags, sacking or preferably with protective angle pieces (fig. 13).
- Fit cable and rope end rings with thimbles (fig. 14)
- Do not use knotted ropes, cables or chains.
Fig. 13 Fig. 14
- Choose attachment points on the load to be hoisted which do not allow the sling to slip. Ensure that these
points are properly arranged around the centre of gravity of the load.
The load must be stably balanced, and a gantry should be used if necessary to balance the forces in the
slings, whose strands should form the smallest possible angles.
- Take the following precautions:

- when a sling must be moved, slacken it enough to move it without its rubbing against the load;
- do not stand under a load when trying to move a sling; and
- do not hoist loads sharply.
- Cables and ropes should not have rings or welds except at their ends.
- The ends of cables and ropes must be secured with ties to prevent fraying.
- Lifting equipment must be protected against fire. heat, corrosives (acids, solvents, cements, etc), moisture
and light in the case of synthetic fibre ropes.
8 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF STORAGE

- Store in dry places sheltered from the effects of the weather. Natural fibre ropes should be protected
against sunlight and other sources of ultraviolet light.
- Store cables as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
- Chains should be suitably lubricated with a grease recommended by the manufacturer.
- Ropes should be dried before storage.
- Load capacity should be marked on all lifting equipment.
- All lifting equipment should be stored so that it is not in direct contact with the ground. It should be
suspended from rounded wooden supports or deposited on stakes or palettes. It should also be kept
well away from corrosive products.

-
TERMINALS AND WIRE ROPE CLAMP -
0 CONTENTS
1 TERMINALS, ASYMMETRIC WEDGE SOCKET
2 WIRE ROPE CLAMP, U-BOLT CLAMPS

1 TERMINALS, ASYMMETRIC WEDGE SOCKET

See Standard EN 13411-6.
1.1 Use of cable terminals

Check that the terminal is free from defects before assembling it.
PIN
SOCKET BODY
WEDGE
Fig. 1
It is essential that the appropriate terminal is used, and that it is checked that the wedge and socket body are
those indicated for the cable. A large wedge or one with an incorrect angle will not enter the socket body suffi-
ciently to provide a secure fastening; a small wedge will enter too far causing an excess load over the socket
body of the terminal, damaging it.
CORRECT INCORRECT INCORRECT

Fig. 2

-
Terminals of an appropriate strength for the pull to be transmitted should be used.
The cables should be placed such that the active leg is over the straight part of the terminal.
The inactive leg should have the necessary length to allow a safety system to be attached.
Fig. 3
Distance X between the cable-fastening clamp and the terminal should be less than 75% of the length of the
wedge.
When it is necessary to re-install the terminal, should be located over a part of the cable which has not been
previously used for the same purpose.
After each assembly, check that the wedge and cable are correctly seated in the socket body of the terminal,
to prevent cable slip and stop the wedge from slipping out of the socket body of the terminal.
Antirotation cables tend to become deformed on being bent over the wedge; to prevent this, it is recommended
that the cable be lined, for example, with adhesive tape, during the mounting of the terminal. The lining should
be removed to the extent possible to permit inspection of the cable.
1.2 INSPECTION OF TERMINALS

:Attention should be given to the following:
- Appearance of cracks in the socket body.

- Wedge protruding too far or inserted too far on mounting
- Deformation of the terminal.
- Imperfections in the cable, ruptured wires or excessive cable deformation.
- Condition of the fastening pin.
- Installation of the safety system on the inactive leg of the cable.
If any defect is found in the terminal as well as in the cable, replace it.

-
2 WIRE ROPE CLAMP, U-BOLT CLAMPS

(See Standard EN 13411-5)
The cable-fastening clamps manufacturer should provide information on the diameter and type of cable for which
each clamp is appropriate, in addition to the number of clamps, the method of installation and the strength of
the clamp.
The cable-fastening clamps are formed of a fork threaded at its ends, a connector and two nuts.
Castings can be distinguished from forgings by the way in which they are manufactured.
FORK FORK
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
CAST CABLE FORGED CABLE
FASTENER NUT FASTENER NUT
Fig. 4
2.1 USE OF CAST CABLE FASTENERS

The number of clamps and the distance «e» between them are indicated in the table.
The connector should be located on the active leg of the cable.
Fig. 5
When a thimble is used in making the grommet, the first clamp should be located against the thimble.
The tightening torques indicated in the table are for greased threads.
The tightening of the clamps should be checked on application of the initial load.
Cable diameter (mm) e (mm) Number of clamps Tightening torque (Nm)
8 30 / 60 4 6,0
10 30 / 60 4 9,0
12 36 / 72 4 20
14 42 / 84 4 33
16 48 / 96 4 49
18 48 / 96 4 68

-
2.2 USE OF FORGED CABLE FASTENERS

This clamp is used with standard and antirotation cables.
The distance between clamps and the number of clamps are indicated in the table.
The connector should be located on the active leg of the cable.
The tightening torques indicated in the cable are for clean, dry and ungreased threads.
The tightening of the clamps should be checked on application of the initial load.
Cable diameter (mm) e (mm) Number of clamps Tightening torque (Nm)
8 133 3 40,7
10 165 3 61,0
12 178 3 88,0
14 305 3 129,0
16 305 3 129,0
18 460 4 176,0
Clamp assembly sequence:

- The cable length specified at 4 in the table is bent.
- The connector is located over the active leg of the cable, at a distance from the end of the inactive l
eg equal to the width of the connector.
- The nuts are tightened uniformly and alternately up to the tightening torque.
- The second clamp is placed against the thimble and the nuts are tightened without locking them.
- The remaining clamps are installed distributed between the first two.
- The nuts of all the cable fasteners are tightened uniformly and alternately up to the tightening torque
indicated in the table.
Fig. 6

-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
0 CONTENTS
5 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS
- Crane
Discontinuous operation device used to hoist and distribute loads suspended from a hook over an
area.
- Slewing tower crane
Top slewing tower crane with slewing support on tower top end and with lower support connected to the
crane foot.
- Removable tower crane for worksites
Temporary slewing tower crane, used in construction sites, designed to cope with frequent erection and
dismantling operations, as well as transfers between different locations.
- Top slewing crane

Crane with the slewing system on tower top end.
- Horizontal jib crane
Crane where the jib is parallel to the ground.
- Travelling crane
Crane with foot equipped with own means for travelling on a track.
- Stationary
Crane without any travelling means or which, even featuring travelling means, may not move during site
construction work.
Crane anchored in a foundation or baseplate.
- CONDITION OF SERVICE
-Operational
Crane working under given operating conditions (crane setup, load reach, etc.) or ready to move
the loads for which it has been designed.
-Out of service
Unloaded crane left in stable position, in conditions specified by the manufacturer, without perfor-
ming any work, and ready to get into operation when circumstances so require and allow.
- Crane erection
The actual process of erecting the crane in the worksite, to perform as required. It includes preliminary
works such as foundations, track construction works, etc.
- Installed crane
Crane erected in the worksite, subject to design loads for crane out of service, but without the requirement
of being ready for operation.
- Commissioning
Set of crane checks and operations needed for making the crane operational.

-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
- Reach or radius
Horizontal distance measured between crane slewing axis and the vertical centerline of the hook without
load, when the crane is erected on horizontal ground.
- Lifting range
Vertical distance between upper and lower hook positions for the actual work.
- Lift
Vertical distance between hook rest level and upper hook position for the actual work.
- Lowering depth
Vertical distance between hook rest level and lowest position.
- Travelling speed
Speed of crane translation movement on the track for the type of work involved.
- Slewing speed
Angular speed of the slewing part of the crane for the type of work involved.
- Trolley speed
Speed of trolley translation movement for the type of work involved.
- Hoisting speed
Speed of the vertical movement of the load for the type of work involved.
- Positioning speed
Minimum load speed in erection or suspension processes, for the type of work involved.
- Tip load
Maximum load that can be hoisted at maximum reach.
- Maximum load
Maximum load that can be lifted according to crane manufacturer data.
5 COMPONENT DEFINITION, VOCABULARY
- Support frame
Structural assembly supporting the slewing part or the fixed part of the crane tower.
- Ballast
Mass attached to the support frame for crane stability.
- Tower
Vertical structure of crane which supports the slewing part and allows for the required lift to be met.
- Slewing section
Structure including the slewing track and the slewing mechanism and comprising the elements
for the transition between the fixed and the moving part of the crane.
- Operator’s cabin
Cabin destined to normal control of the crane that houses the controls and the crane operator.
- Jib
Structural component of the crane, supporting the trolley and the hook, ensuring this way the required
reach and lift. One section includes the trolley winch.
- Counterjib
Structure able to support the crane counterweight, that can include the hoisting mechanism.
- Counterweight
Mass fixed to the counterjib, that helps compensate load actions.
- Trolley
Structure destined to the translation of suspended loads.
- Hook
Device for suspending the load.
- Erection cage
Structure placed on the tower upper part, that allows for hoisting the crane slewing part.

-
TERMINOLOGY 21LC
- Bracing frame
Structure, arranged on the tower, for transmitting loads derived from a tower extension.
- Travelling mechanism
Mechanism for crane translation on track.
- Slewing mechanism
Mechanism for turning the slewing part of the crane in a horizontal plane.
- Trolley winch
Mechanism for the translation of loads along the jib.
- Hoisting winch
Mechanism for hoisting and lowering loads.
- Limiter
Device for stopping or limiting crane movements or functions.
- Indicator
Device for furnishing the crane operator with necessary information for a perfect crane operation within
the operating parameter table.
6b 6 4 5c 5a 5
4d 5b
4e 7 8
6a
4a
4b
4c
4f
9
3
1.- Support frame, cross frame.
1a.- Support assembly.
3a 10 1b.- Structure assembly with translation mechanism
1c.- Base ballast
2.- Foundation anchor, foundation
2a.- Anchoring foot, Anchoring section.
3.- Tower.
3a.- Tower section.
4.- Slewing part.
1c 2a 4a.- Lower slewing track support.
4b.- Slewing track.
1 4c.- Upper slewing track support
4d.- Cat head.
4e.- Cabin.
4f.- Slewing mechanism.
5.- Jib
1a 2 5a.- Jib section.
1b 5b.- Jib end, moveable tip.
5c.- Trolley winch.
6.- Counterjib
6a.- Counterweights
6b.- Hoisting winch.
7.- Trolley.
8.- Hook.
9.- Erection cage.
10.- Bracing frame.


21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

6 MAINTENANCE MAN 000 0137 A
8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
MAINTENANCE 000 0137 IB
21LC290
INDEX -
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Warning notes........................................................................................................010 0001 IB A 5
Maintenance plan...................................................................................................020 0001 IB A 6
Maintenance plan (member connections)..............................................................020 0004 IB A 7
Maintenance plan (structure)..................................................................................020 0005 IB A 9
Handling and storage of the blocks........................................................................020 0066 IB A 11
Slewing mechanism and ring.................................................................................020 0069 IB A 12
Maintenance plan (trolley mechanism)...................................................................020 0062 IB A 15
Maintenance plan (hoisting)...................................................................................020 0048 IB B 17
Maintenance plan (hook, pulleys and cable)..........................................................020 0021 IB B 19
Lubrications instructions (travelling).......................................................................030 0004 IB A 21
Lubrications instructions (slewing gear).................................................................040 0004 IB B 22
Lubrications instructions (Slewing gear).................................................................050 0001 IB B 24
Lubrications instructions (Hoisting mechanism).....................................................060 0015 IB B 25
Lubrications instructions (Hoisting mechanism).....................................................060 0031 IB A 27
Lubrication instructions (Trolley mechanism).........................................................070 0004 IB B 29
Electromagnetic brake instructions........................................................................080 0001 IB B 31
Brake: "S" & "MS" type...........................................................................................080 0002 IB E 32
Brake: "FCO" type..................................................................................................080 0007 IB A 35
Brake: type "NFF"...................................................................................................080 0008 IB D 37
Brake "BKF458" type..............................................................................................080 0009 IB B 42
Brake: type "fcpl60h"..............................................................................................080 0018 IB B 45
Brake: "gr" type.......................................................................................................080 0019 IB A 50
Anemometer...........................................................................................................090 0005 IB B 55
Lubrications instructions (hydraulic system)...........................................................110 0001 IB A 60
Hydraulic equipment...............................................................................................110 0007 IB A 62
Lubrications instructions (hydraulic system)...........................................................110 0004 IB C 63
Hydraulic lay-out.....................................................................................................110 0013 IB A 65
Instructions for wire ropes......................................................................................120 0001 IB C 67
High strength union elements (HV)........................................................................140 0001 IB A 78
Bolt torque..............................................................................................................140 0002 IB A 80
Cross-base bolt torque...........................................................................................140 0005 IB A 81
Slewing ring bolts...................................................................................................140 0016 IB A 87
Tightness of screws on slewing mechanism..........................................................140 0012 IB A 88
Scrapping the crane...............................................................................................150 0001 IB A 89

-
SAFETY WARNINGS -
This chapter contains information on crane periodical checks and calibrations after commissioning.
Qualified personnel must carry out these operations after reading and understanding the instructions
given in this manual.
National regulations call for controls and inspections that must be duly documented, but these controls
do not exempt the user from regular crane maintenance.
For all maintenance works the following points must be taken into account:
1 Crane safety systems must never be worked on.
2 Always use a safety harness when working at heights over 2m and, as a general rule, use personal
protection equipment adequate for the job.
3 Take special precautions when working on crane moving parts. Use adequate garments without loose
ohanging parts that can be caught by moving parts (avoid clocks, rings, chains, etc.).
4 Never work alone.
5 When working on stationary crane parts:

- Switch the control voltage off
- Place controls on zero position
- Isolate crane power supply by switching the power inlet isolator to the OFF position fixing it in
place by means of a lock
- Place on the crane and the control cabinet easily noticeable and legible warning signs on the
current works being carried out.
- Do not operate the crane before the responsible person gives the ready signal.
- Make sure that all protection equipment is in place before the crane starts.
6 Make sure there is no voltage present prior to working with electrical components.
- Never work alone.
7 Make sure no relevant changes have taken place after the last inspection.
8 Immediately report to the responsible person any detected malfunction. Stop crane operation and take
necessary measures.
9 During draining operations, oil and other fluids must be collected into a suitable container.
10 Oil and grease must only be stored in places meant for lubricating materials. Remove any oil or grease
residues to avoid skidding.

-
MAINTENANCE PLAN -
This instruction is a maintenance plan.

It is complementary to the instructions given along the manual.
WHEN WHAT
- Check cables, inspect general condition.
- Check pulleys, check for jams.
- Check the structure, inspect general condition.
Daily - Check supports, track clear of obstructions, rail condition.
Before start up - Check movement of all mechanisms.
- Check brake operation.
- Check limiters operation.
- Check indicators operation.
- Translation mechanism, grease teeth.
- Crown wheel and slewing mechanism, grease teeth.
- Check cables and pulleys.
Weekly
- Inspect reeving.
- Inspect winding on drum
- Check electrical installation, inspect general condition.
- Grease mechanisms.
- Check levels, fill up if necessary.
- Grease slewing crown wheel.
- Grease hydraulic group .
Monthly - Check levels, fill up if necessary.
- Check hook, distortions, safety catch condition, etc.
- Check connections.
- Appearance, corrosion, etc.
- Clearances, movements, etc
- Check brakes.
- Check operation.
- Adjustment
Every three months
- Inspection of hydraulic equipment
- Hose condition
- Leaks, etc.
- Inspection of electrical installation.
Every six months - See "ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE" in chapter 4
- Inspection of crane anchorage, general condition.
- Check bolted connections.
- Check connections.
Yearly
- Check limiters, calibration.
Every new erection
- Check brakes, adjustment.
- General inspection of structure.
- Replace lubricant in:
- Hoist drive mechanism.
Every 2500 hour operation
- Trolley drive mechanism.
- Hydraulic group.
- Replace lubricant in :
Every 4000 hour operation - Translation mechanism.
- Slewing mechanism.
- Cables, terminals.
- Pulleys and hook.
Regular maintenance
- Crane control.
- Access.
Any detected mal function must be reported to machine responsible personnel

LC1000/LC2100
MAINTENANCE PLAN (member connections) -

0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 FREQUENCY
3 REGULAR MAINTENANCE
1 GENERAL
All crane member connections must be checked regularly and, if needed, corrective action shall be taken:
- Connections must be free from damage that might affect negatively their function and strength.
- Checking unions which use high strength screws with controlled tightening torque
- See specific documents for bolted connections with specified tightening torque.
- Unless otherwise stated, bolted connections shall be tightened to a torque level in accordance with
mechanical good practice.
- All bolts and screws must be adequately secured.
- All securing elements must be tight enough as to prevent loosening
2 FREQUENCY
This instruction service must be carried out after the first 100-hour operation and then every 500-hour
operation or every six months provided a lower compulsory frequency period has not been established.

LC1000/LC2100
MAINTENANCE PLAN (member connections) -
3 REGULAR MAINTENANCE
During compulsory regular maintenance the following points shall be checked:
A Bolted connections
- Equipment anchorage to structure.
- Gear reducer, drum support and motor frame anchorage
- Auxiliary jib fixing. (optional)
- Electrical cabinet fixing
- Slewing crown wheel bolts
- Bolts for anchoring tower foot to base
B Jib and Counterjib:

- Bolts and pins for section upper connections
- Bolts for section lower connections
C TOWER
- Bolts are continuously subject to loads and must be replaced by new ones if corrosion or wear
damage
exceeding 0,3 mm in depth are detected
- In any case they must be replaced after 6-year operation.
D ANCHORAGE FOOTING
- Make sure that anchorage footing does not move.
- This is done by lowering and lifting the test load, used for limiting crane operation, in both tower
diagonal directions.
E BASE
- Section anchorage to base
- Fastening of translation parts (driving mechanisms, shafts, wheels, rail fastening clamps, etc.)
- Fastening of supports (spindles, plates, pyramids)
Other connectingelements
- Connecting elements not mentioned in this or other sections must be checked with adequate
frequency, as a function of the conditions under which the crane is working.

LC1000/LC2100
MAINTENANCE PLAN (STRUCTURE) -
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 CONTINUOUS SERVICING

1 GENERAL
A visual inspection of the crane should be made to detect any deformation, cracks, breakage, corrosion or other
damage. If the damage is capable of affecting the fatigue strength of the crane, the crane must immediately be
taken out of use until the damage has been repaired or other instructions received.
When necessary:
- If there is some doubt as to whether the crane may have suffered damage during manoeuvres, for exam-
ple the load swinging against the section or the jib striking an obstacle as it is moving, then the relevant
zone of the crane must be inspected immediately and measures taken as appropriate.
Compulsory periodic inspections (every 6 months when not compulsory)

- Check that the structural profiles of the base, tower sections, jib sections, counterjib, cat head, trolley
and hook are not bent and are free from knocks or any other form of damage.
- Damaged structures must be replaced or repaired.

Consult the manufacturer for precise instructions.
- Make sure that welds on the crane are not cracked or corroded. Pay particular attention to the following
points:
- Welds on the tabs of the profiles forming part of tower sections, jib sections, cat head and counterjib.
- Welds on the diagonals of tower, jib and counterjib sections.
- Welds on the slewing part.

LC1000/LC2100
MAINTENANCE PLAN (STRUCTURE) -
Check bolted joints. If d1 - d2 > 0.5 mm, the structure must be repaired or replaced.
Other observations:
- When repainting, all corrosion must be removed before applying the first coat.

-
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF THE BLOCKS -
0 CONTENTS
1 HANDLING AND STORAGE

1 HANDLING AND STORAGE
- Suitable slings must be used for handling the load of the concrete blocks to be moved and the blocks
should be hooked to the points designated for this purpose.
For sling selections, see the "SLINGS AND ACCESSORIES" section in the chapter "USING THE CRA-
NE".
Hook up points
Fig. 1
- The ballast must be stored on smooth, solid and level surfaces.

- Separators such as, for example, wood chocks (beech, oak or similar) should be used, and placed in
between the blocks to keep them from coming into direct contact with each other.
The separators should all be the same size, preferably with a square cross section (for example, 60 x
60, 70 x 70, 80 x 80 mm) and approximately 600 mm to 800 mm long.
- It is very important to ensure that the separators are correctly aligned with the adjacent separators above
and below them.
. A maximum of 6 ballast blocks may be stacked on each other.
Position
Position separators
Separators separators
Position Position
separators separators
Fig. 2
- At least two operators are required when handling and storing ballast blocks.
- Protect the ballast blocks from being knocked during handling.
-Failure to follow these instructions may result in the ballast blocks developing fissures and damage
which may harm their appearance and integrity.

MANTENIMIENTO 020 0069 IB
21LC
PLAN DE MANTENIMIENTO (Mecanismo de giro y corona) GFU-7.5
During maintenance operations use safety harness to prevent accidents.
Only qualified, skill and trained personnel may carry out maintenance operations.
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 SLEWING MECHANISM
3 SLEW RING
4 SLEW LIMITER
5 ANGLE LIMITER
6 STRUCTURE
1 GENERAL
The purpose of this instruction is defining the guidelines to carry out crane maintenance operations as indica-
ted in the «MAINTENANCE PLAN», (MAN 020 0001).
7
1
2
4
6 5 3
1 Slewing mechanism
2 Slewing mechanism fixing bolts
3 Slew ring
4 Ring fixing bolts
5 Slew limiter
6 Sector limiter
7 Structure
Fig. 1

21LC
2 SLEWING MECHANISM
Do not touch motor housings as they can be very hot.
Slewing mechanism maintenance operations are:

1 Check for proper tightening of the slewing mechanism fixing bolts, see corresponding document, later in
this chapter.
2 Check for proper gear reducer lubricant and teeth lubrication, see corresponding document, later in this
chapter.
3 Check for motor brake condition, see corresponding document, later in this chapter.
In order to know the type of brake installed, see: «MECHANISMS DATA» in chapter: «TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS» or «CRANE OPERATION».
4 Check for proper weathervaning function, see corresponding document "WEATHER VANING" (MAN 090
0001) , later in this chapter.
Model 21LC290 21LC400 21LC550 21LC660 21LC750

Tigtening of slewing
mechanism fixing MAN 140 0012 MAN 140 0023
bolts
Greasing instruc-
MAN 040 0004 MAN 040 0012
tions
Brake MAN 080 0019
Fig. 2
3 SLEW RING
Slew ring maintenance operations are:
1 Check for proper tightening of ring fixing bolts, see corresponding document, later in this chapter.

21LC
2 Check for proper track and teeth lubrication, see document "GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (Slew ring)",
(MAN 050 0001) later in this chapter.
Model 21LC290 21LC400 21LC550 21LC660 21LC750

Tigtening of ring
MAN 140 0016 MAN 140 0016 MAN 140 0015 MAN 140 0031 MAN 140 0032
bolt
Greasing
MAN 050 0001
instructions
Fig. 3
4 SLEW LIMITER
Monitor drive pinion condition, check for proper gear mesh.
Check for proper lubrication of the limiter shaft.
Check for proper limiter condition, see document «ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE», (INE 120 0001) in chap-
ter «ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION».
LIMITADOR DE GIRO
1
LIMITADOR DE ZONAS
Fig. 4
5 ANGLE LIMITER
Monitor drive pinion condition, check for proper gear mesh.
Check for proper lubrication of the limiter shaft.
6 STRUCTURE
See document «MAINTENANCE PLAN (structure)», in this chapter

21LC
MAINTENANCE PLAN (Trolley mechanism) CFU-7.5
Only qualified, skill and trained personnel may carry out maintenance operations.
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 TROLLEY MECHANISM
3 TROLLEY ROPE
1 GENERAL
The purpose of this instruction is defining the guidelines to carry out crane maintenance operations as indi-
cated in the «MAINTENANCE PLAN», (MAN 020 0001).
1
4
1 Motor
2 Gear box
3 Limiter
4 Drum
5 Frame
Fig. 1

21LC
MAINTENANCE PLAN (Trolley mechanism) CFU-7.5
2 TROLLEY MECHANISM
2.1 Motor
Do not touch the motor housing; it may be very hot.
The maintenance operations to carry out on the hoist motor are:

1 Check the state of the motor; see document "ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE" (INE 120 0001) in the
chapter "ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION".
2 Check the state of the motor brake; see document "BRAKE : "BFK 458" TYPE" (MAN 080 0009) later in
this chapter.
To find out the type of brake that is installed, see: "CHARACTERISTICS OF MECHANISMS" in the
chapter: "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS" or "USING THE CRANE".
2.2 Gearbox
The maintenance operations to carry out on the gearbox are:
1 Check that the bolts attaching the box to the frame are tightened correctly.
2 Check the lubricant; see document "GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (Trolley mechanism)" (MAN 070 0004)
later in this chapter.
2.3 Turn counter/limiter

Check the state of the limiter; see document "ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE" (INE 120 0001) in the chapter
"ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION".
2.4 Structure
See document "MAINTENANCE PLAN (structure)", in this chapter.
3 TROLLEY CABLE
For the use and maintenance of cables, see the document "INSTRUCTIONS FOR STEEL CABLES" (MAN 120.0001)
in this chapter.

21LC/18 t
MAINTENANCE PLAN (Hoisting) -
Only qualified, skill and trained personnel may carry out maintenance operations
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 HOISTING MECHANISM
3 HOISTING ROPE
1 GENERAL
The purpose of this instruction is defining the guidelines to carry out crane maintenance operations as indi-
cated in the «MAINTENANCE PLAN», (MAN 020 0001).
3
1 Motor
2 Gear box
3 Resistance
4 Limiter
5 Guard
6 Drum
7 Frame
Fig. 1

21LC/18 t
MAINTENANCE PLAN (Hoisting) -
2 HOISTING MECHANISM
2.1 Motor
Do not touch motor housings as they can be very hot.
Hoisting mechanism maintenance operations are:

1 Check for motor condition, see documen "ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE", (INE 120 0001) in chapter
2 Check for motor brake condition, see corresponding document later in this chapter.
MECANISMO TIPO FRENO DOCUMENTO

EFU5-50-45 FCPL60H MAN 080 0018
EFU6-65-45 NFF160/210R MAN 080 0008
EFU4-110-45 NFF100 doble MAN 080 0008
In order to know the type of brake installed, see: «MECHANISMS DATA» in chapter: «TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS» or «CRANE OPERATION».
2.2 Gear box

Gear box maintenance operations are:
1 To verify that the screws of mooring of the box to the frame are correctly tight.
2 Check for proper gear reducer lubricant, see corresponding document later in this chapter.
MECANISMO TIPO REDUCTOR DOCUMENTO

EFU5-50-45 REDOC.MA1A1 MAN 060 0031
EFU6-65-45 REDOC.MA18 MAN 060 0031
EFU4-110-45 REDOC.MA32 MAN 060 0015
2.3 Resistance
Do not touch resistances as they can be very hot.
Resistances maintenance operations are:

1 Check for resistance condition, see documen "ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE", (INE 120 0001) in chapter
2.4 Limiter
2.5 Structure
See document «MAINTENANCE PLAN (structure)», in this chapter.
3 HOISTING ROPE
For use and maintenance of ropes see "INSTRUCTIONS FOR WIRE ROPES" (MAN 120.0001) in this
chapter.

21LC750
MAINTENANCE PLAN (hook, pulleys and cable) -
TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS, ALWAYS USE A SAFETY HARNESS DURING MAINTENANCE OPERA-

TIONS.
ALL MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY PROPERLY TRAINED, QUALIFIED

PERSONNEL.
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 HOOK
3 PULLEYS
4 WHEELS
4 HOIST CABLE
1 GENERAL
The purpose of these instructions is to provide a guide to carrying out the maintenance operations
indicated in the crane's "MAINTENANCE PLAN" (MAN 020 0009).
2 HOOK
2.1 Front hook
Check that the anchor support frame has not suffered any damage or deformation.
Check that the fastening elements are correctly secured.
Check the condition of the pulleys. (See point 3).
2.2 Rear hook

Check that the anchor support frame has not suffered any damage or deformation.
Check that the fastening elements are correctly secured.
Check the condition of the pulleys. (See point 3).
2.3 Anchor
Check the condition of the anchor.
- Check the anchor shaft and the fastening nut. Look for any signs of corrosion.
If the thread is worn down by more than 0.1 mm, replace the anchor.
- Check the movement of the anchor, grease the block housings and the axial bearing.
- Check that the anchor lock works correctly.
Check the anchor dimensions (according to DIN15401)

- Check the "y" and "a" dimensions.
If there is deformation of more than 5 %, replace the anchor.
- Check the "h" dimension.
If there is wear of more than 5 %, replace the anchor.
- Check that the brand name is visible.
d maximum
a d h y
load
9t 71 Rd 50x6 85 130
y
12 t 80 Rd 56x6 95 145
a
18 t 100 Rd 72x8 118 180
24 t 112 Rd 80x10 132 200
36 t 140 Rd 100x12 170 255

Brand name
h 48 t 160 Rd 110x12 190 290
Fig. 1
1 / 2 Rev: B 13/10 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approved 6 / 020 / 19

21LC750
MAINTENANCE PLAN (hook, pulleys and cable) -
3 PULLEYS
Check that the pulley turns correctly.
Check that the pulley is not damaged. d
Check that the fastening pins of the pulleys are not de- R
formed and that they are correctly fastened.
Check that the locks preventing the release of the cable
are in place.
Check the wear of the groove.
- Clean of any grease residues.
- Measure the diameter at the bottom of the pulley
groove.
The pulley must be replaced if the diameter at the bottom

of the groove is greater than 1.15 times the diameter of
the cable.
2 x R 1.15 x d Fig. 2
The pulley bearings do not need to be greased.
4 WHEELS
4.1 Crane travel wheels
Check their condition.
- Check that the wheel turns correctly.
- Check that the wheel is neither damaged nor deformed.
- Check the wear on the wheel. Look for any signs of corrosion.
- Check that the fastening pins of the wheels are not deformed and that they are correctly
fastened.
4.1 Trolley guide wheels and rollers

Check their condition.
- Check that the wheel turns correctly.
- Check that the wheel is neither damaged nor deformed.
- Check the wear on the wheel.
- Check that the fastening pins of the wheels are not deformed and that they are correctly
fastened.
- Check that the locks for preventing the release of the wheel are in place.
5 HOIST CABLE
For the use and maintenance of cables, see the document "INSTRUCTIONS FOR STEEL CABLES"
(MAN 120.0001) in this chapter.

TRA-7.5
LUBRICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS (HOISTING) -
1-Filling plug 2-Dumping plug 3-Finder
LUBRICANTS
place type capacity
A- Reduction box ENGRANAJES HP-220 4l

B- Bell-housing MOLYKOTE KGP-2M -
LUBRICANT CHANGES
initial maintenance
A- 150 hours A- 2500 hours

B- 50 hours B- 100 hours
SLEWING RED. GEAR BOX

Reduction gear boxes should be refilled whenever the oil level goes below the “normal” level of the level indi-
cator. This minimum level guarantees a correct lubrication of gears and bearings as long as a lubricant with an
adequated quality is used.
The level marked as “normal” should not be exceeded when refilling the red. gear box.
Bearings should not be lubricated separately, since they are lubricated by the sprinkling of oil coming from the
gears.
Oil changes
The oil will be changed according to the changes specified before, or depending on the conditions of the lubri-
cant (inadequated viscosity, oil oxidation, contamination with silica, etc.). In this case, a very careful cleaning
with petroleum of all the gears should be made. The purpose of this is to eliminate all metallic particles which
might cause a faster erosion, pitting and scratching of the teeth surface. Besides, these particles work as a
catalisator in the oxidation of the oil.
Quality level of the oil
Lubricating oils
It should be used oils with a great capacity to reduce the coefficient of friction, big thermal and oxidation stability,
good properties against corrosion and rust with high humidity, nonfoaming, easy to separate from water, and
with extreme good behaviour under high pressures and against erosion.
All lubricants should comply with the specifications DIN 51517 part 3, U.S. Steel 224, AGMA 250.04 and Cin-
cinnati Milacron P-35 and P-59.
LUBRICATION OF THE TEETH

Teeths are lubricated in order to create a lubricant surface film which avoids direct metallic contact.
PERIODS OF LUBRICATION
Establish the lubrication periods depending on the working conditions.
Generally, it should be lubricated every 100 working hours.These periods should be shorter in case the crane
works in tropical ambient, with high humidity, with high levels of dust and dirt, in case there are big temperature
changes and when the travelling is being used for long periods of time.
The crane should be lubricated before and after long periods of time when it is going to be out of service.
In case it is used another lubricant different from those specified on the table, the manufacturer or the
supplier should give a written confirmation that the chosen lubricant is also appropriated for that determined
use, and that its qualities comply at least with those indicated in the mentioned table.
Special greases or lubricants will be required in case the crane will be used at a very low temperatures
(<-20ºC)
EQUIVALENCE OF GREASE
A ENGRANAJES ENERGOL REDUCTELF SPARTAN - MOBIL GEAR OMALA OIL

HP-220 GRXP-220 SP-220 EP-220 - 630 220

B - ENERGOL CARDREXA SURETT MOLYKOTE MOBILTAC CARDIUM
- WRL DC1 FLUID 4k KGP-2M 81 FLUID C

GR
GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (slew) REDPL.TE
1-Filling cap 2-Discharge cap 3-Sight glass
LUBRICANTS GREASE CHANGES

location type capacity first change maintenance
A- Gearbox ATHESIA EPO full A- A- Every 4000 hours
B- Hood SHELL STAMINA HDS2 full B- B- Every 4000 hours
C- Teeth MOLYKOTE KGP-2M - C- Every 50 hours C- Every 100 hours
A GEARBOX
The gears are housed in the upper part of the gearbox.
On the top there are two caps: one for filling and another for checking the level.
The gearboxes must always be filled up to this level. Doing so guarantees that the gears and bearings are
correctly lubricated, assuming that a lubricant of suitable quality is used.
When filling the gearbox, the level must not be exceeded.
The bearings should not be greased independently, since they are lubricated by the splashing of lubricant given
off by the gears.
CHANGING THE LUBRICANT.

Those gearboxes using synthetic "lifelong" oils, assuming that no external contamination has occurred, do not
need to be changed, although the correct level or quantity must be maintained.
Do not mix oils of different makes or characteristics.
In accordance with the previously specified changes or depending on the current state of the lubricant (unsuitable
viscosity, oil oxidation, silica contamination, etc.) it may be necessary to change the lubricant.
To do so:
- Place a sufficiently large container underneath the discharge cap.
- Remove the discharge cap and let the oil flow out. To speed up the discharge operation, it is best to carry
it out when the oil is hot.
If the new oil is not of the same type as the old oil, carry out an internal wash using a light solvent.
- Bolt down the discharge cap after having replaced its seal.
- Pour in the new oil up to the correct level.
- Bolt down the filling caps after having replaced their seals.
The lubricants, solvents and detergents are toxic/harmful products. Handle them with care and use
suitable personal protective equipment.
Do not allow their fumes to disperse into the atmosphere and dispose of them in accordance with current
legal regulations.
1 / 2 Rev: B 11/24 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A Approved 6 / 040 / 22

GR
GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (slew) REDPL.TE
QUALITY OF LUBRICANTS.
It is essential to use lubricants that have a high capacity for reducing the friction coefficient, a high heat and
oxidation stability, and high anti-corrosive and anti-rust power when working in humid conditions. They must
be resistant to the formation of foam, separate well from water, and have exceptional characteristics in terms
of resisting extreme pressure and wear.
The lubricants used must comply with the following specifications: DIN 51517/3, CLP-PAO ISO, U.S. Steel 224,
AGMA 250.04 and ISO/TR3498-CKC.
B HOOD.
The lower part of the gearbox is separated from the gears by a seal. This zone is filled with long-life grease
which need not normally be changed.
CHANGING THE LUBRICANT.

If the lower bearing is replaced, the hood grease should be changed.
To do so, the hood must be meticulously cleaned. The purpose of this cleaning operation is to remove any metal
particles shed through wear. These particles act as a catalyst, facilitating the oxidation of the lubricant.
The lubricants, solvents and detergents are toxic/harmful products. Handle them with care and use
suitable personal protective equipment.
Do not allow their fumes to disperse into the atmosphere and dispose of them in accordance with current
legal regulations.
QUALITY OF LUBRICANTS.
Synthetic, semi-fluid greases will be used, enriched with anti-oxidant, anti-corrosion and extreme pressure
additives, "fort E. P.".
They have high oxidation stability and are resistant to both leaking and the formation of grooves.
They also have a wide margin of service temperatures and very low friction coefficients.
C GEAR TEETH.
The aim of greasing the teeth is to form a superficial film of lubricant that prevents direct contact with the
metal.
GREASING PERIODS.
Establish greasing periods depending on the service conditions.
In general, greasing should be done after every 100 operating hours.

It should be done more often in tropical climes or in very humid conditions, when there is a lot of dust and dirt
present, if there are large temperature changes or when the slewing unit is in continuous use.
Before and after any prolonged periods in which the crane is not in service it is essential to re-grease.
LUBRICANT EQUIVALENTS
GREASE BEACON MOBILUX ALVANIA EP

A
LTX-EP EP EP S. GREASE EP
ENERGOL CARDREXA SURETT MOLYKOTE MOBILTAC CARDIUM
B
WRL DC1 FLUID 4k KGP-2M 81 FLUID C
GREASE GLYGOYLE TIVELA
C
S420 GREASE 00 COMPOUND A
If lubricants other than those given in the table are applied, the manufacturer or supplier of the lubricant
should be asked to provide confirmation that the selected lubricant is suitable for the planned application
and that its characteristics at least correspond to the requirements indicated in the table.
2 / 2 Rev: B 11/24 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A Approved 6 / 040 / 22

-
LUBRICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS (slewing gear) -
1-Nipple
LUBRICANTS
place type capacity
A- Rolling strip MOLYKOTE BR-2 -

B- Teeth MOLYKOTE KGP-2M -
GREASE CHANGES
1
initial maintenance
A- 50 hours A- 100 hours

A B B- 50 hours B- 100 hours
A) LUBRICATION OF THE ROLLING STRIP

The purpose of filling with grease is to diminish the friction, in addition to making tight and to protect against
corrosion. Enough grease should be injected in order to create a collar of fresh grease around the whole
perimeter of the slot between the rings and in the joints. During the greasing operation the crown must be
rotated to ensure the proper distribution of grease all along the inside of the roller paths.
Use only greases of the type KP 2 K. That means mineral greases saponified with lithium, belonging to the
class NLGI-2, with additives EP.
B) LUBRICATION OF THE TEETH

Teeths are lubricated in order to create a lubricant surface film which avoids direct metallic contact.
PERIODS OF LUBRICATION
Establish the lubrication periods depending on the working conditions.
Generally, it should be lubricated every 100 working hours.These periods should be shorter in case the crane
works in tropical ambient, with high humidity, with high levels of dust and dirt, in case there are big temperature
changes and when the travelling is being used for long periods of time.
The crane should be lubricated before and after long periods of time when it is going to be out of service.
When the gear is being cleaned, special care must be taken in order to avoid that the detergent may damage
the joints, and that it does not slip into the rolling strips.
In order to improve the covering of the contact surfaces and their durability, we recommend that greasing
should be done using a brush throughout the 360º of the rotation crown.
For tasks with small rotation sectors, increase the greasing frequency for those sectors to once a
week.
Lack of regular greasing may lead to noise during the rotation manoeuvre.
In case it is used another lubricant different from those specified on the table, the manufacturer or the
supplier should give a written confirmation that the chosen lubricant is also appropriated for that determined
use, and that its qualities comply at least with those indicated in the mentioned table. Special greases or
lubricants will be required in case the crane will be used at a very low temperatures ( <-20ºC ).
EQUIVALENCE OF GREASE
A MOLYKOTE ENERGREASE EPEXELF GREASE RENOLIT MOBILUX ALVANIA

BR-2 LS-EP2 2 EP2 MP-2 EP2 SREASE EP-2

B MOLYKOTE ENERGOL CARDREXA SURETT - MOBILTAC CARDIUM
KGP-2M WRL DC1 FLUID 4k - 81 FLUID C

REDOC.MA_
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS (hoisting gear) RX02/818
GEARBOX
Gearboxes should be filled up whenever the level of lubricant falls below that marked as "normal" on the level
indicator.
Doing so guarantees that the gears and bearings are correctly lubricated, assuming that a lubricant of suitable
quality is used.
When filling the gearbox, the level marked "normal" must not be exceeded.
The bearings should not be greased independently, since they are lubricated by the splashing of oil given off
by the gears.
1 Fill plug
2 Drain plug
3 Sight glass
LUBRICANT QUALITY
Two types of lubricants can be used depending on the gearbox operating conditions and environmental con-
ditions at the work site.
1 MINERAL OILS
They are appropriate for moderate loads, normal use of the mechanism and with no extreme tempera-
tures.
Lubricants with great ability to reduce the friction coefficient, high heat and corrosion stability, high co-
rrosion and oxidation resistance in the presence of moisture, foaming resistance, good water separation
ability, and high performance under extreme pressure and high wear resistance shall be used.
Lubricants must comply with DIN 51517 part 3, U.S. Steel 224, AGMA 250.04 and Cincinnati Milacron
P-35 and P-59 specifications.
2 SYNTHETIC OILS
They are appropriate for heavy loads, continuous operation and where extreme temperatures are ex-
pected.
Medium viscosity synthetic oil or grease containing antioxidant additives, corrosion resistant and good
performance under extreme pressure «fort E.P.», high
temperatures and very small friction coefficient shall be used.

REDOC.MA_
LUBRICANT CHANGE
The lubricant of gearboxes using mineral oil must be changed periodically.
The lubricant of gearboxes using synthetic oil or grease does not need changing but the lubricant level or
quantity must be maintained.
The lubricant must be changed in accordance with the specified frequency or as a function of the lubricant
condition (adequate viscosity, oil oxidation, sand contamination, etc.).
For this purpose, all gears must be thoroughly cleaned with petrol. The purpose of said cleaning is to remove
the metallic wear particles that could result in more wear, substantial pitting and scratching on the gear teeth
surface. Also, said wear particles act as lubricant oxidation catalyst.
Make sure the oil selected is compatible with the mechanism oil, otherwise, carry out a thorough cleaning
prior to oil change.
If the lubricant used differs from the ones shown in the table, seek confirmation from the lubricant ma-
nufacturer or supplier that the lubricant selected is appropriate for the application and complies at least
with the quality requirements shown in the table.
For low temperature applications (<-20 ºC), special grease or lubricant is required.
The gearbox leaves the factory with the lubricant shown in the table below.
Fill plug ORIGINAL OIL

TYPE: mineral oil QUANTITY
MYSTIK JT-7 49 litre
OIL CHANGE
Sight glass
FIRST CHANGE MANTENIMIENTO
Drain plug
150 hours 2500 hours
APPROVED MINERAL OILS
MYSTIK ENERGOL REDUCTELF SPARTAN RENEP MOBIL GEAR OMALA OIL

JT-7 GRXP 150 SP 150 EP 150 COMPOUND 104 629 150

REDOC.MA_
GEARBOX
Gearboxes should be filled up whenever the level of lubricant falls below that marked as "normal" on the level
indicator.
Doing so guarantees that the gears and bearings are correctly lubricated, assuming that a lubricant of suitable
quality is used.
When filling the gearbox, the level marked "normal" must not be exceeded.
The bearings should not be greased independently, since they are lubricated by the splashing of oil given off
by the gears.
1 Fill plug
2 Drain plug
3 Sight glass
LUBRICANT QUALITY
1 MINERAL OILS
tures.
2 SYNTHETIC OILS
pected.

REDOC.MA_
LUBRICANT CHANGE
If the lubricant used differs from the ones shown in the table, seek confirmation from the lubricant ma-
nufacturer or supplier that the lubricant selected is appropriate for the application and complies at least
with the quality requirements shown in the table.
For low temperature applications (<-20 ºC), special grease or lubricant is required.
ORIGINAL OIL
Fill plug
MYSTIK JT-7 25 litre
OIL CHANGE
Sight glass
FIRST CHANGE MAINTENANCE
Drain plug
150 h 2500 h
MYSTIK ENERGOL REDUCTELF SPARTAN RENEP MOBIL GEAR OMALA OIL

JT-7 GRXP 150 SP 150 EP 150 COMPOUND 104 629 150

CFU-7.5
GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (trolley) REDOC.LC
GEARBOX
Gearboxes must always be refilled with oil whenever the oil level is below the indicator «normal» level mark.
Said level ensures a correct gear and bearing lubrication, provided a lubricant of adequate quality is used.
During gearbox refill, the «normal» level mark must not be exceeded.
Bearings must not be lubricated separately, as they are splash lubricated by the gear motion.
1 Fill plug
2 Drain plug
3 Sight glass
LUBRICANT QUALITY
1 MINERAL OILS
tures.
2 SYNTHETIC OILS
pected.

CFU-7.5
GREASING INSTRUCTIONS (trolley) REDOC.LC
LUBRICANT CHANGE
If the lubricant used differs from the ones shown in the table, seek confirmation from the lubricant
manufacturer or supplier that the lubricant selected is appropriate for the application and complies at
least with the quality requirements shown in the table.
Special greases or lubricants will be required in case the crane will be used at a very low temperatures
(<-20ºC ).
Fill plug ORIGINAL OIL

CEPSA ENGRANAJES HP220 2,8 litres
OIL CHANGE
Sight glass
FIRST CHANGE MAINTENANCE
Drain plug 150 h 2500 h
ENGRANAJES ENERGOL REDUCTELF SPARTAN RENEP MOBIL GEAR OMALA OIL

HP220 GRXP 220 SP 220 EP 220 COMPOUND 106 630 220

-
ELECTROMAGNETIC BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS -
The brake types are described according to the motor model or type installed at the crane in
the "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS" section, in the Chapter entitled "MECHANISM SPECI-
FICATIONS".
The following pages contain, maintenance instructions for each brake model.
Nevertheless, in general it is practical to establish the following:
- Brakes are an important feature for crane operation safety. Their

operation should be checked every working day before operating the
machine. Any disturbance noted, either during this inspection or during
the normal operation of the crane, should be reported to the site fore-
man, and, if necessary, crane operation should be stopped.
- When the crane is installed for the first time or when the motors
or brakes are new, the brakes should be checked after approximately
one working week and adjusted if necessary.
In case of repeated emergency stops within a short period of time, the

brakes should be checked immediately by qualified personnel, since
they may be adversely affected and lose their braking power and load-
retaining capabilities.
- Under poor weather conditions or after a long period of inopera-

tion, the brake disc may get stuck to the friction surface. As a result,
the brake opening should be controlled before starting again, and, the
disc should be released, if necessary.

-
BRAKE: TIPE "S", "MS" -
FOR DETAILS ON BUILT-IN BRAKE REFER TO CHAPTER “TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS”, PARAGRAPH

“CHARACTERISTICS OF MOTORS”
O CONTENTS
2 PERIODICAL SERVICE
3 BRAKING COUPLE ADJUSTMENT
4 AIR GAP CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT
5 COIL REPLACEMENT
6 BRAKE DISC REPLACEMENT
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Some of the operations described below, for instance, replacing the magnet, will require to leave the
motor with the locking brake inoperative. In this case, make sure that the motor will not rotate, for
instance, preventing the hook to fall freely or the trolley to move. If this is not possible, suitably lock any
possible movement before proceeding to carry out the required maintenance operation. In any case,
these maintenance operations shall be performed with no load suspended from the hook.
On cranes that can be weathervaned remotely from the control panel, this system loses its adjustment
when the realese device is dismounted so the brake can be accessed. It must therefore be readjusted
when the device is re-mounted, as per points 3 and 4 of these instructions.
1 Brake protection
2 Column
3 Coil fixing nut
4 Air gap adjustment nut
5 Braking torque adjustment nut
6 Brake spring
7 Moving magnet
8 Brake disc
9 Coil
10 Manual releasing
The brake is of electromagnetic type.

Its function is to brake the movement of electric motor.
Normally, it is electrically actuated (brake open) when the control which governs the movement of the system
driven by the motor is moved by the crane operator out of its neutral position.
On the contrary, the brake is electrically released (brake closed) when the control is returned to its neutral position.
However, in some cases the brake action may be delayed in order to obtain a smoother braking effect.

-
2 PERIODICAL SERVICE
Every three months:
Verify for a correct air gap (“A” distance) between moving magnet (7) and brake coil (9). Adjust air gap if required:
refer to paragraph 4.
If the brake is disassembled or adjusted:

Thoroughly clean all brake components using pressure air.
After disassembling the brake, apply a thin grease layer on moving magnet pegs.
Important.
Make sure that all friction surfaces are free from grease.
3 BRAKING COUPLE ADJUSTMENT

Electromagnetic brakes are perfectly adjusted at factory. However, it is advisable in some cases to increase or
reduce the braking pressure according to the conditions of work site.
To reduce the braking force, adjust the three nuts (5) by rotating them in the direction required to release the
pressure applied by springs (6).
To increase the braking force, adjust nuts (5) in reverse direction.
When increasing the braking force, prevent applying excessive pressure on the springs, making sure that the
electromagnetic field generated by the brake coil is sufficient to overcome the spring forces.
The following contains the information to adjust the braking torqueof the trolley,slewing and traveling motor
brakes:
Movement Motor Manufacturer Brake Yellow Spring White Spring

4,5 kgm 100S - (*) H=16,0
5,5 kgm 100S - (*) H=17,5
6,5 kgm 100S H=16,0 (*) H=17,5

SLEWING BESOZZI
7,5 kgm 110MS H=33,0 (*) H=19,5
9,0 kgm 110MS H=32,5 (*) H=18,0
12,0 kgm 110MS (*) H=31,5 H=16,5
0,7/2,6 CV 100S - (*) H=18,5

TROLLEY BESOZZI
2,2 kW 100S - (*) H=18,5
3,0 kgm 80S - (*) H=12,0
4,5 kgm 100S - (*) H=18,5

TRAVELLING BESOZZI
5,5 kgm 100S - (*) H=18,5
7,5 kgm 110MS (*) H=32,0
H= Length of the brake springs (6) when it is applied (braking)

(*) Current equipment.
Before adjusting the spring, check its color and choose the appropiate valve from the table.
Important:
Make sure that braking force adjustment is made by actuating on the three nuts (5). Spring pressure must be
suitably balanced.
Do not actuate on nuts (3 and 4) when performing this adjustment operation.

-
4 AIR GAP CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT

Checking:
The use of brake involves wear of friction surface of brake disc (8), causing the air gap to increase.
Verify dimension “A” by means of a set of feeler gauges every three months.
Brake type Air gap
minimum maximum
60 0,3 1,2
70 - 80 - 90 0,5 1,2
100 - 110 - 120 1,0 1,5
140 - 160 - 180 - FM158/1 1,0 1,5
Adjust air gap whenever dimension “A” exceeds the maximum allowable value.
Adjustment:
If dimension “A” exceeds the maximum allowable value:
4.1 Loosen the three nuts (4)
4.2 Tighten the three nuts (3), moving the coil toward the moving magnet.
4.3 Verify for a correct air gap and make sure that dimension “A” is within the allowable range and is
evenly distributed along the entire coil circumference.
4.4 Tighten the three nuts (4) to keep the coil locked.
5 COIL REPLACEMENT
The coil is covered with a solid resin, making up a compact block which must be totally replaced if required.
5.1 Disconnect coil supply wires from motor terminal box.
5.2 Remove manual brake releasing assembly, if any.
5.3 Remove brake protection cover.
5.4 Remove the three nuts (3) and then the coil.
5.5 Replace the coil by a new one.
5.6 Assemble the brake by following a reverse procedure, taking care to adjust the air gap as described
in paragraph 4.
6 BRAKE DISC REPLACEMENT

Brake disc is made of steel and a friction material and its is fixed to motor shaft by means of a pinion.
6.1 Disconnect coil supply wires from motor terminal box.
6.2 Remove manual brake releasing assembly, if any.
6.3 Remove brake protection cover.
6.4 Remove the three nuts (3).
6.5 Remove coil (9).
6.6 Loosen nuts (4 and 5), remove brake springs (6) and then moving magnet (7).
6.7 Replace brake disc by a new one.
6.8 Assemble the brake by following a reverse procedure, taking care to adjust the air gap as described
in paragraph 4.
The disc should be changed when the thickness of the brake lining
is inferior to the value indicated in the table.
Minimum Thickness
Brake type of Brake dining (K)
80 1
100 - 110 - 120 1,5
140 - 160 - FM158/1 1,7

-
BRAKE : TYPE "FCO" -
TO LEARN WHICH STANDARD BRAKE IS INCLUDED SEE THE SECTION ON MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
IN THE CHAPTER “TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS”
0 CONTENTS
2 CONTINUOUS SERVICE
3 GAP ADJUSTMENT
4 BRAKING TORQUE
5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
6 MANUAL RELEASE
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Some of the operations below (e.g. changing the electro-magnet) will lead to the motor being left without a
locking brake. In such cases, ensure that the motor cannot slip, causing for instance free fall of the hook on
hoisting motors or trolley displacement. Block any movements before carrying out the operation. In any event
these operations should always be performed with no load on the hook.
1 Brake cover
2 Armature
4 Nut
5 Lock nut
6 Brake spring
8 Gap adjustment screw
9 Fixed electro-magnet
10 Fixed brake ring
11 Brake disc
12 Brake endshield
13 Rotor shaft
An electro-magnetic brake is used to brake the movement of the electric motor. It is normally activated elec-
trically (open brake) when the manipulator controlling the movement to which the motor belongs is moved out
of the neutral position by the crane operator.
It is deactivated electrically (close brake) when the manipulator is returned to the neutral position. However on
some occasions brake action may be delayed for smoother braking.
When the fixed electro-magnet (9) is powered it opens the armature (2) which compresses the spring (6) and
frees the disc (11). The brake is then open.
When power is disconnected the armature (2) is free, and under pressure from the spring (6) it presses the
crown wheel (10) onto the disc (11).
The crown wheel (10) is prevented from spinning by the brake endshield (12).
Every 3 months: check that the brake works properly. If opening speed is too slow, adjust the gap.
Each time the brake is disassembled: clean it carefully.

-
BRAKE : TYPE "FCO" -
3 GAP ADJUSTMENT
The gap must be adjusted as soon as release is observed not to
take place properly (brake opening too slowly or not at all). Unscrew
the positioning screw (8) and take it out of the holes in the armature
(2). Using a screwdriver on the slotted exterior, fully unscrew the
armature so that it rests on the electro-magnet (9). Screw up the
armature (2) again, resting on the screw (7) in the third hole.
4 BRAKING TORQUE
Braking torque is factory set and cannot be adjusted on site.
5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
5.1 Disassembly
Cut the power. Open the terminal box and identify the cables and their positions (motor and brake power, pro-
bes, etc.). Then disconnect the power cables.
Dismount the brake motor using suitable tools (extractors, plastic body maces, calibrated screwdrivers & wren-
ches, grips for circlips, etc.)
Remove the lock nut (5) and unscrew the nut (4).
Unscrew the three fixing screws on the electro-magnet and remove the magnet carefully so as not to damage
the power cables.
Remove the armature (2) and lined crown wheel (11) assembly, and unscrew the armature from the crown
wheel.
Clean the components.
Use only an air jet for electrical components (no solvents or wet products),
white spirit or a similar cleaner for mechanical parts,
and a scraper for connections.
If necessary degrease the brake disc(s) and lining(s).
Change the seals and check the condition of the bearings. Disconnect the rectifier bridge and check the stator
insulation (> 100 megohms).
Identify any faulty item so that a replacement can be ordered.
5.2 Assembly
Open bearings must be re-greased before assembly with grease suitable for their working conditions. Shafts
and bearing boxes should be lightly lubricated. The lips of seals should be lined with grease and re-fitted with
care (using the key slot protection bushes). Connections which must be leak-tight must be coated with a fine
layer of sealing paste.
Screw the armature (2) onto the lined crown wheel (11) with the flat side outwards. Remove the electro-magnet
positioning screw (8), and position the crown/armature assembly and the spring stop in the electro-magnet.
Fit the spring (6) and the nut (7) on the release bar, and screw the nut onto the electro-magnet a few turns.
Assemble on the brake endshield (12) and attach via the three screws and washers, tightening them alternately
until they are locked.
Adjust the gap and the braking torque (see sections 3 & 4).
Screw up the lock nut (5).
Re-connect the rectifier bridge and the probes if necessary, then the motor, ensuring that the cables are correctly
placed. Close the terminal box.
Check that the whole unit works properly and ensure, if necessary, that the release lever is properly fitted before
mounting the unit on the machine.
6 MANUAL RELEASE
To release the brake manually, turn the lock nut (5) clockwise. This operation should only be carried out when
really necessary, and should be left to competent personnel familiar with the effects of releasing or braking the
motor.
Unscrew the lock nut (5) again before returning to normal operation.

-
BRAKE : TYPE "NFF" -
TO IDENTIFY BRAKE TYPE FITTED, CONSULT CHAPTER “TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS” – SECTION–

MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS.
O CONTENTS
2 BRAKING TORQUE
3 ADJUSTING AND CHECKING THE AIR GAP
4 CHANGING FERODO LININGS
5 MICRO APERTURE BRAKE
6 MANUAL UNLOCKING
7 DOUBLE BRAKE
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Certain operations described below involve leaving the motor without the locking brake, such as changing
the electromagnet or adjusting the air gap. Under these circumstances, make sure this would not allow
the motor to slip, for example allowing the hook to fall freely in the case of the hoisting motor, or the trolley
to move. If this is possible, lock any possible movement before proceeding with the task in hand. In any
case, these operations should always be carried out with no load on the hook.
1 Electromagnet body 10 Pin 19 Spring

2 Outer casing 11 Joint 22 Inspection cover
3 Shim 12 Cover 23 Brake fixing screw
4 Moving armature 13 Bearing 24 Brake cover fixing screw
5 Brake disc 14 Unlocking lever 25 Electromagnet fixing screw
6 Toothed hub 15 Terminal box 26 Joint
7 Brake flange 16 Micro switch 27 Joint
8 Encoder cover 17 Actuator bolt 35 Plug
9 Key 18 Stop nut
Fig. 1

-
The brake is of electromagnetic type using a brake disc with two braking surfaces. The brake is applied by
pressure springs in the absence of current, and released by electromagnetic force.
If the coil (1) is not supplied with energy, the cylindrical springs (19) push the moving armature (4) axially against
the brake disc (5). The disc is clamped between the moving armature (4) and the flange (7), so that the motor
shaft is locked via the pinion (8) which joins it to the brake disc (5).
When the coil (1) is supplied with energy, the moving armature (4) is attracted towards the coil body (1), over-
coming the spring (19) pressure and operating the microswitch (16) with the actuator bolt (17)
This frees the brake disc (5), the brake is open (off) and a status signal is sent.
2 BRAKING TORQUE
Brakes are supplied set to the rated torque.
Brakes cannot be adjusted or reset.
3 ADJUSTING AND CHECKING THE AIR GAP

3.1 Checking the air gap
The air gap increases with use due to wear of the Ferodo linings. However, for the brake to work properly it is
important that the air gap does not exceed the maximum air gap dimension as shown in the table, and this gap
must be adjusted depending on the amount of brake usage. If this task is not performed and the air gap beco-
mes excessive, the coil body (1) will not have enough force to attract the moving armature (4). An excessive
air gap also reduces the rated braking torque.
The air gap is the dimension between the moving armature (4) and the coil body (1), with no electrical supply
to the coil. A set of feeler gauges is used to measure the gap; remove the inspection cover (22) and insert the
corresponding gauge via the threaded hole.
Brake size Nominal air gap Maximum air gap

(mm) (mm)
63 0,7 1,5
100 0,7 1,6
100/140 0,7 1,6
100/140 Doble (*) 0,7 1,6
160/210R 0,7 1,6
(*) Two 100/140 brakes fitted in series.
3.2 Adjusting the air gap

If the air gap as checked in point 3.1 exceeds the permitted maximum, it needs adjusting as follows. Remove the
threaded plugs (35), and in their place fit the screws supplied in the brake terminal box. Tighten these screws
so the moving armature (4) is held against the electromagnet body (1). Remove screws 23 and 25, allowing
the electromagnet and armature assembly to be dismantled.
Withdraw the shim (3) and refit the brake.
Screws 23 and 25 must be tightened as per the table.
Brake size Braking torque

(Nm)
63 36
100 36
100/140 36
100/140 Doble 36
160/210R 74

-
Remove the electromagnet body and moving armature fixing screws and fit the threaded plugs (35) in their
place.
NOTE: If the shim (3) had already been taken out, the brake disc (5) will have to be changed and a new shim
fitted.
4 CHANGING FERODO LININGS

The Ferodo linings must be changed when the air gap needs adjusting and the shim (3) has already been
taken out.
Before changing the Ferodo linings, check the moving armature (4) and flange (7) surfaces. If they show marks,
they must be machined or ground smooth.
New Ferodo linings do not initially transmit full braking torque, and a certain number of applications are neces-
sary before this occurs.
The air gap must be checked shortly after changing the linings.
When changing Ferodo linings, make sure the braking surfaces are free from grease or dry lubricants.
If necessary, degreasers such as trichloroethylene or tetra chloromethane may be used for cleaning.
Never use petrol.
Re-adjust the brake as described in section 3.2.
5 MICRO APERTURE BRAKE

5.1 Description
The brake aperture test microswitch is operated when the brake is active. An actuator situated in the
mobile electromagnet operates the microswitch when the electromagnet is drawn by the fixed electro-
magnet (coil).
This microswitch prevents the motor working against the brake, in case of a malfunction of the latter.
During the commencement of each lifting operation, it is verified that the microswitch has actuated after
a brief time period and the movement is stopped if this is not the case.
The system is protected against short circuit of the microswitch or in the signal cables, such that the
lifting movement will not operate in this case. Before the movement commences, the condition of the
microswitch is checked, which should be open (since the brake is not activated).
5.2 Maintenance
The microswitch does not require maintenance or adjustment during normal operation.
The microswitch does not require adjustment when a gap adjustment is carried out.
The microswitch should only be adjusted in case of malfunctioning, or if the location or regulation is
adjusted during maintenance operations (for example, coil replacement).
5.2.1 Regulation of the microswitch (See Fig. 1 and 2).
Verify that there is no load suspended from the crane hook.
INSERT GAUGES
Fig. 2

-
1.- Remove plugs (35), remove electromagnet fixing screws (25) next to the plugs and put them in place to
disengage the brake. Once this is done, remove the encoder cover (8) and proceed to remove the brake
by undoing the screws (23).
2.- With the brake on a working surface, loosen the three electromagnet fixing screws (25), and introduce
0.2 mm thick feeler gauges in each air gap inspection hole, tighten screws (25) until these two gages
are trapped.
3.- Turn the brake to place the mobile armature (4) facing up. Place a multimeter between black and brown
cables of the micro. Loosen locknut (18) and adjust plunger stud (17) until the multimeter measures
electrical continuity and beeps, then tighten locknut (18) without moving the plunger stud (17).
4.- ALoosen electromagnet fixing screws (25), remove the 0.2 mm feeler gauges and introduce the 0.3 mm
gauges, tighten again screws (25) until these other two feeler gauges are trapped.
If NO electrical continuity is measured by the multimeter the micro is correctly set. If there is continuity
repeat the procedure of section 3.
5.- Loosen electromagnet fixing screws (25), and remove the feeler gauges, mount the brake into the motor
fixing it by screws (23), remove electromagnet fixing screws (25) and place them in their original position,
place plugs (35) in position and finally install the encode cover (8).
5.2.2 Inspection of micro installation (see fig. 1 and 2).
Check that no load is suspended from the crane hook.
1.- Remove air gap inspection covers (22) and introduce 0.3 mm thick feeler gauges into each inspection
hole.
2.- Remove plugs (35), undo electromagnet fixing screws (25) next to the plugs and place them in position,
tighten the screws until the two feeler gauges are trapped.
3.- Place a multimeter between black and brown cables of the micro; no electrical continuity must be mea-
sured.
4.- Loosen electromagnet fixing screws (25), remove 0.3 mm feeler gauges and introduce the 0.2 mm gau-
ges, tighten again screws (25) until these other two feeler gauges are trapped.
If the multimeter measures electrical continuity, the micro is correctly adjusted; if no electrical continuity is
measured proceed to adjust the micro correctly in accordance with paragraph 5.2.1 Micro adjustment.
A signal failure of the micro can be caused by:

a.- The mobile armature (4) does not close properly against the electromagnet body (1) as a result of ex-
cessive air gap
Air gap must be adjusted, see section 3
b.- The mobile armature (4) does not close properly against the electromagnet body (1) as a result of the
presence of foreign bodies between both.
.c.- Incorrect micro adjustment.
6 MANUAL UNLOCKING
This operation is only allowed in cases of emergency, for example to lower a load on the hook in the
absence of electrical power, or during maintenance work, and may only be carried out by competent
personnel who are aware of the consequences of unlocking the brake.
This procedure must never be used as a normal method of working.
Use the manual lever (14) if the brake is fitted with one.
If not, unlock the brake using the screws (35) that fix the electromagnet body to the moving armature (see
section 3.2). This involves fitting them in place of the threaded plugs. Make sure to remove the screws (35) and
replace the threaded plugs before bringing the brake into use.

-
7 DOUBLE BRAKE
37 Brake side flange

38 Internal brake setscrew
39 Internal side coil
The remaining parts are the same as is indicated in Fig. 1
40 External brake coil
41 External brake setscrew
Fig. 3
The operation of the double brake is the same as that described in Point 1 of this chapter.
The internal brake disk (motor side) and the external brake disk (encoder side) operate at the same time.
Since both brakes (disks, springs, etc.) are almost the same, the points described 1, 2, 3, 4
and 5, for a brake, similarly apply for the double brake.
The dismantling of the internal brake is carried out by first dismantling the external brake.

-
BRAKE: LENZE BFK 458 TYPE -
TO IDENTIFY BRAKE TYPE FITTED, CONSULT CHAPTER “TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS” – SECTION –

MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS.
0 CONTENTS
3 ADJUSTMENT OF BRAKING TORQUE
4 ADJUSTMENT OF AIR GAP
5 CHANGING BRAKE DISC
6 MANUAL UNLOCKING
IMPORTANT NOTE
Certain operations described below involve leaving the motor without the locking brake, changing the
electromagnet or brake disc, for example. In these cases, the mechanism must be appropriately immobilised
to make sure the motor cannot slip before proceeding. In any case, these operations should always be
carried out with no load on the hook.
The brake is of electromagnetic type using a brake disc with two braking surfaces. Spring pressure ensures
braking torque through friction. The brake is opened by supplying direct current to the brake coil.
During braking the rotor (2.0), which moves axially on the pinion (3.0), is pressed against the friction surface
by the moving electromagnet (1.2) by means of springs (1.4).
When the brake is applied there is an air gap SLü between the coil body (1.1) and the moving electromagnet
(1.2). When the brake is opened, direct current is supplied to the coil (1.1); the magnetic force generated attracts
the moving electromagnet (1.2) towards the coil body (1.1), overcoming the force of the springs. The braking
disc is freed and the motor rotor may turn freely.
1.1 Coil body

1.2 Moving electromagnet
1.3 Thrust piece
1.4 Spring
1.5 Adjusting nut
1.6 Threaded bush
2.0 Rotor
2.1 Brake lining
3.0 Toothed hub
8.1 Allen screw DIN912
8.2 Locking washer

-
Wear on the braking surface of the brake disc depends on operating conditions. There is a gradual reduction
in friction until brake adjustment becomes necessary.
It is recommended to check the air gap SLü a week after putting into service, and thereafter every three months.
Checking the brake lining thickness and brake operation is also recommended every three months.
Air gap Disk thickness

Brake (mm) Bolt tightenin (mm) Omax
Type
torque (Nm) torque (Nm) (mm)
Nominal max max min
06 4 0,2 0,5 2,8 6,0 4,5 4,5
08 8 0,2 0,5 5,5 7,0 5,5 4,5
10 16 0,2 0,5 9,5 9,0 7,5 7,5
12 32 0,3 0,75 9,5 10,0 8,0 9,5
14 60 0,3 0,75 23 10,0 7,5 11
16 80 0,3 0,75 23 11,5 8,0 10
18 150 0,4 1,0 23 13,0 10,0 15
20 260 0,4 1,0 46 16,0 12,0 17
25 400 0,5 1,25 46 20,0 15,5 19,5
25 600 0,5 0,75 46 20,0 15,5 19,5
2.1 INSPECTION OF BRAKE LINING THICKNESS

The disc must not turn during this inspection.
1. Remove the brake cover.

2. Measure brake lining thickness using a calibre.
3. Compare the measurements taken with the minimum permitted thickness (see table: depends on
type of brake).
4. If necessary, change the brake disc.
2.2 INSPECTION OF AIR GAP

The motor must not turn during this inspection.
1. Measure the air gap SLü between the moving electromagnet and the coil body using feeler gau-
ges.
2. Compare the measurement taken with the maximum permitted, depending on brake size (see
table).
3. If necessary, adjust the air gap to the recommended value.
2.3 INSPECTION DURING OPERATION

Do not touch either brake disc or connecting cables where not insulated.
1. Observe the air gap during operation. It should be zero.

2. Measure the voltage of the direct current in the brake coil during operation. The figure should be
indicated on the maker’s plate. A variation of 10% is permissible.
3 ADJUSTMENT OF BRAKING TORQUE

Spring pressure and therefore braking torque may be changed using the adjusting nut (1.5).
To reduce torque, the adjusting nut should be turned anti-clockwise.
Note the stops when turning the nut. Positions between stops are not permitted.
Never exceed the value Omax (see table).

Do not exceed the maximum permitted air gap SLü.
This regulation of the torque by means of adjustment nut is only possible in elevation the connected
motor brakes.

-
4 ADJUSTMENT OF AIR GAP

Disconnect the electrical supply to the brake.
The brake must be free from torque.
1. Loosen the screws (8.1).
2. Tighten the threaded bushes (1.6) in towards the coil body. 1/6 of a turn reduces the air gap by
about 0.15 mm.
3. Tighten the screws (see table for tightening torque).
4. Check the air gap near the screws using feeler gauges. Consult the table for the recommended
air gap value.
5. If the difference between the measured and recommended values is too large, repeat the ad-
justment.
Unlocking
lever
5 CHANGING THE BRAKE DISC

Disconnect the electrical supply to the brake.
The brake must be free from torque.
1. Disconnect the supply cable.
2. Remove the screws (8.1).
3. Remove the coil body, taking care with the supply cable.
4. Remove the brake disc and check that the pinion teeth are not damaged. If they are worn, the
pinion must also be replaced.
5. Loosen the threaded bushes to adapt the air gap to the new brake disc thickness.
6. Fit the new disc and the coil body.
7. Adjust the air gap to the value recommended in the table.
8. Reconnect the supply cable.
6 MANUAL UNLOCKING
This operation may only be carried out, in case of need, by competent personnel aware ofthe
consequences of working on the brake unlocking mechanism.
To realese the brake, push the realese leaver towards the motor.
The unfreezing normal is only included in elevation the connected motor brakes.

-
BRAKE: TYPE "FCPL60H" -
TO LEARN MORE ABOUT THE TYPE OF BUILT-IN BRAKE, SEE CHAPTER "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS"
--SECTION-- MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
0 CONTENTS
2 INSTALLATION
3 POWER SUPPLY
4 ADJUSTING THE AIR GAP
5 REPLACING THE DISC
6 FITTING
7 CHARACTERISTICS
8 OPTIONAL
9 REPAIR GUIDE
IMPORTANT NOTE:
In the following instructions, there are certain operations, for example replacing the electromagnet or
the disc brake, or adjusting the screws for tightening the brake spring, which will involve leaving the
motor without a locking brake. In these cases, ensure that this does not mean that motor will slide
out of position, for example, by falling freely from the hook. If this risk is present, block any possible
movement before carrying out the operation. In any case, these operations must be always carried
out with no load under the hook.
8 8 Axle shaft
9 Yoke
11 Mobile electromagnet
12 Friction element
15 Disc
21 Washer
24 Nuts
28 Spring
31 Nuts
34 Columns
39 Rear cover
50 Joint sealing
73 Joint
Fig. 1
2 INSTALLATION
Follow the general start-up recommendations for the installation of brake coupled motors.
Make sure that the brake is in the locked stop position.

-
3 POWER SUPPLY
The FCPL60H brake is equipped with a DC coil and a CDF 7 power supply unit.
The technical data and information is available in the manual supplied with the card.
4 ADJUSTING THE AIR GAP

Make sure that the brake is disconnected and that there is no load on the motor before carrying out any
operations with the brake.
The air gap is the distance that separates the mobile electromagnet 11 from the yoke 9 when the coil is not
energised (Fig. 2).
It must be adjusted when abnormal unlocking occurs or when its value reaches 1.3 mm.
Adjusting the air gap (Fig. 1):

- De-energise the coil and remove the rear cover 39.
- Next, loosen the nuts 31 to move the mobile electromagnet close to the yoke 9.
- The adjustment process is carried out by inserting a 0.5 mm gauge for the brakes with 1 disc and a 0.6
mm gauge for the brakes with 2 discs, between the yoke 9 and mobile electromagnet 11.
- Once this has been checked, retighten the nuts 24. If the brake has been correctly adjusted, it must close
freely when energised and the disc must not rub.
- Refit the rear cover 39.
he intervals between checks and adjustments depends on the types of service, service factor, motor
T
position and its application.
Air gap Minimum distance
Fig. 2
5 REPLACING THE DISC

These removal must be performed with aid of the correct tools.
- Remove the rear cover 39 and disconnect the power supply cables of the brake.
In the case of the encoder option, disconnect it and unlock the coupling. Slide the encoder and pull it
fully away from the coupling.
- Insert two 150 mm M8 threaded rods fitted with washers and nuts in the holes of the yoke 9.
Once in position, tighten the nut until it is separated from the surface, constituting a single braking
block.

-
- Loosen the three fixing nuts 24 (18" wrench).

- Slide and remove the brake block from the columns 34 by progressively unscrewing the nuts 31 (19"
wrench).
- Remove the worn disc 15 by sliding it on its groove.
- Clean the friction surfaces of the axle shaft 8 and the mobile electromagnet 11, ensuring that they are
clean and dry.
- Place the 73 FCPL60H joint in the centre for model 2; the disc will only be in contact with the assembled
bearing 8, fixed to 73 (see Fig. 1).
- Replace the disc with a new one.
- To complete the replacement (see point 6)
6 FITTING
- Place the brake block in the correct position by first adjusting the mobile electromagnet 11 to the column
34; next, place the nuts 31 and pass the lugs 9 through before completing the process.
- Gradually tighten the nuts 31 on the framework's surface 11 and make sure that it is not in contact with
the disc.
- Place the nuts 24 in position.
- Remove the threaded rods.
- Adjust the air gap (see point 3).
- If necessary, replace the seal on joint 50.
- Put the brake in the correct position before putting the cover back.
7 CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical Characteristics (*):

Voltage (V) Service R (Ω) I(A)
180 S3 160 1.2
* Values subject to technical modifications.
Standard brake torques (*):

Brake Standard brake torque
FCPL60H / 1 disc 400 - 570 - 650
FCPL60H / 2 discs 870 - 1000 - 1150 - 1300
* Values subject to technical modifications.
Parts subject to wear:

Ref. Description Part No.
9 Yoke ***
15 Disc 065 AA 060 007
21 Washer 070E 202 054
28 Spring 058E 123 054
CDF7 Card 069E 808 046
50 Joint-cover 965E 000 006
*** When ordering parts, please specify the information on the dataplate and, in particular, the motor's serial
number.
8 OPTIONAL
8-1 Micro-contact (see Fig. 3)
The micro-contact is adjusted at the factory for different applications, depending on whether it will be used to
detect the wear on brakes or act as a brake activation pilot lamp.
In theory, the micro-contact does not have to be adjusted, except when the coil 9 is replaced.

-
Fig. 3
However, the adjustment might be necessary when the contact distance is incorrect.
To adjust the micro-contact, the distances must comply with the minimum value (see Fig. 3)
8-2 Unlocked brake indicator micro-contact.

- Disconnect the connections from the micro-contact and record its position.
- Place an ohmmeter between the terminals.
- Slightly loosen nut 55.
- Set screw 54 in contact with the switch and unscrew it until the micro-contact does not touch the
resistor. The resistance is zero.
- Screw in screw 54, between 1/4 and 1/3 of a turn. The resistance increases to infinite.
- Make sure that the mobile device 11 is in contact with the yoke 9 (free brake).
- Lock nut 55.
- Put the micro-contact back in place.
8-3 Brake wear indicator micro-contact.

- Disconnect the connections from the micro-contact and record its position.
- Place an ohmmeter between the terminals.
- Slightly loosen nut 55.
- Set screw 54 in contact with the switch and unscrew it until the micro-contact does not touch it. The
resistance is zero.
- Continue unscrewing the screw 54, between 3/4 to 1 turn. Value corresponding to 0.7 mm, permitted
brake wear.
- Lock nut 55.
- Put the micro-contact back in place.
9 REPAIR GUIDE.
Defect Possible cause Diagnosis

Very wide air gap distance.
Adjust the distance.
The voltage drops (U<0.8Un)
No voltage in the coil.
Increase to its nominal voltage
The brake does not unlock.
The coil is damaged.
Replace the coil.
The card is not working.
No voltage at the coil's terminals.
Check the card.

-
Defect Possible cause Diagnosis

The voltage must be over 0.9 x
Un.
Check the voltage on the coil.
Adjust the voltage to the nominal
The response time is very long. value.
Excessive air gap. Adjust the air gap.
Adjust the initial values or contact
The brake torque has increased.
our technical service.
Use terminals 3 and 4 of the CDF7
Check the DC.
The voltage drop time is too long. to activate the brake.
The disc is worn. Replace the disc.
Permanent sliding of the brake. Adjust the air gap.
CDF7 Power Supply Card:

The following must be carried out to check the correct operation of the card:
- 1 and 2 connected to the network.
- 3 and 4 connected to each other (shunt).
- 5 and 6 connected to the brake coil or, in its absence, to a 1 to 2.7kΩ resistor.
Use an analogue voltmeter to check the development of the voltage on the terminals.
The card works when it is powered from the grid; the voltmeter indicates that 90% of the grid
voltage (corresponding to a power supply for 500 ms) then stabilises at 22% (maintenance
voltage).
Fig. 4

-
BRAKE: "GR" TYPE -
TO LEARN MORE ABOUT BUILT-IN BRAKES SEE THE "MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS" SECTION OF THE
"TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS" CHAPTER
0 CONTENTS
3 BRAKE TORQUE ADJUSTMENT
4 TESTING AND ADJUSTING THE AIR GAP
5 REPLACING THE COIL
6 REPLACING THE BRAKE DISC
IMPORTANT NOTE:
In the following instructions there are certain operations, for example replacing the electromagnet,
which will leave the motor without a locking brake. In these situations, make sure that this will not
lead to the motor sliding, for example a free fall of the hook in the case of the lifting motor or due to
movement of the trolley in its case. If this risk is present, block any possible movement before carrying
out the operation. In any case, these operations must always be carried out with no load on the hook.
In cranes with remote wind protection operated from the crane control, when removing the release
to access the brake it becomes uncalibrated, which is why during assembly it must be recalibrated
according to points 3 and 4 of this instruction.
B A Attachment screw
B Washer
C C Coil
D Release lever
D (Optional)
E Torque spring
F Mobile electromagnet
E
G Lock nut
H Brake disc
F
I Pinion
G
The brake is electromagnetic with a double sided brake disc. The pressure of the springs (E) ensures the
braking torque through friction.
The brake is opened by applying alternating current to the brake coil.
When the coil is powered (C), the mobile electromagnet (F) is drawn towards the coil overcoming the force of
the springs (E).
The brake disc (H), which is coupled by the pinion (I) to the motor shaft, is freed to enable the rotation of
the motor rotor.

-
BRAKE: "GR" TYPE -
When the coil (C) has no power feed, the springs (E) push the mobile electromagnet (F) pressing
the disc (H) against the engine shield and blocking its rotation.
Braking disc surface wear depends on the operating conditions.
As the brake disc lining wears out, the air gap grows and the spring pressure drops. When the spring pressure
drops, braking torque likewise drops. The air gap must be readjusted when the maximum value indicated in
the table is exceeded. The disc must be changed when the thickness of the brake lining is less than the re-
commended minimum.
Maximum Air gap (SLü) Thickness of lining (a)

Screw tighte-
brake (mm) (mm)
Type ning torque
torque maxi-
minimum (Nm) Nominal minimum
(Nm) mum
GR7 BESOZZI 0.3 1.0 (*) H=16.0 2.5 1.25
GR8
0.3 1.0 (*) H=17.5 3.5 1.75
AC8
GR9 0.3 1.0 (*) H=17.5 3.5 1.75
GR9-H 0.3 1.0 (*) H=19.5 3.5 1.75
GR10 0.3 1.0 (*) H=18.0 3.3 1.65
GR10-2D 0.5 1.0 H=16.5 3.35 1.6
Every three months:

Check the air gap between the mobile electromagnet (F) and the brake coil (C).
Check the thickness of the brake disc lining (H).
Adjust the air gap if necessary: see section 3.
Every time the brake is removed or adjusted:
Clean it thoroughly with compressed air.
Any time it is removed, a thin layer of grease should be applied to the pins of the mobile electromagnet.
3 ADJUSTING THE BRAKE

The electromagnetic brakes are factory fitted. The braking torque is fixed. With adequate maintenance, any
torque variations caused by wear of the disc and resulting increase in the air gap will not be important. If the
disc is in good condition and the air gap is properly adjusted according to the values indicated, the braking
torque will only depend on the number of springs that the brake coil contains. It is therefore very important that
the number and type of springs are always suited to the application.
Below is the braking torque adjustment table according to the application:
Manufactu- Number of
Movement Motor Brake Braking torque
rer springs
ROTATION 7.5 kgm BESOZZI GR7 4 54 Nm

-
BRAKE: "GR" TYPE -
4 TESTING AND ADJUSTING THE AIR GAP

Lack of maintenance of the air gap may prevent the brake from opening, causing its overheating and
ultimately destroying the brake disc and motor.
Use of the brake causes wear of the braking disc surface (H); this increases the air gap.
It will be checked every three months that the value of the air gap is within the range indicated in the above
table, by using a set of gauges.
The air gap must be adjusted whenever its value exceeds the maximum allowed.
4.1 Verifications.
1 Remove the brake manual unlocking assembly, if one is fitted.

2 Remove the brake protection cover.
3 Check the air gap distance with gauges when the brake is de-energised.
4 When the brake is energised, the air gap distance must be reduced to zero.
4.2 Adjustment.
When the air gap distance is greater than the maximum allowed:
This operation should be carried out when the crane is not in service and with no load on the hook.
If the adjustment is made at the end of a work session, make sure that the brake body is not overheated.
An air gap larger than the recommended value may cause excessive loss of braking torque.
1 Loosen the lock nuts (G) and the attachment screws (A).
2 Tighten the screws (A) until the nominal air gap is obtained (see table). Perform this operation alternately
(one screw and then the opposite with gauges). The lock nuts (G) must not prevent the tightening of the
screws (A); if necessary, loosen the screws a little more.
3 Keeping the screws (A) fixed, tighten the lock nuts (G) on the motor shield.
5 REPLACING THE COIL

The coil is coated with a solid resin, forming a compact coil block that must be replaced in its entirety if necessary.
1 Disconnect the electrical power supply cables of the coil in the motor terminal box.
2 Remove the brake manual unlocking assembly, if one is fitted.
3 Remove the brake protection cover.
4 Loosen the 6 lock nuts (G) until they touch the mobile electromagnet (F).
5 Remove the whole of the mobile electromagnet (F) and fixed electromagnet (C) by loosening the atta-
chment screws (A).
6 Carefully separate the mobile electromagnet (F) from the fixed electromagnet (C) so that the springs
inside it do not fall.
7 Replace the coil, i.e. the fixed electromagnet (C), with a new one.
8 Refit the brake following the above steps in reverse order, making sure that the air gap is adjusted in
accordance with the specifications stated in section 4.
6 REPLACING THE BRAKE DISC

The brake disc is made of steel and friction material. It is fixed to the motor shaft by a pinion.
1 Remove the coil according to the instructions in section 5.

2 Replace the brake disc with a new one.
3 Refit the brake following the above steps in reverse order, making sure that the air gap is adjusted in
accordance with the specifications in section 4.
The disc must be replaced when the thickness of the brake pad is less than the value shown in the table.

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
0 CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION
2 OPERATION
3 MANUAL OPERATION
4 WIRING
5 ADJUSTMENT
1 DESCRIPTION
units.
2 OPERATION
(1).
weathervaned.
released.
crane in operation.

2 Mobile armature
taken place. 5 Autoblocage nut
- If the weathervaning button is pressed 6 Releasing electromagnet and Switch set
7 Adapter disk
by accident during normal operation, just
8 Motor brake cover
it. Fig. 1

DESB.0101
WEATHER VANING -
3 MANUAL OPERATION
released manually.
keep it lifted.
Fig. 2
2
4 WIRING
.
Fig. 3
5 ADJUSTMENT

correctly.
system..

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
0 CONTENTS
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2 OPERATION CHECK

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(2).
km/h..

weathervaning).
1 Wind-speed sensor
4 Fastening magnets
6 Siren
8 Cabin display
Fig. 1
2 OPERATION CHECK
in the ON position.
- Siren.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
supplied.



at preset values.
Necessary material:
Instructions:
hand.

Instructions:
conditions.

calibrated.

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA

modes.
The equipment is configured by LINDEN COMANSA, as is indicated in Fig.2.
Fig. 2
3.1 Test and alarm configuration modes.
ON (1) Autotest ON
DIP1
OFF Autotest OFF.
ON (1) Siren ON.

DIP2
OFF Siren OFF.

DIP4

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA
3.2 Test modes.

device.
3.3 Alarms.
Fig. 3


Fig. 4

-
ANEMOMETER ITOWA


-
HYDRAULIC GROUP -
IT IS MOST IMPORTANT TO TAKE GOOD CARE OF THE OIL IN AN OIL-HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, AS IT NOT
ONLY TRANSMITS POWER BUT ALSO LUBRICATES MOVING PARTS
0 CONTENTS
1 OIL CLEANING
2 FILTER CLEANING
3 OIL CHANGES
4 CHECKING FOR LEAKS
5 CLEANING RAM RODS
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
1 OIL CLEANING
Oil can deteriorate due to the combined action of high running temperatures, air, water and contaminant particles.
This can cause the system to run poorly, and may lead to pump cavitation, jerky movements, increased wear,
valve failures, etc.
Before assembly, always check the condition of the oil and change it if necessary.
2 FILTER CLEANING
To prevent oil from becoming contaminated hydraulic groups have return and air filters, which must be cleaned
or replaced as necessary.
The intake filter (item 4 on the hydraulic layout) must always be cleaned before oil is changed and when the
noise characteristic of pump cavitation is detected. Clean it as follows:
a) Remove the screws from the cover of the mini-hydraulic group and thoroughly clean the cover,
edges and screws with before fully unscrewing them with compressed air.
b) Remove the cover, unscrew the filters and remove them from the tank.
c) Submerge the filters in petroleum, trichloroethylene or a similar solvent. Clean the inside with
compressed air. Remove all traces of solvent before re-fitting.
d) Screw them back into their housings.
e) Fit the clean cover, changing the seals if necessary, and screw it down.
How often air filters (item 2 on the hydraulic layout) need to be checked will depend on the surrounding
environment.
3 OIL CHANGES
Before assembly always top up the oil in the tank to the maximum level, using oil of the same characteristics
as that used by the manufacturer.
Recommended oil types are listed in the lubrication instructions.
Change oil every 2500 hours or more often if it is seen to be deteriorated or contaminated.
Completely eliminate the old oil.
Ensure that the inside of the system is completely clean before filling it with new oil.
The cleaner a system is, the longer those parts subject to wear will last.
Do not attempt to clean the tank with cotton or similar materials: use white cloths free from dust and fluff, or
preferably foam-rubber sponges.
New oil should preferably be added through a portable pump unit with a filter to prevent dirty oil getting in.

-
HYDRAULIC GROUP -
NO HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HAS EVER FAILED BECAUSE IT WAS TOO CLEAN.
ALWAYS USE THE SPECIFIED OILS
4 CHECKING FOR LEAKS

Before assembly always check for leaks in the circuit. Leaks may occur after operation for a time, and are
usually caused by three things:
a) loosening of connectors due to pressure points and vibrations;

b) wear of dynamic seals; and
c) deterioration of the elastomer due to high oil temperatures or oil contamination.
To stop leaks their cause must be eliminated: tighten connectors, and change seals or elastomers as necessary.
The surfaces of the hydraulic circuit should be kept clean to prevent accidents and contamination and to enable
leaks to be detected.
Check that hoses are not cut, trapped or deteriorated. Defects of this type affect the properties of the hose and
therefore its safety coefficients. If defects are found, change the hose.
5 CLEANING RAM RODS

Once the machine is erected in its working position, protect the rod from atmospheric agents with a coat of
anticorrosion material such as TECTYL 506-EH by VALVOLINE or an equivalent product, especially if the crane
is to remain mounted for a long time.
Before dismounting the machine, clean the corrosion protector and any traces of dust, concrete, sand, etc. off
the surface of the rod using a scale remover (solvent or degreaser).
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Solution
Excessive noise Air in circuit

Due to low oil level Re-fill tank
Or dirty intake filter Clean filter
Little or no pressure Oil level low Re-fill tank

Reversed pump spin Change motor phases
Limiting valve out of adjustment Reset
Filter dirty Clean filter
Pump malfunction Change pump

JAULA
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT -
0 CONTENS
1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
2 REGULATION OF THE MAXIMUN PRESSURE
3 REGULATION OF THE CYLINDER SPEED

1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
Before making operational the hydraulic equipment, check the oil level and condition.
Also check the hoses, valves and bends.
2 REGULATION OF THE MAXIMUN PRESSURE OF THE EQUIPMENT. (Fig. 1)

The equipment is already adjusted to the correct pressure when it leaves
the factory. The pressure is stated on the characteristics plate of the
unit.
Should a new regulation be necessary, please proceed as follows:
1º- Deregulate the safety valve (11) located in the distributor by loosening
the nut (A) and roating the stud (B) in the opposite to clockwise
sense.
2º- Start the hydraulic equipment and check the pressure gage (10) by
opening the key (9).
3º- Rotate the stud (B) clockwise to increase the pressure, checking
on the pressure gage until the maximunpressure stated on the
characteristics plate is good. Then, block the stud position (B) by
means of the counternut (A).
4º- It is recommended to close the key (9) to protect the pressure gage.
Open it only for pressure checkings.
Fig. 1

IN ORDER TO AVOID BREAKINGS OF THE PARTS OF THE EQUIPMENT, DO NOT EXCEED THE
INDICATED PRESSURE.
3 REGULATION OF THE CYLINDER SPEED. (Fig. 2)

La válvula reguladora de caudal (12) está dispuesta en el cilindro (Fig. 2), para regulación de la velocidad de
descenso.
The flow regulation is made by means of a flow valve (fig.2)
placed in the cylinder to control the descent speed. This
regulation is made by loosening the counternut (A) and rotating
the valve´s body in the clockwise sense, in order to increase
the speed. To decrease the speed, proceed on the contrary,
i.e. unclockwise. Once the regulation has been made, the
valve will be blocked with the counternut (A).
To get the correct speed, please note:
1º- If the descent speed of the cylinder is increased too much,
the cylinder will go down striking, which will produce
oscilations in no way favourable for the structure of the
crane.
2º- An excessive throttle of the flow increases the pressure,
heat excessively the oil may poduce annoying noise. Fig. 2
THE MANIPULATION OF THE REGULATIONS OF THE HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT SHALL ALWAYS

BE CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED PERSONNEL DULY TRAINED.

GH20HI_
LUBRICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS (hydraulic system) -
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The tank must be topped up whenever its level drops below the “normal” mark on the level indicator.
This is the level required to ensure proper operation of the hydraulic system.
Do not top up to above the “normal” mark with the cylinder withdrawn.
1 Filter
2 Inspection plug
QUALITY LEVEL OF HYDRAULIC OILS.

Hydraulic oils that have great power of emulsibility, high resistance to the foam formation, stop to be able anti-
erosion, protection against the rust and corrosion will be used, resistance to the formation of deposits and high
resistance to the oxidation.
They must be compatible with rubbers used in meetings and detents of the hydraulic circuits.
The used lubricants must fulfill the specifications DIN 51524 part 2 class HLP, Denison HF-0, HF-1 y HF-2, Cin-
cinnati Milacron P-68, P69 y P-70, AFNOR NFE 48603-HM, VIKERS I-286-S y M2950-S, y ISO 6743/4-HM.
CLEAN OIL
Oil may become dirty due to a combination of high working temperatures, air, water and contaminant parti-
cles.
All this leads the system to run poorly, with brusque movements, increased wear, valve failures, etc.
Before assembly, check the condition of the oil and change it if necessary.
To prevent oil from getting dirty an air filter is fitted. Check this at intervals, depending on the environment.
OIL CHANGES
Change the oil at the times indicated or when its viscosity or oxidation levels make this advisable.
Ensure that the inside of the system is completely clean before pouring in new oil. The cleaner the system, the
longer wear parts will last.
Do not try to clean the tank with cotton rags or similar: use white cloth free from dust and frayed threads, or
preferably a foam rubber sponge.

GH20HI_
LUBRICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS (hydraulic system) -
Add new oil with a portable pump unit fitted with a filter to prevent any dirt getting in at the same time.
To make sure that the chosen oil is compatible with which has the hydraulic system, on the contrary, to
come to a thorough cleaning before the change.
If lubricants other than those shown in the table are used, confirm with the manufacturer or supplier that
they are suitable for the intended use and meet the minimum requirements for those listed.
For applications at very low temperatures (<-20°C) special oils are required.
The hydraulic group leaves factory with the oil indicated in the table inferior.
INITIAL LUBRICANT
TYPE CAPACITY
REPSOL
125 litros
Filter LIBRA HIDRÁULICO HLP 46
Inspection
plug LUBRICANT CHANGES
INITIAL MAINTENANCE
2500 hours
EQUIVALENT LUBRICANT
DTE-OIL RENOLIN HIDRAULICO HIDRAULIC POLYTELIS

MORLINA-46 NUTO-46
DEDIUN HLP-46 HLP-46 HLP-46 46

GH20HI06
HYDRAULIC LAY-OUT -
Q=30 l/min
P=250 Bar
20 C.V.-1500 rpm
V-1;220/380V-50Hz

GH20HI06
HYDRAULIC LAY-OUT -
4,5,6,7,8
11,12
10
COMPONENTS LIST COMPONENTS LIST
Pos. Cant. Description Pos. Cant. Description
1 1 Oil tank c=125Lts. 12 1 Manometer
2 1 Filter 13 1 Key
3 1 Level 14 1 Plate
4 1 Pump 15 1 Electrovalve
5 1 Support 16 - Hose
6 1 Coupling 17 1 Cylinder
7 1 Motor 20 CV 18 1 Takes pressure
8 1 Antireturn 19 1 Antireturn
9 1 Filter 20 1 Valve
10 1 manual distributor with safety valve 21 1 Quick plug
11 1 Safety key 22 1 Quick plug

-
INSTRUCTIONS FOR WIRE ROPES -
0 CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
2 CABLE HANDLING
3 STORAGE AND PRESERVATION
4 CABLE UNWINDING
5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
6 LUBRICATION
7 INSPECTION
8 INSPECTION POINTS
9 CRITERIA FOR REPLACEMENT
10 CABLE LIFE
11 VERIFICATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMEN
1 GENERAL
Nonspinning cables are made up of several layers of strands twisted alternately in one or other direction. By
this way, the opposite torsion moments generated when suspending a load from the cable are balanced.
Because their construction, wire ropes are very delicate and should be only used if necessary. They must
be handled and installed with extreme care to prevent serious problems. Because of this, we recommend
to strictly follow the instructions given in UNE standard 58-111-91WIRE ROPES FOR HOISTING DEVICES,
EXAMINATION CRITERIA AND REPLACEMENT OF ROPES.
2 CABLE HANDLING
Forms of supply:
Cables may be supplied in rolls, X-reels or flanged reels as required by the user.
Roll
The most economic form of supply is in rolls, but cable unwinding is cumbersome and should be only used in
case of thin, short cables. (Fig. 1)
X-Reel
It prevents the cable becoming tangled, but their transport is more difficult. (Fig. 1)
Flanged reel
It prevents the cable becoming tangled and handling is very easy. It also prevents the cable touching the floor,
thus preventing being fouled. It also protects the cable during loading, unloading and transport operations.
(Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
3 STORAGE AND PRESERVATION

The environment of cable warehouse shall be dry, well ventilated and free from corrosive or dusty atmospheres.
Do not rest the cables on the floor as otherwise the moisture on the floor could be cause of corrosion.
Exposing the cables to direct sunlight or high temperatures should be prevented as otherwise the grease
coating could be lost.
If storing the cables in an outdoor location is indispensable, we recommend to use supports in such a way that
reel bottom will be at 25 or 30 mm from floor level. Use a suitably cover to protect the external surface of cable
windings. We recommend to periodically inspect the cables, for instance every month, for rust signals. If any
rusting is observed, apply a sufficient amount of grease to prevent further corrosion.

-
4 CABLE UNWINDING
We are sure that the users know the procedures for installing and handling the cables and that they also know,
from their own experience, that if the required precautions are not taken a premature failure could occur.
However, we believe that it would be very useful to recall these precautions, especially because they are often
neglected, in spite that they are well known.
The figures below show the correct procedures, as well as the incorrect procedures, to be followed, or avoided,
when unwinding a cable. (Fig. 2)
If the procedure is not correct, the initial twisting of the cable proper is modified and its structure significantly
altered in some positions.
Sometimes, if unsuitably handled, the cable is subjected to an overtwisting effect which will make it difficult to
handle, causing kinks. Another times there is a risk of loosening and opening the strands because the twisting
effect of strands is partially lost, impairing also the balance of the cable.
Incorrect method.
Incorrect method. Corret prcedures.
Fig. 2
5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1.- When replacing a cable, use a new cable of the type specified by the manufacturer. If other type of cable
is used, make sure that the specifications given by the same manufacturer are strictly complied with.
2.- Cable ends shall be suitably bound in order to prevent cable strands being untwisted.
3.- Before installing a new cable verify that drum and sheave slots are of suitable size.
4.- Suitably unwind the cable according to the instructions given below.
5.- When being installed, prevent the cable being twisted about its axis, as otherwise the concentric strand
layers would become separated, facilitating the formation of kinks and swellings.
6.- When installing a cable on a crane, unwind the cable from the reel and at the same time wind it on the
crab drum while applying a slight tension on the cable between reel and crab drum. It is of paramount
importance that the cable will be unwound and wound in the same direction, that is, that the reel and
crab drum will rotate in the same direction.
7.- Before putting a cable recently installed into service, make sure that all auxiliary devices are correctly
mounted and ready for operation.
8.- Perform several operations with a load 10% the nominal load to allow the cable to stabilize.
9.- Avoid applying sudden stresses.

-
6 LUBRICATION
The lubrication of a cable is as important as the lubrication of a car engine. The lubricant will reduce wear and
will protect the cable against corrosion.
When a load is suspended from a cable, the internal wires move and rub against each other and the external
wires are subjected to wear when sliding on sheaves and drums. The lubricant will reduce wear of both internal
and external wires.
During the manufacture of a cable, the fiber core, wire and strands are suitably lubricated with an adequate hot
lubricant. When a cable is put into service, the pressure of strands against the core makes the lubricant to be
forced outward, thus being lost more or less quickly depending on the viscosity and movement of cable.
Because of this, all cables must be periodically lubricated during their working life.
If when a cable is being lubricated, the core does not receive the amount of grease required to compensate the
grease lost, the grease applied during the manufacturing process will continue being lost, becoming increasingly
dry and finally being decomposed. As a result, the strands will be without support, being excessively pressed
against each other, the pitch of strands will become longer and the cable will quickly deteriorate.
The cable should be lubricated during its working life with the same attention and extreme care as during its
manufacturing process.
For the lubrication of an installed cable to be efficient, the following points must be observed:
- Previously clean the cable. This cleaning operation may be carried out using either rushes or pressure
air. Use a solvent to easily remove old grease residues.
- Thoroughly lubricate the cable. The lubricant should be suitably applied. If the lubricant is simply applied as
a external coating on cable surface, without penetrating into the core, the cable would be improperly
lubricated.
- Use a suitable lubricant of the following characteristics:
a.- High viscosity
b.- Resistant to the working environment, neither generating corrosive products nor hardening
c.- To remain on the cable for a long time. Lubrication frequency will depend on the working
conditions.This frequency may be determined through inspections.
7 INSPECTIONS (Excerpt of UNE standard 58-111-91)

Frequency:
Daily inspections.
Whenever possible, daily examine all exposed parts of cables in order to verify for signals of deterioration or
deformations. Pay special attention to the points in which the cable is fastened to the device. Any sensible
change in the cable condition should be identified, followed by an examination by a qualified technician.
Regular Inspections.
In determining inspection intervals, take the following into account:
a.- Requirements of law.
b.- Type of apparatus & conditions of use.
c.- Group in which the apparatus is classified.
d.- Results of previous inspections.
e.- Time of use of cable.
Periodical special.
In any case, when an incident may be cause of wear of cable and/or fastening points, or in such cases as when
a cable is put into service after being reassembled, the cable should be newly inspected.
When a hoisting device has been out of service for a certain time, the cables should be inspected before putting
then newly into service.
In any event, inspections must be made by qualified personnel.

Apart from these inspections, those laid down in national or local regulations applicable to the place of installation
of the crane must be carried out, as must those recommended in «Schedule of Inspections & Maintenance» in
the chapter on Use of the Crane chapter and "Maintenance Plan" in the chapter on Maintenance.

-
8 INSPECTION POINTS
General
When a cable is examined on its entire length, the following points should be inspected with special care:
- Fastening points at the ends of both working cables and idle cables.
- Parts of cable wound on sheaves of sheave block and return sheaves. For devices performing operations,
parts of cable passing on the sheaves at the point from which the load is suspended.
Schematic diagram showing the possible defects to be considered when examining the different parts
of a cable
1.- Inspect the point at which the cable is fastened to the drum.
2.- Verify for any faulty winding causing deformations (cable
flattening) or wear, especially at the points in which cable direction
Polea
changes.
3.- Check for broken wires.
4.- Check for corrosion signals.
5.- Check for deformations caused by intermittent stresses.
Tambor
6.- Examine the part of the cable wound on a sheave to check for
broken wires or wear.
7.- Verify fastening points
- check for broken wires or corrosion
- inspect also the part of the cable incontact to or near
compensation sheaves
8.- Verify for any deformation
Polea
9.- Verify cable diameter
Carga
10.- Carefully inspect the part of the cable wound on the sheave block,
especially the point from which the load is suspended.
11.- Check for broken wires or surface wear.
Fig. 3 12.- Check for corrosion.
- Parts of cable passing on compensation sheaves.
- Parts of cable which may be subjected to external abrasion.
- Examination of internal parts for corrosion and fatigue.
- Cable ends, excepting slings. Cables should be examined on those areas in which cable end fastenings
are located, as those areas are critical for wire breakage and corrosion. Thimbles on cable ends should
be examined for deformation or wear of both the thimble and the cable.
- Cable fastenings using clamping bushes should examined in a similar manner as for cable thimbles,
verifying for bush cracking and sliding.
- Moving unions of cable ends (cable hangers, cable pincers, etc.) should be examined for broken wires,
sliding of unions or loose clamping screws. This examination should verify that all requirements of
applicable standards and regulations are complied with.
- Cable end unions made by splicing shall be examined to verify for broken wires and sliding of joined
strands. For this, let the union exposed by removing any coating or textile tie.
- If broken wires are observed in a cable end, it should be possible to cut the cable in order to newly
fastening it. If any sliding or loosen screw is observed, proceed to tighten it. However, the remaining
cable length should be sufficient to allow the cable to be properly wound on the drum.

-
9 CRITERIA FOR REPLACEMENT (Excerpt of UNE standard 58-111-91)
The following criteria can be used as a basis to determine the safety degree of a cable in service:
a) Nature and number of wire breakages

b) Wires broken on cable ends
c) Nests caused by broken wires
d) Gradual breakage of wires with the time
e) Strand breakage
f) Reduction of cable diameter caused by core breakage
g) Loss of elasticity
h) External or internal wear
i) External or internal corrosion
j) Deformation
k) Deterioration caused by heat or electric effects
l) Permanent elongation increasing rate
All the above criteria should be separately examined. However, the juxtaposition of certain alterations on certain
areas may be cause of a cumulative effect which should be kept in mind when deciding whether a cable is to
be replaced.
In any case, it should be determined whether the defects are caused by a faulty device and if so, to repair the
faulty device before installing a new cable.
a) Nature and number of wire breakages

The design of hoisting devices does not permit an indefinite use of cables. Thus, when establishing the criteria
for replacing nonspinning cables, the components, service length and way in which the cable is used should
be considered. The number of visible broken wires which determine the immediate replacement of a wire is
given in the table below for guidance only (Table 1).
Special attention should be paid to any surface dry or having the lubricant altered.
Tabla - 1 -
Number of visible broken wires on
nonspinning cables working on steel sheaves
Classification groups of mechanisms Classification groups of mechanisms

M1, M2, M3 and M4 M5, M6, M7 and M8
On a length 1) of On a length 1) of
6d 30d 6d 30d
2 4 4 8
1) d = cable diameter.
Mechanism groups (Classification FEM 1.001 / EN14439): Hoisting winch: M4

Luffing gear: M4
Slewing gear: M5
Trolley travelling: M3
Travelling gear: M4
Auxiliary winch: M1
Ropes group (Classification FEM 1.001 / EN14439): Lifting ropes: M4

Luffing ropes: M4
Trolley travel ropes: M4

-
NOTE: If a cable is totally or in part working on synthetic sheaves or metallic sheaves with synthetic
slots, breakage of internal wires with no visible breakage or wear of external wires could occur.
b) Wires broken on cable ends

A number, even small, of wires broken in or near a cable end indicates that high stresses are applied on the
cable, perhaps caused by an incorrect assembly of cable end. You should determine the exact cause of this
deterioration and, if possible, carefully rebuild the cable end, making sure that the remaining length after cutting
the cable is sufficient for subsequent use.
c) Nests caused by broken wires

When broken wires are near each other, breakage nests are formed requiring to replace the cable. If a breakage
nest is limited to a cable length below 6d or is concentrated in a single strand, replacing the cable may be
necessary even if the number of broken wires is below the number given on Table 1.
d) Gradual breakage of wires with the time

If the main cause of a deterioration is cable fatigue, breakage of wires only begins after a certain operation
time, the rate of wire breakage increasing from this moment.
In this case it will be necessary to closely control the increase of wire breakages as a function of time. An
“increase law” for wire breakage may be determined and, to a certain extent, the date at which the cable should
be replaced.
e) Strand breakage
If a strand is broken, the cable must be replaced.
f) Reduction of cable diameter caused by core deterioration

Cable diameter reduction because of core deterioration may be caused by:
f.1.- internal wear and notches

f.2.- internal wear resulting from friction between individual strands and cable wires, in particular when
subjected to bending.
f.3.- deterioration of textile fiber core
f.4.- breakage of wire core
f.5.- breakage of internal layers on multi-strand cables.
If because any of the above causes, cable diameter (mean value of two orthogonal measurements) is reduced
with respect to nominal diameter by 3% for nonspinning cables or 10% for other cables, the cable must be
removed even if there is no visible broken wire.
A small deterioration may not be detected through a normal examination, in particular if the stresses are evenly
distributed across the strands. However, this may be cause of a significant loss of strength, which should be
determined by means of external examination procedures. If this deterioration is confirmed, the cable must be
removed.
NOTE: The actual diameter of a new cable may be greater than nominal diameter. In this case, the allowable
wear under the same conditions will be also greater.
g) Loss of elasticity
In some cases, related to the work site, cable elasticity may be significantly reduced, involving a serious risk
when subjected to high stresses.
Loss of elasticity is very difficult to detect. In case of doubt, contact a specialized technician. This fault shows
in most case the following symptoms:
g.1.- reduction of cable diameter

g.2.- cable elongation
g.3.- lack of clearance between individual wires and between strands, caused by compression between
components.
g.4.- appearance of brownish dust between strands
g.5.- if wire breakage is not visible, cable handling may be sensibly more difficult and diameter reduction
will be higher than when caused by wear of individual wires.

-
This cable condition may lead to a sudden breakage when subjected to dynamic loads and must be
replaced.
h) External wear
Wear of filler wires of external strands of a cable is caused by friction of cable against sheave and drum slots.
This effect is especially evident at the contact points of moving cables with sheaves during acceleration and
slowdown periods, and results in a variation of thickness of external wires.
Wear is promoted by an insufficient or improper lubrication as well as by the presence of dust. When, as a
result of wear, the external diameter of cable is reduced by 7% or more with respect to nominal diameter, the
cable must be removed even if there is no visible broken wire.
i) External and internal corrosion

Corrosion will mainly occur in marine atmospheres and highly polluted industrial atmospheres, and may be
cause of not only a reduction of static strength because a reduction of metal cross-section of cable but also of
an acceleration of cable fatigue because surface irregularities which are cause of cracks when subjected to
high stresses. A severe corrosion may lead to a reduction of cable elasticity.
i.1.- External corrosion.

Corrosion of external wires can be visually verified.
i.2.- Internal corrosion.
Internal corrosion is more difficult to detect than external corrosion, the latter appearing often together
with the first one, though the following effects may be observed:
1.- Changes in cable diameter: a reduction of cable diameter occurs normally on the cable portion
wound on sheaves. However, on stationary cables, it not unusual to observe an increase of
diameter because of the rust deposited under the external layers of cable wires.
2.- Lack of clearance between strands in external cable thimbles, often appearing together with
wire breakage.
If you suspect of internal corrosion, the cable may be subjected to internal examination, performed by a
qualified technician.
If internal corrosion is confirmed, the cable must immediately removed.
j) Deformation
The apparent alteration of a cable structure is called deformation.
The different types of deformation are in general identified by a loosening of cable structure, at least in the
vicinity of deformed parts, resulting in a uneven distribution of stresses.
The deformations are classified as follows according to its appearance:
j.1 curl-shaped deformation

j.2 basket-shaped deformation
j.3 strand extrusion
j.4 wire extrusion
j.5 local increase of cable diameter
j.6 local decrease of cable diameter
j.7 flattening
j.8 kinks
j.9 elbows
j.10 damages caused by heat or electric effects
j.1 Curl-shaped deformation (refer to Fig. 4, Fig 5)

Cable axis takes the shape of a helix. Even if this deformation does not result in a weakening of cable, it can
be cause of irregular movements when operated, in such a way that, after a long operation period, wear and
wire breakage can result.
If a curl-shaped deformation is detected, the cable should be removed whenever:
4d where d is the nominal cable diameter and d1 the diameter of deformed cable evolvent when
d1 >
3 not subjected to stresses, and provided the length of cable considered does not exceed 25d.

-
Fig. 4 - Curl-shaped deformation: cable longuitudinal axis takes the shape of a helix.
If the deformation exceeds the value given in a, the cable should be removed
Fig. 5 - Curl-shaped deformation
Fig. 6 - Basked-shaped deformation of a cable with several strand layers,

Cable should be immediately removed.
Fig. 7- Breakage or extrusion of wire core commonly resulting from a

basket-shaped deformation occurred in an adjacent area.
j.2 Basket-shaped deformation (Refer to Fig. 6)

This deformation occurs in cables with a wirel core when the external layer of wires is dislocated or when
external strands are longer than internal strands. This condition may result in a sudden load on a loose
cable.
When a basket-shaped deformation is detected, the cable should be immediately removed.
j.3 Strand extrusion (Refer to Fig. 7)

This type of deformation is often related to a basket-shaped deformation when the unbalance of cable results
in an extrusion of core.
If a strand extrusion is observed, the cable should be immediately removed.
j.4 Wire extrusion (Refer to Fig. 8 and 9)

In this case, some wires or groups of wires come off from the side opposite to the sheave slot, forming loops,
often as a result of an impact.
If the deformation observed is serious, the cable should be removed.

-
Fig. 8- A single strand is affected by the extrusion of wires, even though

the examination of a greater length of cable shows that the defect is
repeated in a regular way on the same strand at distances of one pitch.
Fig. 9- Worsening of the above defect by one degree will require the cable to be removed
Fig. 10- Local increase of diameter of a cable with a filler layer, caused by
the extrusion of a multi-strand wire core as a result of impacts.
Fig. 11- Local increase of cable diameter caused by a knottiness of textile

fibre core whose fibers are spread among the strands
Cable should be removed.
Fig. 12- Local decrease of cable diameter, external strands tending to occupy core position.
Note that broken wires are present. Cable should be immediately removed.
j.5 Local increase of cable diameter (Refer to Fig. 10 and 11)

A local increase of cable diameter may occur, affecting a cable length relatively significant. This will lead to a
distortion of core (in certain environments a rusting of cable core may be observed) causing a unbalance
of external strands, becoming improperly orientated.
If a significant increase of cable diameter is observed, the cable should be rejected.
j.6 Local decrease of cable diameter (Refer to Fig. 12)

A local reduction of cable diameter is commonly related to a core breakage. The areas near cable ends should
be carefully examined.

-
Fig. 13-Flattening caused by a mechanical action. Cable should be removed.
Fig. 14- Flattening caused by a mechanical action applied on a certain lenght of a cable with several strand layers.
Note the flattening and elongation of pitch of external strands as well as
their loosening. Cable should be removed.
Fig. 15- Very serious kink. Note the expansion of textile fibre core.
Fig. 16- Cable put into service in spite of having a kink and which are now subjected to local wear as well as to typical
deformation.
Fig. 17- Very distinct elbow.

Cable should be removed.
j.7 Flattening (Refer to Fig. 13 and 14)

Flattening is caused by a mechanical damage of cable and if serious the cable should be immediately
removed.
j.8 Kinks (Refer to Fig. 15 and 16)
Kinks are cable deformations caused when a cable is pulled in straight direction forming a loop and without
having sufficient freedom to compensate the deformation through a rotation about its axis.
j.9 Elbows (Refer to Fig. 17)

Elbows are angular deformations caused by external violent causes.
Cables with elbows should be immediately removed.

-
j.10 Damages caused by heat or electric effects

Cables we have been subjected to high temperatures, visually detected by burning marks, should be
removed.
10 CABLE LIFE
After the user has acquired sufficient practical experience, an estimation can be made about the life expectancy
of a cable. However, these estimations should be only used for stock management purposes and in no case
affect the frequency of inspections or be used to extend the life of a cable beyond specifications.
11 VERIFICATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Periodically verify drums and sheaves to make sure that all components properly rotate on their bearings.
Sheaves which rotate improperly or are blocked are subjected to uneven, high wear resulting in wear of cable
wires by friction. Compensation pulleys blocked are cause of uneven loads on cable branches.
Slot bottom radius shall be compatible with cable nominal diameter. If the radius is too great or too small, the
slot should be machined or the sheave replaced.

-
HIGH STRENGTH UNION ELEMENTS (HV) -
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE STANDARDS COULD BE CAUSE OF DAMAGES OR PERSONAL

INJURES
GENERAL

Screws, nuts and washers used for HV unions should comply with COMANSA standard NP11-01-03.
High strength screws with controlled tightening torque should be tightened using a torque wrench. The tightening
torque required is given in the section for assembling.
Torque wrenches should be periodically checked for proper operation.
Tightening torques should be within ±10% the value given in table (1).
Strength class according ISO 898 part 1 and 2 must be stamped on screw head, nut and washer as shown in
fig. 1, 2 and 3.
Strength class of screws, nuts and washers will be specified for each crane. Strength classes shown in the
figures are only for illustration purposes.
Seating surfaces and screw holes must be free from dirt, paint and other foreign particles.
HV washers should be located with the bevels outward, facing screw head or nut.

For the screws in the slewing ring, see specific section for the
slewing ring.
Atention!
10.9
10.9
10.9
Trademark
Trademark
Screw Nut Washer

-
HIGH STRENGTH UNION ELEMENTS (HV) -
Checking unions which use high strength screws with controlled tightening torque:
1.- Check unions every time the crane is disassembled or before assembling it again, but never later than 1
year after last check-out.
Screws tightened according to a controlled tightening torque and then dismantled may be reused in subsequent
assemblies provided that both screw head and thread are not damaged and free from rust.
DIN 6914 screws and related DIN 6915 nuts have a width across flats greater than DIN 931 screws and related
DIN 934 nuts (Refer to table II).
When selecting the nuts, verify that nut strength is the same as screw strength.
For instance: A nut 8 will require a screw 8.8
A nut 10 will require a screw 10.9
A nut 12 will require a screw 12.9
Washers used on unions with HV screws should be high strength washers of the same material as screws and
nuts used.
Avoid using:
Screws with rusty shank or thread as well as nuts with rusty thread and screws or nuts damaged or with da-
mage signals.
If a broken or elongated (loosened) screw is observed in a union, replace all screws in that union.
TABLE (II) TORQUE WRENCH WIDTH

Nominal
DIN931 screw DIN6914 screw DIN912 screw
DIN 931 Thread
DIN 912 Diameter
DIN934 nut DIN6915 nut (6 internal flats)
DIN 6914
mm mm mm mm
M 12 19 22 10
M 14 22 - 12
M 16 24 27 14
M 18 27 - 14
M 20 30 32 17
M 22 32 36 17
S S M 24 36 41 19
M 27 41 46 19
M 30 46 50 22
Srew head
M 33 50 - 24
M 36 55 60 27
Fig. 4 M 39 60 - -
M 42 65 - 32
M 45 70 - -
M 48 75 - 36
M 56 85 -
These checking and tightening operations can be done more easily with the crane
disassembled.

-
BOLT TORQUE -
Yield point L.E. (N/mm²) 640 940 1100
8.8 10.9 12.9

Bolt quality
8G 10K 12K
Tightening force FA[N] = 0,7 x L.E. x S

Bolt size
Tightening torque Ma [N] = (0,16 x M xFa) x 0,9/1000
M-6 Fa 9005 13225 15480

S = 20,1 mm² Ma 8 11 13
M-8 Fa 16400 24085 28180

S = 36,6 mm² Ma 19 28 32
M-10 Fa 25985 38165 44660

S = 58,0 mm² Ma 37 55 64
M-12 Fa 37765 55470 64910

S = 84,3 mm² Ma 65 96 110
M-14 Fa 51520 75670 88550

S = 115,0 mm² Ma 105 155 180
M-16 Fa 70335 103305 120890

S = 157,0 mm² Ma 160 240 280
M-18 Fa 86464 126995 148610

S = 193,0 mm² Ma 225 330 385
M-20 Fa 109760 161210 188650

S = 245,0 mm² Ma 315 465 545
M-22 Fa 135745 199375 233310

S = 303,0 mm² Ma 430 630 740
- The figures on the above chart are only applicable to the fixing elements which comply with
NP11-01-03 COMANSA standard.
- The torque ratings are obtained by means of torque wrench and must be accurate to ±10%.
- The torque ratings are intended for fixing elements free from lubricant, dust, dirt, paint or other
foreingn bodies. In case of any other conditions, different to the indicated, the torque should be
adjusted to these new conditions.
- The torque of the unions HV are shown on the erection sheets.
- See document "HIGH STRENGTH UNION ELEMENTS (HV)".

X3 (4,5 m)
CROSS-BASE BOLT TORQUE -
Cross bases consist of a cross-beam plug two arms which fold out to form a cross, secured by pinned, vertical panels.
Different anchor feet are bolted the cross-base for each type of mast section
Mast section Mast section Mast section

1,2 m 1,6 m 2,0 m
PMH13 PMS3 PMS4 PMS4 PMS5
Description Nº Dimension Grade Norm Q

1, 2, 3, 4
1 M:33 L:260 10.9 3215P1063 16
2 D:60 d:34 HV D6916 16

3 D:60 d:34 L:110 3301P191.01 16
4 M:33 10 D934 16
ASSEMBLY TORQUE (M)

CHECKING TORQUE (C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 2170 Nm Bolt 1........... 1950 Nm
(M) The given torque corresponds to the specified type of bolt, DACROMET type 320A surface protection, WITHOUT
GREASE, and is applied to bearing surfaces and holes free from grease, dirt, paint and other foreign objects. For
any other condition than that descrubed above, the torque should should be adjusted accordingly.
(C) The Checking torque applied during inspections and maintenance, to detect if any bolts have lost their
torque to below the permitted tolerance, should be 10% less than that applied during the initial installation
of the ring, so as to avoid overtightening the bolts as a result of different conditions from those exisitng
at the time of initial installation.
Procedure for checking torque of cross-base anchor feet bolts on erected crane:
A. Visual Inspection:
A.1 Observe carefully the visual aspect of the bolts and nuts, insofar as to establish that they are all in place and have
no appreciable defects (noticeable loosening, damaged nuts or bolts, rust stains,...)
A.2 Check that the seating of the anchor feet on the cross-base is correct and that no play or movement is
apparent. This can be best controlled by slewing the crane, without load, and observing the seating on
the side of the ring facing the jib.
N.B. A visual inspection carried out in a professional manner can detect important defects
more efectively than a spot checking of the torque.
B.- Mechanical Inspection:

If the visual inspection was satisfactory, then check mechanically as follows:
B.1 Suspend the corresponding jib-end load from the hook and trolley out to the jib end.
B.2 Slew jib and bring to stop over one of the four corners as shown.
B.3 Check the torque as per (C) above of the bolts on the Jib side.
B.4 Remove load from hook and trolley in to minimum radius.
B.5 Check the torque of remaining bolts on the counter-jib side.
With the crane dismantled, on the ground, checking of slewing ring bolt torque can be carried
out much more simply and evenly, in sequence.

X5 (6,0 m)
Cross bases consist of a cross-beam plug two arms which fold out to form a cross, secured by pinned, vertical panels.
Mast section Mast section Mast section

1,6 m 2,0 m 2,5 m
PMS5-1 PMS5-1 PMD3-2 PMD3-2

1, 2, 3, 4
1 M:36 L:280 10.9 D931 24
2 D:66 d:37 HV D6916 24

3 D:65 d:37 L:140 3301P191.01 24
4 M:36 10 D934 24
ASSEMBLY TORQUE (M)

CHECKING TORQUE (C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 2790 Nm Bolt 1........... 2510 Nm

B.3 Check the torque as per (C) above of the bolts on the Jib side.
B.4 Remove load from hook and trolley in to minimum radius.

X7 (8 m)

1, 2, 3
1 M:36 L:510 10.9 D931 48
2 D:66 d:37 HV D6916 96
PMD4-3
3 M:36 10 D934 48
D34; TD34
ASSEMBLY TORQUE
(M) CHECHING TORQUE
(C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 2790 Nm Bolt 1........... 2510 Nm

1, 2, 3
1 M:36 L:350 10.9 D931 48
2 D:66 d:37 HV D6916 96
PMD6
3 M:36 10 D934 48
D36; TD36A
ASSEMBLY TORQUE
(M) CHECHING TORQUE
(C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 2790 Nm Bolt 1........... 2510 Nm
Screw support
base supported
1 M:30 L:150 10.9 D931 32
2 M:30 10 D934 32
3 D:56 d:31 HV D6916 32
D:65 d:31
4 3301P192.06 32
L:45
ASSEMBLY TORQUE
(M) CHECHING TORQUE
(C)
1, 2, 3, 4 (NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 1600 Nm Bolt 1........... 1440 Nm

X7 (8 m)
Support mechanism
base translation
1 M:30 L:455 10.9 D931 32
2 M:30 10 D934 32
3 D:56 d:31 HV D6916 32
D:65 d:31
4 3301P192.09 32
L:35
ASSEMBLY TORQUE
(M) CHECHING TORQUE
(C)
1, 2, 3, 4 (NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 1600 Nm Bolt 1........... 1440 Nm
(M) The given torque corresponds to the specified type of bolt, DACROMET type 320A surface protection,
WITHOUT GREASE, and is applied to bearing surfaces and holes free from grease, dirt, paint and other
foreign objects. For any other condition than that descrubed above, the torque should should be adjusted
accordingly.
PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING TORQUE OF CROSS-BASE ANCHOR FEET BOLTS ON ERECTED

CRANE:
A-. Visual Inspection:

A.1 Observe carefully the visual aspect of the bolts and nuts, insofar as to establish that they are all in place
and have no appreciable defects (noticeable loosening, damaged nuts or bolts, rust stains,...)
N.B. A visual inspection carried out in a professional manner can detect important defects more
efectively than a spot checking of the torque.

B.3 Check the torque of remaining bolts on the jib side. (Two ties)
B.4 Remove load from hook in to minimum radius.

X10 (10 m)

1, 2, 3
1 M:36 L:510 10.9 D931 24
2 D:66 d:37 HV D6916 48
3 M:36 10 D934 48
ASSEMBLY TORQUE (M)

CHECHING TORQUE (C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 2790 Nm Bolt 1........... 2510 Nm
accordingly.



X10 (10 m)
1 M:30 L:150 10.9 D931 32
2 M:30 10 D934 32
3 D:56 d:31 HV D6916 32
4 D:65 d:31 L:45 3301P192.06 32
1, 2, 3, 4
ASSEMBLY TORQUE (M)
CHECHING TORQUE (C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1........... 1600 Nm Bolt 1........... 1440 Nm
accordingly.



SM215/SM218
SLEWING RING BOLTS CORI1800.03B4
1 d:M24 L:200 10.9 D931 72

2 d:M30 L:200 10.9 D931 36
3 d:M24 10 D934 72
4 d:25 D:45 L:15 3301P198.01 72

5 d:31 D:55 L:45 3301P192.06 36
ASSEMBLY TORQUE
CHECHING TORQUE
(M)
(C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1....................800 Nm Bolt 1 720 Nm
Bolt 2..................1600 Nm Bolt 2 1440 Nm
(C) The Checking torque applied during inspections and maintenance, to detect if any bolts have lost their torque to
below the permitted tolerance, should be 10% less than that applied during the initial installation of the ring, so as to
avoid overtightening the bolts as a result of different conditions from those exisitng at the time of initial installation.
Procedure for checking torque of slewing ring bolts on erected crane:
A.1. Observe carefully the visual aspect of the bolts and nuts, insofar as to establish that they are all in place and
have no appreciable defects (noticeable loosening, damaged nuts or bolts, rust stains,...)
A.2. Check that the seating of the slewing ring on the turntable is correct and that no play or movement is apparent.
This can be best controlled by slewing the crane, without load, and observing the seating on the side of the ring
facing the jib.

B.1. Suspend load from the hook and trolley out to the corresponding safe load radius.
B.2. Lock (brakes applied) slewing in a determined position.
B.3. Check the torque (as per (C) above) of the bolts on the Jib side of the ring (half the bolts).
B.4. Remove load from hook and trolley in to minimum radius.
B.5. Check the torque of remaining half of the bolts on the counter-jib side of the ring.

-
TIGHTNESS OF SCREWS ON SLEWING MECHANISM -
1 M:16 L:60 12.9 D931 12
2 D:30 d:17 HV D6916 12
ASSEMBLY TORQUE (M)

CHECHING TORQUE (C)
(NIC\9603-01)
Bolt 1............ 279 Nm Bolt 1............ 251 Nm
GREASE, and is applied to bearing surfaces and holes free from grease, dirt, paint and other foreign objects.
For any other condition than that descrubed above, the torque should should be adjusted accordingly.
(C) The Checking torque applied during inspections and maintenance, to detect if any bolts have lost their torque
to below the permitted tolerance, should be 10% less than that applied during the initial installation of the ring,
so as to avoid overtightening the bolts as a result of different conditions from those exisitng at the time of initial
installation.
1.- Procedure for checking tightness of slewing mechanism fixing screws.

A.- Visual Inspection:
A.2 Check that the seating of the slewing ring on the turntable is correct and that no play or movement is apparent. This
can be best controlled by slewing the crane, without load, and observing the seating on the side of the ring facing
the jib.

If no problems are revealed by a visual inspection, carry out the checking operations on the screws.
2.- Changing the slewing mechanism

- To change the mechanism proceed as follows:
2.1: Dismounting
- Use the threaded extractor bolt holes in the clamping ring of the mechanism. Tighten the pressure screws
successively until the mechanism is released.
NEVER SUSPEND THE MECHANISM AND PULL WITHOUT RELEASING IT FIRST
2.2: Mounting
- Contact surfaces must be completely free from oil and grease. Use degreasers to clean them.
- Tighten the slewing mechanism fixing screws.

-
SCRAPPING THE CRANE -
Social awareness of the need for Sustainable Growth requires the construction field to enable recycling for
equipment and materials that have reached the end of their useful lives.
The most outstanding advantage to this recycling effort is the concurrent solution of problems originating in
elimination of some sub-products of waste as well as obtaining new raw material, which reduces the quantity
of newly extracted natural resources.
Waste from maintenance operations, before being disposed of, must be classified according to type:

- Electrical parts.
- Plastic materials.
- Lubricants.
Such materials should be disposed of by authorized companies.
At the end of the crane's useful life its raw materials should be recycled rather than thrown away.
The apparatus, accessories, fluids and packaging should be sent to sites set aside for ecological
reutilization.
Waste from electronics and electronic devices should be stored at places set aside for selective recovery.
Disposal and scrapping of the crane should be performed according to the provisions of current legislation
in the country where the work is performed.
Proper disposal of waste generated in the scrapping of the crane contributes to the conservation of resources
and the prevention of possible environmental problems.
The owner may scrap the crane by separating all materials according to their type:

- Electrical parts.
- Plastics.
- Lubricants.
Such materials should be disposed of by authorized enterprises.
1 / 1 Rev: A 10/26 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Approval 6 / 150 / 89

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810
SPARE PARTS 000 0090 IB
21LC290
INDEX -
Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Instructions when ordering spare parts..................................................................010 0005 IB B 5
General assembly.................................................................................................020 0091 ES A 7

SPARE PARTS 010 0005 IB
21LC
INSTRUCTIONS WHEN ORDERING SPARE PARTS -
CRANE MODEL ............................................. 21LC
CRANE SERIAL NUMBER.................................................... ( )
DEPARTURE DATE............................................................... ( )
If you look at the drawing of any assembly, you will note that each part has a number which, as per the list
attached to the drawing, provides the necessary data to place an order.
Example:
In order to find the hook sheave, or pulley, the followings steps must be followed:
1º- In the GENERAL ASSEMBLY page you can find out that the HOOK is marked with the reference
030 0216
2º In the HOOK ASSEMBLY page you can see that the sheave is given number 2. Its corresponding
reference is POL18387DT4791.
3º Purchase Order.
PURCHASE ORDER
CRANE MODEL 21 LC ---
CRANE SERIAL NUMBER (a)

ASSEMBLY 030 0216
DESCRIPTION SHEAVE
REFERENCE POL18387DT4791
QUANTITY (b)
(a) Indicate the serial number of your crane.

(b) Indicate the required quantity.

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ENSEMBLE GENERAL 21LC290
ERSATZTEILLISTE ALGEMEINESCHEMA -
35 42
77 36 43
78 37 44 49
79 38 45 40
80 39 46 41
81 85 70 29 40 47 42
82 86 71 32 41 48 53 54
31 90 60
20 61
21 62
22 63
91 26 64
92 65
93
94
96 15
16
97
3
4
1 2
5 9 10
11
12


1 RPS030 0141 FUNDACION FONDATION BASE FUNDAMENT 11
2 RPS030 0307 CENTRADOR CENTRAGE DRIFT ZENTRIERGERAET 13
3 RPS030 0264 BASAMENTO BASE UNDERCARRIAGE UNTERWAGEN 15
4 RPS030 0010 PLATAFORMA PLATEFORME PLATFORM BUEHNE 17
5 RPS030 0010 PLATAFORMA PLATEFORME PLATFORM BUEHNE 19
11 RPS030 0280 TRASLACION TRANSLATION TRAVELLING FAHRWERK 31
12 RPS030 0281 TRASLACION TRANSLATION TRAVELLING FAHRWERK 37
15 RPS030 0248 LETRERO INDICATEUR INDICATOR SCHILD 39
16 RPS030 0457 TRAMO DE TORRE ELEMENT DE MAT MAST SECTION TURMMODUL 41
20 RPS030 0269 PARTE GIRATORIA PARTIE TOURNANTE SLEWING PART DREHWERKMODUL 43
21 RPS030 0913 REDUCTOR DE GIRO REDUT. DÒRIENTATION SLEWING RED. GEAR B. DREHWERKSGETRIEBE 45
22 RPS030 0914 REDUCTOR DE GIRO REDUT. DÒRIENTATION SLEWING RED. GEAR B. DREHWERKSGETRIEBE 53
26 RPS030 0230 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 61
29 RPS030 0915 CUSPIDE TETE DE TOUR CAT HEAD TURMSPITZE 63
31 RPS030 0916 PLATAFORMA + CABINA PLATEFORME + CABINE PLATFORM + CABIN BUEHNE + KABINE 65
35 RPS030 0441 PLUMA FLECHE JIB AUSLEGER 69
36 RPS030 0240 PORTAPOLEAS SEILROLLENHALTERUNG PULLEY SUPPORT PORTE-POULIE 71
38 RPS030 0235 TENSION AUTOMATICA TENSION AUTOMATIQUE AUTOMATICAL TENSION AUTOM. SPANNUNG 75
40 RPS030 0445 TRAMO DE PLUMA ELEMENT DE FLECHE JIB SECTION AUSLEGERMODUL 81
47 RPS030 0204 FINAL DE PLUMA POINTE DE FLECHE JIB END AUSLEGERSPITZE 95
48 RPS030 0205 FINAL DE PLUMA POINTE DE FLECHE JIB END AUSLEGERSPITZE 97
49 RPS030 0206 TIRANTE TIRANT STRUT ABSPANNUNG 99
54 RPS030 0211 CABREST. CARRITO TREUIL DE CHARIOT TROLLEY WINCH KATZFAHRWERK 109
60 RPS030 0212 CARRITO CHARIOT TROLLEY LAUFKATZE 115
61 RPS030 0213 CARRITO CHARIOT TROLLEY LAUFKATZE 117
62 RPS030 0216 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 119
63 RPS030 0217 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 121
64 RPS030 0239 CARRO ANTICA. DELAN. CHARIOT ANTI-CATE.DEV. FRONT ANTI-SAG TROLLEY KATZE VOR MIT AUT.SEIL. 123
65 RPS030 0238 CARRO ANTICA. TRASE. CHARIOT ANTI-CATE.DER. REAR ANTI-SAG TROLLEY KATZE RÜCK MIT AUT.SEI 125
70 RPS030 0219 TRAMO CONTRAPLUMA ELEMENT CONTREFLECHE COUNTERJIB SECTION GEGENAUSLEGERMODUL 127
71 RPS030 0917 TRAMO CONTRAPLUMA ELEMENT CONTREFLECHE COUNTERJIB SECTION GEGENAUSLEGERMODUL 129
77 RPS030 0773 CABREST. ELEVACION TREUIL DE LEVAGE HOISTING WINCH HUBWERK 131
85 RPS030 0640 PLUMIN POTENCE AUX.JIB BALLASTIERKRAN 183
90 RPS030 0135 PERCHA EQUILIBRADO BRAS DÈQUILIBRAGE BALANCING ARM GEWICHTSAUSGLEICH 193
91 RPS030 0888 TRAMO TREPADOR ELEMENT DE TELESCOP. CLIMBING SECTION KLETTER MODUL 195


95 RPS030 0887 GRUPO HIDRAULICO GRUPE HYDRAULIQUE HYDRAULIC GROUP HYDRAULIKGRUPPE 203
96 RPS030 0273 MARCO CADRE FRAME HALTERAHMEN 205

REPUESTOS FUNDACION 030 0141 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE FONDATION PS5
SPARE PARTS BASE
ERSATZTEILLISTE FUNDAMENT -

REPUESTOS FUNDACION 030 0141 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE FONDATION PS5
SPARE PARTS BASE
ERSATZTEILLISTE FUNDAMENT -

1 3214M330 PIE PIED FOOT FUSS 4
2 10600185E.25 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 8
3 20160160.25 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 4
4 PSR3.2 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4

REPUESTOS CENTRADOR 030 0307 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CENTRAGE 2,0 x 2,0 m
SPARE PARTS DRIF
ERSATZTEILLISTE ZENTRIERGERAET -
PS4 PS5 PD3-2
2 X X -
3 - - X

REPUESTOS CENTRADOR 030 0307 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CENTRAGE 2,0 x 2,0 m
SPARE PARTS DRIF
ERSATZTEILLISTE ZENTRIERGERAET -
1 3214K0329 BASTIDOR CHASSIS FRAME RAHMEN 1

2 3214K0329-2 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 8
3 3214K329-1 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 8

REPUESTOS BASAMENTO 030 0264 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X3/PMS5 (2m)
SPARE PARTS UNDERCARRIAGE
ERSATZTEILLISTE UNTERWAGEN

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X3/PMS5 (2m)
ERSATZTEILLISTE UNTERWAGEN
1 3201M1703 LARGUERO LONGERON STRINGER LAENGSTRAEGER 1

2 3201M1707 BRAZO BRAS ARM HALTEARM 2
3 3215P1099 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 2
4 OL10006 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 4
5 ARP21D6916 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 8
6 093320250050088 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 8
7 GLY.PG10010550F ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
8 3201P1672 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 1
9 3201M1708 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4
12 PSA5*60 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 8
13 PSR5 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 8
14 3201P0443 APOYO APPUI SUPPORT AUFLAGE 4
15 1408P0146 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 8
16 ARP15F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 16
18 3201M1460 APOYO APPUI SUPPORT AUFLAGE 4
24 3215P1046 HUSILLO VIS SPINDLE SPINDEL 4
26 3215P1063 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 16
28 3215P1072 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 16
32 PSR3,2 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4
34 ARP17F111D9021A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 2
36 3201P1674 ESCALERA ECHELLE LADDER LEITER 1
37 3201-10004 TIRANTE TIRANT STRUT ABSPANNUNG 4
38 1408P1807-A TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 16

REPUESTOS PLATAFORMA 030 0010 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PLATEFORME X3
SPARE PARTS PLATFORM
ERSATZTEILLISTE BUEHNE -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PLATEFORME X3
1 3201M1726 PLATAFORMA PLATEFORME PLATFORM BUEHNE 1

2 3201P1733 PROTECTOR PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 1
3 3201M1730 ESCALERA ECHELLE LADDER LEITER 1
5 3301P166.02 ABARCON ATTACHE U-CLAMP U-KLAMMER 2

REPUESTOS TRASLACION 030 0487 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TRANSLATION TRA-7,5-04
ERSATZTEILLISTE FAHRWERK -
63
64
65

1 1408K8503 PLACA PLAQUE PLATE SCHILD 4

2 1408M8506 TRAVIESA TRAVERSE CROSSTIE TRAVERSE 2
3 1408P8496 PLACA PLAQUE PLATE SCHILD 4
13 PSI5*40*105 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4
14 1408M8500 TACO CALE BLOCK HOLZBLOCK 4
15 1408P8495 VASTAGO TIGE DE CYLINDRE RAM-ROD KOLBENSTANGE 4
16 ECM10*100D71412 ENGRASADOR GRAISSEUR NIPPLE SCHMIERNIPPEL 4
17 1408P8505 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
18 PSE10*24 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4
19 GLY.PG12012550F CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 4
20 JT95.74*5.33 JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG 4
22 ARMB12 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 8
23 TUKM12 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 8
24 1408P8492 TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL 4
25 JT12.81*1.78 JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG 4
30 ARG16D127B ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 32
31 1408K7496 PORTARUEDAS BOGGIE BOGIE RADKASTEN 2
32 1408K5275 PORTARUEDAS BOGGIE BOGIE RADKASTEN 2
34 1408M1134 RUEDA ROUE WHEEL RAD 4
36 1408P7498 GUARDA-POLVO CACHE POUSSIERE DUST GUARD STAUBMANTEL 8
37 ROD32316A RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 8
39 RTNFAD140*80*3 GUARDA-POLVO CACHE POUSSIERE DUST GUARD STAUBMANTEL 8
42 1408M7495 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 2
43 CHVP14*8*160A CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 2
45 ARG12D127B TARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 2
47 1408P8748 MORDAZA MACHOIRE CLAMP KLEMMBACKE 8
50 1408P8767 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
51 LMMC.0001 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 2
55 ROD6212.2RS RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 2
56 AEE60 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU D'ARRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 1
57 REDBI.MA60 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 2



60 MTRCF3336-1 MOTOR MOTEUR MOTOR MOTOR 2
62 1408P7495 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 2
63 10400180.14 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 8

REPUESTOS REDUCTOR 030 0331 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDBI.MA60
SPARE PARTS GEAR-BOX
ERSATZTEILLISTE GETRIEBE -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDBI.MA60
1 CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHAEUSE 1

2 TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL 2
4 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 1
6 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE DECKEL 1
7 SINFIN VIS SANS FIN WORM-GEAR GETRIEBESCHNECKE 1
8 CORONA COURONNE CROWN WHEEL STRINRAD 1
9 RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
10A RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
11 RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
13 TAPON BOUCHON PLUG STOEPSEL 1
15 NIVEL NIVEAU LEVEL NIVEAU 1


REPUESTOS MOTOR 030 0490 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE MOTEUR MTRCF3336-1
SPARE PARTS MOTOR
ERSATZTEILLISTE MOTOR -

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

1 ESTATOR STATOR STATOR STATOR 1
2 BRIDA DELANTERA FLASQUE AVANT DRIVE-ENDSHIELD A-LAGERSCHILD 1
3 BRIDA FRENO FLASQUE FREIN BRAKE-ENDSHIELD BEMSE-LAGERSCHILD 1
5 CARCASA RALENTIZAD. CARTER RALENTISSEUR EDDY C.BRAKE HOUSING WIRBELSTROMB.GEHAUSE 1
6 ROTOR ROTOR ROTOR ROTOR 1
7 BLOQUE BLOC BLOCK BLOCK 1
9 BOBINA RALENTIZADOR BOBINE RALENTISSEUR EDDY C,-BRAKE COIL WIRBELSTROMB. SPULE 1
10 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR FAN LUFTER 1
11 VARILLA TIGE ROD STANGE 4
12 DISCO FRENO DISQUE FREIN BRAKE DISC BREMSCHEIBE 1
13 MUELLE RESSORT SPRING BREMSFEDER 3
14 COLUMNA FRENO COLONNE DE FREIN BRAKE COLUMN FUHRUNGSSAULE BREMSE 3
15 ELECTROIMAN MOVIL ARMATURE ARMATURE BREMSANKER 1
16 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 3
18 BOBINA FRENO ELECTRO-AIMANT BRAKE COIL BREMSPULE 1
19 JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG 1
20 CAJA DE BORNES BOITE A BORNES TERMINAL BOX FRAME KLEMMENKASTEN 1
23 PIÑON MOYEU CANNELE SPLINED HUB NABE, VIELKEILVERZHN 1
24 PRENSAESTOPAS PRESSE-ETOUPE GLAND BUCHSE 1
25 TAPA FRENO CAPOT FREIN BRAKE COVER BREMSGEHAUSE 1
30 BORNE BORNE TERMINAL KLEMME 1
32 DESBLOQUEO DEBLOCAGE RELEASE FREISTELLUNG 1
35 RETÉN DE ACEITE BAGUE DÉTANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
36 CANCAMO CHEVILLE A ÒEILLET EYEBOLT ZUGOESE 1
37 GUÍA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X5/PMS5-1
ERSATZTEILLISTE UNTERWAGEN -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X5/PMS5-1

7 EAM1/4GASD71412 ENGRASADOR GRAISSEUR NIPPLE SCHMIERNIPPEL 4
8 GNP300F233 TAPON BOUCHON PLUG STOEPSEL 4
14 3301P199.01 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 24
20 3201M2018 ESTABILIZADOR STABILISATEUR ELEPHANT`S FOOT ABSTUETZUNG 4
22 3201P2022 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 8
31 ARP10.5F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 6

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X5/PMS5/TRA-7.5-

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BASE X5/PMS5/TRA-7.5-

7 EAM1/4GASD71412 ENGRASADOR GRAISSEUR NIPPLE SCHMIERNIPPEL 4
8 GNP300F233 TAPON BOUCHON PLUG STOEPSEL 4
14 3301P199.01 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 24
25 TP21 PROTECTOR PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 4
26 3201-10226 LARGUERO LONGERON STRINGER LAENGSTRAEGER 2

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TRANSLATION TRA-7.5-05


1 REDOC.LS24 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 1
4 1408P1399 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 2
7 1408P875 GUARDA POLVO CACHE POUSSIERE DUST GUARD STAUBMANTEL 2
9 1404-10204 CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHAEUSE 1
13 1408K7507 APOYO APPUI SUPPORT AUFLAGE 1
15 AEE130 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU DÁRRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 1
16 EAM06*100D71412 ENGRASADOR GRAISSEUR NIPPLE SCHMIERNIPPEL 1
27 1408K8651 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 1
28 ROD22212HL RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
29 1408M8655 EJE PIÑON AXE DENTE PINION AXLE RITZELWELLE 1
31 CHVP14*9*100 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 1
37 1408P8674 RODILLO GALET ROLLER ROLLE 4
49 10400180.14R BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 2


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDOC.LS24


25 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 1
31 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 1
41 PIÑON MOYEU CANNELE SPLINED HUB NAVE, VIELKEILVERZHN 1
51 RUEDA ROUE WHEEL RAD 1
61 22211 RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
62 NJ 208 E RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
78 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASFEDER 1
90 65*85*13 AS RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
91 65*85*13 AS RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
92 240*3 RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 2
95 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
100 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU D'ARRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 1
110 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING
153 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 1
200 CANCAMO CHEVILLE A'OEILLET EYEBOLT ZUGOESE 1


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

2 BRIDA DELANTERA FLASQUE AVANT DRIVE-ENDSHIELD A-LAGERSCHILD 1
3 BRIDA FRENO FLASQUE FREIN BRAKE-ENDSHIELD BEMSE-LAGERSCHILD 1
5 CARCASA RALENTIZAD. CARTER RALENTISSEUR EDDY C.BRAKE HOUSING WIRBELSTROMB.GEHAUSE 1
9 BOBINA RALENTIZADOR BOBINE RALENTISSEUR EDDY C,-BRAKE COIL WIRBELSTROMB. SPULE 1
10 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR FAN LUFTER 1
11 VARILLA TIGE ROD STANGE 4
12 DISCO FRENO DISQUE FREIN BRAKE DISC BREMSCHEIBE 1
14 COLUMNA FRENO COLONNE DE FREIN BRAKE COLUMN FUHRUNGSSAULE BREMSE 3
15 ELECTROIMAN MOVIL ARMATURE ARMATURE BREMSANKER 1
18 BOBINA FRENO ELECTRO-AIMANT BRAKE COIL BREMSPULE 1
25 TAPA FRENO CAPOT FREIN BRAKE COVER BREMSGEHAUSE 1
32 DESBLOQUEO DEBLOCAGE RELEASE FREISTELLUNG 1
35 RETÉN DE ACEITE BAGUE DÉTANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
37 GUÍA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 1



5 GLY.PG9510060F EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 4
6 ARG30D127B TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 8
8 1408P7508 ESPARRAGO GOUJON SHANK STEHBOLZEN 2
11 1408P7509 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FUEHRUNG 4
18 1404-10447 CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHAEUSE 1
21 1408P875 GUARDA-POLVO CACHE POUSSIERE DUST GUARD STAUBMANTEL 2
25 ARMB16 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 2
39 ROD62082RS RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 8
41 10400180.14R BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 2


REPUESTOS LETRERO 030 0248 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE INDICATEUR 21LC
SPARE PARTS INDICATOR
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHILD -
21LC170 21LC210 21LC290 21LC400 21LC550

12 t 18 t 12 t 18 t 12 t 18 t 12 t 18 t 12 t 18 t
6 - - - - - - - - - 1
7 - - - - - - - - 1 -
8 - - - - - - - 1 - -
9 - - - - - - 1 - - -
10 - - - - - 1 - - - -
11 - - - - 1 - - - - -
12 - - - 1 - - - - - -
13 - - 1 - - - - - - -
14 - 1 - - - - - - - -
15 1 - - - - - - - - -

REPUESTOS LETRERO 030 0248 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE INDICATEUR 21LC
SPARE PARTS INDICATOR
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHILD -

1 3201-10233 BASTIDOR CHASSIS FRAME RAHMEN 1
2 3201-10235 ABARCON ATTECHE U-CLAMP U-KLAMMER 4
6 3201-10231 LETRERO INDICATEUR INDICATOR SCHILD 1


REPUESTOS TRAMO DE TORRE 030 0457 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE MAT S25
SPARE PARTS MAST SECTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE TURMMODUL -
4,5
21, 22, 23
16
11, 15
10, 12, 13
17, 18, 19
2
6
9, 14 15 8
17, 18, 19
20, 18, 19
17, 18, 19

REPUESTOS TRAMO DE TORRE 030 0457 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE MAT S25
SPARE PARTS MAST SECTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE TURMMODUL -

1 3203M1560 PANEL PANNEAU PANEL TAFEL 4
2 3203-10736 DIAGONAL DIAGONALE DIAGONAL DIAGONALE 1
3 3203-10668 PLATAFORMA PLATEFORME PLATFORM BUEHNE 1
4 3202-10078 BARANDILLA RAMBARDE GUARD RAIL BRUESTUNG 2
6 3202-10084 ESCALERA ECHELLE LADDER LEITER 1
8 3203K972 PROTECTOR PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 1
11 20200030.11 CLAVIJA GOUPILLE PIN VORSTECKER 2
22 20160160.25 CLAVIJA GOUPILLE PIN VORSTECKER 4

REPUESTOS PARTE GIRATORIA 030 0269 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PARTIE TOURNANTE SM215
SPARE PARTS SLEWING PART
ERSATZTEILLISTE DREHWERKMODUL

REPUESTOS PARTE GIRATORIA 030 0269 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PARTIE TOURNANTE SM215
SPARE PARTS SLEWING PART
ERSATZTEILLISTE DREHWERKMODUL

1 3204-10098 PORTACORONA CHASSIS-COURONNE SLEWING RING SUPPORT DREHRADHALTERUNG 1
2 3203H1092 PORTACORONA CHASSIS-COURONNE SLEWING RING SUPPORT DREHRADHALTERUNG 1
3 CORI1800.03B5 CORONA DE GIRO COURONNE D'ORIENT. SLEWING RING KUGELDREHKRANZ 1
4 093130350200109 TORNILLLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 36
5 3301P192-06 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 36
7 3301P198-01 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 72
14 05341.25"078 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4
15 3301P163-10 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
17 3215-10052 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 4

REPUESTOS REDUCTOR DE GIRO 030 0913 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUT. DÒRIENTATION GFU-7.5-07
SPARE PARTS SLEWING RED. GEAR B.
ERSATZTEILLISTE DREHWERK-GETRIEBE -
3
4

1 REDPL.TE10 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 1

2 MTRCF6661-1DE45 MOTOR MOTEUR MOTOR MOTOR 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE MOTEUR MTRCF6661-1DE45
SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDPL.TE10

1 m12 z15 PIÑON ARBRE PIGNON PINION SHAFT RITZELWELLE 1

2 CASQUILLO ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZSCHEIBE 1
3 JUNTA JOINT SEALING STHLABDICHTUNG 1
4 M8X22-8.8 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 6
6 22222C RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
7 CUERPO RED. CARTER REDUCTEUR GEARBOX HOUSING GETRIEBEGEHÄUSE 1
8 100X130X12 BASL RETEN JOINT D' ETAINCHEITE SEAL RING DICHTRING 2
11 PASADOR ELASTICO BOUNDON ELASTIC ELASTIC PIN SPANNSTIFT 3
12 3,53X291,69 ARANDELA TORICA O-RING O-RING O-RING 2
13 ANILLO DENTADO ANNEAU DENTEE TOOTHED RING ZAHNKRANZ 1
16 M16 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 8
27 M10X35-8.8 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 4
28 6012-2Z RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
29 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG 1
30 95 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU ELASTIQUE CIRCLIP SICHERNUNGSRING 1
31 65X95X10 BA RETEN JOINT D' ETAINCHEITE SEAL RING DICHTRING 1

3
4

1 REDPL.TE10 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 1

2 MTRCF6661-1D45 MOTOR MOTEUR MOTOR MOTOR 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE MOTEUR MTRCF6661-1D45
SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR


1 m12 z15 PIÑON ARBRE PIGNON PINION SHAFT RITZELWELLE 1

2 CASQUILLO ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZSCHEIBE 1
3 JUNTA JOINT SEALING STHLABDICHTUNG 1
4 M8X22-8.8 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 6
7 CUERPO RED. CARTER REDUCTEUR GEARBOX HOUSING GETRIEBEGEHÄUSE 1
8 100X130X12 BASL RETEN JOINT D' ETAINCHEITE SEAL RING DICHTRING 2
11 PASADOR ELASTICO BOUNDON ELASTIC ELASTIC PIN SPANNSTIFT 3
27 M10X35-8.8 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 4
28 6012-2Z RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
29 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG 1
31 65X95X10 BA RETEN JOINT D' ETAINCHEITE SEAL RING DICHTRING 1

REPUESTOS LIMITADOR 030 0230 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR -GIRO- 21LC
SPARE PARTS LIMITER
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTER -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR -GIRO- 21LC
SPARE PARTS LIMITER

3 3204M1240 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
9 3204P734.01 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
10 CHVP5*5*14A CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 1
11 3204P1000 PIÑON MOYEU CANNELE SPLINED HUB NABE,VIELKEILVERZHN 1

REPUESTOS CUSPIDE 030 0915 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TETE DE TOUR CM215
SPARE PARTS CAD HEAD
ERSATZTEILLISTE TURMSPITZE
26
27
1
A A
29 28
30 29
31 30
B B
16 19 22
17 20 23 9
18 21 24 10
15
25 32
2
33
34
3 35
4
5
13
6 14
10
11
12
8 7
9

REPUESTOS CUSPIDE 030 0915 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TETE DE TOUR CM215
SPARE PARTS CAD HEAD
ERSATZTEILLISTE TURMSPITZE

7 3204M1287 TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL 1
16 3204P741 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
17 1408P30408 TACO CALE BLOCK HOLZBLOCK 1
18 3203P1033-103 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 1
25 3204-10150 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FUEHRUNG 1
26 3205M1004 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 2
32 3204-10664 DIAGONAL DIAGONALE DIAGONAL DIAGONALE 2

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PLATEFORME -
3, 4,5
6
1
2, 4, 5
28, 29, 30, 31
16, 17, 18
21
22
8, 9, 10 12, 13, 14, 15
20
22 7
6
23
22 24 19
25
22 1
26
27

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PLATEFORME -

1 5204-20233 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
3 PSA5X60 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 6
6 3204-24115 BRAZO BRAS ARM HALTEARM 2
15 5204-20229 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
28 3204-10561 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 4

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR 21 LC 400-550
SPARE PARTS LIMITER
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTER

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR 21 LC 400-550
SPARE PARTS LIMITER
ERSATZTEILLISTE SCHALTER
1 3204P609 RESORTE RESSORT SPRING SPRINGFEDER 2

4 3204-10137 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
9 3204-10625 CAJA CAISSE BOX GEHAEUSE 1
13 1408P8936 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG
14 0934101508 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER
15 LMMC.4003 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER
16 091205080045088 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE
17 ARG5D127B ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE
18 0934050808 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER

REPUESTOS TRAMO DE PLUMA 030 0441 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE FLECHE AM282A
SPARE PARTS JIB SECTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERMODUL
11
12
8, 9, 10
2 3 4

ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERMODUL

2 RPS_030.0240 PORTA-POLEAS PORTE-POULIE PULLEY SUPPORT SEILROLLENHALTERUNG 1
3 RPS_030.0235 TENSION AUTOMATICA TENSION AUTOMATIQUE AUTOMATICAL TENSION AUTOMATISCHE SPANNUNG 1
10 ARP8.4F1D9021A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 18
25 MOSQ10*120 CLAVIJA GOUPILLE PIN VORSTECKER 1
28 CADENA05D764N CADENA CHAINE CHAIN KETTE 1

REPUESTOS PORTA-POLEAS 030 0240 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE 21 LC
SPARE PARTS PULLEY SUPPORT
ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLLENHALTERUNG c/carros aux.
AM299 AM298 AM282A AM272A AM262A

22 X X
23 X X
24 X X
25 X
26 X
36 X

ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLLENHALTERUNG c/carros aux.

2 3205-10710 POLEA POULIE SHEAVE SEILROLLE 1
3 CASQ566008 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 2
4 40600160L.14 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 1
6 CPOL8190DT4589 POLEA POULIE SHEAVE SEILROLLE 2
12 3205-10290.01 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
14 3205-10410 RODILLO GALET ROLLER ROLLE 1
22 3205-10391 TORNILLO VIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 4
24 3205-10388 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 4
28 3205-10855 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 2
30 3205-10426 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 2
33 AE142 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU DÁRRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 2

ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLLENHALTERUNG s/carros aux.

22 X X
23 X X
24 X X
25 X
26 X
36 X

ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLLENHALTERUNG s/carros aux.


REPUESTOS TENSION AUTOMATICA 030 0235 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TENSION AUTOMATIQUE 21LC
SPARE PARTS AUTOMATICAL TENSION
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUTOMATISCHE SPANNUNG
34 X X X X
64 X
77 X
78 X X X
79 X
81 X X
82 X
83 X
84 X X
85 X
86 X
124 X


1 3205-10301 CABALLETE CHASSIS TOURNANT REVOLVING PLATFORM DREHBUEHNE 1
9 3205-10321 BALANCIN BALANCIER BEAM BALANCIER 1
10 3205-10367 CARRACA TENDEUR CABLE RATCHER DRUM KABELSPANNER 1
11 1010.314 GATILLO VERROU PAWL SPENHAKEN 4
17 TER43148.8 TERMINAL CON CUÑA ATTACHE A COIN WEDGE ANCHOR KEILENDKLEMME 1
39 CASQ563008 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 2
46 3205-10395 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
47 OL-10308 PLACA PLAQUE PLATE SCHILD 4
54 CN08.0RCGA.1 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL 1
60 1407P70135 GALGA CALES GAUGES ABSTANDSSCH 1
61 3301P156.03 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 1
63 SJC3/8" SUJETA-CABLES SERRE-CABLE WIRE ROPE CLAMP DRAHTSEILKLEMME 1
65 3205-10366 VARILLA TIGE ROD STANGE 1


67 3205-10364 TACO CALE BLOCK HOLZBLOCK 1
68 3205-10362 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
70 3205-10507 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG 1
72 3205-10365 MUELLE RESSORT SPRING BREMSFEDER 1
77 3205-10409 BIELA BIELLE LINK VERBINDUNGSSTUECK 1
84 3205-10308 BARRA BARRE BAR STANGDE 2
90 3205-10354 MUELLE RESSORT SPRING BREMSFEDER 1
91 3205-10356 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 1
97 CPLOL8190DT4589 POLEA POULIE SHEAVE SEILROLLE 2
100 563505 SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING 4
116 3205-10505 PROTECCION PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 1
117 OL-10307 PROTECCION PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR LC-3.0 t
SPARE PARTS LIMITER
24
25 2
13
1 26 3 5
7, 8
22 19, 15, 20
6
14, 15, 16
17, 18
10, 11, 12 27
9 21
23
15

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE LIMITEUR LC-3.0 t
SPARE PARTS LIMITER

1 3204P451 MUELLE RESSORT SPRING MUELLE 1
3 3205-10397 PLACA PLAQUE PLATE SCHILD 1
6 3301P154.15 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 1
9 1408P6526 TUBO TUBE TUBE ROHR 4
11 AR915F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 8
14 OL-0998 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FUEHRUNG 1
17 3204P1013 VARILLA TIGE ROD STANGE 1
19 3204P1073 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG 4
21 3205-10652 PROTECTOR PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 1
22 OL-1016 SUPLEMENTO SUPPLEMENT SUPPLEMENT SUPPLEMENT 1
23 3204M1071 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1
24 GLY.PG404430F SEPARADOR SEPARATEUR SPACER DISTANZRING 1
25 3205-10408 VASTAGO TIGE DE CYLINDRE RAM-ROD KOLBENSTANGE 1

ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERMODUL -
15 16
11
1
17 9
10
3
2 12, 13, 14
AM282B
5, 7, 8
AM282B
1er Tramo
6, 7, 8 4
AM262A AM250A
9 1
10 1
11 1
15 1
16 2
17 1


16 3205P1692 CASQUILLO DOUILLE BUSHING BUCHSE 2

ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERMODUL C/MC
7 2 3 6 5 4
8, 9, 10
8, 9, 10
14, 16, 17
2
2
2
2

ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERMODUL C/MC

18 3205-10519-01 PORTAPOLEAS PORTE -POULIE PULLEY SUPPORT SEILROLLENHALTERUNG 1

6
11
1
8 10
7
12, 13, 14
2
3, 4, 5
AM230 AM240 AM244 AM245

6 - 1 1 1
7 1 - - -
8 - 1 1 1
9 1 - - -
10 2 - - -
11 - - 2 -


6 3205M995 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 1
10 3205-10832 CASQUILLO DOUILLE BUSHING BUCHSE 2
11 3205P947 CASQUILLO DOUILLE BUSHING BUCHSE 2

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE FLECHE AM240
9 4 5 8 7 6
13
10, 11, 12
14, 15, 16
3
2
AM240 AM244
4 1 1
5 1 1
13 - 2


1 3205H764 TRAMO ELEMENT SECTION MODUL 1

9 4 5
1
6, 7, 8
10, 11, 12
3
2
AM220 AM244
4 1 1
5 1 1
9 - 1



9 4 5
1
6, 7, 8
10, 11, 12
3
2
AM210 AM244
4 1 1
5 1 1
9 - 2



6 7
8
1 9, 10, 11
2, 3, 4, 5


1 3205K934 TRAMO ELEMENT SECTION MODUL 1

REPUESTOS FINAL DE PLUMA 030 0204 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE POINTE DE FLECHE JE211
SPARE PARTS JIB END
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERENDE SIN CARROS AUX.

SPARE PARTS JIB END
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERENDE SIN CARROS AUX.

9 TPP95*80M16*45 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG 2
15 ROD51207 RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER 1
16 GLYPG.353920F CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
17 TER550D-C.18-19 TERMINAL CON CUÑA ATTACHE A COIN WEDGE ANCHOR KEILENDKLEMME 1

SPARE PARTS JIB END
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERENDE CON CARROS AUX.

SPARE PARTS JIB END
ERSATZTEILLISTE AUSLEGERENDE CON CARROS AUX.

9 TPP95*80M16*45 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG 2
16 GLYPG.353920F CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
17 TER550D-C.18-19 TERMINAL CON CUÑA ATTACHE A COIN WEDGE ANCHOR KEILENDKLEMME 1
18 "SJC3/4""" SUJETA-CABLES SERRE-CABLE WIRE ROPE CLAMP DRAHTSEILKLEMME 1

REPUESTOS TIRANTE 030 0206 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TIRANT -
SPARE PARTS STRUT
ERSATZTEILLISTE BINDER LC2100
AM220 AM230 AM240 AM250A AM262A

11 1 0 0 0 0
12 0 1 0 0 0
13 0 0 1 1 1
14 2 0 0 0 0
15 0 2 0 0 0
16 0 0 2 0 0
17 0 0 0 2 2

REPUESTOS TIRANTE 030 0206 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TIRANT -
SPARE PARTS STRUT
ERSATZTEILLISTE BINDER LC2100
1 3205P953 TIRANTE TIRANT STRUT ABSPANNUNG 1

2 3205P943 TIRANTE TIRANT STRUT ABSPANNUNG 1
12 10250140.14 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 1

REPUESTOS PORTAPOLEAS 030 0207 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO-21LC
ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLLENHALTERUNG -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO-21LC


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE ANTIC. 21LC
ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLENHALTERUNG -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE ANTIC. 21LC
ERSATZTEILLISTE SEILROLENHALTERUNG -


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO/ANTIC.

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO/ANTIC.
1 3205-10515 PORTAPOLEAS SEILROLLENHALTERUNG PULLEY SUPPORT PORTE-POULIE 1


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO-AM250A

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE PORTE-POULIE CARRO-AM250A


REPUESTOS CABRESTANTE CARRITO 030 0211 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE CHARIOT CFU-7.5-02
SPARE PARTS TROLLEY WINCH
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZFAHRWERK -

REPUESTOS CABRESTANTE CARRITO 030 0211 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE CHARIOT CFU-7.5-02
SPARE PARTS TROLLEY WINCH
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZFAHRWERK -

2 1404-10225 TAMBOR TAMBOUR DRUM TROMMMEL 1
10 SPROD.08 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
14 1408P1243-H SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
20 ARG8D127A ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 2
22 LMCVP4401/4SL35 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
26 REMOC.LS51 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 1



51 RUEDA ROUE WHEEL RAD 1
90 75*100*10AS RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
92 295*3 RETEN BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 2
210 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 1
220 CANCAMO CHEVILLE A'OEILLET EYEBOLT ZUGOESE 1


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE MOTEUR MTRCF5662
SPARE PARTS MOTOR

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE MOTEUR MTRCF5662
SPARE PARTS MOTOR

3 TOPE BUTTOIR STOP ANSCHLAG 1
5 ESPARRAGO GOUJON SHANK STEHBOLZEN 5
9 FRENO FREIN BRAKE BREMSE 1
14 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 1
15 FERODO FERODO LINING BREMASBELAEGE 4
16 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
18 CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
22 ENCODER JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG 1
38 BRIDA BRIDE BOLT SCHRAUBE 1
46 RECTIFICADOR RECTIFICATEUR RECTIFIER ENTZERRUNG 1
48 BORNE BORNE FLANGE FLANSCH 1


REPUESTOS CARRITO 030 0212 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CHARIOT TLC09-00
SPARE PARTS TROLLEY
ERSATZTEILLISTE LAUFKATZE -

SPARE PARTS TROLLEY

6 AEI110 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU D'ARRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 6
12 3215-10059 RUEDA ROUE WHEEL RAD 4
26 3209-10093 BALANCIN BALANCIER BEAM BALANCIER 1
31 TER43148.8 TERMINAL CON CU¥A ATTACHE A COIN WEDGE ANCHOR KEILENDKLEMME 2

SPARE PARTS TROLLEY

SPARE PARTS TROLLEY

2 3209-10074 GATILLO VERROU PAWL SPENHAKEN 1
5 3215-10082 CLAVIJA GOUPILLE PIN VORSTECKER 2
31 CASQ562509 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 2

REPUESTOS GANCHO 030 0216 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CROCHET GA09.0-00
SPARE PARTS HOOK
ERSATZTEILLISTE HAKEN -

SPARE PARTS HOOK

2 POL18387DT4791 POLEA POULIE SHEAVE SEILROLLE 2
12 1408P5699 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 1
13 3301P156.03 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 2
19 3211-10028 CONTRAPESO CONTREPOIDS COUNTERWEIGHT GEGENGEWICHT 2


SPARE PARTS HOOK

SPARE PARTS HOOK
1 3211-10039 TRAVIESA TRAVERSE CROSSTIE TRAVERSE 1

2 3211-10078 PROTECCION 1
3 3211-10077 PROTECCION 1
5 3211-10070 FIJACION FIXATION FASTENING BEFESTIGUNG 1
9 3211-21254 CONTRAPESO CONTREPOIDS COUNTERWEIGHT GEGENGEWICHT 3
13 POL18387DT4791 POLEA POULIE SHEAVE SEILROLLE 1
21 3211-10042 COLGADOR ACCROCHE CABLE CABLE SUPPORT HOOK KABEL BEFESTIGUNG 1
23 3211M013 EJE AXE AXLE ACHSE 1
28 3211M012 TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER 1
33 3211P014 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 1
34 1408P5701/B CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 2
37 3211-10068 RESORTE RESSORT SPRING SPRINGFEDER 1

REPUESTOS CARRO ANTICATENARIA DELANTERO 030 0239 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CHARIOT ANTI-CATENAIRE DEVANT 21LC
SPARE PARTS FRONT ANTI-SAG TROLLEY
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZE VOR MIT AUTOMATICER SEIL.
6, 7
12, 13
9, 10, 11
2
17
18, 19
3, 4, 5
16
16
14, 15

REPUESTOS CARRO ANTICATENARIA DELANTERO 030 0239 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CHARIOT ANTI-CATENAIRE DEVANT 21LC
SPARE PARTS FRONT ANTI-SAG TROLLEY
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZE VOR MIT AUTOMATICER SEIL.

2 3209-10117 PATA PATTE FOOT FUSS 1
3 093310150030088 TORNILLO BIS BOLT SCHRAUBE 4
6 TER15315,4-5 TERMINAL CON CUÑA ATTACHE A COIN WEDGE ANCHOR KEILENDKLEMME 1
7 SJC5/16" SUJETA CABLE SERRE-CABLE WIRE ROPE CLAMP DRAHTSEILKLEMME 1
8 3209-10229 CARRACA TENDEUR CABLE RATCHET DRUM KABELSPANNER 1

REPUESTOS CARRO ANTICATENARIA TRASERO 030 0238 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CHARIOT ANTI-CATENAIRE DERRIER 21 LC
SPARE PARTS REAR ANTI-SAG TROLLEY
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZE RÜCK

REPUESTOS CARRO ANTICATENARIA TRASERO 030 0238 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CHARIOT ANTI-CATENAIRE DERRIER 21 LC
SPARE PARTS REAR ANTI-SAG TROLLEY
ERSATZTEILLISTE KATZE RÜCK

2 3209-10135 PATA PATTE FOOT FUSS 1
6 3209-10126 ESPARRAGO GOUJON SHANK STEHBOLZEN 1
7 3209-10128 MUELLE PINZA RESSORT SPRING BREMSFEDER 1
9 3209-10129 PINZA PINCE CLAMP KLEMMBUEGEL 1

REPUESTOS TRAMO DE CONTRAPLUMA 030 0219 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE CONTREFLECHE FM215
SPARE PARTS COUNTERJIB SECTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE GEGENAUSLEGERMODUL -

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE CONTREFLECHE FM215
1 3207-10149 TRAMO ELEMENT SECTION MODUL 1


PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE CONTREFLECHE BM215A
11 12
13
19
9
20 14
21
11
26
10
8 2
12
3
4
7
5
6
17
23
24
25
11

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE CONTREFLECHE BM215A

17 3301P179.07 PROTECTOR PROTECTEUR GUARD SCHUTZ 4
19 3301P166.03 ABARCON ATTACHE U-CLAMP U-KLAMMER 24
21 ARP8,4F111D125 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 48

REPUESTOS CABRESTAN. ELEVACION 030 0773 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE LEVAGE EFU5-50-30-00
SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB
ERSATZTEILLISTE BALLASTIERKRAN
21, 5
22
21, 5
20
27
10
4, 5
7, 8, 9
12
11
3
8
17
17
18, 19
14
13
24, 25, 26
47 6
46
24, 25, 26
48
51
15, 16
45
48
49
50
53
23
40, 43
41, 42
MTRCF5685-2
52
21, 5, 39
44
38
28, 19, 29, 30

35
31
36, 37
33, 34
32

SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB

2 1404-10237 TAMBOR TAMBOUR DRUM TROMMEL 1
11 RTN110*90*12 RETÉN DE ACEITE BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
22 1404-10266 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 2
30 ARCD13D6918 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
31 1408P8540 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG 1
32 1406-10097 ARO ANNEAU HOOP RING 1
34 PSCL.001 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 1
35 OL-10455 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
41 10400080.14 BULÓN AXE PIN BOLZEN 4
46 1408P1243-G SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1
51 INDI.A200 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
53 REDOC.MA19 REDUCTOR REDUCTEUR GEAR-BOX GETRIEBE 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDOC.MA__
-
ERSATZTEILLISTE GETRIEBE

-
1-II ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU D'ARRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING

2-II TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL
3-II TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE
4-II ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE
5-II TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER
7-II RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER
8-II JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG
9-II CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHÄUSE
14-II SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING
16-II CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASFEDER
17-II EJE PIÑON AXE DENTE PINION AXLE RITZELWELLE
30-II CORONA COURONNE CROWN WHEEL STRINRAD
47-II PIÑON MOYEU CANNELE SPLINED HUB NAVE, VIELKEILVERZHN
22-III CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHÄUSE
23-III TAPON BOUCHON PLUG STÖPSEL
24-III JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG
32-III TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE
33-III ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE

-

34-III TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL
39-III GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG
41A-II TUERCA ECROU NUT MUTTER
41B-III PRISIONERO PRISONNIER STUD STIFTSCHRAUBE
1-V JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG
2-V ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEAU D'ARRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING
3-V SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING
4-V RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER
5-V ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE
7-V CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASFEDER
8-V CORONA COURONNE CROWN WHEEL STRINRAD
15-V TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL
17-V TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE
31-V ENGRASADOR GRAISSEUR NIPPLE SCHMIERNIPPEL
33-V EJE PIÑON AXE DENTE PINION AXLE RITZELWELLE
1-VI TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE
2-VI ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE
3-VI TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL
4-VI SEPARADOR ENTRETOISE SPACER DISTANZRING
5-VI RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER
7-VI EJE PIÑON AXE DENTE PINION AXLE RITZELWELLE
8-VI CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASFEDER
9-VI CORONA COURONNE CROWN WHEEL STRINRAD

-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

1 ESTATOR STATOR STATOR STATOR -
2 TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL -
3 RODAMIENTO ROULEMENT BEARING LAGER -
4 REJILLA PROTECCION GRILLE DE PROTECTION PROTECTION GRILL SCHUTZGITTER -
5 CARCASA CARCASSE CASING GEHAEUSE -
6 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG -
7 BORNERO BORNES TERMINAL KLEMME -
8 CAJA BORNES BOITE A BORNES TERMINAL BOX FRAME KLEMMENKASTEN -
9 JUNTA JOINT GASKET DICHTUNG -
11 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER -


SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB
11,20,25
40,31
28,29
45
11,20,25
21
39
40
14,31
13,21,26
38
35
3
33
10
32
23,15
34
8
16,24,27
4
16,27
5
5
36
2
6
9,18
49
43,46
41
7
43,46
42
48
44
1
12,19,22
47
37

SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB

7 1406-10027 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG 1
44 1404-10365 AMARRE FIXATION ATTACHMENT BEFESTIGUNG 3

-

-


-


-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

Nº de plano: Descripción: MOTOR ELEVACION G Hoja Nº: 1
COMANSA
Cliente: REPUESTOS Características:
MOTOR 88 cv (65kW) 500 rpm 2 Nº
030de Hojas:
0770 ES 1 CommandB
Marca deSPARE
cliente: MTRCF-5688.2
PARTS Peso:
MOTOR Fecha de creación: 22/02/2011
LISTA DE MATERIALES
Nº de
Descripción Cant. Código o Norma Material Observaciones
Orden
1 Anillo V-ring V-85A Lado A 1
2 Platillo exterior delantero 1 6.14.82-9 Fe. Fundido
3 Rodamiento lado A 1 Nº6317
4 Tapa delantera 1 7.52.03-1 Caldereria
5 Platillo interior 2 6.14.81-2 Fe. Fundido
6 Eje y rotor 1 EJEMT250M011 F-125
7 Carcasa y estator 1 7.52.20-1 Caldereria
8 Tapa Trasera 1 7.52.02-2 Caldereria
9 Retén lado B 1 120x160x12-BA
10 Casquillo interior lado B 1 85x112x32 F-114
11 Casquillo exterior lado B 1 85x120x32-R F-114
12 Piñon freno Stromag NFF-160 1 80x160x125
13 Freno Stromag 1 NFF-160
14 Encoder Kubler 1 A020H RS422
15 Tapa encoder 1 8.46.33 Fibra vidrio
16 Junta caja bornas 1 8.44.03-B EPDM60 sh.
17 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores 1 8.44.03-24 Fe. Fundido
18 Placa de bornas con tornilleria 1 Nº 930
19 Junta tapa de bornas Ø4 1 8.44.03 EPDM60 sh.
20 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria 1 8.44.04 Fe. Fundido
21 Junta caja de bornas (encoder) 1 6.04.03-A1 EPDM60 sh.
22 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores (enco.) 1 6.04.03 Aluminio
23 Regleta gris 10 agujeros 1
24 Junta tapa de bornas Ø2 (encoder) 1 6.04.03-B EPDM60 sh.
25 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria (encoder) 1 6.04.04 Aluminio
26 Junta ventilador 1 8.45.40A EPDM60 sh.
27 Visera laberinto caracol 1 Caldereria
28 Rejilla ventilador 1 Chapa
29 Caracol ventilador 1 200/1070 Caldereria
30 Rodete ventilador 1 200/1070 Caldereria
31 Brida ventilador 1 130.5x420x5 Caldereria
32 Tapa brida (ventilador) 1 6.01.23-5 Fe. Fundido
33 Carcasa y estator (ventilador) 1 6.01.20 Fe. Fundido
34 Rodamiento lado A (ventilador) 1 Nº6205-2RS
35 Eje y rotor (ventilador) 1 EJEKV092N001 F-114
36 Rodamiento lado B (ventilador) 1 Nº6304-2RS
37 Tapa trasera (ventilador) 1 6.01.01-1 Fe. Fundido
38 Rodete refrigerador (ventilador) 1 1,022.00 Plastico
39 Caperuza (ventilador) 1 6.01.05 Chapa
40 Junta caja de bornas (ventilador) 1 6.04.03-A1 EPDM60 sh.
41 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores (vent.) 1 6.04.03 Aluminio
42 Placa de bornas con tornilleria (vent,) 1 Nº500
43 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria (ventilador) 1 6.04.04 Aluminio
Informe generado el 18/09/2008 a las 11:44

SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB
21, 5
22
21, 5
20
27
10
4, 5
7, 8, 9
12
11
3
8
17
17
18, 19
14
13
24, 25, 26
47 6
46
24, 25, 26
48
51
15, 16
45
48
49
50
53
23
40, 43
41, 42
MTRCF5685-2
52
21, 5, 39
44
38
28, 19, 29, 30

35
31
36, 37
33, 34
32

SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB

30 ARCD13D6918 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 4
31 1408P8540 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG 1
34 PSCL.001 GUIA GUIDE GUIDE FÜHRUNG 1

-

-


-


-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

1 ESTATOR STATOR STATOR STATOR -
4 REJILLA PROTECCION GRILLE DE PROTECTION PROTECTION GRILL SCHUTZGITTER -
7 BORNERO BORNES TERMINAL KLEMME -
8 CAJA BORNES BOITE A BORNES TERMINAL BOX FRAME KLEMMENKASTEN -
11 VENTILADOR VENTILATEUR VENTILATOR LÜFTER -


SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB
11,20,25
40,31
28,29
45
11,20,25
21
39
40
14,31
13,21,26
38
35
3
33
10
32
23,15
34
8
16,24,27
4
16,27
5
5
36
2
6
9,18
49
43,46
41
7
43,46
42
48
44
1
12,19,22
47
37

SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB


-

-


-


-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

Nº de plano: Descripción: MOTOR ELEVACION G Hoja Nº: 1
COMANSA
Cliente: REPUESTOS Características:
MOTOR 88 cv (65kW) 500 rpm 2 Nº
030de Hojas:
0770 ES 1 CommandB
Marca deSPARE
cliente: MTRCF-5688.2
PARTS Peso:
MOTOR Fecha de creación: 22/02/2011
LISTA DE MATERIALES
Nº de
Descripción Cant. Código o Norma Material Observaciones
Orden
1 Anillo V-ring V-85A Lado A 1
2 Platillo exterior delantero 1 6.14.82-9 Fe. Fundido
3 Rodamiento lado A 1 Nº6317
4 Tapa delantera 1 7.52.03-1 Caldereria
5 Platillo interior 2 6.14.81-2 Fe. Fundido
6 Eje y rotor 1 EJEMT250M011 F-125
7 Carcasa y estator 1 7.52.20-1 Caldereria
8 Tapa Trasera 1 7.52.02-2 Caldereria
9 Retén lado B 1 120x160x12-BA
10 Casquillo interior lado B 1 85x112x32 F-114
11 Casquillo exterior lado B 1 85x120x32-R F-114
12 Piñon freno Stromag NFF-160 1 80x160x125
13 Freno Stromag 1 NFF-160
14 Encoder Kubler 1 A020H RS422
15 Tapa encoder 1 8.46.33 Fibra vidrio
16 Junta caja bornas 1 8.44.03-B EPDM60 sh.
17 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores 1 8.44.03-24 Fe. Fundido
18 Placa de bornas con tornilleria 1 Nº 930
19 Junta tapa de bornas Ø4 1 8.44.03 EPDM60 sh.
20 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria 1 8.44.04 Fe. Fundido
21 Junta caja de bornas (encoder) 1 6.04.03-A1 EPDM60 sh.
22 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores (enco.) 1 6.04.03 Aluminio
23 Regleta gris 10 agujeros 1
24 Junta tapa de bornas Ø2 (encoder) 1 6.04.03-B EPDM60 sh.
25 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria (encoder) 1 6.04.04 Aluminio
26 Junta ventilador 1 8.45.40A EPDM60 sh.
27 Visera laberinto caracol 1 Caldereria
28 Rejilla ventilador 1 Chapa
29 Caracol ventilador 1 200/1070 Caldereria
30 Rodete ventilador 1 200/1070 Caldereria
31 Brida ventilador 1 130.5x420x5 Caldereria
32 Tapa brida (ventilador) 1 6.01.23-5 Fe. Fundido
33 Carcasa y estator (ventilador) 1 6.01.20 Fe. Fundido
34 Rodamiento lado A (ventilador) 1 Nº6205-2RS
35 Eje y rotor (ventilador) 1 EJEKV092N001 F-114
36 Rodamiento lado B (ventilador) 1 Nº6304-2RS
37 Tapa trasera (ventilador) 1 6.01.01-1 Fe. Fundido
38 Rodete refrigerador (ventilador) 1 1,022.00 Plastico
39 Caperuza (ventilador) 1 6.01.05 Chapa
40 Junta caja de bornas (ventilador) 1 6.04.03-A1 EPDM60 sh.
41 Caja de bornas tornilleria y racores (vent.) 1 6.04.03 Aluminio
42 Placa de bornas con tornilleria (vent,) 1 Nº500
43 Tapa de bornas y tornilleria (ventilador) 1 6.04.04 Aluminio
Informe generado el 18/09/2008 a las 11:44

SPARE PARTS HOISTING WINCH
ERSATZTEILLISTE HUBWERK -


35 RTN110*90*12 RETEN DE ACEITE BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE SEAL DICHTRING 1
43 RCIA.2018 RESISTENCIA RESISTANCE RESISTANCE WIDERSTAND 1
46 OL-10382 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTER 1

-

-


-


-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE LEVAGE EFU4L-110-45-02
40
39 14
41 31 33
35
34 33
36
2
38
4
16
24
45 27
15
23
3
9 1 12
18 13
10 21
21 8 11 55
6
20
22
25
23
42
49
52 7
17
20 37 53
22 54
25
28
29
30 56 26 37
19 46
44 48
49

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE LEVAGE EFU4L-110-45-02

5 LMCVP4461/4SL35 LIMITADOR LIMITEUR LIMITER SCHALTER 1
9 3301P195.08 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 2
37 1406-10089 DETECTOR LIMITEUR DE COUPLE MOMENT DETECTOR ENDABSCHAL. DETEKTOR 1

-

-


-


-


SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

REPUESTOS PLUMIN 030 0640 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE POTENCE 21 LC
SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB
23, 24 32
29
25, 26 16
14, 13, 12
39, 26 26
30
22 16 38
19, 20, 21
26, 34, 35
11
36, 43
40, 41, 42
33
16 28, 14
32
15 27
26, 34, 35
31
14, 13, 12
2
7
37
6
1
5
8, 9, 10 3, 4

REPUESTOS PLUMIN 030 0640 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE POTENCE 21 LC
SPARE PARTS AUX.JIB

2 3207-10394 PLUMIN POTENCE AUX.JIB BALLASTIERKRAN 1
5 ARCJ51070 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER SCHEIBE 1
6 GLY.PBG505530F CASQUILLO COUSSINET BUSHING LAGERBUCHSE 1
11 1410-10151 CABRETAN. ELEVACION TREUIL DE LEVAGE HOISTIN WINCH HUBWERK 1
15 ARGOLLAR80*10 TIRADOR POIGNEE HANDLE GRIFF 1
16 SJC1/4" SUJETA CABLE SERRE-CABLE WIRE ROPE CLAMP DRAHTSEILKLEMME 3
17 CN06.0RCGA.1 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL -
18 CN08.0XDGA.2 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL -
22 TER43148.8-9 SUJETACABLES SERRE-CABLE WIRE ROPE CLAMP DRAHTSEILKLEMME 1
29 3207-10277 PALANCA LEVIER LEVER HEVEL 1
30 3207-10266 CARRITO CHARIOT TROLLEY LAUFKATZE 1
31 3211M0170 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 1
32 3207-10276 FINAL PLUMA POINTE DE FLECHE JIB END AUSLEGERSPITZE 1
36 10150060.14 GUARDACABOS TETE DE CABLE THIMBLE KAUSCHEN 2
38 3207-10395 PLUMA FLECHE JIB AUSLEGER 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE LEVAGE ES1-2.2-7.5-01
ERSATZTEILLISTE HUBWERK PLUMÍN AUXILIAR
9, 7, 8
3
10, 11 4 9, 7, 8
6, 7, 8

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE TREUIL DE LEVAGE ES1-2.2-7.5-01
ERSATZTEILLISTE HUBWERK PLUMÍN AUXILIAR

4 SPROD.08 SOPORTE SUPPORT SUPPORT HALTERUNG 1

PIÈCES DE RECHANGE REDUCTEUR REDOC.MA111




SPARE PARTS MOTOR

SPARE PARTS MOTOR

REPUESTOS PERCHA EQUILIBRADO 030 0135 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BRAS DÉQUILIBRAGE -
SPARE PARTS BALANCING ARM
ERSATZTEILLISTE GEWICHTSAUSGLEICHER 21LC

REPUESTOS PERCHA EQUILIBRADO 030 0135 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE BRAS DÉQUILIBRAGE -
SPARE PARTS BALANCING ARM
ERSATZTEILLISTE GEWICHTSAUSGLEICHER 21LC

1 1012.532 TRAVIESA TRAVERSE CROSSTIE TRAVERSE 1
2 1012.535 LARGUERO LONGERON STRINGER LAENGSTRAEGER 2
3 1012.529 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 1
6 4310P015 ABARCON ATTACHE U-CLAMP U-KLAMMER 1
7 4310P014 BIELA BIELLE LINK VERBINDUNGSSTUECK 2
9 4315P009 ANILLA ANNEAU RING RING 1
12 1408P5692 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 1
13 ARP27D6916 ARANDELA RONDELLE WASHER UNTERLEGSCHEIBE 1

REPUESTOS TRAMO TREPADOR 030 0888 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE ELEMENT DE TELESCOP. J2-10
SPARE PARTS CLIMBING SECTION
ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL TREPADO
1 2
31
32
33
8
9
10 5
6
7
13
30
7
11
12 3
14
21
22
23
24
25
28
31 29
32
33
19
20
26
27
16
17
18
15

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL TREPADO

2 3210-21521 ESCALA ÉCHELLE SCALE SKALA 2
3 3210M642 ESCALA ÉCHELLE SCALE SKALA 2
4 3210M641 ESCALA ÉCHELLE SCALE SKALA 2
8 BULON-20425 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 2
21 3210P598 GATILLO VERROU PAWL SPENHAKEN 4
22 PSI6X70X170 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 4
23 MOSQ5*50 MOSQUETON MOUSQUETON SNAP HOOK KARABINERHAKEN 4
25 MOSQ7*70 MOSQUETON MOUSQUETON SNAP HOOK KARABINERHAKEN 4
28 09331620080.88 TORNILLO VIS SCREW SCHRAUBE 2

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL POLIPASTOS
35 5
36 6
37
2 1 5
6
6
7
23 3
24
25 9
18
19
16 20
17 21
12
13 29
14 30
15
6
7
26
8
22
27
28
6
7
10
11
31
32
33
34

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL POLIPASTOS

5 10300080,25 BULON AXE PIN BOLZEN 4
11 3210-21807 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL 4
12 3210-21890 CARRACA TENDEUR CABLE RATCHET DRUM KABELSPANNER 1
16 3205-10856 POLEA COMPLETA POULIE COMPLETE SHEAVE COMPLETE SEILROLLE KOMPLETTE 1
17 AEE25 ANILLO ELASTICO ANNEU DÁRRET CIRCLIP SICHERUNGSRING 1
18 TENSOR.009 TENSOR TENDEUR TURNBUCKLE SPANNSCHLOSS 1
19 CN06,ORCGA.01 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL 1
20 SJC5/16" SUJETACABLE SERRE-CABLE CABLE HOLDER KABELKLEMME 6
21 3209P0457 MUELLE RESSORT SPRING MUELLE 1
22 3210-21696 GANCHO CROCHET HOOK HAKEN 1
26 3210-21677 CARRO CHARIOT TROLLEY LAUFKATZE 1
29 TER15315.4-5 TERMINAL COSSE TERMINAL ENDKLEMME 1
30 SJC5/16 SUJETACABLE SERRE-CABLE CABLE-HOLDER KABELKLEMME 1
32 CN10.0RCGA.1 CABLE CABLE CABLE KABEL 2
33 TER43148.9-12 TERMINAL COSSE TERMINAL ENDKLEMME 4
34 SJC3/8" SUJETACABLE SERRE-CABLE CABLE-HOLDER KABELKLEMME 4

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL ESTRUCTURA
39
7 40
11
10 39
12 40
20
21
22
30 31
32
7
9
10 17
11 18
12 19
12
14 2
15
26
27
36 28
37 29
38
23
24
33 25
34
35
41 7
42 8
43
44 4
45 5
46 6

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL ESTRUCTURA

9 3210-21359 PORTAPOLEAS PORTA-POULIE PULLEY SUPPORT SEILROLLENHALTERUNG 1
10 CASQ563002 CASQUILLO DOUILLE BUSHING BUCHSE 12
27 GLY.PG353930 CASQUILLO DOUILLE BUSHING BUCHSE 16
32 PSI5X40X105 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 8
34 3215P860 CLAVIJA GOUPILLE PIN VORSTECKER 2
36 OL-20364 CHAVETA CLAVETTE KEY PASSFEDER 2
41 3210-20402 BARRA BARRE BAR STANGE 1
42 3210-20408 BARRA BARRE BAR STANGE 1

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL ACCESOS
14
26
4
10 2 28 7
19
26 26 29 22
30 23
24
19
26 3
26
6
26
13
22
9 14 17 23
26 27 24
11
22 28
23 2 29
14
24 26 26
16 8
18 19 10 27 22
22 26 28 2 23
38 37 23 29 26 24
38 22 25
40 23 36
41 25 26 6
26
12
19 22
26 23
24
4
28
15 29
27 30
28
9 14 29
26
11
22
23 2 19
24 26 5 26
22
23
25
20
26

ERSATZTEILLISTE KLETTER MODUL ACCESOS

4 3202-20138 TAPA COUVERCLE COVER DECKEL 2
40 PSA3 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 2

REPUESTOS CENTRAL HIDRAULICA 030 0887 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CENTRALE HYDRAULIQUE GH20HI06
SPARE PARTS HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
ERSATZTEILLISTE HYDRAULIKAGGREGAT -
4,5,6,7,8
16
11,12
17 9
20
10

REPUESTOS CENTRAL HIDRAULICA 030 0887 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CENTRALE HYDRAULIQUE GH20HI06
SPARE PARTS HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
ERSATZTEILLISTE HYDRAULIKAGGREGAT -

1 DEPOSITO RESERVOIR TANK TANK -
2 TAPON BOUCHON PLUG STOEPSEL -
3 NIVEL NIVEAU LEVEL NIVEAU -
4 BOMBA POMPE PUMP PUMPE -
6 ACOPLAMIENTO ACCOUPLEMENT COUPLING KUPPLUNG -
7 MOTOR MOTEUR MOTOR MOTOR -
8 ANTIRRETORNO CLAPET NON RETOUR CHECK VALVE PILOTRUCKSCHLAGVENT -
9 FILTRO FILTRE FILTER FILTER -
10 VALVULA SOUPAPE VALVE VENTIL -
11 LLAVE CLE KEY SCHLUESSEL -
12 MANOMETRO MANOMETRE PRESSURE GAUGE DRUCKGEBER -
15 VALVULA SOUPAPE VALVE VENTIL -
16 MANGUERA CABLE ELECTRIQUE ELECTRICAL CABLE ELECTROKABEL -
17 CILINDRO CYLINDRE CYLINDER ZYLINDER -
19 ANTIRRETORNO CLAPET NON RETOUR CHECK VALVE PILOTRUCKSCHLAGVENT -
20 REGULADOR REGULATEUR GOVERNOR REGLER -
21 ENCHUFE PRISE DE COURANT POWER SOCKET STECKER -
22 ENCHUFE PRISE DE COURANT POWER SOCKET STECKER -

REPUESTOS MARCO 030 0273 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CADRE MA02
SPARE PARTS FRAME
ERSATZTEILLISTE HALTERAHMEN 2m
17
18
10
19
20
21
22
15 11 2
3
16 12
4
13
5
14
6

REPUESTOS MARCO 030 0273 ES
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE CADRE MA02
SPARE PARTS FRAME
ERSATZTEILLISTE HALTERAHMEN 2m
1 3214M200 TRAVIESA TRAVERSE CROSSTIE TRAVERSE 2

2 3214K201 LARGUERO LONGERON STRINGER LAENGSTRAEGER 2
8 3214P404 SUPLEMENTO SUPPLEMENT SUPPLEMENT SUPPLEMENT 8
9 PSE6*45 PASADOR GOUPILLE COTTER PIN VORSTECKER 8
15 3214-10027 APOYO APPUI SUPPORT AUFLAGE 4
20 OL1101 BRIDA BRIDE FLANGE FLANSCH 4

21LC290/18 t 16053 / 54 / 55 / 56
EFU5-50-45-00 / 57 / 58 / 59 / 60
COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

8 VARIOUS

Tel.: (34) 948 335 020 / Fax: (34) 948 330 810

Linden Comansa 21 LC 290 18T - Manufacturer Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Linden Comansa 21 LC 290 18T - Manufacturer Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUFACTURER´S MANUAL

"TRANSLATION FROM THE ORIGINAL MANUAL"

CRANE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER

MANUAL REFERENCE DATE OF ISSUE

COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

CHAPTER TITLE Reference Rev.

Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A.

"TRANSLATION FROM THE ORIGINAL MANUAL"

CRANE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER

MANUAL REFERENCE DATE OF ISSUE

COM 050 0117 A IB 13/22

CHAPTER TITLE Reference Rev.

Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A.

Title..............................................................................................................................Ref. Rev. Pag.

Table of contents....................................................................................................000 0003 IB D 3

1 / 1 Rev: D 13/17 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 000 / 3

ACCIDENTS MIGHT OCCUR IF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED

1 / 1 Rev: A 03/50 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 010 / 5

COMANSA GENERAL PRODUCT WARRANTY

circuit boards, speed variators or electrical components in general as a result of defects in

voltage specified in the COMANSA instruction manual.

- Improper or negligent use of equipment.

- Improper or insufficient erection, installation, maintenance or use of equipment in any way

llation must also be considered.

- Temporary or permanent removal of the safety systems of the equipment.

consent but improperly by personnel not answerable to COMANSA.

1 / 2 Rev: B 10/02 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 010 / 6

6. COMANSA’s warranty obligations are binding only in the following cases

of the date when they are detected.

tomer, and requests by COMANSA for parts or equipment to be shipped to do not in

themselves constitute an acknowledgement of liability.

following the detection of defects.

under any title.

reduced to six months.

1 / 2 Rev: B 10/02 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 010 / 7

1 / 1 Rev: A 03/52 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 020 / 8

Document identification for queries shall be as follows:

Sheets of these service instructions are laid out as follows.

1 / 1 Rev: B 13/03 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 030 / 9

2 CRANE DEFINITIONS BASED ON FEATURES

- Top slewing crane

1 / 3 Rev: A 03/46 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 040 / 10

5 COMPONENT DEFINITION, VOCABULARY

2 / 3 Rev: A 03/46 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 040 / 11

3 / 3 Rev: A 03/46 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 040 / 12

A NUMBER OF SYMBOL ARE USEDIN THIS MANUAL TO DESCRIBE DIFFERENT IMPORTANT

Information to be considered when erecting, dismantling and operating the crane.

Important information for accident prevention.

Information, instructions and banning for damage and accident prevention.

See maintenance instructions.

Indicator of number of falls.

Indicator of number of falls.

1 / 1 Rev: A 08/07 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 050 / 13

Units which are used in the manual

MEASURE SYMBOL NAME

temperature ºC degree Celsius

speed m/s metre per second

pressure kg/cm² kilogramme per square centimetre

work Nm Newton per metre

elektric output W watt

1 / 1 Rev: A 03/50 Construcciones Metálicas COMANSA S. A. Vº Bº 1 / 060 / 14

CONVERSION UNITS FROM INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM TO BRITISH SYSTEM

TO CONVERT FROM TO MULTIPLY BY

Horsepower (CV) Horsepower (hp) 0.987